Sharp MX5500 6200 7000 Service Manual

SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMX7000/S1E
DIGITAL FULL COLOR

MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MX-5500N
MX-6200N
MODEL MX-7000N
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING [F] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION . . . .F-1

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 [G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION . . G-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 [H] DUPLEX SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 [ i ] LSU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i -1
[4] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION [J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION. . . J-1
For how to unpacking and installation, [K] TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . .K-1
refer to the installation manual
(00ZMX7000/I1E) [L] DEVELOPING SECTION . . . . . . . . . L-1
[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL [M] TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . M-1

STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 [N] PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR,
[6] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 REGISTRATION SENSOR
SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
[7] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[O] FUSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1
[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . 8-1
[P] PAPER EXIT SECTION . . . . . . . . . .P-1
[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[Q] DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1
[10] ROM VERSION-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[R] PWB SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-1
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . 11-1
[S] FAN, FILTER SECTION . . . . . . . . . .S-1
[12] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[T] SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION . . . . . T-1
DETAILS OF EACH SECTION
[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
[B] OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
[C] DSPF SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
[D] SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
[E] MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION .E-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1
3. Note for installing site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i [B] OPERATION PANEL
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . B - 1
1. Product features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B - 2
2. Newly employed technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B - 2
3. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2 [C] DSPF SECTION
[2] SPECIFICATIONS 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . C- 1
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C- 7
2. Functional specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C- 8
3. Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 15 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C- 39
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS [D] SCANNER SECTION
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . D- 1
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D- 2
3. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D- 3
4. The indication of remaining toner amount and the 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D- 10
status of toner cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6 [E] MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION
[4] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . E- 1
* For how to unpacking and installation, 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 2
refer to the installation manual (00ZMX7000/I1E) 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 2
[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 10
1. Identification of each section and functions . . . . . . 5 - 1 [F] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION
[6] ADJUSTMENTS 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . .F - 1
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F - 5
2. Adjustment item list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F - 6
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F - 23
[7] SIMULATION [G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . G- 1
2. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G- 6
3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G- 6
4. Soft switch (Detail of SIM 66-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 111 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G- 20
[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE [H] DUPLEX SECTION
1. Self diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . H- 1
2. Trouble code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H- 2
3. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 8 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H- 2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H- 17
[9] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1 [ i ] LSU SECTION
2. Details of maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . i - 1
3. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i - 3
[10] ROM VERSION-UP
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i - 10
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 1
2. Version-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 1 [J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . J - 1
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J - 4
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 1
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J - 5
2. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 12
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J - 15
3. Signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 43
[K] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
[12] OTHERS
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . K- 1
1. System settings (Administrator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K- 2
2. Paper JAM code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 4
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K- 2
3. Hidden Page for Serviceman Only . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 6
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K- 5
[L] DEVELOPING SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . .L - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L - 2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L - 13
[M] TRANSFER SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . M- 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M- 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M- 3
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M- 18
CONTENTS
[N] PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR

SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . N - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N - 2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N - 4
[O] FUSING SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . O - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O - 3
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O - 24
[P] PAPER EXIT SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . P - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P - 2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P - 7
[Q] DRIVE SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q - 1
2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q - 32
[R] PWB SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R - 1
[S] FAN, FILTER SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S - 1
2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S - 9
[T] SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T - 1
NOTE
MX-7000N
FOR SERVICING 4) When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
following points.
This Service Manual uses some symbols to assure safe operation. It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
Please understand the meanings of photographs before servicing. Gas tube
Lightning conductor
WARNING: If this WARNING should be ignored, a serious A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
danger to life or a serious injury could result. grounding object by the authorities.
CAUTION: If this CAUTION should be ignored, an injury or Grounding wire for telephone line
a damage to properties could result. 5) Do not damage, break, or work the power cord.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it
forcibly or do not pull it extremely.
1. Precautions for servicing
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, 6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine,
Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
except when performing the communication test, etc.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
7) Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use an
may drop inside the machine.
extreme care when servicing.
It may cause a burn.
8) With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not
3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may
insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
do not perform servicing.
4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective
It may cause an electric shock.
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
3. Note for installing site
5) When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other Do not install the machine at the following sites.
driving sections. 1) Place of high temperature, high humidity, low tempera-
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. ture, low humidity, place under an extreme change in tem-
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch perature and humidity.
inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, caus-
an injury. ing paper jam or copy dirt.
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
excessively. Do not get them in the eyes. described later.
If toner, developer, or ink enters you eyes, wash it away with
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to
damage fingers when servicing.
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise,
toner may pop and burn you.
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified
one only.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken, 2) Place of much vibrations
causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine. It may cause a breakdown.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
2. Warning for servicing

1) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements. 3) Poorly ventilated place
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric An electro-static type copier will produce ozone inside it.
shock. The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so
It may cause a fire or an electric shock. as not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of
2) If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal such a machine may produce a smell of ozone. Install the
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug. machine in a well ventilated place, and ventilate occasionally.
3) Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may
result.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening,
grounding must be made.
MX-7000N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

4) Place of direct sunlight.
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may
undergo qualitative change.
It may cause a breakdown or copy dirt.
5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photoconductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier may result
in dirt copy.
6) Place of much dust

When dusts enter the machine, it may cause a breakdown or
copy dirt.
7) Place near a wall

Some machine require intake and exhaust of air.
If intake and exhaust of air are not properly performed, copy
dirt or a breakdown may be resulted.
30 cm
(11-13/16")
30 cm 45 cm
(11-13/16") (17-23/32")
8) Unstable or slant surface

If the machine drops or fall down, it may cause an injury or a
breakdown.
If there are optional paper desk and the copier desk specified,
it is recommendable to use them.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and
lock the casters.
MX-7000N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
MX-7000N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Product features
No. Features Content Employed technology
1 High-speed color output by tandem process Color output: 41 sheets/min Print by the 2-beam LSU, paper
Monochrome output: 70 sheets/min [MX-7000N] transport by the full grip short path
62 sheets/min [MX-6200N] (Monochrome print only)
55 sheets/min [MX-5500N]
* When A4/8.5 x 11 paper is used.
2 High-volume paper feed, Paper exit option Standard paper feed capacity: 3,100 sheets
Max. paper feed capacity: 6,600 sheets
Paper feed option: A4LCC, Large LCC
Paper exit option: 4K finisher, 4K saddle finisher
3 Color document duplex simultaneous scan Single surface scan Color duplex document is scanned by
(DSPF) Monochrome: 65 sheets/min one scan.
Color: 35 sheets/min
Duplex scan
Monochrome: 65 pages/min
Color: 35 pages/min
4 Improved usability by the large-type color LCD The color VGA LCD panel (10.4") is employed to improve
panel visibility and operability.
The mode keys are arranged on the LCD panel. The
number of mode keys is increased or decreased
depending on the installation of option units. Linked with
the user authentication.
User's frequently used features can be concentrated on
the home screen, allowing quick selection of a desired
function with less key operations.
2. Newly employed technology

No. Item Content Remark
1 2-beam LSU employed Simultaneous writing with 2-beam allows high speed Resolution: 600dpi
monochrome printing.
2 Full grip short path The full grip short path is used for the paper transport
system to stabilize paper transport.
MX-7000N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 1

3. Configuration
A. Lineup (Main unit and option)
Saddle staple cartridge

(For saddle stitch finisher) Paper pass unit
AR-SC3
MX-RBX2
Saddle stitch finisher

MX-FNX4 Large capacity tray
MX-LCX2
Punch module Inserter

MX-PNX2A MX-CFX1 Digital full color multifunctional system
MX-PNX2B
(Copier/Printer/Scanner) Large capacity tray
MX-PNX2C
MX-5500N/6200N/7000N MX-LCX3
MX-PNX2D
Finisher Staple cartridge

MX-FNX3 (For finisher/saddle stitch finisher)
AR-SC2
Data security kit Expansion kit (Software, ROM) FAX system
Barcode font kit Facsimile expansion kit

AR-PF1 MX-FXX1
Data security kit
(Authentication version)
MX-FRX3
Expansion kit (Software) Fiery option
Data security kit
(Commercial version)
MX-FRX3U
Sharpdesk 1 license kit
PS3 expansion kit
MX-USX1
MX-PKX1
MX-USX5 Fiery print controller
Sharpdesk 10 license kit MX-PEX2
MX-US10
Application integration
MX-US50
module
MX-AMX1 Sharpdesk 100 license kit
MX-USA0
Application communication
module
MX-AMX2
External account module Internet Fax expansion kit
MX-AMX3 MX-FWX1

B. Machine configuration
Copier memory (Local memory) (MB) 1GB
Printer memory (System memory) (MB) 896MB
Copier Standard provision
PCL printer Standard provision
PS printer Option (Product key target.)
Main body LCD Color VGA 10.4"
FAX Option (No support for some areas.)
Scanner Standard provision
Filing Standard provision
HDD Standard provision
DSPF Standard provision
Automatic duplex Standard provision
Security Option (Product key target.)
Internet Fax Option (Product key target.)
C. Combination of options list

Section Name Model name Remarks
Paper feed system Large capacity tray MX-LCX2 (A4)
Large capacity tray MX-LCX3 (A3)
Paper exit system Paper pass unit MX-RBX2 Required when the finisher or the saddle stitch finisher is installed.
Inserter MX-CFX1 The finisher or the saddle stitch finisher is required.
When combining the finisher with the inserter, the punch unit is required.
Finisher MX-FNX3 Simultaneous installation with the saddle stitch finisher is inhibited.
Saddle stitch finisher MX-FNX4 Simultaneous installation with the finisher is inhibited.
Punch module MX-PNX2A Requires the finisher or the saddle stitch finisher and the paper pass unit.
MX-PNX2B
MX-PNX2C
MX-PNX2D
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple section
(For finisher/saddle stitch finisher)
Saddle staple cartridge AR-SC3 Saddle stitch section
(For saddle stitch finisher)
Data security kit Data security kit MX-FRX3U
(Commercial version)
Data security kit MX-FRX3
(Authentication version)
Expansion kit Barcode font kit AR-PF1
(Software, ROM)
Expansion kit PS3 expansion kit MX-PKX1
(Software) Internet Fax expansion kit MX-FWX1
Sharpdesk 1 license kit MX-USX1
Sharpdesk 5 license kit MX-USX5
Sharpdesk 10 license kit MX-US10
Sharpdesk 50 license kit MX-US50
Sharpdesk 100 license kit MX-USA0
Application integration module MX-AMX1
Application communication module MX-AMX2
External account module MX-AMX3
FAX system Facsimile expansion kit MX-FXX1 No support for some areas.
Fiery option Fiery print controller MX-PEX2

[2] SPECIFICATIONS
MX-7000N (3) Engine composition
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Photoconductor kind OPC (Drum diameter: Black; I80mm,

1. Basic specifications Color; I30mm x 3)
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser)
A. Base engine Developing system Dry-type dual-component magnetic brush
development
(1) Type
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method
Transfer system Intermediate transfer belt
Type Console
Cleaning system Counter blade
Color support Full color
Fusing system Heat roller
(2) Engine speed (ppm) Waste toner disposal No toner recycling system (With waste
a. Tray 1 4 (Main unit), LCC toner box)
Toner supply during Available (Black only)
Black and white operation
Paper size Color
MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N (4) Engine resolution
A3W, 12 x 18 29 31 37 18
A3, 11 x 17, 8K 30 33 38 19 Resolution [Writing]
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 35 38 44 22 600 x 600dpi
A4, A5R, B5, 8.5 x 11, 55 62 70 41 1200 x 600dpi (Black and white print only. Rotation
5.5 x 8.5R, 16K output inhibited. The PS extension is required.)
A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R, 40 44 51 26 Smoothing None
7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR function
Extra 30 31 37 18 Gradation [Writing]
Black and white:
b. Large LCC 2 levels (1bit) * 256 levels equivalent
Color:
Black and white PCL/PS3: Each color 2 levels (1bit)
Paper size Color
MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N Each color 16 levels (4bits) * 256 levels equivalent
A3W, 12 x 18 29 31 37 18 FIERY:
A3, 11 x 17, 8K 30 33 38 19 Each color 64 levels (6bits) * 256 levels equivalent
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 35 38 44 22 (5) Warmup
A4, A5R, B5, 8.5 x 11, 55 62 70 41
5.5 x 8.5R, 16K Warmup time 360 sec or less
A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R, 40 44 51 26 Pre-heat Yes
7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR
(6) Jam recovery time
* 8K and 16K are for China only.
c. Manual (Main unit) With the door Approx. After leaving the machine with the door open
open 60 sec for 60sec, in the standard condition and the
Black and white polygon stop conditions.
Paper size Color
MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N (7) Printable area
A3W, 12 x 18 29 30 35 13
A3, 11 x 17, 8K 30 32 37 14 A3W *1 297 x 420mm 12 x 18 *1 279 x 432mm
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8K 35 36 42 15 A3 293 x 413mm 11 x 17 275 x 425mm
A4, A5R, B5, 8.5 x 11, 55 62 70 27 B4 253 x 357mm 8.5 x 14 212 x 349mm
5.5 x 8.5R, 16K A4 206 x 290mm 8.5 x 13 212 x 323mm
A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R, 40 42 49 17 B5 178 x 250mm 8.5 x 11 212 x 272mm
7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR A5 144 x 203mm 5.5 x 8.5 136 x 209mm
OHP (A4, 8.5 x 11) 23 23 23 19 7.25 x 10.5 180 x 260mm 8K 266 x 383mm
OHP (A4R, 8.5 x 11R) 18 18 18 12 Postcard 96 x 141mm 16K 191 x 263mm
OHP (Other) 13 13 13 9
*1: When the PLC6/5c or the PS driver is used to print on A3W
Extra 29 30 35 13
(12 x 18) paper, the maximum print area is 299mm x 450mm
Envelope 29 30 35 13
(11-49/64 x 17-45/64).
Heavy paper 23 23 23 19
(B5, A4, A5R, 8.5 x 11, * The printable area with the printer is the area excluding 4.2mm
8.5 x 5.5R, 16K) (5/32) from the each edge of paper.
(8) Void area
(Postcard HIGH) *1
Void area Top: 4 mm or less
(Postcard LOW) *1
Image loss Bottom: 4 mm or less
Heavy paper (A4R, B5R, 18 18 18 12 FR Total: 4 mm or less
8.5 x 11R/8.5 x 5.5R/
16KR) (9) Power source
(Other sizes) 100V type 200V type
Voltage / Current 100 127V, 16A 220 240V, 8A
*1: Switched by the service simulation setting
Frequency 50/60Hz
Power source Fixed type (direct) Inlet type
code
Power switch 2 switches (Primary switch: in the front cover;
Seconday switch: the operation panel)
MX-7000N SPECIFICATIONS 2 1
(10) Power consumption Tray 3 Tray 4
Changing of paper By users
100V type 200V type size
Maximum rated power 1.8kW 1.84kW Paper type setting Yes
consumption Default paper size Maximum width of paper guide
* An option (finisher, inserter, punch unit, paper pass unit) is not setting
included. Feedable paper Plain paper: Plain paper:
type/weight 60 105g/m2 60 105g/m2
(11) Noise (16 - 28lbs) (16 28lbs)
Heavy paper 1 (including Heavy paper 1 (including
In action Black and white 7.3B or less gloss paper): gloss paper):
Color 6.8B or less 106 209g/m2 106 209g/m2
Standby (Standby Black and white/Color 5.5B or less (28 - 56lbs) (28 56lbs)
mode) OHP
Label paper
(12) Dimensions
Tab paper
Paper capacity Plain paper: Plain paper:
Outer dimensions 795 (W) x 715 (D) x 1225 (H) mm
500 sheets 500 sheets
(31-19/64 (W) x 28-9/64 (D) x 48-7/32 (H) inch)
(80g/m2, 21lbs) (80g/m2, 21lbs)
Footprint 795 (W) x 715 (D) mm
OHP: 40 sheets
(31-19/64 (W) x 28-9/64 (D) inch)
Heavy paper: 80 sheets
(13) Weight Tab paper: 40 sheets
Gloss paper: 40 sheets
Main unit Approx. 209 kg (460 lbs) Other special paper:
Main unit + Developer + Toner cartridge Approx. 214 kg (471 lbs) 1 sheet
Paper type Plain paper, pre-printed Plain paper, pre-printed
(14) Dimensions occupied by Machine paper (not including paper (not including
backing paper), recycled backing paper), recycled
Dimensions occupied by machine 1130 (W) x 715 (D) mm paper, letter head, pre- paper, letter head, pre-
(with multi bypass extended) (44-31/64 (W) x 28-9/64 (D) inch punched paper, colored punched paper, colored
B. Paper feed unit/Transport/Paper exit secton paper, heavy paper 1, paper, heavy paper 1
label paper, OHP, * Users can set up all of
(1) Paper feed section tab paper these paper types.
* Users can set up all of
Form Standard: Fourfold feeder tray + multi bypass these paper types.
Maximum: Fourfold feeder tray (serial LCC + 2 Paper size AB auto detection: AB auto detection:
trays) + multi bypass + large capacity feeder tray detection A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R,
(Normal or large) B5, B5R, A5R, 8.5 x 13 B5, B5R, 8.5 x 13
Heater (Engine part) Service parts Inch auto detection: Inch auto detection:
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 12 x 18, 11 x 17,
(2) Paper feed tray
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
a. Tray 1/Tray 2 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R
5.5 x 8.5R
Tray 1 Tray 2 Detection of Level detection
Paper size A4, 8.5 x 11 A4, 8.5 x 11 remaining paper (3 levels: 100%, 67%, 33%, none)
Changing of paper Guide adjustment and size setting by serviceman (3) Manual feed tray (Bypass tray)
size
Paper type setting Yes Paper size A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K,
Default paper size Inch system: 8.5 x 11 16KR, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
setting AB system: A4 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R, Envelope
Feedable paper Plain paper: 60 105g/m2 (16 - 28lbs) (Monarch / Com-10 / DL / C5 / Rectangle 3 /
type/weight Western 2 / Western 4)
Paper capacity 1200 sheets 800 sheets * For Western type 2 with the inserter installed,
(80g/m2, 21lbs) (80g/m2, 21lbs) paper feed is inhibited.
Extra Size (Tab paper is limited to A4; tab width
Paper type Plain paper, pre-printed paper (not including
12mm-20mm / 8.5 x 11; tab width 6.1-17mm)
backing paper), recycled paper, letter head, pre-
punched paper, colored paper Changing of Guide adjustment by users
* Users can set up all of these paper types. paper size
Paper size detection No Paper type setting Yes
Detection of 100%, 33%, 6%, none 100%, 50%, 9%, none Feedable paper Thin paper: 55 59g/m2 (15 16 lbs)
remaining paper type/weight Plain paper: 60 105g/m2 (16 28 lbs)
Heavy paper 1 (including gloss paper):
Tray rising/falling Rising: Within 12 seconds
106 209g/m2 (28 56 lbs)
time * Time required from tray insertion to empty
Heavy paper 2 : 210 256g/m2 (56 68 lbs)
detection without paper.
Envelope: 75 90g/m2 (20 24 lbs)
Falling: Self-weight falling
OHP
b. Tray 3/Tray 4 Label paper
Tab paper
Tray 3 Tray 4 Gloss paper
Paper size A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R,
B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, B5, B5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR,
16KR, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 12 x 18, 11 x 17,
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R, 7.25 x 10.5R
Special size (uncertain
paper size) inhibited.
Paper capacity Plain paper: 100 sheets (80g/m2) Transmission Image (Scanner)
Envelope: 20 sheets resolution (dpi) process 100 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 300 x 300dpi
OHP: 20 sheets / 400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
Heavy paper: 40 sheets (Internet Fax)
Tab paper: 20 sheets 200 x 100dpi (Half tone not allowed) /
Gloss paper: 20 sheets * 200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi /
Other special paper: 1 sheet 400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
* The gloss paper is sucked under a high humidity (Fax)
environment to cause double feed or misfeed. In Standard (203.2 x 97.8dpi) (Half tone not
such a case, manually supply paper sheet by allowed) / Fine (203.2 x 195.6dpi) /
sheet (Select heavy paper). Super fine (203.2 x 391dpi) /
Paper type Plain paper, pre-printed paper (excluding back print Ultra fine (406.4 x 391dpi)
paper), recycled paper, letter head, pre-punched PC-Fax/ 200 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi
paper, colored paper, heavy paper 1, heavy paper 2, PC-Internet / 400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
thin paper, label paper, OHP, tab paper, envelope. Fax
* Users can set up all of these paper types. Network 75dpi / 100dpi / 150dpi / 200dpi / 300dpi /
Paper size AB auto A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, TWAIN 400dpi / 600dpi or custom: 50-9600dpi
detection detect A5R, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 11 x 17 Exposure lamp Xenon
Inch auto 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, Scan levels 10bits
detect 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R, 7.25 x 10.5R,
Output levels Fax mode: 1bit
A3, B4, A4, B5
Internet Fax mode: 1bit
For China A3W, A3, A4, A4R, B5R, A5R, 8K, Scanner mode:
(AB auto 16K, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11 Black and white: 1bit
detect) Gray scale: 8bit
For China 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, Full color: Each color RGB 8bit
(Inch auto 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R,
detect) A3, B4, A4, B5
(2) Original cover
Detection of Yes or No only
Scan range 297 x 432mm (12 x 17)
remaining paper
Original cover Left back as standard
(4) Double-sided standard
location
Method Non-Stack Detection Yes
Paper size A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, Detection size Auto detect
16KR, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
Inch-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R
Inch-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
Paper weight Plain paper: 60-105g/m2 (16-28 lbs)
AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5
(for duplex operation) Heavy paper 1: 106-209g/m2 (28-56 lbs)
AB-2 A3, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 x 13
Logo paper support For paper such as letterhead paper with front-
back attributes, the engine control must be cared AB-3 B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
for printing side. Manual Yes
detection size
(5) Paper exit tray (Center tray) Heater Service parts
(Scanner part)
Exit location/method Face down in the main unit
Exit capacity 250 sheets (A4 or 8.5 x 11 (color recommended (3) Duplex single pass feeder
paper))
Exit paper size/type All feedable paper Form DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder)
Exit tray full Yes Scan speed Black and white Color
detection (A4/8.5 x 11) (A4/8.5 x 11)
Copy 1-sided: 65 sheets/min 1-sided:
(6) Paper exit tray unit (Right tray) (600 x 300dpi, 1bit) 35 sheets/min
2-sided: 65 pages/min (600 x 600dpi,
Form Exit tray unit (600 x 300dpi, 1bit) 4bit)
Transport standard Center standard 2-sided:
Ejecting location/ External ejection from the right face of the main unit 35 pages/min
method / face-down ejection (600 x 600dpi,
Tray capacity 100 sheets (A4 or 8.5 x 11 (color recommended 4bit)
paper)) Fax 1-sided: 65 sheets/min
Ejected paper size/ Any feedable paper except heavy paper 2 (210 (203.2 x 97.8dpi
type 256g/m2 (56 68 lbs)), envelope and tab paper. (Standard), 1bit)
Full tray detection Yes (Detection on the main unit) 2-sided: 65 pages/min
Installation Installation by service personnel. (203.2 x 97.8dpi
(Standard), 1bit)
C. Scanner section Scanner 1-sided: 65 sheets/min 1-sided:
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) 35 sheets/min
(1) Resolution/Gradation (or Levels) 2-sided: 65 pages/min (200 x 200dpi,
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) 8bit)
Scan Copy mode (when in full color)
resolution (dpi) Black and white Color 2-sided:
Original 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi 35 pages/min
Cover 600 x 300dpi (Default) (200 x 200dpi,
(Default) 8bit)
DSPF 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi Internet 1-sided: 65 sheets/min
600 x 300dpi (Default) Fax (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(Default) 2-sided: 65 pages/min
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Document set Up standard
orientation
Document standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for 2. Functional specifications
location random feeding)
Document Seat through method
A. Specifications of copy functions
transportation method (1) Copy speed (Continuous copy speed) (cpm)
Document sizes Inch-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4 a. Tray 1 - 4, LCC (Reduction/Normal/Enlargement)
Inch-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4 Black and white
Paper size Color
AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11 A3W, 12 x 18 29 31 37 18
AB-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A3, 11 x 17, 8K 30 33 38 19
11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 216 x 330 B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 35 38 44 22
AB-3 A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, A4, A5R, B5, 8.5 x 11, 55 62 70 41
16KR, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 216 x 5.5 x 8.5R, 16K
330 A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R, 40 44 51 26
Long 800mm (31-1/2) 7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR
paper (Black and white 2 levels only) Extra 30 31 37 18
Mixed feeding (same type / same width) b. Large LCC (Reduction/Normal/Enlargement)
possible
Random feeding (feeding of different types / Black and white
different widths) Paper size Color
MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N
Only the following combinations of 2 size types
A3W, 12 x 18 29 31 37 18
are allowed: A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and
B5; B5 and A5; and 11-inch and 8.5-inch. A3, 11 x 17, 8K 30 33 38 19
Document 1-side Thin 35 49g/m2 (9 13 lbs) B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 35 38 44 22
weights paper A4, A5R, B5, 8.5 x 11, 55 62 70 41
Plain 50 128g/m2 (13 34 lbs) 5.5 x 8.5R, 16K
paper A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R, 40 44 51 26
2-side 50 128 g/m2 (13 34 lbs) 7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR
Document carrying Maximum: 150 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs), or * 8K and 16K are for China only.
capacity Maximum thickness: 19.5 mm, 3/4 inch or less
c. Manual feed (Reduction/Normal/Enlargement)
Types of document that The following documents are NOT allowed:
may not be transported OHP, second original drawing, tracing paper,
Black and white
carbon paper, thermal paper, wrinkled / broken Paper size Color
MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N
/ torn document, document with cuts and
pastes, documents printed by an ink ribbon, A3W, 12 x 18 29 30 35 13
and perforated document (Perforated A3, 11 x 17, 8K 30 32 37 14
document by punch unit is allowed.) B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8K 35 36 42 15
Paper detection Yes A4, A5R, B5, 8.5 x 11, 55 62 70 27
Paper detection size Auto detection (Switching one type of detection 5.5 x 8.5R, 16K
unit through system setting) A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R, 40 42 49 17
Inch-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4 OHP (A4, 8.5 x 11) 23 23 23 19
Inch-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, OHP (A4R, 8.5 x 11R) 18 18 18 12
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4 OHP (Other) 13 13 13 9
AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, Extra 29 30 35 13
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11 Envelope 29 30 35 13
AB-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, Heavy paper 23 23 23 19
11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 216 x 330 (B5, A4, A5R, 8.5 x 11,
AB-3 A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, 8.5 x 5.5R, 16K)
16KR, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 216 x Heavy paper 23 23 23 19
330 (Postcard HIGH) *1
Paper feeding direction Right hand feeding Heavy paper 13 13 13 9
Simultaneous double- Enable for either of B/W (black and white) and (Postcard LOW) *1
sided scanning color. Heavy paper (A4R, B5R, 18 18 18 12
8.5 x 11R/8.5 x 5.5R/
D. Fuser section
16KR)
(1) Type Heavy paper 13 13 13 9
(Other sizes)
System Heat roller attachment system *1: Switched by the service simulation setting
(2) First copy time
MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N

Platen
Black Black Black
/
and Color and Color and Color
DSPF
white white white
Platen 4.5 sec 8.4 sec 4.5 sec 8.4 sec 4.0 sec 8.4 sec
DSPF 9.0 sec 15.5 9.0 sec 15.5 9.0 sec 15.0
sec sec sec
* Feeding A4/8.5 x 11 paper from the main unit tray 2
* Polygon in rotation
* Auto Color Selection OFF/Auto Color for color OFF
* Document tray lift-up complete state when the DSPF is used.
(3) Job speed (10) Color adjustment
a. Document changing speed (in copy mode)
RGB adjustment Yes
Color balance Yes
MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N
Saturation adjustment Yes
Black Black Black
and Color and Color and Color Brightness adjustment Yes
white white white Contrast adjustment No
S to S 55cpm 35cpm 62cpm 35cpm 65cpm 35cpm Sharpness adjustment Yes
(100%) (85.4%) (100%) (85.4%) (92.9%) (85.4%) Background removal Yes
Auto color calibration Allowed by system setting
* The copy speed in combination of the main unit and the auto
Registration adjustment Allowed by system setting
document feed user is defined.
* S to S: A4/8.5 x 11 document, 11 pages and 1 copy (not includ- (11) Copy functions
ing the first copy)
Function Automatic paper Yes (Mixed/random size feeding
Black and white: 600 x 300dpi selection supported)
Color: 600 x 600dpi (default) Automatic Yes
(4) Continuous copy magnification selection
Paper type select Yes
Multi max. number 999 sheets (Type setting allowed)
Auto tray switching Yes
(5) Resolution
Rotated copy Yes
Large rotated copy exceeding A4
Scan resolution 600 x 600dpi
supported
Writing resolution 600 x 600dpi
Electronic sort Yes
(6) Copy document Job reservation Yes
Program call/ Yes (Program name registration to
Document Max. A3 (11 x 17) registration be examined)
Document type Sheet/Book original Preheat function Yes
(7) Copy magnification ratio Conditions set up by system setting
Auto power shutoff Yes
Copy Normal: 1:1r0.8% Conditions set up by system setting
magnification ratio AB series: 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, User authentication 1000
115%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400% Indeterminate Yes
Inch series: 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%, document paper size
129% , 200%, 400% input
Zoom 25 400% (25 200% for DSPF) Indeterminate paper Yes
size input
Preset 4
magnification ratio 2-sided copy direction Yes
switch
XY zoom Yes
Special Margin shift Yes
(8) Density, copy image quality processing function Edge/center erase Yes
Dual page copy Yes
Exposure mode Automatic (Color: Auto Color, Black and white:
Tandem copy Yes
Character AE)
Cover/insertion Yes
Text,Text/Printed Photo, Print photo, Text/Photo,
Photo, Map, Pale-color document. Tab paper insertion Yes (Insertion only. Tab copy not
allowed. Staple/Punch not allowed.)
Copy document Effective for Text, Text/Printed photo, Printed photo
mode mode. OHP insertion Yes
Color emphasis Effective for Text, Text/Printed photo, Printed photo, Tab copy Yes
Text/Photo, Photo, Map mode. Centering Yes
Manual steps 9 steps 2in1/4in1 Yes
Toner save mode Black and white: Yes Pamphlet Yes
Color: Yes Card shot Yes
Off on printed photo, photo or copy document Book copy Yes
(9) Color copy mode Large capacity Yes
document mode
Auto Color Copy mode automatically discerning color/black and Black-white inversion Yes (Only black-white copy allowed/
selection copy white. color copy not allowed upon setup
Not ready)
Full color mode Enforced full color mode
Multi-page Yes
2-color mode Red-black mode (Change red point in document into
Enlargement
other color)
Mode to select black and another color from R/G/B/ Mirror image Yes
C/M/Y Photo repeat Yes
Single color mode Mode to select one color from R/G/B/C/M/Y Date print Yes
Black and white Enforced black and white copy mode Character print Yes
copy mode Stamp Yes
Page printing Yes
Proof copy Yes
Mixed document Yes (Random + MIX)
feeder
Document control Yes (with Data Security Kit
equipped)
B. Image send function Item Scanner Internet Fax Fax
Density Auto + 5 steps Auto + 5 steps
(1) Mode
adjustment (The image quaity of
"Auto" is the same
Scanner Scan to E-mail
as that of "Manual =
Scan to Desktop
3" when selecting
Scan to FTP
full color/gray scale.)
Scan to Folder(SMB)
Black and white ---
Scan to USB memory
enabled
Scan to E-mail with Meta
Auto
Scan to Desktop with Meta
Manual
Scan to FTP with Meta
Scan to SMB with Meta
Color key enabled
Fax Fax to Fax (manual)
When selecting
Fax to E-mail (inbound routing)
"Auto":
Fax to / FTP/Desktop/SMB/E-mail (Document Admin)
Text/printed photo
Internet Internet Fax to Internet Fax (manual) Text/photo
Fax Internet Fax to E-mail (inbound routing) Text
Internet Fax to FTP/Desktop/SMB/E-mail (Document Admin)
* Full mode supported (including Simple mode) When selecting
(2) Image send function "Manual":
(Push send from the main unit) Text/printed photo
Text/Photo
a. Support system Text
Photo
Item Scanner Internet Fax Printed photo
Corresponding SMTP POP server Map
server/protocol FTP(TCP/IP) SMTP server Selection of --- Half tone (Black and white only)
SMB ESMTP server image quality ON/OFF
b. Support image Resolution 100 x 100 dpi 200 x 100dpi Standard
(depends on (Half tone (203.2 x 97.8dpi)
Item Scanner Internet Fax Fax file format/ not allowed) (middle tone not
transmission allowed)
File format Black and white: Black and white: ---
method) 200 x 200 dpi 200 x 200dpi Fine
TIFF, PDF, Encrypted TIFF-FX
PDF (TIFF-F, TIFF-S) (203.2 x 195.6 dpi)
Color: Gray scale, color 300 x 300 dpi 200 x 400dpi Super
TIFF, JPEG, PDF, (203.2 x 391dpi)
Encrypted PDF 400 x 400 dpi 400 x 400dpi Ultra
Compression [Black and white] MH, MMR MH, MR, (406.4 x 391 dpi)
method Non-compression MMR, 600 x 600 dpi 600 x 600dpi ---
G3 (1-dimensional) JBIG Moire Yes ---
= MH (Modified reduction
Huffman) mode
G4 DSPF duplex Yes (Black and white)
= MMR (Modified simultaneous Yes (Color) ---
MR) scanning
[Color/Gray scale] Notes' Yes Yes ---
JPEG (High, middle, security
low) feature
Specified pages Yes --- ---
d. Specification of Addresses
per size (number
of page(s)
Item Scanner Internet Fax Fax
specification
Address Specification by one-touch/group/direct address entry.
allowed)
specification Entry from soft keyboard. (Scanner/Internet Fax)
c. Image processing Entry from 10-key. (Fax)
Selection from LDAP server
Item Scanner Internet Fax Fax Input from the externally connected keyboard
Original Full color, gray black and white Setting of default Yes ---
scanning scale, black and address *1
color white Number of One- Total (number of key): Maximum 999
Auto color Color start key: --- touch address
selection Auto key registration
(judge as color: Number of Number of Group (1 key) address registration :
Full color, judge Group (1 key) maximum 500
as black and address Number of Group key registration : 5000 (Total
white: registtation address number included in /999 key)
Monochrome/gray Program 48
scale)
Direct entry of Input from the soft keyboard and Entry by 10-key,
Full color black and
addresses the externally connected keyboard # key, * key
white start key:
Chain dial --- Yes (pause key)
Monochrome
Gray scale Resend Call up nearest 8 addresses which are specified as a
single destination. *2
Halftone Equivalent of 256 steps
reproduction Shortcut for Use the 10-key to call up registered numbers of
address addresses.
selection (quick
key)
CC/BCC sending Yes ---
Item Scanner Internet Fax Fax Item Scanner Internet Fax Fax
Subjet Selective/direct entry from the list --- Scaled transmission Yes
File name Selective/direct entry from the list Enlargement/reduction is allowed only from a fixed
Return mail Selective/direct --- --- size to another. Reduction may be done on the
address entry from the (1 default receiver side with Internet Fax sending.
list/selection address fixed Recall Busy --- --- Yes
from LDAP as sender mode --- --- Number/time
server name) to be set up
Transmission Selective/direct entry from the list. --- through
message (Number of characters: Maximum system setup
(message body) of 1800 half-size characters (900 Long original Yes
full size characters)) transmission Maximum of 800mm (single side only/black and
Mail footer Yes --- white 2 values only)
preset *3 Change of the Yes ---
Inhibition of Yes number of pages for
address each file
registration from Restriction on Yes ---
the main unit transmission size
Inhibition of Yes Large capacity Yes
address original mode
registration from Scanning of thin Yes
a Web screen paper
Inhibition of Yes Mixed originals Yes (Random + MIX)
registration from feeder
the network Default date sender --- Yes (ON only)
scanner tool transmission
Inhibition of Yes
g. Reception function
"Resend" in the
FAX/image send
Item Internet Fax Fax
mode
Automatic reception Yes
Inhibition of Yes
Manual reception Yes Yes
selection from an
Switching from manual
address book
reception to automatic
Inhibition of Yes
reception. (France only)
direct input
Memory reception Yes
Inhibition of send Yes
Fixed size reduced Yes
from the PC
reception
Internet Fax
Rotated reception Yes
Inhibition of send Yes
of PC-Fax Setting of received data --- Equal size print
print condition (partition not allowed)
*1: The scanner mode allows setting the default address. Equal size print
To transmit data, users only have to set the original and press (partition allowed)
the start key. Equal or reduced size
*2: Except for FTP, Desktop, SMB, USB memory and Broadcast. print
2-sided reception Condition setting through system setting
*3: Function to set up a text message that will be added
Automatic reduction Yes Yes
automatically to the message body upon mail transmission.
setting upon receiving (North America only) (North America,
Editing upon transmission is not allowed.
A3 Philippine only)
e. Specification of Multiple Addresses Automatic reduction Yes Yes
setting upon receiving (except North (except North America,
Item Scanner Internet Fax Fax letter America only) Philippine only)
Broadcast Yes (500 destinations) Yes (500 destinations) Address/Domain- Yes (50 domains) ---
(E-mail/FTP/Desktop specified reception
allowed) allowed
* Broadcast transmission by Scanner, Internet Fax and Fax is Address/Domain- Yes (50 domains) ---
specified reception not
allowed. (Black and white (2 value))
allowed. (To be
f. Transmission function rejected)
Reception from a --- Specified numbers only
Item Scanner Internet Fax Fax specific number not (50 numbers /20 digits)
Memory 94 destinations in all allowed. (To be
transmission rejected)
On-hook --- Yes External phone --- Yes
Quick online --- Yes connection remote
transmission Received data bypass Yes
Direct transmission --- Yes output
(Switching: Reception confirmation Setting by 0-8 hours ---
Memory cycle setting (Each minute)
transmission POP3 communications Setting by 30-300 ---
l Direct timeout setting seconds (Every 30
transmission) seconds)
Automatically- --- Yes Body text print select Yes ---
reduced setting
transmission Transfer function upon Yes (1 receiver (of transfer) registration)
Rotated --- Yes disabling of output.
transmission
Item Internet Fax Fax Item Scanner Internet Fax Fax
Rooting function Yes Center erase Yes
Internet Fax/ 2 in 1 No Yes
Fax to E-mail (Transfer (Allowed for
of Internet Fax/Fax Fax /Internet
reception data to Fax broadcast)
E-mail, inbound routing) Background Yes ---
Exit tray setting Yes removal (Only color
Setting set of received --- Yes and gray
data scale)
Staple function of --- Yes Card scan Yes (Equivalent or enlargement up to the paper width.
received data The maximum enlargement is not allowed to exceed
Auto wake up print Yes 200%)
Received data print Yes Confirm --- Yes ---
hold function transmission Timeout time
Setting for 1
h. Report/list function
minute 240
hours/each
minute
Image sending Yes
Forward data Yes
activity report Time-specified output
transmission/
Output with memory full
reception
* Maximum of 200 times including both
transmission and reception * E-mail address can be set for the F-code relay broadcast.
Transaction report Yes j. Transmission method
Address/phone Yes
number table Item Fax
Group table Yes Transmission time 2 seconds level (Super G3 / JBIG)
Program table Yes 6 seconds level (G3 ECM)
Memory box table --- Yes Modem speed Automatic fall-back : 33.6kbps o 2.4kbps
(F code) Intercommunication Super G3 / G3
Communication --- Always print/Upon error/no print Communication General membership telephone line (PSTN),
original contents print line independent business line (PBX), F net.
List of rejected --- Yes R-key for PBX setting: Germany, France
reception numbers Maximum number 1 line only
List of addresses --- Yes --- of lines
allowed or not ECM Yes
allowed for reception
k. Record size
Inbound routing table No Yes
list
Item Internet Fax Fax
Document Admin list Yes
Maximum record width 293mm (11-17/32)
i. Other Functions Record size A3 A5 (11 x 17 5.5 x 8.5)
Item Scanner Internet Fax Fax l. F code communication

Time Yes
Item Fax
specification
Sub-address Yes (20 digits)
Polling reception --- Yes
Password Yes (20 digits)
Bulletin board --- Yes
transmission Up to 100 m. Registration-related settings
registrations allowed
with bulletin board, Item Scanner Internet Fax
confidential and Fax
relay broadcast all One-touch/group *1 999 destinations (Max. 200 items for FTP, Desktop,
combined. (Free E-mail and SMB)
area: 1 registration) FTP Use of LDAP allowed
Setting of the Desktop Up to 500 registered addresses for each group dial.
number of SMB Registered name in 18 full-size character (36 half-
transmission: 1 / no Internet Fax size characters)
limit. Fax Fax only:
Own number --- Yes One-touch dial receiver number registration: within
sending 64 digits for receiver number + sub-address +
Own name select --- Yes passcode (including /).
Page number --- Yes Default address Yes ---
print setup
Date print --- Yes (Date can be expressed Desktop Yes ---
alternatively) registration Registration by
Polling protection --- Yes using Web or
function NST (network
Page partition Yes scanner tool)
transmission Program Registration of addresses (groups), settings
Confidential --- Yes (density, image quality) and special functions in one
(receiver unit) (F code method) set is allowed. (48 of them)
Relay broadcast --- Yes
instructions (F code method)
Fax to E-mail --- Yes
(F code) *
Edge erase Yes
Item Scanner Internet Fax Item Scanner Internet Fax Fax
Fax Transmission Sound volume --- Yes *2
Number of memory --- Total 100 can be and reception setting
boxes registered error sound Sound pattern --- Yes *3
including bulletin Time setting for --- Yes *5
board / communication
confidential / relay ending sound
broadcast. Communication Sound volume --- Yes *2 ---
Registration error sound setting
name: 9 full-size
Sound setting Sound volume Yes *1
characters (18
for end of setting
half-size
original reading
characters)
(image send)
Reply-To 1000 (user ---
registration registration *1: Large/middle/small. Setup by the system settings.
from Web) *2 *2: 14 levels and no sound. Setup by the system settings.
E-mail only *3: PATTERN 1/2/3/4. Setup by the system settings.
Number of sender --- 1 (20 1 (default) with Different sound should be selectable for each of reception /
registration characters) 20 characters
transmission success/transmission and reception error.
Number of sender --- Total: 18
selection registrations (20 *4: Setup by the system settings. 5 steps of 2.0 - 4.0 seconds.
registration characters) *5: Setup by the system settings. 2-steps setting for every 0.3 or
(Sender selection: 0.7 second.
In addition to
default, 18 p. Others
registrations
allowed) Item Scanner Internet Fax Fax
Registration of --- 10 numbers / 20 PC-Fax --- Yes
polling approval digits PC-Internet Fax --- Yes ---
number FAST --- Yes
Quick key (short Yes (001 999) (U.S.A only)
cut registration) *3 Distinctive ring --- Setting for
Retrieving/ Yes (By address book conversion utility) detection each
scanning of destination
registered data to Trial mode Scanner: Yes No ---
other model (Standard)
Import/export of Yes (By storage backup) Meta data: Yes
address book
C. PC-Fax functions
*1: Since Scanner/Internet Fax/Fax uses the common address
book, the number of addresses allowed for registration is the (1) PC-Fax/PC-Internet Fax operating environment
sum total of all modes.
OS Windows 98
*2: The book for address selection is used when a scan sender is Windows Me
selected. Windows NT4.0 Workstation (Service Pack5)
*3: Quick key is the function to select an address based on the IE4.0 or more
registered number of each address within the book for address Windows 2000
selection. Users should be able to select a quick key number. Windows XP Home Edition
Windows XP Professional
n. Telephone functions Windows Server 2003
PC IBM PC/AT compatible machine
Item Fax CPU Pentium II 300MHz or more
On-hook function Yes Monitor 640x480 Pixels or more of screen resolution
Setting of pause time Yes (1-15 seconds) 256 or more of colors
Telephone transmission No (External telephone transmission Memory 64MB or more
during power outage allowed) HDD Free space of 50MB or more
Tone pulse switching Availability of setting (10 / 20 / TONE / Interface USB2.0
auto detection) and their default values 10/100BASE-TX
are different depending on destination.
Communications LPR/lp, Port9100(RAW), IPP, USB2.0
o. Sound settings protocol
(2) PC-Fax/PC-Internet Fax functions
On-hook sound Sound volume --- Yes *1
PC-Fax Send Yes (with Fax equipped)
setting
Maximim of 64 digits for Fax number (including
Sound volume Sound volume --- Yes *2 sub-address and passcode)
for calling setting
PC-Internet Fax Send Yes (Necessary options: Internet Fax
Line monitor Sound volume --- Yes *2 expansion kit)
sound setting Maximum of 64 digits for Internet Fax address
Reception Sound volume --- Yes *1 Yes *2 Resolution 200 x 100 dpi/200 x 200 dpi/
sound setting 200 x 400 dpi/400 x 400 dpi
Sound pattern --- Yes *3 Transmission original A3/B4/A4/A5/B5/11 x 17/8.5 x 14/8.5 x 13/
Transmission Sound volume --- Yes *2 sizes 8.5 x 11/5.5 x 8.5/8K/16K
success sound setting Compression method MH/MMR
Sound pattern --- Yes *3 Braodcast transmission Yes (Fax, Internet Fax mixture possible.
Time setting for --- Yes *4 Maximum of 500)
communication
ending sound
F code transmission Yes Sub-address Yes maximum of E. Printer function
20 digits
(1) Platform
Passcode Yes maximum of
20 digits
IBM PC/AT compatible machine
Phone book Yes
Macintosh
registration/
transmission function (2) Support OS
Attach a cover sheet Yes (Not allowed for bradcast transmission)
function Custom Windows 98/Me
Create cover sheets Yes PCL5c/6 Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later *1
function Windows 2000
Own number send Yes (Always printed) Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Preview function Yes
Custom Windows 98/Me
Transmission Yes
PS Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later *1
confirmation (Notice to
Windows 2000
PC by NJR)
Windows XP
Document filing function Filing Yes
Windows Server 2003
Quick File Yes
PPD Windows 98/Me
PC-Fax Transmission Yes (Re-transmission not allowed) Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later *1
log Windows 2000
User authentication Yes Windows XP
R-KEY (Germany/ Yes Windows Server 2003
France only) MacOS 9.0-9.2.2, x 10.1.5, x 10.2.8, x 10.3.3 10.3.9, x 10.4
D. Remote PC Functions (Network TWAIN) *1: The driver for Windows NT is not bundled in the CD-ROM
Pull scan (TWAIN) specification included in the package.
(3) Command system
Interfaces LAN Yes
USB No PCL5c compatible Standard
OS's Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/2003 Server PCL6 compatible
WHQL validated OS's Windows 2000/XP BMLinkS No
Hardware environment System: Must satisfy the operational conditions PS3 compatible Option (PS3 expansion kit: MX-PKX1)
for each OS.
Fiery controller Adobe Option (Fiery print controller: MX-PEX2)
HDD: 10MB or more: 100MB or more
PostScript3
recommended.
Monitor: 800 x 600 dots or more; 256 or more of (4) Installed fonts
colors must be available.
Other: Network port Standard PCL5c/PCL6 Roman outline fonts = 80 types
2-sided scan Yes Line printer font (Bitmap) = 1 type
Color modes Mono 2 gradation/Mono Diffusion/Gray scale/ Option PCL5c/PCL6 Bar code fonts = 28 types (Can be provided
Full Color by the flash ROM kit as well)
Resolutions 75dpi/100dpi/150dpi/200dpi/300dpi/400dpi/ PS3 Roman outline fonts = 136 types
600dpi or custom: 50-9600dpi (5) Support print channel
Scanning ranges A3/A4/A4R/A5/A5R/B4/B5/B5R/11 x 17/
8.5 x 14/8.5 x 13/8.5 x 11/8.5 x 11R/7.25 x 10.5/ USB USB 1.1: Windows 98/Me/2000/Server 2003/XP only
7.25 x 10.5R/5.5 x 8.5/5.5 x 8.5R/8K/16K/ USB 2.0 (High speed): Windows 2000/XP only
16KR/Auto/Auto(Mixed size)/Custom PSERVER/ Print channel in PSERVER/PRINT mode to be used in
* "Auto" includes the same width (Mix). RPRINT for netware environment
"Auto (Mixed size)" means random. NetWare
Preview function Yes environment
Zoom preview function Yes LPR UNIX LPR/LPD command-compatible print channel
Rotated scan Yes (90-degree/ 180-degree/ 270-degree) IPP Print channel in compliance with IPP1.0
Brightness/contrast Auto/manual (-100 +100) PAP: Print channel to be used for Machintosh environment
adjustment EtherTalk
Gamma adjustment Yes (AppleTalk)
Color matching None/For Printer/For CRT/For LCD/ICM FTP Equipped with the function to print data received via
Edge emphasis None/Normal/Sharp/Blur built-in FTP server
Black-white inversion Yes NetBEUI Microsoft NetBEUI compatible print channel
Selection of illuminant Yes (Red/Green/Blue/White) Port9100 9100 TCP port (Raw Port) supported
color HTTP Web Submit Print supported
Selection of threshold Auto/manual (1 254) POP3 E-Mail To Print supported
value
(6) Command compatibility
Addition of void area Allowed (4 sides; 2.5mm for each)
Save of setup contents Yes
PCL5c PCL5c must be compatible with HP Color Laser Jet
Save of preview image Yes compatibility 4600.
Display unit of Pixel/mm/inch PCL XL PCL XL must be compatible with HP Color Laser Jet
scanning range compatibility 4200.
Notes's security Yes PCL CXL must be compatible with HP Color Laser Jet.
function PostScript3 Must be compatible with Adobe PS3.
Image acquision Non-compression compatibility
method from the main
unit
(7) Environmental settings
Setting item Overview

Initial setting Basic settings for printer use such as number of copies
or printing direction.
PCL seting Setting of PCL symbols and fonts
PS setting Whether or not printing is allowed upon PS error is to
be set up.
(8) Print functions
Function Content PCL6/5c PS (Option)

Multiple Pamphlet Binds multiple pamphlet outputs into a single booklet. Yes Yes
Bar code font JetCAPS BarDIMM emulation Yes No
Network tandem print Two units connected via network can be used simultaneously for a printout. Yes Yes (Windows
only)
Windows Cluster Print When a Windows server breaks down, a mirror server takes over and executes the suspended Yes Yes (Windows
print job. only)
* There may be color differences between machine types
Encryption PDF/PDF/TIFF/ PDF/TIFF/JPEG file can be printed without printer driver. Yes (No for Yes
JPEG direct print 1) Printing of e-mail attachment file encrypted
2) Printing from FTP server PDF/PDF)
3) Printing from setup file on Web page
4) USB memory
E-Mail To Print Direct printing of an attached file upon receipt of the e-mail. Yes Yes
Pull print from front panel Browsing of FTP server from front panel and pull-printing of a specified file (direct printing). Yes Yes
FTP push print Performs direct print by data transfer from the client PC to the MFP server. Yes Yes
Print by file setup on Web Setting and direct printing of a file on network through Web page. Yes Yes
page [Web Submit Print]
Continuous print function The function executes multiple print jobs continuously as if they are one single job even if the Yes Yes
unit receives an end of job command, in order to support print from the application assuming
printout on continuous pages.
ROPM The function enables the printout of a multiple number of copies in one RIP processing. Yes Yes
Multi-access RIP processing must be allowed during printing. Printing must also be allowed during scanning. Yes Yes
Paper direction setting for Pages with front-back attribute such letterhead or punch paper are to be printed correctly in Yes Yes
2-sided printing of front-back page order for 2-sided printing.
letterhead paper and pre-
punched paper.
Enable detection of For setting of bypass tray, even if the setup values on the main unit side do not match with Yes Yes
selected paper type in those on the driver side, the printing will be executed in the setting of the driver regardless of
bypass tray the setup values on the main unit side.
Setting environmental Print setting of each client is memorized under meta frame environment (auto print create Yes Yes
control under terminal environment). (Setup for each log-in can be skipped.)
server control
Driver delivery function PAU4.0 allows the administrator to deliver a driver to clients. Yes Yes
Form overlay The function downloads a form to the main unit beforehand, sends the contained data only, and Yes No
inserts the data into the form in the main unit for printout. (PCL5c only)
Planet Press Object Lune Corporation's Planet Press (Software to execute the mapping of forms (DL Yes Yes
beforehand) and variable data in the printer interior)
Management of password The purpose is to prevent the access even if the hidden Web page address becomes known. Yes Yes
by hidden Web page
Expansion font list In self-print of a font list, ESC command information is needed for BITMAP font. Yes Yes
(PCL5c only)
Bonjour for Macintosh This technology detects and connects peripheral equipment on the network automatically. No Yes
environment The dynamic network connection (computer, peripheral equipment and software) is possible
without user setting.
Document control print When printing, the unique pattern for prevention against unauthorized copy is embedded in Yes (Option) Yes (Option)
printing.
Object judgement (screen In the printer color mode output, object of image data (area of photograph/graphic text) is PCL6: Yes Yes
change/color change) judged. Print screen (resolution) and profile (color) are changed automatically. PCL5c: No
CMYK Simulation Choice of CMYK simulation is as follows. No Yes
1) Default
2) Custom
Default is defined depending on the destination of service simulation.
1. Japan = Japan Color
2. North America, China, Other abroad inch type = SWOP
3. Europe, Other abroad AB type = Euroscale
Custom profile can upload by Web setting. Notation of driver is Custom.
Example: Use DIC authorization profile. Use SWOP profile in Japan.
Function Content PCL6/5c PS (Option)
ICC Profile <Source Profile> Yes Yes
Choice of source profile is as follows.
1) sRGB
2) AppleRGB
3) Custom
Custom profile can upload by Web setting. (The attached ICC profile on devices is available.)
<Output Profile>
There is no user selection for output profile. Sharp provides Custom profile. Upload of profile
supported by service. The tool can be set on the Web (service setting). The concrete method of
profile making is to be considered separately.
Pantone color For Pantone color support, the profile upload can be made by Web setting. No Yes
(9) Windows driver function *1: Cannot be specified with the black and white mode.
PS: Option (Installation of the PS3 expansion kit (MX-PKX1) are *2: Cannot be used in Windows NT.
required.) *3: Can be specified only with the black and white mode.
a. Image Quality *4: Cannot be used in PCL5c.
b. Image Layout
PCL6/
Function PS
PCL5c
PCL6/
Resolution 1200x600dpi (black and white No Yes Function PS
PCL5c
only)
Paper Size A2 (Fit To Page) Yes *3 No
600x600dpi Yes Yes
A3 Wide / 12 x 18 /A3 / A4 / Yes Yes
300x300dpi Yes No A5 / B4 / B5 / 11 x 17 /
Color Mode Auto Yes Yes 8.5 x 11 / 8.5 x 14 /
Color (CMYK) 7.25 x 10.5 / 8.5 x 13 /
Monochrome (K only) 5.5 x 8.5 / 8K / 16K / DL / C5 /
ICM Method *1 OFF Yes Yes COM10 / Monarch /
System (Windows ICM). Yes *2 Yes *2 Custom Paper
Effective only when Color Orientation Portrait / Landscape Yes Yes
Options is Custom. Rotate 180 degrees On / Off Yes Yes
Printer Yes Yes N-Up Printing 1-Up / 2-Up / 4-Up / 6-Up / Yes Yes
Rendering Intent *1 When ICM Method is anything Yes Yes 8-Up / 9-Up / 16-Up
other than Custom: Default Black N-Up Border On / Off Yes Yes
Default N-Up Order [2-Up]: Yes Yes
When ICM Method is Custom: Left to Right / Right to Left
Perceptual matching [4, 6, 8, 9, 16-Up]:
Relative colorimetric Right, and Down /
Saturation matching Down, and Right
Absolute colorimetric Left, and Down /
ICC Profile Source Profile (Monitor Profile) Yes Yes Down, and Left
Selection *1 When Windows ICM is off: Fit To Page A3 Wide / 12 x 18 /A3 / A4 / Yes Yes
None A5 / B4 / B5 / 11 x 17 /
sRGB 8.5 x 11 / 8.5 x 14 /
Apple RGB 7.25 x 10.5 / 8.5 x 13 /
Custom 5.5 x 8.5 / 8K / 16K / DL / C5 /
When Windows ICM is on: COM10 /Monarch /
Monitor Profile installed in PC Custom Paper
Print Priority *1 1 bit Yes Yes Poster 2x2 Yes *3 Yes
4 bit Yes Yes 3x3 Yes *3 Yes
Contrast 0-100 Yes Yes 4x4 Yes *3 Yes
Brightness 0-100 Yes Yes Poster Dash Border On / Off Yes *3 Yes
Saturation *1 0-100 Yes Yes Poster Overlap On / Off Yes *3 Yes
Color Balance 0-100 Yes Yes Duplex 2-Sided (Book) Yes Yes
(RGB) *1 2-Sided (Tablet)
Text To Black *3 On / Off Yes Yes Pamphlet *1 2-Up Pamphlet Yes Yes
Vector To Black *3 On / Off Yes Yes Tiled Pamphlet
Toner Save (1bit On / Off Yes Yes Multiple 2-Up Pamphlet
only) Multiple Tiled Pamphlet
Screen Setting *1 Default Yes Yes Margin Shift *2 None / 10mm (0.4inch) / Yes Yes
Photo 20mm (0.8inch) /
Text & Graphic 30mm (1.2inch)
Pure Black Print *1 On / Off No Yes Zoom 25 % - 400 % Yes Yes
Black Over Print *1 On / Off No Yes X-Y Zoom No Yes
CMYK Simulation *1 On (Default/Custom) / Off No Yes Mirror Image No Mirror Image No Yes
Bitmap None Yes *4 Yes Vertical
Compression Very High Quality Horizontal
High Quality
*1: Pamphlet processing by MFP/Printer firmware.
Medium Quality
Draft *2: Margin Shift processing by MFP/Printer firmware.
Image Type Standard / Graphics / Photo / Yes Yes *3: Cannot be used in PCL5c.
CAD / Custom
Neutral Grays *1 Black Only Yes Yes
4-Color
c. Watermark / Overlay h. Job Handling
PCL6/ PCL6/
Function PS Function PS
PCL5c PCL5c
Watermark Transparent Text Yes Yes Retention Hold Only Yes Yes
Overwrite Text Yes Yes Hold After Print
Outline Text Yes Yes Sample Print
Image Stamp Yes *1 Yes Password
Overlay Create Overlay Yes Yes Document Filing Quick File Yes Yes
Main Folder
Load Overlay
Custom Folder
Delete
User Authentication Login Name Yes Yes
Query Page Overlay
Password
*1: Cannot be used in PCL5c. Job ID User Name Yes Yes
Job Name
d. Paper Control
Notify Job End On / Off Yes Yes
PCL6/ Auto Job Control On / Off Yes Yes
Function PS Review
PCL5c
Paper Selection Paper Source Yes Yes Tandem Print On / Off Yes Yes
Paper Type i. Configuration
Tray Status Yes Yes
Different Paper Cover Page Yes Yes PCL6/
Function PS
Last Page Yes Yes PCL5c
Other Page Yes Yes Auto Configuration Yes Yes
Transparency Blank / Printed Yes Yes Set Tray Status Set Paper Size Yes Yes
Inserts Set Paper Type
Tab Printing Image Shift Yes Yes Paper Type Name Display Name Yes Yes
Tab Paper Printing Yes *1 No (USER TYPE 1 - 7)
Output Tray Center Tray Yes Yes Font Substitution No Yes
Right Tray Set Tandem Print IP Address (Slave Machine) Yes Yes
Offset Tray Input Tray Options Four Trays Yes Yes
Saddle Stitch Tray Large Capacity Large Capacity Tray Yes Yes
Tray (A3W/12x18)
*1: Cannot be used in PCL5c.
Large Capacity Tray
e. Finishing (A4/8.5x11)
Output Tray None Yes Yes
PCL6/ Options Finisher
Function PS
PCL5c Saddle Stitch Finisher
Staple None Yes Yes Punch Module None / 2 Holes / 3 Holes / Yes Yes
1-Staple 4 Holes / 4 Holes (Wide)
2-Staples Right Tray On / Off Yes Yes
Punch Yes Yes Yes
No
(10) Windows PPD, Macintosh driver functions
Binding Edge Top Yes Yes a. Image Quality
Left
Right Macintosh PPD
No Offset On / Off Yes Yes Windows Mac Mac Mac
Function
PPD OS9 OSX OSX
f. Copies
10.1 10.2/3
PCL6/ Resolution 600x600 dpi Yes Yes Yes Yes
Function PS
PCL5c Color Mode Auto Yes Yes Yes Yes
Copies *1 1-999 Yes Yes Color(CMYK)
Collate On / Off Yes Yes Monochrome(K only)
Carbon Copy Top Copy Yes Yes ICM Method OFF Yes Yes No Yes
Carbon Copy ColorSync *1 System Yes *2 Yes No Yes
*3
*1: Copy processing by MFP/Printer firmware
Printer Yes Yes Yes Yes
g. Object Control Rendering [Mac OS] Yes Yes Yes Yes
Intent *1 Perceptual matching
PCL6/ Relative colorimetric
Function PS
PCL5c Saturation matching
Font Source Resident Font Yes Yes Absolute colorimetric
Download Font [Windows]
Download Font TrueType(Type 42) Yes Yes Graphics
Type Bitmap(Type 3) Yes Yes Pictures
Proof
Adobe(Type 1) No Yes
Match
As Graphics Yes No
ICC Profile Source Profile Yes Yes No Yes
Graphics Mode Vector Yes No
Selection *1 (Monitor Profile) *3
Raster
sRGB
PS Pass Through On / Off No Yes Apple RGB
PS Error Printing On / Off No Yes Custom
Job Compression None / Fastest / Fast / No Yes Print Priority 1 bit Yes Yes Yes Yes
Medium / Best Compression 4 bit Yes Yes Yes Yes
Brightness *4 0-100 No No No Yes
Saturation *4 0-100 No No No Yes
Macintosh PPD c. Watermark
Windows Mac Mac Mac
Function Macintosh PPD
PPD OS9 OSX OSX
10.1 10.2/3 Windows Mac Mac Mac
Function
PPD OS9 OSX OSX
Toner Save On / Off Yes Yes Yes Yes
(1bit only) 10.1 10.2/3
Screen Setting Default Yes Yes Yes Yes Transparent Text Yes Yes Yes Yes
Photo Overwrite Text Yes Yes Yes Yes
Text & Graphic Outline Text Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pure Black On / Off Yes Yes Yes Yes * Specification depending on OS.
Print
Black Over On / Off Yes Yes Yes Yes d. Paper Control
Print
Macintosh PPD
CMYK Off Yes Yes Yes Yes
Windows Mac Mac Mac
Simulation Default Function
PPD OS9 OSX OSX
Custom
10.1 10.2/3
Image Type Standard / Graphic / Yes Yes Yes Yes
Photo / CAD / Custom Paper Auto Select Yes Yes Yes Yes
Selection Paper Source
Neutral Grays Black Only Yes Yes Yes Yes
Paper Type
4-Color
Different Paper Cover Page No Yes Yes Yes
*1: Specification depending on OS.
Transparency Blank / Printed Yes Yes Yes Yes
*2: Cannot be used in Windows NT. Inserts
*3: Can be used in MacOSX 10.3. Output Tray Center Tray Yes Yes Yes Yes
Right Tray
*4: Some OS may not allow one-number-to-next specification for
Offset Tray
setup values.
Saddle Stitch Tray
b. Image Layout e. Finishing
Macintosh PPD Macintosh PPD
Windows Mac Mac Mac
Function Windows Mac Mac Mac
PPD OS9 OSX OSX Function
PPD OS9 OSX OSX
10.1 10.2/3 10.1 10.2/3
Paper Size A3 Wide / 12 x 18 / A3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Staple None Yes Yes Yes Yes
Setting *1 / A4 / A5 / B4 / B5 / 1-Staple
11 x 17 / 8.5 x 11 / 2-Staples
8.5 x 14 / 7.25 x 10.5 /
Punch Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5 x 13 / 5.5 x 8.5 /
No
8K / 16K / DL / C5 /
Binding Edge Top No Yes No Yes
COM10 / Monarch /
Left
Custom Paper
Right
Orientation Portrait Yes Yes Yes Yes
No Offset On / Off Yes Yes Yes Yes
Landscape
Rotate 180 On / Off Yes Yes No Yes f. Copies
degrees
(Landscape Macintosh PPD
only) Windows Mac Mac Mac
Function
N-Up Printing 1-Up / 2-Up / 4-Up / Yes *3 Yes Yes Yes PPD OS9 OSX OSX
*2 6-Up / 9-Up / 16-Up *4 10.1 10.2/3
Black N-Up On / Off No Yes Yes Yes Copies *1 1-999 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Border *2 Collate On / Off Yes Yes Yes Yes
N-Up Order *2 [2-Up]: Yes Yes Yes Yes *1: Specification depending on OS.
Left to Right
Right to Left g. Object Control
[4, 6, 8, 9, 16-Up]:
Right, and Down Macintosh PPD
Down, and Right Windows Mac Mac Mac
Function
Left, and Down PPD OS9 OSX OSX
Down, and Left 10.1 10.2/3
Duplex 2-Sided (Long) Yes Yes Yes Yes Download Font Type *1 Yes Yes No No
2-Sided (Short) PS Error On / Off Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pamphlet *5 Tiled Pamphlet Yes Yes Yes Yes Printing
Multiple Tiled
*1: Specification depending on OS.
Pamphlet
Margin Shift None / 10mm / 20mm / Yes Yes Yes Yes h. Job Handling
30mm
Zoom 25 % - 400 % Yes Yes Yes Yes Macintosh PPD
Mirror *2 None Yes Yes No No Windows Mac Mac Mac
Function
Vertical PPD OS9 OSX OSX
Horizontal 10.1 10.2/3
Retention Hold Only No Yes No Yes
*1: Some OS may not support a custom size setting.
Hold After Print
*2: Specification depending on OS. Sample Print
*3: Cannot be used in Windows NT. Pass Code
Document Quick File No No No Yes
*4: Windows 9x: 1-Up / 2-Up / 4-Up.
Filing Main Folder
*5: Pamphlet processing by MFP/Printer firmware. Custom Folder
Macintosh PPD G. Safety and environmental protection
Function
Windows Mac Mac Mac standards
PPD OS9 OSX OSX
10.1 10.2/3 (1) Safety standards
User Login Name No No No Yes
Authentication Password 100V type 200V type
Job ID User Name No No No Yes Safety UL60950, 21CFR (Laser) EN60950-1
Job Name standard CSA C22.2 No.60950 IEC60825 (Laser)
Tandem Print On / Off No No No Yes CNS14336 (Taiwan) GB4943 (China)
EMC VCCI Class A EN55022 Class A
i. Configuration
FCC Class Part 15 Class A CISPR22 Class A
ICES-003 Class A (SABS: Class B)
Macintosh PPD
(Canada) EN61000-3-2
Windows Mac Mac Mac
Function CNS 13438 Class B EN61000-3-3
PPD OS9 OSX OSX (Taiwan) EN55024
10.1 10.2/3 AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class A
Auto Configuration No Yes No Yes (Australia)
*1 GB9254, GB17625.1, GB/
Set Tandem IP Address No No No Yes T17618 Class A (China)
Print (Slave Machine) Line FCC part 68 TS 103 021, EG 201 120,
Input Tray Four Trays Yes Yes No Yes standard ICCS-03 EG 201 121 (Europe)
Options (for Fax PSTN01 (Taiwan) AS/ACIF S002 (Australia)
Large Capacity Large Capacity Tray Yes Yes No Yes expansion) GB/T 3382.1-2003,
Tray (A3W/12x18) GB/T 3382.2-2003,
Large Capacity Tray YD/T 514-1998,
(A4/8.5x11) YD/T 589-1996,
Output Tray None Yes Yes No Yes YD/T 703-1993,
Options Finisher YD/T 965-1998,
Saddle Stitch Finisher YD/T 993-1998 (China)
Punch Module None / 2 Holes / Yes Yes No Yes (2) Environmental Readiness
3 Holes / 4 Holes /
4 Holes(Wide) International Energy Star Program MFP (EPA)
Right Tray On / Off Yes Yes No Yes The Eco Mark Program
*1: Can be used in MacOSX 10.3. Environmental Choice Program (ECP)
New Blue Angel
F. Document filing function
Nordic Swan
(1) Basic function European ROHS regulations
Chinese ROHS
Capacity for document Main folder 30GB
filing Custom folder WEEE
Quick file 10GB Taiwan green mark
folder
Pages or files for
allowed for filing
Main folder
Custom folder
4,200 pages or 3,000 files
(SHARP standard document)
3. Ambient conditions
Quick file 1,400 pages or 1,000 files A. Environmental conditions for use of the main
folder (SHARP standard document)
Maximum number of Maximum of 500 folders
unit
user folder Temperature: 10qC to 35qC, Humidity: 20 to 85%RH
Number of users Depends on the number of user registrations. Air pressure: 590 to 1013hPa (height: 0 to 2000m)
allowed for registration (Maximum of 1000 users)
(2) Data saving for each function (Humidity)
85%
Quick File Folder Main/Custom Folder
Job Shared Confidential Shared Confidential 60%
storage storage storage storage
Copy Yes No Yes Yes
Printer Yes Yes Yes
Direct print (FTP) Yes No No
20%
Direct print (e-mail) Yes Yes No
Direct print (Web) Yes No No
Scan to e-mail/FTP Yes Yes No
Scan to SMB Yes Yes No (Temperature)
Scan to USB No No No
memory
Fax reception No No No
Fax transmission Yes Yes No
Internet Fax No No No
reception
Internet Fax Yes Yes No
transmission
PC-Fax/PC-Internet Yes Yes Yes
Fax transmisson
Scan to HDD No Yes Yes
B. Environmental conditions for transit of the
main unit
20qC to 45qC (No condensation)
(Humidity)
90%
60%
20%
(Temperature)
C. Standard environmental conditions for

supplies
Valid use period under the environmental conditions of use
1) Photoconductor drum kit
36 months from the production month
2) Photoconductor drum unit
3) Toner (K)/Color toner (C/M/Y)
D. Environmental conditions for use of supplies

(Humidity)
85%
60%
20%
(Temperature)
E. Environmental conditions for transit of

supplied
F. Environmental conditions for store of supplies

(sealed)
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
MX-7000N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Supply system table

A. USA/Canada/South and Central America
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) with IC chip x1 42K *1 MX-70NTBA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
2 Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) with IC chip x1 32K *1 MX-70NTCA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
3 Toner cartridge (Magenta) Toner cartridge (Magenta) with IC x1 32K *1 MX-70NTMA Life: A4/Letter size at area
chip coverage 5%
4 Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) with IC chip x1 32K *1 MX-70NTYA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 300K MX-70NVBA
6 Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x1 100K MX-70NVSA
7 Drum (Black) I80mm OPC drum x1 300K MX-70NRBA
8 Drum (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) I30mm OPC drum x1 100K (Color) MX-27NRSA
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
B. Europe/East Europe/Russia/Australia/New Zealand

1 Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) with IC chip x1 42K *1 MX-70GTBA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
2 Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) with IC chip x1 32K *1 MX-70GTCA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
3 Toner cartridge (Magenta) Toner cartridge (Magenta) with IC x1 32K *1 MX-70GTMA Life: A4/Letter size at area
chip coverage 5%
4 Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) with IC chip x1 32K *1 MX-70GTYA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 300K MX-70GVBA
6 Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x1 100K MX-70GVSA
7 Drum (Black) I80mm OPC drum x1 300K MX-70GRBA
8 Drum (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) I30mm OPC drum x1 100K (Color) MX-27GRSA
C. Asia/Hong Kong
1 Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) with IC chip x1 42K *1 MX-70ATBA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
2 Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) with IC chip x1 32K *1 MX-70ATCA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
3 Toner cartridge (Magenta) Toner cartridge (Magenta) with IC x1 32K *1 MX-70ATMA Life: A4/Letter size at area
chip coverage 5%
4 Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) with IC chip x1 32K *1 MX-70ATYA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 300K MX-70AVBA
6 Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x1 100K MX-70AVSA
7 Drum (Black) I80mm OPC drum x1 300K MX-70ARBA
8 Drum (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) I30mm OPC drum x1 100K (Color) MX-27ARSA
D. Middle East/Taiwan/Africa/Israel/Philippines
1 Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) with IC chip x1 42K *1 MX-70FTBA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
2 Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) with IC chip x1 32K *1 MX-70FTCA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
3 Toner cartridge (Magenta) Toner cartridge (Magenta) with IC x1 32K *1 MX-70FTMA Life: A4/Letter size at area
chip coverage 5%
4 Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) with IC chip x1 32K *1 MX-70FTYA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 300K MX-70FVBA
6 Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x1 100K MX-70FVSA
7 Drum (Black) I80mm OPC drum x1 300K MX-70FRBA
8 Drum (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) I30mm OPC drum x1 100K (Color) MX-27FRSA
MX-7000N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 1

E. China
1 Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) with IC chip x1 42K *1 MX-70CTBA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
2 Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) with IC chip x1 32K *1 MX-70CTCA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
3 Toner cartridge (Magenta) Toner cartridge (Magenta) with IC x1 32K *1 MX-70CTMA Life: A4/Letter size at area
chip coverage 5%
4 Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) with IC chip x1 32K *1 MX-70CTYA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 300K MX-70CVBA
6 Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x1 100K MX-70CVSA
7 Drum (Black) I80mm OPC drum x1 300K MX-70CRBA
8 Drum (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) I30mm OPC drum x1 100K (Color) MX-27CRSA
2. Maintenance parts list

A. U.S.A/Canada/South and Central America/Asia/Middle East/Agencies
1 Heat roller kit Upper separation pawl x6 300K MX-700HK
Upper thermistor sub x1
Lower heat roller unit x1
Lower separation pawl x4
Separation pawl/spring x4
Upper thermistor x1
Lower thermistor x1
2 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller unit x1 200K MX-700UH
3 Primary transfer kit Intermediate transfer belt x1 300K MX-700Y1
Primary transfer blade x1
PS paper dust removal unit x1
Primary transfer roller x4
Belt drive gear x1
Charger wire PTC x1
Charger cleaner x1
Charger cleaner B x1
4 Secondary transfer kit Secondary transfer belt x1 300K MX-700Y2
Secondary transfer roller x1
Secondary transfer idle gear x1
5 Filter kit Ozone filter x2 300K MX-700FL For North America/South
Paper exit filter x1 and Central America
Toner filter (Main unit) x1
6 Filter kit Ozone filter x2 300K MX-700FLN For Asia/Agencies
7 Web cleaning kit Web unit x1 200K MX-700WC
8 External heating unit External heating unit x1 300K MX-700EF
9 Waste toner box kit Waste toner box unit x1 100K MX-700HB Each color 5% coverage,
color ratios 30%
10 DV seal kit DV seal x1 300K MX-700DL
(For monochrome) DV side seal F/R x1
Toner filter x1
11 DV seal kit DV seal x3 100K MX-270DS
(For color) DV side seal F/R x3
Toner filter x3
12 Main charger kit Main charger unit x1 300K MX-700MC
(For monochrome) Drum cleaning blade x1
Sub blade x1
13 Main charger kit Main charger unit x1 100K MX-700MK
(For color) Drum cleaning blade x1
Toner stirring sheet x1
14 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 times x 3 AR-SC2 For staple section
15 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 2000 times x 3 AR-SC3 For saddle section
16 Primary transfer belt unit Primary transfer belt unit (For service rotation) x1 MX-700U1 Product for service rotation
17 Secondary transfer belt unit Secondary transfer belt unit (For service rotation) x1 MX-700U2 Product for service rotation
18 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service rotation) (Heater lamp 120V) x1 MX-700FU1 Product for service rotation
Fusing unit (For service rotation) (Heater lamp 230V) x1 MX-700FU Product for service rotation

B. Europe/UK/Australia/New Zealand
2 Upper thermistor kit Upper separation pawl x6 300K MX-700UR
Upper thermistor x1
3 Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller unit x1 300K MX-700LH
Lower thermistor x1
4 Primary transfer belt kit Intermediate transfer belt x1 300K MX-700B1
PS paper dust removal cleaner x1
Charger wire PTC x1
Charger cleaner x1
5 Primary transfer roller kit Primary transfer roller x4 300K MX-700X1
Belt drive gear x1
6 Secondary transfer belt kit Secondary transfer belt x1 300K MX-270B2
7 Secondary transfer roller kit Secondary transfer roller x1 300K MX-700X2
8 Filter kit Ozone filter x2 300K MX-700FL For Europe/Oceania
Paper exit filter x1
color ratios 30%
Toner filter x1
Toner filter x3
Sub blade x1
20 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service rotation) (Heater lamp 230V) x1 MX-700FU Product for service rotation
Fusing unit (For service rotation) (Heater lamp 100V) x1 MX-700FU2 Product for service rotation

C. Hong Kong
1 Heat roller kit Upper separation pawl x6 300K MX-700HK
Lower heat roller unit x1
Upper thermistor x1
Lower thermistor x1
3 Primary transfer kit Intermediate transfer belt x1 300K MX-700Y1
PS paper dust removal unit x1
Primary transfer roller x4
Belt drive gear x1
Charger wire PTC x1
Charger cleaner x1
4 Secondary transfer kit Secondary transfer belt x1 300K MX-700Y2
Secondary transfer roller x1
5 Filter kit Ozone filter x2 300K MX-700FLN For Asia/Agencies
color ratios 30%
Toner filter x1
Toner filter x3
Sub blade x1
17 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service rotation) (Heater lamp 230V) x1 MX-700FU Product for service rotation

3. Production number identification 5/6: Number
Indicates the production day.
A. Photoconductor drum
7: Number or X, Y, or Z
(1) Photoconductor drum (black) Indicates the packing month.
X means October, Y November, and Z December.
8/9: Number
Indicates the packing day.
10: Alphabet
Production place code.
B. Developer
BK
C. M .Y
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
The lot number is in 10 digits. Each digit indicates the following

content.
This number is printed on the inside wall of the tube.
1: Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 for this mode.
2: Alphabet The lot number is in 8 digits, and each digit indicates the following
Indicates the model code. It is C for this model. content.
3: Number This number is printed on the right lower section of the back sur-
Indicates the end digit of the production year. face of the developer bag.
4: Number or X, Y, or Z 1: Alphabet
Indicates the production month. Indicates the production factory.
X means October, Y November, and Z December. 2: Number
5/6: Number Indicates the production year.
Indicates the production day. 3/4: Number
7: Number or X, Y, or Z Indicates the production month.
Indicates the packing month. 5/6: Number
X means October, Y November, and Z December. Indicates the production day.
8/9: Number 7: Hyphen
Indicates the packing day. 8: Number
10: Alphabet Indicates the production lot.
Production place code. C. Toner cartridge
(2) Photoconductor drum (color) The label with the management number on it is attached to the side
of the toner cartridge.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Part name
The lot number is in 10 digits. Each digit indicates the following
content. A1MX70JTBA
This number is printed on the flange in the front side. Destination
1: Number
Toner color BK 19
2 for this mode. Production site H 20060307
2: Alphabet
Indicates the model code. H for this model.
00974 B Production year, month, day
Version
3: Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year. Serial production number
4: Number or X, Y, or Z
(Example) Produced on March 7th, 2006, 974th item.
Indicates the production month.
X means October, Y November, and Z December.

4. The indication of remaining toner amount and the status of toner cartridge
A. Black toner
(1) Change in the indication of remaining toner amount in case Bk1 is used first and Bk2 remains full.
Indication of remaining toner amount Message

Definition
1st (Bk1) 2nd (Bk2) Pop-up message UI
100-75% 100-75%
75-50% 100-75%
50-25% 100-75%
Close to Near End 25-0% 100-75% Toner supply is low. (Bk1) Ready to scan for copy.
Toner supply is low. (Bk1)
Near End 0% 100-75% Change the toner cartridge. (Bk1) Ready to scan for copy.
Change the toner cartridge. (Bk1)
* The above chart shows the toner amount in case an originally packaged black toner cartridge is inserted into Bk1. (It can be inserted into
Bk2.)
(2) Changes in the indication of remaining toner amount in case Bk1 is depleted and Bk2 is in use.
Indication of remaining toner amount Message

Definition
1st (Bk1) 2nd (Bk2) Pop-up message UI
0% 100-75% Change the toner cartridge. (Bk1) Ready to scan for copy.
Close to Near End 0% 25-0% Toner supply is low. (Bk2) Ready to scan for copy.
Change the toner cartridge. (Bk1) Change the toner cartridge. (Bk1)
Toner End 0% 0% Change the toner cartridge. (Bk1)
B. Color Toner
Message
Definition Indication of remaining toner amount
Pop-up message UI
100-75%
75-50%
50-25%
Close to Near End 25-0% Toner supply is low. () Ready to scan for copy.
Toner supply is low. ()
Near End 0% Change the toner cartridge. () Ready to scan for copy.
Change the toner cartridge. ()
Toner End 0% Change the toner cartridge. ()
* The icon for applicable color toner (Y/M/C) will go to ( ) in the table above.

[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
MX-7000N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Identification of each section and functions

A. External view
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
When a finisher /
saddle stitch finisher
is not installed
When a finisher
is installed
11 12 13 14 15 16
No. Name Function/Operation Remark

1 Finisher / saddle stitch finisher This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch finisher can automatically staple Option
output at the center line and fold the pages to create a pamphlet.
2 Punch module This is used to punch holes in output. Option
3 Inserter Paper loaded in the inserter can be inserted into output from the machine as covers and Option
inserts.
4 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of 2-sided originals
can be automatically scanned.
5 Upper front cover Open this to replace a toner cartridge or clear a paper misfeed from the paper pass unit. When a paper pass
unit (option) installed.
6 Front cover (lower) Open this to switch the main power on and off.
7 Operation panel This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.
8 Right Tray Output can be delivered to this tray.
9 Output tray (center tray) Output is delivered to this tray.
10 Toner cover Open this to replace a toner cartridge.
11 Tray 1 (left side) This holds paper. Up to 1200 sheets of paper can be loaded.
12 Tray 2 (right side) This holds paper. Up to 800 sheets of paper can be loaded.
13 Tray 3 This holds paper. Transparency film, tab paper, and other special media can also be
loaded. Up to 500 sheets of paper can be loaded.
14 Tray 4 This holds paper. Up to 500 sheets of paper can be loaded.
15 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray This holds paper. 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 paper can be loaded. Up to 3500 sheets of paper Option
(MX-LCX2) is installed) can be loaded.
16 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray This holds paper. 8-1/2" x 11" to 12" x 18" (B5 to A3W) paper can be loaded. Up to 3000 Option
(MX-LCX3) is installed) sheets of paper can be loaded.
MX-7000N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 1

B. Internal structure
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
When a finisher /
saddle stitch finisher
is not installed
8 9 10 11
No. Name Function/Operation Remark

1 Paper pass unit This transfers output to the finisher or saddle stitch finisher. Option
2 Toner cartridges These contain toner for printing. When the toner runs out in a
cartridge, the cartridge of the color that ran out must be
replaced.
3 Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the The fusing unit is hot. Take care not to burn
paper. yourself when removing a paper misfeed.
4 Transfer belt During full color printing, the toner images of each of the four Do not touch or damage the transfer belt. This
colors on each of the photoconductive drums are combined may cause a defective image.
together on the transfer belt.
During black and white printing, only the black toner image is
transferred onto the transfer belt.
5 Right side cover Open this cover to operate the fusing unit pressure adjusting
lever and to remove a misfeed.
6 Paper reversing section cover This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this
cover to remove a paper misfeed.
7 Bypass tray Use this tray to feed paper manually.
When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11"R or A4R, be sure
to pull out the bypass tray extension.
8 Main power switch This is used to power on the machine.
When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in
the "on" position.
9 Waste toner box This collects excess toner that remains after printing. Your service technician will collect the waste
toner box.
10 Waste toner box compartment cover Open this to remove a paper misfeed from trays 1 to 4, or to
replace the waste toner box.
11 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open
the right side cover.

C. Auto document feeder and document cover
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
No. Name Function/Operation

1 Document feeding area cover Open to remove a misfeed original.
2 Original guides These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly. Adjust the guides to the width of the original.
3 Document feeder tray Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.
4 Original exit tray Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
5 Scanning area Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.
6 Original size detector This detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
7 Document glass Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder.
D. Connectors
1
2
3
4

1 USB connector (A type) This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
2 USB connector (B type) A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine as a printer.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
3 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network.
For the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
4 Service-only connector Important note for service technicians:
The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 118" (3 m) in length.
5 Power plug

E. Operation panel
1 2 3 4 5
HOME
SYSTEM
SETTINGS
READY
PRINT
DATA
LINE
IMAGE SEND
DATA
JOB STATUS LOGOUT
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display.
Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations.
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you perform
an operation.
2 [HOME] key Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to enable
quick and easy operation of the machine.
3 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings are used to configure paper tray
settings, store addresses for transmission operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use.
4 Numeric keys These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical values.
5 [CLEAR] key Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
6 PRINT mode indicators READY indicator
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
DATA indicator
This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place.
7 IMAGE SEND mode indicators LINE indicator
This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of an image
in scan mode.
DATA indicator
This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such as out of paper. This
lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent.
8 [JOB STATUS] key Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and to cancel
jobs.
9 [LOGOUT] key Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When using the fax function, this key can also
be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial line.
10 [#/P] key When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using the fax function, this key can be used
when dialing.
11 [CLEAR ALL] key Press this key to return to the initial operation state.
Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have been selected and start operation from the initial state.
12 [STOP] key Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original.
13 [BLACK & WHITE START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original in black and white. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode.
14 [COLOR START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original in color.
This key cannot be used for fax or Internet fax.
15 [POWER SAVE] key / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy.
The [POWER SAVE] key blinks when the machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
16 [POWER] key Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
17 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.

F. Print and send status (Job status)
"Complete"
job screen
1 Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax
Job Queue Sets / Progress Status Spool Spool

1 Copy 020 / 001 Copying
2 Job Queue 3 Job Queue
2 Copy 002 / 000 Paper Empty 1 Complete Complete
1
3 Computer01 002 / 000 Waiting 4
4 0312345678 001 / 000 Waiting
5
Detail 6 Detail
Priority
7
Stop/Delete 8 Call 9

1 Mode select tabs Use these tabs to select print mode, scan mode, fax mode, or Internet fax mode.
The [Print Job] tab shows copy, print, received fax, received Internet fax, and self print jobs.
The [Scan to] tab shows transmission jobs that use the scanner function.
The [Fax Job] tab shows transmission (and reception) jobs that use the fax and PC-Fax functions.
The [Internet Fax] tab shows transmission (and reception) jobs that use the Internet fax and PC Internet Fax functions.
2 Job list This shows jobs that are reserved and in progress (job queue), and jobs that have been completed.
When the [Print Job] tab is touched in the mode select tabs, the job status screen selector key changes and the
"Spool" list appears.
A brief description of each job and its status appears in the list.
The "Spool" screen shows spooled print jobs and encrypted PDF jobs waiting for password entry. To move an
encrypted PDF job from the spool list to the job queue, touch the key of the job and enter the job password.
3 Job status screen selector key This switches the job list display between spooled jobs, the job queue, and completed jobs.
"Spool": This shows spooled print jobs and encrypted PDF jobs waiting for password entry. "Spool" appears when print
jobs are displayed.
"Job Queue": This shows reserved jobs and the job in progress.
"Complete": This shows completed jobs.
4 "Paper Empty" display Add paper.
When the status is "Paper Empty", the specified size of paper for the job is not loaded in any of the trays. In this case, the
job will be held until the required size of paper is loaded. Other jobs that are waiting will be printed (if possible) ahead of
the held job. (However, other jobs will not be printed if the paper ran out while printing was in progress.)
If you need to change the paper size because the specified paper size is not available, touch the key of the job in the job
list (2) to select it, touch the [Detail] key described in (6), and select a different paper size.
5 [p] [n] keys These change the page of the displayed job list.
6 [Detail] key This shows detailed information on a selected job.
When a job has been stored using Quick File or File in document filing mode, or when a broadcast transmission has
been performed in image send mode, the job appears as a key in the completed jobs screen. You can touch the [Detail]
key to show details on the completed job, and you can also touch the [Call] key to reprint or resend the job.
7 [Priority] key A reserved job in the "Job Queue" screen can be printed ahead of all other reserved jobs by selecting the job and then
touching this key.
In the print job queue, select the print or copy job to which you wish to give priority and touch this key. The job in progress
stops and printing of the selected job begins. When the selected job is completed, the interrupted job resumes.
8 [Stop/Delete] key Use this key to cancel the job currently in progress or a selected reserved job. Note that printing of received faxes and
received Internet faxes cannot be canceled.
9 [Call] key A job that appears in the completed jobs screen as a key can be touched followed by the [Call] key to reprint or resend
the job. This is the same [Call] key that appears when the [Detail] key is touched.

G. Sensors
SCOV
SPED1
SPPD1
SPRDMD STUD SPLS2
SPPD2 SPLS1
STLD
SPWS
SPED2
SPPD3 SPPD5
SOCD SPOD
SPPD4 SLCOV
OCSW
MHPS
PO_TMP TFD_R
TFD POD2
POD3
POD1
APPD1
WEB_INL
HTCS_Y HTCS_M HTCS_C WEB_END

DSW_ADU
PCS_CL/
PCS_K/
TBLTC REG_F/
REG_R
TBLTB
HTCS_K
DHPD_Y DHPD_M PTCM_HP THPS
DHPD_C DHPD_K PPD2 APPD2
TCS_Y TCS_M TCS_C MPED
CCHP MPLD1
MTOP2
TCS_K CCMD PPD1 MPFD
TH2 MPWS MTOP1
TH1 HUD_M/
T1PPD2 TH_M
T1PPD1 LPPD
T2PPD
T1LUD/T1PED DSW_D
T2LUD/T2PED
VTOD
T1SPD
T2SPD
TANSET
T2
C3LUD C3PFD
C3PED
C3SS1 C3SS2
C3SPD
C3SS3 C3SS4
C3PWD TBBOX
C4LUD C4PFD
C4SS1 C4PED
C4SS2
C4SS3 C4SS4
C4SPD
TNFD
Signal
Name Type Function/Operation Active condition Note
name
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Photo interrupter Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream
paper pass.
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Photo interrupter Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream
paper pass.
C3LUD Tray 3 upper limit detection Photo interrupter Tray 3 upper limit detection
(Lift HP detection)
C3PED Tray 3 paper empty detection Photo interrupter Tray 3 paper empty detection
C3PFD Tray 3 paper entry detection Reflection type Tray 3 paper pass detection
C3PWD Tray 3 width detection Volume resistor Tray 3 paper width detection
C3SPD Tray 3 remaining quantity Photo interrupter Tray 3 paper remaining quantity
detection detection
C3SS1 Tray 3 rear edge detection 1 Tact switch Either of rear edge 1 - 4 of tray 3 is PWB unit
C3SS2 Tray 3 rear edge detection 2 Tact switch detected to detect tray insertion.
C3SS3 Tray 3 rear edge detection 3 Tact switch The paper size of tray 3 is detected.
C3SS4 Tray 3 rear edge detection 4 Tact switch

Signal
name
C4LUD Tray 4 upper limit detection (Lift Photo interrupter Tray 4 upper limit detection
HP detection)
C4PED Tray 4 paper empty detection Photo interrupter Tray 4 paper empty detection
C4PFD Tray 4 paper entry detection Reflection type Tray 4 paper pass detection
C4SPD Tray 4 remaining quantity Photo interrupter Tray 4 paper remaining quantity
detection detection
C4SS1 Tray 4 rear edge detection 1 Tact switch Either of rear edge 1 - 4 of tray 4 is PWB unit
C4SS2 Tray 4 rear edge detection 2 Tact switch detected to detect tray insertion.
C4SS3 Tray 4 rear edge detection 3 Tact switch The paper size of tray 4 is detected.
C4SS4 Tray 4 rear edge detection 4 Tact switch
CCHP Charger cleaner HP detection Photo interrupter Charger cleaner position detection (in
the process unit)
CCMD CCM rotation detection Photo interrupter Detects rotation of the charger
cleaner motor.
DHPD_C C phase detection Photo interrupter C phase detection PWB unit
DHPD_K K phase detection Photo interrupter K phase detection PWB unit
DHPD_M M phase detection Photo interrupter M phase detection PWB unit
DHPD_Y Y phase detection Photo interrupter Y phase detection PWB unit
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close Photo interrupter Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/
detection close.
DSW_D Right lower door open/close Photo interrupter Detects open/close of the right lower
sensor door.
HTCS_C Hopper remaining quantity sensor Vibration sensor
C
HTCS_K Hopper remaining quantity sensor Vibration sensor
K
HTCS_M Hopper remaining quantity sensor Vibration sensor
M
HTCS_Y Hopper remaining quantity sensor Vibration sensor
Y
HUD_M/ Temperature/humidity sensor Temperature/ Detects temperature and humidity.
TH_M humidity sensor
LPPD LCC paper entry sensor Reflection type Detects paper entry from LCC.
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Photo interrupter Detects the scanner home position.
MPED Manual paper feed paper empty Photo interrupter Detects the manual paper feed paper
detection empty.
MPFD Manual paper feed paper entry Photo interrupter Manual paper feed tray paper entry
detection detection
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detector Photo interrupter Detects the manual paper feed tray
paper length.
MPWS Manual paper feed tray paper Volume resistor Detects the manual paper feed tray PWB unit
width detector paper width.
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out Photo interrupter Detects the manual paper feed tray
position detector 1 paper pull-out position (storing
position).
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out Photo interrupter Detects the manual paper feed tray
position detector 2 paper pull-out position (pull-out
position).
OCSW Original cover SW Photo interrupter Document size detection trigger.
PCS_CL/ Process control sensor PWB Toner density Toner patch density detection
PCS_K sensor
PO_TMP Paper exit temperature detection Temperature Detects temperature.
sensor
POD1 Fusing after-detection Photo interrupter Detects paper from the fusing section.
POD2 Paper exit detection Photo interrupter Detects the paper from paper exit.
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Photo interrupter Detects the paper exit to right tray.
PPD1 Registration pre-detection (PPD1) Photo interrupter Detects paper in front of the resist
roller.
PPD2 Registration detection (PPD2) Reflection type Detects paper in front of the resist
roller.
PTCM_HP Sensor inside of the PTC unit Leaf switch Detects PTC cleaner HP
REG R Resist sensor PWB R Reflection type Detects toner patch (R side) PWB unit
REG_F Resist sensor PWB F Reflection type Detects toner patch (F side) PWB unit
SCOV DSPF upper door open/close Transmission type Detects open/close of the upper door. L when the upper door is open.
sensor
SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close Micro switch Detects open/close of the lower door. L when the lower door is open.
sensor
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the DSPF unit. L when the DSPF unit is open.
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit Transmission type Detects the upper limit of the DSPF L when paper is detected.
sensor document.
SPED2 DSPF document empty sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the paper L when paper is detected.
feed tray.

Signal
name
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection Transmission type Detects the document length of the H when paper is detected.
short sensor paper feed tray upper.
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection Transmission type Detects the document length of the H when paper is detected.
long sensor paper feed tray upper.
SPOD DSPF paper exit sensor Transmission type Detects paper exit of the document. L when paper is detected.
SPPD1 DSPF paper pass sensor 1 Transmission type Detects pass of the paper. L when paper is detected.
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor Transmission type Detects the paper size in random L when paper is detected.
paper feed.
SPWS DSPF document width sensor Volume resistor Detects the document width of the
paper feed tray upper.
STLD DSPF paper feed tray lower limit Transmission type Detects the lower limit of the paper H when the lower limit of the
sensor feed tray. paper feed tray is detected.
STUD DSPF paper feed tray upper limit Transmission type Detects the upper limit of the paper L when the upper limit of the
sensor feed tray. paper feed tray is detected.
T1LUD/ Tandem tray 1 sensor Photo interrupter Tandem tray 1 lift-up and paper
T1PED presence detection
T1PPD1 Tandem tray 1 transport sensor 1 Reflection type Tandem tray 1 paper entry detection Immediately
after T1
paper feed
T1PPD2 Tandem tray 1 transport sensor 1 Reflection type Detects Tandem tray 1 paper pass at Immediately
the transport roller. before T2
interflow
T1SPD Tandem tray 1 paper remaining Photo interrupter Tandem tray 1 paper remaining
quantity detector quantity detection
T2LUD/ Tandem tray 2 sensor Photo interrupter Tandem tray 2 lift-up and paper
T2PED presence detection
T2PPD Tandem tray 2 transport detection Reflection type Detects paper pass from tandem tray
2.
T2SPD Tandem tray 2 paper remaining Photo interrupter Tandem tray 2 paper remaining
quantity detector quantity detection
TANSET Tandem tray installation detection Photo interrupter Tandem tray insertion/removal
detection
TBBOX Waste toner box sensor Photo interrupter Waste toner box installation detection
TBLTB Transfer belt separation sensor BK Photo interrupter Transfer belt separation BK detection
TBLTC Transfer belt separation sensor CL Photo interrupter Transfer belt separation CL detection
TCS_C Toner density detection C (ATC) Permeable sensor Detects the toner density (C).
TCS_K Toner density detection K (ATC) Permeable sensor Detects the toner density (K).
TCS_M Toner density detection M (ATC) Permeable sensor Detects the toner density (M).
TCS_Y Toner density detection Y (ATC) Permeable sensor Detects the toner density (Y).
TFD Main unit paper exit full detection Photo interrupter Detects face-down paper exit tray full.
TFD_R Right tray paper exit full detection Photo interrupter Detects right tray paper exit full.
TH1 LSU thermistor 1 Temperature Detects the LSU temperature.
sensor
TH2 LSU thermistor 2 Temperature Detects the LSU temperature.
sensor
THPS Secondary transfer separation Photo interrupter Secondary transfer separation
drive sensor detection
TNFD Waste toner full detection Photo interrupter Waste toner full detection
VTOD Right transfer unit open/close Photo interrupter Detects open/close of the right
sensor transfer unit.
WEB_END Web end detection sensor Mechanical switch Detects the web end.
WEB_INL Web presence detection Mechanical switch Detects presence of web.

H. Switches
PWRSW
DSW-R
MSW
DSW-FD
DSW-FL
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

DSW-FD Front door upper open/close switch Micro switch Detects front door upper open/close.
DSW-FL Front door lower open/close switch Micro switch Detects front door lower open/close.
DSW-R Right door open/close switch Micro switch Detects right door open/close.
MSW Main SW Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the main DC power source.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Push switch Outputs the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power source.

I. Clutches and solenoids
STRC
STRRC
SRRC
SPFC STRRBC SRRBC
ADUGS
LSS_CL
BLTCL
PCSS
MPGS BLTCL_R
RRC2 LSS_BK
T1PUS
MPFS RRC T1PFC
TANCL
TRC1 T2PFC
MPUC
T2PUS
LPFC C3PUS
C4PUS C3PFC
C4PFC
TRC2
Signal
Name Type Function/Operation
name
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls the ADU gate.
BLTCL Belt separation clutch (normal) Electromagnetic clutch Controls separation of the primary transfer belt.
BLTCL_R Belt separation clutch (reverse) Electromagnetic clutch Controls separation of the primary transfer belt.
C3PFC Tray 3 paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tray 3 paper feed section.
C3PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 3) Electromagnetic solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 3)
C4PFC Tray 4 paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tray 4 paper feed section.
C4PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 4) Electromagnetic solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 4)
LPFC LCC transport clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller in the LCC transport section.
LSS_BK LSU shutter solenoid BK Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the LSU (BK) shutter.
LSS_CL LSU shutter solenoid CL Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the LSU (CL) shutter.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) Electromagnetic solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls open/close of the manual paper feed gate.
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the manual paper feed
section.
PCSS Process control shutter solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls open/close of the shutter of the process control register sensor.
RRC PS clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of resist roller.
RRC2 PS clutch 2 Electromagnetic clutch Performs braking of resist roller.
SPFC DSPF paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the rollers in the paper feed section.
SRRBC DSPF No. 2 resist roller brake clutch Electromagnetic clutch Performs braking of No. 2 resist roller.
SRRC DSPF No. 2 resist roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 2 resist roller.
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 1.
STRRBC DSPF No. 1 resist roller brake clutch Electromagnetic clutch Performs braking of No. 1 resist roller.
STRRC DSPF No. 1 resist roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 1 resist roller.
T1PFC Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tandem tray 1 paper feed
section.
T1PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1) Electromagnetic solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1)
T2PFC Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tandem tray 2 paper feed
section.
T2PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 2) Electromagnetic solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 2)
TANCL Tandem tray transport clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transfer roller in the tandem tray section.
TRC1 Vertical transport clutch upper Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the vertical transfer roller.
TRC2 Vertical transport clutch lower Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the vertical transfer roller.

J. Drive motors
SPOM SPFM
SLUM SPUM
HTM_C
TM_K2 TM_C
HTM_K HTM_M
TM_K1 TM_M
MIM
WEBM TM_Y
PTMH_1 HTM_Y
PTMH_2
POM DM_Y
FEXM
DM_M
ADUH
FUM DVCM
BTM POLYM
PTCCM DM_C
TURM DVKM
CCM
PFM
ADUL DM_K
RRM T1LUM
WTM
LCCM CPFM
T2LUM
C3LUM
C4LUM
Signal
name
ADUH ADU motor upper Stepping motor Drives the right door section.
ADUL ADU motor lower Stepping motor Drives the right door section.
BTM Transfer drive motor Stepping motor Drives the transfer belt.
C3LUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 3) Brush motor Drives the lift of the paper feed tray.
C4LUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 4) Brush motor Drives the lift of the paper feed tray.
CCM Charger cleaner motor Brush motor Cleans the main charger.
CPFM Paper feed motor DC brushless motor Drives the paper feed section.
DM_C Drum motor (C) Stepping motor Drives the cyan OPC drum unit.
DM_K Drum motor (K) Stepping motor Drives the black OPC drum unit.
DM_M Drum motor (M) Stepping motor Drives the magenta OPC drum unit.
DM_Y Drum motor (Y) Stepping motor Drives the yellow OPC drum unit.
DVCM Developing drive motor (CL) DC brushless motor Drives the developing section (CL).
DVKM Developing drive motor (K) DC brushless motor Drives the developing section (K) and the primary transfer belt separation
operation.
FEXM External variable motor Stepping motor Separates the external heating roller in the fusing unit.
FUM Fusing motor DC brushless motor Drives the fusing unit.
HTM_C Hopper motor C Synchronous motor Transports toner.
HTM_K Hopper motor K Synchronous motor Transports toner.
HTM_M Hopper motor M Synchronous motor Transports toner.
HTM_Y Hopper motor Y Synchronous motor Transports toner.
LCCM LCC transport motor Stepping motor Drives the LCC transport roller.
MIM Scanner motor Stepping motor Scanner (reading) section
PFM PS front transport motor Stepping motor Drives the transport roller.
POLYM Polygon motor DC brushless motor Scans the laser beams.
POM Paper exit motor Stepping motor Drives the paper exit roller.
PTCCM PTC cleaner motor Brush motor Cleans the PTC.
PTMH_1 Intermediate hopper motor Synchronous motor Transports toner.
PTMH_2 Stirring motor Synchronous motor Stirs toner.
RRM PS motor DC brushless motor Drives the transport roller.
SLUM DSPF lift motor PM step motor Lifts up or moves down the paper feed tray.

Signal
name
SPFM DSPF transport motor Hybrid step motor Drives the transport roller.
SPOM DSPF paper exit motor PM step motor Drives the paper exit roller.
SPUM DSPF paper feed motor Hybrid step motor Drives the rollers, transport rollers and transport rollers in the paper feed
section.
T1LUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1) Brush motor Drives the lift of the paper feed tray.
T2LUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 2) Brush motor Drives the lift of the paper feed tray.
TM_C Toner motor C Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TM_K1 Toner motor K1 Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TM_K2 Toner motor K2 Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TM_M Toner motor M Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TM_Y Toner motor Y Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TURM Secondary transfer separation drive motor Brush motor Separates the secondary transfer.
WEBM Fusing web cleaning motor Synchronous motor Drives fusing web cleaning paper.
WTM Waste toner drive motor DC brushless motor Transports waste toner.
K. Lamps
CLI
DSPF COPY
LUMP
DL_Y
DL_M
DL_C
HL_US
HL_EX HL_LM
DL_K
HL_UM

CLI Scanner lamp Xenon lamp Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
DL_C Discharge lamp (C) LED Discharges the photoconductor.
DL_K Discharge lamp (K) Sub miniatua lamp Discharges the photoconductor.
DL_M Discharge lamp (M) LED Discharges the photoconductor.
DL_Y Discharge lamp (Y) LED Discharges the photoconductor.
DSPF COPY LUMP DSPF copy lamp Xenon lamp Radiates light onto a document to allow the CCD to scan document images.
HL_EX Heater lamp external Halogen lamp Heats the external roller.
HL_LM Lower heater roller Halogen lamp Heats the lower heat roller.
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main Halogen lamp Heats the upper heat roller. (main)
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub Halogen lamp Heats the upper heat roller. (sub)

L. Fans and filters
SPFFAN
POFM_F
POFM_U
LSUFM
DTBFM
5 VFM_R
FUFM_R
4 HDDFM
CFM OZFM3
CONFM OZFM1
2
3
FCFM
OZFM2
VFM_C
PSFM

CFM Charger suction fan motor Sirocco fan Supplies air to the charging unit of the OPC drum unit (BK).
CONFM MFP cooling fan motor Axial-flow fan Cools the MFP PWB.
DTBFM Bottle cooling fan motor Sirocco fan Cools the toner bottle.
FCFM Fusing cooling fan Sirocco fan Cools the fusing unit.
FUFM_R Fusing exhaust fan Axial-flow fan Cools the fusing unit.
HDDFM HDD cooling fan motor Axial-flow fan Cools the HDD.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor Axial-flow fan Cools the polygon motor.
OZFM1 Ozone fan motor 1 Sirocco fan Exhausts ozone.
OZFM2 Ozone fan motor 2 Sirocco fan Exhausts ozone.
OZFM3 Ozone fan motor 3 (Individual control) Sirocco fan Exhausts ozone.
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) Axial-flow fan Cools the fusing unit.
POFM_U Paper exit cooling fan motor (center) Axial-flow fan Cools the fusing unit.
PSFM Power cooling fan motor Axial-flow fan Cools the power unit.
SPFFAN DSPF cooling fan motor Axial-flow fan Cools the motors and the clutches.
VFM_C Main inside ventilation fan motor (center) Axial-flow fan Discharges air from the machine.
VFM_R Machine ventilation fan motor (right) Sirocco fan Discharges air from the machine.

1 Toner filter (CL) Prevents dispersing of toner.
2 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
3 Toner filter (BK) Prevents dispersing of toner.
4 Dust filter Absorbs dusts in sucked air.
5 Paper exit filter Deodorizes odor generated in the fusing unit.

M. PWB
8 4 12
Drum
37 1
38
11
5
10 3
2
9 13
40 14 DV
15 DV (BK)
7
17
16 35
18
20
21
19
6
41 42
36
25
LSU 30
31
23 32
22
28
39
29
34 33
27 26 24
No. Name Function/Operation Note

1 DSPF CCD PWB Scans document images.
2 DSPF flash PWB Program ROM PWB for DSPF
3 DSPF control PWB Control PWB for DSPF
4 DSPF driver PWB Driver PWB for DSPF
5 DSPF CL inverter PWB Drives the copy lamp.
6 RD I/F PWB Detects each sensor in the right door unit.
7 CCD PWB Scans the document images.
8 Document detection light receiving PWB Outputs the document size detection signal.
9 Power_SW_PWB Outputs the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power source.
10 MFP OPE-JPWB Outputs the key operation signal.
11 CL inverter PWB Drives the xenon lamp.
12 Document detection light emitting PWB Emits the document size detection LED lights.
13 DSPF memory PWB Temporary storage of back surface image data
14 Scanner control PWB Controls the scanner section.
15 1TC PWB Outputs the primary transfer voltage.
16 HL PWB Controls the heater lamp.
17 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
18 DRIVER PWB Drives the motor and related sections.
19 MC PWB Generates a high voltage for the main charger and the developing bias
voltage.
20 DOCC PWB Recognizes the document control pattern.
21 Mother PWB Interfaces the MFPcnt PWB and other PWB.
22 MFP cnt PWB Controls images and the whole machine.
23 AC power source PWB Controls the power source on the primary side.
24 SUB power source PWB Supplies the power of the controller.
25 C3SS PWB The paper size of tray 3 is detected.
26 C4SS PWB The paper size of tray 4 is detected.
27 DC power source PWB Outputs the secondary side voltage.
28 2TC PWB Outputs the secondary transfer voltage.

29 LSU CNT PWB Controls the LSU.
30 LD PWB1 Controls laser lighting. (1 beam)
31 LD PWB2 Controls laser lighting. (2 beams)
32 Thermistor PWB 2 Detects the temperature in the LSU.
33 Thermistor PWB 1 Detects the temperature in the LSU.
34 BD PWB Detects the laser sync signal.
35 Drum phase detection PWB Detects the phase of each color drum.
36 Tandem sensor PWB Detects the tandem tray YES/NO and detects paper.
37 LVDS PWB Outputs the LCD display signal. MFP cnt is the source of output.
38 LCD INV PWB Drives the LCD backlight.
39 PTC PWB Outputs the pre-transfer voltage.
40 Paper exit temperature detection PWB Detects the temperature of the paper exit unit.
41 Memory PWB
42 DVK DRIVER PWB Controls the toner mixing motor.
N. Gate

1 ADU reverse gate Selects the paper route among the path to the inner tray and the path to the right tray and the path to the
duplex (ADU) section.
2 Right paper exit gate Selects the paper route between the path to the duplex (ADU) section and the path to the right tray.

O. Fuse/Thermostat
11
1
5
2
4
3
200V
21 6
20 7
18 19
17 8
16 9
15
14
13
12
10 22
23
120V 24
26
28
25
27
15
16
17
18
12
No. Signal name Name Specifications Function/Operation Section

1 TS_EX External thermostat sub Prevention against overheating of the external heat roller Fusing unit
2 TS_EX External thermostat main Prevention against overheating of the external heat roller Fusing unit
3 TS_LM Lower thermostat Prevention against overheating of the lower heat roller Fusing unit
4 TS_UM Upper thermostat main Prevention against overheating of the upper heat roller main Fusing unit
5 TS_US Upper thermostat sub Prevention against overheating of the upper heat roller sub Fusing unit
6 F1 Fuse 20A 125V AC power source PWB
7 F2 Fuse 20A 125V AC power source PWB
8 F3 Fuse T2AH250V AC power source PWB
9 F4 Fuse T2AH250V AC power source PWB
10 F1 Fuse 1.25A 250V CL inverter PWB
11 F208 Fuse 250V 6.3A DC power source PWB
20 F3 Fuse 250V 5A DC power source PWB
22 F61 Fuse 250V 2A SUB power source PWB

P. Rollers
11 13 2 40 41
7 4 5 3 1 15 16 37 38 39 42
8
9
10
12
14
43
44
45
46
47 48
49
17 50
51
18 52
53
19 54
20 55
56
21 57
22
23 58
24 59
25
26 60
61
27 62
28 63
29
30 64
65
31 66
32 67
68
33
69
34 70
35 71
72
36
73

1 Pickup roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller Performs the paper feed operation of documents.
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double-feed.
4 No. 1 resist roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport.
5 No. 1 resist roller (Idle) Applied a pressure to paper and the resist roller, and provides transport power
of the resist roller to paper.
6 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper from No. 1 resist roller to No. 2 resist roller.
7 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force
of the transport roller to paper.
8 No. 2 resist roller (Drive) Make synchronization between the lead edge of a document and the scan start
position.
9 No. 2 resist roller (Idle) Applied a pressure to paper and the resist roller, and provides transport power
of the resist roller to paper.
10 Platen roller Applies a pressure to paper to prevent against fluctuations on operation of
paper.
11 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper from the platen roller to the transport roller 3.
13 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 2 to the paper exit roller.

15 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges paper.
16 Paper exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force
of the paper exit roller to paper.
17 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports paper to the resist roller. After P5
18 Transport roller 8 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force After P5
19 Transport roller 7 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force Before P5
20 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 6 and the transport roller 13 to the Before P5
transport roller 8.
21 Transport roller 13 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 12 to the transport roller 7. Tandem 2-2
22 Transport roller 13 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force Tandem 2-2
23 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports paper from the tandem tray 2 to the transport roller 13. Tandem 2-1
24 Transport roller 12 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force Tandem 2-1
25 Paper feed roller (Tandem No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
26 Paper pickup roller (Tandem No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
27 Separation roller (Tandem No. 1 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevents against double feed.
28 Paper pickup roller (Tandem No. 2 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
29 Paper feed roller (Tandem No. 2 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
30 Separation roller (Tandem No. 2 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevents against double feed.
31 Paper feed roller (No. 3 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
32 Paper pickup roller (No. 3 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
33 Separation roller (No. 3 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevents against double feed.
34 Paper feed roller (No. 4 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
35 Paper pickup roller (No. 4 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
36 Separation roller (No. 4 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevents against double feed.
37 Paper exit roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to provide a transport force Paper exit
38 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper. /Transports paper to the right paper exit tray. / Transports Paper exit
paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
39 Transport roller 9 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force After fusing
40 Transport roller 17 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force ADU paper entry
41 Transport roller 17 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper exit roller 1 to the paper exit roller 2. / ADU paper entry
Transports paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
42 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper from the upper/lower heat roller to the paper exit roller 1. After fusing
43 Paper exit roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force Right paper exit
44 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper. Right paper exit
45 Upper heat roller Heats and presses toner on the paper to fuse paper. Fusing
46 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 17 to the transport roller 11. ADU1
47 Transport roller 10 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force ADU1
48 Lower heat roller Applies a pressure to the upper heat roller. Fusing
49 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to provide a transport force of PS
the transport roller to paper.
50 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. / Controls transport timing of paper and PS
adjust the relative relations between images and paper.
51 Transport roller 16 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force After manual feed
52 Transport roller 11 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force ADU2
53 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 16. ADU2
54 Transport roller 16 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 7. / After manual feed
Transports paper from the manual feed tray to the transport roller 7.
55 Transport roller 15 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force LCC2
56 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
57 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
58 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevents against double feed.
59 Transport roller 14 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force LCC1
60 Transport roller 14 (Drive) Transports paper from LCC to the transport roller 15. LCC1
61 Transport roller 15 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 14 to the transport roller 8. LCC2
62 Transport roller 6 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force Tandem 2,
of the transport roller to paper. Casette 3, 4
63 Transport roller 6 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 5 and the tandem tray 2 to the Tandem 2,
transport roller 7. Casette 3, 4
64 Transport roller 5 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force Cassette 3, 4-2

65 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 4 to the transport roller 6. Cassette 3, 4-2
66 Transport roller 4 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force Cassette 3, 4-1
67 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 2 and 3 to the transport roller 5. Cassette 3, 4-1
68 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 3 to the transport roller 4. Cassette 3
69 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force Cassette 3
70 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force Cassette 4-2
71 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 to the transport roller 4. Cassette 4-2
72 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 4 to the transport roller 2. Cassette 4-1
73 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force Cassette 4-1

[6] ADJUSTMENTS
MX-7000N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per- If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list

Job No. Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 1 Developing doctor gap adjustment (For color)
ADJ 2 Developing roller main pole position adjustment (For color)
ADJ 3 Developing doctor gap adjustment (For black)
ADJ 4 Developing roller main pole position adjustment (For black)
ADJ 5 Toner density control reference value setting 25-2
ADJ 6 High voltage adjustments 6A Main charger grid voltage adjustment 8-2
6B Developing bias voltage adjustment 8-1
6C Transfer voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ 7 Image density sensor, image 7A Color image density sensor calibration 44-13
registration sensor adjustment 7B Color image density sensor, black image density sensor, image registration sensor 44-2
adjustment
ADJ 8 Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit) 61-4
ADJ 9 OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment) 50-22
ADJ 10 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjustment) 50-10
ADJ 11 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section) 50-10
ADJ 12 Image registration adjustment 12A Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub scanning direction) 50-22
(Print engine section) (Auto adjustment)
12B Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 50-20
12C Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 50-21
ADJ 13 Scan image distortion adjustment 13A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
13B Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment
13C Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
13D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner)
ADJ 14 Scan image focus adjustment 14A Scan image focus adjustment (Document table mode, DSPF front surface mode) 48-1
(CCD unit position adjustment) 14B Scan image focus adjustment (DSPF back surface mode)
ADJ 15 DSPF parallelism adjustment 15A DSPF levelness adjustment
15B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode) 64-1
15C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode) 64-1
ADJ 16 Scan image magnification ratio 16A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction) 48-1
adjustment (Document table mode, (Document table mode, DSPF front surface mode)
DSPF front surface mode) 16B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning direction) 48-1
(Document table mode, DSPF front surface mode)
ADJ 17 Scan image magnification ratio 17A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction) 48-1
adjustment (DSPF back surface mode) (DSPF back surface mode)
17B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning direction) 48-1/48-5
(DSPF back surface mode)
ADJ 18 Scan image off-center adjustment 18A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode, DSPF front surface mode) 50-12
18B Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF back surface mode) 50-12
ADJ 19 Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine section) 50-10/50-1
ADJ 20 Copy image position, image loss 20A Copy image position, image loss adjustment (Document table mode) 50-1 (50-2)
adjustment 20B Original scan position adjustment 53-8
20C Copy image position, image loss adjustment (DSPF mode) 50-6 (50-7)
ADJ 21 Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode) (Print engine section) 50-5
ADJ 22 Copy color balance/density adjustment 22A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (Normal document copy mode) 63-3 (63-5)
22B CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (DSPF document copy mode) 63-3
22C Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) 46-24/44-21/
44-26
22D Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 46-21/44-21/
44-26/63-7/
63-8
22E Copy density adjustment (Each color copy mode) (Whole adjustment) 46-1
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
22F Copy density adjustment (Each monochrome copy mode) (Whole adjustment) 46-2
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
22G Copy color balance adjustment (Color balance adjustment at each density level in 46-10
each color copy mode) (Normally not required)
22H Monochrome copy density adjustment (Density adjustment at each density level in 46-16
each monochrome copy mode) (Normally not required)
MX-7000N ADJUSTMENTS 6 1
Job No. Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 22 Copy color balance/density adjustment 22I Gamma/density adjustment in the text image edge section (Normally not required) 46-27
22J Copy color balance adjustment (Single color copy mode) (Normally not required) 46-25
22K Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Copy color balance auto adjustment 26-53
ENABLE setting and adjustment)
22L Background process condition setting in the color auto copy mode 46-33
22M Color document identification level (ACS operation) setting 46-33
ADJ 23 Printer color balance/density 23A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) 67-24/44-26
adjustment 23B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 67-25/44-26/
67-27/67-28
23C Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Printer color balance auto adjustment 26-54
ADJ 24 Fusing paper guide position adjustment
ADJ 25 Document size sensor adjustment 25A Document size sensor detection point adjustment 41-1
25B Document size sensor sensitivity adjustment 41-2
ADJ 26 Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 40-2
ADJ 27 DSPF paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 53-6
ADJ 28 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
ADJ 29 Image loss, void area, image off- 29A Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment 50-28
center, image magnification ratio auto 29B Image off-center automatic adjustment 50-28
adjustment with SIM50-28 29C Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning 50-28
direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment
29D DSPF mode auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) 50-28
ADJ 30 Shading adjustment 63-2
3. Details of adjustment
3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0.40mm between 40mm 70mm
ADJ 1 Developing doctor gap from the edge of the developing doctor.
adjustment (For color)
70mm
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the developing unit is disassembled. 40mm
* When the print image density is low. 70mm
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density. 40mm
* There is abnormally much toner dispersion.
1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove
the developing unit upper cover and the developing doctor
cover.
4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten

the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw.
5) Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 40mm 70mm 6) Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing
from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and
0.40 r 0.05mm. move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the developing roller.
70mm
40mm
70mm
40mm
Repeat procedures 3) 6) until the developing roller main pole

position comes to the specified range.
7) After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller
ADJ 2 Developing roller main pole main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjust-
ment plate with the fixing screw.
position adjustment (For color)
* When the developing unit is disassembled.
ADJ 3 Developing doctor gap
* When the print image density is low. adjustment (For black)
* When there is a blur on the print image. This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When there is unevenness in the print image density. * When the developing unit is disassembled.
* There is abnormally much toner dispersion. * When the print image density is low.
1) Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the develop- * When there is a blur on the print image.
ing unit on a flat surface. * When there is unevenness in the print image density.
2) Attach a thread to a needle or a pin. * There is abnormally much toner dispersion.
3) Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing 1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because it will not provide a cor- the developing unit upper cover and the developing doctor
rect position.) cover.
4) Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the
needle with the needle at 2 3mm from the developing roller
surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.)
23mm
2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw.
5) Measure the distance between the marking position and posi-

tion A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 37.8 r
0.5mm.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the devel-
oping roller main pole position in the following procedures.
A
37.8 + 0.5mm 37.8 + 0.5mm
3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0.45mm between 40mm 70mm * When there is unevenness in the print image density.
from the edge of the developing doctor. * There is abnormally much toner dispersion.
1) Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the develop-
70mm
ing unit on a flat surface.
40mm
2) Attach a thread to a needle or a pin.
3) Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because it will not provide a cor-
70mm rect position.)
4) Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the
needle with the needle at 2 3mm from the developing roller
surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.)
40mm
23mm
4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten

the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
5) Measure the distance between the marking position and posi-

tion A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 62.1 r
0.5mm.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the devel-
oping roller main pole position in the following procedures.
62.1 + 0.5mm
5) Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 40mm 70mm

A 62.1 + 0.5mm
from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
0.45 r 0.05mm.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the developing roller.
70mm 6) Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing
40mm screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and
move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
70mm
40mm
Repeat procedures 3) 6) until the developing roller main pole

ADJ 4 Developing roller main pole position comes to the specified range.
7) After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller
position adjustment (For black) main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjust-
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases: ment plate with the fixing screw.
* When the developing unit is disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
2) Close the front cover (lower).
ADJ 5 Toner density control reference 3) Select a developing unit to be adjusted.
value setting 4) When [EXECUTE] key it pressed, it is highlighted. The devel-
oping roller rotates, and the toner sensor detects toner density,
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases: and the output value is displayed.
* When developer is replaced. The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the aver-
NOTE: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is age value of the toner density sensor detection level is set
replaced. Never execute it in the other cases. (saved) as the reference toner density control value.
1) With the front cover (lower) open, enter SIM25-2. When the reference toner density control adjustment operation
is completed, [EXECUTE] key display return, to normal from
TEST SIMULATION NO.25-02 CLOSE
highlight. This makes you know whether the adjustment opera-
AUTOMATIC DEVELOPER ADJUSTMENT
tion is completed or not.
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K : 128 AT DEVEVO_L_Y : 128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C : 128 AT DEVE VO_M_K : 128

The above operation is executed each of the lower speed
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M : 128 AT DEVE VO_M_C : 128
mode, the middle speed mode and the high speed mode, and
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y : 128 AT DEVE VO_M_M : 128 the reference toner density control value is set for each of
AT DEVE ADJ_M_K : 128 AT DEVE VO_M_Y : 128 them.
AT DEVE ADJ_M_C : 128 AT DEVE VO_H_K : 128
NOTE: If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the
AT DEVE ADJ_M_M : 128
adjustment result is not reflected (enabled).
AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y : 128
AT DEVE ADJ_H_K : 128

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the opera-
AT DEVEVO_L_K : 128 tion is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal dis-
AT DEVEVO_L_C : 128 play.
AT DEVEVO_L_M
K C M
: 128
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EG] is displayed, setting of the ref-
Y EXECUTE 1/1
erence toner density control value is not completed normally.
K
EXECUTE Error
M Error name Detail of error Remark
or process interrupt display
EXECUTE
EE-EL EL (1) The sensor output level is less When either
SIMULATION NO.25-02 CLOSE
abnormality than 0.5V in 1min after execution of (1) or (2)
TEST
of SIM25-02. is satisfied.
TCD_K : 45
(2) The sensor output level is less
TCD_C : 50
than 1.5V after the adjustment for
each speed or the control voltage
TCD_M : 50
exceeds 8.0V.
TCD_Y : 45
EE-EU EU (1) The sensor output level When either
TCV_K : 45
abnormality exceeds 4.5V in 1min after of (1) or (2)
50
TCV_C :
execution of SIM25-02. is satisfied.
50
The sensor output level exceeds
TCV_M :
TCV_Y : 50
3.45V after the adjustment for
each speed or the control voltage
is less than 2.0V.
EE-EC EC The sensor output level after the
K C M Y EXECUTE 1/1 abnormality adjustment for each speed is not
2.5V r 0.2V.
Adjustment completed
5) Use SIM24-5 to clear the developer counter.
TEST SIMULATION NO.25-02 CLOSE 6) Use SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction data.
NOTE:
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K : 185 AT DEVEVO_L_Y : 128

1) When replacing developer, always replace all the three colors
of Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan.
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y : 128 AT DEVE VO_M_M : 185 If only one color is replaced, color balance may be adversely
Abnormal end AT DEVE ADJ_M_K : 185 AT DEVE VO_M_Y : 128 affected. Black developer can be replaced individually.
2) After replacement of developer or the photoconductor, be sure

to execute SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction data.
AT DEVE ADJ_H_K : 185 If the above procedure is neglected, the half-tone correction
AT DEVEVO_L_K : 185 may not be performed correctly.
AT DEVEVO_L_C : 128
AT DEVEVO_L_M : 185
ADJ 6 High voltage adjustments

K C M Y EXECUTE 1/1
TCD_K : EE-EL 6-A Main charger grid voltage adjustment

TCD_C : 50
TCD_M : EE-EL
* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
TCD_Y : 45
TCV_K :
* When U2 trouble occurs.
TCV_C : * When the PCU PWB is replaced.
TCV_M :
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
TCV_Y :
K C M Y EXECUTE 1/1
1) Enter SIM8-2 mode.
DV SETTING AND OUTPUT

A : 583 ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_K
A: XXX B : 635 ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_C
C : 635 ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_M

230 850
D : 635 ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y
MIDDLE LOW/HIGH EXECUTE OK
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE or after 30 sec.

A : 500 ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_K
A: XXX B : 635 ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_C
C : 635 ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_M

230 850
D : 635 ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y
2) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed mode and press [OK] key.
Adjustment value Monitor (MC/DV high voltage PWB)

Actual
Item Mode Adjustment Monitor voltage Pin
Default value Connector voltage
range (Specified value) No.
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED K Main charger grid voltage 230 850 583 54.1 r 1.62V CNMON 8 620V
GB_K (Middle speed mode)
B MIDDLE SPEED C Main charger grid voltage 230 850 635 55.5 r 1.67V CNMON 6 635V
GB_C (Middle speed mode)
C MIDDLE SPEED M Main charger grid voltage 230 850 635 55.5 r 1.67V CNMON 4 635V
GB_M (Middle speed mode)
D MIDDLE SPEED Y Main charger grid voltage 230 850 635 55.5 r 1.67V CNMON 2 635V
GB_Y (Middle speed mode)
LOW/ A LOW SPEED K Main charger grid voltage 230 850 552 50.9 r 1.53V CNMON 8 585V
HIGH GB_K (Low speed mode)
B LOW SPEED C Main charger grid voltage 230 850 600 52.3 r 1.57V CNMON 6 600V
GB_C (Low speed mode)
C LOW SPEED M Main charger grid voltage 230 850 600 52.3 r 1.57V CNMON 4 600V
GB_M (Low speed mode)
D LOW SPEED Y Main charger grid voltage 230 850 600 52.3 r 1.57V CNMON 2 600V
GB_Y (Low speed mode)
E HIGH SPEED K Main charger grid voltage 230 850 604 (70-sheets machine) 60.5 r 1.82V CNMON 8 690V
GB_K (High speed mode) 598 (62/55-sheets
machine)
Remark: By setting the default value, the specified voltage is When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
normally outputted. mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value. tain relationship.
To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed
mode, and then adjust the other mode.
If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the
modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are
automatically changed. Use care for that.
Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output volt-
age, there is no need to check the output value.
If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an
adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the
procedures below.
GBK:XXX GBC:XXX GBM:XXX GBY:XXX
1) Remove the screw, and remove the main unit rear cover.
6-B Developing bias voltage adjustment
1 This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
* When PCU PWB is replaced.

A : 450 ; MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K
A: XXX B : 450 ; MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C
C : 450 ; MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M

0 700
D : 450 ; MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y
2
2) Open the PWB holder.

4) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and MIDDLE LOW/HIGH EXECUTE OK
the scroll key.

5) Check the relationship between the pin No. of the connector 10-key EXECUTE
CNMON on the MC/DV high voltage PWB and each adjust-
ment mode. EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
6) Apply a digital multi-meter to the connector CNMON pin on the
MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the adjusted
mode. TEST SIMULATION NO.08-01 CLOSE
7) Press [EXECUTE] key. DV SETTING AND OUTPUT
The main charger grid voltage is outputted for 30sec. A : 500 ; MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K
A: XXX B : 450 ; MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C

If this procedure is executed for a long time, the OPC drum C : 450 ; MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M
and the developing roller may be adversely affected. Use this 0 700
D : 450 ; MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y
procedure as short as possible.
If possible, it is recommendable to use an unnecessary devel-
oping unit and an unnecessary OPC drum for this adjustment.
8) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values
shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
adjust again. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even MIDDLE LOW/HIGH EXECUTE OK
though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts
may be defective. 2) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and
MC/DV high voltage PWB the scroll key.
PCU PWB 3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle
speed mode and press [OK] key.
Developing unit
OPC drum unit
High voltage circuit electrode
Adjustment value Monitor (MC/DV high voltage PWB)

Actual
Item Mode Adjustment Default Monitor voltage Pin
Connector voltage
range value (Specified value) No.
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K K Developing bias voltage (Middle 0 700 450 12.0 r 0.36V CNMON 7 450V
speed mode)
B MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C C Developing bias voltage (Middle 0 700 450 12.0 r 0.36V CNMON 5 450V
speed mode)
C MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M M Developing bias voltage (Middle 0 700 450 12.0 r 0.36V CNMON 3 450V
speed mode)
D MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y Y Developing bias voltage (Middle 0 700 450 12.0 r 0.36V CNMON 1 450V
speed mode)
LOW/ A LOW SPEED DVB_K K Developing bias voltage (Low 0 700 420 11.1 r 0.33V CNMON 7 420V
HIGH speed mode)
B LOW SPEED DVB_C C Developing bias voltage (Low 0 700 420 11.1 r 0.33V CNMON 5 420V
speed mode)
C LOW SPEED DVB_M M Developing bias voltage (Low 0 700 420 11.1 r 0.33V CNMON 3 420V
speed mode)
D LOW SPEED DVB_Y Y Developing bias voltage (Low 0 700 420 11.1 r 0.33V CNMON 1 420V
speed mode)
E HIGH SPEED DVB_K K Developing bias voltage (High 0 700 450 12.0 r 0.36V CNMON 7 450V
speed mode)
Remark: By setting the default value, the specified voltage is 6) Apply a digital multi-meter to the connector CNMON pin on the
normally outputted. MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the adjusted
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label mode.
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value. 7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The developing bias voltage is outputted for 30sec.
8) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values
shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
adjust again. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even
though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts
may be defective.
MC/DV high voltage PWB
PCU PWB
Developing unit
OPC drum unit
DVK:XXX DVC:XXX DVM:XXX DVY:XXX
High voltage circuit electrode
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer- 6-C Transfer voltage adjustment
tain relationship. This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed * When the TC high voltage power PWB is replaced.
mode, then adjust the other mode. * When U2 trouble occurs.
If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the * When the PCU PWB is replaced.
modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are * When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
automatically changed. Use care for that.
Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output volt-
age, there is no need to check the output value. TEST SIMULATION NO.08-06 CLOSE
If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an THV SETTING AND OUTPUT
adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the A : 78 ; TC1 LOW SPEED CL K
procedures below. A: XXX B : 78 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K
C : 68 ; TC1 LOW SPEED CL C

1) Remove the screw, and remove the main unit rear cover. 0 255
D : 68 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C
E : 68 ; TC1 LOW SPEED CL M
1 F : 68 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M
G : 68 ; TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y
H: 68 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y
I : 78 ; TC1 LOW SPEED BW K
J : 78 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K
K : 130 ; TC1 HIGH SPEED BW K
L : 132 ; TC2 PLAIN CL SPX
EXECUTE OK
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE or after 30 sec.

2
THV SETTING AND OUTPUT

A: 200 ; TC1 LOW SPEED CL K
2) Open the PWB frame. A: XXX B : 78 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K
3) Enter SIM8-1 mode. 0 255

D: 68 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C

4) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and
the scroll key.
F : 68 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M
5) Check the relationship between the pin No. of the connector
G: 68 ; TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y
CNMON on the MC/DV high voltage PWB and each adjust-
ment mode.
H: 68 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y
I : 78 ; TC1 LOW SPEED BW K
K: 130 ; TC1 HIGH SPEED BW K
CNMON EXECUTE OK
1
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK] key.
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified voltage is outputted.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer voltage is outputted.
Actual output
Set Default Actual output
Item Display Content value of the
range value setting range
initial value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary Color K Lower speed 0 - 255 78 2PA - 100PA 15PA
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K transfer bias Middle speed 0 - 255 78 2PA - 100PA 15PA
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C reference value C Lower speed 0 - 255 68 2PA - 100PA 10PA
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C Middle speed 0 - 255 68 2PA - 100PA 10PA
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M Lower speed 0 - 255 68 2PA - 100PA 10PA
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M Middle speed 0 - 255 68 2PA - 100PA 10PA
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y Lower speed 0 - 255 68 2PA - 100PA 10PA
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y Middle speed 0 - 255 68 2PA - 100PA 10PA
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Black and white K Lower speed 0 - 255 78 2PA - 100PA 15PA
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K Middle speed 0 - 255 78 2PA - 100PA 15PA
K TC1 HIGH SPEED BW K High speed 0 - 255 130 2PA - 100PA 40PA
L TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary Color Normal Front surface 51 - 255 132 2PA - 60PA 25PA
M TC2 PLAIN CL DPX transfer bias paper Back surface 51 - 255 132 2PA - 60PA 25PA
N TC2 PLAIN BW SPX reference value Black and white Front surface 51 - 255 184 2PA - 60PA 40PA
O TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 184 2PA - 60PA 40PA
P TC2 HEAVY CL SPX Color Heavy Front surface 51 - 255 88 2PA - 60PA 12.5PA
Q TC2 HEAVY CL DPX paper Back surface 51 - 255 88 2PA - 60PA 12.5PA
R TC2 HEAVY BW SPX Black and white Front surface 51 - 255 79 2PA - 60PA 10PA
S TC2 HEAVY BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 79 2PA - 60PA 10PA
T TC2 OHP CL Color OHP 51 - 255 72 2PA - 60PA 8PA
U TC2 OHP BW Black and white 51 - 255 72 2PA - 60PA 8PA
V TC2 ENVELOPE CL Color Envelope 51 - 255 149 2PA - 60PA 30PA
W TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black and white 51 - 255 149 2PA - 60PA 30PA
X TC2 CLEANING Cleaning process 51 - 255 72 2PA - 60PA 8PA
Y TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary Printing at low speed 51 - 255 72 50V - 1500V 200V
Z TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD transfer Printing at middle speed 51 - 255 100 50V - 1500V 400V
AA TC2 CLEAN HIGH SPD cleaning bias Printing at high speed 51 - 255 114 50V - 1500V 500V
AB TC2 CLEAN CLEANING reference value Cleaning 51 - 255 156 50V - 1500V 800V
AC PTC LOW SPEED CL PTC current Color Lower speed 0 - 255 119 0/100PA - 700PA 300PA
AD PTC MIDDLE SPEED CL reference value Middle speed 0 - 255 119 0/100PA - 700PA 300PA
AE PTC LOW SPEED BK Black and white Lower speed 0 - 255 119 0/100PA - 700PA 300PA
AF PTC MIDDLE SPEED BK Middle speed 0 - 255 119 0/100PA - 700PA 300PA
AG PTC HIGH SPEED BK High speed 0 - 255 119 0/100PA - 700PA 300PA
AH VCASE LOW SPEED CL PTC case Color Lower speed 0 - 255 0 0/200V - 1000V 0
AI VCASE MIDDLE SPEED CL voltage Middle speed 0 - 255 0 0/200V - 1000V 0
AJ VCASE LOW SPEED BK reference value Black and white Lower speed 0 - 255 0 0/200V - 1000V 0
AK VCASE MIDDLE SPEED BK Middle speed 0 - 255 0 0/200V - 1000V 0
AL VCASE HIGH SPEED BK High speed 0 - 255 0 0/200V - 1000V 0
NOTE:
ADJ 7 Image density sensor, image Before executing this adjustment, check to confirm the following
registration sensor adjustment items.
* Check to confirm that the color image density sensor, the black
There are some assembly variations in the image density sensor image density sensor, and the image registration sensor are
section. Therefore, the absolute detection level differs in each clean.
machine. To correct this, calibration is executed.
* Check to confirm that the image density sensor calibration plate
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases: is clean.
* When the image density sensor is replaced. * Check to confirm that the transfer belt is clean and free from
* When the image resist sensor is replaced. scratches.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
The targets of the adjustment are the color image density sensor,
the black image density sensor, and the image registration sensor.
There are following adjustment methods.
* Color image density sensor adjustment (Calibration with the
adjustment jig) SIM44-13
* Color/black image density sensor and the image registration sen-
sor adjustment SIM44-2
7) Turn on the power and enter SIM44-13 mode.
7-A Color image density sensor calibration
1) Open the front cover (lower). TEST SIMULATION NO.44-13 CLOSE
2) Turn to the transfer belt tension release cam and release the PATCH SEAL ADJUSTMENT
primary transfer belt tension. PCS CL CARB OUT : 108
PCS CL DARK : 0
PCS CL LED ADJ : 21
EXECUTE
1/1
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or when the color sensor
NOTE: adjustment is completed
When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-13
released manually, turn on the power again after completion of
PATCH SEAL ADJUSTMENT
the work. (Power OFF-ON) This procedure initializes the trans-
PCS CL CARB OUT : 108
fer roller to return it to the home position.
PCS CL DARK : 0
3) Open the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).
PCS CL LED ADJ : 21
4) Open the process front cover, loosen the screw, and pull out
the primary transfer belt unit. OK
EXECUTE
1/1
8) Close the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).

10) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Color image sensor calibration is automatically executed.
When the operation is completed, the adjustment result is dis-
played and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
Adjustment Default
Display/Item Content
value range value
5) Remove the developing unit (BK) and the OPC drum unit (BK).
A PCS_CL Color image density sensor 1 255 108
6) Install the image density sensor calibration jig (UKOG- CARB OUT LED current adjustment
0318FCZZ) to the sensor housing section. target value
Engage the pawl (A) in the sensor housing groove, and slide it B PCS_CL Color image density sensor 0 255 0
to the rear frame side. DARK dark-voltage level
C PCS_CL Color image density sensor 1 255 21
LED ADJ LED current adjustment
target value (PCS CL CARB
OUT) registered LED current
level
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.
In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality. If any
abnormality is found, repair and adjust again.
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
* Color image density sensor
* PCU PWB
* Image sensor calibration jig (standard reflection sheet dirt,
A
scratch, discoloration)
A NOTE: Store the image sensor calibration jig under low tempera-
ture, low humidity and dark place.
7-B Color image density sensor, black image
density sensor, image registration sensor
adjustment
PROCON GAIN ADJUSTMENT
PCS_CL LED ADJ : 21 PCS_K LED ADJ : 21
PCS_CL DARK : 0 PCS_K DARK : 0
PCS_K GRND : 0
PCS_K BELT MAX : 0 PCS_K BELT MIN : 0
PCS_K BELT DIF : 0
REG_F LED ADJ : 27 REG_R LED ADJ : 27
REG_F DARK : 0 REG_R DARK : 0
REG_F GRND : 0 REG_R GRND : 0
REG_F BELT MAX : 0 REG_F BELT MIN : 0
REG_F BELT DIF : 0 REG_R BELT MAX : 0
REG_R BELT MIN : 0 REG_R BELT DIF : 0
EXECUTE 1/2

The color image density sensor, the black image density sen-
sor, and the image registration sensor are automatically
adjusted.
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is
displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
Display/Item Content Adjustment value range Default value

PROCON A PCS_CL LED ADJ Color image density sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value 1 255 21
B PCS _K LED ADJ Black image density sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value 1 255 21
C PCS_CL DARK Color image sensor dark voltage 0 255 0
D PCS_K DARK Black image density sensor dark voltage 0 255 0
E PCS_K GRND Belt base detection level when completion of Item B adjustment 0 255 0
F PCS_K BELT MAX Belt base detection level (Max.) 0 255 0
G PCS_K BELT MIN Belt base detection level (Min.) 0 255 0
H PCS_K BELT DIF Belt base detection level difference (Item E, Item F) 0 255 0
REGIST I REG_F LED ADJ Image registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value F 1 255 27
J REG_R LED ADJ Image registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value R 1 255 27
K REG_F DARK Image registration sensor dark voltage F 0 255 0
L REG_R DARK Image registration sensor dark voltage R 0 255 0
M REG_F GRND Belt base detection level when completion of Item I adjustment 0 255 0
N REG_R GRND Belt base detection level when completion of Item J adjustment 0 256 0
O REG_F BELTMAX Belt base detection level (Max.) F 0 255 0
P REG_F BELT MIN Belt base detection level (Min.) F 0 255 0
Q REG_F BELT DIF Belt base detection level difference (Item O, Item P) 0 255 0
R REG_R BELT MAX Belt base detection level (Max.) R 0 255 0
S REG_R BELT MIN Belt base detection level (Min.) R 0 255 0
T REG_R BELT DIF Belt base detection level difference (Item R, Item S) 0 255 0
U REG_F PATCH (K) Patch detection level F (K) 0 255 0
V REG_F PATCH (C) Patch detection level F (C) 0 255 0
W REG_F PATCH (M) Patch detection level F (M) 0 255 0
X REG_F PATCH (Y) Patch detection level F (Y) 0 255 0
Y REG_R PATCH (K) Patch detection level R (K) 0 255 0
Z REG_R PATCH (C) Patch detection level R (C) 0 255 0
AA REG_R PATCH (M) Patch detection level R (M) 0 255 0
AB REG_R PATCH (Y) Patch detection level R (Y) 0 255 0
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is dis-
played.
In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality.
If any abnormality is found, repair and adjust again.
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
* Color image density sensor
* Black image density sensor
* Image registration sensor
* PCU PWB
* Transfer belt (dirt, scratch)
* Transfer belt cleaner
(Method 1)
ADJ 8 Image skew adjustment a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines from the cross
(LSU (writing) unit) point of the outside cross pattern.
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases: R

* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
* When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit.
* When a color image registration mistake occurs.
* When the unit is installed or when the installing site is changed.
(Required depending on the cases.)
Diagonal line D
* When there is an uneven density area or a difference in color
balance in the main scanning direction (back and forth).
* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced. Diagonal line C
* When the primary transfer unit is replaced.
* When the color phase is not matched by the color balance
adjustment.
F
LSU POSITION ADJUSTMENT (SELF PRINT) b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C
A: 1 ; MULTICOUNT and D of the diagonal lines.
A: XXX B: 4 ; PAPER : CS3
c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in
1 999 the following range.
C D = r 0.8mm
If the difference between C and D is in the above range,
there is no need to adjust.
(Method 2)
a) Fit the three cross points of the cross patterns in a row with
the side of A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper for checking for any skew
(right angle).
EXECUTE OK
A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE or end of print
Comparison line R
TEST SIMULATION NO.61-04 CLOSE 0.5 mm or less
LSU POSITION ADJUSTMENT (SELF PRINT)
A: 2 ; MULTICOUNT
Direction A Direction B
A: XXX B: 4 ; PAPER : CS3
1 999
Reference line
EXECUTE OK
F
2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by
changing the value of set item B. The cross patterns in a row
b) Measure the shortest distance between the cross pattern
The check pattern is printed out. on the extended line of the vertical line and the paper side.
4) Check the printed black image for any skew (right angle). If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to
Measure the right angle level by using the six cross patterns adjust.
printed in black.
If not, execute the following procedures.
There are following two methods of checking the black image
5) Open the front cover (lower).
for any skew (right angle).
6) Loosen the LSU (writing) unit fixing screws (2 pcs.) and shift
Method 1: Measure the length of the diagonal lines from the
the skew adjustment screw in the arrow direction to adjust the
cross point of the cross pattern. Check the difference in the
LSU (writing) unit skew.
length of the diagonal lines for judgment of good or no good.
(When Method 1 is used to check the black image for any
Method 2: Use the right angle sides of A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper for
skew (right angle) in procedure 4)
judgment of good or no good.
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C > D, shift the
NOTE:
adjustment screw in the direction of Y.
IN the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be used
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C < D, shift the
may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of paper to
adjustment screw in the direction of X.
be used in advance.
(When Method 2 is used to check the black image for any 11) Turn the image skew adjustment screw of the target color to
skew (right angle) in procedure 4) adjust.
If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of A, shift the
adjustment screw to X direction. If the image is skewed in the
arrow direction of B, shift the adjustment screw to Y direction. Y M C
Y X
When each adjustment screw is turned, it clicks. Turn it by

5 6 clicks and the check pattern is changed by 1 step (1
dot size).
When the image skew pattern on the front frame side is
8) Execute procedures 3) 4). skewed in the arrow direction of A (to the smaller character)
(Repeat procedures 5) 8) until a satisfactory result is from the rear frame side, turn the adjustment screw counter-
obtained.) clockwise. When the image is skewed in the arrow direction of
9) If the adjustment result reaches the satisfactory level, tighten B (to the larger character), turn the adjustment screw clock-
the adjustment screw. wise.
(The black image skew adjustment is completed with the 12) Print the check pattern.
above.) 13) Check the color image skew pattern.
10) In the above black image skew adjustment, check the color Repeat procedures 11) 13) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
image skew pattern printed when completion of the adjust- The image skew adjustment (LSU unit) is executed by changing
ment. the parallelism of the LSU unit scan laser beam for the OPC drum.
R
ADJ 9 OPC drum phase adjustment
*B (Auto adjustment)
Yellow
Cyan
Magenta
NOTE: This machine is provided with the manual photoconductor

*A phase adjustment function (SIM 44-31), which, however, is
rather difficult to perform. Therefore, it is advisable to use
Direction A Direction B
SIM 50-22 to perform the automatic adjustment.
* When the OPC drum is replaced.
*B * When the OPC drum is removed from the main unit.
* When the OPC drum drive section is disassembled.
* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced.
F * When U2 trouble occurs.
*A: Rough adjustment pattern * When the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced.
*B: Fine adjustment pattern * When EEPROM on the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced.
In each Y/M/C color print pattern printed separately in the front
frame direction and in the rear frame direction, note the same
print color pattern and check to confirm that the difference in
the highest density sections is within r 1 step.
(Compare the front and the rear frame positions of the same-
color print color patterns. All the highest density sections of all
the print color patterns may not be aligned on a line. Compare
only the same-color patterns.)
If the above condition is not satisfied, execute the procedures
below.

ADJ 10 Print engine image
magnification ratio adjustment
TEST
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION&DLUM POSITION
MAIN F MAIN R SUB (BK) (Main scanning direction)

C 105.0(+0.2) 110.0(-0.1) 103.0(+0.4) (Print engine section) (Manual
adjustment)
M 100.0(+0.0) 99.0(-0.2) 99.0(+0.2)
Y 98.0(+0.3) 98.0(+0.1) 105(+0.0)

START POINT AMP
K 1(2) 0(1)
CL 1(2) 0(1)
PHASE AMP * When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
C 1(2) 0.0(0.1)
M 1(2) 0.0(0.1)
Y 0.0(0.1) SIMULATION NO.50-10 CLOSE
TEST
PAPER CENTER OFFSET SETUP

REGIST DRUM POS ALL EXECUTE 1/1 A : 100 ; BK-MAG
A: XXX B : 50 ; MFT
EXECUTE
Normal end 60 140 C : 50 ; CS1
D : 50 ; CS2

E : 50 ; CS3
F : 50 ; CS4
NOW EXECUTING...
G : 50 ; LCC
H : 50 ; ADU
I: 1 ; MULTICOUNT
EXECUTE J: 2 ; PAPER : CS1
K: 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
Abnormal end
EXECUTE OK

PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START
10-key EXECUTE
ERRORTONNER EMPTY 01
EXECUTE
end of print
EXECUTE TEST SIMULATION NO.50-10 CLOSE

2) Press [ALL] key. A : 50 ; BK-MAG
(The machine enters the OPC drum phase adjustment mode/ A: XXX B : 50 ; MFT
image registration adjustment (auto adjustment) mode, and 60 140 C : 50 ; CS1
both adjustments are executed simultaneously in this mode.) D : 50 ; CS2
The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration E : 50 ; CS3
adjustment can be individually executed by [REGIST] key and F : 50 ; CS4
[DRUM POS] key. Since, however, the image registration G : 50 ; LCC

adjustment must be executed when the OPC drum phase
H : 50 ; ADU
adjustment is completed, both adjustment are executed in this
adjustment simultaneously. I: 1 ; MULTICOUNT
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. J: 2 ; PAPER : CS1
The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration K: 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
adjustment are executed automatically.

* After completion of the adjustment, the drum motor stops and EXECUTE OK
[EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display and the adjustment
result is displayed. 2) Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray.
MAIN, SUB: Image regist adjustment value is displayed. 3) Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll
key.
( ) is the difference from the previous adjustment value.
Example: This time 105.0, previous time 103.0: 105.0 (+2)
The check pattern is printed.
PHASE: OPC drum phase adjustment value is displayed.
( ) is the previous adjustment value.
Example: This time 90q, previous time 45q: 3 (2)
* In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details.
5) Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240 1) Enter SIM50-10 mode.
r 0.5mm.

A : 100 ; BK-MAG
A: XXX B : 50 ; MFT
60 140 C : 50 ; CS1
D : 50 ; CS2
E : 50 ; CS3
F : 50 ; CS4
G : 50 ; LCC
H : 50 ; ADU
I: 1 ; MULTICOUNT
J: 2 ; PAPER : CS1
K: 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE OK
If the above condition is not satisfied, execute the procedures

below. 10-key EXECUTE
6) Change the set value of set item A.
EXECUTE
When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed
End of print
by 0.1mm.
When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification
ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set TEST
value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the PAPER CENTER OFFSET SETUP
main scanning direction is decreased. A : 50 ; BK-MAG
A: XXX B : 50 ; MFT
Repeat procedures 2) 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
60 140 C : 50 ; CS1
D : 50 ; CS2
ADJ 11 Image off-center adjustment E : 50 ; CS3
(Print engine section) F : 50 ; CS4
G : 50 ; LCC
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases: H : 50 ; ADU
* When the LSU is replaced or removed. I: 1 ; MULTICOUNT
* When ADJ 10 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment J: 2 ; PAPER : CS1
(BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual
K: 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
adjustment) is performed.
* When a paper tray is replaced.
EXECUTE OK
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual feed tray is replaced. 2) Select set item J with the scroll key and enter the value corre-
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled. sponding to the paper feed tray to be adjusted.
* When the duplex section is disassembled.
Set Default
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced. Display/Item Content
range value
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced. A BK-MAG Main scan print 60 140 100
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled. magnification ratio BK
B MFT Print off-center adjustment 1 99 50
* When the regist roller section is disassembled. value (Manual feed tray)
* When U2 trouble occurs. C CS1 Print off-center adjustment 1 99 50
* When the PCU PWB is replaced. value (Paper feed tray 1)
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced. D CS2 Print off-center adjustment 1 99 50
value (Paper feed tray 2)
(Caution) E CS3 Print off-center adjustment 1 99 50
Before execution of this adjustment, check the following item. value (Paper feed tray 3)
* Check to insure that the Print engine image magnification ratio F CS4 Print off-center adjustment 1 99 50
adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) value (Paper feed tray 4)
(Manual adjustment) has been properly adjusted. G LCC Print off-center adjustment 1 99 50
value (LCC)
H ADU Print off-center adjustment 1 99 50
value (ADU)
Note: Before execution of
this adjustment, check to
insure that the adjustment
items A G have been
properly adjusted. If not,
this adjustment cannot be
made properly.
I MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 999 1
Set Default 8) Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2
Display/Item Content pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray,
range value
J PAPER MFT Paper feed Manual paper 16 1 2 (CS 1) and change the gear unit position in the front/back frame direc-
tray select feed tray tion. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).
CS 1 Paper feed 2
tray 1
CS 2 Paper feed 3
tray 2
CS 3 Paper feed 4
tray 3
CS 4 Paper feed 5
tray 4
LCC LCC 6
K DUPLEX YES Duplex Selected 01 0 1 (NO)
print select
3) Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-
cedure 2).
The adjustment pattern is printed.
5) Check the adjustment pattern image position.
Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
all the following conditions are satisfied.
ADJ 12 Image registration adjustment

(Print engine section)
* When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit.
* When the color image registration mistake in the main scanning
direction occurs.
* When the color image registration mistake in the sub scanning
direction occurs.
* When the unit is installed or when the installing place is changed.
RV: REAR VOID AREA
* When maintenance is executed. (Replacement of the OPC drum,
FV: FRONT VOID AREA
the OPC cartridge, the transfer unit, the transfer belt, etc.)
RV + FV d 4.0mm
* When ADJ 10 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment
RV = 2.0 r 2.0mm (BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual
FV = 2.0 r 2.0mm adjustment) is performed.
If the above conditions are not satisfied, execute the proce- * When U2 trouble occurs.
dures below. * When the PCU PWB is replaced.
6) Select the paper feed mode adjustment item (B H) to be * When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
adjusted with the scroll key. Note before adjustment
7) Change the adjustment value. (Before execution of this adjustment, all the following adjustments
Enter the adjustment value and press [OK] or [EXECUTE] key. must have been completed.)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is * Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit)
printed.
* ADJ 10 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK)
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat- (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjust-
tern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the ment)
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
changed by about 0.1mm.
Repeat procedures 3) 7) until the conditions of procedure 5)
are satisfied.
In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating
the above procedures, perform the following procedure.
Adjustment Default
12-A Image registration adjustment (Main Display/Item Content
value range value
scanning direction, sub scanning direction) REGIST MAIN C Image registration 1.0 199.0 100
(Auto adjustment) R adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
In this adjustment, the image registration adjustment in the main
(Cyan) (R side)
scanning direction and that in the sub scanning direction are exe-
M Image registration 1.0 199.0 100
cuted simultaneously and automatically.
adjustment value (Main
1) Enter SIM50-22 mode. scanning direction)
(Magenta) (R side)
TEST Y Image registration 1.0 199.0 100
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION&DLUM POSITION adjustment value (Main
MAIN F MAIN R SUB
scanning direction)
(Yellow) (R side)
C 105.0(+0.2) 110.0(-0.1) 103.0(+0.4)
SUB C Image registration 1.0 199.0 100
M 100.0(+0.0) 99.0(-0.2) 99.0(+0.2)
adjustment value (Sub
Y 98.0(+0.3) 98.0(+0.1) 105(+0.0)
scanning direction)
(Cyan)
START POINT AMP
M Image registration 1.0 199.0 100
K 1(2) 0(1)
adjustment value (Sub
CL 1(2) 0(1) scanning direction)
(Magenta)
PHASE AMP Y Image registration 1.0 199.0 100
C 1(2) 0.0(0.1) adjustment value (Sub
M 1(2) 0.0(0.1) scanning direction)
Y 0.0(0.1) (Yellow)
MAIN, SUB: The entered value after adjustment is displayed.
REGIST DRUM POS ALL EXECUTE 1/1 ( ): Difference from the previous value.
EXECUTE Example: This time 105, previous time 103: 105 (+2)
Normal end * In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details.
To check the auto adjustment result, use the manual image
TEST
registration adjustment mode below.
NOW EXECUTING...
* Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (SIM50-20)
* Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (SIM50-21)
EXECUTE
12-B Image registration adjustment (Main
Abnormal end scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : FRONT-REAR DIRECTION
A : 100 ; CYAN(FRONT)
ERRORTONNER EMPTY 01
A: XXX B : 100 ; CYAN(REAR)
1 199 C : 100 ; MAGENTA(FRONT)
D : 100 ; MAGENTA(REAR)
E : 100 ; YELLOW(FRONT)
EXECUTE
F : 100 ; YELLOW(REAR)
2) Press [REGIST] key to select the image registration adjust- G: 1 ; MULTICOUNT
ment auto adjustment mode. H: 4 ; PAPER : CS3
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. I: 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the image registration auto

adjustment is started. After completion of the adjustment, EXECUTE OK
[EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display and the adjust-

ment result is displayed. 10-key EXECUTE
It takes about 40 sec to complete the adjustment. EXECUTE End of print
Adjustment Default TEST SIMULATION NO.50-20 CLOSE

value range value REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : FRONT-REAR DIRECTION
REGIST MAIN C Image registration 1.0 199.0 100 A : 50 ; CYAN(FRONT)
F adjustment value (Main A: XXX B : 100 ; CYAN(REAR)
scanning direction) 1 199 C : 100 ; MAGENTA(FRONT)
(Cyan) (F side) D : 100 ; MAGENTA(REAR)
M Image registration 1.0 199.0 100 E : 100 ; YELLOW(FRONT)

adjustment value (Main F : 100 ; YELLOW(REAR)
scanning direction)
G: 1 ; MULTICOUNT
(Magenta) (F side)
Y Image registration 1.0 199.0 100 H: 4 ; PAPER : CS3
adjustment value (Main I: 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
scanning direction)
(Yellow) (F side) EXECUTE OK
2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by
changing the value of set item H.
The image registration adjustment pattern in the main scan-
ning direction is printed.

A A
C C
A A
C C
A A
C C
B B
A: Rough adjustment pattern

B: Fine adjustment pattern
C: Adjustment range (0 r 1)
4) Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pat-
Adjustment Default
tern positions of each color in the front frame and the rear Display/Item Content
value range value
frame sides.
A CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 199 100
Use the visually highest color density section as the center, (FRONT) value (Main scanning
and measure the shift amount. direction) (Cyan) (F side)
The front frame registration and the rear frame registration are B CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 199 100
adjusted independently. (REAR) value (Main scanning
direction) (Cyan) (R side)
To check the image registration, therefore, check the front
C MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 199 100
frame side and the rear frame side individually.
(FRONT) value (Main scanning
direction) (Magenta) (F side)
Rough adjustment Check that the rough adjustment print pattern is at
D MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 199 100
print pattern check: the center for the rough adjustment reference
(REAR) value (Main scanning
pattern.
direction) (Magenta) (R side)
Fine adjustment Check that the fine adjustment print pattern is at the
E YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 199 100
print pattern check: center for the fine adjustment reference pattern.
(FRONT) value (Main scanning
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is located in the range of 0 direction) (Yellow) (F side)
r 1 from the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the F YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 199 100
adjustment is not required.) (REAR) value (Main scanning
If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode direction) (Yellow) (R side)
adjustment item A F to be adjusted with the scroll key and Repeat procedures 3) 4) until a satisfactory result is
change the adjustment value to adjust. obtained.
For measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of the
adjustment value, refer to the table below.
(Measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of Measurement value: 27 (= 20 7)
the adjustment value)
a) Measurement of the shift amount
* Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern
The visually highest color density section is regarded as

the center, and used as the measurement value.
-20
(Example)
The measurement value of the figure is "7."
* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern
Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direc-

tion or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from
that.
The center black line is scaled as 0, the first line mark
as 20, the second line mark as 40, the third line mark as

60. The interval between the rough adjustment marks
corresponds to 20.
(Example)
In the case of the figure, it is between 20 40 of the

plus polarity, and the measurement is "20."
* The actual shift amount is the sum of the rough adjust-
ment reference shift amount and the fine adjustment
shift amount.

Shift amount (correction value) = Rough adjustment
shift amount + Fine adjustment shift amount
When calculating, be careful of the plus polarity and the
minus polarity.

(Example)
In the case of the figure, the total shift amount is 27. The shift amount from the adjustment reference position
Measurement value: 27 (= 20 + 7) is calculated for each of six kinds of adjustment items A
F.
b) Adjustment value calculation
Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or
from the current adjustment value, and the result value is

used as the new adjustment value.
20 Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift
amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is plus)

Adjustment value = Current adjustment value Shift
amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is minus)

Yellow
E F

Magenta
C D

Cyan
A B

(Example)
12-C Image registration adjustment (Sub
Previous value before adjustment New adjustment value
scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
A: 100 A: 93 (= 100 7)
B: 112 B: 100 (= 112 12) 1) Enter SIM50-21 mode.
C: 95 C: 96 (= 95 + 1) SIMULATION NO.50-21 CLOSE
TEST
D: 98 D: 109 (= 98 + 11)
REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : SCANNING DIRECTION
E: 102 E: 109 (= 102 + 7) A : 100 ; CYAN
F: 96 F: 118 (= 96 + 22) A: XXX B : 100 ; MAGENTA
C : 100 ; YELLOW
NOTE: If either of front or rear adjustment value is changed, the 1 199
D: 1 ; MULTICOUNT
other adjustment print pattern position may be varied. Be E: 2 ; PAPER : CS1
careful of that. F: 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE OK
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE or end of print
REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : SCANNING DIRECTION

A : 150 ; CYAN
A: XXX B : 100 ; MAGENTA
1 199 C : 100 ; YELLOW
D: 1 ; MULTICOUNT
E: 2 ; PAPER : CS1
F: 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE OK
2) Select the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) or A3 (11 x 17)
paper in it by changing the value of set item H.
The sub scanning direction image registration adjustment pat-
tern is printed.
C B

C: Adjustment range
4) Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pat- Measurement value: 27 (= 20 7)
tern positions of each color.
A
The visually highest color density section is regarded as the
center, and used as the measurement value.
-20
Rough adjustment Check that the rough adjustment print pattern is at
print pattern check: the center for the rough adjustment reference
pattern.
B

Fine adjustment Check that the fine adjustment print pattern is at the
print pattern check: center for the fine adjustment reference pattern.
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is positioned in the range of
0 r 1 for the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the
adjustment is not required.)
If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode

adjustment item A C to be adjusted with the scroll key, and
change the adjustment value to adjust.

Adjustment Default
value range value
A CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 199 100
value (Sub scanning

direction) (Cyan)
B MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 199 100 C
value (Sub scanning

direction) (Magenta)
C YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 199 100
value (Sub scanning

direction) (Yellow)
Repeat procedures 3) 4) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
For measurement of the shift amount and calculation of the
adjustment value, refer to the table below.

(Measurement of the shift amount and calculation of the
adjustment value)
a) Measurement of the shift amount
* Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern
The visually highest color density section is regarded as Measurement value: 27 (= 20 + 7)
the center, and used as the measurement value of the
A
shift amount.
(Example) 20

The measurement value of the figure is "7."
* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern
Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direc- B

tion or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from
that.
The center black line mark is scaled as 0, the first line
mark as 20, the second line mark as 40, the third line

mark as 60. The interval between the rough adjustment
marks corresponds to 20.
(Example)
In the case of the figure, it is between 20 40 of the

plus polarity, and the measurement is "20."

C: Adjustment range
The shift amount is calculated from the adjustment ref-
C
erence position for each of the three adjustment items A
C.

b) Adjustment value calculation
Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or from the current adjustment value, and the result value is used as the new
adjustment value.
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is plus)
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value Shift amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is minus)
A B C

Previous adjustment value New adjustment value

A: 100 A: 73 (= 100 27)
B: 112 B: 119 (= 112 + 7)
C: 95 C: 110 (= 95 + 15)
ADJ 13 Scan image distortion

adjustment
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the copy image is distorted.
13-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism

adjustment
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
glass. (For details, refer to Chapter [D]-3.)
1) Loosen the fixing screws of the scanner unit A and the drive
wire, and remove the scanner unit A from the drive wire.
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner 6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper. edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame (the
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on top surface of the mylar), and fix the scanner unit A with the fix-
the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is ing screw.
proper.
If not, perform the following procedures.

3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
side of the scanner unit B.
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
simultaneously.
5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce- 13-B Scan image (sub scanning direction)
dures, perform the following procedures.
distortion adjustment
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which
is not in contact. 1) Make a test chart with A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
L
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
L L
L = 10mm
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
ment table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference 13-C Scan image (main scanning direction)
position as shown below.) With the document cover open, distortion adjustment
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. 1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper. (Draw a rectangular
with four right angles.)
L L
L = 10mm
L
3) Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
If La = Lb, there is no distortion. ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11"x 17") paper.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction.
La Lb If the four angles of the copy image are right angles, there is
no distortion. (Completion of the adjustment)
If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform

the following procedures.
4) Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will
do.) If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform
the following procedure.
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between the image
distortions on the right and the left.
Lc Lc
Copy A Copy B
Ld Ld
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left.
Lc = Ld Lc Ld
If Lc = Ld, there is no difference between the right and the left
5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the image distortions.
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scan- If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
ner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner
If not, perform the following procedures.
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
Repeat the procedures 2) 6) until the condition of the procedure
3) is satisfied.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform ADJ 13D Scan image distortion
adjustment (Whole scanner).
5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side. ADJ 14 Scan image focus adjustment
(CCD unit position adjustment)
14-A Scan image focus adjustment (Document
table mode, DSPF front surface mode)
* When the CCD unit is removed from the machine.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
ning direction is not properly adjusted.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
1) Enter the simulation 48-1 mode.
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the
scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the TEST
right and the left heights of the scanner rail. MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
A : 50 ; CCD(MAIN)
Repeat the procedures 2) 5) until the difference between the
A: XX B : 50 ; CCD(SUB)
image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted.
C : 50 ; SPF(MAIN)
1 99
6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
D : 50 ; SPF(SUB)
frame side, change the overall height.
E : 50 ; SPFB(MAIN)
7) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) and make a
F : 50 ; SPFB(SUB)
copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check that the distortion in the
main scanning direction is within the specified range.
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main
scanning direction is in the specified range.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted OK
with the above procedures, perform ADJ 13D Scan image dis-
tortion adjustment (Whole scanner). 2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).
Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
13-D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
scanner) 3) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.
This adjustment is executed when scan image distortion cannot be
adjusted with ADJ 13A, ADJ 13B, and ADJ 13C related to the scan
image distortion adjustment.
Change the upper and lower positions of the scanner unit distortion
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
adjustment plate on the left edge of the scanner unit so that the
scan image distortion is minimized. By adjusting the mechanical
distortion of the whole scanner unit, the scan image distortion is
adjusted.
1) Loosen the fixing screw (A).
2) Adjust the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate.
4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.

Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy.
5) Compare the scale length with the scale image length on the
copy paper.
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main
scanning direction from the following formula.
A A A Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
A ratio = (Original size Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
Example: Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm
on the copy image.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (100 99) / 100 x 100 = 1
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
100mm scale CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
10 20 90 100 110 than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
(Original)
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
1.0mm
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
in procedure 9).
Copy image
(1mm (1%) B
shorter than
10 20 90 100 110
the original)
A
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the
following procedures.
7) Remove the document table glass.
8) Remove the dark box cover.
9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 r 1%,
repeat the procedures of 9) 11) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 r 1.0%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.
14-B Scan image focus adjustment (DSPF back

surface mode)
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
* When the COPY/SCAN/FAX image focus is not properly
adjusted.
* This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is
* When the DSPF unit is removed.
replaced.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
1) Make a duplex copy in DSPF mode.
2) Make sure that the copied image on the back side of the paper
is satisfactorily focused.
If the image is not satisfactorily focused, do the following
steps.
3) Open the door. Remove the screws, and remove the transport
PG upper.
* Never loosen the screws marked with .

If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.
4) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below. ADJ 15 DSPF parallelism adjustment
15-A DSPF levelness adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* The DSPF unit has been replaced.
1) Close the DSPF unit and check the clearance between the
projections in the front side and the rear side and the SPF
glass holding resin surface.
5) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws (4 pcs.).
* Never loosen the screws marked with . 2) Visually check to insure that the clearance A is 1mm or less
Loosening these screws could possibly change the CCD and the clearance B is 0mm (in contact).
unit base optical axis. Once the optical axis has been
changed, it cannot be corrected through on-site adjust-
ments. Solving such a problem requires the replacement of 1mm
the entire scanner unit. or less
6) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the A
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
B
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
in procedure 4). 0mm
If the above requirement is not met, do step 3.

3) Turn the height adjustment screw to adjust the DSPF front/rear
frame horizontal level.
A
B L
R
7) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 r 1%,
repeat the procedures of 4) 6) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 r 1.0%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti- When the front frame side is higher (there is a clearance in B):
cal system structure. Turn the height adjustment screw R of the DSPF rear frame
clockwise.
When the rear frame side is higher (clearance A is more than
1mm): Turn the height adjustment screw L of the DSPF rear
frame counterclockwise.
Repeat steps 2 to 3 until an acceptable result is obtained.
4) After adjustments of A and B, check to insure that the projec- [Check Method 2]
tion on the front right side is in contact with the glass surface of Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
the main unit. print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
1.0mm.
0 - 1.0mm
15-B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface

mode)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: If the front surface copy image is as shown above and the
* The DSPF section has been disassembled. back surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
* When replacing the DSPF unit. of "ADJ 15C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode)."
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images. If the above requirement is not met for the paper's front side,
then do step 3.
1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern 1 (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-1. 3) Loosen the hinge screws and lower the two attachments.
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to 2
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.
1
A Paper pass direction
B 4) Open the DSPF and loosen the screw.
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| 1 mm
5) Adjust by turning the DSPF skew adjusting screw on the right

A side of the DSPF rear frame.
B
a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| 1 mm
C D
c d
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the [Check Method 2]
left] Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
If a < b, then turn counterclockwise the DSPF skew print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
adjusting screw. 1.0mm.
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
right]
0 - 1.0mm
If a > b, then turn clockwise the DSPF skew adjusting screw.
15-C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface A

mode)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern 1 (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-1.
If the back surface copy image is as shown above and the
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with front surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to of "ADJ 15B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode)."
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
If the back surface copy is not as shown above, perform the
back sides of the paper.
procedures of step 3) or later.
3) Open the upper door, and remove the adjustment cover.
A Paper pass direction
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
4) Turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw on the CCD unit to
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjust.
adjustment chart is at the edge).
Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| 1 mm
A B
a b
(Back side) A B
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| 1 mm
C D
* When the adjustment screw is turned 180 degrees, a change
of about 0.5mm is made.
c d [When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
left]
If c < d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A
counterclockwise, or turn the adjustment screw B clockwise.
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
right]
If c > d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A clockwise,
or turn the adjustment screw B counterclockwise.
* The adjustment screws A and B must be turned in proper 5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
balance. For example, if the trouble is not removed by turn- When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
ing the adjustment screw A 180 degrees clockwise, do not tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
turn the adjustment screw A furthermore, but turn the adjust-
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
ment screw B 180 degrees counterclockwise.
cation ratio is changed by about 0.02%.
Repeat the procedures 3) 5) until the copy magnification
NOTE: Since turning the adjustment screw too much may cause ratio is within the specified range (100 r 1.0%).
the optical axis trouble, turn in less than one turn clockwise
or counterclockwise. 16-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Sub scanning direction) (Document table
mode, DSPF front surface mode)
ADJ 16 Scan image magnification ratio 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
adjustment (Document table below.
mode, DSPF front surface
mode)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

* When the copy image magnification ration in the sub scanning
direction is not properly adjusted.
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
position adjustment) must have been completed.
16-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(Main scanning direction) (Document table 2) Enter the simulation 48-1 mode.
mode, DSPF front surface mode) TEST SIMULATION NO.48-01 CLOSE
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
below. A : 50 ; CCD(MAIN)
C : 50 ; SPF(MAIN)
1 99
D : 50 ; SPF(SUB)
E : 50 ; SPFB(MAIN)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
F : 50 ; SPFB(SUB)
OK
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.

Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy.
Copy magnification ratio

(Original dimension Copy dimension)
2) Enter the simulation 48-1 mode. = x 100 [%]
Original dimension
(Example 1)
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT Copy A
A : 50 ; CCD(MAIN)
(Shorter than 10 20 90 100 110
A: XX B : 50 ; CCD(SUB) the original)
C : 50 ; SPF(MAIN)
1 99
D : 50 ; SPF(SUB)
E : 50 ; SPFB(MAIN)
F : 50 ; SPFB(SUB)
Scale
(Original) 10 20 90 100 110
OK
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.

Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the (Example 2)
copy mode and make a copy. Copy B
(Longer than 10 20 90 100 110
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified the original)
range (100 r 1.0%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
r 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification 4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following range (100 r 1.0%).
procedure.
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 5) Enter the simulation 48-1 mode.
r 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following TEST SIMULATION NO.48-01 CLOSE
procedure. MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. A : 50 ; CCD(MAIN)
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
C : 50 ; SPF(MAIN)
1 99
D : 50 ; SPF(SUB)
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%. E : 50 ; SPFB(MAIN)
F : 50 ; SPFB(SUB)
Repeat the procedures 3) 5) until the copy magnification ratio is
within the specified range (100 r 1.0%).
OK
ADJ 17 Scan image magnification ratio
adjustment (DSPF back surface 6) Select the SPFB(MAIN) with scroll key.
mode) 7) Enter the image magnification adjustment value with the 10-
key.
17-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment 8) Press [OK] key.
(Main scanning direction) (DSPF back Pressing the [OK] key starts copy operation as well as applying
surface mode) the adjustment value.
This adjustment is required in the following cases: Repeat the above adjustments until an acceptable result is
* The MFP control PWB has been replaced. obtained.
* The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced.

17-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
* The scan control PWB has been replaced.
(Sub scanning direction) (DSPF back
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced.
surface mode)
* Images are not correctly magnified in the main scanning direc-
tion. * Images are not correctly magnified in the sub-scanning direction.
1) On the DSPF original tray, place such an original as illustrated * The MFP control PWB has been replaced.
below. * The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced.
Paper pass direction * The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced.
A4 size * When a U2 trouble occurs.
1) On the DSPF original tray, place such an original as illustrated
below.
10mm
(both sides)
10mm 10mm Paper pass direction
A4 size
2) Make a normal duplex copy on A4 paper.
3) Measure the lengths of the copied image (back surface) and
the original image.
original 10mm
2) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.
copy 3) Measure the lengths of the copied image and the original
image.
10 50 100 150 200 250
10
50
10 50 100 150 200 250

100
10
4) Determine the image magnification factor using the following

original
150
50
formula:
Image magnification factor (%) = Copy dimension / original
200
100
dimension x 100
copy
150
Image magnification factor (%) = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99

If the image magnification factor is within the spec (100
200
0.8%), no adjustment is required; otherwise, do the following

steps.
4) Determine the image magnification factor using the following
formula: ADJ 18 Scan image off-center
Image magnification factor (%) = Copy dimension / original adjustment
dimension x 100
Image magnification factor (%) = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 This adjustment is required in the following cases:
If the image magnification factor is within the spec (100 * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
0.8%), no adjustment is required; otherwise, do the following * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
steps. * When the DSPF section is disassembled.
5) Enter the simulation 48-1 mode. * When the DSPF unit is installed.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
A : 50 ; CCD(MAIN) * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
A: XX B : 50 ; CCD(SUB) * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
C : 50 ; SPF(MAIN)
1 99
D : 50 ; SPF(SUB) 18-A Scan image off-center adjustment
E : 50 ; SPFB(MAIN) (Document table mode, DSPF front surface
F : 50 ; SPFB(SUB) mode)
1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by your self) in the
adjustment mode (document table or DSPF).
OK
6) Select the SPFB(SUB) with scroll key.

This adjustment items is intended to adjust the image magnifi- A
cation in the sub-scanning direction in DSPF mode. (SPFB
(SUB))
7) Enter the image magnification adjustment value with the 10- A=B
key.
8) Press [OK] key.
Pressing the [OK] key starts copy operation as well as applying B
the adjustment value.
Repeat the above adjustments until an acceptable result is
obtained.
NOTE: After adjusting the image magnification in the sub-scanning
direction through Simulation 48-1, do the following steps if 2) Check the copy image center position.
making a copy at a different magnification factor fails to If A B = r 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
produce a correctly scaled copy.
MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT

A'
A: 50 ; MR(HI)
A: XX B: 50 ; MR(MID)
C: 50 ; MR(LO)
1 99
A' - B' = 1.0mm
D : 50 ; DSPF(HI)
E: 50 ; DSPF(MID)
(100%)
F: 50 ; DSPF(LO)
B'
OK
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
2) Select the item corresponding to be adjusted with scroll key. procedures.
3) Enter the image magnification adjustment value with the 10- 3) Enter the simulation 50-12 mode.
key.
Make adjustments by changing the adjustment value for high
ORIGINAL CENTER OFFSET SETUP
revolution mode if the copy magnification is not correct for A : 50 ; OC
microcopies; or the adjustment value for low revolution mode if A: XX B : 50 ; SPF(SIDE1)
the copy magnification is not correct for blowbacks. 1 99

C : 50 ; SPF(SIDE2)
4) Press [OK] key.

This applies the adjustment value.
OK
4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key. 3) Enter the scanned image off-center position adjustment value
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. with the 10-key.
(The adjustment value should be changed in steps of 0.1mm.)
The entered value is set.
(When the adjustment is increased, the print image is shifted
When the set value is increased, the main scanning print posi-
to the front side.)
tion is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
4) Press [OK] key.
6) Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
Pressing the [OK] key starts copy operation as well as applying
copy mode and make a copy.
the adjustment value.
Repeat the procedures of 2) 6) until the above condition is
5) Check the off-center of the printed image.
satisfied.
obtained.
18-B Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF
back surface mode)
This adjustment is required in the following cases: ADJ 19 Print area (Void area)
* The MFP control PWB has been replaced.
adjustment (Print engine
section)
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced. This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled. * When the LSU is replaced or removed.
* The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced. * When the paper tray is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs. * When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* The DSPF section has been disassembled. * When the manual paper feed tray is replace.
* The DSPF unit has been replaced. * When the manual paper feed tray is disassembled.
(Adjustment mode selection) * When the duplex section is disassembled.
1) Enter the simulation 50-12 mode. * When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replace.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
ORIGINAL CENTER OFFSET SETUP
A : 50 ; OC * When the resist roller section is disassembled.
A: XX
B : 50 ; SPF(SIDE1)
C : 50 ; SPF(SIDE2)
1 99
* When the EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
(Caution)
Before executing this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ 10 Print
engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main scanning
direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjustment) in advance.
OK
(UNIT: 0.1mm/STEP When the value is increased, the image is
shifted to the front side.) TEST

A : 100 ; BK-MAG
Item Set range Default A: XXX B : 50 ; MFT
A OC OC mode adjustment 0 99 50 C : 50 ; CS1

60 140
B SPF(SIDE1) DSPF front surface adjustment D : 50 ; CS2
C SPF(SIDE2) DSPF back surface adjustment E : 50 ; CS3
2) Using the scroll key, select the adjustment item SPF(SIDE2), F : 50 ; CS4
which is intended to adjust the off-center in DSPF back surface G : 50 ; LCC
mode. H : 50 ; ADU
3) Press [OK] key.

I: 1 ; MULTICOUNT
J: 2 ; PAPER : CS1
(Scan off-center adjustment) K: 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
1) On the DSPF original tray, place such an original as illustrated

EXECUTE OK
below.
2) Press [START] key. 10-key EXECUTE
Since the front side and back side images are copied onto sep- EXECUTE End of print
arate sheets, check the off-center of the back side image.
If the off-center is 0 r 2.7 mm, no adjustment is required. TEST SIMULATION NO.50-10 CLOSE

A : 50 ; BK-MAG
original copy A:
60
XXX
140
B : 50
C : 50
;
;
MFT
CS1
D : 50 ; CS2
a
E : 50 ; CS3
F : 50 ; CS4
G : 50 ; LCC
H : 50 ; ADU
b
I: 1 ; MULTICOUNT
J: 2 ; PAPER : CS1
K: 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps. EXECUTE OK
2) Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper to all the trays, and select the set item 6) Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
J with the scroll key. Enter the value corresponding to the adjustment value and press [OK] key.
adjustment target paper feed tray.
Standard
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. Display/ Adjustment Default
Content adjustment
The adjustment pattern is printed. Item range value
value
4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below DENA Void are Lead edge 1 99 30 3.0 r
are in the range of the standard values. amount void area 1.0mm
adjustment adjustment
Content Standard adjustment value DENB Rear edge 1 99 20 2.0 r
X Lead edge void area 3.0 r 1.0mm void area 1.0mm
Y Rear edge void area 2.0 r 1.0mm adjustment
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0 r 2.0mm FRONT/ FRONT/ 1 99 20 2.0 r
REAR REAR void 2.0mm
Z1 area
2.02.0mm adjustment
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
area is decreased. When the adjustment value is changed by
1, the void area is changed by 0.1mm.
(Note)
X
3.01.0mm The adjustment value and the actual void area are related as
Y
2.01.0mm
follows:
Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) 4) to
check that the void area is within the specified range.
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if
the lead edge void area is not within the specified range,
change the adjustment value of RRCB-XXX of SIM 50-1.
Z2 Display Adjustment Default
2.02.0mm Content
item range value
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired RRCB- Image lead Resist Standard 1 99 50
condition, execute the simulation 50-1. CS12 edge motor ON cassette
(Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm. RRCB- position timing 1 99 50
CS34 adjustment adjustment
RRCB- value LCC 1 99 50
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-01 CLOSE LCC
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE
RRCB- Manual 1 99 50
A : 50 ; RRCA MFT feed
A: XX B : 50 ; RRCB-CS12 RRCB- ADU 1 99 50
0 99 C : 50 ; RRCB-CS34
ADU
D : 50 ; RRCB-LCC Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
E : 50 ; RRCB-MFT
F : 50 ; RRCB-ADU
G : 30 ; LEAD ADJ 20 Copy image position, image

H : 20 ; SIDE
loss adjustment
I: 30 ; DENA
J: 20 ; DENB
K : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
20-A Copy image position, image loss
adjustment (Document table mode)
OK This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
10-key
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
OK
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-01 CLOSE * When the resist roller section is disassembled.
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE * When a U2 trouble occurs.
A : 60 ; RRCA
A: XX B : 50 ; RRCB-CS12
0 99 C : 50 ; RRCB-CS34
D : 50 ; RRCB-LCC
E : 50 ; RRCB-MFT
F : 50 ; RRCB-ADU NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that
G : 30 ; LEAD the ADJ 19 Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine
H : 20 ; SIDE section) has been completed normally.
I: 30 ; DENA
J: 20 ; DENB
K : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
OK
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure 2) Enter the simulation 50-1 mode.
below.
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE
A : 50 ; RRCA
plate.
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead
0 99 C : 50 ; RRCB-CS34
edge can be seen.
D : 50 ; RRCB-LCC
E : 50 ; RRCB-MFT
F : 50 ; RRCB-ADU
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

G : 30 ; LEAD
H : 20 ; SIDE
I: 30 ; DENA
J: 20 ; DENB
K : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
OK
10-key
OK

A : 60 ; RRCA
0 99 C : 50 ; RRCB-CS34
D : 50 ; RRCB-LCC
E : 50 ; RRCB-MFT
F : 50 ; RRCB-ADU
G : 30 ; LEAD
H : 20 ; SIDE
I: 30 ; DENA
J: 20 ; DENB
K : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
OK
3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.
Item Display item Content Adjustment range Default value

A RRCA Image lead edge position Document lead edge reference position (OC) 0 99 50
B RRCB-CS12 adjustment value Resist motor ON timing Standard cassette 1 99 50
C RRCB-CS34 adjustment 1 99 50
D RRCB-LCC LCC 1 99 50
E RRCB-MFT Manual feed 1 99 50
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 99 50
G LEAD Image loss adjustment Lead edge image loss adjustment 0 99 30
H SIDE Side image loss adjustment 0 99 20
I DENA Void area amount adjustment Lead edge void area adjustment 1 99 30
J DENB Rear edge void area adjustment 1 99 20
K FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area adjustment 1 99 20
4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment. Scale image 3.0mm position
Press [CLOSE] key, and shift from the simulation mode to the Paper lead
copy mode and make a copy in 100% mode and in 200% edge
mode.
When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge
image from 3.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200%
copy scale. 100%
5mm 10mm
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 3.0mm is not copied
in either of different copy magnification ratios.)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is 200%
obtained. 5mm 10mm
5) Image loss adjustment 2) Enter the simulation 53-8 mode.
When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the
default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. TEST
If it is not in the above standard state, or when it is set to a SPF SCANNING POSITION ADJUSTMENT
A : 50 ; ADJUST VALUE
desired value, change these adjustment items.
A: XX
Paper lead edge 1 99
Copy area Maginification ratio: 400%
1 2 3 4
5mm 10mm
OK
3) Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key.

Void area: 3.0mm, Image loss: 3.0mm
obtained.
Standard
Display/ Adjustment Default
Content adjustment
Item range value
value 20-C Copy image position, image loss
LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 99 30 3.0 r adjustment (DSPF mode)
adjustment image loss 1.0mm
value adjustment This adjustment is required in the following cases:
SIDE Side image 0 99 20 2.0 r * The MFP control PWB has been replaced.
loss 1.0mm * The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced.
adjustment
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced.
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image loss is decreased. * The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image loss is * The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced.
changed by 0.1mm. * When a U2 trouble occurs.
20-B Original scan position adjustment * The DSPF unit has been replaced.
This adjustment is required in the following cases: Papar lead edge Papar tail edge
* The scan control PWB has been replaced. No Image
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced. Void (RV)
* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled.
* The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs. LIL = 1.5 mm
10 20 LV = 3.5 mm
* The DSPF section has been disassembled. TV = 3.5 mm No Image
* The DSPF unit has been replaced. FV+RV= 7.0 mm
Void (TV)
This adjustment is intended to adjust the scanner read position in Image loss (LIL)
DSPF mode front face scan.
An incorrect adjustment would deviate the scanner stop position No Image
from the required position, thus possibly causing a shadow of the Void (LV) No Image
original table to appear at the leading edge of an image generated Void (FV)
by DSPF (front surface) mode scan.
1) Make a copy in DSPF (front surface) mode, and make sure
that the printed image at the leading edge of the copied image
is free from shadows. 1) Enter the simulation 50-6 mode.
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE(SPF)

A : 50 ; SIDE1
Papar lead edge
A: XX B : 50 ; SIDE2
1 99 C : 20 ; LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)
Image area
D : 20 ; FRONT_REAR (SIDE1)
E : 30 ; TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1)
F : 30 ; LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)
Shadow image of SPF
G : 20 ; FRONT_REAR (SIDE2)
H : 20 ; TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE2)
If the printed image at the leading edge of the copied image

contains a shadow of the original table, then do the following
OK
steps.
Item Default Papar trail edge
A SIDE1 Front surface document 50
scan start position
adjustment (CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface document 50
scan start position
adjustment (CCD) TIL = 1.5 mm
C Image loss LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge 20
TV = 3.5 mm
Image area
amount (SIDE1) image loss amount setting
D setting: FRONT_REAR Front surface side image 20
SIDE1 (SIDE1) loss amount setting Image loss (TIL)
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge 30
(SIDE1) image loss amount setting Void (TV)
F Image loss LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge 30
amount (SIDE2) image loss amount setting No Image
G setting: FRONT_REAR Back surface side image 20
SIDE2 (SIDE2) loss amount setting If an acceptable result is not obtained, do the following steps.
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge 20
2) Repeat the process of changing the TRAIL_EDGE adjustment
(SIDE2) image loss amount setting
value and then pressing the [OK] key until attaining an accept-
(Leading edge image loss adjustment) able level.
1) Set the adjustment values for leading edge image loss (LEAD_ Repeat the above adjustments until an acceptable result is
EDGE) for the front and back sides as follows: obtained.
(Standard setting) (Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment)
C: LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1): 15 Set the front surface/back surface (FRONT_REAR) adjustment
F: LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2): 15 value to 20 by entering "20" into the FRONT_REAR adjustment
* Set the adjustment value for "C: LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)" and value field and then pressing the [OK] key.
"F: LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)" to 15 by entering "15" into the Note that changing this adjustment value shifts the image position
(LEAD_EDGE) adjustment value field and then pressing the in the front/rear frame direction.
[OK] key.
2) In DSPF mode, make a duplex copy at 100% magnification,
and make sure that the leading edge image loss is 1.5 mm for
both the front and back sides. (Select duplex mode from the
ADJ 21 Print lead edge image position
paper selection mode as described in Simulation 50-6). adjustment (Printer mode)
Papar lead edge (Print engine section)
* When the resist roller section is disassembled.
TIL = 1.5 mm * When the LSU is replaced or removed.
TV = 3.5 mm * When a U2 trouble occurs.
Image area
Image loss (TIL) (Caution)
This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the lead edge
Void (TV) void area to greater than the standard value (3mm) in the printer
mode.
No Image
If an acceptable result is not obtained, do the following steps.
3) Repeat the process of changing the SIDE1 & SIDE2 adjust-
ment values and then pressing the [OK] key until attaining an
acceptable level.
SIDE1: Adjustment value for the position at which to read the
leading edge of the original in DSPF front side mode.
SIDE2: Adjustment value for the position at which to read the
leading edge of the original in DSPF back side mode.
(The adjustment value should be changed in steps of 0.1 mm.)
(The timing in which to start reading the image should be
determined based on the timing in which detector SPPD4
detects the leading edge of the original.)
(Trailing edge image loss adjustment)
1) In DSPF mode, make a duplex copy at 100% magnification,
and make sure that the trailing edge image loss is 1.5 mm for
both the front and back sides. (Select duplex mode from the
paper selection mode as described in Simulation 50-6).
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE (PRINTER)

A : 30 ; DEN-C
A: XX B : 20 ; DEN-B
1 99 C : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
D: 1 ; MULTI COUNT
E: 2 ; PAPER : CS1
F: 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print

A : 40 ; DEN-C
A: XX B : 20 ; DEN-B
1 99 C : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
D: 1 ; MULTI COUNT
E: 2 ; PAPER : CS1
F: 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE OK
2) Select the set item E with the scroll key, and enter the value
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) paper
in it.
Display/Item Content Adjustment range Default value Standard adjustment value

A DEN-C Printer print image lead edge adjustment 1 99 30 3.0 r 2.0mm
D MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 999 1
E PAPER MFT Cassette select Manual feed 16 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
F DUPLEX YES Duplex print select Select 01 0 1 (NO)
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. 5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust-
The adjustment pattern is printed. ment item DENC with the scroll key.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment 6) Change the adjustment value.
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is Enter the adjustment value and press [OK] or [EXECUTE] key.
in the standard adjustment value range. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
Standard adjustment value: 3.0 r 2.0mm printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
the adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is
decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed
by about 0.1mm.
3.02.0mm Repeat the procedures 4) 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following

procedures.
3) The following items (correction functions) of SIM 44-1 must be
ADJ 22 Copy color balance/density set to ENABLE (default).
adjustment Default
Display Content Set range
value
(1) Note before execution of the copy color balance/density
HV Normal operation high-density Normal Allow
adjustment
process control YES/NO setting (Inhibit: 1:
* After completion of this adjustment, the printer color balance/ HT Normal operation half-tone NO) Allow
density adjustment must be executed. process control YES/NO setting Highlighted
* Requisite conditions before execution of the copy color balance/ TC Transfer output correction YES/ (Allow: 0: Allow
density adjustment NO setting YES)
Before execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment, MD VG Membrane decrease grid voltage Allow
correction YES/NO setting
check to insure that the adjustments which affect the copy color
MD LD Membrane decrease laser power Inhibit
balance/density adjustment have been completed.
voltage correction YES/NO
The importance levels of them are shown below. setting
(The following items affect the copy color balance/density MD EV Membrane decrease Allow
adjustment, and must be checked and adjusted before execu- environment grid voltage
tion of the image quality adjustments.) correction YES/NO setting
MD DL Membrane decrease discharge Allow
1) The following adjustment items must be adjusted properly.
light quantity correction YES/NO
setting
Job Simulation
Adjustment item MD DL EV Membrane decrease Inhibit
No to be used
environment discharge light
ADJ Image density 7A Color image density sensor 44-13
quantity correction YES/NO
7 sensor, image calibration
setting
registration 7B Color image density sensor, 44-2
sensor TN_HUM Toner density humidity correction Allow
black image density sensor,
adjustment YES/NO setting
image registration sensor
adjustment TN_AREA Toner density area correction Allow
YES/NO setting
ADJ Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit) 61-4
8 TN_LIFE Toner density life correction Allow
YES/NO setting
ADJ OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment) 50-22
9 TN_COV Toner density print rate Allow
ADJ Image 12A Image registration adjustment 50-22
12 registration (Main scanning direction, sub TN_PROCON Toner density process control Allow
adjustment scanning direction) (Auto correction YES/NO setting
(Print engine adjustment) TN_ENV Toner density environment Allow
section) 12B Image registration adjustment 50-20 correction YES/NO setting
(Main scanning direction) TN_DRIP Toner density correction, Allow
(Manual adjustment) unconditional supply YES/NO
12C Image registration adjustment 50-21 setting
(Sub scanning direction) TN_SPEND Toner compulsory consumption Allow
(Manual adjustment) mode YES/NO setting
PHT 1Pixel half-tone process control Inhibit
2) The set values of the following simulations must be set to the
default values.
AR_AUTO Auto resist adjustment YES/NO Allow
setting
SIM No Adjustment/setting item Default value
AR_ERROR Error check YES/NO setting Allow
46-1 AU 50
during auto resist adjustment
46-2 AL 50
DM_PHASE Drum phase alignment YES/NO Allow
46-10 AO 500 setting
46-16 AO 500 SENSITIVITY Toner density correction YES/NO Inhibit
setting
PRT_HT Half tone process control printer Allow
correction feedback Enable/
Disable setting
(The following items affect the copy color balance/density (Relationship between the servicing job contents and the copy
adjustment, but it is not required to adjust them frequently. color balance/density adjustment)
When, however, a trouble occurs, check and adjust them.) Note that the preliminary jobs before execution of the copy color
1) The following items must be adjusted properly. balance/density adjustment depend on the machine status and the
servicing conditions.
Job Simulation
Adjustment item Follow the flowchart of the copy color balance/density adjustment
No to be used
procedures depending on the actual conditions.
ADJ Developing doctor gap adjustment (For color)
1 There are following four, major cases.
ADJ Developing roller main pole position adjustment (For 1) When installing the machine.
2 color) 2) When the periodic maintenance is performed.
ADJ High voltage 6A Main charger grid voltage 8-2
3) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
6 adjustment adjustment
(When a consumable part is replaced.)
6B Developing bias voltage 8-1
adjustment 4) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
6C Transfer voltage adjustment 8-6 (Without replacement of a consumable part)
ADJ Scan image 14A Scan image focus adjustment 48-1
14 focus (Document table mode,
adjustment DSPF front surface mode)
(CCD unit 14B Scan image focus adjustment
position (DSPF back surface mode)
adjustment)
(2) Flowchart of the copy color balance/density adjustment procedures
START
When in repair, check/maintenance (with replacing consumable parts)

When in
After After After cleaning
After After install/repair/check
JOB No Work item Simulation replacing replacement scanner
replacing replacing (without replacing
developer of the image (reading)
OPC drum transfer belt consumable parts)
drum density sensor section
OPC drum counter clear 24-7

Developer counter clear 24-5
ADJ 7A Color image density sensor
calibration
44-13

ADJ 9 OPC drum phase adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
50-22
ADJ 8 Image skew adjustment
(LSU (writing) unit)
61-4

ADJ 12 Image registration adjustment
(Print engine section)
50-22 (50-20/
50-21)

The necessary work items for each condition are marked with " ."
Process correction is forcibly

performed. (SIM 44-6)
Execute the half tone image

correction. (SIM 44-26)
Check the copy color balance/density.

(Manual operation) Text/Printed photo mode
(Test chart UKOG-0016FCZZ/
UKOG-0317FCZZ/11 is used.)
Are the copy No Yes Perform ADJ 22A

color balance and density Is the CCD replaced? CCD gamma adjustment.
at satisfactory SIM 63-3 (Normal document mode)
levels?
Set the ST chart
(UKOG-0280FCZZ) on
the original table.
Yes No
Check the copy color balance/density. Enter the SIM 63-03

(Manual operation) Text/Printed photo mode mode and press the
(Test chart UKOG-0016FCZZ/ EXECUTE key.
UKOG-0317FCZZ/11 is used.)
(to Next page) (to Next page) : Standard adjustment flow
Perform ADJ 22C copy color balance/
(from Previous page) (from Previous page) density auto adjustment. (SIM 46-24)
Enter the SIM 46-24 mode and select
A3 (11 x 17) paper. (Auto selection)
Press the EXECUTE key.

(The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern

on the original table, select
the FACTORY mode, and
3 press the EXECUTE key.
Can the
copy color balance and No
density be adjusted to satisfactory
levels with the fine
adjustment?
Is the No
No Use SIM 46-21 to
automatic adjustment
repeated?
Yes Are the
print the color
color balance
and density at the balance check
4 satisfactory sheet, and check
Yes
levels? the patch color
balance of process Press the REPEAT key. Can be
Perform the manual adjustment of ADJ 22D
copy color balance, density adjustment. (SIM 46-21) Yes black. repeated
/Check the copy max. 3 times.
color balance and (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Perform the initial setup of half tone density.
image correction. (SIM 44-21) Check in the
(Manual operation) Set the adjustment pattern
Text/Printed photo on the original table, and
Execute the half tone image correction. mode. (Use the press the EXECUTE key.
(Forcible execution) (SIM 44-26) test chart
UKOG-0317FCZZ/
1 11.) Press the OK key. (The initial
Check the copy color balance and the density. setup of half tone image correction
(Check in the (Manual operation) is automatically performed.)
Text/Printed photo mode.)
*1 (Use the test chart UKOG-0317FCZZ/11.)
The number of Cancel SIM 46-24.
times is limited Were all
to 3 times the three kinds of
Are the copy color balance/density adjustment 4
No color balance and density
targets changed?
Yes
(SIM 63-11)
at satisfactory
levels? Change the color balance/density
No adjustment factory targets. 3
Yes (SIM 63-11)
Were the
No copy color balance and Yes Make the factory color balance target
density Were (when adjusting the copy color
customized? the three kinds of
balance/density with SIM 46-24) same
color balance/density adjustment
as the service color balance target and
targets changed?
Yes (SIM 63-11) the color balance target when adjusting
the density. (SIM63-8)
Auto color balance adjustment No
service target is set.
Enter the SIM 63-7 mode.
Perform the initial setup of half tone

Press the SETUP key. image correction. (SIM 44-21)
1
Set the color patch image (adjustment Execute the half tone image correction.
pattern) printed in the copy color balance/ (Forcible execution) (SIM 44-26)
density adjustment on the original table,
and press the EXECUTE key.
Check the copy color balance and density.
Check in the (Manual operation)
Press the REPEAT key. Text/Printed photo mode.
(Use the test chart UKOG-0317FCZZ/11.)

Are the
No copy color
balance and the density
Press the OK key.
*1 in the specified
The number of level ?
times is limited to
Cancel SIM 63-7.
3 times
Yes
Is the color balance/ Perform ADJ 22G copy color

density adjustment performed
Yes balance/density adjustment
for each copy mode ? for each copy mode separately.
(Does the user request (SIM 46-10)
that ?)
No
The copy color

balance and *1: If a satisfactory result in the copy color balance or the density
density adjustment cannot be obtained by repetition of this loop of procedures
completed. 3 times or more, there may be a problem in the machine conditions.
Check the cause, repair the trouble section, and execute all the
Perform the printer color balance adjustment from the beginning again.
adjustment.
: Standard adjustment flow
(3) Copy color balance and density check
22-A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)
(Note)
(Normal document copy mode)
Before checking the coy color balance and density, be sure to exe-
cute the following jobs. This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) * When the CCD unit is replaced.
forcibly. (SIM 44-6) * When a U2 trouble occurs.
* Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26) * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
(Method) * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0016FCZZ) and a copy (1) Note before adjustment
of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/11), and check
1) Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens
that they are proper.
surface are free from dirt and dust. (If there is some dust and
a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check in the dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
color copy mode
2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of
To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are
chart (UKOG-0016FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart free from dirt and scratches.
(UKOG-0317FCZZ/11). Set the copy density level to "3" in the
If they are dirty, clean them.
Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual), and make a copy.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user
adjustment mode must be set to the default (center). (2) Adjustment procedures
In addition, be sure to use the specified paper for color. 1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
b. Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-
To check the density, use the gray chart (UKOG-0016FCZZ). ment table.
Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
Photo mode (Manual). the left side.
In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user
adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
[Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0016FCZZ)]
In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
the following conditions.
NOTE: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test
chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/11) to check.
(Color copy)
Patch 1 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
Patch 2 is copied. CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
(Black-and-white copy) method using the SIT chart.
Patch 2 is SHARP gray chart NOTE:
slightly copied.
SHARP GRAY CHART Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document
table.
UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
2) Enter the SIM 63-03 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
Patch 3 is copied. The automatic adjustment is started. During the adjustment,
Patch 1 is not copied. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. After completion of the adjust-
ment, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
[Check with the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/11)]
In the copy color balance check with the servicing color test chart, TEST SIMULATION NO.63-03 CLOSE
check to insure the following conditions. SCANNER COLOR BALANCE AUTO ADJUSUTMENT
OC #1:197, #2:185, #3:165, #4:148, #5:117, #6:110,
(Color copy) #7: 88, #8: 75, #9: 55, #10: 45, #11: 38, #12: 29,
#13: 27, #14: 21, #15: 18, #:16: 15, #17: 10, #18: 8,
Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
#19: 5, #20: 4, #22: 2, #:24: 2
C#2:180, C#6:141, C#12: 89 R#2:166, R#6: 43, R#12: 4
M#2:180, M#6:141, M#12: 89 G#2:166, G#6: 43, G#12: 4
Y#2:180, Y#6: 141, Y#12: 89 B#2:166, B#6: 43, B#12: 4
The densities of patches 1 6 of Patch 7 is slightly

each color are properly balanced. copied or not copied.
B G R DSPF OC 1/2
NOTE: 2) Enter the SIM 63-03 mode.
Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ) is easily discolored by
sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and humidity and tempera- TEST
ture, put it in a bag such as a clear file) and store in a dark SCANNER COLOR BALANCE AUTO ADJUSUTMENT
OC #1:197, #2:185, #3:165, #4:148, #5:117, #6:110,
place of low temperature and low humidity.
#7: 88, #8: 75, #9: 55, #10: 45, #11: 38, #12: 29,
22-B CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) #13: 27, #14: 21, #15: 18, #:16: 15, #17: 10, #18: 8,
(DSPF document copy mode) #19: 5, #20: 4, #22: 2, #:24: 2

C#2:180, C#6:141, C#12: 89 R#2:166, R#6: 43, R#12: 4
M#2:180, M#6:141, M#12: 89 G#2:166, G#6: 43, G#12: 4
Y#2:180, Y#6: 141, Y#12: 89 B#2:166, B#6: 43, B#12: 4
(1) Note before adjustment
1) Check to insure that there is no dirt or dust on the SPF scan-
ning glass, the mirror, and the lens surface. (If there is, clean it B G R DSPF OC 1/2
with alcohol.)
2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of 3) When a color key is selected, the adjustment value of the
the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are selected color is displayed.
free from dirt and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them. SCANNER COLOR BALANCE AUTO ADJUSUTMENT
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one. OC #1:197, #2:185, #3:165, #4:148, #5:117, #6:110,
NOTE: #7: 88, #8: 75, #9: 55, #10: 45, #11: 38, #12: 29,
Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ) is easily discolored by #13: 27, #14: 21, #15: 18, #:16: 15, #17: 10, #18: 8,
sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and humidity and tempera- #19: 5, #20: 4, #22: 2, #:24: 2
ture, put it in a bag such as a clear file) and store in a dark

place of low temperature and low humidity. C#2:180, C#6:141, C#12: 89 R#2:166, R#6: 43, R#12: 4
M#2:180, C#6:141, C#12: 89 G#2:166, R#6: 43, R#12: 4
Y#2:180, C#6:141, C#12: 89 B#2:166, R#6: 43, R#12: 4
B G R DSPF OC 1/2
4) When [DSPF] key is pressed, it is highlighted, and the color

automatic adjustment execution screen is displayed.

SCANNER COLOR BALANCE AUTO ADJUSUTMENT
(2) Adjustment procedures SET THE CHART ON DSPF AND TOUCH [EXECUTE]
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)

face-down in the DSPF paper feed tray.
EXECUTE 1/1
5) Press [EXECUTE] key and it is highlighted and the color auto

adjustment is executed.
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during the automatic
adjustment, the automatic adjustment is interrupted.

NOW CHART PATCH READING...
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
EXECUTE 1/1
6) After normal completion, the result of calculation is displayed a. General
in the initial screen. The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
* When an error occurs in execution, the following screen is dis- the copy density of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black with SIM 46-
played. 24 or the user program automatically.
When [CA] key is pressed, the simulation is terminated. When (When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the display returns to the of all the copy modes are revised.)
sub number entry screen. There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
ment.
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24
SCANNER MOTOR IS NOT READY
is used.)
2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the copy color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine environment is greatly changed, this function does
EXECUTE 1/1 not work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
* When an error occurs in the automatic adjustment, all the error serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
patch numbers are displayed. though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the
When [RESULT] key is pressed, the display returns to the initial machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
screen. (The previous value is displayed) the normal color balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.
SAMPRING DATA UNFIT
b. Note for executing the color balance adjustment (Auto
adjustment)
#1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, #8, #9, #10, #11, #12, #13, #14, #15,
1) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly.
#16, #17, #18, #19, #20, #22, #24
2) The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted prop-
PLEASE CHECK THE CHART AND PLATEN GLASS
erly.
3) Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
4) Before execution of the image quality check and the image
quality adjustment, be sure to execute the following correc-
tions forcibly to set the image forming section to the optimum
B G R RESULT 1/1
state.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correc-
* When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis- tion) forcibly. (SIM44-6)
played. When [RESULT] key is pressed, the display returns to * Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
the initial screen. (The calculation result of normal completion is
c. Adjustment procedure
displayed.)
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
TEST SIMULATION NO.63-03 CLOSE 1) Enter the SIM 46-24 mode.
COMPLETE TEST SIMULATION NO.46-24 CLOSE
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PROCON EXECUTIONAND PRINT THE TEST PATCH.
(PLEASE USE SPECIFIED TYPE OF A3 OR 11" 17" SIZE PAPER
FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT)
EXECUTE
B G R RESULT 1/1
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
selected.)
22-C Copy color balance adjustment (Auto The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
adjustment)
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory
procedure 2) on the document table. target gamma data are the same. Both are set to the standard
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper color balance when shipping.
so that the thin lines on the paper are on the left side. Place 5 For the service target, the customized color balance gamma
sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image (adjust- can be registered with SIM 63-7.
ment pattern) paper. 5) Press [REPEAT] key.
The operation panel is changed and [EXECUTE] key is dis-
played.
CONFIRM THE ADJUSTED PATCH AND PRESS [OK] TO REGISTER THIS PATCH DATA
, PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE.
REPEAT OK

The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.

4) Press [FACTORY] key, and press [EXECUTE] key. ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
When the color balance is customized with the manual color PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PRINT THE TEST PATCH
balance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's

request and the color balance is registered as the service tar- FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT
get with SIM 63-7, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
balance, select the service target.
EXECUTE
7) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
PLEASE SELECT THE MODE (FACTORY) OR (SERVICE) AND PLACE
procedure same as the procedure 3) on the document table.
THE PRINTED TEST PATCH ON DOCUMENT GLASS THEN PRESS [EXECUTE].
,
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically performed,
*LIGHT AREA AT LEFT SIDE ON DOCUMENT GLASS.
and the color balance check patch image is printed out.
9) Press [OK] key.
TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-24 CLOSE

FACTORY SERVICE EXECUTE
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed CONFIRM THE ADJUSTED PATCH AND PRESS [OK] TO REGISTER THIS PATCH DATA
to print the color balance check patch image. Wait until the ,PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE.
operation panel shown in the next procedure is displayed.

NOTE:
Check the printed color balance check patch image to insure
that the color balance adjustment result is satisfactory to deter- REPEAT OK
mine how many times the procedures 5) - 8) must be repeated.

After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
If the color balance adjustment result is not satisfactory and if correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
the procedure 5) is satisfactory, go to the procedure 9). ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis-
The procedures 5) - 8) can be repeated max. 3 times. played. This operation takes several minutes.
When this procedure is repeated, the color balance adjustment After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
accuracy is improved, especially the color balance adjustment MODE" is displayed.
accuracy in the low density area is improved. Note that the NOTE:
color balance adjustment accuracy, however, varies depend-
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
ing on the machine status.
MODE" is displayed.
Remark:
(Descriptions on FACTORY key and SERVICE key in the color TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-24 CLOSE
balance auto adjustment menu.) ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.
auto adjustment; Factory and Service.

FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE.
above two.
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be
selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM
63-11.)
Service target color balance: The color balance can be cus-
tomized according to the user's request. (Variable)
10) Check the color balance and density. 11) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction.
There are three methods to check the color balance and the (Forcible execution)
density. Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
(Method 1) [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch
image is within the following specifications. TEST
HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
TOUCH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.

Fig. 1 PG image
Low density High density
Y
M EXECUTE
C It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-

Bk pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
(Normal end (Auto transition))

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O Max
Patch A of each of Y, M, 1) The max. density [S_VALUE]

C, and BK are not copied. section is not blurred.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, #1: 907, #2: 902, #3: 909, #4:921, #5:936
and BK is very slightly copied.
#6: 347, #7:992, #8:1047, #9:1081, #10:1137
3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK #11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260

The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
The patch density is changed gradually.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter

level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same K C M Y EXECUTE 1/1
level.
Patch B may not be copied. (Abnormal end (Auto transition))
Patch A must not be copied.
(Method 2) [S_VALUE]
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 46-21 #1: ERR, #2: ERR, #3: ERR, #4: ERR, #5: ERR
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance #6: ERR, #7: ERR, #8: ERR, #9: ERR, #10: ERR
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be #11: ERR, #12: ERR, #13: ERR, #14: ERR,#15: ERR
checked more precisely.

Y
M K C M Y EXECUTE 1/1
C
Bk
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
CMY 12) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/11) in the
mixed
color Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance/
density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density
check.)
3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, 1) The max. density
If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, per-
2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied. and BK is very slightly copied. section is not blurred. form the following procedures.
4) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. 13) Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction.
(SIM 44-21)
(Method 3) 14) Execute the half tone image correction. (Forcible execution)
Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/11) in the (SIM44-26)
Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color bal- 15) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/11) in the
ance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color bal-
and density check.) ance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/den-
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained sity check.)
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in Repeat the procedures 13) 15) until a satisfactory result is
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM obtained.
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1). However, the number of times of repeat is limited to 3 times. If the
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce- copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the specified
dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ level by repeating the procedures 3 times, there may be another
22D). cause.
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe- Troubleshoot the cause and repair or perform proper treatments,
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment from the
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ beginning.
22D). If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory results of the
copy color balance and density, use SIM 46-21 (ADJ 22D) (Manual
adjustment).
22-D Copy color balance adjustment (Manual selected.)
adjustment) The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
This adjustment is required in the following cases: 3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is balance is satisfactory.
replaced. If not, execute the following procedures.
* When the CCD is replaced.
Y
M
C
Bk
a. General CMY
mixed
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to color
adjust the copy density (15 pts for each color) of CMYK according A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O Max
to a request from the user for changing (customizing) the color bal-
ance because the automatic adjustment stated above is resulted in 2) Patch A of each of Y, M, 3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, 1) The max. density
C, and BK are not copied. and BK is very slightly copied. section is not blurred.
an unsatisfactory result or a fine adjustment is required.
In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal- The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
efficiency. not be reversed.
b. Note for the color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) The density level of each color must be almost at the same
1) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly. level.
2) The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted prop- Patch B may not be copied.
erly. Patch A must not be copied.
3) Set the color patch image adjustment patter on the document When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
table, and place 5 sheet of white paper on it. request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
4) Be sure to use the specified paper for color. color balance stated above.
5) Before execution of the image quality check and adjustment, 4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
be sure to execute the following corrections to set the image select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
forming section to the optimum state. 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
* Execute the high density image correction (process correc- The adjustment value is set in the range of 245 755 (1
tion) forcibly. (SIM 44-6) 999). When SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26) balance and density, all the set values of this simulation are set
to 500.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
1) Enter the SIM 46-21 mode.
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-21 CLOSE Repeat procedures of 2) 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [ALL(COLOR)]
A : 500 ; POINT1
fied.
A: XXX B : 500 ; POINT2
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
245 755
C : 500 ; POINT3
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
D : 500 ; POINT4
E : 500 ; POINT5
adjustment values of A O to a same level collectively.
F : 500 ; POINT6 Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
G : 500 ; POINT7
way of adjustment.
H : 500 ; POINT8
I : 500 ; POINT9
Referring to the black and gray patches, adjust so that each
J : 500 ; POINT10
process (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A O
K : 500 ; POINT11 approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
L : 500 ; POINT12
6) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
0317FCZZ/11) and a user's document according to necessity
K C M Y EXECUTE OK
C in the normal copy mode, the text/Printed Photo mode (Man-

EXECUTE
10-key ual) to check the adjustment result. (Refer to the item of the
EXECUTE or self print end copy color balance/density check.)
7) Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the half tone
image correction.)
A : 400 ; POINT1

TEST
C : 500 ; POINT3
245 755
D : 500 ; POINT4
HALF TONE PROCON STANDARD VALUE REGISTER
E : 500 ; POINT5 TOUCH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.
F : 500 ; POINT6
G : 500 ; POINT7
H : 500 ; POINT8
I : 500 ; POINT9
J : 500 ; POINT10
EXECUTE
K : 500 ; POINT11
L : 500 ; POINT12
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
K C M Y EXECUTE OK
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
(Normal end (Auto transition)) (Abnormal end (Auto transition))
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-21 CLOSE TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE
HALF TONE PROCON STANDARD VALUE REGISTER HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
RESULT RESULT
COMPLETE ERROR:K,C,M,Y
RESULT EXECUTE RESULT EXECUTE
After completion of the operation, cancel the simulation.

(Abnormal end (Auto transition))
9) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
0317FCZZ/11) and a user's document according to necessity
TEST
in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and check the adjust-
ment result again. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/
RESULT
density check.)
ERROR:K,C,M,Y If the copy color balance and density are not in the specified
level, repeat procedures of 7) 9) until they are in the speci-
fied range.
The number of repeat is, however, limited to 3 times.
RESULT EXECUTE If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the
specified level by repeating the procedures 3 times, there may
After completion of the operation, cancel the simulation. be another cause.
This procedure is to save the copy color balance adjustment Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treat-
data as the reference data for the half tone correction. ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
Immediately after execution of ADJ 22D (Color balance adjust- from the beginning.
ment, Manual) with SIM 46-21, be sure to execute this proce- (NOTE)
dure.
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register the
When ADJ 22C (Color balance adjustment, Auto) is executed color balance as the service target.
with SIM 46-24, this procedure is automatically executed.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the required.
operation is started.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar-
8) Execute SIM 44-26 to perform the half tone image correction. get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
(Forcible execution) the next color balance adjustment.
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started. color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode
to make an adjustment to the similar color balance as the reg-
TEST istered color balance.

(Auto color balance adjustment target gamma setting)
a. General
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer-
tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
EXECUTE There are following three kinds of the target.
Factory color balance (gamma) target
It takes several minute to complete the operation. After com-
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed. Service color balance (gamma) target
User color balance (gamma) target
(Normal end (Auto transition)) In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
to a desired level.
CLOSE
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjust-
RESULT
ment) is executed with SIM 46-21).
COMPLETE * When a U2 trouble occurs.
RESULT EXECUTE * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
improper.
Each color balance target for the copy color balance adjustment
Kind Descriptions
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance target,
balance and each of them is specified according to the
(gamma) target machine design. Use SIM 63-11 to select one of
them as the factory target. The default setting
(factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1) which
emphasizes color reproduction.
B Service color This target is used when the user requests to
balance customize the color balance to users desired level.
(gamma) target In advance, the users unique color balance must
be registered as the service color balance target.
The above registration (setting) is made by the
serviceman with SIM 46-21 to adjust the color
balance and with SIM 63-7 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
executes the color balance adjustment.
When, therefore, the service color balance target is
changed, the color balance target of the users
color balance adjustment is also changed. When,
however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance
is set to the factory color balance target set with
SIM 63-11.
The default setting (factory setting) of the color
balance is same as the factory color balance
target. (Emphasized on color reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
color balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the
color balance to the factory color balance target.
C User color Same color balance as the service color balance
balance (gamma) target
(gamma) target When the service color balance target is changed,
this color balance target is also changed
accordingly.
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the copy
color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Color balance target in the copy color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Use SIM 63-11 to select
one of the three kinds of Factory color balance Service color balance Factory setting
color balance targets. =
target (DEF1) target
Factory color balance
target (DEF1) Use SIM 46-21 to adjust the
Factory color balance Service color balance
optional color balance, and
target (one of DEF1 3) target (Unique)
Factory color balance use SIM 63-7 to register it.
target (DEF2)
Factory color balance Service color balance Execute SIM 63-8.
Factory color balance =
target (one of DEF1 3) target (The service color balance
target (DEF3)
target is the same as the
factory color balance target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for

Service color balance
the user color balance =
target
adjustment
Factory target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
By use of SIM 63-11, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM63-8
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target (DEF2) Service color balance target/Color balance
target for the user color balance adjustment
+b* Direction of Yellow
SIM63-8
Hue
Factory color balance target
Factory color
(DEF1) = Service color balance
balance target
target/Color balance target for the
(DEF1)
user color balance adjustment
+a*
Direction Direction DEF1 Color balance with emphasis on color Default
of Green of Red reproduction (factory setting)
DEF2 Color balance with slightly strong Cyan
DEF3 Color balance with emphasis on Cyan
Direction of Blue

SIM63-8 target for the user color balance adjustment
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust- The service color balance target data are basically registered
ment (SIM 45-24). immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance 46-21.
can be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7. If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal-
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the
the same balance as the factory color balance target set with adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
SIM 63-11. balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24). When, therefore, judges as follows.
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also Select the service color balance target with SIM 46-24 and execute
changed accordingly. the color valance adjustment (Auto), and check the adjustment
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and result. When the result is unsatisfactory or abnormal, the registered
service target data for the color balance adjustment (Auto) may be
the purpose of registration)
improper.
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
customized with SIM 46-21.
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7.
required.
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man- made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
ual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7 SIM 46-21. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
to register the service color balance target data by use of the
b. Setting procedure
printed adjustment pattern.
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
the service color balance target)
It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with
1) Use SIM 46-21 (Copy color balance adjustment (manual
SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
same color balance target to another machine.
(adjustment pattern).
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data.
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
from discoloration and dirt. optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
adjustment.
2) Enter the SIM 63-7 mode. (Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
TEST SIMULATION NO.63-07 CLOSE the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
SCANNER TARGET OF COLOR CALIB SETUP:SERVICE
#B: 91, #C 2944, #D: 3227, #E: 5822, #F: 8600
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 46-21 to a unique color balance requested
#G: 28935, #H: 54344, #I: 86968, #J: 122678, #K: 151198
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
#L: 169731, #M: 195950, #N: 201249, #:O: 207112 get with SIM 63-7.
* When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 63-11,
be sure to execute this procedure.
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SETTING:SERVICE
K C M Y SETUP 1/1
3) Press [SETUP] key.

4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE
adjusted and printed in the copy color balance adjustment

(Manual adjustment) (SIM 46-21) (ADJ 22D) on the document
table. 3) Press [YES] key.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed with SIM The service color balance target and the color balance target for
64-2 can be used instead. In this case, however, check that the the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-
printed pattern is normal. ance as the factory color balance target.
(When the color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed by
SIM 64-2, set the item B (PROC ADJ) to "0 (YES)" and press 22-E Copy density adjustment (Each color copy
[EXECUTE] key to print.) mode) (Whole adjustment) (Normally
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another unnecessary to adjust)
machine can be used. This adjustment is required in the following cases.
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side. * When a U2 trouble occurs.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
SIM 46-21 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not exe-
individual adjustments are not required. When there is a request
cute SIM 63-7 to register the service color balance target data.
from the user, execute this adjustment.
SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUP SERVICE
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(COLOR)[COPY]
SET THE CHART ON PLATEN AND TOUCH [EXECUTE]. A : 50 ; AUTO
A: XX B : 50 ; TEXT
1 99 C : 50 ; TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
D : 50 ; TEXT/PHOTO
E : 50 ; PRINTED PHOTO
EXECUTE
F : 50 ; PHOTOGRAPH
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read. G : 50 ; MAP
H : 50 ; LIGHT
6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
I: 50 ; TEXT (COPY TO COPY)
(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again. J: 50 ; TEX/PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)
K : 50 ; PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)

L : 50 ; TEXT (COLOR TONE ENHANCEMENT)
SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUP: SERVICE
OK
10-key
OK

EXECUTE
A : 45 ; AUTO
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color A: XX B : 50 ; TEXT
(KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys. C : 50 ; TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO

1 99
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B O. D : 50 ; TEXT/PHOTO
If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is judged as E : 50 ; PRINTED PHOTO
abnormal. F : 50 ; PHOTOGRAPH
In case of an abnormality, settle the problem and try again. G : 50 ; MAP
7) Press [OK] key. H : 50 ; LIGHT

The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
J: 50 ; TEX/PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
get.
L : 50 ; TEXT (COLOR TONE ENHANCEMENT)
OK
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 1) Enter the SIM 46-2 mode.
Adjustment Default TEST SIMULATION NO.46-02 CLOSE

Display/Item (Copy mode)
value range value EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[COPY]
A AUTO Auto 1 99 50 A : 50 ; AUTO1
B TEXT Text 1 99 50 A: XX B : 50 ; AUTO2
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 99 50 1 99 C : 50 ; TEXT
PHOTO D : 50 ; TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 99 50 E : 50 ; TEXT/PHOTO
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 99 50 F : 50 ; PRINTED PHOTO
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 99 50 G : 50 ; PHOTOGRAPH

G MAP Map 1 99 50
H : 50 ; MAP
H LIGHT Light document 1 99 50
I TEXT (COPY TO Text (Copy 1 99 50
COPY) document) J: 50 ; TEX/PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 99 50 K : 50 ; PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)
PHOTO (COPY TO (Copy document) L : 50 ; LIGHT
COPY)
OK
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document)
L TEXT (COLOR Text (Color tone 1 99 50 10-key
TONE enhancement) OK
ENHANCEMENT)
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 99 50
PHOTO (COLOR (Color tone
TONE enhancement) EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[COPY]
ENHANCEMENT) A : 45 ; AUTO1
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 99 50
A: XX B : 50 ; AUTO2
(COLOR TONE (Color tone 1 99 C : 50 ; TEXT
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) D : 50 ; TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 99 50 E : 50 ; TEXT/PHOTO
(COLOR TONE (Color tone F : 50 ; PRINTED PHOTO

ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
G : 50 ; PHOTOGRAPH
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph (Color 1 99 50
H : 50 ; MAP
(COLOR TONE tone enhancement)
ENHANCEMENT) I: 50 ; TEXT (COPY TO COPY)
Q MAP (COLOR TONE Map (Color tone 1 99 50 J: 50 ; TEX/PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) K : 50 ; PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)
R SINGLE COLOR Single color 1 99 50 L : 50 ; LIGHT

S SINGLE COLOR Single color (Copy 1 99 50
OK
(COPY TO COPY) document)
T TWO COLOR Two-color (Red/ 1 99 50 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
Black) copy
U TWO COLOR Two-color (Red/ 1 99 50 Adjustment Default
(COPY TO COPY) Black) copy (Copy Display/Item (Copy mode)
value range value
document)
A AUTO1 Auto 1 1 99 50
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. B AUTO2 Auto 2 1 99 50
4) Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the nor- C TEXT Text 1 99 50
mal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result. D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 99 50
PHOTO
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alter-
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 99 50
nately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 99 50
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 99 50
normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and H MAP Map 1 99 50
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is I TEXT (COPY TO Text (Copy 1 99 50
obtained. COPY) document)
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To J TEXT/PRINTED Test/Printed Photo 1 99 50
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value. PHOTO (COPY TO (Copy document)
COPY)
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 99 50
22-F Copy density adjustment (Each
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document)
monochrome copy mode) (Whole L LIGHT Light density 1 99 50
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to document
adjust) 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
This adjustment is required in the following cases. 4) Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the nor-
* When a U2 trouble occurs. mal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alter-
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. nately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the
individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment is exe- normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
cuted when there is a request from the user. checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
M X - 7 0 0 0 N A D J U S T M E N T S 6 5 3
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key.
22-G Copy color balance adjustment (Color
3) Select a color to change the adjustment value with the color
balance adjustment at each density level in key.
each color copy mode) (Normally not 4) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
required) key.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
Density level Adjustment
* When a U2 trouble occurs. Item/Display Default value
(Point) value range
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. A POINT1 Point 1 245 755 500
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. B POINT2 Point 2 245 755 500
This is to adjust the color balance at each density level in each C POINT3 Point 3 245 755 500
color copy mode. D POINT4 Point 4 245 755 500
E POINT5 Point 5 245 755 500
Normally individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment
F POINT6 Point 6 245 755 500
is executed when there is a request from the user.
G POINT7 Point 7 245 755 500
H POINT8 Point 8 245 755 500
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-10 CLOSE I POINT9 Point 9 245 755 500
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT J POINT10 Point 10 245 755 500
TEXT TEXT/PRT PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO
K POINT11 Point 11 245 755 500
MAP LIGHT COPY ORG L POINT12 Point 12 245 755 500
M POINT13 Point 13 245 755 500
N POINT14 Point 14 245 755 500
O POINT15 Point 15 245 755 500
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
EXECUTE 1/1 increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
TEXT sity is decreased.
When the arrow key is pressed, the color densities selected
TEST
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT

with the color keys are collectively adjusted. That is, all the
A : 500 POINT1
density levels (points) from the low density point to the high
A: XXX
density point can be adjusted collectively.
B : 500 POINT2
245 755 C : 500 POINT3
D : 500 POINT4
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
E : 500 POINT5
printed out.
F : 500 POINT6
G : 500 POINT7 The color balance at each density level (point) and the density
H: 500 POINT8
can be checked by referring to this printed adjustment pattern.
However, it is more practically to make a cop and check it.
I : 500 POINT9
J : 500 POINT
K : 500 POINT11
L : 500 POINT12
22-H Monochrome copy density adjustment
K C M Y EXECUTE OK
(Density adjustment at each density level in
C
each monochrome copy mode) (Normally
10-key not required)
OK
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-10 CLOSE * When a U2 trouble occurs.
A : 300 POINT1
A: XXX B : 500
C : 500

POINT2
POINT3
245 755
D : 500 POINT4 This is to adjust each density level in each monochrome copy
E : 500 POINT5
mode.
F : 500 POINT6
G : 500 POINT7 Normally individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment
H: 500 POINT8 is executed when there is a request from the user.
I : 500 POINT9
J : 500 POINT
K : 500 POINT11
L : 500 POINT12
K C M Y EXECUTE OK
EXECUTE EXECUTE
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
or end of print

A : 300 POINT1
A: XXX B : 500 POINT2
245 755 C : 500 POINT3
D : 500 POINT4
E : 500 POINT5
F : 500 POINT6
G : 500 POINT7
H: 500 POINT8
I : 500 POINT9
J : 500 POINT
K : 500 POINT11
L : 500 POINT12
K C M Y EXECUTE OK
1) Enter the SIM 46-16 mode. When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is
required in the following cases.
TEST
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [ALL(B/W)]:PG
A : 500 ; POINT1

C : 500 ; POINT3 1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode.
373 627
D : 500 ; POINT4
E : 500 ; POINT5
COEFFICIENT OF GAMMA SETUP
F : 500 ; POINT6
A : 50 ; BLACK TEXT (SLOPE)
G : 500 ; POINT7 A: XX B : 50 ; BLACK TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
H : 500 ; POINT8 C : 50 ; COLOR TEXT (SLOPE)

1 99
I : 500 ; POINT9 D : 50 ; COLOR TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
E : 50 ; ED TEXT (SLOPE)
J : 500 ; POINT10
F : 50 ; ED TEXT (INTERCEPT)
K : 500 ; POINT11
L : 500 ; POINT12
EXECUTE OK
10-key EXECUTE OK
EXECUTE or self print end

10-key
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-16 CLOSE OK

A : 450 ; POINT1 TEST SIMULATION NO.46-27 CLOSE
A: XXX B : 500 ; POINT2 COEFFICIENT OF GAMMA SETUP

C : 500 ; POINT3
373 627
D : 500 ; POINT4
A: XX B : 50 ; BLACK TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
C : 50 ; COLOR TEXT (SLOPE)

E : 500 ; POINT5 1 99
D : 50 ; COLOR TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
F : 500 ; POINT6
G : 500 ; POINT7
H : 500 ; POINT8
I : 500 ; POINT9
J : 500 ; POINT10
K : 500 ; POINT11
OK
L : 500 ; POINT12
EXECUTE OK 2) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
2) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll Display/Item Adjustment Default
Content
key. (Copy mode) range value
A BLACK TEXT Black text edge area 1 99 50
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
(SLOPE) engine J curve calculation
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is coefficient (slope) setting
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den- B BLACK TEXT Black text edge area 1 99 50
sity is decreased. (INTERCEPT) engine J curve calculation
When the arrow key is pressed, the selected are collectively coefficient (density) setting
adjusted. That is, all the density levels (points) from the low C COLOR TEXT Color text edge area 1 99 50
density point to the high density point can be adjusted collec- (SLOPE) engine J curve calculation
coefficient (slope) setting
tively.
D COLOR TEXT Color text edge area 1 99 50
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is (INTERCEPT) engine J curve calculation
printed out. coefficient (density) setting
The density at each density level (point) can be checked by E ED TEXT Error diffusion edge area 1 99 50
referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more (SLOPE) engine J curve calculation
practically to make a cop and check it. coefficient (slope) setting
F ED TEXT Error diffusion edge area 1 99 50
(INTERCEPT) engine J curve calculation
22-I Gamma/density adjustment in the text coefficient (density) setting
image edge section (Normally not required) 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
This adjustment is used to change the reproduction level of text When the adjustment value of item A, C, or E is changed, the
and outline to an optional level by changing the gamma and the gamma at the edge area of text and lines is changed.
density at the edge section of text image. The thickness of fine text
When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast at
and fine lines is changed by this adjustment.
the edge area of text and lines is increased. When the adjust-
The black text edge/color text edge adjustment is enabled only in ment value is decreased, the contrast is decreased.
the Text/Printed Photo mode and the Text/Photograph copy mode.
When the adjustment value of item B, D, or F is increased, the
The error diffusion edge adjustment is enabled only in the 2-color image density at the edge area of text and lines is increased.
copy mode. When the value is decreased, the density is decreased.
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Press [CLOSE] key to exit from the simulation.
6) Make a copy in the TEXT/Printed Photo copy mode (Manual), 5) Press [OK] key.
and check the copy. 6) Press [CLOSE] key to exit from the simulation.
Use a document with fine text and line images for copying and 7) Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the
checking. copy.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-27 If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25 mode
mode and change the adjustment value. and change the adjustment value. Repeat the above procedures
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is until a satisfactory result is obtained.
obtained.
22-K Auto color balance adjustment by the user
22-J Copy color balance adjustment (Single (Copy color balance auto adjustment
color copy mode) (Normally not required) ENABLE setting and adjustment)
This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in a. General
the single color copy mode to the user's request.
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color cal-
The adjustment is made by changing YMC components of each
ibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density).
color.
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
This adjustment is not required normally, but executed when there
tion with SIM 26-53.
is a request from the user.
When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
required in the following cases. understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy
color balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged enough to execute the adjustment.
When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. operating procedures, notes, and operations to the user.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. This adjustment is required in the following cases.
a. Adjustment procedures * When a U2 trouble occurs.
1) Enter the SIM 46-25 mode. * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
SINGLE COLOR MODE COLOR BALANCE SETUP
A: 0 ; RED
A: XXX B : 255 ; GREEN
C : 255 ; BLUE
0 255
D: 0 ; YELLOW
E: 0 ; MAGENTA
F : 255 ; CYAN
ENAIBLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION
A: 1 ; (1:YES 0:NO)
A: X
0 1
C M Y OK
10-key
OK

OK
A : 255 ; RED
A: XXX B : 255 ; GREEN
C : 255 ; BLUE 10-key

0 255
D: 0 ; YELLOW OK
E: 0 ; MAGENTA
F : 255 ; CYAN TEST SIMULATION NO.26-53 CLOSE

A: 0 ; (1:YES 0:NO)
A: X
0 1
C M Y OK
2) Select the color to be adjusted with the scroll key.

3) Select the color (YMC) to be adjusted with the color key.
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Adjustment Default value

Display/Item
value C M Y
OK
A RED 0 255 0 255 255
B GREEN 0 255 255 0 255
C BLUE 0 255 255 255 0
D YELLOW 0 255 0 0 255
E MAGENTA 0 255 0 255 0
F CYAN 0 255 255 0 0
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key. 1) Enter the SIM 46-33 mode.
When disabling, set to "0" (NO).
When enabling, set to "1" (Yes).
COLOR AUTO MODE ADJUSTMENT(ACS 4DIGIT UNDER)
3) Press [OK] key. A: 7 ; THCLMK_1
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration A: X B: 2 ; THCLBK_1
(automatic adjustment of copy color balance and density) is not dis-
0 9
played in the user program mode.
C: 0 ; ACSMSK_1
(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjust- D: 7 ; THCLMK_2
ment)) E: 2 ; THCLBK_2
Remark: This adjustment is based on the service target color bal- F: 0 ; ACSMSK_2
ance set with SIM 63-7 and SIM 63-8. If, therefore, the above set-
G: 7 ; THCLMK_3
tings are not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made
properly. H: 2 ; THCLBK_3
1) Enter the system setting mode. I: 0 ; ACSMSK_3
2) Enter the copy setting mode. J: 7 ; THCLMK_4
3) Press the auto color calibration key. K: 2 ; THCLBK_4
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. BACK NEXT OK
System settings 2) Select COLOR AE mode with [NEXT] and [BACK] key.
3) Select the setting mode with the scroll key.
Adjustment Default
range value
COLOR A SW_ ON Auto mode: Text 01 1
AE MODE1 OFF document
background
detection
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. B SW_ ON Auto mode: Text 01 1
5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in pro- MODE2 OFF mesh document
background
cedure 4) on the document table. Set the patch image so that
detection
the light density area is on the left side.
C SW_ ON Auto mode: Text- 01 1
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color MODE3 OFF on-mesh
patch image (adjustment pattern). document
background
Black Yellow detection
D SW_ ON Auto mode: Mesh 01 0
Red
MODE4 OFF document
Blue background
detection
E SW_ ON Auto mode: Photo 01 0
MODE5 OFF document
background
detection
F SW_ ON Auto mode: text 01 0
MODE6 OFF document
background
detection
G SW_ ON Auto mode: Other 01 0
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment MODE7 OFF document
is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment, background
the display returns to the original operation screen. detection
H TH_MAX_ Monochrome 0 32 17
MONO background
22-L Background process condition setting in detection
the color auto copy mode threshold value
When the adjustment value is changed from the default adjustment I TH_MAX_ Color background 0 32 17
value, this adjustment is required in the following cases. COLOR detection
threshold value
J SW_NEWS Newspaper 01 0
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. background
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. forcible delete
switch
* When the user request for the adjustment.
K SW_MODE_ Mesh area 13 3
This adjustment is used to set the condition for inhibiting copy of SCR1 background
the background depending on the document image kind and state. judgment switch
The setting is applied to the color auto copy mode. L SW_MODE_ Mesh area 01 0
SCR2 background delete
select switch
M SW_MODE_ Auto other 12 2
MIX document
background
detection switch
Adjustment Default Set item A (TH_MODE_SCR):
range value Used to set the mesh are level at which the background delete
COLOR N SW_HOSEI Correction table 08 4 function is enabled for printed documents with mesh images.
AE correction (4 +4)
To delete background of documents with much mesh area:
O AE ON Selection of color 01 1
Increase the set value.
COLOR OFF correction table in
TABLE color AE To delete background of documents with less mesh area:
P BG_REMOVE_ Background 17 4 Decrease the set value.
LEVEL (OC) removal level Select TH_MODE_SCR, enter the set value, and press [SET]
change (OC) key to save the entered value to the memory.
Q BG_REMOVE_ Background 17 4
(NOTE)
LEVEL (RSPF) removal level
change (RSPF) Enable/Disable of the background delete operation is determined
R BG_REMOVE_ Background 17 4 by AND condition of A (SW MODE1) G (SW MODE7), H (TH_
LEVEL (DSPF removal level MAX_MONO), I (TH_MAX_COLOR), and A (TH_MODE_SCR).
SIDE1) change (DSPF For newspapers documents, however, it is determined by the set
front surface) item J (SW_NEWS) only.
S BG_REMOVE_ Background 17 4 Except for the above set items, do not change the setting in the
LEVEL (DSPF removal level
market. Set them to the default values.
SIDE2) change (DSPF
back surface)
T BG_REMOVE_ Background 0 100 0 22-M Color document identification level (ACS
ADJ judgment operation) setting
correction value
When the machine is used with some adjustment values changed
A TH_MODE_ Mesh ratio 0 10000 3000
from the default values, this adjustment is required in the following
SCR threshold value
cases.
B TH_SITAJI_ Background mesh 0 10000 3000
SCR threshold value * When a U2 trouble occurs.
Set item A (SW MODE1) G (SW MODE7): * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
Used to set Enable/Disable of the background delete function * When the user requests for the adjustment.
for various kinds of documents. This setting is used to set the recognition level of a color image in a
When the value of the set item corresponding to the document document.
kind is set to 1, the background delete function of the docu- The actual ACS operation is executed according to the combination
ment kind is enabled. of the judgment reference value in the color auto mode set by the
To reproduce the document colors directly, set this setting to device and this setting.
OFF (0). When a monochrome document cannot be judged as a mono-
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the entered chrome document or when a color document cannot be judged as a
value to the memory. color document, change this setting. This setting is applied to the
Set item H (TH_MAX_MONO): color auto copy mode.
Used to set the density level at which the background delete 1) Enter the SIM 46-33 mode.
function is enabled for monochrome background documents.
Set to the range of 0 16.
To delete the background of light-density documents: Increase A: 7 ; THCLMK_1
the set value. A: X B: 2 ; THCLBK_1
To delete the background of dark-density documents:
0 9 C: 0 ; ACSMSK_1
Decrease the set value.
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set D: 7 ; THCLMK_2
value to the memory. E: 2 ; THCLBK_2
Set item I (TH_MAX_COLOR): F: 0 ; ACSMSK_2
Used to set the density level at which the background delete G: 7 ; THCLMK_3
function is enabled for color background documents.

H: 2 ; THCLBK_3
Set to the range of 0 16.
I: 0 ; ACSMSK_3
To delete the background of light-density documents: Increase
the set value. J: 7 ; THCLMK_4
To delete the background of dark-density documents: K: 2 ; THCLBK_4
Decrease the set value. BACK NEXT OK
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
value to the memory. 2) Select the ACS mode with [NEXT] key and [BACK] key.
Set item J (SW_NEWS): 3) Select the setting mode of "P/SIM LEVEL" with the scroll key.
Used to set Enable/Disable of the newspaper (monochrome) When a monochrome document is not recognized as a mono-
background delete function. chrome document, increase the set value.
It is not affected by the set item H. When a color document is not recognized as a color docu-
For newspapers of color background, this setting is invalid. ment, decrease the set value.
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
value to the memory. value to the memory.
The figure in the table indicates the ACS setting level in the
device setting.
The ACS setting level of the device setting (the judgment refer-
ence value in the color auto mode) is changed with the setting
of SIM 46-33 ACS/P/SIM LEVEL.
The left and the upper area from the cross point of the device
setting on the table and the ACS/P/SIM LEVEL setting serves
as the ACS operation condition.
Large hue area Small hue area
Hue area (Device setting ACS setting level

(Judgment reference set value in the color auto mode))
ACS color judgment setting Area level 5 Area level 4 Area level 3 Area level 2 Area level 1
Can be set optionally. About 10mm 5mm About 5mm 5mm About 3mm 4mm About 1mm 3mm
(30000 pixel or more) (30000 pixel) (15000 pixel) (7000 pixel) (1875 pixel)
Hue level Hue level 5 C C
Strong hue
(SIM LEVEL) Hue level 4 B B C C
Hue level 3 A A B B C
Hue level 2 A A B
Weak hue
Hue level 1 A
Device setting ACS setting level (Judgment reference set

value in the color auto mode) (5 steps)
[Monochrome] 1m2m3o4o5 [Color]
SIM 46-33 ACS/P/SIM LEVEL (3 steps)
Weak hue [Monochrome] l [Color] Strong hue
XC XB XA
* Adjustment in 3 steps of device setting
(Example) When the ASC setting level of device setting (judgment
reference set value in the color auto mode) is 2 and SIM 46-33
ACS/P/SIM LEVEL is set to 3, the following area serves as the
ACS operating condition.
Large hue area Small hue area
Hue area (Device setting ACS setting level

(Judgment reference set value in the color auto mode))
ACS color judgment setting Area level 5 Area level 4 Area level 3 Area level 2 Area level 1
Can be set optionally. About 10mm 5mm About 5mm 5mm About 3mm 4mm About 1mm 3mm
(30000 pixel or more) (30000 pixel) (15000 pixel) (7000 pixel) (1875 pixel)
Hue level Hue level 5
Strong hue
(SIM LEVEL) Hue level 4
Hue level 3
Hue level 2
Weak hue
Hue level 1
(NOTE) Though the judgment reference in the color auto mode of

device setting is set to "5: Monochrome," if a monochrome docu-
ment is not recognized as a monochrome document, increase the
set value of the set item A TH ACS5 ENLARGE (area level 5).
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set value to
the memory.
Except for the above set item, do not change the setting in the mar-
ket. Set it to the default value.
ADJ 23 Printer color balance/density
adjustment
(1) Note before execution of the printer color balance/density
adjustment
(Requisite condition before execution of the printer color balance/
density adjustment)
Before execution of the printer color balance/density adjustment,
the copy color balance/density adjustment must have been com-
pleted properly.
(This adjustment is required in the following cases.)
* Basically same as when the copy color balance/density adjust-
ment is required. Refer to the page of the ADJ 22 Copy color
balance/density adjustment.
* After the copy color balance/density adjustment.
(2) Flow of printer color balance/density adjustment procedures
Printer color balance/density adjustment
START
Process correction is forcibly

performed. (SIM 44-6)
Execute the half tone image

correction. (SIM 44-26)
No
Is PCL mode
supported?
Yes
Check the printer color balance/density.
(Check the test pattern of SIM 64-5.)
Use SIM 67-25 to the color balance

check sheet, and check the patch
color balance of process black.
Are the copy No

color balance and density
at satisfactory
levels?
Yes
(to Next page) (to Next page) : Standard adjustment flow
(from Previous page) Perform ADJ 23A printer color balance/
(from Previous page)
density auto adjustment. (SIM 67-24)
Enter the SIM 67-24 mode and select
A3 (11 x 17) paper. (Auto selection)

3 (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Can the
printer color balance and No Set the adjustment pattern on the
density be adjusted to satisfactory original table, select the FACTORY
levels with the fine mode, and press the EXECUTE key.
adjustment?
Yes No
4 Is PCL mode
supported? Is the
automatic adjustment
No
Perform the manual adjustment of ADJ 23B repeated?
printer color balance, density adjustment. (SIM 67-25)
Yes
Yes Can be
Yes Use SIM 67-25 to print
Press the REPEAT key.
repeated
the color balance max. 3 times.
Is PCL mode
check sheet, and
supported? check the patch color Press the EXECUTE key.
balance of process (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
No black./Check the
printer color balance
and density. Set the adjustment pattern on the
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance (Check the test pattern original table, and press the
check sheet, and check the patch color of SIM 64-5) EXECUTE key.
balance of process black.
Use SIM 67-25 to print Press the OK key. (The initial

Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance the color balance setup of half tone image correction
check sheet, and check the patch color check sheet, and is automatically performed.)
balance of process black./Check the check the patch color
printer color balance and density. balance of process
(Check the test pattern of SIM 64-5) black. Cancel SIM 67-24.
Are No Were
Yes the color all the three kinds
of color balance/density
Are the printer
balance and density at adjustment targets 4
No color balance and density
the satisfactory changed? Yes
levels? (SIM 67-26)
at satisfactory
levels? Yes
No
Change the color balance/
Were the density adjustment factory 3
No printer color balance targets. (SIM 67-26)
and density
customized?
Were
Yes
the three kinds of Make the factory printer balance target
color balance/density (when adjusting the printer color
Yes adjustment targets
balance/density with SIM 67-24) same
changed?
Auto color balance adjustment (SIM 67-26) as the service color balance target and
service target is set. the color balance target when adjusting
No the density. (SIM67-28)
Enter the SIM 67-27 mode.
Press the SETUP key.

No Is PCL mode
Set the color patch image (adjustment supported?
pattern) printed in the printer color
balance/density adjustment on the original Yes
table, and press the EXECUTE key.
Execute the half tone image correction.
(Forcible execution) (SIM 44-26)
Press the REPEAT key.
Press the EXECUTE key. Check the printer color balance/density.

(Check the test pattern of SIM 64-5)
Press the OK key.

Are the
Yes printer color No
Cancel SIM 67-27. balance and the density
in the specified
level ?
No Is the printer Yes

color balance density
adjustment performed
with SIM67-25?
The printer color

balance and density
adjustment completed.
: Standard adjustment flow
(3) Printer color balance/density check The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
(Note) to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed.
Before checking the copy color balance and the density, be sure to
execute the following procedures in advance. The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
* Execute the high density image correction (process correction) Patch B may not be copied.
forcibly. (SIM 44-6) Patch A must not be copied.
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
(Procedure) 23-A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto
a. When the PCL mode is supported: adjustment)
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern. a. General
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
print test pattern is printed. the print density of each color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) auto-
matically with SIM 67-24 or the user program.
(When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the print modes are revised.)
There are following two modes of the automatic color balance
adjustment.
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman) (SIM 67-24
I used.)
2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
is used.) (The color balance target becomes the service tar-
get.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the print color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine environment is greatly changed, this function does
not work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal color balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.
b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Auto
adjustment)
1) The copy color balance adjustment must have been completed
properly.
2) Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
quality adjustment, be sure to execute the following correc-
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level tions forcibly to set the image forming section to the optimum
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be state.
reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the * Execute the high density image correction (Process correc-
same level. tion) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
b. When the PCL mode is not supported: (In the case of GDI * Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
model)
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
compare each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the
black patch to check the color balance. 1) Enter the SIM 67-24 mode.

Fig. 1 PG image
PRINTER CALIBRATION
PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PROCON EXECUTION AND PRINT THE TEST PATCH.
Y
M FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT)
Bk
EXECUTE
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O Max 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically

selected.)
Patch A of each of Y, M, 2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, 1) The max. density The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.

3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory
on the document table. target gamma data are the same.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping.
so that the thin lines on the paper are on the left side. Place 5 For the service target, the customized color balance gamma
sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image (adjust- can be registered with SIM 67-27.
ment pattern) paper.
5) Press [REPEAT] key.
The operation panel is changed and [EXECUTE] key is dis-
PRINTER CALIBRATION
played.
PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE.
REPEAT OK


4) Press [FACTORY] key, and press [EXECUTE] key. PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PROCON EXECUTION AND PRINT THE TEST PATCH.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color (PLEASE USE SPECIFIED TYPE OF A3 OR 11" x 17" SIZE PAPER
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT)
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-

get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
balance, select the service target.
EXECUTE

PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE 7) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
PLEASE SELECT THE MODE (FACTORY) OR (SERVICE) AND PLACE procedure same as the procedure 3) on the document table.
THE PRINTED TEST PATCH ON DOCUMENT GLASS THEN PRESS [EXECUTE]. 8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
, The print color balance adjustment is automatically performed,
*LIGHT AREA AT LEFT SIDE ON DOCUMENT GLASS. and the color balance check patch image is printed out.
9) Press [OK] key.
FACTORY SERVICE EXECUTE PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE.
to print the color balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in the next procedure is displayed.
NOTE:
Check the printed color balance check patch image to insure
that the color balance adjustment result is satisfactory to deter- REPEAT OK
mine how many times the procedures 5) - 8) must be repeated.
NOTE:
If the color balance adjustment result is not satisfactory and if
the procedure 5) is satisfactory, go to the procedure 9). Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
The procedures 5) - 8) can be repeated max. 3 times.
When this procedure is repeated, the color balance adjustment TEST SIMULATION NO.67-24 CLOSE
accuracy is improved, especially the color balance adjustment PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
accuracy in the low density area is improved. Note that the COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.
color balance adjustment accuracy, however, varies depend-
ing on the machine status.
Remark: PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE.
(Descriptions on FACTORY key and SERVICE key in the color

balance auto adjustment menu.)
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance
auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the
above two.
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be
selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM
67-26.)
Service target color balance: The color balance can be cus-
tomized according to the user's request. (Variable)
10) Check the color balance and density. If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce-
There are two methods. dures, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
23B).
(Method 1)
When the service target is selected in the procedure 4) and the
Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch
image is within the following specifications. auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
obtained, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
Fig. 1 PG image
23B).
PRINTER CALIBRATION 11) Cancel SIM 67-25.
(For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the
Y
adjustment is completed.)
M
12) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction (forc-
C ible execution).
Bk Enter the SIM 44-26 mode, and press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O Max TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE

Patch A of each of Y, M, 2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, 1) The max. density

EXECUTE
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
not be reversed. pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
level. (Normal end (Auto transition))
Patch B may not be copied. TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE
Patch A must not be copied. HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
[S_VALUE]
(Method 2) #1: 907, #2: 902, #3: 909, #4:921, #5:936
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 67-25 #6: 347, #7:992, #8:1047, #9:1081, #10:1137
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance #11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be

checked more precisely.
PRINTER CALIBRATION

Y
M K C M Y EXECUTE 1/1
C
Bk (Abnormal end (Auto transition))

CMY
mixed
color TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE
[S_VALUE]
2) Patch A of each of Y, M, 3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, 1) The max. density #1: ERR, #2: ERR, #3: ERR, #4: ERR, #5: ERR
#6: ERR, #7: ERR, #8: ERR, #9: ERR, #10: ERR
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. #11: ERR, #12: ERR, #13: ERR, #14: ERR,#15: ERR
(Method 3)
(This method cannot be used when the machine supports only
the GDI mode.)
When the PCL mode is supported, use SIM 64-5 to print the
print test pattern.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key, K C M Y EXECUTE 1/1
and the print test pattern is printed out.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter 13) After completion of the operation, cancel SIM 44-26.
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must 14) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print
not be reversed. The density level of each color must be color balance and the density again.
almost at the same level.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
When the factory target is selected in the procedure 4) and the print test pattern is printed out.
auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
If a satisfactory result on the print color balance and the density is
obtained on the color balance and the density, use SIM 67-26
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the manual
to change the factory color balance target and repeat the pro-
adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 23B).
cedures from 1).
23-B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
This adjustment is required in the following cases. TEST SIMULATION NO.67-25 CLOSE
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment is required. PRINTER ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT: PG
Refer to the page of the ADJ 22 Copy color balance/density A : 50 ; POINT1
adjustment. A: XX B : 50 ; POINT2
* After execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment. 1 99

C : 50 ; POINT3
D : 50 ; POINT4
a. General
E : 50 ; POINT5
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
F : 50 ; POINT6
adjust the copy density (15 points for each color) of each color
(CMYK) manually when the automatic adjustment cannot obtain G : 50 ; POINT7
the specified result or when a fine adjustment is required or when H : 50 ; POINT8
the user requests to change (customize) the color balance. I : 50 ; POINT9
In this adjustment, only the patch of each color is adjusted in the J : 50 ; POINT10
above case where the automatic adjustment cannot obtain the
K : 50 ; POINT11
specified result.
L : 50 ; POINT12
When the color balance is lost, execute the automatic color bal-
ance adjustment in advance and execute this adjustment for better K C M Y EXECUTE OK
efficiency.
10-key
b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Manual
adjustment) OK
1) The copy color balance adjustment must have been completed

properly. TEST SIMULATION NO.67-25 CLOSE
2) When setting the color patch image adjustment pattern on the PRINTER ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT: PG
document table, place 5 sheets of white paper on the color A : 67 ; POINT1
patch image adjustment pattern. A: XX B : 50 ; POINT2
3) Be sure to use the specified paper for color. 1 99

C : 50 ; POINT3
D : 50 ; POINT4
quality adjustment, be sure to execute the following correc- E : 50 ; POINT5
tions forcibly to set the image forming section to the optimum F : 50 ; POINT6
state. G : 50 ; POINT7
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correc- H : 50 ; POINT8

tion) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
I : 50 ; POINT9
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
J : 50 ; POINT10
K : 50 ; POINT11
L : 50 ; POINT12
K C M Y EXECUTE OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or self print end
PRINTER ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT: PG

A : 67 ; POINT1
A: XX B : 50 ; POINT2
C : 50 ; POINT3
1 99
D : 50 ; POINT4
E : 50 ; POINT5
F : 50 ; POINT6
G : 50 ; POINT7
H : 50 ; POINT8
I : 50 ; POINT9
J : 50 ; POINT10
K : 50 ; POINT11
L : 50 ; POINT12
K C M Y EXECUTE OK

selected.)
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the desired 8) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction (forc-
color balance is obtained. ible execution).
If the above specification is not satisfied, perform the following Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
procedures. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
PRINTER CALIBRATION SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE
TEST
Y
M
Bk
CMY
mixed EXECUTE
color
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
2) Patch A of each of Y, M, 3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, 1) The max. density
C, and BK are not copied. and BK is very slightly copied. section is not blurred. (Normal end (Auto transition))
The patch density is changed gradually. TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter [S_VALUE]
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must #1: 907, #2: 902, #3: 909, #4:921, #5:936
not be reversed.
#6: 347, #7:992, #8:1047, #9:1081, #10:1137
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
#11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260
level.
Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
color balance stated above.
K C M Y
4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and EXECUTE 1/1
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. (Abnormal end (Auto transition))
The adjustment value is set in the range of 1 99 (1 255).
When SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance
and density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 50.
[S_VALUE]
Repeat procedures of 2) 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied. #11: ERR, #12: ERR, #13: ERR, #14: ERR,#15: ERR
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high

and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A O to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
K C M Y
Referring to the black and gray patches, adjust so that each EXECUTE 1/1
process (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A O
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible. 9) After completion of the operation, cancel SIM 44-26.
6) Cancel SIM 67-25. 10) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern again.
(For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
adjustment is completed.) The print test pattern is printed out.
7) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern. The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
NOTE: Only for the machine which support the PCL mode. level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
(For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, this pro- not be reversed. The density level of each color must be
cedure cannot be used.) almost at the same level.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. (NOTE)
The print test pattern is printed out. If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter the color balance as the service target.
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
not be reversed. The density level of each color must be required.
almost at the same level. If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar-
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
the next color balance adjustment.
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target
color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode
to make an adjustment to the similar color balance as the reg-
istered color balance.
(Auto color balance adjustment service color balance target Color balance target for the printer color balance adjustment
gamma setting)
Kind Descriptions
a. General
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance target,
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer- balance (gamma) and each of them is specified according to the
tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target. target machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to select one of
There are following three kinds of the target. them as the factory target. The default setting
(factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
Factory color balance (gamma) target which emphasizes color reproduction.
Service color balance (gamma) target B Service color This target is used when the user requests to
User color balance (gamma) target balance (gamma) customize the color balance to users desired
target level. In advance, the users unique color
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
balance must be registered as the service color
to a desired level. balance target.
This adjustment is required in the following cases. The above registration (setting) is made by the
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjust- serviceman with SIM 67-25 to adjust the color
balance and with SIM 67-27 to register it.
ment) is executed with SIM 67-25.
This color balance target is used when the user
* When a U2 trouble occurs. executes the color balance adjustment.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. When, therefore, the service color balance target
is changed, the color balance target of the users
color balance adjustment is also changed.
* When the user requests for customizing the color balance. When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as balance is set to the factory color balance target
improper. set with SIM 67-26.
The default setting (factory setting) of the color
balance is same as the factory color balance
target. (Emphasized on color reproduction
(DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
color balance, be sure to use SIM 67-28 to set
the color balance to the factory color balance
target.
C User color Same color balance as the service color balance
balance (gamma) (gamma) target
target When the service color balance target is
changed, this color balance target is also
changed accordingly.
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Color balance target in the printer color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Use SIM 67-26 to select
one of the three kinds of Factory color balance Service color balance Factory setting
color balance targets. =
target (DEF1) target
Factory color balance
target (DEF1) Use SIM 67-25 to adjust the
Factory color balance Service color balance
optional color balance, and
target (one of DEF1 3) target (Unique)
Factory color balance use SIM 67-27 to register it.
target (DEF2)
Factory color balance Service color balance Execute SIM 67-28.
Factory color balance =
target (one of DEF1 3) target (The service color balance
target (DEF3)
target is the same as the
factory color balance target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for

Service color balance
the user color balance =
target
adjustment
Factory target in the printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)
By use of SIM 67-26, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM67-28
target for the user color balance adjustment
+b* Direction of Yellow
SIM67-28
Hue
Factory color balance target
Factory color
(DEF1) = Service color balance
balance target
target/Color balance target for the
(DEF1)
Direction of Green
user color balance adjustment
(A)
+a*
Direction
of Red
DEF1 Color balance with emphasis on color Default

reproduction (factory setting)
DEF2 Color balance with slightly strong Cyan
DEF3 Color balance with emphasis on Cyan
Direction of Blue

SIM67-28 target for the user color balance adjustment
Service color balance target in the printer color balance adjust- Select the service color balance target with SIM 67-24 and execute
ment (SIM 67-28). the color valance adjustment (Auto), and check the adjustment
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance result. When the result is unsatisfactory or abnormal, the registered
can be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27. service target data for the color balance adjustment (Auto) may be
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set improper.
to the same balance as the factory color balance target set with This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
SIM 67-26. adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27.
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24). When, therefore, made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also SIM 67-25. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
changed accordingly. b. Setting procedure
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and (Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as
the purpose of registration) the service color balance target)
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is 1) Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual
customized with SIM 67-25. adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not (adjustment pattern).
required. If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man- is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
ual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27 optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
to register the service color balance target data by use of the adjustment.
printed adjustment pattern. 2) Enter the SIM 67-27 mode.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUP: SERVICE
SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the #B: 91, #C 2944, #D: 3227, #E: 5822, #F: 8600
same color balance target to another machine. #G: 28935, #H: 54344, #I: 86968, #J: 122678, #K: 151198
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. #L: 169731, #M: 195950, #N: 201249, #:O: 207112
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it
from discoloration and dirt.
The service color balance target data are basically registered
immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM
67-25.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal-
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the K C M Y SETUP 1/1
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
3) Press [SETUP] key.
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment. 4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly
adjusted and printed in the printer color balance adjustment
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 23B) on the document
judges as follows.
table.
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another 3) Press [YES] key.
machine can be used. The service color balance target and the color balance target for
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side. the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image ance as the factory color balance target.
If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with 23-C Auto color balance adjustment by the user
SIM 67-25 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not exe- (Printer color balance auto adjustment
cute SIM 67-27 to register the service color balance target
data.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. a. General
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color cal-
CLOSE
ibration (auto adjustment of the printer color balance and density).
SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUP: SERVICE
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
tion with SIM 26-54.
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the printer
color balance and density and the user's operational ability
EXECUTE are judged enough to execute the adjustment.
When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read. operating procedures, notes, and operations to the user.
6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image This adjustment is required in the following cases.
(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-27 CLOSE * When the PCU PWB is replaced.
SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUP: SERVICE * When the EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
BASE:8800
#B: 227, #C: 624, #D: 908, #E: 1249, #F: 2074
#G: 3298, #H: 18951, #I: 76117, #J: 128495, #K: 165225
#L: 184155, #M: 189254, #N: 194377, #:O: 197276
ENAIBLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION OF PRINTER

A: 1 ; (1:YES 0:NO)
A: X
K C M REPEAT 0 1
Y OK 1/1
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color

(KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B O.
If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is judged as
abnormal.
In case of an abnormality, settle the problem and try again.
OK
7) Press [OK] key.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
get. When disabling, set to "0" (NO).
When enabling, set to "1" (Yes).
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to 3) Press [OK] key.
the same color balance as the factory color balance target) When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration
(automatic adjustment of printer color balance and density) is not
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
displayed in the user program mode.
was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color balance requested
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar- (Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjust-
get with SIM 67-27. ment))
* When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 67- Remark:
26, be sure to execute this procedure. This adjustment is based on the service target color balance set
1) Enter the SIM 67-28 mode. with SIM 67-27 or SIM 67-28. If, therefore, the above settings are
not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made properly.
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-28 CLOSE 1) Enter the system setting mode.
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB: SERVICE 2) Enter the printer setting mode.
3) Press the auto color calibration key.
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE
System settings
ADJ 25 Document size sensor
adjustment
* When the document size sensor section is disassembled.
* When the document size sensor section is replaced.
5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in pro-
cedure 4) on the document table. Set the patch image so that
the light density area is on the left side. 25-A Document size sensor detection point
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color adjustment
patch image (adjustment pattern). 1) Enter the SIM 41-1 mode.
Black Yellow TEST SIMULATION NO.41-01 CLOSE

PD SENSOR CHECK
Red OCSW PD1 PD2 PD3
Blue PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7
1/1
Slowly tilt the document detection arm unit in the arrow direc-
tion. Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust- screw so that the display OCSW is returned to the normal dis-
ment is executed automatically. After completion of the adjust- play when the height of the arm unit top from the table glass is
ment, the display returns to the original operation screen. 32 r 0.5mm. Slide the actuator position and adjust. (If the ON
timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the document
detection function may malfunction.)
ADJ 24 Fusing paper guide position
adjustment
* When the fusing section is disassembled.
* When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
* When a wrinkle is made on paper in the fusing section.
* When an image deflection or image blur occurs in the paper rear
edge section.
1) Loosen the fixing screw C.
2) Shift the fusing paper guide in the arrow direction A or B (up
and down direction).
32+
-0.5mm
A 1.5mm 1.5mm A
C C
B B
The standard fixing position is the center of the marking scale.

Change the position depending on the situation.
* When a wrinkle is formed on paper, change the position
upward (in the arrow direction A).
* When an image deflection or image blur occurs in the paper
rear edge section, shift the position downward (in the arrow
direction B).
25-B Document size sensor sensitivity
adjustment TEST SIMULATION NO.40-02 CLOSE
1) Enter the SIM41-2 mode. BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT

MAXPOSITION ADJUSTMENT.
TEST SIMULATION NO.41-02 CLOSE PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START
DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO-SENSOR SETUP
WITH THE ORIGINAL COVER OPENED, TURN ON THE EXECUTE

KEY WITH THE ORIGINAL ON THE ORIGINAL TABLE.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT

EXECUTE
MAXPOSITION ADJUSTMENTE.
EXECUTING
SET AN A3-SIZE(11 17) COPY PAPER ON THE ORIGINAL TABLE

,
AND WITH THE OC OPEND, TURN ON THE EXECUTE KEY.
EXECUTE

EXECUTE BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT
P1(A4)POSITION ADJUSTMENT.
Adjustment completed PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START
Adjustment failed EXECUTE
DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO-SENSOR SETUP EXECUTE

DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO- SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUSTED.
EXECUTE
Repeat the above procedure to adjust

the A4R width MIN POSITION.
EXECUTE

DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO-SENSOR SETUP BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT
PHOTO-SENSOR ERROR POSITION . COMPLETE
PD1 ,---,---,---,---,---,---,---
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
2) Set the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document. tion.
With the document cover open, without placing a document on
the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
[EXECUTE] key.
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT SIZE
PHOTO-SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.
ADJ 26 Manual paper feed tray paper

size (width) sensor adjustment
* When the manual paper feed tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual paper feed tray unit is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper
feed guide is recognized.
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4R size width.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal The maximum width detection level is recognized.
display. 4) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
The A4R size width position detection level of the manual 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
paper feed guide is recognized. The A4R width detection level is recognized.
8) Set the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi- 6) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
tion. 7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The A5R width detection level is recognized.
8) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.

[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The minimum width position detection level of the manual 9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
paper feed guide is recognized. The minimum width detection level is recognized.
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" * When each of the above operations has been completed, the
display is highlighted. "COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are has failed, the "ERROR" message appears.
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
ADJ 28 Touch panel coordinate setting

ADJ 27 DSPF paper feed tray paper This adjustment is required in the following cases:
size (width) sensor adjustment * When the operation panel is replaced.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When a U2 trouble occurs.
* The paper feed tray section has been disassembled. * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* The paper feed tray unit has been replaced. * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs. 1) Enter the SIM65-1 mode.
* The scanner PWB has been replaced.

* The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced.
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT

TRAYVOLMAX TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
EXECUTE
2) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion.
2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).

When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen
again.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
pressed.
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
as a needle or a pin).
ADJ 29 Image loss, void area, image
off-center, image magnification
ratio auto adjustment with
SIM50-28
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM50-28.
* ADJ 10 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK)
(Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjust-
ment)
* ADJ 11 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section)
* ADJ 16/17 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
* ADJ 18 Scan image off-center adjustment
* ADJ 19 Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section) 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* ADJ 20 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
(Menu in SIM50-28 mode) TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENTSERVICE
Display/Item Content PLEASE WAIT
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image

magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) NOW EXECUTING
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio

adjustment
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
REPRINT EXECUTE
magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF mode)
SETUP/PRINT Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each The following item is automatically adjustment.
ADJ paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
* Print image main scanning direction image magnification
RESULT Adjustment result display
ratio
DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is executed
7) Press [OK] key.
29-A Print image main scanning direction image The adjustment result becomes valid.
magnification ratio automatic adjustment SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE
TEST
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode. AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENTSERVICE
BK-MAG
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE
OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ SETUP/PRINT ADJ

RESULT DATA
REPRINT RESCAN RETRY DATA OK
29-B Image off-center automatic adjustment

1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
1/1
2) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the touch panel key. AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE
3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the touch panel OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ
key. (Any paper size will do.) SPF ADJ SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT DATA

MFT CS1 CS2 CS3
CS4
1/1
2) Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] with the touch panel key.

3) Select [ALL] with the touch panel key.
EXECUTE AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENTSERVICE

1/1
LEAD OFFSET
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. ALL
The adjustment pattern is printed out.
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc-
tion)
Note: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide. 1/1
(NOTE) 2) Select [OC ADJ] with the touch panel key.
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] key, the following items can 3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the touch panel
be executed individually. key. (Any paper size will do.)
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are MFT CS1 CS2 CS3
executed simultaneously.
CS4
4) Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.
MFT CS CS2 ADU
CS3 CS4 LCC
EXECUTE 1/1

EXECUTE The adjustment pattern is printed out.
1/1
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc-
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. tion)
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Note: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
6) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc- guide.
tion)
Note: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key. AUTO IMAGEPOSITION ADJUSTMENT: SERVICE

PLEASE SET THE PRINTER PATTERN PAPER ON THE OC
The following items are automatically adjusted.
THEN PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START
* Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* Print image off-center adjustment
8) Press [OK] key.
REPRINT EXECUTE
The adjustment result becomes valid.
Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray. The following items are automatically adjusted.
* Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image
29-C Copy lead edge image reference position off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning automatic adjustment
direction image magnification ratio 7) Press [OK] key.
automatic adjustment The adjustment result becomes valid.
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode. TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT SERVICE

OC : LEAD: ** (**) OFFSET: **(**) SUB**: (**)
OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ

RESULT DATA
1/1
4) Self-print of the SPF adjustment pattern is performed.
29-D DSPF mode auto void adjustment (Service
installation adjustment) TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE
This adjustment is required in the following cases: AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE
NOW EXECUTING...
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced. EXECUTE
* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled.
* The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced. 5) After completion of printing, the SPF adjustment start screen is
displayed.
* The DSPF section has been disassembled. TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE
* The DSPF unit has been replaced. AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE
This adjustment is used to adjust the DSPF (front/back) document PLEASE SET THE PRINTER PATTERN PAPER ON THE SPF
lead edge, off-center, sub operation magnification ratio. THEN PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START
1) Enter the simulation mode 50-28 to select [SPF ADJ].
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE REPRINT EXECUTE
OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ

6) Load the SPF adjustment pattern on the DSPF.
RESULT DATA
1/1
2) Select an adjustment item (front, back, both).
<List of adjustment items>

Item Content
SIDE1 SPF adjustment front surface
SIDE2 SPF adjustment back surface
ALL SPF adjustment front/back surface

TEST
7) Press [EXECUTE] key, and scanning of the SPF adjustment
pattern selected in step 2) is started.
SIDE1 SIDE2
ALL
PLEASE WAIT
NOW EXECUTING
1/1 REPRINT EXECUTE
3) The display shows the tray select screen for printing the SPF 8) When [ALL] is selected, load the SPF adjustment pattern on
adjustment pattern. Select a tray for SPF adjustment printing. the DSPF again, and perform the adjustment of the back sur-
face in the similar procedures.
9) The adjustment result screen is displayed.
MFT CS1 CS2 CS3 The value of this time is displayed, and the value of the last
time is displayed in the parenthesis ( ).
CS4

SPF (SIDE1) LEAD** (**) OFFSET: ** (**) SUB: ** (**)
SPF (SIDE2) LEAD** (**) OFFSET: ** (**) SUB: ** (**)
EXECUTE 1/1
* When [REPRINT] key is pressed, the display returns to the 2) Enter the simulation 63-2 mode.
cassette select screen to allow self-print of the SPF adjust- 3) Select, [DSPF SHADING].
ment pattern (front, back) again.
* When [RESCAN] key is pressed, the SPF adjustment pat- TEST SIMULATION NO.63-02 CLOSE
tern (front, back) is scanned again. SHADING EXECUTION
* When [RETRY] key is pressed, the adjustment value is not SELECT OC SHADING/DSPF SHADING, AND PRESS EXECUTE
saved in EEPROM and RAM and shifted to the top menu

screen.
* When [DATA] key is pressed, the data used in execution of
the adjustment are displayed.
OC SHADING DSPF SHADING EXECUTE
10) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment value is saved in
EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to the end
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and shading
screen.
is started.
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE * When the operation is executed, the document is trans-
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE ported by about 25mm, and shading data are obtained dur-
SIMULATION COMPLETE ing transport.
PLEASE PUSH CA KEY
* During execution, "SHADING EXECUTING..." is displayed.
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during execution, the
operation is interrupted.
* When shading is completed normally, [EXECUTE] key
returns to the normal display and "COMPLETED" is dis-
played.
1/1
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during other
than printing, the display returns to the sub number entry
screen.
<Descriptions of keys>
ADJ 30 Shading adjustment Display Content
OC OC analog correction level correction, and shading
1) Open the lower door, and insert the white reference sheet SHADING correction data making (Document table mode)
DSPF (PSHEP5668FCZZ). Close the lower door. DSPF DSPF analog correction level correction, and shading
SHADING correction data making (SPF mode)
<Result display>
Display Content
COMPLETE Normal completion
ERROR Abnormal completion
INCOMPLETE Incomplete, interruption
* When inserting the white reference sheet DSPF, insert it

straight along the rear edge frame so that the rear edge of
the white reference sheet DSPF comes at the root of the
actuator as shown in the mark {.
[7] SIMULATION
MX-7000N 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. General
There are the following simulation functions for grasping the
machine operating conditions, troubleshooting, early detection of
trouble causes, speedy setting and adjustments, and improve-
ments in servicing.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting, clear
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data
check, clear
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
transfer
The operating procedures and displays depend on the form of the
operation panel of the machine.
A. Basic operation
(1) Starting the simulation
* Entering the simulation mode
1) Copy mode key ON o Program key ON o Asterisk (*) key ON
o CLEAR key ON o Asterisk (*) key ON (Ready for input of a
main code of simulation)
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key o START key ON
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key o START key ON
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
item.
Press START key or EXECUTE key to start the simulation
operation.
To cancel the current simulation mode or to change the main
code and the sub code, press the user setup key.
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode

1) Press CA key.
(Note for the simulation mode)

Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when
the machine is in the simulation mode.
If the power switch should be turned OFF in the simulation mode,
a malfunction may be resulted. In this case, turn OFF/ON the
main power source.
Before entering the simulation mode, check to insure that neither
print data nor FAX data are receiving.
MX-7000N SIMULATION 7 1
START (Copy mode)
Press the Program key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the Program key.
Standby for entry of Press the SYSTEM

SIM code. SETTINGS key
Enter the main code of

SIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SIM

is displayed.
NO
Press the START button.

YES Is it the same
simulation main
code?
YES
In the power OFF/ON type
Standby for entry of SIM <Exclusion type> simulation, OFF/ON
Is there a sub code ?
sub code You have to exit message is
simulation mode Press the SYSTEM displayed by the
NO before entering into SETTINGS key SYSTEM
Enter SIM sub code with
this mode for self YES
SETTINGS key.
the 10-key. printing type.
Select the mode and the Do you want
NO
Press the START button. item with the scroll key to perform another
and the item key. simulation ? The simulation mode
is canceled.
NO
If there is no item. YES Press the EXECUTE button
Operation check ?
and OK button.
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?
YES Press the EXECUTE button

Operating conditions
check ? and OK button.
NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
YES Press the EXECUTE button

Data clear ?
and OK button.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
YES Adjustments NO Operation is made according

or setting (counter data to the selected mode and the item.
change) ? (Other modes)
The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you NO
want to change the
content ?
The changed content
YES
is stored.
Enter the new setting and

;'5 Press the EXECUTE button
adjustment values. and OK button.
2. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Function (Purpose) Purpose Section
1 1 Used to check the operations of the scanner (read) unit and its control Operation test/Check Optical (Image scanning)
circuit.
2 Used to check the operation of sensor in the scanning (read) section and the Operation test/Check Optical (Image scanning)
related circuit.
5 Used to check the operations of the scanner (read) unit and its control Operation test/Check Optical (Image scanning)
circuit.
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder unit and the Operation test/Check DSPF
control circuit.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the automatic Operation test/Check DSPF
document feeder unit and the control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder Operation test/Check DSPF
unit and the control circuits.
3 2 Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in the finisher and the Operation test/Check Finisher
control circuits.
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Operation test/Check Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Adjustment Finisher
30 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the inserter Operation test/Check Inserter
and the control circuits.
31 Used to check the operations of the loads in the inserter and the control Operation test/Check Inserter
circuit.
32 Used to set the adjustment value of the inserter paper width detection level. Setting (Adjustment) Inserter
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the large Operation test/Check Large capacity tray (LCC)
capacity tray (LCC) and the control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the large capacity tray (LCC) Operation test/Check Large capacity tray (LCC)
and the control circuit.
5 Used to check the operations of the clutch (LTRC) in the LCC and the Operation test/Check Large capacity tray (LCC)
monitor.
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and Operation test/Check Operation panel
control circuit.
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Operation test/Check Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the copy lamp and the control circuit. Operation test/Check Optical (Image scanning)
4 Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the control circuit. Operation test/Check Process
6 1 Used to check the operations of the loads (clutches and solenoids) in the Operation test/Check Paper transport/paper exit
paper transport system and the control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Operation test/Check Other
3 Used to check the operations of the primary transfer unit and the control Operation test/Check Process (Transfer)
circuit.
4 Used to check the operations of the PTC and the MC cleaner. Operation test/Check
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Setting Other
6 Used to set the intermittent aging cycle. Setting
8 Used to display the warm-up time. Operation display
9 Used to set a color in the color mode printing. (Used to check the print in the Operation test/Check
color mode.)
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each Operation test/Check/Adjustment Process (Developing)
print mode and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the high speed and the low speed are
also adjusted simultaneously.
2 Used to check and adjust the operations of the main charger grid voltage in Operation test/Check/Adjustment Process (Charging)
each printer mode and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the high speed and the low speed are
also adjusted simultaneously.
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transfer voltage and the Operation test/Check/Adjustment Process (Transfer)
control circuit.
9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the duplex Operation test/Check Duplex
section and its control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the duplex section and the Operation test/Check Duplex
control circuits.
10 1 Used to check the operation of the load (motor) in the process section and Operation test/Check Process (Developing)
the related circuits.
* This check must be performed with no toner bottle installed.
2 Used to check the operations of the toner remaining quantity sensor and the Operation test/Check Process (Developing)
control circuit.
13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble. Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
14 - Used to cancel excluding the self-diag "U1/U2/LCC/PF" troubles. Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
15 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09, F3-12, F3-22 (large capacity paper feed Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.) LCC
tray, paper feed tray 1, 2)" trouble.
16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.) MFPcnt PWB /
PCU PWB / SCU PWB
17 - Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble. Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle. Setting
22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and operation mode. Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
(Used to check the maintenance timing.) output/Check
2 Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and troubles. (When the number Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
of total jam is considerably great, it is judged as necessary for repair.) check
3 Used to check the misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
position. check
* The trouble position can be troubleshooted according to this data.
4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history. Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
check
5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Other
6 Used to output the list of the setting and adjustment data (simulations, FAX Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
soft switch, counters). check
8 Used to check the counter value of the finisher, the DSPF, and the scan Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
(reading). check
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Adjustment/Setting/Operation data Paper feed, ADU, LCC
check
10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware). Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
check
11 Used to check the use frequency of FAX (send/receive). (Only when FAX is Adjustment/Setting/Operation data FAX
installed.) check
12 Used to check the misfeed position in the DSPF and the number of misfeed Adjustment/Setting/Operation data DSPF
of each position. (If the number of misfeed is considerably great, it may lead check
to the decision for repair.)
13 Used to check the running time of the process section. (OPC drum, DV unit, Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
toner bottle). check
19 Used to check each counter value related the network scanner. Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
check
90 Used to output the list of various set data. Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
check
23 2 Used to check the trouble history of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
misfeed and troubles is considerably great, it may be judged as necessary to check
repair.)
80 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed Operation test/Check Paper feed, transport
and transport section.
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (The counters are Data clear
cleared after completion of maintenance.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed Data clear
section.
3 Used to clear the counter value of the finisher, the DSPF, and scan Data clear
(reading).
4 The maintenance counter and the print counters of the transfer unit and the Data clear
fusing unit are cleared. (After completion of maintenance, the counters are
cleared.)
5 Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, this Data clear
counter is cleared.)
6 Used to clear the copy counter value. Data clear
7 Used to clear the OPC drum counter value. (After replacement of the OPC Data clear
drum, this counter is cleared.)
9 Used to clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print Data clear
counter.
10 Used to clear the FAX counter value. (Only when FAX is installed.) Data clear
15 Used to clear various counters in the scan mode related to image send. Data clear
30 Used to initialize the administrator password. Data clear
31 Used to initialize the service mode password. Data clear
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Operation test/Check Process (Developing
section)
2 Used to make the initial setting of the toner density when replacing Setting Process (Photoconductor/
developer. (Automatic adjustment) Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
26 2 Used to set the paper size of the large capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper Setting Paper feed
size is changed, this simulation must be executed to change the paper size
in software.)
3 Used to set the auditor setting mode. (Setting must be made according to Setting Auditor
the auditor use conditions.)
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance Setting
counter.
6 Used to set the specifications according to the destination. (Paper, fixed Setting
magnification ratios, etc.)
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner. Setting
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Setting
Japan and the UK versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe Setting
safety standards). (For slow start to drive the fusing heater lamp)
26 35 Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same Setting
trouble occurred repeatedly. There are two display modes: display as one
trouble and display as several series of troubles.
38 Used to set whether printing is continued or stopped when the developer life Setting
is expired or when the fusing wed ends.
41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select Setting
function (AMS) in the center binding mode.
49 Used to set the copy speed mode of postcards. Setting
50 Used to set Enable/Disable of the black and white highlight function and the Setting
2-color/Single display function.
52 Used to set whether non-print paper (insertion paper, cover, etc.) is counted Setting
or not.
53 Used to set YES/NO of the auto color calibration. Setting
54 Used to set the printer calibration YES/NO. Setting
65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode. Setting
67 Used to set the summer time timing and the time zone. Setting
69 Used to set the display of spare toner preparation and near end when the Setting
toner quantity reaches 25%.
27 1 Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC Setting
2 Used to set the FSS function (sender registration number, host server Setting
telephone number).
4 Used to set the FSS function (initial, call, toner order automatic send). Setting
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to Setting Communication (RIC/
check the machine tag No.) MODEM)
6 Used to set the FSS function (manual service call). Setting
7 Used to set the FSS function (enable, alert call). Setting
9 Paper transport time between sensors / Gain adjustment retry number Setting
setting
10 Used to clear the history information of trouble prediction Data clear
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number history and the Other
scanner gain adjustment retry number history.
12 Used to check the error history of high density, half tone process control, Other
and automatic registration adjustment.
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. Other
14 Used to set the FSS function connection mode. (Only "Disable o Enable" is Setting
allowed.)
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than Operation test/Check
the paper feed section and the control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper Operation test/Check
feed section and the control circuits.
33 1 Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the control Operation test/Check
circuit.
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width detector detection level adjustment Adjustment/Setting Paper feed
7 Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray width detection level. Adjustment/Setting Paper feed
12 Used to perform the tray 3 paper width detection level adjustment. Adjustment/Setting Paper feed
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control Operation test/Check
circuit.
2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level. Adjustment
3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control Operation test/Check
circuit.
43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode. Setting
4 Used to perform the fusing temperature setup 2 in each operation mode. Setting
(Continued from SIM 43-1.)
20 Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low Adjustment/Setting
humidity (L/L) for the fusing temperature setting in each mode (SIM 43-1).
21 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high Adjustment/Setting
humidity (H/H) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper
mode.
22 Used to set the environment correction under low temperature and low Adjustment/Setting
humidity (L/L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper
mode.
23 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high Adjustment/Setting
humidity (H/H) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper
mode.
24 Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1 Adjustment/Setting
and 43-4.
31 Used to check the operation of the fusing web cleaning motor and the Operation test/Check
control circuit.
32 Used to set the compulsory operation of fusing web cleaning at job end. Adjustment/Setting
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming Setting Process (Photoconductor/
(process) section. Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
2 Image density sensor gain adjustment Adjustment/Setting Process
4 Used to set the target density level in the image density correction. (Do not use this function unless
specially required.)
6 Used to execute the high density process correction compulsorily. Adjustment
9 Used to check data of correction results in the image forming section. (Do not use in the market.) Process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
12 Used to check the sampling toner image patch density data in the image (Do not use in the market.) Image process
density correction. (Photoconductor/
Developing)
13 Used to adjust the color image sensor. Adjustment/Setting
14 Used to check the output level of the temperature/humidity sensor. Adjustment, setting, operation data Image process
check (Photoconductor/
Developing)
16 Used to check the toner density control data. (Do not use in the market.)
21 Used to set the half tone process control. Adjustment/Setting Process
22 Used to check the toner patch image density level of each color in half tone (Do not use in the market.)
image forming section correction (process correction).
24 Used to display the process control result. (Do not use in the market.)
25 Used to set the initial conditions of the process control half tone correction. (Do not use in the market.)
26 Used to execute the half tone process control compulsorily. Adjustment/Setting Process
27 Used to clear the half tone process correction value. Data clear
28 Used to set the process control execution timing. Adjustment/Setting
29 Used to select the half tone correction during a job. (Do not use in the market.)
31 Used to adjust the phase of the photoconductor. Adjustment/Setting Process
37 Used to perform the image density correction setting. Adjustment/Setting
43 Used to check installation of the developing unit and the current state. (Do not use in the market.)
52 Used to check the image density level of each color toner patch in 1-pixel (This simulation should not be
half tone correction. executed unless specially required.)
54 The 1-pixel half tone correction result is displayed. (This simulation should not be
executed unless specially required.)
56 The 1-pixel half tone correction is executed compulsorily. (This simulation should not be
57 The 1-pixel half tone correction value is cleared. (This simulation should not be
46 1 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode. Adjustment (Color copy mode)
2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode. Adjustment (Monochrome copy
mode)
4 Used to adjust the density in the scanner mode. Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
5 Used to adjust the density in the scanner mode. Adjustment (Monochrome scanner
mode)
8 Used to adjust the scanner color balance RGB. Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
9 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode. Adjustment (DSPF mode)
10 Used to adjust the engine color balance manually. Adjustment
16 Used to perform the engine color balance manual adjustment (monochrome, Adjustment
all modes).
19 Used to set the monochrome auto exposure mode. Setting
21 Used to perform the engine color balance manual adjustment (color, all Adjustment
modes).
23 Used to perform the half tone highest density correction. Adjustment/Setting
24 Used to perform the engine half tone auto density adjustment. Adjustment
25 Used to perform the color balance adjustment in the single color mode. Adjustment
26 Used to perform the default setting of color balance in the single color mode. Adjustment
27 Used to perform the engine/gamma calculation formula coefficient setting. Adjustment/Setting
28 Used to check Auto exposure/Document auto recognition/Line number (This simulation should not be used
recognition (color mode). unless specially required.)
33 Used to perform the color auto mode adjustment. Adjustment/Setting
36 2-color (red/black) copy adjustment Adjustment/Setting
37 Used to perform the black/white image generation adjustment. Adjustment/Setting
39 Used to perform the image send sharpness adjustment. Adjustment/Setting
40 Used to perform the collective adjustment of all the FAX exposure modes. Adjustment/Setting
41 Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment (normal character). Adjustment/Setting
42 Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment (small character). Adjustment/Setting
43 Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment (fine). Adjustment/Setting
44 Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment. (Super fine) Adjustment/Setting
45 Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment (600dpi). Adjustment/Setting
47 Used to perform the JPEG compression rate setting in copying and Adjustment/Setting
scanning.
48 1 Used to perform the copy magnification ratio (main scanning, sub scanning Adjustment
direction) adjustment.
5 Used to perform the copy magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning Adjustment Scanner section
direction). When the sub scanning direction image magnification ratio is
adjusted with SIM 48-1 and a satisfactory copy image is not obtained when
copying by specifying a different copy magnification ratio, perform this
adjustment.
6 Used to perform the rotation speed adjustment of each motor. Adjustment
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to update the operation manual in the HDD. Adjustment
50 1 Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper and the void area
(image loss) in the copy mode. (The similar adjustment can be performed
also with SIM 50-5 and SIM 50-2 (simple method). (Document table mode))
2 Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper and the void area Adjustment
(image loss) in the copy mode. (The similar adjustment can be performed
also with SIM 50-1. This simulation. However, is simpler.)
5 Printer print lead edge adjustment Adjustment
6 Used to adjust the DSPF document lead edge, and to adjust the copy image Adjustment DSPF
position and the void area (image loss) on the print paper in the copy mode.
(The similar adjustment can be performed with SIM 50-7 (simple method).)
(DSPF mode)
7 Used to adjust the DSPF document lead edge, and to adjust the copy image Adjustment DSPF
position and the void area (image loss) on the print paper in the copy mode.
(The similar adjustment can be performed with SIM 50-7 (simple method).)
(DSPF mode)
10 Used to adjust the print image off-center position. (Adjustment is made Adjustment
separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment. (The Adjustment
adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
20 Used to perform the main scanning direction manual registration adjustment. Adjustment
21 Used to perform the sub scanning direction manual registration adjustment. Adjustment
22 Used to perform the main/sub scanning auto registration adjustment. Adjustment
24 Used to display the auto registration adjustment result (SIM 50-22). (Do not use in the market.)
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of the scanned image in the Adjustment
FAX or scanner mode
28 Used to perform the OC adjustment, the BK main scanning direction Adjustment
magnification ration correction, the DSPF adjustment, and the print position
adjustment.
51 1 Used to perform the transfer voltage and the separation bias voltage ON/OF Adjustment/Setting
timing adjustment.
2 Used to perform the paper contact pressure adjustment for each section Adjustment/Setting
resist roller (main unit, each paper feed, duplex paper fed, DSPF paper
feed). (When there is a considerable fluctuation in the print image position
on print paper or a paper jam occurs, this adjustment is required.)
53 6 Used to perform the DSPF size width detection level adjustment. Adjustment
7 Used to perform the DSPF size width adjustment value setting. Adjustment/Setting
8 Used to perform the DSPF document scanning start position adjustment. Adjustment
55 1 Used to perform the engine control operation specification setting. (Do not use this function unless
2 Used to perform the scanner control operation specification setting. (Do not use this function unless
3 Used to perform the controller operation specification setting. (Do not use this function unless
56 1 Data transfer (Used in repairing the PWB.) Backup
2 Used to backup the data (user authentication data, address book, etc.) in the Backup
EEPROM, the SRAM, and the HDD of the main unit into the USB memory
and to transfer the data.
60 1 Used to check the operations (read/write) of the MFP control (SDRAM). Operation test/Check
2 Used to set the onboard SDRAM. (Do not use in the market.)
61 1 Used to check the polygon motor rotation and the BD signal detection. Operation test/Check LSU
2 Used to set the laser power. (for printer FIERY) Adjustment/Setting
3 Used to set the laser power. Adjustment/Setting
4 Used to perform self printing of the LSU position adjustment pattern. Adjustment
62 1 Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding the operation manual area.)
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial). Operation test/Check
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas). Operation test/Check
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk. Operation test/Check
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log. Operation test/Check
8 Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding the system area and the operation
manual area)
10 Used to delete the job log data. Data clear
11 Used to delete the document filing data. Data clear
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble. Setting
13 Used to format the hard disk. (only the operation manual area)
63 1 Used to check the shading correction result. Adjustment/Setting/Operation data Scanner
check
2 Used to perform shading. Adjustment
3 Used to perform scanner color balance and color coefficient auto Adjustment/Setting Scanner
adjustment.
5 Used to perform the scanner color balance and the color coefficient auto Adjustment/Setting
adjustment.
6 Used to perform the engine color balance auto adjustment pattern setting. Adjustment/Setting
7 Used to perform the auto density setting of the engine auto adjustment Adjustment/Setting
scanner target value. (Servicing)
8 Used to perform the initial value reset of the engine auto adjustment scanner Adjustment/Setting
target value. (Servicing)
11 Used to set the reference scanner target value for the engine auto density Adjustment/Setting
adjustment.
64 1 Used to perform the self print. (Color mode) Operation test/Check
2 Used to print the density adjustment pattern. Operation test/Check
3 Used to perform self print (monochrome mode). Operation test/Check
4 Used to perform the printer self print. Operation test/Check
* When FIERY is supported, SIM is not displayed.
5 Used to perform the printer self print (PCL). Operation test/Check
6 Used to perform the printer self print (PS). Operation test/Check
65 1 Used to perform the touch panel (LCD display) detection position Adjustment Operation panel section
adjustment.
2 Used to check the touch panel (LCD display) detection position adjustment Operation check/test
result.
5 Used to check the operation panel key input. Operation check/test
66 1 Used to change and check the soft switch setting. Setting
2 Used to clear the soft switch and set the default value. Data clear
3 Used to check the operation (read/write) of the FAX PWB memory. Operation test, check FAX
4 Used to check the output operation (MODEM operation) of data signal in Operation check, test FAX
each data output mode of FAX. Send level: MAX
5 Used to check the output operation (MODEM operation) of data signal in Operation test, check FAX
each data output mode of FAX. Send level: Soft switch setting
6 Used to print the confidential pass code. User data output, check FAX
7 Used to output the image memory data (memory send and receive). User data output, check FAX
* The confidential receive contents are also outputted.
8 Used to check the output operation (audio output IC operation check) of the Operation test, check FAX
various audio signals of FAX. Send level: MAX
9 Used to check the output operation (audio output IC operation) of various Operation test, check FAX
audio signals of FAX. Send level: Soft switch setting
10 Used to clear all the data (memory receive and send) of the image memory. Data clear FAX
* The confidential receive data are cleared simultaneously.
11 Used to check the output operation (MODEM operation) in the FAX G3 Operation test, check FAX
mode 300bps. Send level: MAX
12 Used to check the output operation (MODEM operation) in the FAX G3 Operation test, check FAX
mode 300bps. Send level: Set with the soft switch.
13 Used to set the number for the FAX dial signal output test. (In the dial signal Setting FAX
output test with SIM66-14 - 16, the dial number set with this simulation is
outputted.)
14 Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse dial mode (10PPS) and to Setting/Operation test, check FAX
execute the dial signal output test. (The signal of the dial number set with
SIM66-13 is outputted.)
15 Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse dial mode (20PPS) and to Setting/Operation test, check FAX
execute the dial signal output test. (The signal of the dial number set with
SIM 66-13 is outputted.)
16 Used to perform the dial signal (DTMF) output test in the FAX tone dial Setting/Operation test, check FAX
mode. (The signal of the dial number set with SIM 66-13 is outputted.)
The send level can be set to an optional level.
17 Used to perform the dial signal (DTMF) output test in the FAX tone dial Operation test, check FAX
mode. Send level: MAX
18 Used to perform the dial signal (DTMF) output test in the FAX tone dial Operation test, check FAX
mode. Send level: Set with the soft switch.
19 Used to backup the address book data stored in the HDD. (Backup to the Backup
Flash ROM)
20 Used to transfer the address book data stored in the Flash ROM. (Transfer Data transfer
to HDD)
21 Used to print information abut FAX (various registrations, communication Adjustment, setting, operation data FAX
management, file management, system errors, protocols). check
24 Used to clear the FAST memory data. Clear FAX
25 Used to register a FAX number for MODEM dial-in. Setting FAX
26 Used to register an external telephone number for MODEM dial-in. Setting FAX
66 29 Used to clear the data related to the address book (one-touch registration, Data clear
FTP/ Desktop extension, group extension, program registration, interface
memory box, meta data, Inbound Routing, Document Admin table).
30 Used to check a change in the TEL/LIU status. Operation test, check FAX
31 Used to set the TEL/LIU output port. Operation check FAX
32 Used to check the received data (fixed data) from the line. Operation test, check FAX
33 Used to detect the line signals (BUSY TONE/CNG/CED/FNET/DTMF). Operation test, check FAX
34 Used to measure the communication time of the send test image data. Operation test, check FAX
36 Used to perform the interface check between the MFP controller and the Operation test, check FAX
MDMC. (Data line or command line check)
39 Used to set the destination. Setting FAX
42 Used to rewrite the power control program again to the FAX BOX. Setting FAX
43 Used to write the adjustment value of the power control program to the FAX Setting FAX
BOX.
67 17 Used to set the printer controller memory clear and default value. Setting
24 Used to perform the printer setting of auto color calibration. Adjustment/Setting
25 Used to perform the manual correction setting of the printer engine color Adjustment/Setting
balance.
26 Used to perform the reference scanner target value setting of the printer Adjustment/Setting
engine auto density adjustment.
27 Used to perform the scanner target value registration of the printer engine Adjustment/Setting
auto density adjustment.
28 Used to perform the scanner target value registration of the printer engine Adjustment/Setting
auto adjustment.
30 Used to perform delivery setting of the main unit calibration data and the Adjustment/Setting
process correction data to a client PC. (for GDI printer)
31 Used to clear the printer calibration value. Data clear
32 Used to perform the screen/color select function setting for each object. Adjustment/Setting
33 Used to perform the gamma correction (for PCL) between printer screens. Adjustment/Setting
33 Used to perform gamma correction (for GDI) between printer screens. Adjustment/Setting
3. Details of simulation 1-5
Purpose Operation test/Check
1 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the scan-
ner (read) unit and its control circuit.
1-1 Section Optical (Image scanning)
Purpose Operation test/Check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the scan- 1) Select the operation mode and the magnification ratio with the
ner (read) unit and its control circuit. touch panel key.
Section Optical (Image scanning) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure The scanner performs scanning at the speed corresponding to
1) Select the operation mode and the magnification ratio with the the operation mode.
touch panel key.
Key Scan Selectable magnification Default
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. display magnification ratio ratios value
The scanner performs scanning at the speed corresponding to 50 50% Color: 50%, 100%, 200% 100%
the operation mode. 100 100% Black and white (High speed):
200 200% 100%, 200%
Key Scan Selectable magnification Default Black and white (Low speed):
display magnification ratio ratios value 50%, 100%, 200%
50 50% Color: 50%, 100%, 200% 100%
100 100% Black and white (High speed): TEST SIMULATION NO.01-05 CLOSE
200 200% 100%, 200% SCANNER CHECK

Black and white (Low speed): 25
100 400
%
50%, 100%, 200%
50 ZOOM 300

100 150 200
SCANNER CHECK
25 400
100
50 ZOOM 300
BLACK(FAST) BLACK(SLOW) COLOR EXECUTE
100 150 200
2
2-1
1-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto-
matic document feeder unit and the control
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of sensor in circuit.
the scanning (read) section and the related
Section DSPF
circuit.
Operation/Procedure
Section Optical (Image scanning)
1) Select the operation mode and the magnification ratio with the
Operation/Procedure touch panel key.
The operating status of the sensor is displayed. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home The DSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper-
position. ations according to the operation mode.
TEST SIMULATION NO.01-02 CLOSE When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
SCANNER SENSOR CHECK
MHPS Key Scan Selectable magnification Default
display magnification ratio ratios value
50 50% Color: 50%, 100%, 200% 100%
100 100% Black and white (High speed):
200 200% 100%, 200%
Black and white (Low speed):
50%, 100%, 200%

DSPF AGING
25 400
100 %
1/1
50 ZOOM 300
100 150 200
2-2 STRRC DSPF No. 1 resist roller clutch
STRRBC DSPF No. 1 resist roller break clutch
Purpose Operation test/Check STRC DSPF transport clutch
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- STMPS Stamp solenoid (only when installed)
sors and detectors in the automatic docu-
ment feeder unit and the control circuits. TEST SIMULATION NO.02-03 CLOSE
DSPF OUTPUT CHECK

Section DSPF
SPUM SPFM
Operation/Procedure
SPOM SLUM
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
SPFC
played. SPFFAN
Sensors and detectors which are turned on are highlighted. SRRC SRRBC
STRRC STRRBC
SSET DSPF installation detection
STRC STMPS
SOCD DSPF open/close detection
SCOV DSPF cover SW
SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close detection
SPED1 DSPF document empty detection
EXECUTE
SPED2 DSPF document detection 1/1
SPPD1 DSPF document pass detection 1
SPPD4
SPPD5
DSPF document pass detection 4
DSPF document pass detection 5
3
SPOD DSPF paper exit detection
SPRDMD DSPF random feed paper size detection 3-2
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short Purpose Operation test/Check
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of sensor and
STLD DSPF document tray lower limit detection
detector in the finisher and the control cir-
STUD DSPF document tray upper limit detection
cuits.
STMPU DSPF stamp unit installation detection
SWD_LEN DSPF guide plate position Section Finisher
SWD_AD DSPF document detection volume output Operation/Procedure
NOTE: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display. The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
Sensors and detectors which are turned on are highlighted.
DSPF SENSOR CHECK SWD_LEN : **** SWD_AD : ***
SSET SOCD SCOV SLCOV <4K finisher>
SPED1 SPED2 SPPD1 SPPD2 FJPID Interface transport unit entry port detection
SPPD3 SPPD4 SPPD5 SPOD FJPOD Interface transport unit exit port detection
FJPDD Interface transport unit cover detection
SPRDMD SPLS1 SPLS2 STLD
FED Entry port paper detection
STUD STMPU
FAED1 Tray 1 area detection 1
FFJHPD Alignment plate HP detection front
FRJHPD Alignment plate HP detection rear
1/1 FBED1 Tray 1 paper detection
FBED2 Tray 2 paper detection
FCCD Tray approaching detection
2-3 FSLD1 Tray 1 paper surface detection
FPDD1 Paper exit detection
FSLD2 Tray 2 paper surface detection
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads FASHPD Rear edge assist HP detection
in the automatic document feeder unit and FSWHPD Oscillation guide HP detection
the control circuits. FSWOPD Oscillation guide open detection
Section DSPF FSTPD Staple tray paper detection
Operation/Procedure FSHPD Staple drive HP detection
FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel.
FSD Staple empty detection
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. FSTD Needle lead edge position detection
The selected load is operated. FFANLK Fan motor lock detection
When [EXECUTE] is pressed, the operation is stopped. FSJOGD Stapler alignment interference detection
FSAD Staple safety SW
SPUM DSPF paper feed motor FSSUC Saddle staple unit detection
SPFM DSPF transport motor FSHTD Shutter open detection
SPOM DSPF paper exit motor FCD Upper door open detection
SLUM DSPF lift motor FFDD Front cover open detection
SPFFAN DSPF fan motor F24V 24V output interruption detection
SPFC DSPF paper feed clutch FPSW1 PUSHSW1 detection
SRRC DSPF resist roller clutch FPSW2 PUSHSW2 detection
SRRBC DSPF resist roller break clutch FPSW3 PUSHSW3 detection
FAED21 Tray 2 area detection 1 SIMULATION NO.03-02 CLOSE
TEST
FIN SENSOR CHECK
FAED23 Tray 2 area detection 3 FJPID FJPOD FJPDD FED
<4K finisher DIPSW> FAED1 FAED2 FAED3 FFJHPD
FDSW1 DIPSW1 detection FRJHPD FBED1 FBED2 FCCD
FDSW2 DIPSW2 detection FSLD1 FPDD1 FSLD2 FASHPD
FDSW3 DIPSW3 detection FSWHPD FSWOPD FSTPD FSHPD

FDSW4 DIPSW4 detection FSTHPD FSD FSTD FFANLK
FDSW5 DIPSW5 detection FSJOGD FSAD FSSUC FSHTD
FDSW6 DIPSW6 detection
FCD FFDD F24V FPSW1
FPSW2 FPSW3 FAED21 FAED22
FAED23
<4K saddle finisher>
FSPIND Saddle entry port paper detection
FSPDD Saddle paper exit detection
FSDTPD Saddle tray paper detection
1/1
FS1PD Saddle paper detection 1
3-3
FSLGE Paper pushing plate motor lock detection
FSLGHPD Paper pushing plate HP detection Purpose Operation test/Check
FSLGTD Paper pushing plate lead edge position detection Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in
FSFOE Paper folding motor lock detection the finisher and the control circuit.
FSFOHPD Paper folding HP detection
Section Finisher
FSPPHPD Paper positioning plate HP detection
FSPPPD Paper positioning plate paper detection Operation/Procedure
FSAHPD Alignment plate HP detection 1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel.
FSSIND Stitcher storage detection 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
FSVPPD Vertical path paper detection The selected load is operated.
FSCRPD Semi-circular roller phase detection
When [EXECUTE] is pressed, the operation is stopped.
FSGHPD Guide HP detection
FSSHP1 Stitch operation HP detection 1 <4K finisher>
FSSHP2 Stitch operation HP detection 2 FINRPS Entry port reverse path solenoid
FSSD1 Saddle needle presence detection 1 FJPM Interface transport motor
FSSD2 Saddle needle presence detection 2 FJFM Interface transport fan motor
FSAHPC Alignment HP sensor connector connection detection FFM Entry port transport motor
FSFOHPC Paper folding HP sensor connector connection detection FAM Bundle paper exit motor
FSEJDC Paper exit door sensor connector connection detection FFJM Alignment motor front
FSFDC Front door open/close sensor connector connection FRJM Alignment motor rear
detection
FSM Staple shift motor
FSPPHPC Paper positioning plate HP sensor connector connection
FTLM1 Tray 1 lift motor
detection
FTLM2 Tray 2 lift motor
FSLGTC Paper pushing plate lead edge sensor connector
FFSM Staple motor
connection detection
FSWM Oscillation motor
FSINDD Inlet port cover open detection
FASM Rear edge assist motor
FSEJDD Paper exit cover open detection
FINRRS Inlet port roller separation solenoid
FSINDSW Saddle inlet port door detection
FBRRS Buffer roller separation solenoid
FSFDSW Front door open detection SW
FFDRRS Paper exit roller separation solenoid
FSEJDSW Paper exit door open detection SW
FBES Buffer rear edge holding solenoid
FSPSW1 S-PUSHSW detection
FSHC Shutter open/close clutch
FSBHPC Paper pushing plate HP sensor connector connection
detection FAORC Bundle exit lower roller clutch
<4K saddle finisher DIPSW> <4K saddle finisher saddle section>
FSDSW1 S-DIPSW1 detection FSIFM Saddle entry port transport motor

FSDSW2 S-DIPSW2 detection FSFM Saddle transport motor
FSDSW3 S-DIPSW3 detection FSFOM Paper folding motor
FSDSW4 S-DIPSW4 detection FSGM Guide motor
FSDSW5 S-DIPSW5 detection FSJM Saddle alignment motor
FSDSW6 S-DIPSW6 detection FSFSTM Stitch motor front
FSDSW7 S-DIPSW7 detection FSRSTM Stitch motor motor rear
FSDSW8 S-DIPSW8 detection FSLGM Paper holding motor
FSFS Saddle flapper solenoid
<4K finisher/4K saddle finisher punch unit> FS1DFS Paper deflection plate 1 solenoid
FPE Punch motor lock detection FS2DFS Paper deflection plate 2 solenoid
FPUC Punch unit connection detection FSFCS Transport plate contact solenoid
FPHPD Punch HP detection FPPM Paper positioning motor
FPSHPD Punch horizontal resist HP detection <External punch unit>
FPFDD Punch front door open detection
FPDD Punch dust detection FPNM Punch motor
FPUDSW Punch upper cover open/close detection SW FPSM Punch horizontal resist motor
FIN LOAD CHECK FINISHER ADJUSTMENT

FINRPS FJPM FJFM FFM A : 10 ; FRONT ADJUST
A: 10 B : 100 ; STAPLE REAR
FAM FFJM FRJM FSM C : 100 ; STAPLE FRONT

0 20
D : 50 ; PUNCH CENTER
FTLM1 FTLM2 FFSM FSWM

E : 50 ; PUNCH HOLE
FASM FINRRS FBRRS FFDRRS
FBES FSHC FAORC
OK
EXECUTE 1/1
3-30
3-10
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
Purpose Adjustment sors and detectors in the inserter and the
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher. control circuits.
Section Finisher Section Inserter
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item corresponding to the adjustment content with The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
[n] and [p] keys on the touch panel. played.
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. Sensors and detectors which are turned on are highlighted.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
TH_SEN Inserter sub tray pull-out detection
<4K finisher> TS_SEN Inserter sub tray storage detection
Set Default T_SEN Inserter tray paper length detection
Item Display Item EMP_SEN Inserter tray empty detection
range value
A FRONT Alignment position 0 - 20 10 REG_SEN Inserter resist detection
ADJUST adjustment (front) TIM_SEN Inserter timing detection
B STAPLE Staple binding position 94 - 106 100 JCK_SEN Inserter JAM cover open/close detection
REAR adjustment (one position H_SEN Inserter reverse detection
at the rear) HI_SEN Inserter paper exit detection
C STAPLE Staple binding position 94 - 106 100 HYK_SEN Inserter reverse unit open/close detection
FRONT adjustment (one position P_ST_SW Inserter start SW
in front) P_MO_SW Inserter staple mode select SW
D PUNCH Punch center adjustment 30 - 70 50 P_PN_SW Inserter punch select SW
CENTER
SET_SW Inserter set SW
E PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 46 - 52 50
adjustment SIMULATION NO.03-30 CLOSE
TEST
<4K saddle finisher> FIN SENSOR CHECK
TH_SEN TS_SEN T_SEN EMP_SEN
Set Default
Item Display Item REG_SEN TIM_SEN JCK_SEN H_SEN
range value
HI_SEN HYK_SEN P_ST_SW P_MO_SW
A SADDLE Saddle binding position 197 - 203 200
POSITION adjustment P_PN_SW SET_SW
B FOLDING Saddle folding position 192 - 208 200

POSITION adjustment
C FRONT Alignment position 0 - 20 10
ADJUST adjustment (front)
D STAPLE Staple binding position 94 - 106 100
REAR adjustment (one position
at the rear) 1/1
E STAPLE Staple binding position 94 - 106 100
FRONT adjustment (one position 3-31
in front)
F PUNCH Punch center adjustment 30 - 70 50
CENTER Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
G PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 46 - 52 50 in the inserter and the control circuit.
adjustment
Section Inserter
Operation/Procedure
The selected load is operated.
K_MOT Inserter paper feed motor

Y_MOT Inserter horizontal transport motor
H_MOT Inserter reverse motor
F_SOL Inserter flapper solenoid
R_CL Inserter resist clutch Operation/Procedure
P_LED Inserter operation panel upper LED The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
INSERTER LOAD CHECK
K_MOT Y_MOT <A4 LCC>
H_MOT F_SOL LPFD LCC transport sensor
R_CL P_LED
LUD LCC tray upper limit detection
LDD LCC tray lower limit detection
LPED LCC tray paper empty detection
LCD LCC tray insertion detection
LDSW LCC upper open/close detection SW
LRE LCC lift motor encoder detection
L24VM LCC 24V power monitor
LLSW LCC upper limit SW
LTOD LCC main unit connection detection
EXECUTE
1/1
<A3 LCC>
LPFD LCC transport sensor
3-32 LUD LCC tray upper limit detection
LDD LCC tray lower limit detection
Purpose Setting (Adjustment)
LPED LCC tray paper empty detection
Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the LCD LCC tray insertion detection
inserter paper width detection level. LDSW LCC upper open/close detection SW
Section Inserter LRE LCC lift motor encoder detection
L24VM LCC 24V power monitor
Operation/Procedure
LLSW LCC upper limit SW
1) Select an item corresponding to the adjustment content with
LPUSW LCC paper upper surface detection SW
[n] and [p] keys on the touch panel.
LRRSW LCC reverse winding detection SW
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. LTLSW LCC tray lift SW
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) LTLD LCC tray lock sensor
LIPSW LCC illegal paper detection SW
Set LTOD LCC main unit connection sensor
Item Display Item
range
A MAX. POSITION Inserter tray width detection 0 - 1023 SIMULATION NO.04-02 CLOSE
TEST
adjustment value (Max. width)
LCC SENSOR CHECK
B POSITION 1 Inserter tray width detection 0 - 1023 LPFD LUD LDD LPED
adjustment value (Adjustment
LCD LDSW LRE L24VM
position 1)
C POSITION 2 Inserter tray width detection 0 - 1023 LLSW LTOD
adjustment value (Adjustment

position 2)
D MIN. POSOTION Inserter tray width detection 0 - 1023
adjustment value (Min. width)
INSERTER TRAY VALUE SETTING

A : 72 ; MAX. POSITION
1/1
A: 72 B : 200 ; POSITION1
C : 10 ; POSITION2
0 1023
D : 100 ; MIN. POSITION
4-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
in the large capacity tray (LCC) and the
control circuit.
Section Large capacity tray (LCC)
OK Operation/Procedure
4 When [EXECUTE] is pressed, the operation is stopped.
<A4 LCC>
4-2
LPFM LCC transport motor
Purpose Operation test/Check LLM LCC lift motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
sors and detectors in the large capacity tray LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
(LCC) and the control circuit. LTRC LCC transport clutch
Section Large capacity tray (LCC)
<A3 LCC>
LPFM LCC transport motor
LLM LCC lift motor TEST SIMULATION NO.05-01
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch

LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
LTRC LCC transport clutch
LTLED LCC tray LED lamp
LTLC LCC tray lock clutch
LFAN LCC separation auxiliary fan
LCC LOAD CHECK
LPFM LLM LPFC LPFS
After 6.0sec
LTRC
EXECUTE 1/1
4-5
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the clutch
(LTRC) in the LCC and the monitor. 5-2
Section Large capacity tray (LCC) Purpose Operation test/Check
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater
1) Press LTRC key to check the sync signal. lamp and the control circuit.
When normal: ON When abnormal: OFF Section Fusing
2) Press the highlighted LTRC key to check the sync signal. Operation/Procedure
When normal: OFF When abnormal: ON 1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel.
TEST
LCC SYNCRONIZING SIGNAL CHECK
The selected heater lamp performs ON/OFF operation.
LTRC : LTRC OFF When [EXECUTE] is pressed, the operation is stopped.
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main

HL_US Heater lamp upper sub
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main
HL_EX Heater lamp external EX1
Heater lamp external EX2
HL_ALL All heater lamps ON

HEATER LAMP LOAD SETUP
1/1 HL_UM HL_US
HL_LM HL_EX
HL_ALL
5
5-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
EXECUTE 1/1
cuit.
Section Operation panel
Operation/Procedure
The LCD is changed as shown below.
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to Max. o
Min. o the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
5-3
6
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the copy
6-1
lamp and the control circuit.
Section Optical (Image scanning)
Operation/Procedure
(clutches and solenoids) in the paper trans-
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel. port system and the control circuits.
Section Paper transport/paper exit
The target lamp is lighted for 10 sec.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target for the operation check with [n] and [p] keys.
OC COPY LAMP OC copy lamp 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF copy lamp The selected load is operated.
COPY LAMP CHECK CPFM Paper feed motor

OC COPY LAMP DSPF COPY LAMP
LCCM LCC transport motor
PFM PS front motor
RRM Resist motor
FPCM Pressure change motor
FUM Fusing motor
POMF Paper exit motor normal rotation
POMR Paper exit motor reverse rotation
WTM Waste toner drive motor
TRC1 Vertical transport clutch upper
TRC2 Vertical transport clutch lower
TANCL Tandem transport clutch
EXECUTE 1/1 LPFC LCC transport clutch
RRC PS clutch
RRC2 PS clutch 2
5-4 PCSS Process control shutter solenoid
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch
MPFS Manual paper feed take-up solenoid
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis- MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid
charge lamp and the control circuit. T1PUS Tandem tray 1 pick-up solenoid
Section Process T2PUS Tandem tray 2 pick-up solenoid
Operation/Procedure C3PUS Cassette 3 pick-up solenoid
C4PUS Cassette 4 pick-up solenoid
T1PFC Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. T2PFC Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch
The target lamp is lighted for 30 sec. C3PFC Cassette 3 paper feed clutch
When [EXECUTE] is pressed, the operation is stopped. C4PFC Cassette 4 paper feed clutch
T1LUM Tandem tray 1 lift-up motor
DL_K Discharge lamp K T2LUM Tandem tray 2 lift-up motor
DL_C Discharge lamp C C3LUM Cassette 3 lift-up motor
DL_M Discharge lamp M Same control C4LUM Cassette 4 lift-up motor
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y LSS_BK LSU shutter solenoid BK
LSS_CL LSU shutter solenoid CL
DISCHARGE LAMP CHECK TEST SIMULATION NO.06-01 CLOSE
DL_K DL_C DL_M DL_Y FEED OUTPUT CHECK
CPFM LCCM PFM RRM
FPCM FUM POMF POMR
WTM TRC1 TRC2 TANCL
LPFC RRC RRC2 PCSS
MPUC MPFS MPGS T1PUS
EXECUTE T2PUS C3PUS C4PUS T1PFC

1/1
T2PFC C3PFC C4PFC T1LUM
T2LUM C3LUM C4LUM LSS_BK
EXECUTE 1/2
6-2 TEST SIMULATION NO.06-03 CLOSE
Purpose Operation test/Check TRANSFER LOAD CHECK
POSITION :
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan
motor and its control circuit.
Section Other
Operation/Procedure
NORMAL REVERSE EXECUTE
1/1
Paper exit cooling fan motor 1
POFM
Paper exit cooling fan motor 2
Ozone exhaust fan motor 1 6-4
OZFM Ozone exhaust fan motor 2 Purpose Operation test/Check
Ozone exhaust fan motor 3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the PTC
Power cooling fan motor 1
PSFM and the MC cleaner.
Power cooling fan motor 2
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor Section
Fusing exhaust fan motor Operation/Procedure
FUFM
Fusing fan cooling motor 1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel.
CFM Charger cooling fan motor
CONFM Controller cooling fan motor / HDD cooling fan motor
VFM_C Main inside ventilation fan motor (center) TEST SIMULATION NO.06-04 CLOSE
VFM_R Main inside ventilation fan motor (right) PTC/MC CLEANING
MC COUNT : 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.06-02 CLOSE PTC COUNT : 0
FAN LOAD SETUP
POFM OZFM
PSFM LSUFM MC PTC ALL EXECUTE
FUFM CFM
CONFM VFM_C
VFM_R
7
7-1
Purpose Setting
ALL EXECUTE 1/1 Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of
aging.
Section Other
6-3 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Operation test/Check 1) Select a target to be set with the touch panel key.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the primary 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
transfer unit and the control circuit. The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
Section Process (Transfer) Afterward, the operation mode is kept until the power is tuned
Operation/Procedure off or resetting is made.
Select [NORMAL] or [REVERSE] and press [EXECUTE] key. AGING Aging operation setup
The load operation is started. (Separation operation is changed in INTERVAL Intermittent setup
the sequence of BLACK o COLOR o FREE, and the operation is MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection enable/disable setup
halted for 5 sec at each position. For REVERSE. However, the FUSING DISABLE Fusing operation enable/disable setup
operation is reversed.) WARMUP DISABLE Warm-up disable setup
During this period, the current position is displayed. DV CHECK DISABLE DV unit detection enable/disable setup
SHADING DISABLE Shading disable setup
BLACK Black mode CCD GAIN FREE CCD gain adjustment free setup
position Black mode position
COLOR Color mode TEST SIMULATION NO.07-01 CLOSE
Color mode position The operation
NORMAL position AGING TEST SETTING
is repeated.
FREE Drum Drum separation position
AGING INTERVAL
separation
MISFEED DISABLE FUSING DISABLE
position
WARMUP DISABLE DV CHECK DISABLE
BLACK Black mode
position Black mode position SHADING DISABLE CCD GAIN FREE
FREE Drum
Drum separation position The operation
REVERSE separation is repeated.
position Color mode position
COLOR Color mode
position EXECUTE 1/1
Purpose Setting PRINTING COLOR SELECT(COLOR MODE)
K C M Y
Function (Purpose) Used to set the intermittent aging cycle.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the intermittent aging cycle (unit: sec) with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key.
The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
* The interval time can be set in the range of 1 to 900sec.

EXECUTE 1/1
INTERVAL AGING CYCLE TIME SETUP
A: 1 ; CYCLE TIME(SEC)
A: 1
1 900
8
8-1
Purpose Operation test/Check/Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
the developing voltage in each print mode
OK and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
high speed and the low speed are also
adjusted simultaneously.
7-8
Section Process (Developing)
Purpose Operation display
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] key on the touch
Section panel.
Operation/Procedure 2) Select an adjustment item with [n] and [p] keys.
Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Counting of the warm-up time is started. * When U or V key is pressed, the set value of each item is
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited. increased or decreased by 1 collectively.
The voltage entered in step 2 is outputted for 30sec and the
WARM UP TIME DISPLAY SETTING
0 SECONDS
set value is saved.
When [EXECUTE] is pressed, the output is interrupted.
Set Default
Key Item Display Content
range value
MIDDLE A MIDDLE K developing bias 0 - 700 450
EXECUTE SPEED set value at middle
DVB_K speed
B MIDDLE C developing bias 0 - 700 450
7-9 SPEED set value at middle
DVB_C speed
C MIDDLE M developing bias 0 - 700 450
Function (Purpose) Used to set a color in the color mode print- SPEED set value at middle
ing. (Used to check the print in the color DVB_M speed
mode.) D MIDDLE Y developing bias 0 - 700 450
SPEED set value at middle
Section
DVB_Y speed
Operation/Procedure LOW/ A LOW K developing bias 0 - 700 420
1) Select a color for print with the touch panel. HIGH SPEED set value at low
DVB_K speed
B LOW C developing bias 0 - 700 420
Printing is started in the selected color. SPEED set value at low
* If no color is specified, printing is made in all colors. DVB_C speed
C LOW M developing bias 0 - 700 420
K Setup/cancel of black SPEED set value at low
C Setup/cancel of cyan DVB_M speed
M Setup/cancel of magenta D LOW Y developing bias 0 - 700 420
Y Setup/cancel of yellow SPEED set value at low
DVB_Y speed
E HIGH K developing bias 0 - 700 450
SPEED set value at high
DVB_K speed
DV SETTING AND OUTPUT MHV/GRID SETTING AND OUTPUT

A450 MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K A 583 MIDDLE SPEED GB_K
A: 450 B450 MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C A: 583 B 635 MIDDLE SPEED GB_C
C450 MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M C 635 MIDDLE SPEED GB_M

0 700 230 850
D450 MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y D 635 MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y

8-2 8-6
Purpose Operation test/Check/Adjustment Purpose Operation test/Check/Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the main charger grid voltage in each the transfer voltage and the control circuit.
printer mode and the control circuit.
Section Process (Transfer)
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
high speed and the low speed are also Operation/Procedure
adjusted simultaneously. 1) Select an adjustment item with [n] and [p] keys.
Section Process (Charging) 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] key on the touch The current set voltage is outputted for 30 sec, and the set
panel. value is saved.
2) Select an adjustment item with [n] and [p] keys. When [EXECUTE] is pressed, the output is interrupted.
* When U or V key is pressed, the set value of each item is
increased or decreased by 1 collectively.
The voltage entered in step 3 is outputted for 30sec and the
set value is saved.
When [EXECUTE] is pressed, the output is interrupted.
Set Default
Key Item Display Content
range value
MIDDLE A MIDDLE K charging/grid 230 - 850 583
SPEED bias set value at
GB_K middle speed
B MIDDLE C charging/grid 230 - 850 635
GB_C middle speed
C MIDDLE M charging/grid 230 - 850 635
GB_M middle speed
D MIDDLE Y charging/grid 230 - 850 635
GB_Y middle speed
LOW/ A LOW K charging/grid 230 - 850 552
HIGH SPEED bias set value at
GB_K low speed
B LOW C charging/grid 230 - 850 600
GB_C low speed
C LOW M charging/grid 230 - 850 600
GB_M low speed
D LOW Y charging/grid 230 - 850 600
GB_Y low speed
E HIGH K charging/grid 230 - 850 604
SPEED bias set value at 598*
GB_K high speed
* 65/55-sheets machine
Actual output
Set Default Actual output
Item Display Content value of the
range value setting range
initial value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Lower speed 0 - 255 78 2PA - 100PA 15PA
K
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K Medium speed 0 - 255 78 2PA - 100PA 15PA
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C Lower speed 0 - 255 68 2PA - 100PA 10PA
C
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C Medium speed 0 - 255 68 2PA - 100PA 10PA
Color
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M Primary Lower speed 0 - 255 68 2PA - 100PA 10PA
M
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M transfer bias Medium speed 0 - 255 68 2PA - 100PA 10PA
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y reference value Lower speed 0 - 255 68 2PA - 100PA 10PA
Y
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y Medium speed 0 - 255 68 2PA - 100PA 10PA
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Lower speed 0 - 255 78 2PA - 100PA 15PA
Black and
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K K Medium speed 0 - 255 78 2PA - 100PA 15PA
white
K TC1 HIGH SPEED BW K High speed 0 - 255 130 2PA - 100PA 40PA
L TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Front surface 51 - 255 132 2PA - 60PA 25PA
Color
M TC2 PLAIN CL DPX Normal Back surface 51 - 255 132 2PA - 60PA 25PA
N TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Black and paper Front surface 51 - 255 184 2PA - 60PA 40PA
O TC2 PLAIN BW DPX white Back surface 51 - 255 184 2PA - 60PA 40PA
P TC2 HEAVY CL SPX Front surface 51 - 255 88 2PA - 60PA 12.5PA
Color
Q TC2 HEAVY CL DPX Heavy Back surface 51 - 255 88 2PA - 60PA 12.5PA
R TC2 HEAVY BW SPX Secondary Black and paper Front surface 51 - 255 79 2PA - 60PA 10PA
S TC2 HEAVY BW DPX transfer bias white Back surface 51 - 255 79 2PA - 60PA 10PA
T TC2 OHP CL reference value Color 51 - 255 72 2PA - 60PA 8PA
U TC2 OHP BW Black and OHP 51 - 255 72 2PA - 60PA 8PA
white
V TC2 ENVELOPE CL Color 51 - 255 149 2PA - 60PA 30PA
W TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black and Envelope 51 - 255 149 2PA - 60PA 30PA
white
X TC2 CLEANING Cleaning process 51 - 255 72 2PA - 60PA 8PA
Y TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary Printing at low speed 51 - 255 72 -50V - -1500V -200V
Z TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD transfer Printing at middle speed 51 - 255 100 -50V - -1500V -400V
AA TC2 CLEAN HIGH SPD cleaning bias Printing at high speed 51 - 255 114 -50V - -1500V -500V
AB TC2 CLEAN CLEANING reference value Cleaning 51 - 255 156 -50V - -1500V -800V
AC PTC LOW SPEED CL Lower speed 0 - 255 119 0/-100PA - -700PA -300PA
Color
AD PTC MIDDLE SPEED CL Medium speed 0 - 255 119 0/-100PA - -700PA -300PA
PTC current
AE PTC LOW SPEED BK Lower speed 0 - 255 119 0/-100PA - -700PA -300PA
reference value
AF PTC MIDDLE SPEED BK Black and white Medium speed 0 - 255 119 0/-100PA - -700PA -300PA
AG PTC HIGH SPEED BK High speed 0 - 255 119 0/-100PA - -700PA -300PA
AH VCASE LOW SPEED CL Lower speed 0 - 255 0 0/-200V - -1000V 0
Color
AI VCASE MIDDLE SPEED CL PTC case Medium speed 0 - 255 0 0/-200V - -1000V 0
AJ VCASE LOW SPEED BK voltage Lower speed 0 - 255 0 0/-200V - -1000V 0
AK VCASE MIDDLE SPEED BK reference value Black and white Medium speed 0 - 255 0 0/-200V - -1000V 0
AL VCASE HIGH SPEED BK High speed 0 - 255 0 0/-200V - -1000V 0
THV SETTING AND OUTPUT

CLOSE
9
A : 78 ; TC1 LOW SPEED CL K
A: 78 B : 78 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K 9-2

0 255
D : 68 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C
sors and detectors in the duplex section
F : 68 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M and its control circuit.
G : 68 ; TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Section Duplex
H: 68 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y Operation/Procedure
I : 78 ; TC1 LOW SPEED BW K The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
K : 130 ; TC1 HIGH SPEED BW K
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection
EXECUTE OK APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2
PHTM_K Vertical transport motor K
HTM_K* Hopper motor K
FIN SENSOR CHECK
DSW_ADU APPD1 APPD2 HTM_C Hopper motor C
HTM_M Hopper motor M
HTM_Y Hopper motor Y
This key operates both the hopper motor K and the intermediate
hopper stirring motor.
TONER MOTOR ACTIVATION
TM_K1 TM_C TM_M TM_Y
1/1 TM_K2 PHTM_K HTM_K HTM_C
HTM_M HTM_Y
9-3
in the duplex section and the control cir-
cuits. ALL EXECUTE 1/1
Section Duplex
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel. 10-2
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Purpose Operation test/Check
The selected load is operated. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
When [EXECUTE] is pressed, the operation is stopped. remaining quantity sensor and the control
circuit.
ADMH ADU 1 motor (H)
ADML ADU 2 motor (L)
ADUGS Gate solenoid
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the toner motor is driven for 10
TEST SIMULATION NO.09-03 CLOSE sec and the toner remaining quantity in the toner hopper is dis-
ADU LOAD CHECK played.
ADMH ADML ADUGS No toner remaining: Normal display
Toner remaining: Highlighted display
HTCS_K Hopper remaining quantity sensor K

HTCS_C Hopper remaining quantity sensor C
HTCS_M Hopper remaining quantity sensor M
HTCS_Y Hopper remaining quantity sensor Y

TONER HOPPER SENSOR CEHCK
EXECUTE 1/1
HTCS_K HTCS_C HTCS_M HTCS_Y
10
10-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load
(motor) in the process section and the EXECUTE 1/1
related circuits.
* This check must be performed with no
toner bottle installed.
Operation/Procedure
13
13--
The selected load is operated for 10 sec. Purpose Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
When [EXECUTE] is pressed, the operation is stopped. Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
Section
TM_K1 Toner motor K1
Operation/Procedure
TM_C Toner motor C
TM_M Toner motor M 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
TM_Y Toner motor Y 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
Operation/Procedure
TEST SIMULATION NO.13 CLOSE
U1 TROUBLE CANCELLATION
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
U2 TROUBLE CANCELLATION

14
14-- 17
Purpose Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel excluding the self-diag "U1/ 17--
U2/LCC/PF" troubles.
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
Operation/Procedure
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
TEST SIMULATION NO.14 CLOSE 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
TROUBLE CANCELLATION(OTHER)
PF TROUBLE CANCELLATION
15
21
15--
Purpose Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.) 21-1
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09, F3-12, Purpose Setting
F3-22 (large capacity paper feed tray, Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
paper feed tray 1, 2)" trouble. Section
Section LCC Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys on the touch
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. panel.
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
LCC TROUBLE CANCELLATION Maintenance timing display Default value

A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 300K
COUNTER (TOTAL) counter (Total)
B MAINTENANCE Maintenance 100K
COUNTER (COLOR) counter (Color)
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE MAINTENANCE CYCLE SETUP

A ; 300 MAINTENANCE COUNTER
TOTAL)
A: 300 B ; 100 MAINTENANCE COUNTER

COLOR)
0 999
16
16--
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
Section MFPcnt PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB OK
22 TEST
COUNTER
SIMULATION NO.22-01
DISPLAY
CLOSE
TOTAL OUT (BW) : 00000000 DOC FIL (COL) : 00000000
00000000 00000000
22-1 TOTAL OUT (COL) : DOC FIL (2COL) :
TOTAL (BW) : 00000000 DOC FIL (SGL COL) : 00000000

Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/ TOTAL (COL) : 00000000 OTHER (BW) : 00000000
Check TOTAL (2COL) : 00000000 OTHER (COL) : 00000000
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each TOTAL (SGL_COL) : 00000000 MAINTENANCE ALL : 00000000
section and operation mode. (Used to COPY (BW) : 00000000 MAINTENANCE COL : 00000000
check the maintenance timing.) COPY (COL) : 00000000 TC1 BELT : 00000000
Section COPY (2COL) : 00000000 TC1 BELT RANGE : 00000000
00000000 000
Operation/Procedure COPY (SGL_COL) : TC1 BELT DAY :
PRINT (BW : 00000000 TC2 BELT : 00000000

Select a display with [n] and [p] keys on the touch panel.
PRINT (COL) : 00000000 TC2 BELT RANGE : 00000000
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK & WHITE] key to print. DOC FIL (BW) : 00000000 TC2 BELT DAY : 000/740
TOTAL OUT(BW) Total output quantity of black and white 1/2
TOTAL OUT(COL) Total output quantity of color

TOTAL(BW) Total use quantity of black and white 22-2
TOTAL(COL) Total use quantity of color Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
TOTAL(2COL) Total use quantity of 2-color
TOTAL(SGL_COL) Total use quantity of single color
Function (Purpose) Used to check the total numbers of misfeed
COPY(BW) Black and white copy counter
and troubles. (When the number of total
COPY(COL) Color copy counter
jam is considerably great, it is judged as
COPY(2COL) 2-color copy counter
necessary for repair.)
COPY(SGL_COL) Single color copy counter Section
PRINT(BW) Black and white print counter Operation/Procedure
PRINT(COL) Color print counter The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.
DOC FIL(BW) Black and white document filing print counter
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK & WHITE] key to print.
DOC FIL(COL) Color document filing print counter
DOC FIL(2COL) 2-color document filing print counter TEST SIMULATION NO.22-02 CLOSE
DOC FIL(SGL COL) Single-color document filing print counter JAM/TROUBLE COUNTER DISPLAY
OTHER(BW) Black and white other counter MACHINE JAM : 00000000
OTHER(COL) Color other counter DSPF JAM : 00000000
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) TROUBLE : 00000000
MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color)
TC1 BELT Primary transfer unit print counter
TC1 BELT RANGE Primary transfer unit accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
TC1 BELT DAY Use day of primary transfer unit (Day)
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer unit print counter
TC2 BELT RANGE Secondary transfer unit accumulated traveling
distance (cm) 1/1
TC2 BELT DAY Secondary transfer unit use day (Day)
FUSER UNIT(U) Fusing unit print counter (Heat roller upper)
22-3
FUSER UNIT(E&L) Fusing unit print counter
(Heat roller external and lower) Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
FUSER DAY(U) Fusing unit use day (Heat roller upper) Function (Purpose) Used to check the misfeed positions and
FUSER DAY(E&L) Fusing unit use day the number of misfeed at each position.
(Heat roller external and lower) * The trouble position can be trouble-
FUSER WEB SEND Fuser web cleaning send counter shooted according to this data.
FUSER WEB UNIT Fusing web print counter
FUSER WEB DAY Use day of fuser web unit (Day)
Section
DRUM LIFE(K) Accumulated number of drum rotations (K) Operation/Procedure
DRUM LIFE(C) Accumulated number of drum rotations (C) The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
DRUM LIFE(M) Accumulated number of drum rotations (M) up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
DRUM LIFE(Y) Accumulated number of drum rotations (Y) Press [COLOR] or [BLACK & WHITE] key to print.
DEVE LIFE(K) Accumulated number of developer rotations (K)
* For the list of the jam codes, refer to "2. Paper jam codes" in [12]
DEVE LIFE(C) Accumulated number of developer rotations (C)
OTTERS.
DEVE LIFE(M) Accumulated number of developer rotations (M)
DEVE LIFE(Y) Accumulated number of developer rotations (Y) TEST SIMULATION NO.22-03 CLOSE
JAM HISTORY DATA DISPLAY
PPD2_N1 CPFD2_S2 MFT TRAY3
PPD2_N1 CPFD2_S2 APPD3_S DPFD2_S4
LCC PPD2_PRI CPID2_S2 CPID2_S2
CPFD1_N1 PPD2_PRI TRAY3 APPD3_S
TRAY2 MFT MFT CPID2_S2
PPD2_N1 PPD2_N1 MFT APPD3_S
TRAY2 TRAY3 TRAY3 CPID2_S2
TRAY2 TRAY3
1/1
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check S/N : **********

ICU(MAIN) : 00.00.00 SADDLE : 00.00.00
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his- ICU(BOOT) : 00.00.00 PUNCH : 00.00.00
tory. LANGUAGE : 00.00.00 INSERTER : 00.00.00
Section GRAPHIC : 00.00.00 NIC : 00.00.00
Operation/Procedure IMG DATA ROM : 00.00.00 FIERY : 00.00.00
COLOR PROFILE : 00.00.00 POWER-CON : 00.00.00

The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.
(The old ones are deleted sequentially.) PCU : 00.00.00 E-MANUAL : 00.00.00
SCU : 00.00.00
SPF : NONE
* For the list of the trouble codes, refer to "2. Trouble code list" in FAX(MAIN) : NONE
[8] SELF DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLE CODES. LCC : 00.00.00
FINISHER : 00.00.00
TROUBLE CODE DATA DISPLAY
1/1
E7-23 F9-20 F2-39 L4-31
F1-50 L4-02 F2-39 F1-50
F1-50 L4-02 F1-61 F1-50

22-6
F1-50 F2-39 H5-01 PF-00
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
L4-31 L8-02 L8-02 L4-02 Function (Purpose) Used to output the list of the setting and
U5-12 F2-39 L1-00 F9-20 adjustment data (simulations, FAX soft
PF-00 PC- F2-81 E7-23 switch, counters).
U2-22 F2-39 Section
Operation/Procedure
1/1 * When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
22-5 1) Select the print mode with 10-key.
Purpose Other 1. List print 2. Lit print (Sim 50-24)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each 2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step
unit (section). 1.
Section TEST SIMULATION NO.22-06 CLOSE
Operation/Procedure DATA PRINT MODE
The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed. A: 1 ; DATA PATTERN
A: 1
When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to
1 2
check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.
S/N Serial No.

ICU(MAIN) ICU (Main section)
ICU(BOOT) ICU (Boot section)
LANGUAGE Language support data version EXECUTE OK
GRAPHIC Graphic data for LCD
IMG DATA ROM ImageASIC FlashROM data
COLOR PROFILE Color profile 22-8
PCU PCU Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
SCU SCU
Function (Purpose) Used to check the counter value of the fin-
SPF SPF
isher, the DSPF, and the scan (reading).
FAX(MAIN) FAX (main section)
LCC Side LCC Section
FINISHER Finisher Operation/Procedure
SADDLE Saddle unit The counter values of the finisher, the DSPF, and the scanner
PUNCH Punch unit related counters are displayed.
INSERTER Inserter Press [COLOR] or [BLACK & WHITE] key to print.
NIC NIC
FIERY FIERY option DSPF Document feed quantity
POWER-CON Power controller SCAN Number of scans
E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage) STAPLER Staple counter
PUNCHER Puncher counter
STAMP Stamp counter
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
OC_OPEN OC open/close counter
DSPF_OPEN DSPF open/close counter
INSERTER Inserter counter
INSERTER OFFLINE Inserter offline counter
OC LAMP TIME Overall lighting time of the lamp in the OC section
(Hour, minute)
DSPF LAMP TIME Overall lighting time of the lamp in the DSPF
section (Hour, minute)
TEST SIMULATION NO.22-08 CLOSE MX-5500N
ORG./STAPLE COUNTER DISPLAY MACHINE MX-6200N Main unit
DSPF : 00000000 MX-7000N
SCAN : 00000000 DSPF MX-RPX1 Document feed unit
STAPLER : 00000000 STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp
PUNCHER : 00000000 MX-LCX2
LCC Large capacity tray (LCC)
STAMP : 00000000
MX-LCX3
MX-PNX2A
SADDLE STAPLER : 00000000
MX-PNX2B
OC_OPEN : 00000000 PUNCHER Punch unit
MX-PNX2C
DSPF_OPEN : 00000000
MX-PNX2D
INSERTER : 00000000 MX-FNX3
FINISHER Finisher
INSERTER OFFLINE : 00000000 MX-FNX4
OC LAMP TIME : 00000000 INSERTER MX-CFX1 Inserter
FAX1 MX-FXX1 FAX kit
DSPF LAMP TIME : 00000000
FAX MEMORY MX-MMX1 FAX extension memory
PS MX-PKX1 PS3 expansion kit
1/1
MX-FRX3U Security kit (DSK) commercial version
SECURITY MX-FRX3 Security kit (DSK) authentication
version
22-9 AIM MX-AMX1 Application expansion module
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check SDRAM (SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
SDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print
HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity
quantity) of each paper feed section.
NIC STANDARD NIC
Section Paper feed, ADU, LCC BARCODE AR-PF1 Barcode font
Operation/Procedure FONT AR-PF3 Kanji font (Japan only)
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed. INTERNET- MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
FAX
FIERY MX-PEX2 Fiery print controller
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter ACM MX-AMX2 Application communication module
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter EAM MX-AMX3 External account module
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total) MACHINE SYSTEM
MACHINE : MX-5500N SDRAM(ICU) : 0MB
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
DSPF : MX-RPX1 HDD : 0MB
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope) STAMP : AR-SU1 NIC : STANDARD
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 or A3 LCC) LCC : NONE BARCODE : AR-PF1
ADU ADU paper feed counter PUNCHER : MX-PNX2A FONT : AR-PF3
FINISHER : MX-FNX3 INTERNET-FAX : MX-FWX1

INSERTER : MX-CFX1 FIERY : MX-PEX2
PAPER FEED COUNTER DISPLAY
FAX1 : MX-FXX1
TRAY 1 : 00000000
FAX MEMORY : MX-MMX1
TRAY 2 : 00000000
PS : MX-PKX1
TRAY 3 : 00000000
SECURITY : MX-FRX3U
TRAY 4 : 00000000
AIM : MX-AMX1
MFT TOTAL : 00000000
SDRAM(SYS) : 0MB
MFT HEAVY : 00000000
1/1
MFT OHP : 00000000
MFT ENV : 00000000
LCC : 00000000 22-11

ADU : 00000000 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency of FAX
(send/receive). (Only when FAX is
installed.)
1/1
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
22-10 The counter values of FAX send and receive are displayed.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Press [COLOR] or [BLACK & WHITE] key to print.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter
(option, internal hardware). FAX SEND FAX send counter
Section FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
Operation/Procedure SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter
The system configuration is displayed. (The model names of the SEND TIME FAX send time
installed devices and the options are displayed.) RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix attached communications
CLOSE
DRUM RANGE M Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(cm) (M)
FAX COUNTER DISPLAY
DRUM RANGE Y Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
FAX OUTPUT : 00000000
(cm) (Y)
FAX SEND : 00000000
DEVE CTRG K Developer cartridge print counter (K)
FAX RECEIVED : 00000000 DEVE CTRG C Developer cartridge print counter (C)
SEND IMAGES : 00000000 DEVE CTRG M Developer cartridge print counter (M)
SEND TIME : 00000000:00:0
DEVE CTRG Y Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
DEVE RANGE K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
RECEIVED TIME : 00000000:00:0
(cm) (K)
ACR SEND : 00000000
DEVE RANGE C Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(cm) (C)
DEVE RANGE M Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
1/1 (cm) (M)
DEVE RANGE Y Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(cm) (Y)
TONER MOTOR K Toner motor print counter (K)
22-12
TONER MOTOR Toner motor print counter (K2)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check K2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the misfeed position in the TONER MOTOR C Toner motor print counter (C)
DSPF and the number of misfeed of each TONER MOTOR M Toner motor print counter (M)
position. (If the number of misfeed is con- TONER MOTOR Y Toner motor print counter (Y)
siderably great, it may lead to the decision TONER TURN K Toner motor accumulated rotating time (sec) (K)
for repair.) TONER TURN K2 Toner motor accumulated rotating time (sec) (K2)
TONER TURN C Toner motor accumulated rotating time (sec) (C)
Section DSPF
TONER TURN M Toner motor accumulated rotating time (sec) (M)
Operation/Procedure TONER TURN Y Toner motor accumulated rotating time (sec) (Y)
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) TEST SIMULATION NO.22-13 CLOSE
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK & WHITE] key to print. PROCESS CARTRIDGE DISPLAY
DRUM CTRG K : 00000000 DEVE RANGE K : 00000000
* For the list of the jam codes, refer to "2. Paper jam codes" in [12]
DRUM CTRG C : 00000000 DEVE RANGE C : 00000000
OTTERS.
DRUM CTRG M : 00000000 DEVE RANGE M : 00000000
TEST SIMULATION NO.22-12 CLOSE DRUM CTRG Y : 00000000 DEVE RANGE Y : 00000000
SPF JAM HISTORY DATA DISPLAY DRUM RANGE K : 00000000 TONER MOTOR K : 00000000
DRUM RANGE C : 00000000 TONER MOTOR K2 : 00000000
DRUM RANGE M : 00000000 TONER MOTOR C : 00000000
DRUM RANGE Y : 00000000 TONER MOTOR M : 00000000
DEVE CTRG K : 00000000 TONER MOTOR Y : 00000000
DEVE CTRG C : 00000000 TONER TURN K : 00000000
DEVE CTRG M : 00000000 TONER TURN K2 : 00000000
DEVE CTRG Y : 00000000 TONER TURN C : 00000000
1/2
22-19
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check each counter value related
1/1
the network scanner.
Section
22-13 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check The counter value related to the network scanner is displayed.
Select the display with [n] and [p] keys on the touch panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the running time of the pro-
cess section. (OPC drum, DV unit, toner Press [COLOR] or [BLACK & WHITE] key to print.
bottle).
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity
Section counter (Black and white scan job)
Operation/Procedure NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity
The rotating time of the process section and the print quantity are counter (Color scan job)
displayed. NET SCN ORG_2CL Network scanner document read quantity
counter (2-color scan job)
NET SCN ORG_SGL Network scanner document read quantity
counter (Single scan job)
DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge print counter (K)
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT Internet FAX output quantity
DRUM CTRG C Drum cartridge print counter (C)
INTERNET FAX SEND Internet FAX send quantity
DRUM CTRG M Drum cartridge print counter (M)
OUTPUT
DRUM CTRG Y Drum cartridge print counter (Y)
INTERNET FAX RECEIVE Number of internet FAX receive
DRUM RANGE K Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send
(cm) (K)
MAIL COUNTER Number of E-Mail send
DRUM RANGE C Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
(cm) (C)
SMB SEND Numeric SMB send
USB CNT Number of USB save SIMULATION NO.22-90 CLOSE
TEST
TRIAL MODE_B/C Trial mode counter (Black and white, color
LIST PRINT
scan job)
ALL CUSTOM SETTING PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
SCAN TO HDD_B/W Scan to HDD record quantity (Black and
white) PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
SCAN TO HDD_CL Scan to HDD record quantity (Color) PS FONT LIST PS KANJI FONT LIST
SCAN TO HDD_2CL Scan to HDD record quantity (2-color) PS EXTENDED FONT NIC PAGE
SCAN TO HDD_SGL Scan to HDD record quantity (Single color)
INDIVIDUAL LIST GROUP LIST
TEST SIMULATION NO.22-19 CLOSE PROGRAM LIST MEMORY BOX LIST
NETWORK SCANNER COUNTER DISPLAY ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
NET SCN ORG_B/W : 00000000
ADMIN. SETTING LIST (COPY) ADMIN. SETTING LIST (PRINT)
NET SCN ORG_CL : 00000000
ADMIN. SETTING LIST (IMAGE SEND) ADMIN. SETTING LIST (DOC FILING)
NET SCN ORG_2CL : 00000000
ADMIN. SETTING LIST (SECURITY) ADMIN. SETTING LIST (COMMON)
NET SCN ORG_SGL : 00000000
ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT : 00000000
INTERNET FAX SEND OUTPUT : 00000000 EXECUTE

1/2
INTERNET FAX RECEIVE : 00000000
INTERNET FAX SEND : 00000000
MAIL COUNTER : 00000000
FTP COUNTER : 00000000 23

SMB SEND : 00000000
USB CNT : 00000000

23-2
TRIAL MODE_B&C : 00000000
1/2 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble history of paper
jam and misfeed. (If the number of misfeed
22-90 and troubles is considerably great, it may
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check be judged as necessary to repair.)
Function (Purpose) Used to output the list of various set data. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing.
1) Select the display with [n] and [p] keys on the touch panel. TEST SIMULATION NO.23-02 CLOSE
2) Select a list to be printed. JAM/TROUBLE DATA PRINT MODE
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self printing. PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PRINT THE JAM/TROUBLE PRINT
All setting list ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST

Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
PS FONT LIST EXECUTE
PS KANJI FONT LIST
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
NIC PAGE
23-80
Destination registration list INDIVIDUAL LIST
(*) GROUP LIST Purpose Operation test/Check
PROGRAM LIST Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
MEMORY BOX LIST sors and detectors in the paper feed and
ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST transport section.
Document filing list DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
Section Paper feed, transport
System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
Operation/Procedure
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND) Press [EXECUTE] key to start list printing.
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
DATA PRINT MODE (PAPER FEED)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST PAPER FEED TIME LIST
Receive rejection number ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
table
Receive rejection address/ ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
domain table
Table list of transfer to INBOUND ROUTING LIST
email
Transfer list to DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
administrator
WEB setting list WEB SETTING LIST
EXECUTE 1/1
Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST
(*): Disabled when the data list print inhibit setting is enabled in a
DSK support model.
24-3
24
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counter value of the fin-
24-1
isher, the DSPF, and scan (reading).
Purpose Data clear
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou-
Operation/Procedure
ble counter. (The counters are cleared after
completion of maintenance.) 1) Select a target to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Section
3) Press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure
The target counter is cleared.
1) Select a target to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. DSPF DSPF counter
3) Press [YES] key. SCAN Scan counter
The target counter is cleared. STAPLER Staple counter
PUNCHER Puncher counter
MACHINE Machine JAM counter STAMP Stamp counter
DSPF DSPF JAM counter SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
TROUBLE Trouble counter INSERTER Inserter counter
INSERTER OFFLINE Inserter offline counter
TEST SIMULATION NO.24-01 CLOSE OC_OPEN OC open/close counter
JAM/TROUBLE COUNTER DATA CLEAR DSPF_OPEN DSPF open/close counter
MACHINE DSPF TROUBLE
OC LAMP TIME OC section lamp total lighting time
DSPF LAMP TIME DSPF section lamp total lighting time
ORG./OUTPUT COUNTER DATA CLEAR

DSPF SCAN STAPLER PUNCHER
STAMP SADDLE STAPLER INSERTER INSERTER OFFLINE
OC_OPEN DSPF_OPEN OC LAMP TIME DSPF LAMP TIME
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO

EXECUTE
1/1
24-2
Purpose Data clear
YES NO EXECUTE
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num- ARE YOU SURE? 1/1
ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
Section 24-4
Operation/Procedure Purpose Data clear
1) Select a target to be cleared with the touch panel key. Function (Purpose) The maintenance counter and the print
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. counters of the transfer unit and the fusing
3) Press [YES] key. unit are cleared. (After completion of main-
The target counter is cleared. tenance, the counters are cleared.)
Section
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter Operation/Procedure
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total) 3) Press [YES] key.
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper) The target counter is cleared.
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope) MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total)
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 or A3 LCC) MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color)
ADU ADU paper feed counter TC1 BELT Primary transfer unit print counter
TC1 BELT RANGE Primary transfer unit accumulated traveling
TEST SIMULATION NO.24-02 CLOSE distance (cm)
PAPER FEED COUNTER CLEAR TC1 BELT DAY Use day of primary transfer unit (Day)
TRAY1 TRAY2 TRAY3 TRAY4 TC2 BELT Secondary transfer unit print counter
MFT TOTAL MFT HEAVY MFT OHP MFT ENV TC2 BELT RANGE Secondary transfer unit accumulated traveling
LCC ADU distance (cm)
TC2 BELT DAY Secondary transfer unit use day (Day)
FUSER UNIT (U) Fusing unit print counter (Heat roller upper)
FUSER UNIT (E&L) Fusing unit print counter (Heat roller external and
lower)
FUSER DAY (U) Fusing unit use day (Heat roller upper)
FUSER DAY (E&L) Fusing unit use day (Heat roller external and
lower)
1/1
FUSER WEB SEND Fusing web send counter
FUSER WEB Fusing web print counter SIMULATION NO.24-06 CLOSE
TEST
FUSER WEB DAY Fusing web unit use day
COPY COUNTER DATA CLEAR
MC CLEANER MC cleaner cleaning operation counter
COPY BW COPY COL SINGLE COLOR 2 COLOR
PTC CLEANER PTC cleaner cleaning operation counter
MAINTENANCE COUNTER CLEAR

MAINTENANCE ALL MAINTENANCE COL TC1 BELT TC1 BELT RANGE
TC1 BELT DAY TC2 BELT TC2 BELT RANGE TC2 BELT DAY
FUSER UNIT (U) FUSER UNIT (E&L) FUSER DAY (U) FUSER DAY (E&L)
FUSER WEB SEND FUSER WEB FUSER WEB DAY MC CLEANER
PTC CLEANER
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE 1/1
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE 24-7

1/1
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the OPC drum counter value.
24-5
(After replacement of the OPC drum, this
Purpose Data clear counter is cleared.)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. Section
(After replacement of developer, this
Operation/Procedure
counter is cleared.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.
3) Press [YES] key. Drum cartridge print counter (K)
K
The target counter is cleared. Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Drum cartridge print counter (C)
C
Developer cartridge print counter (K) Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
K
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K) Drum cartridge print counter (M)
M
Developer cartridge print counter (C) Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
C
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C) Drum cartridge print counter (Y)
Y
Developer cartridge print counter (M) Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
M
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
Developer cartridge print counter (Y) TEST SIMULATION NO.24-07 CLOSE
Y
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y) DRUM CTRG COUNTER CLEAR
K C M Y
DEVELOPER COUNTER DATA CLEAR
K C M Y

1/1 24-9
Purpose Data clear
24-6 Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer mode print counter
Purpose Data clear and the self print mode print counter.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter value. Section
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target to be cleared with the touch panel key.
1) Select a target to be cleared with the touch panel key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Press [YES] key.
3) Press [YES] key. The target counter is cleared.
PRINT BW Printer counter (Black and white)
PRINT COL Printer counter (Color)
COPY BW Copy counter (Black and white)
OTHER BW Other counter (Black and white)
COPY COL Copy counter (Color)
OTHER COL Other counter (Color)
SINGLE COLOR Single color
2COLOR 2-color
SIMULATION NO.24-09 CLOSE NET SCN ORG_SGL Network scanner document read
TEST
quantity counter (Single scan job)
PRINT/OTHER COUNTER CLEAR
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT Internet FAX output quantity
PRINT BW PRINT COL OTHER BW OTHER COL
INTERNET FAX SEND OUTPUT Internet FAX send quantity
INTERNET FAX RECEIVE Number of internet FAX receive
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send
MAIL COUNTER Number of E-Mail send
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
SMB SEND Numeric SMB send
USB CNT Number of USB save
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (Black and white,
color scan job)
SCAN TO HDD_B/W Scan to HDD record quantity (Black
YES NO
ARE YOU SURE? EXECUTE 1/1 and white)
SCAN TO HDD_CL Scan to HDD record quantity (Color)
SCAN TO HDD_2CL Scan to HDD record quantity (2-color)
24-10 SCAN TO HDD_SGL Scan to HDD record quantity (Single
color)
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter value. (Only TEST SIMULATION NO.24-15 CLOSE
when FAX is installed.) NETWORK SCANNER COUTNER DATA CLEAR

NET SCN ORG_B/W NET SCN ORG_CL
Section
Operation/Procedure NET SCN ORG_2CL NET SCN ORG_SGL
1) Select a target to be cleared with the touch panel key. INTERNET FAX OUTPUT INTERNET FAX SEND OUTPUT
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. INTERNET FAX RECEIVE INTERNET FAX SEND
3) Press [YES] key. MAIL COUNTER FTP COUNTER
The target counter is cleared. SMB SEND USB CNT
TRIAL MODE_B&C SCAN TO HDD_B/W

FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD_2CL
FAX SEND FAX send counter
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter SCAN TO HDD_SGL
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter

SEND TIME FAX send time
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix attached communications ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE
1/1
FAX COUNTER DATA CLEAR

FAX SEND FAX RECEIVED
24-30
FAX OUTPUT SEND IMAGES
SEND TIME RECEIVED TIME ACR SEND

Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the administrator pass-
word.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The administrator password is initialized.
EXECUTE 1/1 SIMULATION NO.24-30 CLOSE
TEST
ADMIN PASSWORD INITIALIZE
24-15
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear various counters in the scan ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE
mode related to image send.
Section
Operation/Procedure 24-31
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the service mode pass-
3) Press [YES] key. word.
Section
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read Operation/Procedure
quantity counter (Black and white 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
scan job)
2) Press [YES] key.
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read
quantity counter (Color scan job) The service mode password is initialized.
NET SCN ORG_2CL Network scanner document read
quantity counter (2-color scan job)
NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the
TEST
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
SERVICE PASSWORD INITIALIZE
error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the ref-
erence toner density level is not set normally.
(Default value: 128)
Automatic developer adjustment value at low AT DEVE ADJ_L_K

speed AT DEVE ADJ_L_C
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y
Automatic developer adjustment value at middle AT DEVE ADJ_M_K
speed AT DEVE ADJ_M_C
25 AT DEVE ADJ_M_M
AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y
Automatic developer adjustment value at high AT DEVE ADJ_H_K
25-1 speed
Purpose Operation test/Check Automatic developer adjustment control voltage at AT DEVE VO_L_K
low speed AT DEVE VO_L_C
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel-
AT DEVE VO_L_M
oping section.
AT DEVE VO_L_Y
Section Process (Developing section) Automatic developer adjustment control voltage at AT DEVE VO_M_K
Operation/Procedure middle speed AT DEVE VO_M_C
1) Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] or [HIGH] AT DEVE VO_M_M
keys. AT DEVE VO_M_Y
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Automatic developer adjustment control voltage at AT DEVE VO_H_K
high speed
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
min and the detection level of the toner density sensor is dis- TEST SIMULATION NO.25-02 CLOSE
played. AUTOMATIC DEVELOPER ADJUSTMENT
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K : 128 AT DEVE VO_L_Y : 128

TCS_K Toner density sensor K
TCS_C Toner density sensor C
TCS_M Toner density sensor M
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y : 128 AT DEVE VO_M_M : 128
TCS_Y Toner density sensor Y
AT DEVE ADJ_M_K : 128 AT DEVE VO_M_Y : 128
TCV_K Toner density control voltage K
TCV_C Toner density control voltage C
TCV_M Toner density control voltage M
TCV_Y Toner density control voltage Y
AT DEVE ADJ_H_K : 128
TEST SIMULATION NO.25-01 CLOSE AT DEVE VO_L_K : 128
TONER SENSOR OUTPUT MONITOR AT DEVE VO_L_C : 128
AT DEVE VO_L_M : 128

TCS_K :
K C M Y EXECUTE
TCS_C : 1/1
TCS_M :
TCS_Y :
TCV_K : 26
TCV_C :
TCV_M : 26-2
:
TCV_Y
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the large
LOW MIDDLE HIGH EXECUTE
capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size
1/1 is changed, this simulation must be exe-
cuted to change the paper size in software.)
25-2 Section Paper feed
Purpose Setting Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of the toner Select a paper size to be changed with the touch panel.
density when replacing developer. (Auto-
matic adjustment)
SIZE SETUP
Section Process (Photoconductor/Developing/ TRAY1 : 8.5x11 A4 B5
Transfer/Cleaning) LCC : 8.5x11 A4 B5
Operation/Procedure G/LBS SET : GRAM LBS
1) Select a color to be adjusted with the touch panel.

The developing motor rotates for 3 minutes, and the toner den-
sity sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected
level is displayed.
When the developer motor stops, the average value of the
toner density sampling result is set as the reference toner den-
1/1
sity control level.
26-3 26-5
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the auditor setting mode. (Set- Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total
ting must be made according to the auditor counter and the maintenance counter.
use conditions.) Section
Section Auditor Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys.
Select an item to be set with the touch panel. 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
1 = Count up by 1 2 = Count up by 2
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode (standard mode)
AUDITOR operation (Default) 3) Press [OK] key.
EC1 EC1 mode operation The set value in step 2 is saved.
OUTSIDE NONE Normal operation (Default)
AUDITOR P VENDOR1 Old coin vendor mode (Copy mode A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (Black and white)
management) B TOTAL (COL) Total counter (Color)
P OTHER Vendor mode for an external auditor C MAINTENANCE (B/W) Maintenance counter (Black and white)
connected to the coin vendor I/F D MAINTENANCE (COL) Maintenance counter (Color)
DOC ADJ ON Document filing function enabled E DEV (B/W) Developer counter (Black and white)
OFF Document filing function disabled (Default) F DEV (COL) Developer counter (Color)
PF ADJ ON Continuous paper feed is performed.
OFF Continuous paper feed is not performed. TEST SIMULATION NO.26-05 CLOSE
(Default) A3(11x17) COUNTUP
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 A: 2 ; TOTAL(B/W)
MODE (*) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 A: 2 B: 2 ; TOTAL(COL)
MODE3 Vendor mode 3 (Default) C: 2 ; MAINTENANCE(B/W)

1 2
COUNTUP FUSER_IN When the paper lead edge passes the D: 2 ; MAINTENANCE(COL)
TIMING fusing rear sensor.
E: 2 ; DEV(B/W)
FUSER_OUT When the paper rear edge passes the
fusing rear sensor. F: 2 ; DEV(COL)
EXIT_OUT When the paper rear edge passes the

paper exit sensor in the main unit, the right
tray, and the after process unit. (Default) OK
(*) Details of the vendor mode
Completion Insufficient money during Completion

of the copy job of the
26-6
specified Black and Color specified Purpose Setting
quantity white or color (money quantity
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications according to
(money (no money remaining) (no money
remaining) remaining)
the destination. (Paper, fixed magnification
remaining)
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4
ratios, etc.)
MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1 Section
MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1 Operation/Procedure
MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3 1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
Operation 1: Standby during setting time of auto clear. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Default is 60 sec, which can be changed in the
The selected set content is saved.
system setting.
Operation 2: Auto clear is not made. U.S.A. United States of America
Operation 3: The display is shifted to the initial screen. CANADA Canada
INCH Inch series, other destinations
TEST SIMULATION NO.26-03 CLOSE JAPAN Japan
AUDITOR SETUP AB_B AB series (B5 detection), other destinations
BUILT-IN AUDITOR : P10 EC1 EUROPE Europe
OUTSIDE AUDITOR : NONE P VENDOR1 P OTHER U.K. United Kingdom
DOC ADJ : ON OFF AUS. Australia
AB_A AB series (A5 detection), other destinations
PF ADJ : ON OFF
CHINA China
VENDOR MODE : MODE1 MODE2 MODE3
COUNTUP TIMING : FUSER_IN FUSER_OUT EXIT_OUT

DESTINATION SETUP
U.S.A CANADA INCH JAPAN
AB_B EUROPE U.K. AUS
AB_A CHINA
1/1
EXECUTE 1/1
26-10 26-30
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre-
scanner. sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
Section standards). (For slow start to drive the fus-
ing heater lamp)
Operation/Procedure
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 1 is saved. 1) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
0: Control allowed 1: Control inhibited
TRIAL MODE 0: Trial mode setting 2) Press [OK] key.
(0: YES 1: NO) 1: Trial mode cancel (Default)
The set value in step 1 is saved.

U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported)
NETWORK SCANNER TRIAL MODE SETUP CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported)
A: 1 ; TRIAL MODE(0:YES 1:NO)
INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 0 (CE supported)
A: 1 JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported)
0 1 AB_B 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported)
CE MARK CONTROL SETTING

A: 1 ; (0:YES 1:NO)
A: 1
0 1
OK
26-18
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner
save mode operation. (For the Japan and OK
the UK versions.)
Section
Operation/Procedure 26-35
1) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys. Purpose Setting
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4
3) Press [OK] key. trouble history when a same trouble
The set value in step 2 is saved. occurred repeatedly. There are two display
modes: display as one trouble and display
A COPY 0: Copy toner save mode is inhibited. (Default) as several series of troubles.
1: Copy toner save mode is allowed
Section
B PRINTER 0: Printer toner save mode is inhibited. (Default)
Operation/Procedure
1: Printer toner save mode is allowed.
TEST SIMULATION NO.26-18 CLOSE 0: Display as one trouble
TONER SAVE MODE SETUP 1: Display as series of several troubles
A: 0 ; COPY (1:YES 0:NO)
2) Press [OK] key.
A: 0 B: 0 ; PRINTER (1:YES 0:NO)
0 1
TROUBLE MEMORY MODE SETUP

A: 0 ; (0:ONCE 1:ANY)
A: 0
0 1
OK
OK
26-38 26-49
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether printing is continued or Function (Purpose) Used to set the copy speed mode of post-
stopped when the developer life is expired cards.
or when the fusing wed ends. Section
Operation/Procedure Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW)
2) Press [OK] key.
COPY SPEED MODE SETUP
POSTCARD : LOW HIGH
A: MAINTENANCE LIFE OVER 0: Print continue

1: Print stop
B: FUSER WEB END 0: Print continue
1: Print stop
ENGINE LIFE OVER SETTING

A: 0 ; MAINTENANCE LIFE OVER(0:CONTINUE 1:STOP)
A: 0 B: 1 ; FUSER WEB END(0:CONTINUE 1:STOP)

1/1
0 1
26-50
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the black and
white highlight function and the 2-color/Sin-
gle display function.
OK
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys on the touch
26-41 panel.
Purpose Setting 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi- 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
cation ratio automatic select function (AMS)
in the center binding mode. A BW REVERSE 0: Black and white reverse inhibited
(0: NO 1: YES) 1: Black and white reverse allowed
Section
B COLOR MODE (*1) 0 - 7 Refer to the table below.
Operation/Procedure
(*1) B COLOR MODE
0: AMS Disable 1: AMS Enable Mode inhibit 2-color/Single
Set value
2) Press [OK] key. Single 2-color counter disable
The set value in step 1 is saved. 0 OFF OFF OFF
1 OFF ON OFF
U.S.A 0 (Disable) EUROPE 1 (Enable) 2 ON OFF OFF
CANADA 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable) 3 ON ON OFF
INCH 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable) 4 OFF OFF ON
JAPAN 0 (Disable) AB_A 0 (Disable) 5 OFF ON ON
AB_B 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable) 6 ON OFF ON
7 ON ON ON
TEST OFF: Displayed ON: Not displayed
PAMPHLET MODE AMS SETTING.
A: 1 ; (1:YES 0:NO) TEST SIMULATION NO.26-50 CLOSE
A: 1 FUNCTION SETTING
A: 1 ; BW REVERSE : YES
0 1
A: 1 B: 0 ; COLOR MODE
0 1
OK
OK
Purpose Setting ENAIBLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION OF PRINTER

A: 1 ; (1:YES 0:NO)
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-print paper (inser-
A: 1
tion paper, cover, etc.) is counted or not.
0 1
Section
Operation/Procedure
0: Counts up. 1: Does not count up.
2) Press [OK] key.
TEST SIMULATION NO.26-52 CLOSE OK
A BLANK PAPER COUNT MODE SETUP

A: 1 ; (0:YES 1:NO)
A: 1 26-65
0 1 Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
LIMIT COPIES ON Staple limit copies ON (Default)

OK OFF Staple limit copies OFF
26-53 FINISHER ALARM MODE SETUP (STAPLE LIMIT)

LIMIT COPIES : ON OFF
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the auto color cali-
bration.
Section
Operation/Procedure
0: NO 1: YES (Default)
2) Press [OK] key.
1/1

A: 1 ; (1:YES 0:NO) 26-67
A: 1
Purpose Setting
0 1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the summer time timing and the
time zone.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a mode to be set with the touch panel.
[TIME ZONE] [SUMMER TIME]
2) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys.
OK
4) Press [OK] key.
26-54 The set value in step 3 is saved.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the printer calibration YES/NO.
Section
Operation/Procedure
0: NO 1: YES (Default)
2) Press [OK] key.
TIME A GMT r 0 + 26-69
ZONE 1 Purpose Setting
B GMT HOUR 0 - 13 GMT hour
Function (Purpose) Used to set the display of spare toner prep-
C GMT MINUTE 0 - 59 GMT minute
aration and near end when the toner quan-
D INTERNET 0 Internet clock YES
tity reaches 25%.
1 Internet clock NO
SUMMER A AUTO SUMMER 0 Automatic summer time Section
TIME TIME ADJ adjustment ON Operation/Procedure
1 Automatic summer time
adjustment OFF
B ADJ TIME HOUR 0 - 23 Adjustment time: Hour 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
C ADJ TIME 0 - 59 Adjustment time: Minute 3) Press [OK] key.
MINUTE The set value in step 2 is saved.
D START TIME 1 - 12 Start time: Month
MONTH A TONER 0: Toner ready message, icon display
E START TIME DAY 1 - 31 Start time: Day PREPARATION (Default)
F START TIME 1-5 Start time: Week 1: The toner preparation message is not
WEEK displayed.
G START TIME A 1 MONDAY B TONER NEAR 0: Toner near end message display (Default)
DAY OF THE 2 TUESDAY END 1: The toner near end message is not
WEEK 3 WEDNESDAY displayed.
4 THURSDAY C TONER END 1: Cartridge motor operation enabled at
5 FRIDAY NEAR END (Setting disable)
6 SATURDAY 2: Cartridge motor operation disabled at
7 SUNDAY NEAR END (Setting disable)
H START TIME 0 - 23 Start time: Hour 3: Cartridge motor operation disabled at
HOUR NEAR END
I START TIME 0 - 59 Start time: Minute D TH COUNT (CL) *2 1: Toner end detection in 0 sheet after toner
MINUTE near end
J START MODE 0 DAY 2: Toner end detection in 25 sheets after
toner near end *1
1 WEEK & A DAY OF THE
WEEK 3: Toner end detection in 50 sheet after toner
near end *1
K START UTC 0 YES
4: Toner end detection in 100 sheets after
1 NO
toner near end *1
L END TIME 1 - 12 End time: Month
5: Toner end detection in 200 sheets after
MONTH
toner near end *1
M END TIME DAY 1 - 31 End time: Day
E CONTINUOUS TH 1: Cover open detection (recognition) in
N END TIME WEEK 1-5 End time: Week
COUNT (BK) *2 120sec after toner cover open
O END TIME A DAY 1 MONDAY
2: Cover open detection (recognition) in
OF THE WEEK 2 TUESDAY 210sec after toner cover open
3 WEDNESDAY 3: Cover open detection (recognition) in
4 THURSDAY 300sec after toner cover open
5 FRIDAY 4: Cover open detection (recognition) in
6 SATURDAY 390sec after toner cover open
7 SUNDAY 5: Cover open detection (recognition) in
P END TIME HOUR 0 - 23 End time: Hour 480sec after toner cover open
Q END TIME 0 - 59 End time: Minute *1: Enable when the set item B is set to "0." The numbers of
MINUTE
printable quantity on the table above are estimated with A4
R END MODE 0 DAY
paper and the print rate of 5%.
1 WEEK & A DAY OF THE
WEEK
The toner near end message is displayed. When the printing
S END UTC 0 YES
quantity set in item D is reached, it is judged as "Toner end."
1 NO During this operation, insufficient density, thin spot, or improper
color balance may occur depending on the user's status of use.
TEST SIMULATION NO.26-67 CLOSE To avoid this symptom, set the set item D to "1."
SUMMER TIME&TIME ZONE ADJUSTMENT *2: The output quantity in items D and E are based on A4 paper
A: 1 ; AUTO SUMMER TIME ADJ : OFF with print ratio of 5%.
A: 1 B: 9 ; AUTO TIME HOUR
C: 0 ; AUTO TIME MINUTE TEST SIMULATION NO.26-69 CLOSE

0 1
D: 1 ; START TIME MONTH : YES TONER NEAR END SETTING
A: 0 ; TONER PREPARATION(0:YES 1:NO)
E: 1 ; START TIME DAY
A: 0 B: 0 ; TONER NEAR END (0:YES 1:NO)
F: 1 ; START TIME WEEK
0 1 C: 3 ; NEAR END
G: 1 ; START TIME A DAY OF THE WEEK : MONDAY
D: 3 ; TH COUNTER(CL)
H: 1 ; START TIME HOUR
E: 3 ; CONTINUOUS TH COUNT(BK)
I : 0 ; START TIME MINUTE
J : 0 ; START MODE : DAY
K: 0 ; START UTC : YES
L: 0 ; END TIME MONTH

OK
TIME ZONE SUMMER TIME EXECUTE OK
27 3) Press [OK] key.
27-1
A FSS MODE 0: Exclusive for send in the NE-B mode
Purpose Setting 1: For send and receive in the NE-F
Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communica- mode (Default)
tion error (U7-00) with RIC B RETRY 0 - 15 : Resend number (2: default)
C TIMER (MINUTE) 1 - 15 : Resend timer (min) (3: default)
Section
D TONER ORDER 5: 100% - 75%
Operation/Procedure TIMING (K) 4: 74% - 50%
1) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. Toner order automatic 3: 49% - 25% (Default)
0: Non-detection 1: Detection send time (K) 2: 25% or less
2) Press [OK] key. 1: Near end
0: Empty
E TONER ORDER 5: 100% - 75%
TIMING (C) 4: 74% - 50%
TEST
Toner order automatic 3: 49% - 25% (Default)
DISABLING OF U7-00 TROUBLE send time (C) 2: 25% or less
A: 0 ; DISABLE : YES
A: 0 1: Near end
0: Empty
0 1
F TONER ORDER 5: 100% - 75%
TIMING (M) 4: 74% - 50%
Toner order automatic 3: 49% - 25% (Default)
send time (K) 2: 25% or less
1: Near end
0: Empty
G TONER ORDER 5: 100% - 75%
TIMING (Y) 4: 74% - 50%
OK Toner order automatic 3: 49% - 25% (Default)
send time (K) 2: 25% or less
1: Near end
27-2 0: Empty
Purpose Setting
CLOSE
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function (sender regis- TEST SIMULATION NO.27-04
tration number, host server telephone num- FSS FUNCTION SETUP
ber). A: 1 ; FSS MODE: NEB2
A: 1 B : 2 ; RETRY
Section C : 3 ; TIMER (MINUTE)
0 3
Operation/Procedure D: 3 ; TONER ORDER TIMING (K): 3 (49% - 25%)
1) Select an item to be set with touch panel. E : 3 ; TONER ORDER TIMING (C): 3 (49% - 25%)
[USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO] F : 3 ; TONER ORDER TIMING (M): 3 (49% - 25%)
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. G: 3 ; TONER ORDER TIMING (Y): 3 (49% - 25%)
3) Press [SET] key.

OK
USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)
SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
27-5
TEST SIMULATION NO.27-02 CLOSE Purpose Setting
FSS FUNCTION SETUP (INPUT)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This func-
PRESENT : 0000000000000001
tion allows the host computer to check the
NEW : SET machine tag No.)
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM)
USER FAX_NO. SERVA TEL_NO.
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value (max. 8 digits) with 10-key. The set value is
displayed in NEW.
2) Press [SET] key.
PAUSE
1/1 SIMULATION NO.27-05 CLOSE
TEST
TAG# SETTING
27-4 PRESENT : 11111111
Purpose Setting NEW :
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function (initial, call,

toner order automatic send).
Section
Operation/Procedure
27-6 27-9
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function (manual ser- Function (Purpose) Paper transport time between sensors /
vice call). Gain adjustment retry number setting
Section Section
1) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. 1) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys.
0: YES (Default) 1: NO 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key. 3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 1 is saved. The set value in step 2 is saved.
TEST SIMULATION NO.27-06 CLOSE A FEED TIME 1 0 - 100: Threshold value of the paper
MANUAL SERVICE CALL SETUP
transport time between sensors
A: 0 ; 0:YES, 1:NO
(Main unit) (50: Default)
A: 0 B FEED TIME 2 0 - 100: Threshold value of the paper
transport time between sensors
0 1 (DSPF) (50: Default)
C GAIN ADJUSTMENT 1 - 100: Threshold value of the gain
RETRY adjustment retry number (50:
Default)
D JAM ALERT 1 - 100: Threshold value of the continuous
JAM alert judgment (10: Default)
OK FSS FUNCTION ADJUSTMENT

A : 50 ; FEED TIME1
A: 50 B : 50 ; FEED TIME2
27-7 C : 50 ; GAIN ADJUSTMENT RETRY

0 100
Purpose Setting D : 10 ; JAM ALERT
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function (enable, alert

call).
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. OK
3) Press [OK] key.

27-10
A FUNCTION 0: FSS function enable Purpose Data clear
1: FSS function disable (*1) (Default) Function (Purpose) Used to clear the history information of
B ALERT 0: Alert call enable (*2) (Default) trouble prediction
1: Alert call disable
Section
*1: The FSS function setting can be changed only from Disable to
Operation/Procedure
Enable. (Cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.)
*2: Alert send timing
2) Press [YES] key.
No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached.
Service call When pressing Service call. Target history Serial communication retry number history
Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is High density process control error history
reached. Medium density process control error history
Toner collection Revision of the toner installation date (only for a Automatic registration adjustment error history
request new product) Gain adjustment retry history
Paper transport time between sensors
FSS FUNCTION SETUP (FUNCTION) TEST SIMULATION NO.27-10 CLOSE

A: 1 ; FUNCTION(0:YES 1:NO)
TROUBLE PRECOGNITION HISTORY CLEAR
A: 1 B: 0 ; ALERT(0:YES 1:NO)
0 1
OK
27-11 AUTO REG ADJ1 Automatic registration adjustment error history 1
AUTO REG ADJ2 Automatic registration adjustment error history 2
Purpose Other AUTO REG ADJ3 Automatic registration adjustment error history 3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication AUTO REG ADJ4 Automatic registration adjustment error history 4
retry number history and the scanner gain AUTO REG ADJ5 Automatic registration adjustment error history 5
adjustment retry number history.
Section
TROUBLE PRECOGNITION RESULT(ADJUSTMENT_ERROR)
Operation/Procedure DATE ERROR CODE
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner HV_ERR1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
HV_ERR2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed. HV_ERR3 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
HV_ERR4 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
Serial communication retry number LSU1 HV_ERR5 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
history display LSU2 H_TONE ERR1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
DESK1 H_TONE ERR2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999

H_TONE ERR3 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
DESK2 H_TONE ERR4 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
INSERTER1 H_TONE ERR5 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
INSERTER2 AUTO REG ADJ1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
FINISHER1 AUTO REG ADJ2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999

AUTO REG ADJ3 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
FINISHER2 AUTO REG ADJ4 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
DSPF1 AUTO REG ADJ5 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
DSPF2
Scanner gain adjustment retry history SCAN GAIN ADJ1
display SCAN GAIN ADJ2 1/1
SCAN GAIN ADJ3
SCAN GAIN ADJ4 27-13
SCAN GAIN ADJ5
Purpose Other
DSPF gain adjustment retry history DSPF GAIN ADJ1
display DSPF GAIN ADJ2 Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
DSPF GAIN ADJ3 time between sensors.
DSPF GAIN ADJ4 Section
DSPF GAIN ADJ5
Operation/Procedure
Select the display with [n] and [p] keys.
TEST
TROUBLE PRECOGNITION RESULT
DATE RETRY
FEED TIME1 History 1 of paper transport time between
LSU1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999 sensors (ms)
LSU2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999 FEED TIME2 History 2 of paper transport time between
DESK1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999 sensors (ms)
DESK2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999 FEED TIME3 History 3 of paper transport time between
INSERTER1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
sensors (ms)
INSERTER2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
FINISHER1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
FINISHER2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
sensors (ms)
DSPF1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999 FEED TIME5 History 5 of paper transport time between
DESK2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999 sensors (ms)
SCAN GAIN ADJ1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999 FEED TIME6 History 6 of paper transport time between
SCAN GAIN ADJ2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999 sensors (ms)
SCAN GAIN ADJ3 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
SCAN GAIN ADJ4 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
sensors (ms)
SCAN GAIN ADJ5 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
DSPF GAIN ADJ1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
DSPF GAIN ADJ2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999 sensors (ms)
1/2
sensors (ms)
27-12
sensors (ms)
Purpose Other FEED TIME1(DSPF) History 1 of paper transport time between DSPF
Function (Purpose) Used to check the error history of high den- sensors (ms)
sity, half tone process control, and auto- FEED TIME2(DSPF) History 2 of paper transport time between DSPF
matic registration adjustment. sensors (ms)
FEED TIME3(DSPF) History 3 of paper transport time between DSPF
Section sensors (ms)
Operation/Procedure FEED TIME4(DSPF) History 4 of paper transport time between DSPF
The high density error history, the half tone error history, and the sensors (ms)
automatic registration adjustment error history are displayed. FEED TIME5(DSPF) History 5 of paper transport time between DSPF
sensors (ms)
HV_ERR1 High density error history 1 FEED TIME6(DSPF) History 6 of paper transport time between DSPF
HV_ERR2 High density error history 2 sensors (ms)
HV_ERR4 High density error history 4 sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
H_TONE ERR1 Half tone error history 1
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
<Cord between sensors>
Cord between sensors
FSS TEST MODE SETUP
Sensors A Sensors B Status Bk Color Heavy A: 0 ; CONNECTION TEST MODE(1:ON 0:OFF)
paper A: 0
PPD1 PPD2 On o On 0 40 80
0 1
Off o Off 1 41 81
PPD2 POD1 On o On 2 42 82
Off o Off 3 43 83
POD1 POD2 On o On 4 44 84
Off o Off 5 45 85
POM POD3 On o On 6 46 86
reverse OK
rotation
APPD1 APPD2 On o On 0E 4E 8E
Off o Off 0F 4F 8F
APPD2 PPD1 On o On
Off o Off
10
11
50
51
90
91
30
CPUC1 CPFD1 On o On 12 52 92
CPFD1 PPD1 On o On 14 54 94 30-1
Off o Off 15 55 95 Purpose Operation test/Check
CPUC2 CPFD2 On o On 16 56 96
CPFD2 CPFD1 On o On 18 58 98
sors and the detectors in other than the
Off o Off 19 59 99
paper feed section and the control circuits.
MPUC PPD1 On o On 1A 5A 9A
SPPD2 SPPD3 On o On C4 Section
Off o Off C5 Operation/Procedure
SPPD3 SPPD4 On o On C6 The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
Off o Off C7 played.
SPPD4 SPPD5 On o On C8
Off o Off C9
SPPD5 SPOD On o On CA PPD1 Registration pre-detection
Off o Off CB PPD2 Registration detection
* Sensor A and sensor B On o On : Possibly caused by slip in POD1 Fusing after-detection
paper transport. POD2 Main unit paper exit detection
Off o Off: The sensor actuator response trouble can be POD3 Right tray paper exit detection
detected. TFD Main unit paper exit full detection
TFD_R Right tray paper exit full detection
TEST SIMULATION NO.27-13 CLOSE DSW_R Right door open/close detection
TROUBLE PRECOGNITION RESULT(FEED TIME) DSW_D Front cover open/close detection D
DATE SENSOR CODE PASS TIME STANDARD TIME
DSW_FU Front cover open/close detection U
FEED TIME1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
DSW_FL Front cover open/close detection L
FEED TIME3 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999 VTOD Vertical transport path open/close detection
FEED TIME4 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999 DHPD_K K phase detection
FEED TIME5 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999 DHPD_C C phase detection
FEED TIME6 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
DHPD_M M phase detection
FEED TIME7 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME8 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
DHPD_Y Y phase detection
FEED TIME9 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999 TNFD Waste toner full detection
FEED TIME10 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999 TBBOX Waste toner installation detection
FEED TIME1(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999 CCHP Charger cleaner HP detection
FEED TIME2(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
CCM_ROT Charger cleaner rotation detection
FEED TIME3(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME4(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
LPPD LCC transport sensor
FEED TIME5(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999 T2PPD Tray 2 transport detection
FEED TIME6(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999 T1PPD1 Tray 1 transport detection 1
FEED TIME7(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999 T1PPD2 Tray 1 transport detection 2
1/2
FUEXD Fusing external variation sensor
WEB_INL Fusing web initial detection
27-14 WEB_END Fusing web end detection
Purpose Setting PTCM_HP PTC cleaner HP detection
TBLTC Transfer belt separation sensor CL
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection
TBLTB Transfer belt separation sensor BK
mode. (Only "Disable o Enable" is
THPS Secondary transfer separation home position sensor 1
allowed.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
0: Disable (Default) 1: Enable
2) Press [OK] key.
FIN SENSOR CHECK

CLOSE
33
PPD1 PPD2 POD1 POD2
POD3 TFD TFD_R DSW_R

33-1
DSW_D DSW_FU DSW_FL VTOD
DHPD_K DHPD_C DHPD_M DHPD_Y
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the card
TNFD TBBOX CCHP COM LOT
reader sensor and the control circuit.
LPPD T2PPD T1PPD1 T1PPD2
Section
FUEXD WEB_INL WEB_END PTCM_HP
Operation/Procedure
TBLTC TBLTB THPS
played.
1/1
CARD Card presence detection
30-2 DATA Card number signal detection
CLOCK Reference clock signal detection
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- TEST SIMULATION NO.33-01 CLOSE
sors and the detectors in the paper feed CARD READER SENSOR CHECK
section and the control circuits. CARD DATA CLOCK
Section
Operation/Procedure
played.
MPED Manual paper feed paper empty detection

MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detection 1
MTOP1 Manual feed tray reduction detection
MTOP2 Manual feed tray extension detection 1/1
MPFD Manual paper feed paper entry detection
TANSET Tandem tray installation detection
T1SPD Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity detector
T1LUD
T1PED
Tandem tray 1 upper limit detector
Tandem tray 1 paper presence
40
T2SPD Tandem tray 2 paper remaining quantity detector
T2LUD Tandem tray 2 upper limit detector 40-2
T2PED Tandem tray 2 paper presence Purpose Adjustment/Setting
C3SS1 Tray 3 rear edge detection 1
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width detec-
tor detection level adjustment
C3SS4 Tray 3 rear edge detection 4 Section Paper feed
C3PFD Tray 3 paper entry detection Operation/Procedure
C3LUD Tray 3 lift HP detection 1) Set the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width
C3PED Tray 3 paper empty detection (MAX).
C3SPD Tray 3 paper remaining quantity detection
The maximum width (MAX) detection level is recognized.
C4SS3 Tray 4 rear edge detection 3 3) Set the manual paper feed guide to the P1 width (A4).
C4SS4 Tray 4 rear edge detection 4 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
C4PFD Tray 4 paper entry detection The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized.
C4LUD Tray 4 lift HP detection
5) Set the manual paper feed guide to the P2 width (A4R).
C4PED Tray 4 paper empty detection
C4SPD Tray 4 paper remaining quantity detection
TRAY3 LEN Tray 3 guide plate position The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
TRAY3 AD Tray 3 paper width detection volume output 7) Set the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width (MIN).
The minimum width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
TRAY SENSOR CHECK(MAIN) TRAY3_LEN: **** TRAY3_AD: ***
MPED MPLD1 MTOP1 MTOP2 If the above procedures are not properly performed, "ERROR" is
MPFD TANSET T1SPD T1LUD
displayed. If properly performed, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
T1PED T2SPD T2LUD T2PED
MAX POSITION Manual feed maximum width
C3SS1 C3SS2 C3SS3 C3SS4 P1 (A4) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
C3PFD C3LUD C3PED C3SPD P2 (A4R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width
C4SS1 C4SS2 C4SS3 C4SS4 MIN POSITION Manual feed minimum width
C4PFD C4LUD C4PED C4SPD
1/1
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT TRAY3 ADJUSTMENT

MAXPOSITION ADJUSTMENT. MAXPOSITION ADJUSTMENT.
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
40-7
Purpose Adjustment/Setting
41
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray
width detection level.
41-1
Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
ment size sensor and the control circuit.
Section
3) Press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure
Default played.
Item
value Sensors and detectors which are turned on are highlighted.
A MAX POSITION Manual feed maximum width 241
B P1 (A4) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width 231 OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display
(A4) Close: Highlighted
C P2 (A4R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width 140 PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display
D MIN POSITION Manual feed minimum width 19 sensor status Document present: Highlighted

PD SENSOR CHECK
BYPASS TRAY VALUE SETTING
OCSW PD1 PD2 PD3
A : 241 ; MAX POSITION
A: 241 B : 231 ; P1(A4) POSITION PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7
C : 140 ; P2(A4R) POSITION

0 255
D : 19 ; MIN POSITION
OK
1/1
40-12
41-2
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the tray 3 paper width
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor
detection level adjustment.
detection level.
Section Paper feed
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the tray 3 paper guide to the maximum width (MAX).
1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without
2) Close the tray 3. any document on the document table.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. The sensor level without document is recognized.
The maximum width (MAX) detection level is recognized. 2) Set an A3 (11 x 17) paper on the document table, and press
4) Set the tray 3 paper guide to the minimum width (MIN). [EXECUTE] key.
5) Close the tray 3. The sensor level with a document is recognized.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. When the above operation is completed, it is displayed.
The minimum width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
If the above procedures are not properly performed, "ERROR" is
displayed. If properly performed, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
WITH THE ORIGINAL COVER OPENED, TURN ON THE EXECUTE
KEY WITH THE ORIGINAL ON THE ORIGINAL TABLE.
EXECUTE
Default value
41-3
55/62-
Purpose Operation test/Check Item 70-sheet
sheet
machine
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu- machine
ment size sensor and the control circuit. I HL_UM PLAIN Color plain paper upper 175 175
PAPER CL thermistor main set
Section value
Operation/Procedure J HL_LM PLAIN Color plain paper lower 120 120
The detection output levels (A/D value) of OCSW and the docu- PAPER CL thermistor main set
ment detection sensors (PD1 to PD7) are displayed in real time. value
K HL_US PLAIN Color plain paper upper 175 175
The range of PD1 to PD7 light reception (A/D value) is 1 to 255.
PAPER CL thermistor sub set value
(128: Default)
L HL_EX PLAIN Color plain paper 205 205
PAPER CL external thermistor set
value
PD SENSOR DISPLAY
M WARMUP Fusing motor front 170 175
OCSW : 1
FUMON HL_EX rotation start external
PD1[ ] : TEMP thermistor set value
PD2[ ] : N WARMUP Fusing motor front 10 5
FUMOFF TIME rotation continuation
PD3[ ] :
time thermistor set value
PD4[ ] :
O WARM UP END Warm up completion 250 250
PD5[ ] : TIME time
PD6[ ] : P HL_UM Black and white heavy 185 185
HEAVY1 paper 1 upper thermistor
PD7[ ] :
PAPER BW main set value
Q HL_LM HEAVY1 Black and white heavy 130 130
PAPER BW paper 1 lower thermistor
1/1 main set value
R HL_US HEAVY1 Black and white heavy 175 175
PAPER BW paper 1 upper thermistor
sub set value
43 S HL_EX HEAVY1 Black and white heavy 220 220
PAPER BW paper 1 external
thermistor set value
43-1
T HL_UM Color heavy paper 1 185 185
Purpose Setting HEAVY1 upper thermistor main
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each PAPER CL set value
mode. U HL_LM HEAVY Color heavy paper 1 130 130
1 PAPER CL lower thermistor main
Section set value
Operation/Procedure V HL_US HEAVY1 Color heavy paper 1 175 175
1) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys. PAPER CL upper thermistor sub set
value
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. W HL_EX HEAVY1 Color heavy paper 1 205 205
3) Press [OK] key. PAPER CL external thermistor set
The set value in step 2 is saved. value
X HL_UM Black and white heavy 185 185
Default value HEAVY2 paper 2 upper thermistor
55/62- PAPER BW main set value
Item 70-sheet Y HL_LM HEAVY2 Black and white heavy 140 140
sheet
machine PAPER BW paper 2 lower thermistor
machine
A HL_UM READY Upper thermistor main 180 185 main set value
set value when ready Z HL_US HEAVY2 Black and white heavy 185 185
standby PAPER BW paper 2 upper thermistor
B HL_LM READY Lower thermistor main 135 140 sub set value
set value when ready AA HL_EX HEAVY2 Black and white heavy 220 220
standby PAPER BW paper 2 external
C HL_US READY Upper thermistor sub set 165 165 thermistor set value
value when ready AB HL_UM Color heavy paper 2 185 185
standby HEAVY2 upper thermistor main
D HL_EX READY External thermistor set 205 205 PAPER CL set value
value when ready AC HL_LM HEAVY2 Color heavy paper 2 140 140
standby PAPER CL lower thermistor main
E HL_UM PLAIN Black and white plain 185 190 set value
PAPER BW paper upper thermistor AD HL_US HEAVY2 Color heavy paper 2 185 185
main set value PAPER CL upper thermistor sub set
F HL_LM PLAIN Black and white plain 150 155 value
PAPER BW paper lower thermistor AE HL_EX HEAVY2 Color heavy paper 2 210 210
main set value PAPER CL external thermistor set
G HL_US PLAIN Black and white plain 175 180 value
PAPER BW paper upper thermistor AF HL_UM OHP OHP upper thermistor 180 180
sub set value PAPER main set value
H HL_EX PLAIN Black and white plain 220 220 AG HL_LM OHP OHP lower thermistor 130 130
PAPER BW paper external PAPER main set value
thermistor set value AH HL_US OHP OHP upper thermistor 180 180
PAPER sub set value
Default value Default value
55/62- 55/62-
Item 70-sheet Item 70-sheet
sheet sheet
machine machine
machine machine
AI HL_EX OHP OHP external thermistor 220 220 BI HL UM REC Recycled paper reed 175 180
PAPER set value PAPER READY upper thermistor main
AJ HL_UM ENV Envelope upper 190 190 temperature value
PAPER thermistor main set BJ COOL DOWN Cool down YES/NO 1 1
value CTRL
AK HL_LM ENV Envelope lower 150 150
PAPER thermistor main set TEST SIMULATION NO.43-01 CLOSE
value FUSER TEMP SETUP FOR PAPER
AL HL_US ENV Envelope upper 190 190 A : 180 ; HL_UM READY
PAPER thermistor sub set value A: 180 B : 135 ; HL_LM READY
AM HL_EX ENV Envelope external 220 220
70 230 C : 165 ; HL_US READY
PAPER thermistor set value
AN HL_UM E-STAR Upper thermistor main 173 178 D : 205 ; HL_EX READY
set value when E : 185 ; HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW

preheating
F : 150 ; HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW
AO HL_US E-STAR Preheating upper 163 165
thermistor sub set value G : 175 ; HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW
AP HL_EX E-STAR Preheating external 180 195 H : 220 ; HL_EX PLAIN PAPER BW
thermistor sub set value
I : 175 ; HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL
AQ HL_UM PRE- Upper thermistor main 180 185
JOB set value when J : 120 ; HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL
recovering from K : 175 ; HL_US PLAIN PAPER CL

preheating
L : 205 ; HL_EX PLAIN PAPER CL
AR HL UM THIN Black and white thin 165 165 OK
PAPER BW paper upper thermistor
main set value
AS HL LM THIN Black and white thin 130 130 43-4
PAPER BW paper lower thermistor
main set value Purpose Setting
AT HL US THIN Black and white thin 165 165 Function (Purpose) Used to perform the fusing temperature
PAPER BW paper upper thermistor setup 2 in each operation mode. (Contin-
sub set value ued from SIM 43-1.)
AU HL EX THIN Black and white external 195 195
Section
PAPER BW thermistor set value
AV HL UM THIN Color thin paper upper 165 165 Operation/Procedure
PAPER CL thermistor main set 1) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys.
value
A HL LM THIN Color thin paper lower 120 120
W PAPER CL thermistor main set
3) Press [OK] key.
value The set value in step 2 is saved.
AX HL US THIN Color thin paper upper 165 165
PAPER CL thermistor sub set value Default value
AY HL EX THIN Color thin paper external 195 195 55/62-
Item 70-sheet
PAPER CL thermistor set value sheet
machine
AZ HL UM THIN Thin paper ready upper 165 170 machine
PAPER READY thermistor main set A HL_UM PLAIN Black and white plain 185 190
value PAPER BW DUP paper duplex upper
BA HL UM REC Black and white recycled 175 180 thermistor main set
PAPER BW paper upper thermistor value
main set value B HL_LM PLAIN Black and white plain 150 155
BB HL LM REC Black and white recycled 140 145 PAPER BW DUP paper duplex lower
PAPER BW paper lower thermistor thermistor main set
main set value value
BC HL US REC Black and white recycled 165 170 C HL_US PLAIN Black and white plain 175 180
PAPER BW paper upper thermistor PAPER BW DUP paper duplex upper
sub set value thermistor sub set value
BD HL EX REC Black and white recycled 220 220 D HL_EX PLAIN Black and white plain 220 220
PAPER BW paper external PAPER BW DUP paper duplex external
thermistor main set thermistor set value
value E PLAIN PAPER Black and white plain 1 1
BE HL UM REC Color recycled paper 165 165 BW DUP APP paper duplex external
PAPER CL upper thermistor main CNT thermistor set value
set value F HL_UM PLAIN Color plain paper 170 170
BF HL LM REC Color recycled paper 130 130 PAPER CL DUP duplex upper thermistor
PAPER CL lower thermistor main main set value
set value G HL_LM PLAIN Color plain paper 140 140
BG HL US REC Color recycled paper 165 165 PAPER CL DUP duplex lower thermistor
PAPER CL upper thermistor sub set main set value
value H HL_US PLAIN Color plain paper 165 165
BH HL EX REC Color recycled paper 195 195 PAPER CL DUP duplex upper thermistor
PAPER CL external thermistor set sub set value
value
Default value 3) Press [OK] key.
55/62- The set value in step 2 is saved.
Item 70-sheet
sheet Correction value: -49 to +49, 1 count = 1qC change
machine
machine
I HL_EX PLAIN Color plain paper 205 205 Default
PAPER CL DUP duplex external Item
value
thermistor set value A HL_UM READY Correction value for upper thermistor 65
J PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper 0 0 LL main set value when ready under LL
DUP APP CNT duplex applicable environment
number of sheets B HL_LM READY Correction value for LL environment 65
K HL_UM HEAVY Black and white heavy 180 180 LL ready standby lower thermistor main
PAPER BW DUP paper duplex upper set value
thermistor main set C HL_US READY Correction value for upper thermistor 65
value LL sub set value when ready under LL
L HL_LM HEAVY Black and white heavy 130 130 environment
PAPER BW DUP paper duplex lower D HL_EX READY Correction value for external 60
thermistor main set LL thermistor set value when ready
value under LL environment
M HL_US HEAVY Black and white heavy 180 180 E HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for black and white 65
PAPER BW DUP paper duplex upper BW LL plain paper upper thermistor main set
thermistor sub set value value under LL environment
N HL_EX HEAVY Black and white heavy 220 220 F HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for LL environment 65
PAPER BW DUP paper duplex external BW LL black and white plain paper lower
thermistor set value thermistor main set value
O HEAVY PAPER Black and white heavy 1 1 G HL_US PLAIN Correction value for black and white 65
BW DUP APP paper duplex applicable BW LL plain paper upper thermistor sub set
CNT number of sheets value under LL environment
P HL_UM HEAVY Color heavy paper 170 170 H HL_EX PLAIN Correction value for black and white 50
PAPER CL DUP duplex upper thermistor BW LL plain paper external thermistor set
main set value value under LL environment
Q HL_LM HEAVY Color heavy paper 120 120 I HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for color plain paper 60
PAPER CL DUP duplex lower thermistor CL LL upper thermistor main set value
main set value under LL environment
R HL_US HEAVY Color heavy paper 170 170 J HL_LM PLAIN CL Correction value for LL environment 60
PAPER CL DUP duplex upper thermistor LL color plain paper lower thermistor
sub set value main set value
S HL_EX HEAVY Color heavy paper 200 200 K HL_US PLAIN CL Correction value for color plain paper 60
PAPER CL DUP duplex external LL upper thermistor sub set value under
thermistor set value LL environment
T HEAVY PAPER Color heavy paper 1 1 L HL_EX PLAIN CL Correction value for color plain paper 50
CL DUP APP CNT duplex applicable LL external thermistor set value under
number of sheets. LL environment
M WARMUP Correction value for LL environment 40
TEST FUMON HL_EX fusing motor front rotation start
FUSER TEMP SETUP FOR PAPER TEMP LL external thermistor set value
A :185 HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP N WARMUP Correction value for LL environment 80
A: 185 B : 150 HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP FUMOFF TIME fusing motor front rotation
C : 175 HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
LL continuation time
70 230
O WARMUP END Correction value for warm-up 75
D : 220 HL_EX PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
TIME LL completion time under LL
E: 1 PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT environment
F : 170 HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP P HL_UM HEAVY1 Correction value for LL environment 65
BW LL black and white heavy paper 1 upper
G : 140 HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP
thermistor main set value
H :165 HL_US PLAIN PAPER CL DUP Q HL_LM HEAVY1 Correction value for LL environment 65
I : 205 HL_E PLAIN PAPER CL DUP
BW LL black and white heavy paper 1 lower
J: 0 PLAIN PAPER CL DUP APP CNT
R HL_US HEAVY1 Correction value for LL environment 65
K : 180 HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP BW LL black and white heavy paper 1 upper
L : 130 HL_LM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP
OK S HL_EX HEAVY1 Correction value for LL environment 50
BW LL black and white heavy paper 1
external thermistor set value
43-20 T HL UM HEAVY1 Correction value for LL environment 60
CL LL heavy paper 1 upper thermistor main
set value
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction U HL LM HEAVY1 Correction value for LL environment 65
under low temperature and low humidity (L/ CL LL color heavy paper 1 lower thermistor
L) for the fusing temperature setting in each main set value
mode (SIM 43-1). V HL US HEAVY1 Correction value for LL environment 60
CL LL heavy paper 1 upper thermistor sub
Section
set value
Operation/Procedure W HL EX HEAVY1 Correction value for LL environment 65
1) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys. CL LL color heavy paper 1 external
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. thermistor set value
Default Default
Item Item
value value
X HL UM HEAVY2 Correction value for LL environment 65 A HL LM THIN Correction value for LL environment 55
BW LL black and white heavy paper 2 upper W PAPER CL LL color thin paper lower thermistor
thermistor main set value main set value
Y HL LM HEAVY2 Correction value for LL environment 65 AX HL US THIN Correction value for LL environment 55
BW LL black and white heavy paper 2 lower PAPER CL LL color thin paper upper thermistor sub
thermistor main set value set value
Z HL US HEAVY2 Correction value for LL environment 65 AY HL EX THIN Correction value for LL environment 50
BW LL black and white heavy paper 2 upper PAPER CL LL color thin paper external thermistor
thermistor sub set value set value
AA HL EX HEAVY2 Correction value for LL environment 50 AZ HL UM THIN Correction value for LL environment 55
BW LL black and white heavy paper 2 PAPER READY thin paper ready upper thermistor
external thermistor set value LL main temperature value
AB HL UM HEAVY2 Correction value for LL environment 65 BA HL UM REC Correction value for LL environment 55
CL LL heavy paper 2 upper thermistor main PAPER BW LL black and white recycled paper upper
set value thermistor main set value
AC HL LM HEAVY2 Correction value for LL environment 65 BB HL LM REC Correction value for LL environment 55
CL LL color heavy paper 2 lower thermistor PAPER BW LL black and white recycled paper lower
main set value thermistor main set value
AD HL US HEAVY2 Correction value for LL environment 65 BC HL US REC Correction value for LL environment 55
CL LL heavy paper 2 upper thermistor sub PAPER BW LL black and white recycled paper upper
set value thermistor sub set value
AE HL EX HEAVY2 Correction value for LL environment 60 BD HL EX REC Correction value for LL environment 50
CL LL color heavy paper 2 external PAPER BW LL black and white recycled paper
thermistor set value external thermistor set value
AF HL_UM OHP LL Correction value for OHP upper 65 BE HL UM REC Correction value for LL environment 55
thermistor main set value under LL PAPER CL LL color recycled paper upper
environment thermistor main set value
AG HL_LM OHP LL Correction value for LL environment 65 BF HL LM REC Correction value for LL environment 55
OHP lower thermistor mains et value PAPER CL LL color recycled paper lower thermistor
AH HL_US OHP LL Correction value for OHP upper 65 main set value
thermistor sub set value under LL BG HL US REC Correction value for LL environment 55
environment PAPER CL LL color recycled paper upper
AI HL_EX OHP LL Correction value for OHP external 50 thermistor sub set value
thermistor set value under LL BH HL EX REC Correction value for LL environment 50
environment PAPER CL LL color recycled paper external
AJ HL_UM Correction value for envelope upper 60 thermistor set value
ENVELOPE LL thermistor main set value under LL BI HL UM REC Correction value for LL environment 55
environment PAPER READY recycled paper ready upper
AK HL_LM Correction value for LL environment 60 LL thermistor main temperature value
ENVELOPE LL envelope lower thermistor main set
value TEST SIMULATION NO.43-20 CLOSE
AL HL_US Correction value for envelope upper 60 FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (LL)
ENVELOPE LL thermistor sub set value under LL A : 65 HL_UM READY LL
environment A: 65 B : 65 HL_LM READY LL
AM HL_EX Correction value for envelope 50 C : 65 HL_US READY LL

1 99
ENVELOPE LL external thermistor set value under
D : 60 HL_EX READY LL
LL environment
AN HL_UM E-STAR Correction value for upper thermistor 60 E : 65 HL_UM PLAIN BW LL
LL main set value when preheating F : 65 HL_LM PLAIN BW LL
under LL environment
G : 65 HL_US PLAIN BW LL
AO HL_US E-STAR Correction value for LL environment 60
LL preheating upper thermistor sub set H : 50 HL_EX PLAIN BW LL
value I : 60 HL_UM PLAIN CL LL
AP HL_EX E-STAR Correction value for LL environment 55 J : 60 HL_LM PLAIN CL LL

LL preheating external thermistor set
value K : 60 HL_US PLAIN CL LL
AQ HL_UM PRE- Correction value for upper thermistor 60 L : 50 HL_EX PLAIN CL LL
JOB LL main set value when recovering from OK

preheating under LL environment
AR HL UM THIN Correction value for LL environment 55
PAPER BW LL black and white thin paper upper 43-21
AS HL LM THIN Correction value for LL environment 55
PAPER BW LL black and white thin paper lower Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
thermistor main set value under high temperature and high humidity
AT HL US THIN Correction value for LL environment 55 (H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
PAPER BW LL black and white thin paper upper (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
AU HL EX THIN Correction value for LL environment 50
Section
PAPER BW LL black and white thin paper external Operation/Procedure
thermistor set value 1) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys.
AV HL UM THIN Correction value for LL environment 55
PAPER CL LL color thin paper upper thermistor
main set value
3) Press [OK] key. Default
Item
The set value in step 2 is saved. value
Correction value: -49 to +49, 1 count = 1qC change X HL UM HEAVY2 Correction value for HH environment 50
BW HH black and white heavy paper 2 upper
Default thermistor main set value
Item Y HL LM HEAVY2 Correction value for HH environment 50
value
A HL_UM READY Correction value for upper thermistor 50 BW HH black and white heavy paper 2 lower
HH main set value when ready standby thermistor main set value
under HH environment Z HL US HEAVY2 Correction value for HH environment 50
B HL_LM READY Correction value for HH environment 50 BW HH black and white heavy paper 2 upper
HH ready standby lower thermistor main thermistor sub set value
set value AA HL EX HEAVY2 Correction value for HH environment 50
C HL_US READY Correction value for upper thermistor 50 BW HH black and white heavy paper 2
HH sub set value when ready standby external thermistor set value
under HH environment AB HL UM HEAVY2 Correction value for HH environment 50
D HL_EX READY Correction value for external 50 CL HH heavy paper 2 upper thermistor main
HH thermistor set value when ready set value
under HH environment AC HL LM HEAVY2 Correction value for HH environment 50
E HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for black and white 50 CL HH color heavy paper 2 lower thermistor
BW HH plain paper upper thermistor main set main set value
value under HH environment AD HL US HEAVY2 Correction value for HH environment 50
F HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for HH environment 50 CL HH heavy paper 2 upper thermistor sub
BW HH black and white plain paper lower set value
thermistor main set value AE HL EX HEAVY2 Correction value for HH environment 50
G HL_US PLAIN Correction value for black and white 50 CL HH color heavy paper 2 external
BW HH plain paper upper thermistor sub set thermistor set value
value under HH environment AF HL_UM OHP HH Correction value for OHP upper 50
H HL_EX PLAIN Correction value for black and white 50 thermistor main set value under HH
BW HH plain paper external thermistor set environment
value under HH environment AG HL_LM OHP HH Correction value for HH environment 50
I HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for color plain paper 50 OHP lower thermistor mains et value
CL HH upper thermistor main set value AH HL_US OHP HH Correction value for OHP upper 50
under HH environment thermistor sub set value under HH
J HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for HH environment 50 environment
CL HH color plain paper lower thermistor AI HL_EX OHP HH Correction value for OHP external 50
main set value thermistor set value under HH
K HL_US PLAIN Correction value for color plain paper 50 environment
CL HH upper thermistor sub set value under AJ HL_UM Correction value for enveloper upper 50
HH environment ENVELOPE HH thermistor main set value under HH
L HL_EX PLAIN CL Correction value for color plain paper 50 environment
HH external thermistor set value under AK HL_LM Correction value for HH environment 50
HH environment ENVELOPE HH envelope lower thermistor main set
M WARMUP Correction value for fusing motor 50 value
FUMON HL_UM previous rotation start external AL HL_US Correction value for enveloper upper 50
T HH thermistor set value under HH ENVELOPE HH thermistor sub set value under HH
environment environment
N WARMUP Correction value for HH environment 50 AM HL_EX Correction value for envelope 50
FUMOFF HL_EX fusing motor front rotation ENVELOPE HH external thermistor set value under
TEMP HH continuation time HH environment
O WARMUP END Correction value for warm-up 50 AN HL_UM E-STAR Correction value for upper thermistor 50
TIME HH completion time under HH HH main set value when preheating
environment under HH environment
P HL_UM HEAVY1 Correction value for HH environment 50 AO HL US E-STAR Correction value for HH environment 50
BW HH black and white heavy paper 1 upper HH preheating upper thermistor sub set
thermistor main set value value
Q HL_LM HEAVY1 Correction value for HH environment 50 AP HL EX E-STAR Correction value for HH environment 50
BW HH black and white heavy paper 1 lower HH preheating external thermistor set
thermistor main set value value
R HL_US HEAVY1 Correction value for HH environment 50 AQ HL_UM PRE- Correction value for upper thermistor 50
BW HH black and white heavy paper 1 upper JOB HH main set value when recovering from
thermistor sub set value preheating under HH environment
S HL_EX HEAVY1 Correction value for HH environment 50 AR HL UM THIN Correction value for HH environment 45
BW HH black and white heavy paper 1 PAPER BW HH black and white thin paper upper
external thermistor set value thermistor main set value
T HL UM HEAVY1 Correction value for HH environment 50 AS HL LM THIN Correction value for HH environment 45
CL HH heavy paper 1 upper thermistor main PAPER BW HH black and white thin paper lower
set value thermistor main set value
U HL LM HEAVY1 Correction value for HH environment 50 AT HL US THIN Correction value for HH environment 45
CL HH color heavy paper 1 lower thermistor PAPER BW HH black and white thin paper upper
main set value thermistor sub set value
V HL US HEAVY1 Correction value for HH environment 50 AU HL EX THIN Correction value for HH environment 45
CL HH heavy paper 1 upper thermistor sub PAPER BW HH black and white thin paper external
set value thermistor set value
W HL EX HEAVY1 Correction value for HH environment 50 AV HL UM THIN Correction value for HH environment 45
CL HH color heavy paper 1 external PAPER CL HH color thin paper upper thermistor
thermistor set value main set value
Default 3) Press [OK] key.
Item
value The set value in step 2 is saved.
A HL LM THIN Correction value for HH environment 45 Correction value: -49 to +49, 1 count = 1qC change
W PAPER CL HH color thin paper lower thermistor
main set value Default
AX HL US THIN Correction value for HH environment 45 Item
value
PAPER CL HH color thin paper upper thermistor sub A HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for black and white 60
set value BW DUP LL plain paper duplex upper thermistor
AY HL EX THIN Correction value for HH environment 45 main set value under LL environment
PAPER CL HH color thin paper external thermistor B HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for LL environment 60
set value BW DUP LL black and white plain paper duplex
AZ HL UM THIN Correction value for HH environment 45 lower thermistor main set value
PAPER READY thin paper ready upper thermistor C HL_US PLAIN Correction value for black and white 60
HH main temperature value BW DUP LL plain paper duplex upper thermistor
BA HL UM REC Correction value for HH environment 45 sub set value under LL environment
PAPER BW HH black and white recycled paper upper D HL_EX PLAIN Correction value for black and white 50
thermistor main set value BW DUP LL plain paper duplex external thermistor
BB HL LM REC Correction value for HH environment 45 set value under LL environment
PAPER BW HH black and white recycled paper lower E PLAIN BW DUP Correction value for black and white 50
thermistor main set value APP CNT LL plain paper duplex applicable number
BC HL US REC Correction value for HH environment 45 of sheets under LL environment
PAPER BW HH black and white recycled paper upper F HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for color plain paper 55
thermistor sub set value CL DUP LL duplex upper thermistor main set value
BD HL EX REC Correction value for HH environment 45 under LL environment
PAPER BW HH black and white recycled paper G HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for LL environment 55
external thermistor set value CL DUP LL color plain paper duplex lower
BE HL UM REC Correction value for HH environment 45 thermistor main set value
PAPER CL HH color recycled paper upper H HL_US PLAIN Correction value for color plain paper 55
thermistor main set value CL DUP LL duplex upper thermistor sub set value
BF HL LM REC Correction value for HH environment 45 under LL environment
PAPER CL HH color recycled paper lower thermistor I HL_EX PLAIN Correction value for color plain paper 50
main set value CL DUP LL duplex external thermistor set value
BG HL US REC Correction value for HH environment 45 under LL environment
PAPER CL HH color recycled paper upper J PLAIN CL DUP Correction value for color plain paper 50
thermistor sub set value APP CNT LL duplex applicable number of sheets
BH HL EX REC Correction value for HH environment 45 under LL environment
PAPER CL HH color recycled paper external K HL_UM HEAVY Correction value for black and white 60
thermistor set value BW DUP LL heavy paper duplex upper thermistor
BI HL UM REC Correction value for HH environment 45 main set value under LL environment
PAPER READY recycled paper ready upper L HL_LM HEAVY Correction value for LL environment 60
HH thermistor main temperature value BW DUP LL black and white duplex lower thermistor
main set value
M HL_US HEAVY Correction value for black and white 60
FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (HH) BW DUP LL heavy paper duplex upper thermistor
A : 50 ; HL_UM READY HH sub set value under LL environment
A: 50 B : 50 ; HL_LM READY HH N HL_EX HEAVY Correction value for black and white 50
1 99 C : 50 ; HL_US READY HH
BW DUP LL heavy paper duplex external thermistor
set value under LL environment
D : 50 ; HL_EX READY HH
O HEAVY BW Correction value for black and white 50
E : 50 ; HL_UM PLAIN BW HH DUP APP CNT heavy paper duplex applicable number
F : 50 ; HL_LM PLAIN BW HH
LL of sheets under LL environment
P HL_UM HEAVY Correction value for color heavy paper 65
G : 50 ; HL_US PLAIN BW HH
CL DUP LL duplex upper thermistor main set value
H : 50 ; HL_EX PLAIN BW HH under LL environment
I : 50 ; HL_UM PLAIN CL HH
Q HL_LM HEAVY Correction value for LL environment 65
CL DUP LL black and white heavy paper duplex
J : 50 ; HL_LM PLAIN CL HH
lower thermistor main set value
K: 50 ; HL_US PLAIN CL HH R HL_US HEAVY Correction value for color heavy paper 65
L: 50 ; HL_EX PLAIN CL HH
CL DUP LL duplex upper thermistor sub set value
OK under LL environment
S HL_EX HEAVY Correction value for color heavy paper 65
CL DUP LL duplex external thermistor set value
43-22 under LL environment
Purpose Adjustment/Setting T HEAVY CL DUP Correction value for color heavy paper 50
APP CNT LL duplex applicable number of sheets
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction under LL environment
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Default
TEST SIMULATION NO.43-22 CLOSE Item
value
FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (LL:DUP) M HL_US HEAVY Correction value for black and white 50
A : 60 ; HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL
BW DUP HH heavy paper duplex upper thermistor
A: 60 B : 60 ; HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP LL sub set value under HH environment
1 99 C : 60 ; HL_US PLAIN BW DUP LL N HL_EX HEAVY Correction value for black and white 50
D : 50 ; HL_EX PLAIN BW DUP LL
BW DUP HH heavy paper duplex external
thermistor set value under HH
E : 50 ; PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL
environment
F : 55 ; HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP LL O HEAVY BW DUP Correction value for black and white 50
G : 55 ; HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP LL
APP CNT HH heavy paper duplex applicable
number of sheets under HH
H : 55 ; HL_US PLAIN CL DUP LL
environment
I : 50 ; HL_EX PLAIN CL DUP LL P HL_UM HEAVY Correction value for color heavy paper 50
CL DUP HH duplex upper thermistor main set
J : 50 ; PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT LL
value under HH environment
K : 60 ; HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL
Q HL_LM HEAVY Correction value for HH environment 50
L : 60 ; HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP LL CL DUP HH black and white heavy paper duplex
OK lower thermistor main set value
R HL_US HEAVY Correction value for color heavy paper 50
CL DUP HH duplex upper thermistor sub set value
under HH environment
43-23
S HL_EX HEAVY Correction value for color heavy paper 50
Purpose Adjustment/Setting CL DUP HH duplex external thermistor set value
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction under HH environment
under high temperature and high humidity T HEAVY CL DUP Correction value for color heavy paper 50
APP CNT HH duplex applicable number of sheets
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
Section TEST SIMULATION NO.43-23 CLOSE
Operation/Procedure FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (HH: DUP)
1) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys. A : 50 ; HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP HH
A: 50
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. B : 50 ; HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP HH
1 99
3) Press [OK] key. C : 50 ; HL_US PLAIN BW DUP HH

D : 50 ; HL_EX PLAIN BW DUP HH
Correction value: -49 to +49, 1 count = 1qC change E : 50 ; PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT HH
F : 50 ; HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP HH
Default
Item G 50 ; HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP HH
value
H 50 ; HL_US PLAIN CL DUP HH
A HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for black and white 50
BW DUP HH upper thermistor main set value under I : 50 ; HL_EX PLAIN CL DUP HH
HH environment J : 50 ; PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT HH

B HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for HH environment 50
K : 50 ; HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP HH
BW DUP HH black and white plain paper duplex
lower thermistor main set value L : 50 ; HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP HH
C HL_US PLAIN Correction value for black and white 50 OK
BW DUP HH upper thermistor sub set value under

HH environment
D HL_EX PLAIN Correction value for black and white 50
43-24
BW DUP HH plain paper duplex external thermistor
set value under HH environment Purpose Adjustment/Setting
E PLAIN BW DUP Correction value for black and white 50 Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the tempera-
APP CNT HH plain paper duplex applicable number
ture adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-
of sheets under HH environment
4.
F HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for color plain paper 50
CL DUP HH duplex upper thermistor main set Section
value under HH environment Operation/Procedure
G HL_LM PLAIN CL Correction value for HH environment 50
DUP HH color plain paper duplex lower
thermistor main set value 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
H HL_US PLAIN CL Correction value for color plain paper 50 3) Press [OK] key.
DUP HH duplex upper thermistor sub set value The set value in step 2 is saved.
Correction value: -49 to +49, 1 count = 1qC change
I HL_EX PLAIN CL Correction value for color plain paper 50
DUP HH duplex external thermistor set value
J PLAIN CL DUP Correction value for color plain paper 50
APP CNT HH duplex applicable number of sheets
K HL_UM HEAVY Correction value for black and white 50
BW DUP HH heavy paper duplex upper thermistor
main set value under HH environment
L HL_LM HEAVY Correction value for HH environment 50
BW DUP HH black and white duplex lower
Default value
100V series 200V series
Item 55/62- 55/62-
70-sheet 70-sheet
sheet sheet
machine machine
machine machine
A NN_120_ Warm-up completion When power Upper heater lamp main/ 60 55 60 55
WUP_HL_UM&HL_US temperature correction booting at lower sub
B NN_120_ WUP_HL_LM value than 120qC under Lower heater lamp main 60 55 60 55
C NN_120_WUP_HL_EX NN environment External heater lamp main 50 50 50 50
D LL_120_ When power Upper heater lamp main/ 60 60 60 60
WUP_HL_UM&HL_US booting at lower sub
E LL_120_ WUP_HL_LM than 120qC under Lower heater lamp main 60 60 60 60
F LL_120_WUP_HL_EX LL environment External heater lamp 45 45 45 45
G HH_120_ When power Upper heater lamp main 60 55 60 55
WUP_HL_UM&HL_US booting at lower
H HH_120_ WUP_HL_LM than 120qC under Lower heater lamp main 60 55 60 55
I HH_120_WUP_HL_EX HH environment External heater lamp 50 50 50 50
J ON_120_WUP_HL_UM Temperature When power Upper heater lamp main 50 50 50 50
K ON_120_WUP_HL_US correction value during booting at lower Lower heater lamp 50 50 50 50
L ON_120_WUP_HL_EX temperature correction than 120qC External heater lamp 50 50 50 50
immediately after
completion of warm-up
M NN_120_ Fusing temperature When power Upper heater lamp main 50 50 50 50
FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US correction value booting at lower
N NN_120_ than 120qC under Lower heater lamp main 50 50 50 50
FUS_DUP_HL_LM NN environment
O NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_EX External heater lamp 50 50 50 50
P LL_120_ When power Upper heater lamp main/ 55 55 55 55
FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US booting at lower sub
Q LL_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_LM than 120qC under Lower heater lamp main 50 50 50 50
R LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_EX LL environment External heater lamp 50 50 50 50
S HH_120_ When power Upper heater lamp main/ 50 50 50 50
FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US booting at lower sub
T HH_120_ than 120qC under Lower heater lamp main 50 50 50 50
FUS_DUP_HL_LM HH environment
U HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_EX External heater lamp 50 50 50 50
V NN_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper Under NN environment 0 0 0 0
W LL_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT exit count Under LL environment 0 0 0 0
X HH_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT Under HH environment 0 0 0 0
Y COOL_DOWN_HEAVY Cool-down time Heavy paper 15 15 15 15
Z COOL_DOWN_OHP OHP 30 30 30 30
AA COOL_DOWN_DEVELOP Envelope 40 40 40 40
AB WUP DUP TIME Temperature correction duration time immediately after completion of 1 1 1 1
warm-up
AC FUS MOTOR Fusing web motor operation interval 6 6 6 6
AD BW JOB TH_UM TEMP Upper thermistor main contact judgment temperature set value when 80 80 80 80
starting a BW job
AE CL JOB TH_UM TEMP Upper thermistor main contact judgment temperature set value when 50 50 50 50
starting a BW job
AF ACS (COL-BW) FUN TH FUM racing continuation upper thermistor main judgment temperature set 45 45 45 45
TEMP value when ACS (COL o BW)
AG ACS (BW-COL) FUN TH FUM racing continuation upper thermistor main judgment temperature set 65 65 65 65
TEMP value when ACS (BW o COL)
AH ACS (BW-COL) UN TH Upper thermistor main judgment temperature set value when ACS (shifting 45 45 45 45
TEMP BW o COL)
AI TH_EX CORRELATION Relative control of external thermistor for upper thermistor main 1 1 1 1
(TH_UM) 0: NO, 1: YES
AJ TH_EX CORRELATION Relative control of external thermistor for upper thermistor sub 0 0 0 0
(TH_US) 0: NO, 1: YES
AK BW JOB ELECTRICITY SET Compulsory conduction when starting a BW job. 0: No, 1: Yes 1 1 1 1
AL COL JOB ELECTRICITY Compulsory conduction when starting a COL job. 0: No, 1: Yes
0 0 0 0
SET
AM JOB ELECTRICITY TEMP Correction value of temperature for executing compulsory conduction
40 40 40 40
when starting a job
AN POWER SET Power voltage setting 1: 100V 4 4 8 8
2: 110V
3: 115V
4: 120V
5: 127V
6: 210V
7: 220V
8: 230V
9: 240V
AO TH_EX TWO_WAY SET External thermistor reciprocating control 0 0 1 1
Default value
100V series 200V series
Item 55/62- 55/62-
70-sheet 70-sheet
sheet sheet
machine machine
machine machine
AP TH_EX TWO_WAY MIN Lower temperature limit width for external thermistor reciprocating control 45 45 40 40
AQ TH_EX TWO_WAY MAX Upper temperature limit width for external thermistor reciprocating control 50 50 50 50
AR READY ROTATION SET Slow rotation execution when ready, 0: NO, 1: YES 1 1 1 1
AS BPP SET BPP control, 1: NO, 1:YES 1 1 0 0
AT HL_LM CYCLE Lower heater lamp main compulsory lighting cycle (sec) 6 6 4 4
AU HL_LM TIME Lower heater lamp main compulsory lighting time (100msec) 6 6 10 10
AV LL INTERVAL SET Intermittent drive interval setting in LL (0: No drive, in sec, rotation time 0 0 0 0
5sec)
TEST SIMULATION NO.43-24 CLOSE A JOB END COMP Fusing web motor 0: Allow
FUSER TEMP RESET
ACT CHECK compulsory operation 1: Inhibit
A 60 NN_120_WUP_HL_UM&HL_US
conditions (Default)
A: 60 B 60 NN_120_WUP_HL_LM
B JOB END COMP Print quantity interval of 1 - 230
ACT INTERVAL fusing web motor compulsory (100: Default)
1 99 C 50 NN_120_WUP_HL_EX
operation
D 60 LL_120_WUP_HL_UM&HL_US
C JOB END COMP Number of fusing web motor 1 - 20
E 60 LL_120_WUP_HL_LM ACT CNT compulsory operations (1: Default)
F 45 LL_120_WUP_HL_EX
G 60 HH_120_WUP_HL_UM&HL_US
JOB END WEB CLEANING COMPULSORY CHECK
H 60 HH_120_WUP_HL_LM A: 1 ; JOB END COMP ACT CHECK
I 50 HH_120_WUP_HL_EX A: 1 B : 100 ; JOB END COMP ACT INTERVAL
C: 1 ; JOB END COMP ACT CNT

J 50 ON_120_WUP_HL_UM 0 1
K 50 ON_120_WUP_HL_US
L 50 ON_120_WUP_HL_EX
OK
43-31
OK
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing
web cleaning motor and the control circuit.
Section
44
Operation/Procedure
44-1
Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Setting
The fusing web cleaning motor is operated.
* Remove the fusing unit, and check the rotation of the motor with Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
the door open. tion in the image forming (process) section.
Section Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
TEST SIMULATION NO.43-31 CLOSE Transfer/Cleaning)
FUSER WEB CLEANING CHECK
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel. (The selected
item is highlighted.)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Default
Item
value
HV High-density process control of normal Allow
operation
HT Half tone process control of normal Allow
operation
EXECUTE 1/1 TC Transfer output, transfer high voltage Allow
output voltage correction
MD VG Membrane decrease grid voltage Allow
43-32
correction
Purpose Adjustment/Setting MD LD Membrane decrease grid voltage Inhibit
Function (Purpose) Used to set the compulsory operation of correction
fusing web cleaning at job end. MD EV Membrane decrease environment grid Allow
voltage correction
Section
MD DL Membrane decrease discharge light Allow
Operation/Procedure quantity correction
1) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys. MD DL EV membrane decrease environment Inhibit
discharge light quantity correction
TN_HUM Toner density humidity correction Allow
3) Press [OK] key.
TN_AREA Toner density area correction Allow
The set value in step 2 is saved. TN_LIFE Toner density life correction Allow
Default Default
Item Item
value value
TN_COV Toner density print rate correction Allow M REG_F GRND Belt surface when the item I 0
TN_PROCON Toner density process control correction Allow adjustment is completed
TN_ENV Toner density environment correction Allow N REG_R GRND Belt surface when the item J 0
TN_DRIP Toner density correction unconditional Allow adjustment is completed
supply O REG_F BELTMAX Belt surface input max. value (F 0
TN_SPEND Toner compulsory consumption mode Allow side)
PHT 1-pixel half tone process control correction Inhibit P REG_F BELT MIN Belt surface input min. value (F 0
AR_AUTO Automatic registration adjustment Allow side)
AR_ERROR Error check during execution of automatic Allow Q REG_F BELT DIF Belt surface input difference (Item 0
registration adjustment O, Item P)
DM_PHASE Drum phase alignment Allow R REG_R BELT MAX Belt surface input max. value (R 0
side)
TN_SENSITIVITY Toner sensitivity correction Inhibit
S REG_R BELT MIN Belt surface input min. value (R 0
AR_PHASE Phase between colors and motor Allow
side)
modulation readjustment when resist
adjustment automatic execution after T REG_R BELT DIF Belt surface input difference (Item 0
turning on the power R, Item S)
PRT_HT Half tone process control printer correction Allow U REG_F PATCH(K) Patch light reception potential F (K) 0
feedback *1 V REG_F PATCH(C) Patch light reception potential F (C) 0
W REG_F PATCH(M) Patch light reception potential F 0
*1: Not displayed when an option FIERY is installed.
(M)
SIMULATION NO.44-01 CLOSE X REG_F PATCH(Y) Patch light reception potential F (Y) 0
TEST
Y REG_R PATCH(K) Patch light reception potential R 0
MODE SETTING
(K)
HV HT TC MD VG
Z REG_R PATCH(C) Patch light reception potential R 0
(C)
MD LD MD EV MD DL MD DL EV
AA REG_R PATCH(M) Patch light reception potential R 0
TN_AREA
(M)
TN_HUM TN_LIFE TN_COV
AB REG_R PATCH(Y) Patch light reception potential R 0
TN_PROCON TN_ENV TN_DRIP TN_SPEND (Y)
PHT AR_AUTO AR_ERROR DM_PHASE SIMULATION NO.44-02 CLOSE

TEST
TN_SENSITIVITY AR_PHASE PRT_HTY PROCON GAIN ADJUSTMENT
PCS_CL LED ADJ : 21 PCS_K LED ADJ : 21
PCS_CL DARK : 0 PCS_K DARK : 0
PCS_K GRND : 0
PCS_K BELT MAX : 0 PCS_K BELT MIN : 0
EXECUTE PCS_K BELT DIF : 0

1/1
REG_F LED ADJ : 27 REG_R LED ADJ : 27
44-2 REG_F DARK : 0 REG_R DARK : 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setting REG_F GRND : 0 REG_R GRND : 0
REG_F BELT MAX : 0 REG_F BELT MIN : 0

Function (Purpose) Image density sensor gain adjustment
REG_F BELT DIF : 0 REG_R BELT MAX : 0
Section Process
REG_R BELT MIN : 0 REG_R BELT DIF : 0
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto-
EXECUTE 1/2
matically.
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis-
played. 44-4
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.)
Default
Item Function (Purpose) Used to set the target density level in the
value
A PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light emitting quantity 21 image density correction.
adjustment value Section
B PCS_K LED ADJ Black sensor light emitting quantity 21
Operation/Procedure
adjustment value
C PCS_CL DARK Color dark voltage 0 Default
D PCS_K DARK Black dark voltage 0 Item
value
E PCS_K GRND Belt surface when the item B 0 A PCS_CL TARGET Color sensor target value 98
adjustment is completed B PCS_K TARGET Black sensor target value 155
F PCS_K BELT MAX Belt surface input max. value 0 C LED_CL OUTPUT Color sensor light emitting 21
G PCS_K BELT MIN Belt surface input min. value 0 quantity
H PCS_K BELT DIF Belt surface input difference (Item 0 D LED_K OUTPUT Black sensor light emitting 21
E, Item F) quantity
I REG_F LED ADJ Resist sensor light emitting 27 E PCS ADJSTMENT Sensor adjustment target limit 4
quantity adjustment value F LIMIT value
J REG_R LED ADJ Resist sensor light emitting 27 F BELT GROUND DIF Effective difference between 255
quantity adjustment value R upper/loser values of belt one-
K REG_F DARK Resist sensor dark voltage F 0 round surface
L REG_R DARK Resist sensor dark voltage R 0
Default
Item 44-9
value
G BIAS_CL Bias (for color) reference 0 Purpose (Do not use in the market.)
STANDARD DIF calculation difference Function (Purpose) Used to check data of correction results in
H BIAS_BK Bias (for black) reference 0 the image forming section.
STANDARD DIF calculation difference
Section Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
I BIAS_BW Reference calculation difference 0
STANDARD DIF in high speed mode
Transfer/Cleaning)
J BIAS PATCH Patch bias output interval 60 Operation/Procedure
INTERVAL
K BIAS_PATCH BW BW patch bias output interval 45 Default
Mode Item
INTERVAL value
L Y_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard value 115 CPY/ BLACK_P: GB ***/*** High density process GB: 620 (K)
(yellow) PRN DV ***/*** control 635 (CMY)
M M_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard value 130 CYAN_P: GB ***/*** GB/DV data DV: 450
(magenta) DV ***/***
N C_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard value 120 MAGENTA_P: GB ***/***
(cyan) DV ***/***
O K_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard value 7 YELLOW_P: GB ***/***
(black) DV ***/***
P BW_PAT TARGET BW process control execution BK 7 CPY/ BLACK_N: GB ***/*** High density normal GB: 620 (K)
ID target PRN DV ***/*** (Medium speed) 635 (CMY)
Q HV BK_GROUND Surface light reception effective 29 CYAN_N: GB ***/*** GB/DV data DV: 450
LIMIT area value at the patch position DV ***/***

MAGENTA_N: GB ***/***
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-04 CLOSE DV ***/***
YELLOW_N: GB ***/***
PROCON INITIAL DENSITY SETUP
A : 98
DV ***/***
; PCS_CL TARGET
A: 98 BLACK_L: GB ***/*** High density normal GB: 585 (K)

B : 155 ; PCS_K TARGET
DV ***/*** (Low speed) 600 (CMY)
1 255 C : 21 ; LED_CL OUTPUT
CYAN_L: GB ***/*** GB/DV data DV: 420
D : 21 ; LED_K OUTPUT DV ***/***
E: 4 ; POS ADJUSTMENT LIMIT MAGENTA_L: GB ***/***
F : 255 ; BELT GROUND DIF DV ***/***
G: 0 ; BIAS_CL STANDARD DIF
YELLOW_L: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
H: 0 ; BIAS_BK STANDARD DIF
BLACK_H: GB ***/*** High density normal GB: 690
I: 0 ; BIAS_BW STANDARD DIF DV ***/*** (High speed) DV: 450
J: 60 ; BIAS PATCH INTERVAL
GB/DV data
OTHER TN HUD AREA Toner concentration 9
K : 45 ; BIAS_PATCH BW INTERVAL
humidity area
L : 115 ; Y_PAT TARGET ID TN HUD DATA Toner concentration 0
OK
humidity AD value
TC TMP AREA Transfer temperature 4
area
TC TMP DATA Transfer temperature 0
44-6 AD value
TC HUD AREA Transfer humidity 4
Purpose Adjustment
area
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process TC HUD DATA Transfer humidity AD 0
correction compulsorily. value
Section MD HUD AREA Membrane decrease 9
humidity area
Operation/Procedure
MD HUD DATA Membrane decrease 0
Press [EXECUTE] key. humidity AD value
In case of a normal completion, the result is saved. MD K STEP Drum membrane 0
In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed. (Refer MD C STEP decrease correction
MD M STEP STEP
to the table below.)
MD Y STEP
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color sensor adjustment abnormality MD K DRUM COUNTER Drum travelling 0
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black sensor adjustment abnormality MD C DRUM COUNTER distance
K_HV_ERR K high density process control abnormality MD M DRUM COUNTER
C_HV_ERR C high density process control abnormality MD Y DRUM COUNTER
M_HV_ERR M high density process control abnormality MD K REVISE(VG): Drum membrane 0
Y_HV_ERR Y high density process control abnormality L *** M *** H*** decrease grid voltage
TIMEOUT_ERR Time out MD C REVISE(VG): correction
L *** M ***
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-06 CLOSE MD M REVISE(VG):
PROCON COMPULSORY EXECUTION
L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(VG):
L *** M ***
EXECUTE
Default
Mode Item TEST SIMULATION NO.44-09 CLOSE
value
OTHER MD K REVISE(LD): Drum membrane 0 PROCON DATA DISP (PROCON / NORMAL(M) / NORMAL(L) / NORMAL(H))
L *** M *** H *** decrease laser power BLACK_P : GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/620 BLACK_N : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/620
MD C REVISE(LD): voltage correction CYAN_P : GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/635 CYAN_N : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/635
L *** M ***
MAGENTA_P : GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/635 MAGENTA_N : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/635
MD M REVISE(LD):
L *** M *** YELLOW_P : GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/635 YELLOW_N : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/635
MD Y REVISE(LD): BLACK_L : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/585
L *** M *** CYAN_L : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/600

MD K REVISE(HV): High density 0 MAGENTA_L : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/600
L *** M *** H *** membrane decrease
YELLOW_L : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/600
MD C REVISE(HV): environment GB
L *** M *** correction BLACK_H : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/600
MD M REVISE(HV):
L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(HV):
L *** M ***
CPY/PRN OTHER 1/1
MD K REVISE(CP): Drum membrane 0
L *** M *** H *** decrease
MD C REVISE(CP): environment grid
L *** M *** voltage correction 44-12
MD M REVISE(CP): Purpose (Do not use in the market.)
L *** M ***
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sampling toner image
MD Y REVISE(CP):
L *** M *** patch density data in the image density cor-
MD K REVISE COL (DL): Drum membrane 70 rection.
L *** M *** decrease discharge Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
MD C REVISE COL (DL): light quantity ing)
L *** M *** correction
Operation/Procedure
MD M REVISE COL (DL):
L *** M *** Default
MD Y REVISE COL (DL): Item
value
L *** M *** CARB DATA Calibration plate sensor value 108
MD K REVISE BW (DL): 80 SEAL ADJ DATA Jig patch seal sensor value 108
L *** M *** H ***
ADK_SL(K) Developing characteristics gradient 0
MD K REVISE COL Drum membrane 0 coefficient
(DL EV): L *** M *** decrease
ADK_INT(K) Developing characteristics intercept 0
MD C REVISE COL environment
coefficient
(DL EV): L *** M *** discharge light
ID(K) Sensor target value set value 0
MD M REVISE COL quantity correction
ID(CMY) Color sensor target set value 0
(DL EV): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL
(DL EV): L *** M *** TEST
MD K REVISE BW PATCH/TARGET DATA DISPLAY
(DL EV): L *** M *** H *** CARB DATA : 108
DESTINATION Main unit side SEAL ADJ DATA : 108

destination ADK_SL(K) : 0.00
MODEL TYPE Main unit model type 0
ADK_INT(K) : 0.0
CRUM DEST_K CRUM destination
TARGET(K) : 0.00
CRUM DEST_C
CRUM DEST_M TARGET(C) : 0.00
CRUM DEST_Y TARGET(M) : 0.00
CRUM DEST_K2 TARGET(Y) : 0.00

PROCON COUNT HV High density process 0
control execution
number
TARGET PATCH 1/1
PROCON COUNT HT Half tone process 0
control execution
number
44-13
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the color image sensor.
Section
Operation/Procedure
For details of the procedures, refer to [ADJ 7A] in [6] ADJUST-
MENTS.
Default
Item
value
A PCS_CL CARB OUT Calibration plate sensor value 108
B PCS_CL DARK Color dark voltage 0
C PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light emitting 21
quantity adjustment value
Operation/Procedure
PATCH SEAL ADJUSTMENT Default

Item
PCS CL CARB OUT : 108 value
TONER DEN_LT Medium speed toner density sensor 129
PCS CL DARK : 0
(M) output value (final value) (KCMY)
PCS CL LED ADJ : 21 TONER DEN_ST Medium speed toner density reference 128
(M) value (including the correction value)
(KCMY)
OK
TONER DEN_LT Low speed toner density sensor output 129
(L) value (final value) (KCMY)
TONER DEN_ST Low speed toner density reference value 128
(L) (including the correction value) (KCMY)
TONER DEN_LT High speed toner density sensor output 129
(H) value (final value) (K)
EXECUTE
1/1 TONER DEN_ST High speed toner density reference value 128
(H) (including the correction value) (K)
C: Standard value 60 r 10 after adjustment
AUTO DEVE (M) Automatic development adjustment value 128
(middle speed)
44-14 ALL (M) All correction reference value (middle
Purpose Adjustment, setting, operation data check speed) for automatic development
adjustment value (KCMY)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output level of the tem-
AUTO DEVE (L) Automatic development adjustment value
perature/humidity sensor. (low speed)
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop- ALL (L) All correction reference value (low
ing) speed) for automatic development
adjustment value (KCMY)
Operation/Procedure
AUTO DEVE (H) Automatic development adjustment value
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine (high speed)
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed. ALL (H) All correction reference value (high
speed) for the automatic development
TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main A/D value (differential) adjustment value (KCMY)
(temperature qC)
AREA Correction value for environment area 0
TH_UM_AD1 Fusing upper thermistor main compensation sensor (KCMY)
temperature value/AD value (compensation)
HUD Correction value for humidity change
(temperature qC)
(KCMY)
TH_UM_AD2 Fusing upper thermistor main sensor AD value
PRINT RATE Correction value for document print ratio
(detection)
(KCMY)
TH_LM Fusing lower thermistor main A/D value (temperature
PROCON Correction value for high density process
qC)
control result (KCMY)
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub A/D value (temperature qC)
LIFE Correction value for developer life
TH_EX1 Fusing external thermistor A/D value (temperature qC) (KCMY)
TH_EX2 Fusing external thermistor 2 A/D value (temperature qC) SENSITIVITY Correction for toner density sensor 500
TH_M Manual feed temperature sensor A/D value sensitivity
(temperature qC) AUTO DEVE VO Automatic development adjustment 128
HUD_M Manual feed humidity sensor A/D value (humidity %) (M) control voltage value (middle speed)
TH1_LSU LSU thermistor 1 A/D value (temperature qC) ALL VO (M) Control voltage correction reference
DV_HUM Developing tank humidity detection value (middle speed) (KCMY) for
DV_TH Developing tank temperature detection automatic development adjustment value
AUTO DEVE VO Automatic development adjustment
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-14 CLOSE (L) control voltage adjustment (low speed)
SENSOR DATA DISPLAY MONITOR ALL VO (L) Control voltage correction reference
TH_UM : 255deg / XXX value (low speed) (KCMY) for the
automatic development adjustment value
TH_UM_AD1 : 255.0deg / XXX
AUTO DEVE VO Automatic development adjustment
TH_UM_AD2 : XXX (H) control voltage value (high speed)
TH_LM : 255deg / XXX ALL VO (H) Control voltage correction reference
value (high speed) (K) for the automatic
TH_US : 255deg / XXX
development adjustment value
TH_EX1 : 255deg / XXX
AREA VO Control voltage correction value for the 0
TH_EX2 : 255deg / XXX environment area
TH_M : 60.0deg / XXX
HUD VO Humidity change control voltage
correction value (KCMY)
HUD_M : 90.0% / XX
PRINT RATE VO Control voltage correction value (KCMY)
TH1_LSU : 60.0deg / XX for the document print rate
DV_HUM : 90.0% / XXX PROCON VO Control voltage correction value (KCMY)
for the high density process control result
DV_TH : 60.0deg / XX
LIFE VO Control voltage correction voltage
1/1
(KCMY) for the developer life
SENSITIVITY VO Control voltage correction value (KCMY) 500
44-16 for the toner density sensor sensitivity
Purpose (Do not use in the market.) ENV VO Control voltage correction value (KCMY) 0
under high humidity environment
Function (Purpose) Used to check the toner density control AUTO DEVE Humidity change (KCMY) in automatic 8
data. AREA development adjustment
Section AREA Current humidity display (KCMY)
Operation/Procedure
TONER CONTROL DATA DISPLAY TEST SIMULATION NO.44-24 CLOSE

TONER DEN_LT(M) : 129
HALF TONE PROCON RESULT DISPLAY
TONER DEN_ST(M) : 128 [RIZE] 16 [SATURATE] 109 [STEP] 9.3
TONER DEN_LT(L) : 129 [EX-LOW] A: 0.0 , B: 100.0
TONER DEN_ST(L) : 128 [LOW] A: -0.013 , B: -0.569 , C: 107.444
TONER DEN_LT(H) : 129 [CONNECT] A: 0.0 , B: 0.0
TONER DEN_ST(H) : 128 [MID] A: 0.014 , B: -2.598 , C: 139.245
[HIGH] A: -0.120 , B: -35.708
[CONNECT POINT] #1:100, #2: 86, #3: 86, #4: 25
K C M Y NEXT
1/1
K C M Y NEXT 1/1
44-21
Function (Purpose) Used to set the half tone process control. 44-25
Section Process Purpose (Do not use in the market.)

Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial conditions of the pro-
Press [EXECUTE] key. cess control half tone correction.
The process control reference value is registered. Section
In case of a normal completion, the result is saved. Operation/Procedure
SIMULATION NO.44-21 CLOSE Default

TEST Item
value
A 1ST PATCH Half tone process control 1ST step No. 1 40
patch print gradation
B 2ND PATCH Half tone process control 1ST step No. 2 60
C 3RD PATCH Half tone process control 1ST step No. 3 80
EXECUTE
D 4TH PATCH Half tone process control 1ST step No. 4 100
44-22 E 5TH PATCH Half tone process control 1ST step No. 5 255
Purpose (Do not use in the market.)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the toner patch image den- TEST SIMULATION NO.44-25 CLOSE
sity level of each color in half tone image HALF TONE PROCON INITIAL VALUE DISPLAY
forming section correction (process correc- A : 40 ; 1ST PATCH
tion). A: 40 B: 60 ; 2ND PATCH
Section 0 255
C: 80 ; 3RD PATCH
Operation/Procedure D : 100 ; 4TH PATCH
E : 255 ; 5TH PATCH
HALF TONE CORRECT RESULT

PTK/BASE PTC PTM PTY
ID 1 : 255/255 255 255 255
ID 2 : 255/255 255 255 255

K C M Y OK
ID 3 : 255/255 255 255 255
ID 4 : 255/255 255 255 255
ID 5 : 255/255 255 255 255
44-26
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the half tone process con-
trol compulsorily.
Section Process
1ST STEP 2ND STEP 1/1
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key.
The process control is started compulsorily.
44-24
For the result of the process control compulsory execution, refer to
the table below.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the process control result.
Section COMPLETE Normal completion
INTERRUPTION Compulsory interruption
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color sensor adjustment abnormality
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black sensor adjustment abnormality
[YMCK] High density process control [YMCK] abnormality
CONNECTION_ERR Communication abnormality
Operation/Procedure
HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION TEST SIMULATION NO.44-27 CLOSE

TOUCH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START. HALF TONE PROCON ADJUSTMENT DATA CLEAR
EXECUTE
44-27
Purpose Data clear 44-28
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the half tone process correc- Purpose Adjustment/Setting
tion value.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
Section timing.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys on the touch
panel.
Default
Item
value
A SW ON When the power is supplied (when sleep is canceled.) 0: Allow 0
1: Inhibit
B 24H When 24 hours or more passed with READY (sleep setting) 0: Allow 0
1: Inhibit
C HUM When a change in temperature/humidity for each Item I is 0: Allow 0
greater than item K when compared with the previous 1: Inhibit
process control execution
D REV1 When the accumulated traveling distance of BK or M 0: Allow 0
photoconductor has passed for a certain time after supplying 1: Inhibit
the power.
E REC2 When the accumulated traveling distance of BK or M 0: Allow 0
photoconductor has passed for a certain time after execution 1: Inhibit
of the previous density correction
F INITIAL Warm-up after clearing counter of photoconductor and 0: Allow 0
developer unit 1: Inhibit
G PIX When the toner consumption counter reaches the specified 0: Allow 1
accumulated count. 1: Inhibit
H HUM_LIMIT The setting condition of item C is added to items A to G. 0: Allow 1
1: Inhibit
I BK ONLY Monochrome print continuation BK process control execution 0: Allow: Five times 5
inhibit/allow setting and number of repetitions 1: Allow: Once
2: Allow: Twice
3: Allow: Three times
4: Allow: Four times
5: Allow: Five times
6: Inhibit
J BW_HV Monochrome speed high density process control execution 0: BKpr allow/BWpr allow, BW process control execution 5
setting when a certain condition is satisfied
1: BKpr allow/BWpr allow, BW process control execution
when a certain condition is satisfied
3: BKpr allow/BWpr allow, BK process control execution,
continuous BW process control execution
4: BKpr allow/BWpr allow, 4-color process control
execution, continuous BW process control execution
6: BKpr inhibit/BWpr allow, only BK process control inhibit
7: BKpr allow/BWpr inhibit, only BW process control inhibit
K HUM HOUR Item C temperature/humidity monitor monitoring time interval 1 - 24 2
(h: hour)
L HUM_DIF Item C area difference specified value 1-9 2
M BK_RATIO Item E BK photoconductor specified accumulated rotation 1 - 999 20
distance value 10: Equivalent to every 80
Intermittent print for every 3 20: Equivalent to every 160
30: Equivalent to every 240
Default
Item
value
N M_RATIO Item E M photoconductor specified accumulated rotation 1 - 999 20
distance value 10: Equivalent to every 80
Intermittent print for every 3 20: Equivalent to every 160
30: Equivalent to every 240
O PIX_RATIO Item G toner consumption count specified accumulated value 1 - 999 100
P COLOR BORDER M photoconductor traveling distance upper limit when 1 - 999 20
executing BK process control
Q HT_DIF HT process control execution judgment bias change value 1 - 255 40
difference value
R BW_RATIO BW process control BK photoconductor traveling distance 1 - 999 20
magnification ratio setting (%)
S 2TRAN_CLEAN_ Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment 1 - 999 200
TIME1 threshold value 1 (Unit: Sheet of paper)
T 2TRAN_CLEAN_ Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment 1 - 999 300
U 2TRAN_CLEAN_ Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment 1 - 999 500
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-28 CLOSE 44-31

PROCON TIMING ADJUSTMENT Purpose Adjustment/Setting
A: 0 ; SW ON : YES
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the phase of the photocon-
A: 0 B: 0 ; 24H : YES
ductor.
0 1 C: 0 ; HUM : YES
Section Process
D: 0 ; REV1 : YES
Operation/Procedure
E: 0 ; REV2 : YES
NOTE: Since it is rather difficult to perform the manual photocon-
F: 0 ; INITIAL : YES
ductor phase adjustment with this simulation, use SIM 50-
22 to perform the automatic adjustment.
G: 1 ; PIX : NO
H: 1 ; HUM_LIMIT : NO
Default
I: 5 ; BK ONLY
Item
value
J: 5 ; BW_HV
A PRINT Print mode 1: Deflection 3
K: 2 ; HUM HOUR
MODE check pattern
L: 2 ; HUM_DIF print for every
45q (8-sheet
OK
print)
2: Deflection
44-29 check pattern
print for every
Purpose (Do not use in the market.) 90q (4-sheet
Function (Purpose) Used to select the half tone correction dur- print)
ing a job. 3: Check pattern
print at the set
Section value (1-sheet
Operation/Procedure print)
B BASE Print color select 1: BK 1
Default COLOR 2: C
Item
value 3: M
A COPY Copier 0-4 0: No execution 4 4: Y
B PRINTER Printer 1: HV only 2 C PHASE (C) C tandem phase 0: 0q 0
C FAX FAX 2: HV o PHT 2 setting 1: 5q
D SELF PRINT Self print 3: HV o HT 4 Y sensor reference C :
4: HV o PHT o HT phase state is :
changed up to 355q for 70: 350q
SIMULATION NO.44-29 CLOSE every 5q.
TEST 71: 355q
HALF TONE SETTING D PHASE (M) M tandem phase 0: 0q 0
A: 4 ; COPY : HV PHT setting 1: 5q
A: 4 B: 2 ; PRINTER : HV PHT HT Y sensor reference M :
C: 2 ; FAX : HV PHT phase state is :
0 4
D: 4 ; SELF PRINT : HV PHT HT changed up to 355q for 70: 350q
every 5q.
71: 355q
E START Color modulation 0: 0q 0
POINT (CL) timing delay setting 1: 5q
Y sensor reference :
color modulation start :
timing is changed up 70: 350q
to 355q for every 5q.
OK 71: 355q
F AMPLITUDE Color modulation 0 - 15 0
(CL) amplitude correction
value setting
Default
Item TEST SIMULATION NO.44-31 CLOSE
value
G START BK modulation timing 0: 0q 0 DRUM POSITION SETTING
A: 3 ; PRINT MODE : SET VALUE
POINT (BK) delay setting 1: 5q
BK sensor reference :
A: 3 B: 1 ; BASE COLOR : K
BK modulation start : 1 3 C: 0 ; PHASE(C) : 0DEG

timing is changed up 70: 350q
to 355q for every 5q. D: 0 ; PHASE(M) : 0DEG
71: 355q
H AMPLITUDE BK modulation 0 - 15 0 E: 0 ; START POINT (CL) : 0DEG
(BK) amplitude correction F: 0 ; AMPLITUDE (CL)

value setting
G: 0 ; START POINT(BK) : 0DEG
I PAPER Tray selection 1: Manual feed 4
H: 0 ; AMPLITUDE (BK)
2: Tray 1
3: Tray 2 I: 4 ; PAPER : CS1
4: Tray 3 J: 1 ; MULTI COUNT
5: Tray 4 K: 1 ; PAPER TYPE : PLAIN

6: LCC
J MULTI Print quantity 1 - 999 1 EXECUTE OK
COUNT
K PAPER Paper type 1: Normal paper 1
TYPE 2: Heavy paper
3: OHP 44-37
4: Envelope Purpose Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image density correc-
tion setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target color for setting with touch panel.
2) Select a target item with [n] and [p] keys.
Default
Button Item
value
K A DV_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_1 Color print developing bias correction data 1 (low speed) 2
B DV_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_2 Color print developing bias correction data 2 (low speed) 3
C DV_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_3 Color print developing bias correction data 3 (low speed) 4
D DV_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_1 Color print developing bias correction data 1 (Medium speed) 2
E DV_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_2 Color print developing bias correction data 2 (Medium speed) 3
F DV_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_3 Color print developing bias correction data 3 (Medium speed) 4
G DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_1 Black and white print developing bias correction data 1 (High speed) 2
H DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_2 Black and white print developing bias correction data 2 (High speed) 3
I DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_3 Black and white print developing bias correction data 3 (High speed) 4
J DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_1 Color print developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10[s] low speed) 4
K DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_2 Color print developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10[s], less than 60 [s] low 3
speed)
L DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_3 Color print developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60[s], less than 240 [s] low 1
speed)
M DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_4 Color print developing bias correction start position data 4 (less than 240 [s] low speed) 1
N DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_M_1 Color print developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] middle speed) 4
O DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_M_2 Color print developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10 [s] less than 60 [s] middle 3
speed)
P DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_M_3 Color print developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60 [s] less than 240 [s] middle 1
speed)
Q DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_M_4 Color print developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] middle speed) 1
R DV_ADJ_START_BK_H_1 Black and white print developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] high speed) 4
S DV_ADJ_START_BK_H_2 Black and white print developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10 [s] less than 60 3
[s] high speed)
T DV_ADJ_START_BK_H_3 Black and white print developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60 [s] less than 240 1
[s] high speed)
U DV_ADJ_START_BK_H_4 Black and white print developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] high speed) 1
Default
Button Item
value
C A DV_ADJ_CL_C_L_DATA_1 Developing bias correction data 1 (low speed) 2
B DV_ADJ_CL_C_L_DATA_2 Developing bias correction data 2 (low speed) 3
C DV_ADJ_CL_C_L_DATA_3 Developing bias correction data 3 (low speed) 4
D DV_ADJ_CL_C_M_DATA_1 Developing bias correction data 1 (middle speed) 2
E DV_ADJ_CL_C_M_DATA_2 Developing bias correction data 2 (middle speed) 3
F DV_ADJ_CL_C_M_DATA_3 Developing bias correction data 3 (middle speed) 4
G DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_L_1 Developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] low speed) 4
H DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_L_2 Developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10 [s] less than 60 [s] low speed) 3
I DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_L_3 Developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60 [s] less than 240 [s] low speed) 1
J DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_L_4 Developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] low speed) 1
K DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_M_1 Developing bias correction start position data (less than 10 [s] middle speed) 4
L DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_M_2 Developing bias correction start position data (more than 10 [s] less than 60 [s] middle speed) 3
M DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_M_3 Developing bias correction start position data (more than 60 [s] less than 240 [s] middle speed) 1
N DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_M_4 Developing bias correction start position data (more than 240 [s] middle speed) 1
M A DV_ADJ_CL_M_L_DATA_1 Developing bias correction data 1 (low speed) 2
B DV_ADJ_CL_M_L_DATA_2 Developing bias correction data 2 (low speed) 3
C DV_ADJ_CL_M_L_DATA_3 Developing bias correction data 3 (low speed) 4
D DV_ADJ_CL_M_M_DATA_1 Developing bias correction data 1 (middle speed) 2
E DV_ADJ_CL_M_M_DATA_2 Developing bias correction data 2 (middle speed) 3
F DV_ADJ_CL_M_M_DATA_3 Developing bias correction data 3 (middle speed) 4
G DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_L_1 Developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] low speed) 4
H DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_L_2 Developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10 [s] less than 60 [s] low speed) 3
I DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_L_3 Developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60 [s] less than 240 [s] low speed) 1
J DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_L_4 Developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] low speed) 1
K DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_M_ Developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] middle speed) 4
1
L DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_M_ Developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10 [s] less than 60 [s] middle speed) 3
2
M DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_M_ Developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60 [s] less than 240 [s] middle speed) 1
3
N DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_M_ Developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] middle speed) 1
4
Y A DV_ADJ_CL_Y_L_DATA_1 Developing bias correction data 1 (low speed) 2
B DV_ADJ_CL_Y_L_DATA_2 Developing bias correction data 2 (low speed) 3
C DV_ADJ_CL_Y_L_DATA_3 Developing bias correction data 3 (low speed) 4
D DV_ADJ_CL_Y_M_DATA_1 Developing bias correction data 1 (middle speed) 2
E DV_ADJ_CL_Y_M_DATA_2 Developing bias correction data 2 (middle speed) 3
F DV_ADJ_CL_Y_M_DATA_3 Developing bias correction data 3 (middle speed) 4
G DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_L_1 Developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] low speed) 4
H DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_L_2 Developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10 [s] less than 60 [s] low speed) 3
I DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_L_3 Developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60 [s] less than 240 [s] low speed) 1
J DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_L_4 Developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] low speed) 1
K DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_M_1 Developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] middle speed) 4
L DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_M_2 Developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10 [s] less than 60 [s] middle speed) 3
M DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_M_3 Developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60 [s] less than 240 [s] middle speed) 1
N DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_M_4 Developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] middle speed) 1

IMAGE DENSITY(DVB) ADJUSTMENT SETTING Purpose (Do not use in the market.)
A : 2 ; DV_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_1
Function (Purpose) Used to check installation of the developing
A: 2 B : 3 ; DV_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_2
unit and the current state.
0 5 C : 4 ; DV_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_3
Section
D : 2 ; DV_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_1
Operation/Procedure
E : 3 ; DV_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_2
F : 4 ; DV_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_3
A DVCH KIND K K color developing tank kind
G : 2 ; DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_1 B DVCH KIND C C color developing tank kind
H: 3 ; DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_2 C DVCH KIND M M color developing tank kind
I : 4 ; DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_3
D DVCH KIND Y Y color developing tank kind
E DVCH_AD_K K color developing tank AD value
J : 4 ; DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_1
F DVCH_AD_C C color developing tank AD value
K : 3 ; DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_2
G DVCH_AD_M M color developing tank AD value
L : 1 ; DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_3 H DVCH_AD_Y Y color developing tank AD value
K C M Y OK
DEVELOPER UNIT AD MONITOR Purpose (This simulation should not be executed
DVCH KIND K :
unless specially required.)
DVCH KIND C :
Function (Purpose) The 1-pixel half tone correction is executed
DVCH KIND M :
compulsorily.
DVCH KIND Y :
Section
DVCH AD K :
Operation/Procedure
DVCH AD C :

DVCH AD M :
1 PIXEL HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
DVCH AD Y :
1/1
EXECUTE
44-52
Purpose (This simulation should not be executed 44-57
unless specially required.) Purpose (This simulation should not be executed
Function (Purpose) Used to check the image density level of unless specially required.)
each color toner patch in 1-pixel half tone Function (Purpose) The 1-pixel half tone correction value is
correction. cleared.
Section Section
SIMULATION NO.44-52 CLOSE TEST SIMULATION NO.44-57 CLOSE

TEST
1 PIXEL HALF TONE CORRECT RESULT 1 PIXEL HALF TONE ADJUSTMENT DATA CLEAR
PTK PTC PTM PTY PTK PTC PTM PTY
ID 1 : 255 255 255 255 ID 12 : 255 255 255 255
ID 2 : 255 255 255 255 ID 13 : 255 255 255 255
ID 3 : 255 255 255 255 ID 14 : 255 255 255 255
ID 4 : 255 255 255 255 ID 15 : 255 255 255 255

EXECUTE
ID 5 : 255 255 255 255 ID 16 : 255 255 255 255
ID 6 : 255 255 255 255
ID 7 : 255 255 255 255
46
ID 8 : 255 255 255 255
ID 9 : 255 255 255 255
ID 10 : 255 255 255 255
ID 11 : 255 255 255 255

46-1
1/1 Purpose Adjustment (Color copy mode)

Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
mode.
Section
44-54
Operation/Procedure
Purpose (This simulation should not be executed
unless specially required.) 1) Select a target item of the adjustment with [n] and [p] keys on
the touch panel.
Function (Purpose) The 1-pixel half tone correction result is dis-
played.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Default
Item
1 PIXEL HALF TONE RESULT DISPLAY
value
[EX-LOW] A: 01.000 , B: 100.000 A AUTO Automatic 50
[LOW] A: -10.000 , B: -200.000 , C: 200.000 B TEXT Text 50
C TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Print 50
[CONNECT] A: 10.000 , B: -150.000
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 50
[MID] A: 05.000 , B: 200.000 , C: 150.000
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 50
[HIGH] A: 05.000 , B: 150.000 F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 50
[CONNECT SENSOR] #1: 255, #2: 255, #3: 255, #4: 255
G MAP Map 50
H LIGHT Light document 50
I TEXT (COPY TO COPY) Text (Copy document) 50
J TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Print (Copy 50
K C M Y EXECUTE
(COPY TO COPY) document)
1/1
K PRINTED PHOTO (COPY Print photo (Copy 50
TO COPY) document)
Default
Item TEST SIMULATION NO.46-02 CLOSE
value
L TEXT (COLOR TONE Text (Color enhancement) 50 EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[COPY]
A : 50 ; AUTO1
ENHANCEMENT)
A: 50 B : 50 ; AUTO2
M TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Print (Color 50
(COLOR TONE enhancement) 1 99 C : 50 ; TEXT
ENHANCEMENT) D : 50 ; TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
N TEXT/PHOTO (COLOR Text/Photograph (Color 50 E : 50 ; TEXT/PHOTO

TONE ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
F : 50 ; PRINTED PHOTO
O PRINTED PHOTO (COLOR Printed photo (Color 50
TONE ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) G : 50 ; PHOTOGRAPH
P PHOTOGRAPH (COLOR Photo (Color 50 H : 50 ; MAP
TONE ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) I: 50 ; TEXT (COPY TO COPY)

Q MAP (COLOR TONE Map (Color enhancement) 50
ENHANCEMENT)
R SINGLE COLOR Single color 50 K : 50 ; PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)
S SINGLE COLOR (COPY TO Single color (Copy 50 L : 50 ; LIGHT

COPY) document)
OK
T TWO COLOR 2-color (red/black) copy 50
U TWO COLOR (COPY TO 2-color (red/black) copy 50
COPY) (copy document)
46-4
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
A : 50 ; AUTO
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the scanner
A: 50 B : 50 ; TEXT
mode.
1 99 C : 50 ; TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Section

D : 50 ; TEXT/PHOTO Operation/Procedure
E : 50 ; PRINTED PHOTO 1) Select a target item of the adjustment with [n] and [p] keys on
F : 50 ; PHOTOGRAPH
the touch panel.
G : 50 ; MAP
H : 50 ; LIGHT


Item Default value
L : 50 ; TEXT (COLOR TONE ENHANCEMENT) A TEXT Text 50
OK
B TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Print 50
C TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 50
D PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 50
E PHOTOGRAPH Photo 50
46-2 F MAP Map 50
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy TEST
mode. EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(COLOR)[SCANNER]

A : 50 ; TEXT
Section A: 50 B : 50 ; EXT/PRINTED PHOTO
Operation/Procedure C : 50 ; TEXT/PHOTO
1 99
1) Select a target item of the adjustment with [n] and [p] keys on D : 50 ; PTINTED PHOTO
the touch panel. E : 50 ; PHOTOGRAPH
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. F : 50 ; MAP

Default OK
Item
value
A AUTO1 Automatic 1 50
B AUTO2 Automatic 2 50 46-5
C TEXT Text 50
D TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Print 50
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode)
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 50 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the scanner
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 50 mode.
G PHOTOGRAPH Photo 50 Section
H MAP Map 50
Operation/Procedure
I TEXT (COPY TO COPY) Text (Copy document) 50
J TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Print (Copy document) 50
1) Select a target item of the adjustment with [n] and [p] keys on
(COPY TO COPY) the touch panel.
K PRINTED PHOTO (COPY Print photo (Copy 50 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
TO COPY) document) * When U or V key is pressed, the set value of each item is
L LIGHT Light document 50 increased or decreased by 1 collectively.
Default 46-9
Item
value
Purpose Adjustment (DSPF mode)
A AUTO TEXT Automatic/Text 50
B AUTO TEXT/PRINT PHOTO Automatic/Text/Print 50 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
C AUTO TEXT/PHOTO Automatic/Text/ 50 mode.
Photograph Section
D TEXT Text 50 Operation/Procedure
E TEXT/PRINT PHOTO Text/Print 50
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [ON] and [DSPF] keys
F TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 50
on the touch panel.
G PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 50
H PHOTOGRAPH Photo 50 2) Select a target item of the adjustment with [n] and [p] keys on
I MAP Map 50
the touch panel.
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-05 CLOSE * When U or V key is pressed, the set value of each item is
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[SCANNER] increased or decreased by 1 collectively.
A : 50 ; AUTO TEXT
A: 50 B : 50 ; AUTO EXT/PRINTED PHOTO
1 99 C : 50 ; AUTO TEXT/PHOTO Default

Item
D : 50 ; TEXT
value
A OC COPY SIDEA: LOW DSPF copy mode 42
E : 50 ; TEXT/PRINT PHOTO
exposure adjustment (low
F : 50 ; TEXT/PHOTO density)
G : 50 ; PRINTED PHOTO B SCAN SIDEA: LOW DSPF scanner mode 42
H : 50 ; PHOTOGRAPH
density)
I: 50 ; MAP
C FAX SIDEA: LOW DSPF FAX mode 42
density)
D COPY SIDEA: HIGH DSPF copy mode 53
exposure adjustment
OK (high density)
E SCAN SIDEA: HIGH DSPF scanner mode 53
exposure adjustment
(high density)
46-8
F FAX SIDEA: HIGH DSPF FAX mode 53
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) exposure adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scanner color balance (high density)
RGB. A DSPF COPY SIDEB: LOW DSPF copy mode 45
Section density)
Operation/Procedure B SCAN SIDEB: LOW DSPF scanner mode 45
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch exposure adjustment (low
panel. density)
C FAX SIDEB: LOW DSPF FAX mode 45
2) Select a target item of the adjustment with [n] and [p] keys on exposure adjustment (low
the touch panel. density)
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. D COPY SIDEB: HIGH DSPF copy mode 50
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) exposure adjustment
(high density)
Default E SCAN SIDEB: HIGH DSPF scanner mode 50
Item exposure adjustment
value
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density correction amount 50 (high density)
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density correction amount 50 F FAX SIDEB: HIGH DSPF FAX mode 50
exposure adjustment
SIMULATION NO.46-08 CLOSE (high density)
TEST
G BALANCE SIDEB: R DSPF color balance R 50
SCANNER COLOR BALANCE ADJUSTMENT (COLOR SCANNER MODE)
A : 50
H BALANCE SIDEB: G DSPF color balance G 50
; LOW DENSITY POINT
A: 50 B : 50 ; HIGH DENSITY POINT

I BALANCE SIDEB: B DSPF color balance B 50
1 99 SIMULATION NO.46-09 CLOSE

TEST
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(SPF)
A : 42 ; COPY SIDEA : LOW
A: 42 B : 42 ; SCAN SIDEA : LOW
C : 42 ; FAX SIDEA : LOW

1 99
D : 53 ; COPY SIDEA : HIGH
E : 53 ; SCAN SIDEA : HIGH
B G R OK F : 53 ; FAX SIDEA : HIGH
OC DSPF OK
Operation/Procedure
46-10
Purpose Adjustment the touch panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the engine color balance 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
manually.
Section increased or decreased by 1 collectively.
Operation/Procedure 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
1) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key.
A-O POINT1 - 15 500: Default value
2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
touch panel. SIMULATION NO.46-16 CLOSE
TEST
the touch panel. A : 500 ; POINT1
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. A: 500 B : 500 ; POINT2
* When U or V key is pressed, the set value of each item is 373 627 C : 500 ; POINT3
increased or decreased by 1 collectively. D : 500 ; POINT4
5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) E : 500 ; POINT5
F : 500 ; POINT6
TEXT Text
G : 500 ; POINT7
TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo
PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo H : 500 ; POINT8
PHOTO{TEXT/PHOTO Photograph + Text/Printed Photo I : 500 ; POINT9
MAP Map J : 500 ; POINT10

LIGHT Light document
K : 500 ; POINT11
COPY ORG Copy document
L : 500 ; POINT12
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-10 CLOSE EXECUTE OK

TEXT TEXT/PRT PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO

46-19
MAP LIGHT COPY ORG Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the monochrome auto expo-
sure mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select an item to be set with touch panel.
When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is
saved.
EXECUTE 1/1
Default
Item
A-O POINT1 - 15 500: Default value value
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE1
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-10 CLOSE MODE2
AE_STOP_COPY Auto exposure Stop ON/OFF ON
A : 500 ; POINT1 (for copy)
A: 500 B : 500 ; POINT2 AE_STOP_FAX Auto exposure Stop ON/OFF ON
C : 500 ; POINT3
(for FAX)
245 755
D: 500 ; POINT4
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto exposure Stop ON/OFF ON
(for scanner)
E : 500 ; POINT5
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
F : 500 ; POINT6 setting NORMAL
G: 500 ; POINT7 SHARP
H: 500 ; POINT8
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL FULL
PART
I : 500 ; POINT9
J : 500 ; POINT10 TEST SIMULATION NO.46-19
K: 500 ; POINT11 EXPOSURE MODE SETUP (B/W-AE)

AE_MODE : MODE1 MODE2
L : 500 ; POINT12
AE_STOP COPY : OFF ON
K C M Y EXECUTE OK
AE_STOP FAX : OFF ON
AE_STOP SCAN : OFF ON
AE_FILTER : SOFT NORMAL SHARP

46-16
AE_WIDTH : FULL PART
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine color balance
manual adjustment (monochrome, all
modes). 1/1
Section
Operation/Procedure
46-21
Purpose Adjustment
The half tone auto density adjustment is performed and self
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine color balance print is outputted.
manual adjustment (color, all modes).
2) Place the outputted self print patch on the glass table, and
Section select a process mode with [FACTORY] and [SERVICE] on
Operation/Procedure the touch panel.
1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
touch panel. The patch is scanned and the 16-patch self print is outputted.
2) Select a target item of the adjustment with [n] and [p] keys on 4) Press [OK] key.
the touch panel. The correction value is saved and the reference value is regis-
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. tered.
CLOSE
increased or decreased by 1 collectively. TEST SIMULATION NO.46-24
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PROCON EXECUTION AND PRINT THE TEST PATCH.
A-O POINT1 - 15 500: Default value (PLEASE USE SPECIFIED TYPE OF A3 OR 11" 17" SIZE PAPER


A : 500 ; POINT1
A: 500 B : 500 ; POINT2

EXECUTE
C : 500 ; POINT3
245 755
D : 500 ; POINT4
E : 500 ; POINT5
F : 500 ; POINT6
G : 500 ; POINT7 THE PRINTED TEST PATCH ON DOCUMENT GLASS THEN PRESS [EXECUTE].
H : 500 ; POINT8
,
I : 500 ; POINT9 *LIGHT AREA AT LEFT SIDE ON DOCUMENT GLASS.
J : 500 ; POINT10
K : 500 ; POINT11
L : 500 ; POINT12
FACTORY SERVICE EXECUTE
K C M Y EXECUTE OK
46-25
46-23 Purpose Adjustment
Purpose Adjustment/Setting Function (Purpose) Used to perform the color balance adjust-
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the half tone highest den- ment in the single color mode.
sity correction. Section
Operation/Procedure 1) Select an adjustment target color with [C][M][Y] keys on the
1) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. touch panel.
0: Allow 1: Inhibit 2) Select a target item of the adjustment with [n] and [p] keys on
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) the touch panel.
TEST
ENGINE MAXIMUM DENSITY ADJUSTMENT MODE
A: 0 ; (0:ENABLE 1:DISABLE) Default value
A: 0 Item
C M Y
0 1 A RED 0 255 255
B GREEN 255 0 255
C BLUE 255 255 0
D YELLOW 0 0 255
E MAGENTA 0 255 0
F CYAN 255 0 0
OK
46-24
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine half tone auto
density adjustment.
Section

A: 0 ; RED
A: 0 B : 255 ; GREEN
C : 255 ; BLUE
0 255
D: 0 ; YELLOW
E: 0 ; MAGENTA
F : 255 ; CYAN
C M Y OK
46-26 Default
Item
value
Purpose Adjustment
A BLACK TEXT Black text edge area engine gamma 50
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the default setting of color (SLOPE) curve calculation coefficient (slope)
balance in the single color mode. B BLACK TEXT Black text edge area engine gamma 50
Section (INTERCEPT) curve calculation coefficient (intercept)
Operation/Procedure C COLOR TEXT Color text edge area engine gamma 50
(SLOPE) curve calculation coefficient (slope)
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. D COLOR TEXT Color text edge area engine gamma 50
2) Press [YES] key. (INTERCEPT) curve calculation coefficient (intercept)
The color balance setting in the single color mode is returned E ED TEXT Error diffusion edge area engine gamma 50
to the default value. (SLOPE) curve calculation coefficient (slope)
F ED TEXT Error diffusion edge area engine gamma 50
TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-26 CLOSE (INTERCEPT) curve calculation coefficient (intercept)
SINGLE COLOR MODE STANDARD RATE SETUP
COEFFICIENT OF GAMMA SETUP

A: 50 B : 50 ; BLACK TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
C : 50 ; COLOR TEXT (SLOPE)

ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE 1 99
D : 50 ; COLOR TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
46-27
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine/gamma calcu-
lation formula coefficient setting.
OK
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys on the touch 46-28
panel. Purpose (This simulation should not be used unless
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. specially required.)
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Function (Purpose) Used to check Auto exposure/Document
auto recognition/Line number recognition
(color mode).
Section
Operation/Procedure
Item Display Content

ACS (color document/ RESULT (judgment COL/MONO Document type Color
monochrome document result) Black and white
auto RESULT (judgment STATISTICS ACSCONT ACS judgment counter value
result)
COLOR AE (color auto RESULT (judgment SITAJI_JUDGE Background division detection result
exposure) result)
STATISTICS (image RATE_SCR Dot ratio
process statistic amount) SHITAJI Background number judgment result
BEAT_JUDGE Background judgment result
SUM_SITAJI_SCR Background area dot number
ORG RECOG RESULT (judgment ORIGINAL TXT Document Auto text
(document type auto result) TXT/HT Auto text dot
judgment) HT Auto dot
TXT/PIC Auto text photo
PIC Auto photo
TXT ON HT Text on auto dot
OHT Auto other
BACKGROUND Background None
GR Gray
WH White
NE Newspaper
WH_GR White gray
WH_NE White newspaper
WH_CO White color
CO Color
IM Image
MESH Dot No dot
IMAGE Image dot
BASE Background dot (non-image dot)
HTFE HIGH Line type High line number
LOW Low line number
Item Display Content
ORG RECOG STATISTICS HTCNT Dot counter value
(document type auto (Image process statistic PHOTOCNT Photographic paper counter value
judgment) amount) STRCNT Text counter value
FLATCNT Background counter value
PREHTCNT Document judgment dot counter value
HTXTCNT Text-on-dot counter value
SUMF Average dot counter value
SUMM_L Gross of max. reverse rotation number (lower 32bit)
SUMM_H Gross of max. reverse rotation number (upper 4 bit)
SUMFM_L Gross of flat part max. reverse rotation number (lower 32bit)
SUMFM_H Gross of flat part max. reverse rotation number (upper 4 bit)
FHSTDR Background pixel histogram value (RED)
FHSTDG Background pixel histogram value (GREEN)
FHSTDB Background pixel histogram value (BLUE)
HTHSTDR Dot pixel histogram value (RED)
HTHSTDG Dot pixel histogram value (GREEN)
HTHSTDB Dot pixel histogram value (BLUE)
LHSTD Other-than-dot L component histogram value
MDHSTD Other-than-dot max. difference histogram value
OHSTDR Other-than-dot pixel histogram value (RED)
OHSTDG Other-than-dot pixel histogram value (GREEN)
OHSTDB Other-than-dot pixel histogram value (BLUE)
SUM_BETA_RGB Number of all divisions of background pixel histogram high level
number
EREA_BETA RGB Number of areas (backgrounds) of background pixel histogram high
level number
SUM_BETA_PHOTORGB Number of areas (photographic paper) of background pixel
histogram high level number
RATE_BETA Background ratio
SHITAJI Background number judgment result
BETA_JUDGE Background judgment result
RATE_SCR Dot ratio
RATE_SCR2 Dot judgment ratio
RATE_TSCR Text-on-dot ratio
HTFE_JUDGE Line number judgment result
SCR_HIST_JUDGE Dot histogram judgment result
SCR_CNT_JUDGE Dot counter value judgment result
TSCR_JUDGE Text-on-dot counter value judgment result
SCR_JUDGE Dot judgment result
RATE_OTHER Other ratio
TEXT_JUDGE Test judgment result
PHOTO_CNT_JUDGE Photographic paper pixel counter value judgment result
OTHER_JUDGE Other pixel counter value judgment result
PHOTO_JUDGE Photographic paper judgment result
TH_BETAQ Background pixel histogram high level number division detection
threshold value
TH_BETA_PHT2 Background pixel histogram high level number division detection
threshold value (Photographic paper)
TH_SCR2 Dot high level number threshold value
TH_SCR_CNT2 Threshold value for the dot counter value
TH_TSCR_CNT2 Threshold value for the text-on-dot counter value
TH_TEXT2 Text judgment threshold value
TH_PHOTO2 Photographic paper judgment threshold value
ALLCNT Total number of pixels of the judgment area
SCR RECOG (dot line RESULT (judgment HTFE RESULT HIGH2 Dot line number High line number 2 (htfe_out=3)
number recognition) result) HIGH1 High line number 1 (htfe_out=2)
LOW1 Low line number 1 (htfe_out=1)
LOW2 Low line number 2 (htfe_out=0)
STATISTICS (image REVERSE AVE Max. reverse rotation average
process statistic amount) REVERSE AVE (FLAT) Flat part max. reverse rotation average
FLAT SELECT Flat part dot pixel flatr>Thflatr
comparison Other than flatrTHflatr>
AUTO EXPOSURE/ ORG AUTO RECOG/MESH LINE RECOG OF CONFIRM

PRESS [EXECUTE] TO SCAN START
EXECUTE
46-33
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the color auto mode
adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, the other items than the follow- 1) Select a target category to be set with [NEXT] [BACK] keys on
ing items should be set to default values. Only for the fol- the touch panel.
lowing items, change the set value according to necessity.
2) Select a target item with [n] and [p] keys on the touch panel.
COLOR AE (SW MODE1 - 7 / TH MAX MONO /
TH MAX COLOR / SW NEWS / TH MODE SCR)
ACS (SIM LEVEL)
Default
Category Item
value
ACS Setting 4th digit and below A THCLMK_1 Pixel judgment threshold value (1) 7
B THCLBK_1 Final pixel judgment threshold value (1) 2
C ACSMSK_1 ACS mask size select (1) 0
D THCLMK_2 Pixel judgment threshold value (2) 7
E THCLBK_2 Final pixel judgment threshold value (2) 2
F ACSMSK_2 ACS mask size select (2) 0
G THCLMK_3 Pixel judgment threshold value (3) 7
H THCLBK_3 Final pixel judgment threshold value (3) 2
I ACSMSK_3 ACS mask size select (3) 0
J THCLMK_4 Pixel judgment threshold value (4) 7
K THCLBK_4 Final pixel judgment threshold value (4) 2
L ACSMSK_4 ACS mask size select (4) 0
M THCLMK_5 Pixel judgment threshold value (5) 7
N THCLBK_5 Final pixel judgment threshold value (5) 2
O ACSMSK_5 ACS mask size select (5) 0
P SIM_LEVEL ACS judgment select switch (density difference) 2
Q TH_ACS5_RT TH_ACS5: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio 50
Setting 5th digit and above A TH_ACS5 ENLARGE ACS judgment threshold value 5 (For enlargement) 30000
COLOR AE Setting 4th digit and below A SW_MODE1 Auto text document background 1: ON 1
detection 0: OFF
B SW_MODE2 Auto text dot document 1: ON 1
background detection 0: OFF
C SW_MODE3 Auto text-on-dot document 1: ON 1
D SW_MODE4 Auto dot document background 1: ON 0
detection 0: OFF
E SW_MODE5 Auto photo document background 1: ON 0
detection 0: OFF
F SW_MODE6 Auto text photo document 1: ON 0
G SW_MODE7 Auto other document background 1: ON 0
detection 0: OFF
H TH_MAX_MONO Monochrome background detection threshold value 17
I TH_MAX_COLOR Color background detection threshold value 17
J SW_NEWS Newspaper background compulsory removal switch 0
K SW_MODE_SCR1 Dot area background judgment switch 3
L SW_MODE_SCR2 Dot area background removal select switch 0
M SW_MODE_MIX Auto other document background detection switch 2
N SW_HOSEI Correction table correction 4
O AE COLOR TABLE Selection of color correction table 1: ON 1
in color AE 0: OFF
P BG_REMOVE_LEVEL Background removal level change (OC) 4
(OC)
Q BG_REMOVE_LEVEL Background removal level change (RSPF) 4
(RSPF)
R BG_REMOVE_LEVEL Background removal level change (DSPF front surface) 4
(DSPF SIDE1)
S BG_REMOVE_LEVEL Background removal level change (DSPF back surface) 4
(DSPF SIDE2)
T BG_REMOVE_ADJ Background judgment correction value 0
Setting 5th digit and above A TH_MODE_SCR Dot ratio threshold value 3000
B TH_SITAJI_SCR Background dot threshold value 3000
Default
Category Item
value
ORG RECOG Setting 4th digit and below A MVSTRSEL REDUCE Text pixel judgment result select register (reduction) 0
B MVSTRSEL ENLARGE Text pixel judgment result select register (enlargement) 0
C PSEL1 REDUCE Photographic paper judgment result select register (reduction) 0
D PSEL1 ENLARGE Photographic paper judgment result select register 0
(enlargement)
E PSEL2 REDUCE Photographic paper pixel judgment result select register 0
(reduction)
F PSEL2 ENLARGE Photographic paper pixel judgment result select register 0
(enlargement)
G BUSYSEL REDUCE Complication level comparison value select register (reduction) 1
H BUSYSEL ENLARGE Complication level comparison value select register 1
(enlargement)
I HTSEL REDUCE Dot judgment select (reduction) 0: AREA 1
1: ORG
J HTSEL ENLARGE Dot judgment select (enlargement) 0: AREA 1
1: ORG
K ASEL REDUCE Overall judgment priority level select register (reduction) 16
L ASEL ENLARGE Overall judgment priority level select register (enlargement) 16
M HSTSEL REDUCE Histogram division fluctuation register (reduction) 0
N HSTSEL ENLARGE Histogram division fluctuation register (enlargement) 0
O HSTSEL2 REDUCE Max. density difference histogram division fluctuation register 3
(reduction)
P HSTSEL2 ENLARGE Max. density difference histogram division fluctuation register 3
(enlargement)
Q TH_SUM_BETARGB Threshold value of total number of divisions of background high 7
label number (background)
R TH_BETA_SUB Monochrome background judgment threshold value 6
S TH_WHITE_BETA White background number judgment threshold value 27
T TH_GRAY_BETA1 Gray background judgment threshold value 1 18
U TH_GRAY_BETA2 Gray background judgment threshold value 2 25
V TH_NOISE REDUCE Dot noise threshold value (reduction) 10
W TH_NOISE ENLARGE Dot noise threshold value (enlargement) 10
X SW_SCR1 Dot ratio judgment switch 0
Y SW_SCR2 Dot judgment switch 0
Z TH_HTFE High line number threshed value 0
AA SW_TSCR Text-on-dot judgment switch 1
AB TH_SUM_PHOTO_RGB Threshold value of total number of divisions of background high 15
level number (photographic paper)
AC TH_BETA_RT TH_BETA: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio 50
AD TH_SCR_RT TH_SCR: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio 50
AE TH_SCR_CNT_RT TH_SCR_CNT: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio 50
AF TH_TSCR_ CNT_RT TH_TSCR_CNT: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio 50
AG TH_TEXT_RT TH_TEXT: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio 50
AH TH_PHOTO_RT TH_PHOTO: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio 50
AI TH_BETA_PHT_RT TH_BETA_PHT: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio 50
Setting 5th digit and above A TH_BETA ENLARGE Background pixel histogram high level number division 1000000
detection value (background) (enlargement)
B TH_SCR ENLARGE Dot high level number threshold value (enlargement) 20000
C TH_SCR_RATE Threshold value related to dot ratio 4500
D TH_SCR_CNT EL Threshold value for dot counter value (enlargement) 800000
E TH_MANSEN_RATE Ten-thousand line/print area judgment threshold value 1500
F TH_TSCR_RATE Threshold value for text-on-dot ratio 300
G TH_TSCR_CNT EL Threshold value for the text-on-dot counter value 10000
(enlargement)
H TH_TEXT ENLARGE Text judgment threshold value (enlargement) 50000
I TH_PHOTO ENLARGE Photographic paper judgment threshold value (enlargement) 50000
J TH_BETA_RATE Background ratio threshold value 3000
K TH_BETA_PHT_EL Background pixel histogram high level number division 100000
detection value (photographic paper) (enlargement)
L TH_OTHER Other judgment threshold value 7000
SCR RECOG Setting 4th digit and below A THBAVEM1 REDUCE Threshold value 1 with 13 x 7 mask average value (reduction) 170
B THBAVEM1 ENLARGE Threshold value 1 with 13 x 7 mask average value 170
(enlargement)
C THBAVEM2 REDUCE Threshold value 2 with 13 x 7 mask average value (reduction) 105
D THBAVEM2 ENLARGE Threshold value 2 with 13 x 7 mask average value 105
(enlargement)
E THBAVEM3 REDUCE Threshold value 3 with 13 x 7 mask average value (reduction) 50
F THBAVEM3 ENLARGE Threshold value 3 with 13 x 7 mask average value 50
(enlargement)
G CMSUB1 REDUCE 13 x 7 mask average value adjustment value 1 (reduction) 55
H CMSUB1 ENLARGE 13 x 7 mask average value adjustment value 1 (enlargement) 55
Default
Category Item
value
SCR RECOG Setting 4th digit and below I CMSUB2 REDUCE 13 x 7 mask average value adjustment value 2 (reduction) 0
J CMSUB2 ENLARGE 13 x 7 mask average value adjustment value 2 (enlargement) 0
K MREVSEL REDUCE High line number judgment method select (reduction) 0
L MREVSEL ENLARGE High line number judgment method select (enlargement) 0
M MSDSEL REDUCE When MREVSEL=3, output select (reduction) 0
N MSDSEL ENLARGE When MREVSEL=3, output select (enlargement) 0
O THAVEFM1 REDUCE THAVEFM1 reduction 65
P THAVEFM1 ENLARGE THAVEFM1 enlargement 96
Q THAVEFM2 REDUCE THAVEFM2 reduction 54
R THAVEFM2 ENLARGE THAVEFM2 enlargement 80
S THAVEFM3 REDUCE THAVEFM3 reduction 48
T THAVEFM3 ENLARGE THAVEFM3 enlargement 70
U THAVEM1 REDUCE THAVEM1 reduction 65
V THAVEM1 ENLARGE THAVEM1 enlargement 96
W THAVEM2 REDUCE THAVEM2 reduction 54
X THAVEM2 ENLARGE THAVEM2 enlargement 80
Y THAVEM3 REDUCE THAVEM3 reduction 48
Z THAVEM3 ENLARGE THAVEM3 enlargement 70
SEGMENT Setting 4th Text-on-dot ON/ A MESH_TXT ON HT (Auto) Text-on-dot 0: THROUGH 0
digit and OFF (auto/ B MESH_TXT/HT1 (Auto) text dot (low 1, line 1) 1: OFF
below manual mode) C MESH_TXT/HT2 (Auto) text dot (low 2, line 1) 2: ON1
D MESH_TXT/PR (Manual) Text print 3: ON2
Print document E PR_TXT ON HT (Auto) Text-on-dot 0: THROUGH 0
text detection F PR_TXT/HT1 (Auto) Text dot (low 1, line 1/2) 1: ON1
level G PR_TXT/HT2 (Auto) Text dot (low 2, line 1/2) 2: ON2
H PR_TXT/PR (Manual) Text print 3: ON3
I PR_CHECK1 Check button for consideration 1: ON 0
((Auto) text-on-dot) 0: OFF
J PR_CHECK2 Check button for consideration 1: ON 0
((Auto) Text dot (low 1, line 1/2)) 0: OFF
K PR_CHECK3 Check button for consideration 1: ON 0
((Auto) Text dot (low 2, line 1/2)) 0: OFF
L PR_CHECK4 Check button for consideration 1: ON 0
((Manual) text print) 0: OFF
M THWMAX THWMIN (Print document text detection level) 220
N THWMIN THWMIN (Print document text detection level) 153
Chromatic/ O COLOR_PRINT MODE Print system mode 0: THROUGH 0
achromatic 1: OFF
judgment level P COLOR_PHOTO MODE Photographic paper system mode 2: ON1
3: ON2
Q COLOR_CHECK1 Check button for consideration 1: ON 0
(print system mode) 0: OFF
R COLOR_CHECK2 Check button for consideration 1: ON 0
(photographic paper system mode) 0: OFF
S THILVC THILVC (Chromatic/achromatic judgment level print system 166
mode)
T THACOLL THACOLL (Chromatic/achromatic judgment level print system 21
mode)
U THACOLH THACOLH (Chromatic/achromatic judgment level print system 18
mode)
V THILVG THILVG (Chromatic/achromatic judgment level print system 118
mode)
W THAGRYL THAGRYL (Chromatic/achromatic judgment level print system 14
mode)
X THAGRYH THAGRYH (Chromatic/achromatic judgment level print system 20
mode)
Color auto Y SCREEN FILTER Filter enhancement setting 1: H (High enhancement) 2
document LEVEL 2: L (Low enhancement)
recognition filter 3: AUTO (Auto)
enhancement
setting
Specified mode Z SEG_ACT_A_OTR (Auto) Other mode 1: ON 1
area separation 0: OFF
ON/OFF setting AA SEG_ACT_M_PRT1 (Manual) Print document mode 1: ON 1
(Text) 0: OFF
AB SEG_ACT_M_PRT2 (Manual) Print document mode 1: ON 1
(Text/Print) 0: OFF
Default
Category Item
value
SEGMENT Setting 4th INDEX direct AC SEG_DS_A_TOH (Auto) Text-on-dot 0
digit and specification AD SEG_DS_M_TPP (Manual) Text print 0
below Detection AE SEG_ADJ_TPP_BK1 Text print system Black text 1 10
amount AF SEG_ADJ_TPP_BK2 Text print system Black text 2 10
adjustment AG SEG_ADJ_TPP_CL Text print system Color text 13
AH SEG_ADJ_TPP_PR Text print system Chromatic/achromatic 12
AI SEG_ADJ_TPP_MESH Text print system Dot 10
AJ SEG_ADJ_TXT_BK1 Text system Black text 1 10
AK SEG_ADJ_TXT_BK2 Text system Black text 2 10
AL SEG_ADJ_TXT_CL Text system Color text 13
AM SEG_ADJ_TXT_PR Text system Chromatic/achromatic 12
AN SEG_ADJ_TXT_MESH Text system Dot 10
AO SEG_ADJ_OTR_BK1 Other Black text 1 10
AP SEG_ADJ_OTR_BK2 Other Black text 2 10
AQ SEG_ADJ_OTR_CL Other Color text 13
AR SEG_ADJ_OTR_PR Other Chromatic/achromatic 12
AS SEG_ADJ_OTR_MESH Other Dot 10
Text-on-dot blur AT BKUCR_ACTM - 99% 0: THROUGH 0
adjustment (- 99%) 1: OFF
2: ON
AU BKUCR_ACTM 100% - 199% 0: THROUGH 0
(100% - 199%) 1: OFF
2: ON
AV BKUCR_ACTM 200% - 0: THROUGH 0
(200% -) 1: OFF
2: ON
AW BKUCR_ACTA - 99% 0: THROUGH 0
(- 99%) 1: OFF
2: ON
AX BKUCR_ACTA 100% - 199% 0: THROUGH 0
(100% - 199%) 1: OFF
2: ON
AY BKUCR_ACTA 200% - 0: THROUGH 0
(200% -) 1: OFF
2: ON
AZ WBGLV_TPP Text print, Text system 256
BA WBGLV_TP Text Photographic paper system 256
BB WBGLV_OTR Other system 256
Setting 5th Text-on-dot ON/ A MESH_CHECK1 Check button for consideration 1: ON 0
digit and OFF (auto/ ((Auto) text-on-dot) 0: OFF
above manual mode) B MESH_CHECK2 Check button for consideration 1: ON 0
((Auto) Text dot (low 1, line 1)) 0: OFF
C MESH_CHECK3 Check button for consideration 1: ON 0
((Auto) Text dot (low 2, line 1)) 0: OFF
D MESH_CHECK4 Check button for consideration 1: ON 0
((Auto) Text print) 0: OFF
E THED3A THED3A (Text-on-dot ON/OFF) 1000
F THED3B THED3B (Text-on-dot ON/OFF) 1000

46-36
A: 7 ; THCLMK_1
A: 7 B: 2 ; THCLBK_1
0 9 C: 0 ; ACSMSK_1
Function (Purpose) 2-color (red/black) copy adjustment
D: 7 ; THCLMK_2
Section
Operation/Procedure
E: 2 ; THCLBK_2
1) Select a target category for the adjustment with [RANGE] and
F: 0 ; ACSMSK_2
[COEFFICIENT] keys on the touch panel.
G: 7 ; THCLMK_3
H: 2 ; THCLBK_3 the touch panel.
I: 0 ; ACSMSK_3 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
J: 7 ; THCLMK_4 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
K: 2 ; THCLBK_4
BACK NEXT OK
Default value
Item
C M Y
RANGE (red judgment range) A PARAMETER O Red adjustment coefficient O 3
B PARAMETER M Red adjustment coefficient M 3
C PARAMETER INTENSITY Chromatic enhancement coefficient 3
COEFFICIENT (output color coefficient) A RED R output color 0 255 255
B GREEN G output color 255 0 255
C BLUE B output color 255 255 0
D CYAN C output color 255 0 0
E MAGENTA M output color 0 255 0
F YELLOW Y output color 0 0 255
Default
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-36 CLOSE Item
value
RED/BLACK COLOR COPY ADJUSTMENT
D 200 x 400 [DPI] OFF 200 x 400 half tone OFF 1
A: 3 ; PARAMETER O
E 200 x 400 [DPI] ON 200 x 400 half tone ON 1
A: 3 B: 3 ; PARAMETER M
C: 3 ; PARAMETER INTENSITY
F 400 x 400 [DPI] OFF 400 x 400 half tone OFF 1
0 6 G 400 x 400 [DPI] ON 400 x 400 half tone ON 1
H 600 x 600 [DPI] OFF 600 x 600 half tone OFF 1
I 600 x 600 [DPI] ON 600 x 600 half tone ON 1
RANGE COEFFICIENT OK IMAGE SEND SHARPNESS ADJUSTMENT

A: 1 ; 200x100 [DPI] OFF
A: 1 B: 1 ; 200x200 [DPI] OFF
46-37 0 2 C: 1 ; 200x200 [DPI] ON
Purpose Adjustment/Setting D: 1 ; 200x400 [DPI] OFF
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the black/white image gen- E: 1 ; 200x400 [DPI] ON
eration adjustment. F: 1 ; 400x400 [DPI] OFF
Section G: 1 ; 400x400 [DPI] ON
Operation/Procedure H: 1 ; 600x600 [DPI] OFF
I: 1 ; 600x600 [DPI] ON
3) Press [YES] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item Default value OK

A R/G Gray generation setting (R/G) 35
B B/G Gray generation setting (B/G) 0
46-40
B&W IMAGE CREATE ADJUSTMENT
A : 35 ; R/G Function (Purpose) Used to perform the collective adjustment
A: 35 B: 0 ; B/G
of all the FAX exposure modes.
0 99 Section
Operation/Procedure
The set value is saved and the adjustment print is outputted.
Default
Item
DEFAULT ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE value
A EXPOSURE LEVEL(ALL) Exposure data value 50
(collective)
46-39 SIMULATION NO.46-40 CLOSE

TEST
Purpose Adjustment/Setting EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : ALL)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image send sharpness A : 50 ; EXPOSURE LEVEL(ALL)
adjustment. A: 50
Section 1 99
Operation/Procedure
Default
Item
value
A 200 x 100 [DPI] OFF 200 x 100 half tone OFF 1 EXECUTE OK
B 200 x 200 [DPI] OFF 200 x 200 half tone OFF 1
C 200 x 200 [DPI] ON 200 x 200 half tone ON 1
Default
46-41 Item
value
Purpose Adjustment/Setting K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Small character/Exposure 4/ 50
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the FAX exposure adjust- Half tone
ment (normal character). L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Small character/Exposure 5/ 50
Half tone
Section
M EXECUTE AUTO Print 1: Small character/ 1
Operation/Procedure MODE mode Automatic
1) Select a target item with [n] and [p] keys on the touch panel. EXP1 2: Small character/
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. Exposure 1
EXP2 3: Small character/
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. Exposure 2
The set value is saved and the adjustment print is outputted. EXP3 4: Small character/
Exposure 3
Default EXP4 5: Small character/
Item
value Exposure 4
A AUTO Automatic 50 EXP5 6: Small character/
B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 50 Exposure 5
C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 50 AUTO 7: Small character/
D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 50 H_TONE Automatic/half tone
E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 50 EXP1 8: Small character/
F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 50 H_TONE Exposure 1/Half tone
G EXECUTE MODE Print mode 1: AUTO 1 EXP2 9: Small character/
2: EXP1 H_TONE Exposure 2/Half tone
3: EXP2 EXP3 10: Small character/
4: EXP3 H_TONE Exposure 3/Half tone
5: EXP4 EXP4 11: Small character/
H_TONE Exposure 4/Half tone
6: EXP5
EXP5 12: Small character/
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : NORMAL) TEST SIMULATION NO.46-42 CLOSE

A : 50 ; AUTO
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : FINE)
A: 50 B : 50 ; EXPOSURE1 A : 50 ; AUTO
1 99 C : 50 ; EXPOSURE2 A: 50 B : 50 ; EXPOSURE1
D : 50 ; EXPOSURE3
1 99 C : 50 ; EXPOSURE2
E : 50 ; EXPOSURE4
D : 50 ; EXPOSURE3
F : 50 ; EXPOSURE5
E : 50 ; EXPOSURE4
G: 1 ; EXECUTE MODE : AUTO
F : 50 ; EXPOSURE5
G : 50 ; AUTO H_TONE
H : 50 ; EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
EXECUTE OK I: 50 ; EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
J : 50 ; EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
K : 50 ; EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
46-42 L : 50 ; EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
Purpose Adjustment/Setting EXECUTE OK
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the FAX exposure adjust-

ment (small character).
Section 46-43
Operation/Procedure Purpose Adjustment/Setting
1) Select a target item with [n] and [p] keys on the touch panel. Function (Purpose) Used to perform the FAX exposure adjust-
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. ment (fine).
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section
The set value is saved and the adjustment print is outputted. Operation/Procedure
Default
Item
value
A AUTO Small character/Automatic 50 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
B EXPOSURE1 Small character/Exposure 1 50 The set value is saved and the adjustment print is outputted.
C EXPOSURE2 Small character/Exposure 2 50
D EXPOSURE3 Small character/Exposure 3 50 Default
Item
E EXPOSURE4 Small character/Exposure 4 50 value
F EXPOSURE5 Small character/Exposure 5 50 A AUTO Fine/Automatic 50
G AUTO H_TONE Small character/Automatic/half 50 B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 50
tone C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Small character/Exposure 1/ 50 D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 50
Half tone E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Small character/Exposure 2/ 50 F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 50
Half tone G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/Half tone 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Small character/Exposure 3/ 50 H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone 50
Half tone I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone 50
Default Default
Item Item
value value
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone 50 L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Super fine/Exposure 5/Half 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone 50 tone
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone 50 M EXECUTE AUTO Print 1: Super fine/ 1
M EXECUTE AUTO Print 1: Fine/Automatic 1 MODE mode Automatic
MODE EXP1 mode 2: Fine/Exposure 1 EXP1 2: Super fine/
EXP2 3: Fine/Exposure 2 Exposure 1
EXP3 4: Fine/Exposure 3 EXP2 3: Super fine/
Exposure 2
EXP4 5: Fine/Exposure 4
EXP3 4: Super fine/
EXP5 6: Fine/Exposure 5
Exposure 3
AUTO 7: Fine/Automatic/
EXP4 5: Super fine/
H_TONE Half tone
Exposure 4
EXP1 8: Fine/Exposure 1/
EXP5 6: Super fine/
H_TONE Half tone
Exposure 5
AUTO 7: Super fine/Auto/
H_TONE Half tone
H_TONE Half tone
EXP1 8: Super fine/
H_TONE Half tone
EXP2 9: Super fine/
H_TONE Half tone
EXP3 10: Super fine/
H_TONE Half tone
TEST
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : SUPER FINE)
A : 50 ; AUTO
A: 50 B : 50 ; EXPOSURE1
1 99 C : 50 ; EXPOSURE2 TEST SIMULATION NO.46-44 CLOSE
D : 50 ; EXPOSURE3 EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : ULTRA FINE)

A : 50 ; AUTO
E : 50 ; EXPOSURE4
F : 50 ; EXPOSURE5
1 99 C : 50 ; EXPOSURE2
D : 50 ; EXPOSURE3
E : 50 ; EXPOSURE4
I: 50 ; EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
F : 50 ; EXPOSURE5
J: 50 ; EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
L : 50 ; EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
I: 50 ; EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
EXECUTE OK
J: 50 ; EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
46-44 L : 50 ; EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
Purpose Adjustment/Setting EXECUTE OK
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the FAX exposure adjust-

ment. (Super fine)
46-45
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with [n] and [p] keys on the touch panel. Function (Purpose) Used to perform the FAX exposure adjust-
ment (600dpi).
Section
Operation/Procedure
Default 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Item
value
A AUTO Super fine/Automatic 50
B EXPOSURE1 Super fine/Exposure 1 50
4) The set value is saved and the adjustment print is outputted.
C EXPOSURE2 Super fine/Exposure 2 50
Default
D EXPOSURE3 Super fine/Exposure 3 50 Item
value
E EXPOSURE4 Super fine/Exposure 4 50
A AUTO 600 dpi/Automatic 50
F EXPOSURE5 Super fine/Exposure 5 50
B EXPOSURE1 600 dpi/Exposure 1 50
G AUTO H_TONE Super fine/Automatic/Half tone 50
C EXPOSURE2 600 dpi/Exposure 2 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Super fine/Exposure 1/Half 50
D EXPOSURE3 600 dpi/Exposure 3 50
tone
E EXPOSURE4 600 dpi/Exposure 4 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Super fine/Exposure 2/Half 50
F EXPOSURE5 600 dpi/Exposure 5 50
tone
G AUTO H_TONE 600 dpi/Automatic/Half tone 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Super fine/Exposure 3/Half 50
tone H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600 dpi/Exposure 1/Half tone 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Super fine/Exposure 4/Half 50 I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600 dpi/Exposure 2 /Half tone 50
tone J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600 dpi/Exposure 3 /Half tone 50
Default Default
Item Item
value value
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600 dpi/Exposure 4 /Half tone 50 D SCAN (G) 0: MIDDLE1 Medium compression mode 1 0
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600 dpi/Exposure 5 /Half tone 50 gray compression, Q table for
M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600 dpi/Automatic 1 decompression
MODE EXP1 mode 600 dpi/Exposure 1 1: MIDDLE2 Medium compression mode 2
EXP2 600 dpi/Exposure 2 compression, Q table for
decompression
EXP3 600 dpi/Exposure 3
2: MIDDLE3 Medium compression mode 3
compression, Q table for
decompression
AUTO 600 dpi/Auto/Half
H_TONE tone TEST SIMULATION NO.46-47 CLOSE
EXP1 600 dpi/Exposure 1/
COPY SCAN COMPRESS RATE ADJUSTMENT
H_TONE Half tone A: 0 ; COPY(C) : LOW
EXP2 600 dpi/Exposure 2/ A: 0 B: 0 ; COPY(G) : LOW

H_TONE Half tone C: 0 ; SCAN(C) : MIDDLE 1
0 2
EXP3 600 dpi/Exposure 3/ D: 0 ; SCAN(G) : MIDDLE 1
H_TONE Half tone
EXP4 600 dpi/Exposure 4 /
H_TONE Half tone
EXP5 600 dpi/Exposure 5 /
H_TONE Half tone

OK
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX: 600DPI)
A : 50 ; AUTO
1 99 C : 50 ; EXPOSURE2
D : 50 ; K EXPOSURE3
48
E : 50 ; EXPOSURE4
F : 50 ; EXPOSURE5
48-1
G : 50 ; AUTO H_TONE Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the copy magnification
ratio (main scanning, sub scanning direc-
I : 50 ; EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
tion) adjustment.
J : 50 ; EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
Section
Operation/Procedure
EXECUTE OK 1) Select a target item of the adjustment with [n] and [p] keys on
the touch panel.
46-47 3) Press [OK] key.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting The set value is saved.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the JPEG compression
Default
rate setting in copying and scanning. Item
value
Section A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scan magnification ratio 50
Operation/Procedure adjustment (CCD)
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scan magnification ratio 50
adjustment (CCD)
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. C SPF(MAIN) DSPF document front surface 50
3) Press [OK] key. magnification ratio adjustment (main scan)
4) The set value is saved. D SPF(SUB) DSPF document front surface 50
magnification ratio adjustment (sub scan)
Default E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back surface 50
Item magnification ratio adjustment (main scan)
value
A COPY (C) 0: LOW Low compression 0 F SPFB(SUB) DSPF document back surface 50
color 1: MIDDLE Medium compression magnification ratio adjustment (sub scan)
2: HIGH High compression
B COPY (G) 0: LOW Low compression 0
gray 1: MIDDLE Medium compression MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
A : 50 ; CCD(MAIN)
2: HIGH High compression
A: 50 B : 50 ; CCD(SUB)
C SCAN (C) 0: MIDDLE1 Medium compression mode 1 0
C : 50 ; SPF(MAIN)
color compression, Q table for 1 99
decompression D : 50 ; SPF(SUB)
1: MIDDLE2 Medium compression mode 2 E : 50 ; SPFB(MAIN)
compression, Q table for F : 50 ; SPFB(SUB)
decompression
2: MIDDLE3 Medium compression mode 3
compression, Q table for
decompression
OK
Purpose Adjustment MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT

A: 50 ; MR(HI)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the copy magnification
A: 50 B: 50 ; MR(MID)
ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction).
When the sub scanning direction image
C: 50 ; MR(LO)
1 99
magnification ratio is adjusted with SIM 48- D : 50 ; DSPF(HI)
1 and a satisfactory copy image is not E: 50 ; DSPF(MID)
obtained when copying by specifying a dif- F: 50 ; DSPF(LO)
ferent copy magnification ratio, perform this

adjustment.
Section Scanner section
Operation/Procedure
OK
the touch panel.
3) Press [OK] key. 48-6
The set value is saved. Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the rotation speed adjust-
Default
Item ment of each motor.
value
A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 50 Section
B MR (MID) Scanner motor (Reference speed) 50 Operation/Procedure
C MR (LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 50 1) Select a target mode to be set with [COLOR], [MONO], and
D DSPF (HI) DSPF motor (High speed) 50 [HEAVY] keys on the touch p panel.
E DSPF (MID) DSPF motor (Reference speed) 50
F DSPF (LO) DSPF motor (Low speed) 50
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved.
Item Default value

Color Monochrome Heavy paper
A A A RRM Resist motor correction value Color COLOR 50
Monochrome MONO 50
Heavy paper HEAVY 51
B B B BLTM Belt motor correction value Color COLOR 54
Monochrome MONO 54
C C C DMBK Drum K motor correction value Color COLOR 51
Monochrome MONO 51
D D DMCMY Drum CL motor correction value Color COLOR 51
E D E DVMK Developing K motor correction value Color COLOR 50
Monochrome MONO 50
F E F DVMC Developing CL motor correction value Color COLOR 50
Monochrome MONO 50
G F G FUM Fusing motor correction value Color COLOR 35
Monochrome MONO 35
H - - LCCM LCC motor correction value COLOR 50
I G H PFM PS front motor correction value Color COLOR 55
Monochrome MONO 55
J - - CPFM Paper feed motor correction value COLOR 50
K - - POM Paper exit motor correction value COLOR 50
L H I FUSER SETTING Fusing speed select timing Color COLOR 50
Monochrome MONO 60
<Error display for abnormal completion>
Display Content
VELOCITY ADJUSTMENT
A : 50 ; RRM
CONF Configuration data
A: 50 B : 54 ; BLTM ICUM ICU main
C : 51 ; DMBK
ICUBM ICU boot section main
1 99
D : 51 ; DMCMY
ICUBS ICU boot section sub
LANG Language data program
E : 50 ; DVMK
GRAPH Graphic data for L-LCD
F : 50 ; DVMC
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
G : 35 ; FUM PCUB PCU BOOT
H : 50 ; LCCM PCUM PCU main
LCC4B LCC(A4) BOOT
I : 55 ; PFM
LCC4M LCC (A4) main
J : 50 ; CPFM
FINB Inner finisher BOOT
K : 50 ; POM FINM Inner finisher main
SDLB Saddle unit boot section
SDLM Saddle unit main section
COLOR MONO HEAVY OK
FIN4B 4K finisher BOOT
FIN4M 4K finisher main
LCC3B LCC (A3) BOOT
49 LCC3M LCC (A3) main
SCUB SCU BOOT
SCUM SCU main
49-1 DSPFB DSPF BOOT
Purpose DSPFM DSPF main
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update. FAXB FAX1 BOOT
FAXM FAX1 main
Section
FXOPB FAX2 BOOT
Operation/Procedure FXOPM FAX2 main
1) Save the firmware to a USB memory. ESCP ESC/P font
2) Insert the USB memory to the machine. PDL PDL font
ANIME Animation data
3) Select the target firmware to be updated with the touch panel.
IMGDT Image ASIC data
4) Select the target model for the firmware update.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. TEST SIMULATION NO.49-01 CLOSE
6) Press [YES] key. FIRMWARE UPDATE/usbbd00
The selected firmware is updated. <DIR> FOLDER1 FILE1

When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is FILE2 <DIR> FOLDER2
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
CONFIG Configuration data

ICU (MAIN) ICU main
ICU (BOOTM) ICU boot section main
ICU (BOOTS) ICU boot section sub
LANGUAGE Language data program
GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD .. 1/1
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
PCU (BOOT) PCU BOOT
PCU (MAIN) PCU main
A4LCC (BOOT) LCC (A4) BOOT 49-3
A4LCC (MAIN) LCC (A4) main Purpose
FIN (BOOT) Inner finisher BOOT Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual in the
FIN (MAIN) Inner finisher main HDD.
SADDLE (BOOT) Saddle unit boot section
SADDLE (MAIN) Saddle unit main section
Section
4KFIN (BOOT) 4K finisher BOOT Operation/Procedure
4KFIN (MAIN) 4K finisher main 1) Save the operation manual data to a USB memory.
A3LCC (BOOT) LCC(A3) BOOT 2) Insert the USB memory to the machine.
A3LCC (MAIN) LCC (A3) main
3) Select the update target data of the operation manual with the
SCU (BOOT) SCU BOOT
touch panel.
SCU(MAIN) SCU main
DSPF (BOOT) DSPF BOOT
DSPF (MAIN) DSPF main 5) Press [YES] key.
FAX (BOOT) FAX1 BOOT The selected data of the operation manual is updated.
FAX (MAIN) FAX1 main When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
FAX OPTION (BOOT) FAX2 BOOT displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
FAX OPTION (MAIN) FAX2 main
ESCP_FONT ESC/P font
PDL_FONT PDL font
ANIMATION Animation data
IMAGE_DATA Image ASIC data
COLOR PROFILE Color profile
E-MANUAL UPDATE/usbbd00 Purpose Adjustment
<DIR> FOLDER1 <DIR> FOLDER2 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position on
<DIR> FOLDER3 <DIR> MANUAL1 print paper and the void area (image loss)
in the copy mode. (The similar adjustment
can be performed also with SIM 50-1. This
simulation. However, is simpler.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Be sure to perform the sub scanning direction magnification ratio
(SIM 48-1) in advance.
.. 1/1 1) Set L1 of item A and L2 of item B to 0.
3) Place a ruler on the left edge of the document table, and make
a black and white copy at the magnification ratio of 400%.
50 4) Measure the distance L1 and L2 in the copied image in the unit
of 0.1mm. (Refer to the figure below.) Multiple the measure
50-1 values (in the unit of 0.1mm) with 10, and input the products.
Purpose Adjustment Be sure to input both of L1 and L2 as a set.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position on L1: Distance from the copy image lead edge to the scale of
print paper and the void area (image loss) 10mm.
in the copy mode. (The similar adjustment L2: Distance from the paper lead edge to the copy image lead
can be performed also with SIM 50-5 and edge
SIM 50-2 (simple method). (Document
L1
table mode))
Section
Paper lead
Operation/Procedure edge
the touch panel.
Default
Item
value
A Lead edge RRCA Document lead edge 50
L2
adjustment reference position (OC) 400% enlargement copy
B RRCB-CS12 Resist Standard 50
C RRCB-CS34 motor ON cassette 50 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
D RRCB-LCC timing LCC 50 6) Make a copy at the magnification ratio of 100%, and adjust the
E RRCB-MFT adjustment Manual feed 50 rear edge void.
F RRCB-ADU ADU 50
G Image loss LEAD Lead edge image loss 30 Default
Item
amount set amount setting value
H value SIDE Side image loss amount 20 A Actual L1 Distance from the image
setting measurement lead edge to 10mm (platen
value 400%, 0.1mm unit)
I Void DENA Print lead edge adjustment 30
amount B L2 Distance from the paper
J DENB Sub scanning direction print 20
setting lead edge to the image
range adjustment
lead edge (0.1mm unit)
K FRONT/ FRONT/ REAR void amount 20
C Image loss LEAD Lead edge image loss 30
REAR adjustment
D amount set value SIDE Side image loss 20
E Void amount DENA Print lead edge adjustment 30
TEST
F setting DENB Sub scanning direction 20
print range adjustment
A : 50 ; RRCA
G FRONT/ FRONT/ REAR void 20
A: 50 B : 50 ; RRCB-CS12
REAR amount adjustment
0 99 C : 50 ; RRCB-CS34
D : 50 ; RRCB-LCC TEST SIMULATION NO.50-02 CLOSE
E : 50 ; RRCB-MFT LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE(CALC)

A : 60 ; L1
F : 50 ; RRCB-ADU
A: 60 B: 0 ; L2
G : 30 ; LEAD
C : 30 ; LEAD
0 999
H : 20 ; SIDE D : 20 ; SIDE
I: 30 ; DENA E : 30 ; DENA
J: 20 ; DENB F : 20 ; DENB
G : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
K : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
OK
EXECUTE
50-5 50-6
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Printer print lead edge adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the DSPF document lead
Section edge, and to adjust the copy image position
and the void area (image loss) on the print
Operation/Procedure
paper in the copy mode. (The similar
1) Select a target item of the adjustment with [n] and [p] keys on adjustment can be performed with SIM 50-
the touch panel. 7 (simple method).) (DSPF mode)
Section DSPF
Operation/Procedure
4) Used to measure the void area size on the printed adjustment the touch panel.
pattern in the right and the left frame directions, and to check 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
to confirm that the sizes are as shown below.
If DEN-C=4.0 r 2.0mm or DEN-B=4.0 r 2.0mm, there is no
need to adjust. If not, go to the procedure 5. Default
Item
5) Change the adjustment value of the adjustment item A (DEN- value
C) and the adjustment item B (DEN-B). A SIDE 1 Front surface document 50
scan start position
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A (DEN-C)
adjustment (CCD)
is decreased by 1, the print star position in the sub scanning
B SIDE 2 Back surface document 50
direction is shifted to the paper lead edge by 0.1mm.
scan start position
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B (DEN-B) adjustment (CCD)
is decreased by 1, the print range in the paper transport direc- C Image loss LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge 20
tion is increased toward the rear edge side by 0.1mm. amount (SIDE1) image loss amount setting
6) Repeat procedures 1 - 5 until the condition of procedure 4 is D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side image 20
SIDE 1 (SIDE1) loss amount setting
satisfied.
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge 30
Default (SIDE1) image loss amount setting
Item F Image loss LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge 30
value
A DEN-C Printer print lead edge adjustment 30 amount (SIDE2) image loss amount setting
B DEN-B Sub scanning direction print range 20 G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side image 20
adjustment (paper rear edge void SIDE 2 (SIDE2) loss amount setting
amount) H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge 20
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/ REAR void amount adjustment 20 (SIDE2) image loss amount setting
D MULTI Print quantity 1
COUNT TEST SIMULATION NO.50-06 CLOSE
E PAPER MFT 1: Manual feed 2 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE(SPF)

CS1 2: Cassette 1 A : 50 ; SIDE1
CS2 3: Cassette 2 A: 50 B : 50 ; SIDE2
CS3 4: Cassette 3 1 99 C : 20 ; LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)

CS4 5: Cassette 4
LCC 6: LCC
F DUPLEX Duplex print 0: Select 1 E : 30 ; TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1)
select 1: Not selected F : 30 ; LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)
A : 30 ; DEN-C
A: 30 B : 20 ; DEN-B
C : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
1 99
D: 1 ; MULTI COUNT
E: 2 ; PAPER: CS1 OK
F: 1 ; DUPLEX: NO
50-7
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the DSPF document lead
EXECUTE OK
edge, and to adjust the copy image position
and the void area (image loss) on the print
paper in the copy mode. (The similar
adjustment can be performed with SIM 50-
7 (simple method).) (DSPF mode)
Section DSPF
Operation/Procedure
Be sure to perform the sub scanning direction magnification ratio
(SIM 48-1) in advance.
the touch panel.
2) Set item A (L4) and item B (L5) to 0.
Default
3) Set the magnification ratio to 200%, and press [COLOR] and Item
value
[BW] key to make a print. A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio BK 100
4) Measure the printed image, and input the distance a (DSPF) to B MFT Print off-center adjustment value 50
L4 and L5 in the unit of 0.1mm. (manual feed)
L4: Distance a (DSPF surface: 200%) (Unit: 0.1mm) C CS1 Print off-center adjustment value 50
(Cassette 1)
L5: Distance a (DSPF back surface: 200%) (Unit: 0.1mm)
D CS2 Print off-center adjustment value 50
[DSPF front surface] [DSPF back surface] (Cassette 2)
E CS3 Print off-center adjustment value 50
(Cassette 3)
F CS4 Print off-center adjustment value 50
(Cassette 4)
G LCC Print off-center adjustment value (LCC) 50
H ADU Print off-center adjustment value 50
(ADU)
I MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1
J PAPER MFT Cassette 1: Manual feed 2
CS1 selection 2: Cassette 1
CS2 3: Cassette 2
CS3 4: Cassette 3
CS4 5: Cassette 4
Distance a LCC 6: LCC
Distance a
K DUPLEX YES Duplex print 0: Select 1
NO select 1: Not selected
Default
Item PAPER CENTER OFFSET SETUP
value A : 100 ; BK-MAG
A L4 Distance of up to 10mm from - A: 100 B : 50 ; MFT

the front surface image lead C : 50 ; CS1
60 140
edge (200%, 0.1mm unit)
D : 50 ; CS2
B L5 Distance of up to 10mm from -
the back surface image lead E : 50 ; CS3
edge (200%, 0.1mm unit) F : 50 ; CS4
C LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1) Image loss amount setting 20

G : 50 ; LCC
D FRONT_REAR (SIDE1) SIDE 1 20
H : 50 ; ADU
E TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1) 30
F LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2) Image loss amount setting 30 I: 1 ; MULTICOUNT
G FRONT_REAR (SIDE2) SIDE 2 20 J: 2 ; PAPER : CS1
H TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE2) 20 K: 1 ; DUPLEX : NO

EXECUTE OK
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT (SPF CALC.).
A: 0 ; L4
A: 0 B: 0 ; L5
50-12
0 999 C : 20 ; LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)
Purpose Adjustment
E : 30 ; TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1) Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center
F : 30 ; LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)
position adjustment. (The adjustment is
made separately for each scan mode.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.
EXECUTE
50-10
Default
Purpose Adjustment Item
value
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print image off-center A OC OC document off-center adjustment 50
position. (Adjustment is made separately B SPF (SIDE1) DSPF front surface document off-center 50
for each paper feed section.) adjustment
C SPF (SIDE2) DSPF back surface document off-center 50
Section adjustment
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.
ORIGINAL CENTER OFFSET SETUP Purpose Adjustment
A : 50 ; OC
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the sub scanning direction
A: 50 B : 50 ; SPF(SIDE1)
C : 50 ; SPF(SIDE2)
manual registration adjustment.
1 99
Section
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.
OK Default
Item
value
A CYAN Registration adjustment value sub 100
scanning direction CYAN
50-20 B MAGENTA Registration adjustment value sub 100
Purpose Adjustment scanning direction MAGENTA
C YELLOW Registration adjustment value sub 100
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the main scanning direc-
scanning direction YELLOW
tion manual registration adjustment.
D MULTICOUNT Print quantity 1
Section E PAPER MFT Cassette Manual feed 2
Operation/Procedure CS1 selection Cassette 1
1) Select a target item of the adjustment with [n] and [p] keys on CS2 Cassette 2
the touch panel. CS3 Cassette 3
CS4 Cassette 4
LCC LCC
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.) F DUPLEX YES Duplex print Select 1
NO select Not select
Default
Item
value
A CYAN (FRONT) Registration adjustment value main 100
scanning direction F side (Cyan) REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : SCANNING DIRECTION
A : 100 ; CYAN
B CYAN (REAR) Registration adjustment value main 100
scanning direction R side (Cyan) A: 100 B : 100 ; MAGENTA
C MAGENTA Registration adjustment value main 100 1 199 C : 100 ; YELLOW
(FRONT) scanning direction F side (Magenta) D: 1 ; MULTICOUNT
D MAGENTA (REAR) Registration adjustment value main 100 E: 2 ; PAPER : CS1

scanning direction R side Magenta)
F: 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
E YELLOW (FRONT) Registration adjustment value main 100
scanning direction F side (Yellow)
F YELLOW (REAR) Registration adjustment value main 100
scanning direction R side (Yellow)
G MULTICOUNT Print quantity 1
H PAPER MFT Cassette 1: Manual feed 4 EXECUTE OK
CS2 3: Cassette 2
CS3 4: Cassette 3
CS4 5: Cassette 4 50-22
LCC 6: LCC Purpose Adjustment
I DUPLEX YES Duplex print 0: Select 1 Function (Purpose) Used to perform the main/sub scanning
NO select 1: Not selected auto registration adjustment.

Section
TEST
Operation/Procedure
REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : FRONT-REAR DIRECTION
A : 100 ; CYAN(FRONT) 1) Select a target item for the adjustment with [REGIST], [DRUM
A: 100 B : 100 ; CYAN(REAR) POS], and [ALL] keys on the touch panel.
1 199 C : 100 ; MAGENTA(FRONT) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
D : 100 ; MAGENTA(REAR) All the drum motors are operated to start the adjustment.
E : 100 ; YELLOW(FRONT)
F : 100 ; YELLOW(REAR)
G: 1 ; MULTICOUNT
H: 4 ; PAPER : CS3
I: 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE OK
Default
Item
value
ALL (Auto REGIST (Auto MAIN F C Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Cyan F side) 100
registration registration M Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Magenta F side) 100
adjustment, adjustment Y Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Yellow F side) 100
auto phase execution) MAIN R C Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Cyan R side) 100
adjustment)
M Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Magenta R side) 100
Y Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Yellow R side) 100
SUB C Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction (Cyan drum o Black drum) 100
M Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction (Magenta drum o Cyan drum) 100
Y Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction (Yellow drum o Magenta drum) 100
DRUM POS (Auto START K Pulse modulation start timing 0: 0q 0
phase adjustment POINT Changes up to 355q in the increment of 5q. 1: 5q
execution) 0 - 71 :
:
70: 350q
71: 355q
CL Pulse modulation start timing 0: 0q 0
Changes up to 355q in the increment of 5q. 1: 5q
0 - 71 :
:
70: 350q
71: 355q
AMP K Pulse modulation deflection amount 0
CL Pulse modulation deflection amount (C/M/Y average value of linearity deflection 0
amount)
PHASE C Phase adjustment C o Y 0: 0q 0
0 - 71 :
:
70: 350q
71: 355q
M Phase adjustment M o Y 0: 0q 0
0 - 71 :
:
70: 350q
71: 355q
AMP C Linearity deflection amount 0
M Linearity deflection amount 0
Y Linearity deflection amount 0
<Error display for abnormal completion> Error
Error display Error content
Error code
Error display Error content Sub 22 SUB CYAN The calculation result value is
code
Compulsory SUSPENDED Door open during operation scanning FRONT 22 not in the specified allowable
end error adjustment range.
SUSPENDED CA button push during
error 23 SUB CYAN The amount of change in the
operation
FRONT 23 calculation result value is not
Unconfirmed operation during
in the specified allowable
operation (power OFF)
range.
Basic error 1 TONNER BK or all color toner EMPTY
25 SUB CYAN The pitch data number is not
EMPTY 01 detection
REAR 25 the specified number.
2 BEFORE Other conditions
26 SUB CYAN The pitch data is not in the
BEHAVIOR 02
REAR 26 specified allowable range.
4 SENSOR After 3-time retries of F or R,
27 SUB CYAN The calculation result value is
CALIBRATION the target is not reached.
REAR 27 not in the specified allowable
04
range.
5 TIME OVER 05 Data is not acquired for 90sec
28 SUB CYAN The amount of change in the
from the latest data
REAR 28 calculation result value is not
acquisition.
in the specified allowable
7 PROCESS Process control error detection
range.
CONTROL 07
30 SUB MAGENTA The pitch data number is not
Sub 10 SUB BLACK The pitch data number is not
FRONT 30 the specified number.
scanning FRONT 10 the specified number.
31 SUB MAGENTA The pitch data is not in the
adjustment 11 SUB BLACK The pitch data is not in the
FRONT 31 specified allowable range.
error FRONT 11 specified allowable range.
32 SUB MAGENTA The calculation result value is
15 SUB BLACK The pitch data number is not in
FRONT 32 not in the specified allowable
REAR 15 the specified allowable range.
range.
16 SUB BLACK The pitch data is not in the
33 SUB MAGENTA The amount of change in the
REAR 16 specified allowable range.
FRONT 33 calculation result value is not
20 SUB CYAN The pitch data number is not in the specified allowable
FRONT 20 the specified number. range.
21 SUB CYAN The pitch data is not in the
FRONT 21 specified allowable range.
Error Error
Error display Error content Error display Error content
code code
Sub 35 SUB MAGENTA The pitch data number is not Main 75 MAIN MAGENTA The pitch data number is not
scanning REAR 35 the specified number. scanning REAR 75 the specified number.
adjustment 36 SUB MAGENTA The pitch data is not in the adjustment 76 MAIN MAGENTA The pitch data is not in the
error REAR 36 specified allowable range. error REAR 76 specified allowable range.
37 SUB MAGENTA The calculation result value is 77 MAIN MAGENTA The calculation result value is
REAR 37 not in the specified allowable REAR 77 not in the specified allowable
range. range.
38 SUB MAGENTA The amount of change in the 78 MAIN MAGENTA The amount of change in the
REAR 38 calculation result value is not REAR 78 calculation result value is not
in the specified allowable in the specified allowable
range. range.
40 SUB YELLOW The pitch data number is not 80 MAIN YELLOW The pitch data number is not
FRONT 40 the specified number. FRONT 80 the specified number.
41 SUB YELLOW The pitch data is not in the 81 MAIN YELLOW The pitch data is not in the
FRONT 41 specified allowable range. FRONT 81 specified allowable range.
42 SUB YELLOW The calculation result value is 82 MAIN YELLOW The calculation result value is
FRONT 42 not in the specified allowable FRONT 82 not in the specified allowable
range. range.
43 SUB YELLOW The amount of change in the 83 MAIN YELLOW The amount of change in the
FRONT 43 calculation result value is not FRONT 83 calculation result value is not
in the specified allowable in the specified allowable
range. range.
45 SUB YELLOW The pitch data number is not 85 MAIN YELLOW The pitch data number is not
REAR 45 the specified number. REAR 85 the specified number.
46 SUB YELLOW The pitch data is not in the 86 MAIN YELLOW The pitch data is not in the
REAR 46 specified allowable range. REAR 86 specified allowable range.
47 SUB YELLOW The calculation result value is 87 MAIN YELLOW The calculation result value is
REAR 47 not in the specified allowable REAR 87 not in the specified allowable
range. range.
Main 48 SUB YELLOW The amount of change in the 88 MAIN YELLOW The amount of change in the
scanning REAR 48 calculation result value is not REAR 88 calculation result value is not
adjustment in the specified allowable in the specified allowable
error range. range.
50 MAIN BLACK The pitch data number is not 91 RIB BLACK 91 The rib cannot be detected
FRONT 50 the specified number. either in the phase pattern or
51 MAIN BLACK The pitch data is not in the in the sub pattern.
FRONT 51 specified allowable range. 92 RIB CYAN 92 The rib cannot be detected
55 MAIN BLACK The pitch data number is not in either in the phase pattern or
REAR 55 the specified allowable range. in the sub pattern.
56 MAIN BLACK The pitch data is not in the 93 RIB MAGENTA The rib cannot be detected
REAR 56 specified allowable range. 93 either in the phase pattern or
60 MAIN CYAN The pitch data number is not in the sub pattern.
FRONT 60 the specified number. 94 RIB YELLOW 94 The rib cannot be detected
61 MAIN CYAN The pitch data is not in the either in the phase pattern or
FRONT 61 specified allowable range. in the sub pattern.
62 MAIN CYAN The calculation result value is Other errors 99 OTHER 99 Other errors
FRONT 62 not in the specified allowable Phase 110 PHASE BLACK Phase number error
range. adjustment FRONT 110
63 MAIN CYAN The amount of change in the error 111 PHASE BLACK Phase pitch error
FRONT 63 calculation result value is not FRONT 111
in the specified allowable 115 PHASE BLACK Phase number error
range. REAR 115
65 MAIN CYAN The pitch data number is not 116 PHASE BLACK Phase pitch error
REAR 65 the specified number. REAR 116
66 MAIN CYAN The pitch data is not in the 120 PHASE CYAN Phase number error
REAR 66 specified allowable range. FRONT 120
67 MAIN CYAN The calculation result value is 121 PHASE CYAN Phase pitch error
REAR 67 not in the specified allowable FRONT 121
range. 125 PHASE CYAN Phase number error
68 MAIN CYAN The amount of change in the REAR 125
REAR 68 calculation result value is not 126 PHASE CYAN Phase pitch error
in the specified allowable REAR 126
range. 130 PHASE Phase number error
70 MAIN MAGENTA The pitch data number is not MAGENTA
FRONT 70 the specified number. FRONT 130
71 MAIN MAGENTA The pitch data is not in the 131 PHASE Phase pitch error
FRONT 71 specified allowable range. MAGENTA
72 MAIN MAGENTA The calculation result value is FRONT131
FRONT 72 not in the specified allowable 135 PHASE Phase number error
range. MAGENTA
73 MAIN MAGENTA The amount of change in the REAR 135
FRONT 73 calculation result value is not 136 PHASE Phase pitch error
in the specified allowable MAGENTA
range. REAR 136
Error 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Error display Error content
code
Phase 140 PHASE YELLOW Phase number error Default
Item
adjustment FRONT 140 value
error 141 PHASE YELLOW Phase pitch error FAX A Image loss LEAD_ OC lead edge 30
FRONT 141 mode amount EDGE (OC) image loss (3mm)
setting OC amount
145 PHASE YELLOW Phase number error
REAR 145 B FRONT_ OC side image 20
REAR (OC) loss amount (2mm)
146 PHASE YELLOW Phase pitch error
REAR 146 C TRAIL_EDGE OC rear edge 20
(OC) image loss (2mm)
SIMULATION NO.50-22 CLOSE amount
TEST
D Image loss LEAD_EDGE Front surface 20
amount (SPF_SIDE1) lead edge image (2mm)
MAIN F MAIN R SUB setting loss amount
C 105.0(+0.2) 110.0(-0.1) 103.0(+0.4) E SPF FRONT_ Front surface 20
M 100.0(+0.0) 99.0(-0.2) 99.0(+0.2) SIDE1 REAR side image loss (2mm)
Y 98.0(+0.3) 98.0(+0.1) 105(+0.0) (SPF_SIDE1) amount
F TRAIL_EDGE Front surface 30
START POINT AMP (SPF_SIDE1) rear edge image (3mm)
K 1(2) 0(1) loss amount
CL 1(2) 0(1) G Image loss LEAD_EDGE Back surface 30
amount (SPF_SIDE2) lead edge image (3mm)
setting loss amount
PHASE AMP
H SPF FRONT_ Back surface 20
C 1(2) 0.0(0.1)
SIDE2 REAR side image loss (2mm)
M 1(2) 0.0(0.1)
(SPF_SIDE2) amount
Y 0.0(0.1)
I TRAIL_EDGE Back surface 20
(SPF_SIDE2) rear edge image (2mm)
REGIST DRUM POS ALL EXECUTE 1/1 loss amount
Scanner A Image loss LEAD_EDGE OC lead edge 0
mode amount (OC) image loss
setting OC amount
50-24
B FRONT_ OC side image 0
Purpose (Do not use in the market.) REAR (OC) loss amount
Function (Purpose) Used to display the auto registration adjust- C TRAIL_EDGE OC rear edge 0
ment result (SIM 50-22). (OC) image loss
amount
Section D Image loss LEAD_EDGE Front surface 0
Operation/Procedure amount (SPF_SIDE1) lead edge image
setting loss amount
E SPF FRONT_ Front surface 0
TEST SIMULATION NO. 50-24 CLOSE SIDE1 REAR side image loss
AUTO REGISTRATION DATA DISPLAY (SPF_SIDE1) amount
MAIN F MAIN R SUB F TRAIL_EDGE Front surface 0
C 000.0 ( ) 000.0 ( ) 000.0 ( ) (SPF_SIDE1) rear edge image
M 000.0 ( ) 000.0 ( ) 000.0 ( )
loss amount
Y 000.0 ( ) 000.0 ( ) 000.0 ( )
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE Back surface 0
amount (SPF_SIDE2) lead edge image
START POINT AMP
setting loss amount
K 0() 00.0 ( )
H SPF FRONT_ Back surface 0
CL 0() 00.0 ( ) SIDE2 REAR side image loss
PHASE AMP (SPF_SIDE2) amount
C 00 ( ) 00.0 ( ) I TRAIL_EDGE Back surface 0
M 00 ( ) 00.0 ( )
(SPF_SIDE2) rear edge image
loss amount
Y 00.0 ( )
SCANNER/FAX-SEND ALL EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE

K C M Y BACK NEXT 1/1 A : 30 ; LEAD_EDGE(OC)
A: 30 B : 20 ; FRONT_REAR(OC)
C : 20 ; TRAIL_EDGE(OC)
0 100
50-27 D : 20 ; LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1)
Purpose Adjustment E : 20 ; FRONT_REAR(SPF_SIDE1)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment F: 30 ; TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1)
of the scanned image in the FAX or scan- G : 30 ; LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2)
ner mode H : 20 ; FRONT_REAR(SPF_SIDE2)
Section I: 20 ; TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode for the adjustment with [FAX] and
[SCANNER] key on the touch panel.
2) Select a target item of the adjustment with [n] and [p] keys on FAX SCANNER OK
the touch panel.
(4) Print lead edge adjustment, all trays print off-center (each
50-28
paper feed tray, duplex unit) adjustment
Purpose Adjustment 1) Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] on the touch panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the OC adjustment, the BK 2) Press the key of the adjustment target item and select the tray
main scanning direction magnification for self printing of the print position adjustment pattern.
ration correction, the DSPF adjustment,
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start scanning of the print position
and the print position adjustment.
adjustment pattern.
Section 4) Set the print position adjustment pattern on the OC.
Operation/Procedure 5) Press [EXECUTE] key to start scanning of the print position
<Adjustment item> adjustment pattern.
6) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment value is saved.
Adjustment item General
(1) OC ADJ OC document lead edge, off-center, sub (5) Adjustment result content display
scanning direction magnification ratio (6) Data used in execution of the adjustment are displayed.
adjustment
(2) BK-MAG ADJ BK main scanning direction magnification TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE
ration adjustment AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE

(3) SPF ADJ DSPF (front/back) document lead edge, off-
OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ
center, sub scanning direction magnification
ration adjustment
RESULT DATA
(4) SETUP/PRINT ADJ Print lead edge adjustment, all trays print off-
center (each paper feed tray, duplex unit)
adjustment
(5) RESULT Adjustment result content display
(6) DATA Data used in execution of the adjustment are
displayed.
(1) OC document lead edge, off-center, sub scanning direc- 1/1
tion magnification ratio adjustment
1) Select [OC ADL] on the touch panel.
2) Select the tray for the OC adjustment pattern self print.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self printing of the OC adjust-
51
ment pattern.
4) Set the OC adjustment pattern on the OC by the corner refer- 51-1
ence, and cover the OC adjustment pattern with the black Purpose Adjustment/Setting
background chart.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the transfer voltage and
* Set the adjustment pattern in landscape (A4). Check to con- the separation bias voltage ON/OF timing
firm that there is no clearance between the adjustment pat- adjustment.
tern and the document guide.
Section
* Black chart kind and size
Operation/Procedure
Prepare in 310 x 470, equivalent to cutting sheet No. 791
(black).
the touch panel.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key to start scanning the OC adjustment
pattern.
(2) BK main scanning direction magnification ration adjust- Default
ment Item
value
1) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] on the touch panel. A TC2 ON TIMING Secondary transfer voltage ON timing 40
setting
2) Select the tray for printing the BK magnification ratio adjust-
B TC2 OFF TIMING Secondary transfer voltage OFF 60
ment pattern.
timing setting
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self printing of the BK magnifi-
cation ratio adjustment pattern. TEST SIMULATION NO.51-01 CLOSE
4) Set the BK magnification ratio adjustment pattern on the OC. TRANSCRIPTION TIMING SETUP
5) Press [EXECUTE] key to start scanning of the BK magnifica- A : 40 ; TC2 ON TIMING
tion ratio adjustment pattern. A: 40 B : 50 ; TC2 OFF TIMING
6) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment value is saved. 1 99
(3) DSPF (front/back) document lead edge, off-center, sub

scanning direction magnification ration adjustment
1) Select [SPF ADJ] on the touch panel.
2) Press the key of the adjustment target item and select the tray
for self printing of the DSPF adjustment pattern.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self printing of the DSPF
adjustment pattern. OK
4) Set the DSPF adjustment pattern on the DSPF.

5) Press [EXECUTE] key to start scanning of the DSPF adjust-
ment pattern.
Item content (mode, Default
51-2 Item
document, paper feed speed) value
Purpose Adjustment/Setting ENGIN A TRAY1 (S) DSPF warp adjustment value 1 40
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the paper contact pressure (random, thin paper, HIGH)
adjustment for each section resist roller B TRAY2 (S) DSPF warp adjustment value 2 40
(main unit, each paper feed, duplex paper (random, thin paper, HIGH)
fed, DSPF paper feed). (When there is a C TRAY3 PLAIN Main unit tray 3, warp 40
considerable fluctuation in the print image PAPER (S) adjustment value (plain paper,
small size)
position on print paper or a paper jam
D TRAY3 PLAIN Main unit tray 3, warp 40
occurs, this adjustment is required.)
PAPER (L) adjustment value (plain paper,
Section large size)
Operation/Procedure E TRAY3 Main unit tray 3, warp 25
HEAVY adjustment value (heavy paper,
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [REGI1] and [REGI2]
PAPER (S) small size)
keys on the touch panel.
F TRAY3 Main unit tray 3, warp 25
2) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys. HEAVY adjustment value (heavy paper,
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. PAPER (L) large size)
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) G TRAY4 PLAIN Main unit tray 4, warp 40
PAPER (S) adjustment value (plain paper,
small size)
Item content (mode, Default
Item H TRAY4 PLAIN Main unit tray 4, warp 40
document, paper feed speed) value
PAPER (L) adjustment value (plain paper,
REGI1 A NORMAL_ DSPF warp adjustment value 1 50
large size)
PLAIN_HIGH (normal, plain paper, HIGH)
I TRAY4 Main unit tray 4, warp 25
B NORMAL_ DSPF warp adjustment value 1 50
PLAIN_MID (normal, plain paper, MID)
PAPER (S) small size)
C NORMAL_ DSPF warp adjustment value 1 50
J TRAY4 Main unit tray 4, warp 25
PLAIN_LOW (normal, plain paper, LOW)
D NORMAL_ DSPF warp adjustment value 1 50
PAPER (L) large size)
THIN_HIGH (normal, thin paper, HIGH)
K MANUAL Manual feed tray, warp 40
E NORMAL_ DSPF warp adjustment value 1 50
PLAIN PAPER adjustment value (plain paper,
THIN_MID (normal, thin paper, MID)
(S) small size)
F NORMAL_ DSPF warp adjustment value 1 50
L MANUAL Manual feed tray, warp 40
THIN_LOW (normal, thin paper, LOW)
PLAIN PAPER adjustment value (plain paper,
G RANDOM_ DSPF warp adjustment value 1 50 (L) large size)
PLAIN_HIGH (random, plain paper, HIGH)
M MANUAL Manual feed tray, warp 25
H RANDOM_ DSPF warp adjustment value 1 50 HEAVY adjustment value (heavy paper,
PLAIN_MID (random, plain paper, MID) PAPER (S) small size)
I RANDOM_ DSPF warp adjustment value 1 50 N MANUAL Manual feed tray, warp 25
PLAIN_LOW (random, plain paper, LOW) HEAVY adjustment value (heavy paper,
J RANDOM_ DSPF warp adjustment value 1 50 PAPER (L) large size)
THIN_HIGH (random, thin paper, HIGH) O MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray, warp 25
K RANDOM_ DSPF warp adjustment value 1 50 adjustment value (OHP)
THIN_MID (random, thin paper, MID) P MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray, warp 40
L RANDOM_ DSPF warp adjustment value 1 50 adjustment value (envelope)
THIN_LOW (random, thin paper, LOW) Q ADU PLAIN ADU, warp adjustment value 40
REGI2 A NORMAL_ DSPF warp adjustment value 2 50 PAPER (S) (plain paper, small size)
PLAIN_HIGH (normal, plain paper, HIGH) R ADU PLAIN ADU, warp adjustment value 40
B NORMAL_ DSPF warp adjustment value 2 50 PAPER (L) (plain paper, large size)
PLAIN_MID (normal, plain paper, MID) S ADU HEAVY ADU, warp adjustment value 30
C NORMAL_ DSPF warp adjustment value 2 50 PAPER (S) (heavy paper, small size)
PLAIN_LOW (normal, plain paper, LOW) T ADU HEAVY ADU, warp adjustment value 30
D NORMAL_ DSPF warp adjustment value 2 50 PAPER (L) (heavy paper, large size)
THIN_HIGH (normal, thin paper, HIGH) U A4LCC A4LCC, warp adjustment value 40
E NORMAL_ DSPF warp adjustment value 2 50 V A3LCC (S) A3LCC warp adjustment value 40
THIN_MID (normal, thin paper, MID) (plain paper, small size)
F NORMAL_ DSPF warp adjustment value 2 50 W A3LCC (L) A3LCC warp adjustment value 40
THIN_LOW (normal, thin paper, LOW) (plain paper, large size)
G RANDOM_ DSPF warp adjustment value 2 50 X A3LCC A3LCC warp adjustment value 25
PLAIN_HIGH (random, plain paper, HIGH) HEAVY (heavy paper, small size)
H RANDOM_ DSPF warp adjustment value 2 50 PAPER (S)
PLAIN_MID (random, plain paper, MID) Y A3LCC A3LCC warp adjustment value 25
I RANDOM_ DSPF warp adjustment value 2 50 HEAVY (heavy paper, large size)
PLAIN_LOW (random, plain paper, LOW) PAPER (L)
J RANDOM_ DSPF warp adjustment value 2 50
THIN_HIGH (random, thin paper, HIGH)
K RANDOM_ DSPF warp adjustment value 2 50
THIN_MID (random, thin paper, MID)
L RANDOM_ DSPF warp adjustment value 2 50
THIN_LOW (random, thin paper, LOW)
REGIST ROLLER ADJUSTMENT Purpose Adjustment/Setting
A : 50 ; NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the DSPF size width
A: 50 B : 50 ; NORMAL_PLAIN_MID
adjustment value setting.
1 99 C : 50 ; NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW
Section
D : 50 ; NORMAL_THIN_HIGH
Operation/Procedure
E : 50 ; NORMAL_THIN_MID
F : 50 ; NORMAL_THIN_LOW
the touch panel.
G : 50 ; RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
H : 50 ; RANDOM_PLAIN_MID 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
I: 50 ; RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW
Item Default value
J: 50 ; RANDOM_THIN_HIGH
A AD_MAX Max. width position 66
K : 50 ; NORMAL_THIN_MID
B AD_P1 A4R width position 438
L : 50 ; RANDOM_THIN_LOW C AD_P2 A5R width position 699
REGI1 REGI2 ENGIN OK D AD_MIN Min. width position 893
TRANSCRIPTION TIMING SETUP
53
A : 66 ; AD_MAX
A: 66 B : 438 ; AD_P1
C : 699 ; AD_P2
0 1023
53-6 D : 893 ; AD_MIN
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the DSPF size width
detection level adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width. OK

The maximum width detection level is recognized.
3) Set the DSPF paper feed guide to A4R width. 53-8
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. Purpose Adjustment
The A4R width detection level is recognized. Function (Purpose) Used to perform the DSPF document scan-
5) Set the DSPF paper feed guide to A5R width. ning start position adjustment.
The A5R width detection level is recognized. Operation/Procedure
7) Set the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width. 1) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
8) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
Default
When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is Item
value
displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally, A ADJUST VALUE DSPF scanning position adjustment 50
"COMPLETE" is displayed.
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value
SPF SCANNING POSITION ADJUSTMENT
2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value A : 50 ; ADJUST VALUE
3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value A: 50

4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume A4R size adjustment value
1 99
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT

TRAYVOLMAX TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
OK
EXECUTE
55 56
55-1 56-1
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially Purpose Backup
required.) Function (Purpose) Data transfer (Used in repairing the PWB.)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine control opera- Section
tion specification setting.
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Select a target content of data transfer.
Operation/Procedure 2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
TEST SIMULATION NO.55-01 CLOSE Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1 is executed.
ENGINE SOFT SW. SETTING. When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
SW NO. : (SW No.1-16) displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
DATA :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ALL o HDD All the memory contents are transferred to the HDD.
HDD o ALL The HDD contents are transferred to all the
memories.
EEPROM o HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
HDD o EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
EXECUTE
SRAM o HDD Transfer from SRAM or HDD (including the FAX
memory)
HDD o SRAM Transfer from HDD to SRAM (including the FAX
55-2 memory)
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.)
COPY DATA
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner control opera- ALL HDD : ENABLE
tion specification setting.
HDD ALL : DISABLE
Section
EEPROM HDD : DISABLE
Operation/Procedure
HDD EEPROM : DISABLE
TEST SIMULATION NO.55-02 CLOSE SRAM HDD : DISABLE
SCANNER SOFT SW. SETTING. HDD SRAM : DISABLE
SW NO. : (SW No.1-16)
DATA :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1/1
EXECUTE 56-2
Purpose Backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data (user authentica-
55-3
tion data, address book, etc.) in the
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially EEPROM, the SRAM, and the HDD of the
required.) main unit into the USB memory and to
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the controller operation transfer the data.
specification setting. Section
Operation/Procedure 1) Insert the USB memory to the machine.
2) Select a target item for transfer with the touch panel.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
MFP SOFT SW. SETTING.
SW NO. : (SW No.1-16) Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 2 is executed.
DATA : When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
EXPORT/IMPORT FILING DATA
EXECUTE HDD EXPORT HDD IMPORT

EEPROM&SRAM EXPORT EEPROM&SRAM IMPORT
1/1
Operation/Procedure
60 1) Select a target mode for check with [COLOR] and [MONO] key
on the touch panel.
60-1 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Operation test/Check When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations (read/write)
of the MFP control (SDRAM). LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG CL LSU check polygon mirror abnormality
Section LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG
BW
Operation/Procedure
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K CL LSU check K color LD light emitting
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. abnormality
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K BW
The test is started. LSU TESTRESULT NG: CL LSU check C color LD light emitting
abnormality
SDRAM READ/WRITE TEST SIMULATION NO.61-01 CLOSE

TEST
LSU TEST
EXECUTE
60-2
Function (Purpose) Used to set the onboard SDRAM.
Section
Operation/Procedure COLOR MONO EXECUTE 1/1
Item Default value

A SETTING ENABLE 0 61-2
B NUMBER OF ROW 2 Purpose Adjustment/Setting
C NUMBER OF COLUMN 2
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power. (for printer
D TWR SETTING VALUE 1
FIERY)
E TRAS SETTING VALUE 2
F TRC SETTING VALUE 3 Section
G TRCD SETTING VALUE 1 Operation/Procedure
H TRP SETTING VALUE 1 1) Select a target item of the adjustment with [n] and [p] keys on
I TFRC SETTING VALUE 3 the touch panel.
J CAS LATENCY 1 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
K TOTAL NUMBER OF MBYTES ONBOARD DDR 1
L NUMBER OF ONBOARD-DDR CS-BANK 1
Default value
55/62-
Item 70-sheet
SDRAM SETTING sheet
machine
A: 0 ; SETTING ENABLE : DISABLE
machine
A: 0 B: 2 ; NUMBER OF ROW : 13BIT A LASER POWER Laser power setting 118 118
0 1 C: 2 ; NUMBER OF COLUMN : 10BIT MIDDLE FIERY (K) middle speed, black
D: 1 ; TWR SETTING VALUE : 3CLOCK B LASER POWER Laser power setting 118 118
MIDDLE FIERY (C) middle speed, cyan
E: 2 ; TRAS SETTING VALUE : 6CLOCK
C LASER POWER Laser power setting 118 118
F: 3 ; TRC SETTING VALUE : 9CLOCK
MIDDLE FIERY (M) middle speed, magenta
G: 1 ; TRCD SETTING VALUE : 3CLOCK D LASER POWER Laser power setting 118 118
H: 1 ; TRP SETTING VALUE : 3CLOCK MIDDLE FIERY (Y) middle speed, yellow
I: 3 ; TFRP SETTING VALUE : 10CLOCK
E LASER POWER Laser power setting 77 77
LOW FIERY (K) low speed, black
J: 1 ; TRCD ABSOLUTE VALUE : CL=2.5
F LASER POWER Laser power setting 77 77
K: 1 ; TOTAL NUMBER OF MBYTES ONBOARD DDR : 128MBYTE LOW FIERY (C) low speed, cyan
L: 1 ; NUMBER OF ONBOARD-DDR CS-BANK : 1CHIP SELECT G LASER POWER Laser power setting 77 77
LOW FIERY (M) low speed, magenta
OK
H LASER POWER Laser power setting 77 77
LOW FIERY (Y) low speed, yellow
I LASER POWER Laser power setting 96 107
HIGH FIERY (B/W) high speed, B/W
61 J LASER POWER Laser power setting 118 118
MIDDLE FIERY (B/W) middle speed, B/W
K LASER POWER Laser power setting 77 77
61-1 LOW FIERY (B/W) low speed, B/W
Purpose Operation test/Check L LASER LUT MIDDLE Laser LUT select 0 0
FIERY (K) middle speed, black
Function (Purpose) Used to check the polygon motor rotation
M LASER LUT MIDDLE Laser LUT select 0 0
and the BD signal detection.
FIERY (C) middle speed, cyan
Section LSU
Default value Default value
55/62- 55/62-
Item 70-sheet Item 70-sheet
sheet sheet
machine machine
machine machine
N LASER LUT MIDDLE Laser LUT select 0 0 H LASER POWER Laser power setting low 77 77
FIERY (M) middle speed, magenta LOW (Y) speed, yellow
O LASER LUT MIDDLE Laser LUT select 0 0 I LASER POWER Laser power setting high 96 107
FIERY (Y) middle speed, yellow HIGH (B/W) speed, B/W
P LASER LUT LOW Laser LUT select low 0 0 J LASER POWER Laser power setting middle 118 118
FIERY (K) speed, black MIDDLE (B/W) speed, B/W
Q LASER LUT LOW Laser LUT select low 0 0 K LASER POWER Laser power setting low 77 77
FIERY (C) speed, cyan LOW (B/W) speed, B/W
R LASER LUT LOW Laser LUT select low 0 0 L LASER POWER K2 beam difference value 50 50
FIERY (M) speed, magenta DIFF (K2) K (Difference for K1 beam)
S LASER LUT LOW Laser LUT select low 0 0 M LASER LUT Laser LUT select middle 0 0
FIERY (Y) speed, yellow MIDDLE (K) speed, black
T LASER LUT HIGH Laser LUT select high 0 0 N LASER LUT Laser LUT select middle 0 0
FIERY (B/W) speed, B/W MIDDLE (C) speed, cyan
U LASER LUT MIDDLE Laser LUT select 0 0 O LASER LUT Laser LUT select middle 0 0
FIERY (B/W) middle speed, B/W MIDDLE (M) speed, magenta
V LASER LUT LOW Laser LUT select low 0 0 P LASER LUT Laser LUT select middle 0 0
FIERY (B/W) speed, B/W MIDDLE (Y) speed, yellow
Q LASER LUT LOW Laser LUT select low 0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.61-02 CLOSE (K) speed, black
LASER POWER AUTO SETUP[FIERY] R LASER LUT LOW Laser LUT select low 0 0
A : 118 LASER POWER MIDDLE FIERY (K) (C) speed, cyan
A: 110 B : 118 LASER POWER MIDDLE FIERY (C) S LASER LUT LOW Laser LUT select low 0 0
C : 118 LASER POWER MIDDLE FIERY (M)
(M) speed, magenta
58 236
T LASER LUT LOW Laser LUT select low 0 0
D : 118 LASER POWER MIDDLE FIERY (Y)
(Y) speed, yellow
E : 77 LASER POWER LOW FIERY (K) U LASER LUT HIGH Laser LUT select high 0 0
F : 77 LASER POWER LOW FIERY (C)
(BW) speed, B/W
V LASER LUT Laser LUT select middle 0 0
G : 77 LASER POWER LOW FIERY (M)
MIDDLE (BW) speed, B/W
H : 77 LASER POWER LOW FIERY (Y) W LASER LUT Laser LUT select low 0 0
I : 96 LASER POWER HIGH FIERY (B/W) LOW(BW) speed, B/W
A LASER POWER Laser power setting (for 118 118
J : 118 LASER POWER MIDDLE FIERY (B/W)
PRINTER printer) middle speed,
K : 77 LASER POWER LOW FIERY (B/W) MIDDLE (K) black
L: 0 LASER LUT MIDDLE FIERY (K) B LASER POWER Laser power setting (for 118 118
OK PRINTER printer) middle speed,
MIDDLE (C) cyan
C LASER POWER Laser power setting (for 118 118
61-3 PRINTER printer) middle speed,
MIDDLE (M) magenta
D LASER POWER Laser power setting (for 118 118
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power. PRINTER printer) middle speed,
Section MIDDLE (Y) yellow
E LASER POWER Laser power setting (for 77 77
Operation/Procedure
PRINTER LOW printer) low speed, black
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY] and [PRINT/ (K)
FAX] on the touch panel. F LASER POWER Laser power setting (for 77 77
2) Select a target item of the adjustment with [n] and [p] keys on PRINTER LOW printer) low speed, cyan
the touch panel. (C)
G LASER POWER Laser power setting (for 77 77
PRINTER LOW printer) low speed,
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) (M) magenta
H LASER POWER Laser power setting (for 77 77
Default value PRINTER LOW printer) low speed, yellow
55/62- (Y)
Item 70-sheet
sheet I LASER POWER Laser power setting (for 96 107
machine
machine PRINTER HIGH printer) high speed, B/W
A LASER POWER Laser power setting middle 118 118 (B/W)
MIDDLE (K) speed, black J LASER POWER Laser power setting (for 118 118
B LASER POWER Laser power setting middle 118 118 PRINTER printer) middle speed, B/W
MIDDLE (C) speed, cyan MIDDLE (B/W)
C LASER POWER Laser power setting middle 118 118 K LASER POWER Laser power setting (for 77 77
MIDDLE (M) speed, magenta PRINTER LOW printer) low speed, B/W
D LASER POWER Laser power setting middle 118 118 (B/W)
MIDDLE (Y) speed, yellow L LASER PRINTER Laser LUT select (for 0 0
E LASER POWER Laser power setting low 77 77 LUT MIDDLE (K) printer) middle speed,
LOW (K) speed, black black
F LASER POWER Laser power setting low 77 77 M LASER PRINTER Laser LUT select (for 0 0
LOW (C) speed, cyan LUT MIDDLE (C) printer) middle speed,
G LASER POWER Laser power setting low 77 77 cyan
LOW (M) speed, magenta
Default value
55/62-
Item 70-sheet
sheet LSU POSITION ADJUSTMENT (SELF PRINT)
machine A: 1 ; MULTICOUNT
machine
N LASER PRINTER Laser LUT select (for 0 0 A: 1 B: 4 ; PAPER : CS3
LUT MIDDLE (M) printer) middle speed, 1 999

magenta
O LASER PRINTER Laser LUT select (for 0 0
LUT MIDDLE (Y) printer) middle speed,
yellow
P LASER PRINTER Laser LUT select (for 0 0
LUT LOW (K) printer) low speed, black
Q LASER PRINTER Laser LUT select (for 0 0
LUT LOW (C) printer) low speed, cyan
R LASER PRINTER Laser LUT select (for 0 0 EXECUTE OK
LUT LOW (M) printer) low speed,
magenta
S LASER PRINTER Laser LUT select (for 0 0
LUT LOW (Y) printer) low speed, yellow
T LASER PRINTER Laser LUT select (for 0 0 62
LUT HIGH (BW) printer) high speed, B/W
U LASER PRINTER Laser LUT select (for 0 0
LUT MIDDLE printer) middle speed, B/W
62-1
(BW) Purpose
V LASER PRINTER Laser LUT select (for 0 0 Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding
LUT LOW (BW) printer) low speed, B/W
the operation manual area.)
TEST SIMULATION NO.61-03 CLOSE Section
LASER POWER AUTO SETUP Operation/Procedure
A : 118 ; LASER POWER MIDDLE (K) 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
A: 118 B : 118 ; LASER POWER MIDDLE (C)
2) Press [YES] key.
C : 118 ; LASER POWER MIDDLE (M)
58 236 Formatting the hard disk is started.
D : 118 ; LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y)
E : 77 ; LASER POWER LOW (K)

F : 77 ; LASER POWER LOW (C) HDD FORMAT
G : 77 ; LASER POWER LOW (M)
H : 77 ; LASER POWER LOW (Y)
I : 96 ; LASER POWER HIGH (B/W)
J : 118 ; LASER POWER MIDDLE (B/W)

K : 77 ; LASER POWER LOW (B/W)
L : 50 ; LASER POWER DIFF (K2)
COPY PRINT/FAX OK 62-2

Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
61-4 (partial).
Purpose Adjustment Section
Function (Purpose) Used to perform self printing of the LSU Operation/Procedure
position adjustment pattern. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section 2) Press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure Read/write is executed.
HDD R/W TEST(PART)
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. Printing is started.
Item Default value

A MULTICOUNT Print quantity 1
B PAPER MFT Cassette 1: Manual feed 4
CS2 3: Cassette 2 ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE
CS3 4: Cassette 3
CS4 5: Cassette 4
LCC 6: LCC
62-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(all areas).
Section
2) Press [YES] key. 2) Press [YES] key.
Read/write is executed. Formatting the hard disk is started.
HDD R/W TEST(ALL) HDD FORMAT(EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA)
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE
62-6
62-10
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the
hard disk. Function (Purpose) Used to delete the job log data.
Section Section
1) Select a target item of the self diagnostics. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [YES] key.
The self diagnostics is started. Delete of the job log data is started.

SHORT S.T Partial check
EXTENDED S.T All areas check JOB COMPLETE DATA CLEAR(WITH JOB LOG DATA)
SMART OFFLINE TEST

SHORT S.T : ENABLE
EXTENDED S.T : DISABLE ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE
62-11
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.
Section
Operation/Procedure
EXECUTE
1/1 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
62-7 Delete of the document filing data is executed.
Purpose Operation test/Check TEST SIMULATION NO.62-11 CLOSE
Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics DOCUMENT FILING DATA CLEAR
error log.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Printing the error log is started.
SMART ERROR LOG PRINT OUT 62-12

PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PRINT THE SMART ERROR PRINT
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format
in a hard disk trouble.
Section
EXECUTE Operation/Procedure
62-8 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Purpose A 0: Enable
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding 1: Disable (Default)
the system area and the operation manual
area)
Section
DSPF GAIN ODD Gain adjustment value (odd number)
TEST
GAIN_EVEN Gain adjustment value (Even number)
AUTO FORMAT SETTING (HDD TROUBLE)
OFFSET ODD Offset value (odd number)
A: 1 ; (0:YES 1:NO)
OFFSET EVEN Offset value (even number)
A: 1
SMP AVE ODD Reference plate sampling average
0 1 value (ODD)
SMP AVE EVEN Reference plate sampling average
value (EVEN)
TARGET VALUE Target value
BLACK LEVEL Black output level
ERROR CODE Error code
DSPF BACK WHITE First scan DSPF back surface white
LEVEL 1ST reference level
OK DSPF BACK WHITE Second scan DSPF back surface
LEVEL 2ND white reference level

62-13 SHADING DATA DISPLAY
147
Purpose GAIN ODD :
GAIN EVEN : 143

Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (only the
operation manual area) OFFSET ODD : 0
OFFSET EVEN : 0
Section
SMP AVE ODD : 0
Operation/Procedure
SMP AVE EVEN : 0
TARGET VALUE : 0
2) Press [YES] key.
BLACK LEVEL : 0
Formatting the hard disk is started.
ERROR CODE : 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.62-13 CLOSE DSPF FACE WHITE LEVEL 1ST : 0

HDD FORMAT(MANUAL AREA ONLY) DSPF FACE WHITE LEVEL 2ND : 0
B G R OC DSPF 1/1
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE 63-2

Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading.
Section
63 Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode for execution with [OC SHADING] and
63-1 [DSPF SHADING] on the touch panel.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the shading correction Shading is executed.
result.
OC SHADING OC analog level correction and shading correction
Section Scanner data making (Document table mode)
Operation/Procedure DSPF SHADING DSPF analog level correction and shading correction
1) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch data making (DSPF mode)
panel.
2) Select the display target mode from [OC] and [DSPF].
SHADING EXECUTION
OC GAIN ODD Gain adjustment value (odd number) SELECT OC SHADING/DSPF SHADING, AND PRESS EXECUTE
GAIN_EVEN Gain adjustment value (Even number)

OFFSET ODD Offset value (odd number)
OFFSET EVEN Offset value (even number)
SMP AVE ODD Reference plate sampling average
value (ODD) OC SHADING DSPF SHADING EXECUTE
SMP AVE EVEN Reference plate sampling average

value (EVEN)
TARGET VALUE Target value
63-3
BLACK LEVEL Black output level Purpose Adjustment/Setting
ERROR CODE Error code Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner color balance and
DSPF FACE WHITE First scan DSPF front surface white color coefficient auto adjustment.
LEVEL 1ST reference level
DSPF FACE WHITE Second scan DSPF front surface
Section Scanner
LEVEL 2ND white reference level Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] on the touch panel.
2) Select a target mode with [OC] and [DSPF].
4) The color auto adjustment is executed.
SCANNER COLOR BALANCE AUTO ADJUSUTMENT ENGINE COLOR BALANCE CHART READING
OC #1:197, #2:185, #3:165, #4:148, #5:117, #6:110, SET THE CHART ON PLATEN AND TOUCH [EXECUTE]
#7: 88, #8: 75, #9: 55, #10: 45, #11: 38, #12: 29,
#13: 27, #14: 21, #15: 18, #:16: 15, #17: 10, #18: 8,
#19: 5, #20: 4, #22: 2, #:24: 2
EXECUTE
C#2:180, C#6:141, C#12: 89 R#2:166, R#6: 43, R#12: 4
M#2:180, M#6:141, M#12: 89 G#2:166, G#6: 43, G#12: 4
Y#2:180, Y#6: 141, Y#12: 89 B#2:166, B#6: 43, B#12: 4

63-7
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the auto density setting of
the engine auto adjustment scanner target
value. (Servicing)
B G R
Section
DSPF OC 1/2
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel.
63-5 Sampling is executed.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting 2) Place the chart self-printed with SIM 46-21 on the glass table.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner color balance 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
and the color coefficient auto adjustment. Sampling of each patch is executed.
Section 4) Press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure The displayed sampling result is saved as the target value.
1) Select a target of the initial value reset with [SIDE A(OC)]
B Point B target value
[SIDE B (DSPF)] on the touch panel.
C Point C target value
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [OK] key. D Point D target value
The initial value is saved. E Point E target value
F Point F target value
SIDE A Copy gamma correction 1 and color correction coefficient G Point G target value
(OC) TWAIN gamma correction 1 and color correction coefficient H Point H target value
Auto adjustment gamma correction 1 and color correction I Point I target value
coefficient J Point J target value
SIDE B Copy gamma correction 1 and color correction coefficient K Point K target value
(DSPF) TWAIN gamma correction 1 and color correction coefficient L Point L target value
M Point M target value
N Point N target value
STANDARD SCANNER GAMMA SETUP
O Point O target value
SIDE A(OC) SIDE B(DSPF)
BASE Background sampling value
SCANNER TARGET OF COLOR CALIB SETUP:SERVICE

#B: 91, #C 2944, #D: 3227, #E: 5822, #F: 8600
#G: 28935, #H: 54344, #I: 86968, #J: 122678, #K: 151198
#L: 169731, #M: 195950, #N: 201249, #:O: 207112
63-6
K C M Y SETUP 1/1
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine color balance
auto adjustment pattern setting. 63-8
Section Purpose Adjustment/Setting
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to perform the initial value reset of the
1) Place the chart self-printed with SIM 46-21 on the glass table. engine auto adjustment scanner target
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. value. (Servicing)
3) The sampling value of each patch is displayed. Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The initial value reset of the engine auto adjustment scanner
target value is executed.
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SETTING:SERVICE STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SELECT OF ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
TARGET TBL : DEF1 DEF2 DEF3
63-11
Function (Purpose) Used to set the reference scanner target 1/1
value for the engine auto density adjust-
ment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
64
Select a target item to be changed with the touch panel.
64-1
Item Default value Purpose Operation test/Check
Target value table DEF1 DEF1 mode setting DEF 1 Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self print. (Color mode)
select DEF2 DEF2 mode setting
DEF3 DEF3 mode setting
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target color for self print with [K] [C] [M] [Y] on the
touch panel.
2) Select a target item to print with [n] and [p] keys.
Self printing is started.
Item Default value

A PRINT PATTERN (1, 2, 9 - 11, 14 - 19) Print pattern specification 1
B DOT1 (DOT1 >= 2 IF A: 2,11) Print dot number setting 1
C DOT2 (DOT2 >= 2 IF A: 2,11) Empty dot number setting 254
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Print gradation setting 255
E MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1
F EXPOSURE (2 - 8 IF A: 14 - 19) THROUGH Specification of the 1: No process (through) 8
CHAR/PIC exposure mode. 2: Text/Printed Photo
CHAR/PRPIC 3: Text/Photograph
CHAR 4: Text
PRINT PIC 5: Printed photo
PRINT PAPER 6: Photograph
MAP 7: Map
STANDARD DITCH 8: Dither without correction
G PAPER MFT Tray selection 1: Manual feed 2
CS1 2: Tray 1
CS2 3: Tray 2
CS3 4: Tray 3
CS4 5: Tray 4
LCC 6: LCC
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print select 0: Select 1
NO 1: Not selected
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type 1: Normal paper 1
HEAVY * 2: Heavy paper
OHP 3: OHP
ENVELOPE 4: Envelope
*: HEAVY1 (Not Havy2)
<Item A print pattern>
Pattern generating
Pattern Remark
section
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC For the print width of 100 or more, when all colors are selected, print is
made in three colors of CMY.
Print is started at 4mm from the paper lead edge.
2 Dot print
9 Each color 10% area (A4/A4R) density print Each interval is 41.86mm (989dot).
Print is black is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color belt print
11 4-point dot print Each print is printed for /4 of the sub scan paper size.
14 256 gradations: Sub scan Input process When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
(IMG-ASIC Printing is made in 255 gradations, then printing is made in 0 - 254
previous process) gradations.
15 16 gradations (center gradations only): Sub scan IMG-ASIC When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
16 16 gradations (center gradations only): Main scan In 16-gradation printing, the gradation is changed for every 256dot.
17 All background (half tone) Half tone When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
18 256 gradation pattern (Other dither) (IMG-ASIC after- When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
19 256 gradation pattern (Text dither) process) Printing is made for 16 gradations in the main scanning direction. (16 x 16
patch print)
Printing is made in 255 gradations, then printing is made in 0 - 254
gradations.
SELF PRINT(COLOR) : SERVICE ENGINE COLOR BALANCE PATCH PRINT MODE

A: 1 ; PRINT PATTERN (1,2,9 11, 14 19) A: 1 ; COPIES
A: 1 B: 1 ; DOT1 (DOT1>= 2 IF A : 2,11) A: 1 B: 1 ; PROC ADJ:NO
1 20 C : 254 ; DOT2 (DOT2>= 2 IF A : 2,11) 1 999

D : 255 ; DENSITY (FIXED"255" IF A : 9)
E: 1 ; MULTI COUNT
F: 8 ; EXPOSURE:STANDARD DITCH (2 8 IF A : 14 19)
G: 2 ; PAPER : CS1
H: 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
I: 1 ; PAPER TYPE : PLAIN
EXECUTE OK
K C M Y EXECUTE OK 64-3
Function (Purpose) Used to perform self print (monochrome
64-2 mode).
Purpose Operation test/Check Section
Function (Purpose) Used to print the density adjustment pat- Operation/Procedure
tern. 1) Select a target item with [n] and [p] keys on the touch panel.
Section 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Select a target item with [n] and [p] keys on the touch panel. 4) Self printing is started.
Printing the pattern is started.
Default
Item
value
A COPIES Print quantity 1
B PROC ADJ 0: Adding of the half tone process control 1
correction amount is made.
1: Adding of the half tone process control
correction amount is not made.
Item Default value
A PRINT PATTERN (1, 2, 9 - 11, 14 - 19) Print pattern specification 1
B DOT1 (DOT1 >= 2 IF A: 2,11) Print dot number setting 1
C DOT2 (DOT2 >= 2 IF A: 2,11) Empty dot number setting 254
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Print gradation setting 255
E MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1
F EXPOSURE (2 - 8 IF A: 14 - 19) THROUGH Specification of the 1: No process (through) 8
CHAR/PIC exposure mode. 2: Text/Printed Photo
CHAR/PRPIC 3: Text/Photograph
CHAR 4: Text
PRINT PIC 5: Printed photo
PRINT PAPER 6: Photograph
MAP 7: Map
STANDARD DITCH 8: Dither without correction
G PAPER MFT Paper feed tray select 1: Manual feed 2
CS1 2: Tray 1
CS2 3: Tray 2
CS3 4: Tray 3
CS4 5: Tray 4
LCC 6: LCC
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print select 0: Select 1
NO 1: Not selected
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type select Normal paper 1
HEAVY * Heavy paper
OHP OHP
ENVELOPE Envelope
*: HEAVY1 (Not Havy2)
<Item A print pattern>
Pattern generating section

1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC Print is started at 4mm from the paper lead edge.
2 Dot print
9 10% area (A4/A4R) density print Each interval is 41.86mm (989dot).
Print is black is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color belt print
11 4-point dot print Printing is made for every 1/4 of the sub scan paper size.
14 256 gradations: Sub scan Input process Printing is made in 255 gradations, then printing is made in 0 - 254 gradations.
(IMG-ASIC Print is started at 5mm from the paper lead edge.
previous process)
15 16 gradations (center gradations only): Sub scan IMG-ASIC In 16-gradation printing, the gradation is changed for every 256dot.
16 16 gradations (center gradations only): Main scan
17 All background (half tone) Half tone Printing is made for 16 gradations in the main scanning direction.
18 256 gradation pattern (Other dither) (IMG-ASIC after- Print is started at 5mm from the paper lead edge.
19 256 gradation pattern (Text dither) process) Printing is made in 255 gradations, then printing is made in 0 - 254 gradations.
SELF PRINT(BW) : SERVICE
A: 1 ; PRINT PATTERN (1,2,9 11, 14 19) 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
A: 1 B: 1 ; DOT1 (DOT1>= 2 IF A : 2,11)
1 20 C : 254 ; DOT2 (DOT2>= 2 IF A : 2,11)
D : 255 ; DENSITY (FIXED"255" IF A : 9) Default

Item
E: 1 ; MULTI COUNT value
F: 8 ; EXPOSURE:STANDARD DITCH (2 8 IF A : 14 19) A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 3
G: 2 ; PAPER : CS1 B DENSITY Print gradation specification 128
H: 1 ; DUPLEX : NO C MULTI CONUT Print quantity 1
I: 1 ; PAPER TYPE : PLAIN
D PAPER MFT Paper feed 1: Manual 2
tray select feed
CS1 2: Tray 1
CS2 3: Tray 2
CS3 4: Tray 3
EXECUTE OK CS4 5: Tray 4
LCC 6: LCC
64-4 E HALFTONE PHOTO Half tone 0: Photo 0
TEXT/ 1: Text/
Purpose Operation test/Check GRAPHICS Image
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the printer self print. CAD 2: Design
* When FIERY is supported, SIM is not dis- F BIT DEPTH 1BIT Number of 0: 1bit 1
played. 4BIT bits 1: 4bit
Section G DITHER STRAIGHT Dither 1: Straight 2
CALIB correction 2: Calibration
Operation/Procedure specification
touch panel.
<Item A print pattern> Default
Item
1 256 gradation pattern Each monochrome/C&M/C&Y/ M&Y value
(COLOR) G INTENT
2 256 gradation pattern (B/W) Black only SHARP COLOR Rendering 0: Sharp color 0
3 256 gradation pattern Four sheets of continuous print in PERCEPTUAL intent 1: Perceptual
(COLOR) (Y-M-C-K monochrome of Y, M, C, K. COLORIMETRIC 2: Color metric
continuous) SATURATION 3: Saturation
4 Half tone pattern (Color) Each monochrome/C&M/C&Y/M&Y/ CAD 4: CAD
C&M&Y H GRAY COMPENSATION
5 Half tone pattern (B/W) Black only K Gray 0: K only 0
KCMY compensation 1: KCMY
TEST SIMULATION NO.64-04 CLOSE I TONER SAVE MODE
PRINTER SELF PRINT ON Toner save 0: ON 1
A: 3 ; PRINT PATTERN OFF mode 1: OFF
A: 3 B : 128 ; DENSITY

1 5 C: 1 ; MULTI COUNT
D: 2 ; PAPER : CS2
PRINTER SELF PRINT (PCL)
A: 3 ; PRINT PATTERN
E: 0 ; HALFTONE
A: 3 B: 2 ; DITHER : CALIB
F: 1 ; BIT DEPTH
G: 2 ; DITHER
D: 2 ; PAPER : CS1
E: 0 ; HALFTONE : PHOTO
F: 1 ; BIT DEPTH : 4BIT

K C M Y EXECUTE OK
G: 0 ; INTENT : PERCEPTUAL
H: 0 ; GRAY COMPENSATION : K
64-5 I: 1 ; TONER SAVE MODE : OFF

Function (Purpose) Used to perform the printer self print (PCL).
* When FIERY is supported, SIM is not dis-
played. K C M Y EXECUTE OK
Section
Operation/Procedure
64-6
touch panel. Purpose Operation test/Check
2) Select a target item to print with [n] and [p] keys. Function (Purpose) Used to perform the printer self print (PS).
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. * When FIERY is supported, SIM is not dis-
played.
Self printing is started. Section
Operation/Procedure
Default 1) Select a target color for self print with [K] [C] [M] [Y] on the
Item
value touch panel.
A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern 1: Used to 3
specification perform the PCL
inspection pattern 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
(COLOR). 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2: PCL inspection
pattern (B/W)
3: PCL inspection Default
pattern (COLOR/ Item
value
B/W continuous)
A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern 1: PC inspection 1
B DITHER specification pattern (COLOR)
STRAIGHT Dither 1: Straight 2 2: PS inspection
CALIB correction 2: Calibration pattern (B/W)
specification
B DITHER
C MULTI CONUT Print quantity 1
STRAIGHT Dither 1: Straight 2
D PAPER correction
CALIB 2: Calibration
MFT Paper feed 1: Manual feed 2 specification
CS1 tray select 2: Tray 1 C MULTI CONUT Print quantity 1
CS2 3: Tray 2 D PAPER
CS3 4: Tray 3 MFT Paper feed 1: Manual feed 2
CS4 5: Tray 4 CS1 tray select 2: Tray 1
LCC 6: LCC CS2 3: Tray 2
E HALFTONE CS3 4: Tray 3
PHOTO Half tone 0: Photo 0 CS4 5: Tray 4
TEXT/ 1: Text/Image LCC 6: LCC
GRAPHICS E HALFTONE
CAD 2: Design PHOTO Half tone Photo 0
F BIT DEPTH TEXT/ Text/Image
1BIT Number of 0: 1bit 1 GRAPHICS
4BIT bits 1: 4bit CAD Design
Default
Item 65-2
value
F BIT DEPTH Purpose Operation check/test
1BIT Number of 1bit 1 Function (Purpose) Used to check the touch panel (LCD dis-
4BIT bits 4bit play) detection position adjustment result.
G INTENT Section
SHARP COLOR Rendering Sharp color 0
intent
Operation/Procedure
PERCEPTUAL Perceptual
COLORIMETRIC Color metric Touch the touch panel.
SATURATION Saturation The coordinates (X= horizontal, Y=Vertical) of the point being
CAD CAD touched are displayed in real time.
H GRAY COMPENSATION
K Gray K only 0 40 20 600
40 40
KCMY compensation KCMY
I INK SIMULATION X: 0 Y: 0
OFF Ink simulation OFF 0

SWOP SWOP 130
EURO EURO
JAPAN COLOR JAPAN COLOR
20 120 220 320 420 520 620
240
PRINTER SELF PRINT (PS)
A: 1 ; PRINT PATTERN
A: 1 B: 2 ; DITHER : CALIB
350
D: 2 ; PAPER : CS1
E: 0 ; HALFTONE : PHOTO
40 600
F: 1 ; BIT DEPTH : 4BIT
440 440
G: 0 ; INTENT : PERCEPTUAL 460
H: 0 ; GRAY COMPENSATION : K
I: 0 ; INK SIMULATION : OFF
65-5
Purpose Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key
K C M Y EXECUTE OK input.
Section
Operation/Procedure
65 Press the keys displayed on the screen sequentially.
65-1 OPERATION PANEL KEY CHECK

PLEASE PUSH HOME KEY
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the touch panel (LCD dis-
play) detection position adjustment.
Section Operation panel section
Operation/Procedure
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the
screen.
When all the four points are touched and OK, the sampled correc- 66
tion value is saved.
66-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to change and check the soft switch
setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [SW No.] key.
2) Enter the soft switch number to be checked or changed with
10-key.
3) Press [DATA] key.
The current setting status is displayed.
4) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
10-key.
For details, refer to "4-A. Soft switches."
The setting content is saved.

If "(once)" is selected, when check is completed normally,
TEST SIMLATION NO.66-01 CLOSE
"OK" is displayed. When there occurs an error, "NG" is dis-
FAX SOFT SW. SETTING.
played.
SW No. :
If "(repeat)" is selected, check is repeated until the result is
DATA : found "NG" or until [EXECUTE] key is pressed.
12345678
1 All Memory Device Check (once) Check all the items once.
2 MFP SRAM (once) Check only once.
3 MFP SRAM (repeat) Repeat checking.
EXECUTE 4 MFP FLASH + OP.FLASH (once) Check only once.
5 MFP FLASH + OP.FLASH(repeat) Repeat checking.
6 MODEM EEPROM<1>(once) Check only once.
66-2 7 MODEM EEPROM<1>(repeat) Repeat checking.
8 MODEM SDRAM<1>(once) Check only once.
Purpose Data clear
9 MODEM SDRAM<1>(repeat) Repeat checking.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX soft switch and set
the default value. TEST SIMULATION NO.66-03 CLOSE
Section FAX FAX PWB MEMORY CHECK
Operation/Procedure All Memory Device Check (once) MFP SRAM(once)
1) Enter the country code with 10-key. MFP SRAM (repeat) MFP FLASH + OP.FLASH(once)
* When [DEST CODE] key is pressed, the country code list is MFP FLASH + OP.FLASH(repeat) MODEM EEPROM<1>(once)
displayed. MODEM EEPROM<1>(repeat) MODEM SDRAM<1>(once)

When [BACK] key is pressed on the destination code list MODEM SDRAM<1>(repeat)
screen, the display returns to the destination code entry
screen.
2) Press [SET] key.
4) Press [YES] key.
Clearing the soft switch is executed. 66-4
Purpose Operation check, test
JAPAN 00000000 NORWAY 10000010
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output operation
U.S.A. 10110101 DENMARK 00110001
(MODEM operation) of data signal in each
AUSTRALIA 00001001 NETHERLANDS 01111011
data output mode of FAX. Send level: MAX
U.K. 10110100 ITALY 01011001
FRANCE 00111101 SWITZERLAND 10100110 Section FAX
GERMANY 00000100 AUSTRIA 00001010 Operation/Procedure
SWEDEN 10100101 INDONESIA 01010100 1) Select the display screen with [n] and [p] keys.
NEWZEALAND 01111110 THAILAND 10101001
2) Select an output target mode with the touch panel key.
CHINA 00100110 MALAYSIA 01101100
SINGAPORE 10011100 INDIA 01010011
TW 11111110 PHILIPPINES 10001001 A signal is outputted at the maximum send level.
OTHER1 11111101 HONGKONG 01010000 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the signal output can be
OTHER2 11111100 RUSSIA 10111000 stopped.
OTHER3 11111011 SOUTHAFRICA 10011111
FINLAND 00111100 NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V34
26.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V34
TEST SIMULATION NO.66-02 CLOSE 16.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V34
FAX SOFT SW.CLEAR - JAPAN 7.2 V34 4.8 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V33
PRESENT : 00000000 12.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V17
7.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t
NEW : SET
2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 1100
0.3 V21 ANSam RINGER No RBT
DP MAKE DP BRK No MSG
DEST CODE ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE
66-3
Purpose Operation test, check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation (read/write) of
the FAX PWB memory.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of the memory operation check with the
touch panel.
The operation check of the selected memory is executed.

Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute printing.
SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK. (LEVEL MAX)
NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V34

* If there is no confidential registration, no print is made.

26.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V34
PASS CODE PRINT OUT.
16.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V34
7.2 V34 4.8 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V33
12.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V17 EXECUTE
7.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t

66-7
2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 1100 Purpose User data output, check
Function (Purpose) Used to output the image memory data
0.3 V21 ANSam RINGER No RBT
(memory send and receive).
EXECUTE 1/2 * The confidential receive contents are also
outputted.
66-5 Section FAX

Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute printing.
(MODEM operation) of data signal in each * If there is no image memory, no output is made.
data output mode of FAX. Send level: Soft
switch setting
IMAGE MEMORY PRINT OUT.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the display screen with [n] and [p] keys.
2) Select an output target mode with the touch panel key. EXECUTE
A signal is outputted at the send level set with the soft switch.
66-8
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the signal output can be
stopped.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output operation (audio
NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V34 output IC operation check) of the various
26.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V34 audio signals of FAX. Send level: MAX
16.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V34
Section FAX
7.2 V34 4.8 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V33
Operation/Procedure
12.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V17
7.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t 1) Select an output target model with the touch panel key.
2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 1100 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
0.3 V21 ANSam RINGER No RBT A signal is outputted at the maximum send level.
DP MAKE DP BRK No MSG
stopped.
SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK. (SOFT SW.) NONE Mute

NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V34 PAUSE Pause melody
MESSAGE1 Message 1
26.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V34
MESSAGE2 Message 2
MESSAGE3 Message 3
16.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V34
MESSAGE4 Message 4
4.8 V34
MESSAGE5 Message 5
7.2 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V33
MESSAGE6 Message 6
12.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V17 ALARM Alarm
RINGER Ringer (Speaker)
7.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t EXT.TEL.RINGER External telephone ringer
2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 1100 TEST SIMULATION NO.66-08 CLOSE
MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX)

0.3 V21 ANSam RINGER No RBT NONE PAUSE MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2
EXECUTE 1/2
MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 MESSAGE6
66-6 ALARM RINGER EXT.TEL.RINGER
Purpose User data output, check

Function (Purpose) Used to print the confidential pass code.
Section FAX EXECUTE

66-9
A signal is outputted at the maximum send level.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output operation (audio stopped.
output IC operation) of various audio sig-
nals of FAX. Send level: Soft switch setting TEST SIMULATION NO.66-11 CLOSE
Section FAX 300bps SIGNAL OOUTPUT. (LEVEL MAX.)
NO SIGNAL 11111 11110 00000

Operation/Procedure
1) Select an output target mode with the touch panel key. 010101 00001

stopped. EXECUTE
NONE Mute
PAUSE Pause melody 66-12
MESSAGE1 Message 1
MESSAGE2 Message 2
MESSAGE3 Message 3 Function (Purpose) Used to check the output operation
MESSAGE4 Message 4 (MODEM operation) in the FAX G3 mode
MESSAGE5 Message 5 300bps. Send level: Set with the soft
MESSAGE6 Message 6 switch.
ALARM Alarm Section FAX
RINGER Ringer (Speaker) Operation/Procedure
EXT.TEL.RINGER External telephone ringer
1) Select an output target mode with the touch panel.
TEST SIMULATION NO.66-09 CLOSE 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(SOFT SW.) A signal is outputted at the send level set with the soft switch.
NONE PAUSE MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the signal output can be
stopped.
MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 MESSAGE6

ALARM RINGER EXT.TEL.RINGER
300bps SIGNAL OOUTPUT. (SOFT SW.)
NO SIGNAL 11111 11110 00000
010101 00001
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
66-10
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear all the data (memory receive 66-13
and send) of the image memory. Purpose Setting
* The confidential receive data are cleared
simultaneously. Function (Purpose) Used to set the number for the FAX dial sig-
nal output test. (In the dial signal output test
Section FAX with SIM66-14 - 16, the dial number set
Operation/Procedure with this simulation is outputted.)
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section FAX
2) Press [YES] key. Operation/Procedure
The image memory is cleared. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Enter with 10-key (0 - 9), [*] key, and [#] key. The upper limit is
TEST
20 digits.
IMAGE MEMORY CLEAR.
2) Press [SET] key.
Setting is saved.

ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE DIAL TEST NUMBER SETTING.
PRESENT : 0123456789#
NEW : SET
66-11
(MODEM operation) in the FAX G3 mode
300bps. Send level: MAX
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an output target mode with the touch panel key.

66-14 66-16
Purpose Setting/Operation test, check Purpose Setting/Operation test, check
Function (Purpose) Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse Function (Purpose) Used to perform the dial signal (DTMF) out-
dial mode (10PPS) and to execute the dial put test in the FAX tone dial mode. (The
signal output test. (The signal of the dial signal of the dial number set with SIM 66-
number set with SIM66-13 is outputted.) 13 is outputted.) The send level can be set
Section FAX to an optional level.
Operation/Procedure Section FAX
1) Enter the set value of make time with 10-key. (0 - 15) Operation/Procedure
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Select a target item to be set with [n] [p] keys.
The dial signal is outputted at the make time set with the above 2) Enter the set value of the send level with 10-key. (0 - 15)
procedure. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the signal output can be The dial signal is outputted at the send level set in the above
stopped. procedure.
stopped.
DIAL TEST(10PPS)
A : 4 ; MAKE TIME [+29ms] SIMULATION NO.66-16 CLOSE
TEST
A: 4
DIAL TEST(DTMF)
0 15 A: 4 HIGH(dB)
A: 4 B: 4 HIGH-LOW
0 15
EXECUTE OK
EXECUTE OK
66-15
Purpose Setting/Operation test, check 66-17
Function (Purpose) Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse Purpose Operation test, check
dial mode (20PPS) and to execute the dial Function (Purpose) Used to perform the dial signal (DTMF) out-
signal output test. (The signal of the dial put test in the FAX tone dial mode. Send
number set with SIM 66-13 is outputted.) level: MAX
Section FAX Section FAX
1) Enter the set value of the make time with 10-key. (0 - 15) 1) Select an output target mode with the touch panel.
The dial signal is outputted at the make time set in the above A signal is outputted at the maximum send level.
procedure.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the signal output can be stopped.
stopped.
DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT.(LEVEL MAX)
DIAL TEST(20PPS) 1 2 3
A : 4 ; MAKE TIME [+9ms]
A: 4 4 5 6
0 15
7 8 9
0 #
EXECUTE
EXECUTE OK
66-18
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the dial signal (DTMF) out-
put test in the FAX tone dial mode. Send
level: Set with the soft switch.
Section FAX

Operation/Procedure
66-21
1) Select an output target mode with the touch panel.
Purpose Adjustment, setting, operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to print information abut FAX (various
registrations, communication manage-
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the signal output can be ment, file management, system errors, pro-
stopped. tocols).
TEST SIMULATION NO.66-18 CLOSE Section FAX
DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT.(SOFT SW.) Operation/Procedure
1 2 3 1) Select a print target item with the touch panel key.
5
4 6
Printing is started.
7 8 9
0 # FAX INFORMATION PRINT OUT.

REGISTERED MANAGEMENT
FILE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ERROR LINE
PROTOCOL LINE
EXECUTE
66-19
Purpose Backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the address book data EXECUTE
stored in the HDD. (Backup to the Flash
ROM)
Section 66-24
Operation/Procedure Purpose Clear
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAST memory data.
2) Press [YES] key. Section FAX
The address book data in the HDD are saved to the Flash Operation/Procedure
ROM. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
TEST SIMULATION NO.66-19 CLOSE 2) Press [YES] key.
ADDRESS DATA BACK UP. (WRITE TO FLASH ROM) The FAST memory data are cleared.
FAST MEMORY CLEAR.

66-20
Purpose Data transfer
Function (Purpose) Used to transfer the address book data 66-25
stored in the Flash ROM. (Transfer to HDD)
Purpose Setting
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to register a FAX number for MODEM
Operation/Procedure dial-in.
Section FAX
2) Press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure
The address book data are transferred from the Flash ROM to
1) Enter a MODEM dial-in FAX number (0 - 9, *, #) with 10-key.
the HDD.
The upper limit is 20 digits.
TEST SIMULATION NO.66-20 CLOSE 2) Press [SET] key.
ADDRESS DATA BACK UP. (READ FROM FLASH ROM) The MODEM dial-in FAX number is registered.
M-D-IN FAX NUMBER SETTING. 0-9[0-9]. :[ ]:#:[#]

PRESENT : --------------------
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE NEW : SET

Purpose Setting TEL/LIU SENSOR CHECK

HS1 HS2 RHS EXHS
Function (Purpose) Used to register an external telephone
number for MODEM dial-in.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter a MODEM dial-in external telephone number (0 - 9, *, #)
with 10-key. The upper limit is 20 digits.
66-31
2) Press [SET] key.
Purpose Operation check
The MODEM dial-in external telephone number is registered.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the TEL/LIU output port.
Section FAX
M-D-IN EXTEL NUMBER SETTING. 0-9[0-9]. :[ ]:#:[#]
Operation/Procedure
PRESENT : --------------------
1) Select the port to be turned ON with the touch panel key.
NEW : SET
(ON: Highlighted display)
The setting is reflected.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation can be
stopped.
TEL/LIU SETTING.
66-29 CION MR EC S.
Purpose Data clear

Function (Purpose) Used to clear the data related to the
address book (one-touch registration, FTP/
Desktop extension, group extension, pro- EXECUTE
gram registration, interface memory box,
meta data, Inbound Routing, Document
Admin table). 66-32
Section Purpose Operation test, check
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to check the received data (fixed
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. data) from the line.
2) Press [YES] key. Section FAX
The data related to the address book are cleared. Operation/Procedure
The fixed data received from the line are checked.
FAX ADDRESS DATA CLEAR.
2) When the check is completed normally, "OK" is displayed.
When an error occurs, "NG" is displayed.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation can be
stopped.
RECEIVED DATA CHECK
CHECKING...
66-30
Function (Purpose) Used to check a change in the TEL/LIU sta-
tus.
EXECUTE
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
The TEL/LIU status is displayed. 66-33
(Signal detected: Highlighted display, Signal not-detected: Normal Purpose Operation test, check
display) Function (Purpose) Used to detect the line signals (BUSY
TONE/CNG/CED/FNET/DTMF).
HS1 Polarity reversal signal
HS2 Polarity reversal signal Section FAX
RHS Handset hook SW Operation/Procedure
EXHS External telephone hook SW Select a target item for signal detection check with the touch panel
key.
The detected signal is highlighted.

SIGNAL DETECT CHECK. Purpose Setting
FNET
Function (Purpose) Used to set the destination.
BT/CNG/CED/DT Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Select a destination with the touch panel key.
FAX DESTINATION SETUP
JAPAN U.S.A/CANADA EUROPE AUSTRALIA
66-34
CHINA ASIA&OTHERS
Function (Purpose) Used to measure the communication time
of the send test image data.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
The send test is performed and the send time is measures and dis-
played. (Unit: ms) 66-42

Purpose Setting
TEST
COMMUNICATION TIME DISPLAY. Function (Purpose) Used to rewrite the power control program
####[ms]
again to the FAX BOX.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
When writing the program is completed normally, "OK" is dis-
played. When writing is failed, "NG" is displayed.
66-36
Purpose Operation test, check TEST SIMULATION NO.66-42 CLOSE
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the interface check POWER CONTROL PROGRAM RELOAD
between the MFP controller and the

MDMC. (Data line or command line check)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item for the operation check with the touch YES NO
ARE YOU SURE? EXECUTE
panel key.
If "(once)" is selected, when check is completed normally,
66-43
"OK" is displayed. When there occurs an error, "NG" is dis-
played. Purpose Setting
If "(repeat)" is selected, check is repeated until the result is Function (Purpose) Used to write the adjustment value of the
found "NG" or until [EXECUTE] key is pressed. power control program to the FAX BOX.
Section FAX
MFP m MDMC (DATA once) Data line once only
MFP o MDMC (DATA once) Data line once only
Operation/Procedure
MFP m MDMC (DATA repeat) Data lien repeat 1) Select a target item to be set with [n] [p] keys.
MFP o MDMC (DATA repeat) Data line repeat 2) Enter a set value with 10-key.
MFP m MDMC (CMD once) Command line once only 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
MFP o MDMC (CMD once) Command line once only
When writing the adjustment value is completed normally,
MFP m MDMC (CMD repeat) Command line repeat
"OK" is displayed. When it fails, "NG" is displayed.
MFP o MDMC (CMD repeat) Command line repeat
Item Set range Default
A CI_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 - 15 3
MFP-MDMC I/F CHECK.
B CI_CYCLE_MIN 1 - 254 10
MFP<-MDMC (DATA once) MFP->MDMC (DATA once)
C CI_CYCLE_MAX 2 - 255 142
MFP<-MDMC (DATA repeat) MFP->MDMC (DATA repeat) D CI_COUNT 2 - 15 3
MFP<-MDMC (CMD once) MFP->MDMC (CMD once) E POFF_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 - 15 15
F EXHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 - 255 240
MFP<-MDMC (CMD repeat) MFP->MDMC (CMD repeat)
G RHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 - 15 2
H SON_TIMEOUT 1 - 127 20
EXECUTE

POWER CONTROL ADJUSTMENT VALUE WRITING. PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
A: 3 CI_LEVEL_JUDGE PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PROCON EXECUTION AND PRINT THE TEST PATCH.
A: 3 B 10 CI_CYCLE_MIN
2 15 C 142 CI_CYCLE_MAX
D 3 CI_COUNT
E 15 POFF_LEVEL_JUDGE
EXECUTE
F 240 EXHS_LEVEL_JUDGE
G 2 RHS_LEVEL_JUDGE
H 20 SON_TIMEOUT PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
THE PRINTED TEST PATCH ON DOCUMENT GLASS THEN PRESS [EXECUTE].

EXECUTE OK
,
*LIGHT AREA AT LEFT SIDE ON DOCUMENT GLASS.
67 FACTORY SERVICE EXECUTE
67-17
67-25
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the printer controller memory
clear and default value. Function (Purpose) Used to perform the manual correction set-
ting of the printer engine color balance.
Section
Operation/Procedure played.
2) Press [YES] key. Operation/Procedure
Used to clear the printer controller memory and to set the 1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
default values. touch panel.
If setting is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. 2) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys.
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-17 CLOSE 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
PRINTER CONTROLLER MEMORY CLEAR 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
PRINTER ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT: PG

A : 50 ; POINT1
A: 50 B : 50 ; POINT2
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE C : 50 ; POINT3

1 99
D : 50 ; POINT4
E : 50 ; POINT5
67-24 F : 50 ; POINT6
Purpose Adjustment/Setting G : 50 ; POINT7
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the printer setting of auto H : 50 ; POINT8
color calibration. I : 50 ; POINT9
* When FIERY is supported, SIM is not dis- J : 50 ; POINT10

played.
K : 50 ; POINT11
Section
L : 50 ; POINT12
Operation/Procedure
K C M Y EXECUTE OK
The high density process control operation is started to make
self print. 67-26
2) Place the outputted self print patch on the glass table, and Purpose Adjustment/Setting
select a process mode with [FACTORY] and [SERVICE] on Function (Purpose) Used to perform the reference scanner tar-
the touch panel. get value setting of the printer engine auto
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. density adjustment.
The patch is scanned and the 16-patch self print is outputted. * When FIERY is supported, SIM is not dis-
4) Press [OK] key. played.
The correction value is saved and the reference value is regis- Section
tered. Operation/Procedure
Select a target item to be changed with the touch panel.

Item Default value 67-28
Target value table DEF1 DEF1 mode setting DEF1 Purpose Adjustment/Setting
select DEF2 DEF2 mode setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner target value
DEF3 DEF3 mode setting
registration of the printer engine auto
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-26 CLOSE adjustment.
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SELECT OF PRT ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJ
TARGET TBL : DEF1 DEF2 DEF3
played.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The initial value reset of the engine auto adjustment scanner
target value is executed.
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB: SERVICE

1/1
67-27
Purpose Adjustment/Setting YES NO
ARE YOU SURE? EXECUTE
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner target value
registration of the printer engine auto den-
sity adjustment. 67-30
played.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform delivery setting of the main
Section
unit calibration data and the process cor-
Operation/Procedure rection data to a client PC. (for GDI printer)
1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the * When FIERY is supported, SIM is not dis-
touch panel. played.
2) Press [SETUP] key. Section
3) Place the self print patch outputted with SIM 67-25 on the Operation/Procedure
glass table, and press [EXECUTE] key on the touch panel. 1) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Sampling is started. 2) Press [OK] key. (The setting content is saved.)
4) Press [OK] key.
The target value is saved. Item Default value
A 0: Inhibit 1
B Point B target value 1: Allow
C Point C target value
D Point D target value TEST SIMULATION NO.67-30 CLOSE
E Point E target value BRATION DATA RELEASE ADJUSTMENT
F Point F target value A: 1 ; (0:YES 1:NO)
G Point G target value A: 1

H Point H target value 0 1
I Point I target value
J Point J target value
K Point K target value
L Point L target value
M Point M target value
N Point N target value
O Point O target value
BASE Background sampling value OK
SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUP: SERVICE 67-31

#B: 91, #C 2944, #D: 3227, #E: 5822, #F: 8600
Purpose Data clear
#G: 28935, #H: 54344, #I: 86968, #J: 122678, #K: 151198
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value.
#L: 169731, #M: 195950, #N: 201249, #:O: 207112
played.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
K C M Y SETUP 1/1 The printer calibration value is cleared.

Default value
TEST
Item SCREEN1 - 9 SCREEN10, 11
PRINTER CALIBRATION DATA CLEAR
(KCMY) (K)
H POINT8 Point 8 128 105
I POINT9 Point 9 128 95
J POINT10 Point 10 128 82
K POINT11 Point 11 128 70
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE L POINT12 Point 12 128 64
M POINT13 Point 13 128 57
N POINT14 Point 14 128 62
67-32 O POINT15 Point 15 128 75
Purpose Adjustment/Setting <Items selectable with SCREEN>

Function (Purpose) Used to perform the screen/color select Color middle Monochrome
function setting for each object. speed high speed
Content
* When FIERY is supported, SIM is not dis- 41cpm 55 62 70
played. cpm cpm cpm
SCREEN1 { 4bit_LOW (photo)
Section
SCREEN2 { 4bit_HIGH (Graphic)
Operation/Procedure SCREEN3 { 1bit_LOW (photo)
1) Select a target item with [n] and [p] keys on the touch panel. SCREEN4 { 1bit_HIGH (Graphic)
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. SCREEN5 { 4bit_CAD
SCREEN6 { { { Mono (600 x 600)
SCREEN7 { { { Mono (1200 x 600)
Default SCREEN8 { Toner save
Item 1bit_LOW (Photo)
value
A SCREEN Screen select for each object allow 0 SCREEN9 { Toner save
(0: YES 1: NO) Screen select for each object inhibit 1bit_HIGH (Graphic)
B COLOR Color select for each object allow 0 SCREEN10 { { { Toner save Mono
(0: YES 1: NO) (600 x 600)
Color select for each object inhibit
SCREEN11 { { { Toner save Mono
(1200 x 600)
MODE SETTING (OBJECT) SIMULATION NO.67-33 CLOSE

TEST
A: 0 ; SCREEN(0:YES 1:NO)
P PRINTER SCREEN GAMMA ADJUSTMENT (SCREEN1)
A: 0 B: 0 ; COLOR(0:YES 1:NO)
A : 128 ; POINT1
0 1 A: 128 B : 128 ; POINT2
C : 128 ; POINT3
0 255
D : 128 ; POINT4
E : 128 ; POINT5
F : 128 ; POINT6
G : 128 ; POINT7
H : 128 ; POINT8
I : 128 ; POINT9
OK
J : 128 ; POINT10
K : 128 ; POINT11
67-33
L : 128 ; POINT12
Purpose Adjustment/Setting K C M Y SCREEN OK
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the gamma correction (for

PCL) between printer screens. 67-33
played. Purpose Adjustment/Setting
Section Function (Purpose) Used to perform gamma correction (for

GDI) between printer screens.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the played.
touch panel.
Section
2) Select a target item with [SCREEN] key.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. touch panel.
5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 2) Select a target item with [SCREEN] key.
Default value 3) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys.
Item SCREEN1 - 9 SCREEN10, 11 4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
(KCMY) (K) 5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
A POINT1 Point 1 128 127
B POINT2 Point 2 128 125 Default value
C POINT3 Point 3 128 124 Item SCREEN SCREEN 2
D POINT4 Point 4 128 124 1, 3 K C M Y
E POINT5 Point 5 128 122 A POINT1 Point 1 128 128 128 128 128
F POINT6 Point 6 128 120 B POINT2 Point 2 128 128 128 128 127
G POINT7 Point 7 128 114 C POINT3 Point 3 128 127 127 128 127

Default value SIMULATION NO.67-33
TEST
Item SCREEN SCREEN 2
PPRINTER SCREEN GAMMA ADJUSTMENT (SCREEN1)
1, 3 K C M Y A : 128 ; POINT1
D POINT4 Point 4 128 127 128 128 127 A: 128 B : 128 ; POINT2
E POINT5 Point 5 128 127 127 126 126 0 255

C : 128 ; POINT3
F POINT6 Point 6 128 127 126 127 126 D : 128 ; POINT4
G POINT7 Point 7 128 123 124 124 123 E : 128 ; POINT5
H POINT8 Point 8 128 119 122 122 123 F : 128 ; POINT6
I POINT9 Point 9 128 111 116 117 121 G : 128 ; POINT7

J POINT10 Point 10 128 112 113 112 117
H : 128 ; POINT8
K POINT11 Point 11 128 106 108 115 116
I : 128 ; POINT9
L POINT12 Point 12 128 110 113 110 115
M POINT13 Point 13 128 120 112 117 118 J : 128 ; POINT10
N POINT14 Point 14 128 110 119 120 118 K : 128 ; POINT11
O POINT15 Point 15 128 110 119 121 116 L : 128 ; POINT12
K C M Y SCREEN OK
SCREEN1 1bit Photo
SCREEN2 1bit Graphic
SCREEN3 1bit Mono
4. Soft switch (Detail of SIM 66-1)

A. Soft switch list
SW Bit System
Item SW selection and function Initial value Remarks
No. No. settings
1 1-8 Country code 1 North America
0 * For codes of
1 the other
1 countries, refer
to the page of
0
SIM 66-2
1
setting.
0
1
2 1 Operation Change from the image 1: Change over 0: Do not change over "1": Change over
settings send screen to the copy (North America)
screen "0": Do not change
over (Other country)
2-5 Operation Image quality priority Ordinary lettering 0000 0 Ordinary lettering
settings selection (standard image Small lettering 0001 0
quality setting) Fine 0010 0
Very fine 0011 0
Small lettering, medium 0101
tone
Fine, medium tone 0110
Very fine, medium tone 0111
6 Operation Image quality setting when 1: Apply 0: Do not apply 0 Do not apply
settings saving (FAX)
7, 8 Not used 0
0
3 1 Operation Received data printing hold 1: Hold 0: Do not hold 0 Do not hold
settings (FAX/Internet Fax)
2, 3 FAX initial Tone/Pulse initial setting 10PPS (Pulese) 00 1 TONE
setting (Dial call signal setting) 20PPS 01 0
TONE 10
Same action as initial 11
value
4 FAX initial Auto startup mode 1: Release 0: Setting 0 Setting
setting
5-8 FAX initial Pause time setting Binary input "0100": 4 seconds When set to "0000,"
setting (between dials) Setting range 1 to 15 seconds (1 second intervals) (South Africa) the default value is
"0010": 2 seconds set.
(Other country)

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
4 1, 2 FAX initial Speaker volume when on- Small 01 1 Medium
setting hook (Speaker volume Medium 10 0
during DTMF sending) Large 11
3, 4 FAX initial Call sound volume No sound 00 1 Medium
setting Small 01 0
Medium 10
Large 11
5, 6 FAX initial Line monitor volume setting No sound 00 "00": No sound
setting Small 01 (U.K./France/
Medium 10 Germany/Rusia)
Large 11 "10": Medium
(Other country)
7, 8 FAX initial Volume of the transmission No sound 00 1 Medium
setting completion sound (Volume Small 01 0
of the successful Medium 10
transmission sound) Large 11
5 1, 2 FAX initial Volume of the No sound 00 1 Medium
setting communication error Small 01 0
completion sound (Volume Medium 10
of the transmission and Large 11
reception error sound)
3, 4 FAX initial Volume of the reception No sound 00 1 Medium
setting completion sound (Volume Small 01 0
of the reception completion Medium 10
sound) Large 11
5, 6 FAX initial Tone of the successful Pattern 1 (550Hz) 00 1 Pattern 3
setting transmission sound Pattern 2 (750Hz) 01 0 (1000Hz)
Pattern 3 (1000Hz) 10
5 7, 8 FAX initial Tone of the transmission Pattern 1 (550Hz) 00 1 Pattern 3
setting error sound Pattern 2 (750Hz) 01 0 (1000Hz)
6 1, 2 FAX initial Tone of the reception sound Pattern 1 (550Hz) 00 1 Pattern 3
setting Pattern 2 (750Hz) 01 0 (1000Hz)
3-5 FAX initial Setting of the successful 2.0 seconds 000 0 3.0 seconds
setting transmission sound time 2.5 seconds 001 1
3.0 seconds 010 0
3.5 seconds 011
4.0 seconds 100
6-8 FAX initial Setting of the reception 2.0 seconds 000 0 3.0 seconds
setting sound time 2.5 seconds 001 1
3.0 seconds 010 0
3.5 seconds 011
4.0 seconds 100
7 1 FAX initial Setting of the time of the 1: Every 0.7 seconds 0: Every 0.3 seconds 0 Every 0.3 seconds
setting transmission/reception error
sound
2, 3 FAX initial Communication results Do not print 00 1 At times of
setting sheet print settings (for Always print 01 0 transmission
ordinary transmission) At times of transmission 10 failure
<FAX only> failure
4, 5 FAX initial Setting of the Do not print 00 0 Always print
setting communication results Always print 01 1
sheet printing (at times of Failed transmission 10
broadcast transmission) address
6, 7 FAX initial Communication results Do not print 00 0 Do not print
setting sheet print setting (when Always print 01 0
receiving) <FAX only> At times of error 10
8 FAX initial Report output (when 1: Do not print 0: Print 0 Print
setting receiving confidential
communications)
<FAX only>

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
8 1, 2 FAX initial Print document contents Do not print 00 1 At times of error
setting when transmitting (results Always print 01 0
sheet) <FAX only> At times of error 10
3 FAX initial Automatic printing of the 1: Yes 0: No 0 No Trigger printing of
setting record sheet when memory 200 entries.
is full
4-8 FAX initial Printing of the Setting range 00 to 23 0 0 hour For outside the set
setting communication record Binary input 2-digit input 0 range, the default
sheet at a designated time 0 value is used.
(hours) 0
0
9 1-6 FAX initial Printing of the Setting range 00 to 59 0 0 minute For outside the set
setting communication record Binary input 2-digit input 0 range, the default
sheet at a designated time 0 value is used.
(minutes) 0
0
0
7 FAX initial Printing of the 1: Output 0: Do not output 0 Do not output
setting communication record
sheet at a designated time
8 FAX initial ECM (valid except during 1: No 0: Yes 0 Yes ECM is on during
setting V.34: reflected in the V.21 communication in
DIS/DCS/DTC) the V.34 mode.
10 1-8 FAX initial Remote changeover Setting range Upper 4 bits 0 - F 0 5* When the value of
setting number setting Binary input Lower 4 bits 0 - F 1 C - F is set, the
*=A 0 default value of "5"
#=B 1 is set.
1
0
1
0
11 1-4 FAX initial Distinctive ring (DRD OFF 0000 0 OFF
setting setting) STANDARD 0001 0
Pattern 1 1000 0
Pattern 2 0100 0
Pattern 3 1100
Pattern 4 0010
Pattern 5 1010
ON (Australia) 0110
ON (New Zealand) 1110
ON (Hong Kong) 1001
5-8 Not used 0
1
1
0
12 1, 2 Not used 0
0
3, 4 FAX initial PBX setting OFF 00 0 OFF
setting (Germany and France only) Flash 01 0
ID (number) 10
5-8 FAX initial ID (number) setting Binary input 0 0 Enable when ID is
setting <Input the 1st digit when Setting range 0 to 15 0 set in "PBX setting."
dial inputting and dialing> When 10 -15 is selected, the default value of "0" 0
is set. 0
13 1-4 FAX initial ID (number) setting 2 Binary input 1 Not used Enable when ID is
setting <Input the 2nd digit when Setting range 0 to 15 1 set in "PBX setting."
dial inputting and dialing> When 10 - 12, 14, 15 are designated, do not use 0
numbers with those digits. 1
"-" when 13 is set.
5-8 FAX initial IID (number) setting 3 Binary input 1 Not used Enable when ID is
setting <Input the 3rd digit when Setting range 0 to 15 1 set in "PBX setting."
dial inputting and dialing> When 10 - 12, 14, 15 are designated, do not use 0
numbers with those digits. 1
"-" when 13 is set.

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
14 1 FAX initial External telephone 1: Yes 0: No 1 Yes
setting connection
2-8 Not used 0
1
0
0
0
0
0
15 1-8 Adjustment Signal sending level Binary input "00001010": -10dBm When set over the
value Setting range 0 to 26 (North America/China/ max. send level, the
When the set value is 27 - 255, it is regarded as 26. Singapore/Thailand/ max. value of the
The send level to the line is virtually the set value. Malaysia/Philippine/ destination is used.
Max. send level limitation: Hong Kong/Middle (For North America
China: 0dBm East/Other3) and China, there is
Australia, New Zealand, Taiwan: -10dBm (11 or "00001011": -11dBm no limitation on the
less) (Australia/New max. send level.)
Europe: -10dBm (9 or less) Zealand/India/Taiwan/
Indonesia: -5 to -13dBm Singapore: -6dBm Rusia)
India: -3dBm or less "00001001": -9dBm
Middle East, Slovakia, Other3: No limitation for the (Other country)
standards
Rusia: -11dBm
16 1-8 Not used "00000000": North America/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3
"00010000": China/Hong Kong
"00110000": India
"01010000": Indonesia/Thailand/Malaysia/
Philippine
"01100000": Singapore/South Africa
"10100000": Australia/Rusia
"10000000": Other country
17 1 FAX Automatic reduced 1: Normal 0: Reduction 0 Reduction
transmission transmission
setting
2 FAX Rotated transmission 1: No 0: Yes 0 Yes Rotated
transmission selection (A4 o A4R) transmission or not
setting depending on
orientation of the
document.
17 3 FAX Rotated transmission 1: No 0: Yes 0 Yes Rotated
transmission selection (B5R o B5) transmission or not
orientation of the
document.
(16K A4)
transmission selection (A5R o A5) transmission or not
orientation of the
document.
(INVOICE A5)
transmission selection transmission or not
setting (8.5 x 11 o 8.5 x 11R) depending on
orientation of the
document.
transmission selection (16K o 16KR) transmission or not
orientation of the
document.
(16K A4)
transmission selection transmission or not
setting (5.5 x 8.5R o 5.5 x 8.5) depending on
orientation of the
document.
(INVOICE A5)
8 FAX Page number printing 1: No 0: Yes 0 Yes
transmission
setting

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
18 1 FAX Designation of date and 1: Upper side of a 0: Outside of a 0 Outside of a
transmission source printing position document (in send data) document (outside send document
setting data)
2 FAX Quick online/Memory 1: Memory transmission 0: Quick online 0 Quick online
transmission transmission changeover transmission transmission
setting (quick online transmission)
3 FAX Designation of date and 1: Not apply 0: Apply 0 Apply For North America,
transmission source printing the sender is
setting always specified.
4 FAX Re-call permitted when 1: Re-call permitted 0: Re-call prohibited 1 Permitted
transmission busy when busy when busy
setting
5-8 FAX Number of re-calls when Binary input 0 2 times For outside the set
transmission busy Setting range North America: 1 to 14 0 range, the default
setting Australia/New Zealand/Singapore: 1 to 9 1 value is used.
U.K./France/Germany/Sweden: 1 to 10 0
Indonesia: 1 to 5 China: 1 to 3
Other country: 1 to 15
Number of recalls Set value x once
19 1-4 FAX Interval between re-calls Binary input "0100": 4 minutes For outside the set
transmission when busy Setting range Indonesia/Taiwan: 4 to 15 (Indonesia/Taiwan) range, the default
setting Other country: 1 to 15 "0011": 3 minutes value is used.
Re-call interval Set value x 1 minute (Other country)
5-8 FAX Number of re-calls at times Binary input "0010": 2 times For outside the set
transmission of communication error Setting range (China/Singapore/ range, the default
setting North America/Australia/New Zealand: Once only Indonesia/Thailand/ value is used.
U.K./France/Germany/Sweden/Indonesia: 1 to 5 Malaysia/India/
China: 1 to 3 Malaysia/India: 1 to 9 Philippine/Hong Kong/
Other country: 1 to 15 Taiwan)
Number of recalls Set value x once "0001": 1 time
(Other country)
20 1-4 FAX Re-call interval at times of Binary input "0011": 3 minutes For outside the set
transmission communication error Setting range (North America/ range, the default
setting Indonesia: 4 to 15 minutes Australia/New value is used.
Other country: 1 to 15 minutes Zealand)
Re-call interval Set value x 1 minute "0100": 4 minutes
(Indonesia)
"0001": 1 minute
(Other country)
5 FAX Re-call permitted at times of 1: Re-call permitted at 0: Re-call prohibited at 1 Permitted
transmission communication error times of communication times of communication
setting error error
20 6 FAX Automatic reduced printing 1: Discard 0: Reduction 0 Reduction
reception to fixed sizes
setting
7 FAX Setting to reduce and 1: Discard 0: Reduction 1 Discard When in reduction,
reception discard when printing 94% for all.
setting A3-11 x 17 (reduced
printing setting when
receiving A3)
8 FAX Reduced print setting when 1: Discard 0: Reduction 1 Discard
reception receiving letters
setting
21 1-4 FAX Setting of the number of Binary input 0 2 times If 0 is set, the call
reception automatic reception calls Setting range 0 sound will not be
setting Europe/Indonesia/Thailand: 0 to 9 times 1 sounded.
Australia/New Zealand: 2 to 4 times 0 (However, this does
Other country: 0 to 15 times not include the
nighttime FAX
mode.)
5 FAX Double-faced printing of 1: Double-faced printing 0: Double-faced printing 0 Double-faced
reception received data (double-faced permitted prohibited printing prohibited
setting reception setting)
6, 7 FAX Setting of received data Equal magnification/ 00 0 Equal
reception print conditions Reduction permitted magnification/
setting Equal magnification/ 01 0 Reduction
Division prohibited/ permitted
Reduction prohibited
Equal magnification/ 10
Division permitted
value
8 FAX Designated number 1: Receipt of designated 0: Receipt of designated 0 Receipt of
reception reception refusal setting number is refused (valid) number is not refused designated
setting (FAX) (invalid) number is not
refused (invalid)

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
22 1 FAX FAX delivery tray setting 1: Right tray 0: Center tray 0 Center tray
reception (without finisher attached)
setting FAX delivery tray setting 1: Right tray 0: Finisher tray Finisher tray
(with finisher attached)
2 (*) FAX delivery tray setting 1: Lower tray 0: Upper tray 0 Upper tray
(Upper/lower setting when
the 4K finisher is installed)
3 Device Staple setting 1: Yes 0: No 0 No
setting
4, 5 Device Staple position Rear 1 point 00 0 Rear 1 point
setting Front 1 point 01 0
Center 2 points 10
value
6, 7 FAX Selection of delivered sheet A4 or A3 00 0 A4 or A3 (8.5 x 11
reception size (8.5 x 11 or 11 x 17) or 11 x 17)
setting B5 or B4 01 0
(8.5 x 11 or 8.5 x 14)
A4 (8.5 x 11) 10
A4R (8.5 x 11R) 11
8 Valid/Invalid setting of FAX 1: Invalid 0: Valid 0 Valid
A4, letter threshold
23 1 FAX Setting for changing over to 1: Permitted 0: Prohibited (do not 0 Prohibited The number of calls
reception automatic reception during (changeover) changeover) is set in "Setting of
setting manual reception the number of calls
for changing over
from manual to
automatic
reception."
2-6 FAX Setting of the number of Binary input 1 to 9 times 0 9 times Function setting for
reception calls for changing over from Setting range 1 time intervals 1 "Setting for
setting manual to automatic The number of calls for changing Set value + 1 0 changing over to
reception (Selection setting 0 automatic reception
from manual reception to during manual
0
automatic reception) reception"
For outside the set
range, the default
value is used.
Functions only in
France.
23 7 Polling Polling protection 1: Do not protect 0: Protect 0 Protect
protection
setting
8 Switch to sorting in order of 1: Registered number 0: Search number order 0 Search number
numbers on the address list order order
24 1 Receiver off-hook (External 1: Warns off-hook state 0: Does not warn off- "0": Does not warn off- Limited by the TEL/
telephone) of the external hook state of the hook state of the LIU PWB.
telephone. external telephone. external telephone.
(North America/
Australia/New
Zealand/China/
Singapore/Indonesia/
Thailand/Malaysia/
India/Philippine/Hong
Kong/Taiwan/Middle
East/Other3)
"1": Warns off-hook
state of the external
telephone.
(Other country)
2-5 Not used 1
0
0
0
6 Scope of line sound monitor 1: All 0: Until NSF signal send/ 0 Until NSF signal
receive send/receive
7, 8 (*) Volume setting of call sound Volume level 9 00 1 Volume level 13 Related to BZ
(large) Volume level 11 01 0 Calling sound/
Volume level 13 10 Communication end
Volume level 15 11 sound (Normal,
Error)

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
25 1, 2 (*) Volume setting of call sound Volume level 3 00 0 Volume level 5 Related to BZ
(medium) Volume level 5 01 1 Calling sound/
Volume level 7 10 Communication end
Error)
3, 4 (*) Volume setting of call sound Volume level 0 00 1 Volume level 2 Related to BZ
(small) (no sound) Calling sound/
Volume level 1 01 0 Communication end
Volume level 3 11 Error)
5, 6 (*) Volume setting of line Volume level 9 00 1 Volume level 15 Line Monitor sound
monitor sound (large) Volume level 11 01 1 When on-hook
Volume level 13 10 Receiver off-hook
Volume level 15 11 warning sound
7, 8 (*) Volume setting of line Volume level 5 00 1 Volume level11 Line Monitor sound
monitor sound (medium) Volume level 7 01 1 When on-hook
Volume level11 11 warning sound
26 1, 2 (*) Volume setting of line Volume level 1 00 1 Volume level 5 Line Monitor sound
monitor sound (small) Volume level 3 01 0 When on-hook
Volume level 7 11 warning sound
3 Not used 0
4 Remote changeover 1: Changeover enable 0: Changeover enable 0 Only for call-in North America: This
permitted for call-out/call-in only for call-in SW is ignored and
changeover is
enabled for call-out/
call-in.
5-7 Setting of call time (T0 timer Setting range <Binary input> "001": 35 seconds For outside the set
setting) in automatic (Rusia) 30 seconds to 35 seconds: (Rusia) range, the default
transmission 5 seconds intervals "001": 45 seconds value is used.
(China) 30 seconds to 45 seconds (Other country)
(Other country) 30 seconds to 60 seconds:
15 seconds intervals
8 External telephone setting 1: No sound priority 0: Priority on external 0 Priority on
when no sound is set telephone send external telephone
send
SW Bit System
No. No. settings
27 1-8 External telephone off-hook Setting range 0ms to 2550ms 0 300ms
detection time Binary input 10ms intervals 0
0
1
1
1
1
0
28 1-8 Not used 0
29 1-8 Not used 0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
30 1-8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
31 1-4 Not used "1100": France/Germany
5 Document content print 1: Print 0: Not print 0 Not print
when sending (PC-Fax
(Internet Fax) report table)
6-8 Not used 1
0
1
32 1-4 T1 timer setting Setting range 30 to 105 seconds 0 40 seconds
Binary input 5 seconds intervals 0
1
0
5-8 Not used 0
0
0
0
33 1, 2 T4 timer setting 3 seconds 00 0 3 seconds +1.5 seconds at
Timer during automatic 4 seconds 01 0 times of manual
operation 5 seconds 10 operation
6 seconds 11
3 Not used 0
4 Selection of date and 1: North American 0: Follows the date 0 Follows the date
transmission source print format format setting. format setting.
language <Format>
5 EOL detection timer 1: 25 seconds 0: 13 seconds 0 13 seconds
6-8 Not used "010": North America
"011": Taiwan
"100": Thailand/Rusia/South Africa
34 1, 2 Not used 0
0
3-6 Modem transmission speed V.27ter 2400bps 0000 1 V.17 14400bps Setting in
(Other than V.34) (DCS) V.29 9600bps 0001 0 communication
V.27ter 4800bps 0010 0 other than V.34
V.29 7200bps 0011 0
V.33 14400bps 0100
V.17 14400bps 0101
V.33 12000bps 0110
V.17 14400bps 0111
V.17 14400bps 1000
V.17 9600bps 1001
V.17 12000bps 1010
V.17 7200bps 1011
V.17 14400bps 1100
V.17 14400bps 1101
V.17 14400bps 1110
V.17 14400bps 1111
7, 8 Fixing of modem speed Not fixed 00 0 Not fixed Setting in
during reception (Other than V.29-9600bps 01 0 communication
V.34) (DIS) V.27ter-4800bps 10 other than V.34
V.17-14400bps 11 Max .speed in
reception
35 1, 2 Coding capacity during JBIG/MMR/MR/MH 00 0 JBIG/MMR/MR/
transmission and reception MMR/MR/MH 01 0 MH
(V.34 communication) MR/MH 10
(reflected in DIS/DCS/DTC) MH 11
3, 4 Coding capacity during JBIG/MMR/MR/MH 00 0 JBIG/MMR/MR/
transmission and reception MMR/MR/MH 01 0 MH
(other than V.34 MR/MH 10
communication) (reflected MH 11
in DIS/DCS/DTC)
5, 6 Not used 1
1
7, 8 Image capacity when Very fine 00 0 Very fine
polling (Reflected in DTC) Fine 01 0
Small letters 10
Ordinary lettering 11

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
36 1-7 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
1
0
8 Confirmation of DIS 1: Twice 0: Once for NFS 0 Once for NFS Enable for other
reception when sending reception, twice for DIS reception, twice than V.34
reception for DIS reception
37 1-8 Not used 0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
38 1, 2 Protocol monitor No 00 0 No
Yes 10 0
Only at times of error 11
3 Line monitor display 1: Yes 0: No 0 No
4 EEPROM access prohibited 1: Access prohibited 0: Access permitted 0 Access permitted
5 Not used 0
6 SDT signal detection 1: Yes 0: No 0 No
7, 8 Timer setting (V.21-FSK) 6 seconds 00 0 20 seconds Enable for other
between flag-adrs 20 seconds 01 1 than V.34
30 seconds 10
120 seconds 11
39 1 Echo countermeasure (CED 1: 500ms 0: 75ms 0 75ms
tone sending interval) when
receiving
2 Echo countermeasure 1: 800ms 0: 500ms 0 500ms Enable for other
(setting of hold time than V.34
between DIS reception and
sending of signal) when
transmitting
3-6 Not used 0
0
0
1
7, 8 RTN sending line error rate 6line 00 1 60line Number of error
12line 01 0 lines in the STD
60line 10 standard
120line 11
40 1 CSI sending 1: No 0: Yes 0 Yes
2, 3 CED signal sending time 3 seconds 00 0 3 seconds Setting for the
4 seconds 01 0 ANSam signal is
5 seconds 10 performed using a
No 11 separate SW 51-7,
8 (V.8 mode
ANSam signal
sending time).
4 CED/ANSam detection time 1: 1000ms 0: 500ms 0 500ms
5, 6 Waiting time for start of 2.25 seconds 00 0 2.25 seconds
CED/ANSam sending 3 seconds 01 0
4 seconds 10
7, 8 Not used 0
0
41 1, 2 Start of CNG sending 0.5 seconds 00 "11": 2.0 seconds
1.0 second 01 (North America/
1.5 seconds 10 Taiwan/Middle East/
2.0 seconds 11 Other3/Rusia)
"00": 0.5 seconds
(Other country)
3 Time between DCS-TCF 1: 150ms 0: 75ms 0 75ms
4-8 Not used 0
1
0
0
0

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
42 1, 2 RCP sending count 3 times 00 0 3 times
6 times 01 0
9 times 10
12 times 11
3 RTC EOL sending count 1: 12 times 0: 6 times 0 6 times
4 F.A.S.T function 1: Yes 0: No 0 No Valid only in North
America.
5-8 Not used 0
1
1
1
43 1 V.34 mode function 1: V.34 invalid 0: V.34 valid 0 V.34 valid
(including polling when
calling)
2 V.34 mode function (on call 1: V.34 invalid 0: V.34 valid 0 V.34 valid
arrival)
3 V.34 mode function at times 1: V.34 invalid 0: V.34 valid 0 V.34 valid
of manual communication
4 Primary channel return 1: PPh 0: Sh 1 PPh
mode setting
5, 6 External telephone off-hook 48ms 00 0 96ms
detection time when 96ms 01 1
simulated voltage is applied 200ms 10
300ms 11
7 Reversion from the energy 1: Revert 0: Do not revert 1 Revert
saving state (excluding
preheat) when the external
telephone is off-hook
8 Not used 0
44 1 Echo suppressor tone 1: Without V33 0: With V33 0 With V33
setting No. 1
2 Echo suppressor tone 1: Without V17 0: With V17 0 With V17
setting No. 2
3 Echo suppressor tone 1: Without V29 0: With V29 1 Without V29
setting No. 3
4 Echo suppressor tone 1: Without V27 0: With V27 0 With V27
setting No. 4
5-8 Not used 0
1
1
1
45 1 Error handling when 1: Do not recognize error 0: Recognize errors 0 Recognize errors
transmission and receiving
RTN
2 Reception gain changeover 1: EYE-Q check only 0: "0" Reception & EYE- 0 "0" Reception &
when receiving Q check EYE-Q
3, 4 Transmission cable 0dB 00 0 0dB
amplitude equalizer 4dB 01 0
8dB 10
12dB 11
5-8 Not used 0
0
0
0
46 1-4 V.34 mode transmission Transmission speed = 2400(bps) x N 1 33600(bps) When set to 2400
speed Example: 2400(bps) x 12 = 28800(bps) 1 bps, "Symbol Rate"
2400 (bps) when N=0 1 for V.34 send must
33600 (bps) when N=15 0 be set to Disable.
5-8 V.34 mode receiving speed Receiving speed = 2400(bps) x N 1 33600(bps) When set to 2400
Example: 2400(bps) x 12 = 28800(bps) 1 bps, V.34 Symbol
2400 (bps) when N=0 1 Rate Mask (when
33600 (bps) when N=15 0 reception) must be
also changed.

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
47 1 3429 symbol rate 0: disable 1: enable 1 enable
transmission enable during
V.34 transmission
2 Symbol rate 3200 high 0: disable 1: enable 1 enable
carrier transmission enable
during V.34 transmission
3 Symbol rate 3200 low 0: disable 1: enable 1 enable
4 Symbol rate 3000 high 0: disable 1: enable 1 enable
5 Symbol rate 3000 low 0: disable 1: enable 1 enable
6 Not used 1
7 Symbol rate 2800 enable 0: disable 1: enable 1 enable
8 Symbol rate 2743 enable 0: disable 1: enable 1 enable
48 1-4 V.34 Symbol Rate Mask 2400 0000 0 3429/3200/3000/ For outside the set
(when receiving) 2400 0001 1 2800/2400 range, the default
2800/2400 0010 0 value is used.
3000/2800/2400 0011 1
3200/3000/2800/2400 0100
3429/3200/3000/2800/ 0101
2400
5-8 Not used 0
1
0
0
49 1-5 Not used 0
1
0
1
0
49 6 PIN code correspondence 1: Correspond 0: Do not correspond 0 Do not correspond FAX address
display limit
(displayed up to the
16th digit from the
front)
7, 8 Dial call waiting time 3.5 seconds 00 "01": 4 seconds This only functions
4 seconds 01 (U.K./Finland/Norway/ when dial tone
5 seconds 10 Denmark/ detection is OFF.
6 seconds 11 Netherlands/Italy/New
Zealand/Slovakia/
South Africa/Spain/
Portuguese/
Luxemburg/Belgium/
Czech/Hungary/
Greece/Poland)
"00": 3.5 seconds
(Other country)
50 1-7 Not used 1
0
1
0
0
1
1
8 Dial tone ON detection time 1: 1 second 0: 1.5 seconds 0 1.5 seconds
(during continuous
detection)
51 1-4 Time for prohibition of Binary input 200ms intervals 0 1600ms Enable for other
waiting at both speeds after Setting range 200 to 2800ms 0 than V.34
sending CFR/MCF 1600ms when "0000" is set. 0
0ms when "1111" is set. 0
5, 6 Not used 0
0
7, 8 V.8 mode ANSam signal 3 seconds 00 0 4 seconds
sending time 4 seconds 01 1
5 seconds 10
6 seconds 11

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
52 1-4 Lower limit of dial tone ON/ Setting range 40ms to 490ms "0010": 100ms (North This is only valid
OFF detection time (during 40 + N x 30 America/Australia/ during intermittent
intermittent detection) New Zealand/China/ DT detection.
Thailand/Malaysia/
Kong/Taiwan/Middle
East/Other3)
"0001": 70ms
(Other country)
5-8 Upper limit of dial tone ON/ Setting range 400ms to 1900ms "0011": 700ms (North This is only valid
OFF detection time (during 400 + N x 100 America/Australia/ during intermittent
intermittent detection) New Zealand/China/ DT detection.
Thailand/Malaysia/
Kong/Taiwan/Middle
East/Other3)
"1000": 1200ms
(Other country)
53 1, 2 Not used 0
0
3 Line current detection at 1: No 0: Yes "1": No
times of dial calling (North America/
Taiwan/Middle East/
Other3/Rusia)
"0": Yes
(Other country)
4 Dial tone detection 1: Yes 0: No "0": No (Australia/
New Zealand/China/
Indonesia/Thailand/
Malaysia/India/
Philippine/Hong Kong/
Taiwan/Middle East/
Other3/Rusia)
"1": Yes
(Other country)
53 5 Dial tone monitoring time 1: 17 seconds 0: 10 seconds "1": 17 seconds
(Germany/
Switcherland/Austria)
"0": 10 seconds
(Other country)
6 CNG detection when calling 1: CNG detection ON 0: CNG detection OFF 0 OFF For collision
FAX aversion
7, 8 DT/BT detection level -43dB 00 0 -43dB DT, BT common
-35dB 01 0
-33dB 10
-30dB 11
54 1, 2 DT/BT detection frequency Modem fixed 00 "00": Modem fixed For CTR21: 245Hz
range setting (About 308Hz to 517Hz) (Thailand/India) to 650Hz
420Hz to 680Hz 01 "01": 420Hz to 680Hz
360Hz to 440Hz 10 (China)
245Hz to 650Hz 11 "10": 360Hz to 440Hz
(Indonesia/Malaysia/
Middle East/Other3/
Rusia)
"11": 245Hz to 650Hz
(Other country)
3 Busy tone detection 1: No 0: Yes 0 Yes
4, 5 Busy tone detection interval 2 pulse 00 "00": 2 pulse (North
3 pulse 01 America/Australia/
4 pulse 10 New Zealand/China/
6 pulse 11 Singapore/Indonesia/
Thailand/Malaysia/
India/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3)
"01": 3 pulse
(Other country)
6, 7 DP dial pulse count NORMAL 00 "01": EXTEND
handling (Pulse=DIAL, 10=0) (Sweden)
EXTEND 01 "10": REVERSE
(Pulse=DIAL+1) (New Zealand)
REVERSE 10 "00": NORMAL
(Pulse=10-DIAL) (Other country)
8 Not used 0

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
55 1-8 Not used 0
56 1-4 Adjustment Make time (10PPS) setting Setting range 29 to 44ms "0100": 33ms
value Binary input 1ms intervals (Malaysia/Taiwan/
South Africa)
"0110": 35ms
(New Zealand/India)
"1000": 37ms
(Australia)
"1001": 38ms
(China/Singapore/
Thailand/Hong Kong)
"1011": 40ms
(Other country)
5-8 Adjustment Break time setting (10PPS) Setting range 56 to 71ms "0110": 62ms
value Binary input 1ms intervals (China/Singapore/
Thailand/Hong Kong)
"0111": 63ms
(Australia)
"1001": 65ms
(New Zealand/India)
"1011": 67ms
(Malaysia/Taiwan/
South Africa)
"0100": 60ms
(Other country)
57 1-4 Adjustment Minimum pause time Setting range 800ms to 950ms "0001": 810ms
value (10PPS) setting Binary input 10ms intervals (France)
"0000": 800ms
(Other country)
5-8 Adjustment Minimum pause time Setting range 450ms to 600ms 0 450ms Functions only in
value (20PPS) setting Binary input 10ms intervals 0 China and
0 Thailand.
0
SW Bit System
No. No. settings
58 1-4 Adjustment Make time (20PPS) setting Setting range 9 to 24ms "1010": 19ms (China/ Functions only in
value Binary input 1ms intervals Thailand/Hong Kong) China and
"1000": 17ms Thailand.
(Other country)
5-8 Adjustment Break time setting (20PPS) Setting range 26 to 41ms "0101": 31ms (China/ Functions only in
value Binary input 1ms intervals Thailand/Hong Kong) China and
"0111": 33ms Thailand.
(Other country)
59 1-4 Adjustment Setting of DTMF send level Setting range 0 to 15dB "0011": 3dB
value (high group) Binary input 1dB intervals (Other3/Rusia)
"0101": 5dB
(North America)
"0110": 6dB
(New Zealand/China/
Singapore/Thailand/
Philippine)
"1000": 8dB
(Australia/Indonesia/
Hong Kong/Middle
East/South Africa)
"1001": 9dB (India)
"0111": 7dB
(Other country)
5-8 Adjustment Setting of DTMF send level -2.0dB 0000 "1000": 2.0dB
value (low group) -1.5dB 0001 (New Zealand/China/
High group - Low group: -1.0dB 0010 Singapore/Indonesia/
level difference -0.5dB 0011 Thailand/Malaysia/
0.0dB 0100
Kong/Taiwan/Middle
0.5dB 0101
East/Other3/Rusia/
1.0dB 0110 South Africa)
1.5dB 0111 "1001": 2.5dB
2.0dB 1000 (North America)
2.5dB 1001 "1010": 3.0dB
3.0dB 1010 (Other country)
3.5dB 1011
4.0dB 1100
4.5dB 1101
5.0dB 1110
5.5dB 1111

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
60 1-8 Not used 0
61 1-8 Adjustment Setting of DTMF minimum Setting range 50 to 255ms 0 120ms
value pause time Binary input 1ms intervals 1
1
1
1
0
0
0
62 1-5 DTMF signal send time Setting range 70 to 310ms 0 110ms
Binary input 10ms intervals 1
0
1
1
6 Not used "0": North America/Australia/China/
Singapore/Indonesia/Thailand/Malaysia/
India/Philippine/Hong Kong/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3/Rusia
"1": Other country
7 DPMUTE control 1: ON 0: OFF 0 OFF Functions only in
Australia, New
Zealand, U.K.,
France, Germany,
Sweden.
8 Busy tone OFF non- 1: 300ms 0: 100ms 0 100ms Make shorter than
detection time the "busy tone OFF
detection time."
63 1, 2 Lower limit of busy tone ON 250ms 00 "00": 250ms (North
detection time 140ms 01 America/Australia/
450ms 10 New Zealand/China/
350ms 11 Singapore/Indonesia/
Thailand/Malaysia/
India/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3/
South Africa)
"01": 140ms
(Other country)
3, 4 Upper limit of busy tone ON 750ms 00 "10": 1000ms
detection time 650ms 01 (Australia/India)
1000ms 10 "11": 2850ms
2850ms 11 (Singapore/South
Africa)
"00": 750ms
(Other country)
5, 6 Lower limit of busy tone 250ms 00 "00": 250ms (North
OFF detection time 140ms 01 America/Australia/
450ms 10 New Zealand/China/
350ms 11 Singapore/Indonesia/
Thailand/Malaysia/
India/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3/
South Africa)
"01": 140ms
(Other country)
7, 8 Upper limit of busy tone 750ms 00 "10": 1000ms
OFF detection time 650ms 01 (Singapore/India/
1000ms 10 South Africa)
2850ms 11 "00": 750ms
(Other country)
64 1-4 Not used 0
0
0
0
5-8 Call signal OFF non- Setting range 0 to 1500ms "0110": 600ms (North
detection time Binary input 100ms intervals America/Australia/
Taiwan/Middle East/
Other3/Rusia)
"1010": 1000ms
(New Zealand)
"0100": 400ms
(Other country)

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
65 1-4 Lower limit of call signal ON Setting range 150ms to 300ms "0010": 170ms
time Binary input 10ms intervals (Australia)
"0000": 150ms
(Other country)
5-8 Upper limit of call signal ON Setting range 3000ms to 4500ms 0 3000ms
time Binary input 100ms intervals 0
0
0
66 1-4 Lower limit of call signal Setting range 0 to 1500ms 0 700ms When set to "0000,"
OFF time Binary input 100ms intervals 1 the default value is
1 set.
1
5, 6 Upper limit of call signal 6.5 seconds 00 "01": 10 seconds
OFF time 10 seconds 01 (Sweden/Indonesia)
15 seconds 10 "00": 6.5 seconds
20 seconds 11 (Other country)
7, 8 Not used 0
0
67 1-8 Not used 0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
68 1-8 Not used 0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
69 1-8 Not used 0
70 1-4 Not used 0
0
0
0
5 Manual calibration setting 1: Not execute 0: Execute 0 Execute
when sending
6 Manual calibration setting 1: Not execute 0: Execute 0 Execute
when a signal arrives
7, 8 Not used 0
0
71 1, 2 Reception/ Reception mode setting Automatic reception 00 0 Automatic Setting can be
forwarding Manual reception 01 0 reception made even without
setting Answerphone 10 the external
connection telephone.
3, 4 Image capacity when Very fine 00 0 Very fine
receiving Fine 01 0
(Reflect in DIS, Do not When small 10
reflect in DTC) Ordinary lettering 11
5, 6 Designation of reception By loaded cassette 00 0 By loaded
size (indicating the width of A4 01 0 cassette
reception capacity) B4 (B4, A4) 10
A3 (A3, B4, A4) 11
7, 8 Not used 0
0

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
72 1 Report output (when 1: Output 0: Do not output 0 Do not output
cancelled)
2 Report output (when 1: Output 0: Do not output 0 Do not output Internet Fax is set
refusing reception) by means of
<FAX only> SW155-8.
Irrespective of
"Always print" and
"Error," the results
sheet is not printed.
3 Printing of transmitted 1: Print 0: Do not print 0 Do not print The "Document
document contents at times contents printing
of F code communication (results sheet) at
<FAX only> times of
transmission"
setting takes
priority.
4 Not used 0
5 Designation of rotation 1: Vertical binding 0: Horizontal binding 0 Horizontal binding
direction when printing on
both sides and the rear side
6 Selection of error page 1: Do not output the 0: Output the error page 0 Output the error
output when error occurs error page page
during FAX reception
7 Selection of re-send page at 1: All pages 0: Error page and 0 Error page and The F code is
times of error onwards onwards compulsorily resent
to all pages.
8 Relay data output 1: No 0: Yes 0 Yes
73 1 Not used 0
2 F code communication error 1: Do not re-send 0: Re-send 0 Re-send Only when the
handling remote machine
function is enable.
3 F code password 1: Send with password 0: Disconnect with DCN 0 Disconnect with
transmission setting when DCN
the other party's machine
has no password capacity
4 Remaining receivable 1: 64KB 0: 128KB 0 128KB
memory
73 5 Setting of received 1: Output 1 page at a 0: Save and output en 0 Save and output
document output when time masse following en masse
receiving completion of reception following
completion of
reception
6, 7 Not used 0
0
8 Rotated printing 1: Prohibited 0: Permitted 0 Permitted
74 1-4 Magnification setting in Setting range 85% to 100% 0 90%
automatic reduction Binary input N x 1% + 85% 1
0
1
5 Determination of sub-scan 1: Priority to data width 0: Priority to data length 0 Priority to data
length (determination length
setting when selecting the
page)
6 Setting of protocol monitor 1: Offset or staple 0: No offset or No staple 0 No offset or No
print when setting offset staple
staple
7, 8 Not used 0
0
75 1-8 Not used 0
76 1-8 Not used 0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
77 1 Setting of the reception 1: B4 width (B4, A4) 0: A3 width (A3, B4, A4) 0 A3 width
width of 11 x 17 sheet
2 Not used 0
3 Operation Saving the setting contents 1: The set values are 0: The set values are not 0 The set values are
settings for a certain period after saved saved not saved
completion of scanning
4 Setting of communication 1: Error sound 0: No error sound 0 No error sound Valid in cases
error sound when there is except when the
no response from the other communication
party in FAX reception error completion
sound setting is
OFF.
5 Re-transmission at times of 1: Do not re-call 0: Re-call 0 Re-call
no response from the other
party
6-8 Not used 0
0
0
78 1 Setting to refuse reception 1: Specified number 0: Specified number 0 Specified number Only valid in cases
at times of manual reception rejection reception ignoring (OFF) reception ignoring where the
reception (FAX) designated number
reception refusal
setting (FAX) is
refused.
2 TSI judgment setting (no 1: Reception will be 0: Reception will be 0 Reception will be Only valid in cases
signal or all space) when refused permitted permitted where the
refusing reception from designated number
designated numbers reception refusal
setting (FAX) is
refused.
3 TSI judgment setting (No 1: Reception will be 0: Reception will be 0 Reception will be Only valid in cases
numbers and no space can refused permitted permitted where the
be used) designated number
reception refusal
setting (FAX) is
refused.
4 Not used 0
5, 6 Number of dial call pages at 1 page 00 0 1 page
times of quick online 1 page 01 0
transmission 2 pages 10
3 pages 11
7 Paper selection when 1: Priority on LTR 0: Priority on LTR/A4 0 Priority on LTR/A4
reception printing (LTR/A4) reduction rate reduction rate
8 Not used 0
79 1-8 Not used 0
|
80
81 1-8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
82 1-8 Not used "00000100": North America/China/Thailand/
Malaysia/Philippine/Taiwan/Rusia
"00001000": Singapore/Indonesia/India/
Hong Kong/Middle East
"00100100": Other3
"00101000": New Zealand/South Africa
"01100100": Australia
83 1-8 Not used "00000000": North America/Australia/
New Zealand/China/Singapore/Indonesia/
Thailand/Malaysia/India/Philippine/Hong
Kong/Taiwan/Middle East/Rusia/South Africa

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
84 1-8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
85 1-5 Reception gain correction Setting range 0 (+6.0dBm) to 24 (-6.0dBm) 0 0.0dBm
Binary input -0.5dBm intervals 1
1
0
0
6-8 Not used 0
0
0
86 1-4 Not used 0
0
0
0
5-8 Flag detection byte count Setting range 0 to 15byte 0 4byte When set to "0000,"
Binary input 1byte intervals 1 the default value is
0 set.
0
87 1, 2 Minimum flag count 2-flag 00 0 2-flag
between frames 3-flag 01 0
4-flag 10
5-flag 11
3 Not used 0
4 Ring detection signal select 1: Silicon DAA-RGDT 0: Ring detection circuit 0 Ring detection
signal circuit
5 V.17 carrier frequency 1: 1700Hz 0: 1800Hz 0 1800Hz
6 V.33 carrier frequency 1: 1700Hz 0: 1800Hz 0 1800Hz
7, 8 V17/V33/V29/V27terTCF 0x20 00 1 0x58
reception judgment EQM 0x40 01 0
threshold values 0x58 10
0x7f 11
88 1, 2 Primary channel foul back 0x20 00 1 0x58
EQM threshold value at 0x40 01 0
times of V.34 reception 0x58 10
0x7f 11
3-8 Not used 1
1
0
1
0
0
89 1-4 Symbol speed selection Setting range 0 (-6dBm) to 15 (+6dBm) 0 -3.0dBm
threshold 1 (Allowable Binary input 0, 1, 2: -6dBm 1
range for telephone line 3 to 13: 1dBm intervals 0
characteristics distortion 14: 5dBm 15: 6dBm 1
level)
5-8 Symbol speed selection Setting range 0 (-6dBm) to 15 (+6dBm) 1 0.0dBm
threshold 2 (Minimum S/N Binary input 0, 1, 2: -6dBm 0
allowable range level) 3 to 13: 1dBm intervals 0
14: 5dBm 15: 6dBm 0
90 1-4 Primary channel Setting range 0 (-8dB) to 15 (+7dB) 1 0.0dBm
communication speed Binary input 1dBm intervals 0
selection threshold value 0
0
5-8 High speed CD OFF fixing Setting range 0 (150ms) to 15 (1650ms) "0000": 150ms
time Binary input 100ms intervals (North America/
Australia/Norway/
Switcherland/Austria/
New Zealand/China/
Thailand/Malaysia/
India/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3)
"0010": 350ms
(Other country)

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
91 1, 2 LVCS monitoring cycle 0ms (Do not monitor) 00 1 20ms
10ms 01 0
20ms 10
30ms 11
3-8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
0
92 1-4 External connection volume Setting range 0: 0dBm 0 -12.0dBm Remote selection
0 to 8: -3.0dBm intervals 1 sound
8 to 12: -4.0dBm intervals 0
12 to 14: -8.0dBm intervals 0
15: f (mute)
5-8 Not used 0
0
0
0
93 1-8 Not used 0
|
94
95 1-8 Not used 1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
96 1-8 Not used 0
97 1-8 Not used 0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
98 1-5 Not used 1
1
0
1
0
6 Setting of timeout 0: Monitor 1: Do not monitor 0 Monitor
monitoring between frames
SW Bit System
No. No. settings
98 7, 8 Modem lightning protection 0 second 00 "00": 0 second
measures 20 seconds 01 (North America/
30 seconds 10 New Zealand/China/
40 seconds 11 Singapore/Indonesia/
Thailand/Malaysia/
Kong/Taiwan/Middle
East/Other3/Rusia)
"01": 20 second
(Other country)
99 1-8 Not used 0
100 1-8 CNG detection completion Setting range 0: Unlimited 0 45 seconds
time 1 to 255 seconds 0
1
0
1
1
0
1
101 1-8 Not used 0
|
108

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
109 1-8 Not used "10001010": U.K./France/Germany/Rusia
110 1-8 Not used 0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
111 1-8 Not used 1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
112 1-8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
113 1-8 Not used 1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
114 1-8 Not used 0
115 1-8 Not used "10010000": South Africa
116 1-8 Not used 0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
117 1-8 Not used "00001010": North America/China/
Singapore/Thailand/Malaysia/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Middle East/Other3
"00001011": Australia/New Zealand/India/
Taiwan/Rusia
118 1-8 Not used "00000010": North America/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3
"00010010": China/Hong Kong
"00110010": India
"01010010": Indonesia/Thailand/Malaysia/
Philippine
"01100010": Singapore/South Africa
"10100010": Australia/Rusia
119 1-8 Not used "00001011": North America/Indonesia/
Philippine/Taiwan/Middle East/Other3/Rusia
"00101011": Australia/New Zealand/China/
Singapore/Thailand/Malaysia/India/
Hong Kong

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
120 1-8 Not used 0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
121 1-8 Not used "00111000": Other3/Rusia
"01011001": North America
"01101000": New Zealand/China/Singapore/
Thailand/Philippine
"01111000": Malaysia/Taiwan
"10001000": Indonesia/Hong Kong/
Middle East/South Africa
"10011000": India
122 1-8 Not used "01001011": Malaysia/Taiwan/South Africa
"01101001": New Zealand/India
"10010110": China/Singapore/Thailand/Hong
Kong
123 1-8 Not used "00010000": France
124 1-8 Not used "10100101": China/Thailand/Hong Kong
125 1-8 Not used 0
126 1-8 Not used "00000000": North America/New Zealand/
China/Indonesia/Thailand/Malaysia/
Philippine/Hong Kong/Taiwan/Middle East/
Other3
"00000010": India
"00000011": Australia/Singapore/
South Africa
127 1-8 Not used "00000100": China/Indonesia/Thailand/
Malaysia/Philippine/Hong Kong
"00000110": North America/Australia/
Taiwan/Middle East/Other3
"00001010": New Zealand
"00100100": Singapore/India/South Africa
"01000110": Rusia
128 1-8 Not used "00100000": Australia
129 1-8 Not used "01110100": Sweden/Indonesia
130 1-8 Not used "00000000": Australia/China/Indonesia/
Thailand/Malaysia/India/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Taiwan/Middle East/Other3
"00000010": Rusia
"00010000": North America/Singapore
"00110010": Sweden
"01000000": New Zealand
Thailand/Malaysia/India/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Taiwan/Middle East/Other3
132 1-8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
133 1-8 Not used "00000100": North America/China/Thailand/
Malaysia/Philippine/Taiwan/Rusia
"00001000": Singapore/Indonesia/India/
Hong Kong/Middle East
"00100100": Other3
"00101000": New Zealand/South Africa
Thailand/Malaysia/India/Philippine/Hong
Kong/Taiwan/Middle East/Rusia/South Africa
135 1-8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
136 1-8 Not used 0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
137 1-8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
138 1-8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
139 1-8 Not used 1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
140 1-8 Not used 0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
Norway/Switcherland/Austria/New Zealand/
China/Singapore/Indonesia/Thailand/
Malaysia/India/Philippine/Hong Kong/
Taiwan/Middle East/Other3

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
142 1-8 Not used 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
143 1-8 Not used 0
|
144
145 1-8 Not used 1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
146 1-8 Not used 0
|
153
154 1 Addition of Content-X- 1: Add IGNORE 0: Do not add field 0 Do not add
CIAJWNETFAX field (in
internet Fax send)
2 Nighttime FAX mode setting 1: Do not enter the 0: Enter the nighttime 0 Enter the For internet Fax
<when Internet Fax nighttime FAX mode FAX mode nighttime FAX reception setting
reception is not set> mode YES, refer to
SW154-3.
3 Pseudo-nighttime mode 1: Do not enter the 0: Enter the pseudo- 0 Enter the pseudo- For internet Fax
setting <when Internet Fax pseudo-nighttime mode nighttime mode (do not nighttime mode reception setting
reception is set> (enter the nighttime enter the nighttime NO, refer to
mode) mode) SW154-2.
4 Internet Fax Processing at times of mail 1: Print the main text of 0: Do not print mail 0 Do not print Exclude confirmed
reception reception (when the mails letters sent mails
setting Content-X-CIAJWNETFAX
field is not yet received)
5 Internet Fax Setting of reduced printing 1: Discard 0: Reduce 1 Discard When in reduction,
reception when receiving A3 by 94% for all.
setting Internet Fax
6 Internet Fax Setting of reduced printing 1: Discard 0: Reduce 1 Discard
reception when receiving letters by
setting Internet Fax
7 Setting of text printing when 1: Print the main text of 0: Do not print mail 0 Do not print Print process only
receiving mails without mails letters for mail text without
attached files an attached file
(Remains Error for
the communication
result.)
8 Resolution type of internet 1: mm type 0: inch type 0 inch type
Fax
155 1-6 Not used 1
1
0
0
1
0
7 Selection of the Internet Fax 1: North American 0: Follows the date 0 Follows the date
date and transmission format format setting. format setting.
source print language
<format>
8 Report output (when 1: Output 0: Do not output 0 Do not output FAX is set by
reception is refused) means of SW72-2.
<Internet Fax only> Irrespective of
"Always print" and
"Error," the results
sheet is not printed.

SW Bit System
No. No. settings
156 1 Display setting at times of 1: Do not display trouble 0: Display trouble 0 Display trouble
NW trouble
2 Job log memory at times of 1: Treat as 1 successive 0: Treat each 0 Treat each
successive communication communication communication as 1 communication as
1
3 Valid/Invalid setting of 1: Invalid 0: Valid 1 Invalid
Internet Fax A4, letter
threshold
4-7 Not used 0
0
1
0
8 Setting of mail reception 1: SMTP 0: POP3 0 POP3
method
157 1-5 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
6 (*) Setting of transmitted data 1: ON 0: OFF 0 OFF
upper limit value (FTP/
desktop/shared folder)
7, 8 (*) Transmitted data upper limit 50Mbyte 00 0 150Mbyte
(FTP/desktop/shared folder) 150Mbyte 01 1
300Mbyte 10
158 1-8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
159 1 Not used 0
2 (WEB) Received data E-mail 1: Valid 0: Invalid 0 Invalid
Control forwarding
setting
3 (WEB) Prohibition of forwarded 1: Prohibited 0: Permitted 0 Permitted
Control table registration
setting
4 (WEB) Prohibition of forwarded 1: Prohibited 0: Permitted 0 Permitted
Control table correction
setting
5 (WEB) Prohibition of forwarding 1: Prohibited 0: Permitted 0 Permitted
Control permission revision
setting
6 (WEB) Received data print 1: Print on error 0: Always print 1 Print on error
Control conditions in user transfer
setting
7 Not used 0
8 Received data print 1: Print on error 0: Always print 1 Print on error
conditions at Administrator
transmission
160 1-8 Not used 0
161 1-6 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
0
7 Pseudo nighttime setting 1: Do not enter the 0: Enter the pseudo- 0 Enter the pseudo-
<External accumulation pseudo-nighttime mode nighttime mode (do not nighttime mode
mode> Only for OSA (enter the nighttime enter the nighttime
supporting farm mode) mode)
8 Not used 0
162 1-8 Not used 0
|
170
(*): Change can be made in the system setting for theMX-5500N/6200N/7000N only.

[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
MX-7000N
1. Self diag C. Self diag operation and related work flow

The machine always monitors its own state.
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum-
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine
displays the trouble message.
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble, A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the nearly expired or is expired.
machine to minimize the damage. When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
may not be stopped.
A. Function and purpose
The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a the LCD.
trouble.)
Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
stopped on detection of a trouble.) tion.
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair, cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
improving the repair efficiency.) sages must be cleared by a simulation.
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This Monitors the machine
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con- conditions.
sumable part.)
Detects/analyzes
B. Self diag message kinds the content.
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by

the user. (Paper jam, consumable part life Warning
Trouble/Warning
expiration, etc.)
Serviceman Warning of troubles which can be recovered only
by a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, Trouble
etc.)
Other The machine is stopped.
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
consumable part, etc.)
The content is displayed.
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
Other
Warning A consumable NO
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime.
Trouble YES
Troubleshoot the cause. Replace or supply

the consumable part.
Repair
Cancel the self-

diagnostic message with
the diagnostics
(test commands).
Reset
Standby state
MX-7000N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 1

D. Breakdown sequence
(1) Breakdown mode list
There are following cases of the breakdown mode.
Operatable mode
Judgment Copy scan Scan Notification
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan FAX FAX List
block (including Scan pull To Print to FAST
push send print print
interruption) HDD host
FAX board trouble MFP F6 { { { { U1 U1 { { U1
(North
America
only)
HDD trouble E7 (03)
SCU communication E7 (80), A0-02 { { { {
trouble
PCU communication E7 (90), A0-01 {
trouble L8-20
Backup battery voltage fall U1 (01) {
Printer port system trouble F9 (00) { { { { U {
* 13 * 14
Controller fan motor L4-30
trouble
Connection trouble (MFP E7 (60 65),
detection) A0 (10 12, 20)
Serial number U2-30
discrepancy
Memory error (included U2 (00, 05, 10, {
not installed the expansion 11, 22, 23, 24,
RAM) 25)
HDD registration data sum U2 (50) {
error
Image memory trouble, E7 (00, 01, 05, {
decode error 06, 09)
Personal counter not- PC--- {
installed trouble
Network error Not displayed. { { { { { { { {
(Only the Operatable Operatable
message for but send but send
each trouble is NG NG
displayed.)
Laser trouble PCU E7 (20, 28, 29), {
L6 (10) * 10
Connection trouble (PCU E7 (50), A0 (21)
detection)
PCU section troubles C1 (01, 02), {
(motor, fusing, etc.) C4 (00, 01), * 10
F2 (02, 04, 05,
40, 64, 70, 74),
H2, H3, H4, H5,
H7 (10 12, 14),
L4 (excluding L4-
30), L8 (01, 02),
U2 (90, 91)
PCU color system E7 (21), F2 (41 {
troubles 43, 65 67, 71 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9
73, 75 77) * 10
Paper feed tray 1 trouble F3-12 U3 { { { { U3 U3 U3 {
* 10
* 10
* 10
* 10
Paper feed tray 5 trouble U6 (09, 20 24, U3 { { { { U3 U3 U3 {
51) * 10
Staple trouble F1 (10) U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 {
* 10
After-process trouble F1 (excluding 10) U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 {
* 10
Inserter trouble (except for F1 (61, 62) U5 U5 U5 U5 U5 U5 U5 U5 {
communication trouble) * 10
Other troubles EE (EL, EU, EC) { { { { { { { { {
Process control trouble F2 (39, 44, 45, { { { { { { { { {
(PCU detection) 49 53, 58, 78) * 12

Operatable mode
Judgment Copy scan Scan Notification
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan FAX FAX List
block (including Scan pull To Print to FAST
push send print print
interruption) HDD host
Connection trouble (SCU SCU E7 (70, 75),
detection) A0 (22)
SCU color system UC (02) { { { {
troubles
Document control trouble UC (20) { { { {
EEPROM system U2 (80, 81) { { { {
Scanner section troubles L1, L3 { { { {
(mirror motor, lens, copy
lamp)
CCD troubles (shading, E7 (10, 11, 14) { { { {
etc.)
DSPF trouble U5 U6 U6 U6 U6 U6 { { { {
DSPF back surface CCD E6 (10, 11, 14) U7 U7 U7 U7 U7 { { { {
troubles (shading, etc.)
Process control trouble MFP F2 (80 87, 90) { { { { { { { { {
(Only history is left.) (MFP
detection)
Process control trouble PCU F2 (92 94) { { { { { { { { {
(Only history is left.) (PCU
detection)
{: Operation enabled, : Operation disabled
U 1: The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line.
U 3: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
U 4: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section.
U 5: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the inserter connection paper exit port.
U 6: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode.
U 7: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the single surface scan mode.
* 9: When the color mode is set to Disable in the "Color mode disable setting" of the system setting, the operation is enabled in the Black
mode.
* 10: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
* 12: Trouble display message is displayed in 2 lines. (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
* 13: When FIERY option is installed, PCL will not operate. (Machine specifications) (Exclusive)
* 14: Only FIERY option list print (self print) is disabled.
* Trouble mode process
Machine operation enabled under some conditions.
The operations excluding the trouble mode are enabled (READY). For the mode where operations are disabled, only setting is enabled and
the operation disable message is made.
(NOT READY)
(Display) A dialog is displayed when a trouble occurs. For the mode where operations are enabled, [OK] button is added to the message.
When operations are disabled, [OK] button is not displayed, and the message is displayed until the trouble is cancelled.
* For U 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, perform the following procedures. (In order to avoid patent interference.)
When a trouble is detected during a job, the machine operation is terminated. (Trouble display/without [OK] key)
When a trouble is detected during other than a JOB, the trouble display is not made and the trouble position cannot be selected. (The dis-
play is not turned off. Machine/Button)
Troubles which disable the machine operations
The trouble display is always made, and all the modes cannot be set.
Writing to the trouble memory
Writing of a same trouble to the trouble memory can be selected with SIM26-35. When this simulation is set, any trouble is written to the trou-
ble memory unconditionally.
(Sim26-35)
0: Only once. If same as the previous one, it is not saved. (Default)
1: Any time. Though same as the previous one, it is saved.

(2) Power ON trouble detection sequence.
When the power is turned ON and each trouble of H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6 (09) is stored, it is judged as a trouble immediately.
* For A0 and E7 troubles (connection troubles), only the connection trouble information is saved, and they are not regarded as save troubles.
(There is no way to delete the communication trouble information.) (Detected every time when the power is turned ON.)
MFP event
Each block
manager
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, U1, U2, U6 trouble check When the power is turned on,
Trouble check is made in each block when initializing check is made in each block.
and data are sent to the MFPcnt. Communication of trouble status
H3, H4, H5: Saved in the MFPcnt. [Trouble code] [Trouble status]
U1: Saved in the MFPcnt.
U2: Saved in each block.
U6-09: Saved in the PCU.
sim task
(Trouble cancel sequence)

When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16
(To the corresponding
SIM 13: U1 trouble cancel block) Trouble cancel
SIM 14: H3, H4, H5 (Color mode Trouble cancel command (The trouble memory is
cancel) initialized.)
SIM 15: LCC (U6) trouble cancel
SIM 16: U2 trouble cancel
Trouble cancel status is communicated.
2. Trouble code list

Trouble code
Trouble
Main Sub Trouble code content Remarks Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
detection
code code
A0 01 PCU ROM abnormality MFP
02 SCU ROM abnormality MFP
10 Controller ROM error MFP
11 IF version discrepancy (CTL-PCU) MFP
12 IF version discrepancy (CTL-SCU) MFP
20 Machine level error (CTL detection) MFP
21 Machine level error (PCU detection) PCU
22 Machine level error (SCU detection) SCU
C1 01 Charger cleaner trouble PCU
02 Charger cleaner motor lock PCU
C4 00 PTC (Pre-Transfer Charger) high voltage output trouble PCU
01 PTC (Pre-Transfer Charger) cleaner trouble PCU
CE 00 Communication error other than CE-01 08 The trouble MFP
01 Network controller trouble code is not MFP
02 Not-specified mail/FTP server error displayed, MFP
03 Communication error in image send but only the MFP
message for
04 FTP server account name or authentication password input MFP
each trouble
error
is displayed.
05 FTP server directory input error MFP
06 POP3 server access error MFP
07 POP3 server authentication check error MFP
08 POP3 server timeout error MFP
E6 10 Back-face shading trouble (Black correction) (DSPF) SCU
11 Shading trouble (White correction) (DSPF) SCU
14 Back-face SCAN-ASIC trouble (DSPF) SCU
E7 00 System memory access error MFP
01 System data trouble MFP
03 HDD trouble MFP
04 HDD-ASIC trouble (DSK model only) MFP
05 Local memory access error MFP

Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code code
E7 06 Decode error trouble: Compression decode error MFP
(A compression file cannot decompressed.)
09 Local memory combination error MFP
10 Shading trouble (Black correction) SCU
11 Shading trouble (White correction) SCU
14 SCAN-ASIC trouble SCU
20 LSU BD detection trouble PCU
21 LSU LD deterioration trouble PCU
28 LSU control ASIC connection abnormality PCU
29 LSU-ASIC frequency abnormality PCU
50 Engine connection trouble PCU
60 Controller connection trouble (Engine detection) MFP
61 Controller connection trouble (Engine) MFP
62 Controller connection trouble (Scanner) MFP
65 PWB information sum error (Controller detection) MFP
70 Scanner connection trouble SCU
75 PWB information sum error (Scanner detection) SCU
80 Communication trouble between the MFP and the scanner MFP
(MFP detection)
90 Communication trouble between the MFP and the PCU MFP
(MFP detection)
EE EC Auto developer adjustment trouble (The sample level for PCU
every rotation is other than 128 r 10.)
EL Auto developer adjustment trouble (Overtoner abnormality) PCU
EU Auto developer adjustment trouble (Under-toner PCU
abnormality)
F1 00 Finisher communication trouble (Machine side detection) PCU
03 Finisher oscillation motor trouble PCU
08 Finisher stapler shift motor trouble PCU
10 Finisher staple motor abnormality PCU
15 Finisher tray lift motor abnormality PCU
19 Finisher pre-alignment motor abnormality PCU
20 Finisher after-alignment motor abnormality PCU
21 Finisher interface fan motor abnormality PCU
22 Finisher rear edge assist motor trouble PCU
23 Shutter trouble PCU
30 Communication trouble between the finisher and the saddle PCU
31 Finisher folding motor trouble PCU
32 Communication trouble between the finisher and the punch PCU
unit
33 Finisher punch shift motor trouble PCU
34 Finisher punch motor trouble PCU
37 Finisher backup RAM trouble PCU
38 Finisher punch backup RAM trouble PCU
41 Positioning plate motor trouble PCU
42 Guide motor trouble PCU
43 Side alignment motor trouble PCU
44 Stitch motor rear trouble PCU
45 Stitch motor front trouble PCU
46 Paper pushing motor trouble PCU
50 Finisher incompatibility trouble PCU
51 Sensor connector connection trouble PCU
52 Micro SW trouble PCU
60 Communication trouble between the finisher and the PCU
inserter
61 Inserter EEPROM trouble PCU
62 Inserter reverse sensor trouble PCU
F2 02 Toner supply abnormality (K2) PCU
04 Toner cartridge improper (K2) PCU
05 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K2) PCU
39 Process thermistor trouble PCU
40 Toner empty sensor abnormality (K) PCU
41 Toner empty sensor abnormality (C) PCU
42 Toner empty sensor abnormality (M) PCU
43 Toner empty sensor abnormality (Y) PCU
44 Black exclusive image density sensor trouble (Transfer belt PCU
surface reflection ratio abnormality)
45 Color exclusive image density sensor trouble (Calibration PCU
plate surface reflection ratio abnormality)
49 LSU thermistor trouble PCU

Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code code
F2 50 K phase sensor sensing trouble PCU
51 CL phase sensor sensing trouble (C) PCU
52 CL phase sensor sensing trouble (M) PCU
53 CL phase sensor sensing trouble (Y) PCU
58 Process humidity sensor trouble PCU
64 Toner supply abnormality (K) PCU
65 Toner supply abnormality (C) PCU
66 Toner supply abnormality (M) PCU
67 Toner supply abnormality (Y) PCU
70 Toner cartridge improper (K) PCU
71 Toner cartridge improper (C) PCU
72 Toner cartridge improper (M) PCU
73 Toner cartridge improper (Y) PCU
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K) PCU
75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (C) PCU
76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (M) PCU
77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (Y) PCU
78 Registration exclusive image density sensor trouble PCU
(Transfer belt surface reflection ratio abnormality)
80 Half tone process control 1st patch reference value trouble MFP
(K)
(C)
(M)
(Y)
84 Half tone process control 2nd patch reference value trouble MFP
(K)
(C)
(M)
(Y)
92 High-density process control density correction error (C) PCU
93 High-density process control density correction error (M) PCU
94 High-density process control density correction error (Y) PCU
F3 12 Tray 1 lift-up trouble PCU
22 Tray 2 lift-up trouble PCU
F6 00 Communication trouble between the MFP and the FAX Refer to FAX manual for details
01 FAX board EEPROM read/write error
04 FAX MODEM operation trouble
21 Combination error between the TEL/LIU PWB and the FAX
soft switch
30 Access error to power controller on the FAX board (FAX
detection)
97 FAX PWB incompatibility trouble
98 Combination error between the FAX-BOX PWB destination
information and the machine destination information.
F9 00 Communication trouble between the controller and the MFP
printer controller (FIERY option)
H2 00 Detection thermistor open (TH1_AD2) of the non-contact PCU
thermistor
01 Lower thermistor open (TH_LM) PCU
02 Sub thermistor open (TH_US) PCU
03 Non-contact thermistor compensation thermistor open PCU
(TH1_AD1)
04 External heating thermistor open (TH_EX1) PCU
05 Fusing external heating thermistor open (TH_EX2) PCU
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU
01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU
02 Sub thermistor fusing section high temperature trouble PCU
(TH_US)
04 External heating thermistor high temperature trouble PCU
(TH_EX1)
05 Fusing external thermistor high temperature trouble PCU
(TH_EX2)
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU

Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code code
H4 01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU
02 Sub thermistor fusing section low temperature trouble PCU
(TH_US)
04 External heating thermistor fusing section low temperature PCU
trouble (TH_EX1)
30 Detection thermistor input abnormality (TH_UM) PCU
H5 01 5 continuous detection of POD1 not-reached jam PCU
H7 10 Low temperature detection during the temperature control PCU
reset operation after stopping the alarm in a JOB (HL_UM)
11 Low temperature detection during the temperature control PCU
reset operation after stopping the alarm in a JOB (HL_LM)
reset operation after stopping the alarm in a JOB (HL_US)
reset operation after stopping the alarm in a JOB (HL_EX1)
L1 00 Mirror feed trouble SCU
L3 00 Mirror return trouble SCU
L4 02 Paper feed motor lock trouble PCU
03 Fusing motor lock trouble PCU
04 Developing motor trouble (BK) PCU
05 Developing motor trouble (CL) PCU
06 Transfer belt separation position sensor trouble PCU
08 Waste toner motor lock PCU
09 Resist motor lock PCU
12 Secondary transfer separation trouble PCU
13 Fusing external heating separation trouble PCU
30 Controller fan motor trouble MFP
31 Paper exit cooling fan F lock PCU
32 Power cooling fan 1 lock PCU
34 LSU cooling fan trouble PCU
35 Fusing exhaust fan lock PCU
36 Fusing suction fan lock PCU
37 Charger cooling fan lock PCU
38 Machine ventilation fan center lock PCU
39 Machine ventilation fan right lock PCU
40 Ozone fan 1 lock PCU
43 Paper exit cooling fan center lock PCU
44 Power cooling fan 2 lock PCU
L6 10 Polygon motor lock detection PCU
L8 01 No full wave signal PCU
02 Full wave signal width abnormality PCU
20 Power controller communication trouble MFP
PC -- Personal counter not installed MFP
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP
U2 00 EEPROM read/write error (MFP detection) MFP
05 HDD/SRAM/EEPROM data discrepancy MFP
10 SRAM user authentication index check sum error MFP
11 EEPROM check sum error (MFP detection) MFP
22 SRAM memory check sum error MFP
23 MFPC section SRAM memory individual data check sum MFP
error
24 SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum MFP
error
25 Flash memory user authentication counter check sum error MFP
30 Serial number data discrepancy (MFP l PCU) MFP
50 HDD section individual data check sum error (MFP) MFP
80 EEPROM read/write error (SCU detection) SCU
81 Adjustment value check sum error (SCU detection) SCU
90 EEPROM read/write error (PCU detection) PCU
91 Adjustment value check sum error (PCU detection) PCU
U5 00 SPF communication trouble SCU
16 SPF fan motor trouble SCU
30 SPF tray lift-up trouble SCU
31 SPF tray lift-down trouble SCU
U6 09 LCC lift motor trouble PCU
20 LCC communication trouble PCU
21 LCC transport motor trouble PCU
22 LCC 24V power abnormality PCU

Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code code
U6 23 LCC tray descending trouble (reverse winding detection) PCU
24 LCC tray lock detection trouble PCU
51 LCC incompatibility trouble PCU
UC 02 CPT-ASIC trouble SCU
20 Document control module trouble SCU
21 DOCC (Document Control) PWB not-detected (DSK model SCU
only)
3. Details of trouble code A0-21 Machine level error (PCU detection)

A0-01 PCU ROM abnormality Trouble content Combination error between the machine
production/remodeling and the firmware
Trouble content PCU ROM content trouble Section PCU
Section MFP Case 1 Cause Combination error between the machine
Case 1 Cause Firmware upgrade is not made properly due to production/remodeling and the firmware
power OFF, etc. Check and Check the combination between the machine
Check and Use SIM49-1 to upgrade the firmware. remedy production/remodeling and the firmware.
remedy
A0-22 Machine level error (SCU detection)

A0-02 SCU ROM abnormality
Trouble content Combination error between the machine
Trouble content SCU ROM content trouble production/remodeling and the firmware
Section MFP Section SCU
Case 1 Cause Some part of SFU is not upgraded during Case 1 Cause Combination error between the machine
upgrading of the firmware. production/remodeling and the firmware
Check and Use SIM49-1 to execute the firmware. Check and Check the combination between the machine
remedy remedy production/remodeling and the firmware.
A0-10 Controller ROM error C1-01 Charger cleaner trouble
Trouble content SFU combination error in the controller Trouble content The charger cleaner does not complete shift
Section MFP operation during the specified time.
Case 1 Cause SFU upgrade was not properly made when Section PCU
upgrading the firmware. Case 1 Cause Charger unit trouble
Check and Controller firmware upgrade Check and Check the charger unit
remedy remedy
Case 2 Cause RE sensor, HP sensor, charger cleaner motor, and
PCU PWB troubles, harness connection trouble
A0-11 IF version discrepancy (CTL-PCU) Check and 1) Check the sensor, the motor, and the PCU
remedy PWB.
2) Check the harness connection between the
Trouble content Combination error between CTL and PCU sensor, the motor and the PCU PWB.
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Combination error between CTL and PCU
Check and Check the firmware combination between CTL and C1-02 Charger cleaner motor lock
remedy PCU.
Trouble content When the charger cleaner motor is rotating, an

excess motor current over the specified level is
A0-12 IF version discrepancy (CTL-SCU)
detected.
Section PCU
Trouble content Combination error between CTL and SCU Case 1 Cause Charger cleaner motor trouble
Section MFP Check and Check the charger cleaner motor
Case 1 Cause Combination error between CTL and SCU remedy
Check and Check the firmware combination between CTL and Case 2 Cause PCU PWB trouble, harness connection trouble
remedy SCU. Check and 1) Check the PCU PWB.
remedy 2) Check harness connection between the
motor and the PCU PWB.
A0-20 Machine level error (CTL detection)
Trouble content Combination error between the machine

Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Combination error between the machine
Check and Check the combination between the machine
remedy production/remodeling and the firmware.

C4-00 PTC (Pre-Transfer Charger) high CE-02 Not-specified mail/FTP server error
voltage output trouble
Trouble content The specified mail server, FTP server, and SMB
server are not found
Trouble content A trouble signal is detected during PTC high
voltage output. Section MFP
Section PCU Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble
Case 1 Cause Charger wire breakage Check and Check to insure that the network cable is securely
Check and Check the charger unit. remedy connected.
remedy Case 2 Cause Network setup trouble
Case 2 Cause PTC high voltage PWB trouble Check and 1) Check that the connected network supports
Check and Replace the PTC high voltage PWB. remedy TCP/IP protocol.
remedy 2) Check from Web page that the Primary/
Secondary E-mail Server Address or the FTP
Case 3 Cause PCU PWB trouble
server/Desktop PC/SMB server address as
Check and Replace the PCU PWB.
the destination is properly set.
remedy
3) When the above address is described with
Case 4 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble the Hostname, check that the DNS server is
Check and Check connection of the connector and the properly set or not.
remedy harness. Case 3 Cause SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB server trouble
Check and Check the SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB
remedy server for any trouble.
C4-01 PTC (Pre-Transfer Charger) cleaner
trouble
CE-03 Communication error in image send
Trouble content Shifting the PTC cleaner is not completed within
the specified time. Trouble content The specified server does not respond during
Section PCU image send.
Case 1 Cause Cleaner mechanism trouble Section MFP
Check and Check the cleaner mechanism. Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble
remedy Check and Check to insure that the network cable is securely
Case 2 Cause HP sensor trouble remedy connected.
Check and Replace the HP sensor. Case 2 Cause SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB server trouble
remedy Check and Check the SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB
Case 3 Cause Cleaner motor trouble remedy server for any trouble.
Check and Replace the cleaner motor.
remedy
Case 4 Cause PCU PWB trouble CE-04 FTP server account name or
Check and Replace the PCU PWB. authentication password input error
remedy
Case 5 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble
Trouble content The entered FTP server account name or the
Check and Check connection of the connector and the
authentication password is invalid.
remedy harness.
The entered SMB server log-in name or the
password is invalid.
Section MFP
CE-00 Communication error other than Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble
CE-01 08 Check and Check to insure that the network cable is securely
remedy connected.
Trouble content Another communication error occurs. Case 2 Cause The FTP server account name registered as the
Section MFP destination or the password for the account is
incorrect.
Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble
Check and Check to insure that the FTP server account name
Check and Check to insure that the network cable is securely
remedy registered as the destination or the password for
remedy connected.
the account is correct.
Case 3 Cause The SMB server account name registered as the
destination or the password for the account is
CE-01 Network controller trouble incorrect.
Check and Check to insure that the SMB server account name
Trouble content Network controller and its peripheral circuit trouble remedy registered as the destination or the password for
Section MFP the account is correct.
Case 1 Cause Network controller and its peripheral circuit trouble
Check and 1) Check the network controller and its
remedy peripheral circuit.
2) Output the NIC Config Page and check the
NIC version.
3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.

CE-05 FTP server directory input error E6-10 Back-face shading trouble (Black
correction) (DSPF)
Trouble content The entered FTP server directory is invalid.
The entered SMB server folder is invalid.
Trouble content CCD black scan level abnormality when the copy
Section MFP lamp is turned off.
Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble Section SCU
Check and Check to insure that the network cable is securely Case 1 Cause Installation error of the CCD unit flat cable
remedy connected. Check and Check the installing state of the flat cable to the
Case 2 Cause The FTP server account name registered as the remedy CCD unit.
destination or the password for the account is
Case 2 Cause CCD unit abnormality
incorrect.
Check and Check the CCD unit.
Check and Check to insure that there exits the FTP server remedy
remedy directory registered as the destination.
Case 3 Cause DSPF PWB abnormality
Case 3 Cause The SMB server account name registered as the
Check and Check the DSPF PWB.
destination or the password for it is incorrect.
remedy
Check and Check to insure that there exists the SMB server
remedy folder registered as the destination.
E6-11 Shading trouble (White correction)

CE-06 POP3 server access error (DSPF)
Trouble content The specified mail server (POP3) is not found. Trouble content CCD white scan level abnormality when the copy
(POP3 server access error) lamp is on.
Section MFP Section SCU
Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble Case 1 Cause Installation error of the CCD unit flat cable
Check and Check to insure that the network cable is securely Check and Check the installing state of the flat cable to the
remedy connected. remedy CCD unit.
Case 2 Cause Network setup error Case 2 Cause Dirt on the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
Check and 1) Check that the connected network supports plate.
remedy TCP/IP protocol. Check and Clean the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
2) Check the Web page to insure that the POP3 remedy plate.
server address is correctly set. Case 3 Cause Copy lamp lighting trouble
3) If the above address is described in Check and Check the installing state of the flat cable to the
Hostname, check to insure that the DNS remedy copy lamp unit.
server is correctly set. Case 4 Cause CCD unit abnormality
Case 3 Cause POP3 server trouble Check and Check the CCD unit.
Check and Check the POP3 server for any trouble. remedy
remedy Case 5 Cause DSPF PWB abnormality
Check and Check the DSPF PWB.
remedy
CE-07 POP3 server authentication check
error
E6-14 Back-face SCAN-ASIC trouble (DSPF)
Trouble content The entered POP3 server account name or the
authentication password is invalid. (POP3 server Trouble content Written register value cannot be read correctly
authentication check error) Section SCU
Section MFP Case 1 Cause DSPF PWB abnormality
Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble Check and Check the DSPF PWB.
Check and Check to insure that the network cable is securely remedy
remedy connected.
Case 2 Cause The POP3 server account name or the password
registered for the account is incorrect. E7-00 System memory access error
Check and Check to insure that the POP3 server account
remedy name or the password for the account is correct. Trouble content System memory trouble (Tandem memory cannot
be guaranteed.)
Access to system memory cannot be made.
CE-08 POP3 server timeout error Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Expansion memory installation error
Trouble content The specified mail server (POP3) does not Check and Check installation of the system expansion
respond. (POP3 server timeout error) remedy memory.
Section MFP Case 2 Cause Garbled data
Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble Check and 1) Use SIM60-01 to check memory read/write
Check and Check to insure that the network cable is securely remedy 2) Replace the expansion memory (if installed.)
remedy connected. 3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Case 2 Cause POP3 server trouble Case 3 Cause Dirt on the memory pin
Check and Check the POP3 server for any trouble. Check and Clean the memory pin with alcohol.
remedy remedy

* When E7-00 is in the following combination where system mem-
ory Slot 2 (inside) and Slot 1 (outside) operate normally but a E7-05 Local memory access error
hard error occurs.
(Combination of system memory (Slot 1, Slot 2) Trouble content Local memory cannot be accessed.
Section MFP
System memory Operation guarantee Case 1 Cause Local memory installation abnormality
When turning
No. Slot 2 Slot 1 Check and Check the installing state of the local memory.
Hard Soft on the power
(Inside) (Outside) remedy
1 Since the Case 2 Cause Dirt on local memory pin
machine is not Check and Clean the local memory pin with alcohol.
booted, the remedy
trouble display is Case 3 Cause Garbled data
not made.
Check and 1) Use SIM60-01 to check memory read/write.
2 256MB { { Normal operation remedy 2) Replace the local memory.
3 512MB { { Normal operation 3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
4 256MB 256MB { { Normal operation
* Combination where local memory Slot operate normally (Refer to
E7-09) but a hard error occurs.
8 256MB { { Normal operation
E7-06 Decode error trouble: Compression
9 512MB { { Normal operation
decode error (A compression file
cannot decompressed.)
E7-01 System data trouble
Trouble content A decode error occurs when forming an image.
Trouble content MFP data trouble occurs. Section MFP
Section MFP Case 1 Cause Compression data abnormality
Case 1 Cause MFP image transfer trouble Check and 1) Check the installing state of the PWB. (PCI
Check and 1) Check the connection state of the MFPcnt remedy bus)
remedy PWB connector. 2) When an error occurs during a FAX job,
2) Replace the MFPcnt PWB. check the installation of the FAX PWB. In the
other cases, check the installation of the
MFPcnt PWB and HDD.
E7-03 HDD trouble 3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Case 2 Cause HDD connection abnormality
Check and Check the HDD connection.
Trouble content HDD connection trouble
remedy
File control area data trouble (when FAT is broken)
Case 3 Cause Data are garbled in image compression/send.
Section MFP
Check and 1) Check the installation of the PWB. (PCI bus)
Case 1 Cause The HDD is not properly installed to the MFPcnt
remedy 2) When an error occurs during a FAX job,
PWB
check the installation of the FAX PWB. In the
Check and 1) Check installation of the HDD of the MFPcnt other cases, check the installation of the
remedy PWB. MFPcnt PWB and HDD.
2) Check connection of the harness of the 3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
MFPcnt PWB.
Case 4 Cause MFPcnt PWB abnormality
3) Use SIM62-2 and -3 to check read/write from/
Check and Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
to the HDD.
remedy
Case 2 Cause The HDD does not work properly.
Case 5 Cause Local memory access error
Check and Replace the HDD.
Check and Check and execute remedy similarly to E7-05.
remedy
remedy
Case 3 Cause MFPcnt PWB trouble
remedy
E7-09 Local memory combination error
E7-04 HDD-ASIC trouble (DSK model only) Trouble content Combination error of installation of local slot
memory
Section MFP
Trouble content An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when
Case 1 Cause DIMM of other than 1GB is installed to the slot.
booting.
Check and Check the combination of installed DIMM.
Section MFP
remedy
Case 1 Cause HDD-ASIC abnormality
Check and Check installation of the HDD-ASIC on the MFPcnt * When the following combination (E7-09) where operation is not
remedy PWB. performed properly is used.
Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Local memory Operation guarantee When turning on
No.
Slot 4 Hard Soft the power
1 E7-09
2 256MB { E7-09
3 512MB { E7-09
4 1GB { { Normal operation
5 1GB or more E7-09

E7-10 Shading trouble (Black correction) E7-21 LSU LD deterioration trouble
Trouble content CCD black scan level abnormality when the copy Trouble content The color laser does not light up normally.
lamp is turned off. Section PCU
Section SCU Case 1 Cause Disconnection or improper connection of harness
Case 1 Cause Installation error of the CCD unit flat cable and connector between LD PWB and LSUcnt PWB
Check and Check the installing state of the flat cable to the Check and Check connection of the harness of each PWB
remedy CCD unit. remedy inside the LSU.
Case 2 Cause CCD unit abnormality Case 2 Cause Y/M/C laser deterioration
Check and Check the CCD unit. Check and 1) Use SIM61-1 to check the LSU operation.
remedy remedy 2) Replace the LSUcnt PWB.
Case 3 Cause SCU PWB abnormality 3) If the trouble cannot be removed by the
Check and Check the SCU PWB. above 1) to 2), replace the LSU.
remedy
E7-28 LSU control ASIC connection

E7-11 Shading trouble (White correction) abnormality
Trouble content CCD white reference plate scan level abnormality Trouble content Access error between the CPU of the PCU PWB
when the copy lamp is on. and the LSU control ASIC
Section SCU Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Installation error of the CCD unit flat cable Case 1 Cause Communication connector connection trouble
Check and Check the installing state of the flat cable to the between the PCU PWB and the LSUcnt PWB
remedy CCD unit. (interface PWB), or harness trouble
Case 2 Cause Dirt on the mirror, the lens, or the reference white Check and Check the connector connection between the PCU
plate. remedy PWB and the LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB), or
Check and Clean the mirror, the lens, or the reference white check the harness.
remedy plate. Case 2 Cause PCU PWB or LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB)
Case 3 Cause Copy lamp lighting trouble trouble
Check and Check the installing state of the flat cable to the Check and Replace the PCU PWB or the LSUcnt PWB
remedy copy lamp unit. remedy (interface PWB).
Case 4 Cause CCD unit abnormality
Check and Check the CCD unit.
remedy E7-29 LSU-ASIC frequency abnormality
Case 5 Cause SCU PWB abnormality
Check and Check the SCU PWB. Trouble content Oscillation trouble of the external oscillator used in
remedy LSU-ASIC and the internal oscillation circuit
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Trouble of the oscillator on the LSU-ASIC PWB,
E7-14 SCAN-ASIC trouble the resistor and capacitor for the oscillation circuit,
and the LSU-ASIC itself.
Trouble content Written register value cannot be read correctly Check and Replace the LSUcnt PWB.
Section SCU remedy
Case 1 Cause SCU PWB abnormality
Check and Check the SCU PWB.
remedy E7-50 Engine connection trouble
Trouble content Unknown PWB identification information is

E7-20 LSU BD detection trouble detected in the PCU PWB.
Section PCU
Trouble content LSU BD signal is not detected. Case 1 Cause A PWB which is incompatible with the machine
Section PCU specifications is connected.
Check and 1) Replace the PCU PWB.
Case 1 Cause Disconnection or improper connection of harness
remedy 2) Replace the LSU PWB.
and connector between LD/BD PWB and LSUcnt
PWB Case 2 Cause A firmware which is incompatible with the machine
Check and Check connection of the harness of each PWB specifications is used.
remedy inside the LSU. Check and Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Case 2 Cause 1) Optical axis shift remedy
2) BK laser deterioration, power reduction Case 3 Cause LSU PWB connection trouble
3) BD PWB trouble Check and Check the LSU PWB connection.
Check and 1) Use SIM61-1 to check the LSU operation. remedy
remedy 2) Replace the LSUcnt/BD PWB. Case 4 Cause LSU PWB trouble
3) If the trouble cannot be removed by the Check and Replace the LSU PWB.
above 1) to 2), replace the LSU. remedy

E7-60 Controller connection trouble (Engine E7-75 PWB information sum error (Scanner
detection) detection)
Trouble content Unknown PWB kind information is detected in the Trouble content EEPROM PWB information sum error
MFPcnt PWB. Section SCU
Section MFP Case 1 Cause 1) EEPROM device trouble
Case 1 Cause A PWB which is not compatible with the machine 2) EEPROM device contact failure
specifications is connected. 3) Device access error due to electrical noises
Check and Replace the controller PWB. Check and Replace the scanner control PWB.
remedy remedy
Case 2 Cause A firmware which is not compatible with the
machine specifications is applied.
Check and Check the kind and the version of the firmware. E7-80 Communication trouble between the
remedy MFP and the scanner (MFP detection)
E7-61 Controller connection trouble Trouble content Communication establishment error/Framing/

Parity/Protocol error
(Engine) Section MFP
Case 1 Cause SCU PWB connector connection trouble
Trouble content Controller connection trouble Check and Check the connector connection between the SCU
Compatibility trouble between the controller and remedy PWB and the MFPcnt PWB.
the engine Case 2 Cause Harness trouble between the SCU PWB and the
Section MFP MFPcnt PWB
Case 1 Cause Combination trouble of the controller PWB and the Check and Check the harness between the SCU PWB and the
engine remedy MFPcnt PWB.
Check and Check the controller PWB. Case 3 Cause Broken connector pin of the SCU PWB mother
remedy Check the combination between the controller board
PWB and the engine. Check and Check grounding of the machine.
remedy
E7-62 Controller connection trouble

(Scanner) E7-90 Communication trouble between the
MFP and the PCU (MFP detection)
Trouble content Controller connection trouble
Compatibility trouble between the controller and Trouble content Communication establishment error/Framing/
the scanners Parity/Protocol error
Section MFP Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Combination trouble between the controller PWB Case 1 Cause PCU PWB connector connection trouble
and the scanner Check and Check the connector connection between the PCU
Check and Replace the controller PWB. remedy PWB and the MFPcnt PWB.
remedy Check the combination between the controller Case 2 Cause Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the
PWB and the scanner. MFPcnt PWB
Check and Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the
remedy MFPcnt PWB.
E7-65 PWB information sum error Case 3 Cause Broken connector pin of the PCU PWB mother
(Controller detection) board
Check and Check grounding of the machine.
remedy
Trouble content EEPROM PWB information sum error
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause 1) EEPROM device trouble
2) EEPROM device contact failure
EE-EC Auto developer adjustment trouble
3) Device access error due to electrical noises (The sample level for every rotation is
Check and Replace the MFPcnt PWB. other than 128 r 10.)
remedy
Trouble content When the automatic development adjustment is

executed, the sample level for each rotation is not
E7-70 Scanner connection trouble 128 r 10.
<Detection only with SIM25-2, no trouble memory,
Trouble content Unknown PWB identification information is only display>
detected in the SCU PWB. Section PCU
Section SCU Case 1 Cause Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
Case 1 Cause SCU PWB trouble developing voltage trouble, toner density trouble,
Check and Replace the SCU PWB. developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble
remedy Check and Use SIM25-2 to execute the auto developer
Case 2 Cause A firmware which is incompatible with the machine remedy adjustment.
specifications is connected.
Check and Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
remedy

EE-EL Auto developer adjustment trouble F1-10 Finisher staple motor abnormality
(Overtoner abnormality)
Trouble content Staple operation trouble
Trouble content The sample level is 76 or below, or the control Section PCU
voltage is 208 or above. Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
<Detection only with SIM25-2, no trouble memory, overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble
only display> Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple
Section PCU remedy motor (FFSM).
Case 1 Cause Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/ Replace the finisher control PWB.
developing voltage trouble, toner density trouble,
developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM25-2 to execute the auto developer F1-15 Finisher tray lift motor abnormality
remedy adjustment.
Trouble content Lift motor trouble
Section PCU
EE-EU Auto developer adjustment trouble Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
(Under-toner abnormality) overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the tray lift
remedy motor (FTLM).
Trouble content The sample level is 178 or above, or the control
Replace the finisher control PWB.
voltage is 51 or below.
<Detection only with SIM25-2, no trouble memory, Case 2 Cause Interlock switch (black bar-shape switch under the
only display> upper tray) operation
Section PCU Check and Check that there is nothing on the interlock switch.
remedy If there is, remove it.
Case 1 Cause Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
developing voltage trouble, toner density trouble,
developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM25-2 to execute the auto developer
F1-19 Finisher pre-alignment motor
remedy adjustment. abnormality
Trouble content Pre-alignment motor trouble

F1-00 Finisher communication trouble Section PCU
(Machine side detection) Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble
Trouble content Communication line test error when turning on the Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the pre-
power or after canceling an exclusion simulation. remedy alignment motor (FFJM).
Communication error with the finisher Replace the finisher control PWB.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Malfunction due to electrical noises
Check and Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel.
F1-20 Finisher after-alignment motor
remedy abnormality
Case 2 Cause PCU finisher connector or harness connection
error or disconnection
Trouble content After-alignment motor trouble
Check and Check the connector and harness in the
Section PCU
remedy communication line.
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
Case 3 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble
Check and Replace the finisher control PWB.
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the after-
remedy
remedy alignment motor (FRJM).
Case 4 Cause Control (PCU) PWB trouble Replace the finisher control PWB.
remedy
F1-21 Finisher interface fan motor
F1-03 Finisher oscillation motor trouble abnormality
Trouble content Oscillation motor operation abnormality Trouble content Interface transport fan motor trouble
Section PCU
Section PCU
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the fan motor
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the motor
remedy (FJFM).
remedy (FSWM).
F1-08 Finisher stapler shift motor trouble
Trouble content Stapler shift motor operation abnormality

Section PCU
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple
remedy motor (FSM).

F1-22 Finisher rear edge assist motor F1-32 Communication trouble between the
trouble finisher and the punch unit
Trouble content Rear edge assist motor operation trouble Trouble content Finisher and punch unit communication error
Section PCU Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Motor trouble, HP sensor trouble, harness Case 1 Cause Malfunction due to electrical noises
disconnection, finisher control PWB trouble Check and Cancel by turning OFF/ON the power.
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the rear remedy
remedy edge assist motor. Case 2 Cause Connector/harness connection error or
Replace the finisher control PWB. disconnection between the finisher and the punch
unit
Check and Check the connector and the harness in the
F1-23 Shutter trouble remedy communication line.
Case 3 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble
Trouble content Shutter operation trouble Check and Replace the finisher control PWB.
remedy
Section PCU
Case 4 Cause Control (PCU) PWB trouble
Case 1 Cause Motor trouble, HP sensor trouble, harness
disconnection, finisher control PWB trouble Check and Replace the control (PCU) PWB
remedy
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the bundle
remedy paper exit motor.
F1-33 Finisher punch shift motor trouble
F1-30 Communication trouble between the Trouble content Punch shift motor operation abnormality
finisher and the saddle Section PCU
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble, punch
Trouble content Communication error between the finisher and the
control PWB trouble
saddle unit
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch
Section PCU
remedy shift motor (FPSM).
Case 1 Cause Malfunction due to electrical noises. Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the
Check and Turn ON/OFF the power to cancel the error. punch control PWB.).
remedy
Case 2 Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the
connector and the harness between the finisher F1-34 Finisher punch motor trouble
and the saddle unit.
remedy communication line. Trouble content Punch motor operation abnormality
Case 3 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble. Saddle control PWB Section PCU
trouble. Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
Check and Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble, punch
remedy saddle control PWB. control PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch
remedy motor (FPNW).
F1-31 Finisher folding motor trouble Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the
punch control PWB.).
Trouble content Sensor input value abnormality

Section PCU F1-37 Finisher backup RAM trouble
Case 1 Cause Sensor breakage, harness disconnection, finisher
control PWB trouble
Trouble content Backup RAM data garbled
Check and Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the
Section PCU
remedy bookbinding position sensor (FFPD).
Replace the finisher control PWB. Case 1 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble, malfunction due to
electrical noises
Check and Replace the finisher control PWB.
remedy
F1-38 Finisher punch backup RAM trouble
Trouble content Punch unit backup RAM data garbled

Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Punch control PWB trouble, malfunction due to
electrical noises
Check and Replace the punch control PWB.
remedy

F1-41 Positioning plate motor trouble F1-50 Finisher incompatibility trouble
Trouble content Positioning plate motor operation trouble Trouble content Detection of finisher incompatible with MX-5500N/
Section PCU 6200N/7000N
Case 1 Cause Motor trouble, HP sensor trouble, harness Section PCU
disconnection, finisher control PWB trouble Case 1 Cause Connection of the AR-F13, etc. which is
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper incompatible with MX-5500N/6200N/7000N is
remedy positioning plate motor. detected.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Check and Connect the MX-FNX3/MX-FNX4.
remedy
F1-42 Guide motor trouble

F1-51 Sensor connector connection trouble
Trouble content Guide motor operation trouble
Section PCU Trouble content Sensor operation trouble
Case 1 Cause Motor trouble, HP sensor trouble, harness Section PCU
disconnection, finisher control PWB trouble Case 1 Cause Sensor trouble, harness disconnection, finisher
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the guide control PWB trouble
remedy motor. Check and Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the guide HP
Replace the finisher control PWB. remedy sensor, the paper pushing plate HP sensor, and
the paper pushing plate lead edge sensor.
F1-43 Side alignment motor trouble
Trouble content Side alignment motor operation trouble

F1-52 Micro SW trouble
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Motor trouble, HP sensor trouble, harness Trouble content Micro SW operation trouble
disconnection, finisher control PWB trouble Section PCU
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the Case 1 Cause Sensor trouble, harness disconnection, finisher
remedy alignment motor. control PWB trouble
Replace the finisher control PWB. Check and Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the inlet port
remedy cover open/close sensor and the paper exit cover
open/close sensor.
F1-44 Stitch motor rear trouble Replace the finisher control PWB.
Trouble content Rear stitch motor operation trouble

F1-60 Communication trouble between the
Section PCU
finisher and the inserter
disconnection, finisher control PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the rear Trouble content Communication error between the finisher and the
remedy stitch motor. inserter
Replace the finisher control PWB. Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Malfunction due to electrical noises.
Check and Turn ON/OFF the power to cancel the error.
F1-45 Stitch motor front trouble remedy
Trouble content Front stitch motor operation trouble connector and the harness between the finisher
Section PCU and the inserter. Finisher control PWB trouble,
inserter control PWB trouble
disconnection, finisher control PWB trouble Check and Check the connector and the harness in the
remedy communication line. Replace the finisher control
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the front
PWB. Replace the inserter control PWB.
remedy stitch motor.
F1-61 Inserter EEPROM trouble

F1-46 Paper pushing motor trouble
Trouble content EEPROM trouble
Trouble content Paper pushing motor operation trouble Section PCU
Section PCU Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble, finisher control PWB trouble,
inserter control PWB trouble
disconnection, finisher control PWB trouble Check and Replace the finisher control PWB.
remedy Replace the inserter control PWB.
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
remedy pushing motor.

F1-62 Inserter reverse sensor trouble F2-39 Process thermistor trouble
Trouble content Sensor adjustment failure Trouble content Process thermistor open
Case 1 Cause Sensor trouble, harness disconnection, finisher Case 1 Cause Process thermistor harness connection trouble
control PWB trouble, inserter control PWB trouble Check and Check the connection of the harness and
Check and Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the inlet port remedy connector of the process thermistor.
remedy cover open/close sensor and the paper exit cover Case 2 Cause Process thermistor trouble
open/close sensor. Check and Check the connection of the harness and
Replace the finisher control PWB. remedy connector of the process thermistor.
Replace the inserter control PWB. Case 3 Cause PCU PWB trouble
Check and Check the PCU PWB.
remedy
F2-02 Toner supply abnormality (K2)
Trouble content Toner end with the remaining quantity of 25% or F2-40 Toner empty sensor abnormality (K)
more.
The toner supply time exceeds 5 times as much as
Trouble content Toner empty sensor output abnormality. Sample
the specified time.
level 25 or less or 231 or above.
Section PCU
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Toner motor section connector harness trouble
Case 1 Cause The connector is not installed.
Check and Check the connector connection of the toner motor
Check and Check the connection of the connector harness to
remedy section.
remedy the PCU PWB. Check the connection of the toner
Check the connector harness (TM) connection to
empty sensor.
the main PWB.
Case 2 Cause Connector harness trouble
Case 2 Cause Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble.
Check and Check the harness disconnection.
Piezoelectric sensor abnormality
remedy
Check and 1) Check the toner density sensor output.
Case 3 Cause Cartridge trouble
remedy (SIM25-1)
2) Check that the toner transport pipe is not Check and Check the cartridge connection.
clogged between the toner cartridge and the remedy
developing unit. Replace the toner cartridge
(CRUM) if necessary. Intermediate hopper
replacement F2-41 Toner empty sensor abnormality (C)
3) If replacement of the toner cartridge (CRUM)
does not clear the trouble, check the
developing unit.
level 25 or less or 231 or above.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause The connector is not installed.
F2-04 Toner cartridge improper (K2) Check and Check the connection of the connector harness to
remedy the PCU PWB. Check the connection of the toner
Trouble content Improper data are detected in the CRUM contents empty sensor.
when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is Case 2 Cause Connector harness trouble
detected. Check and Check the harness disconnection.
Section PCU remedy
Case 1 Cause An improper cartridge is inserted. Case 3 Cause Cartridge trouble
Toner cartridge trouble Check and Check the cartridge connection.
Check and Replace the toner cartridge. remedy
remedy
F2-42 Toner empty sensor abnormality (M)

F2-05 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K2)
Trouble content CRUM cannot be read or written. level 25 or less or 231 or above.
Case 1 Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the Case 1 Cause The connector is not installed.
connector and the harness between the PCU and Check and Check the connection of the connector harness to
the toner cartridge. remedy the PCU PWB. Check the connection of the toner
Check and Check the connector and the harness between the empty sensor.
remedy PCU and the toner cartridge. Case 2 Cause Connector harness trouble
Case 2 Cause CRUM trouble Check and Check the harness disconnection.
remedy Case 3 Cause Cartridge trouble
Case 3 Cause PCU PWB trouble Check and Check the cartridge connection.
Check and Replace the PCU PWB. remedy
remedy

F2-43 Toner empty sensor abnormality (Y) F2-49 LSU thermistor trouble
Trouble content Toner empty sensor output abnormality. Sample Trouble content The detection temperature is out of the range of
level 25 or less or 231 or above. -28qC to 78qC.
Case 1 Cause The connector is not installed. Case 1 Cause LSU thermistor harness connection trouble
Check and Check the connection of the connector harness to Check and Check the connection of the LSU thermistor
remedy the PCU PWB. Check the connection of the toner remedy harness and connector.
empty sensor. Case 2 Cause LSU thermistor trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Case 2 Cause Connector harness trouble Check and Replace the LSU thermistor. Replace the PCU
Check and Check the harness disconnection. remedy PWB.
remedy
Case 3 Cause Cartridge trouble
Check and Check the cartridge connection. F2-50 K phase sensor sensing trouble
remedy
Trouble content Detection is made by interruption of light in the
sensor section of the projection rib on the drum
F2-44 Black exclusive image density sensor drive gear to control the BK drum phase. The
trouble (Transfer belt surface detection signal cannot be acquired and phase
control cannot be made.
reflection ratio abnormality)
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Sensor connector connection trouble
Trouble content The transfer belt surface is scanned by the image Check and Check the sensor connector connection.
density sensor before starting the process control, remedy
and adjust the sensor gain so that the output is
Case 2 Cause Dirt on the sensor light emitting section, or
kept at a certain level. However, the output is not
installation trouble
within the specified range though the senor gain is
Check and Check for dirt on the sensor or check the
adjusted.
remedy installation state.
Section PCU
Case 3 Cause Drum drive gear upper rib breakage, sensor
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble
trouble between PCU PWB and the image density
Check and If there is no trouble in the rib, replace the sensor.
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
remedy (Use SIM30-1 "DHPD_K" to check interruption or
cleaning trouble, calibration plate solenoid
transmission of light.)
operation trouble
Check and Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
remedy sensor gain adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed,
check the sensor, the harness and the calibration
F2-51 CL phase sensor sensing trouble (C)
plate solenoid operation for any trouble. If the
adjustment is completed, check the transfer belt Trouble content Detection is made by interruption of light in the
surface state. sensor section of the projection rib on the drum
drive gear to control the color drum (C) phase. The
detection signal cannot be acquired and phase
F2-45 Color exclusive image density sensor control cannot be made.
trouble (Calibration plate surface Section PCU
reflection ratio abnormality) Check and Check the sensor connector connection.
remedy
Trouble content The calibration plate surface is scanned by the Case 2 Cause Dirt on the sensor light emitting section, or
image density sensor before starting the process installation trouble
control, and adjust the sensor gain so that the Check and Check for dirt on the sensor or check the
output is kept at a certain level. However, the remedy installation state.
output is not within the certain level though the Case 3 Cause Drum drive gear upper rib breakage, sensor
senor gain is adjusted. trouble
Section PCU Check and If there is no trouble in the rib, replace the sensor.
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection remedy (Use SIM30-1 "DHPD_C" to check interruption or
trouble between PCU PWB and the image density transmission of light.)
sensor, image density sensor dirt, calibration plate
dirt, calibration plate solenoid operation trouble
check the sensor and the harness operation for
any trouble. If the adjustment is completed, check
the calibration plate solenoid operation.

F2-52 CL phase sensor sensing trouble (M) F2-64 Toner supply abnormality (K)
Trouble content Detection is made by interruption of light in the Trouble content Toner end with the remaining quantity of 25% or
sensor section of the projection rib on the drum more.
drive gear to control the color drum (M) phase. The The toner supply time exceeds 5 times as much as
detection signal cannot be acquired and phase the specified time.
control cannot be made. Section PCU
Section PCU Case 1 Cause Toner motor section connector harness trouble
Case 1 Cause Sensor connector connection trouble Check and Check the connector connection of the toner motor
Check and Check the sensor connector connection. remedy section.
remedy Check the connector harness (TM) connection to
Case 2 Cause Dirt on the sensor light emitting section, or the main PWB.
installation trouble Case 2 Cause Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble.
Check and Check for dirt on the sensor or check the Piezoelectric sensor abnormality
remedy installation state. Check and 1) Check the toner density sensor output.
Case 3 Cause Drum drive gear upper rib breakage, sensor remedy (SIM25-1)
trouble 2) Check that the toner transport pipe is not
Check and If there is no trouble in the rib, replace the sensor. clogged between the toner cartridge and the
remedy (Use SIM30-1 "DHPD_M" to check interruption or developing unit. Replace the toner cartridge
transmission of light.) (CRUM) if necessary. Intermediate hopper
replacement
F2-53 CL phase sensor sensing trouble (Y) does not clear the trouble, check the
developing unit.
Trouble content Detection is made by interruption of light in the

sensor section of the projection rib on the drum F2-65 Toner supply abnormality (C)
drive gear to control the color drum (Y) phase. The
detection signal cannot be acquired and phase
control cannot be made. Trouble content Toner end with the remaining quantity of 75% or
Section PCU more.
The toner supply time exceeds 3 times as much as
the specified time.
Check and Check the sensor connector connection.
Section PCU
remedy
Case 1 Cause Toner motor section connector harness trouble
Case 2 Cause Dirt on the sensor light emitting section, or
installation trouble Check and Check the connector connection of the toner motor
remedy section.
Check and Check for dirt on the sensor or check the
remedy installation state.
the main PWB.
Case 3 Cause Drum drive gear upper rib breakage, sensor
Case 2 Cause Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble
trouble
Check and If there is no trouble in the rib, replace the sensor.
remedy (SIM25-1)
remedy (Use SIM30-1 "DHPD_Y" to check interruption or
2) Check that the toner transport pipe is not
transmission of light.)
clogged between the toner cartridge and the
(CRUM) if necessary.
F2-58 Process humidity sensor trouble 3) If replacement of the toner cartridge (CRUM)
Trouble content Process humidity sensor open developing unit.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Process humidity sensor harness connection
trouble F2-66 Toner supply abnormality (M)
Check and Check the harness and connector connection of
remedy the process humidity sensor. Trouble content Toner end with the remaining quantity of 75% or
Case 2 Cause Process humidity sensor trouble more.
Check and Check the process humidity sensor. The toner supply time exceeds 3 times as much as
remedy the specified time.
Case 3 Cause PCU PWB trouble Section PCU
Check and Check the PCU PWB. Case 1 Cause Toner motor section connector harness trouble
remedy Check and Check the connector connection of the toner motor
remedy section.
the main PWB.
Case 2 Cause Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble
remedy (SIM25-1)
developing unit.

F2-67 Toner supply abnormality (Y) F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K)
Trouble content Toner end with the remaining quantity of 75% or Trouble content CRUM cannot be read or written.
more. Section PCU
The toner supply time exceeds 3 times as much as Case 1 Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the
the specified time. connector and the harness between the PCU and
Section PCU the toner cartridge.
Case 1 Cause Toner motor section connector harness trouble Check and Check the connector and the harness between the
Check and Check the connector connection of the toner motor remedy PCU and the toner cartridge.
remedy section. Case 2 Cause CRUM trouble
Check the connector harness (TM) connection to Check and Replace the toner cartridge.
the main PWB. remedy
Case 2 Cause Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble Case 3 Cause Control (PCU) PWB trouble
Check and 1) Check the toner density sensor output. Check and Replace the PCU PWB.
remedy (SIM25-1) remedy
developing unit. Replace the toner cartridge F2-75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (C)
does not clear the trouble, check the Trouble content CRUM cannot be read or written.
developing unit. Section PCU
connector and the harness between the PCU and
F2-70 Toner cartridge improper (K) the toner cartridge.
Check and Check the connector and the harness between the
remedy PCU and the toner cartridge.
Trouble content Improper data are detected in the CRUM contents
when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is Case 2 Cause CRUM trouble
detected. Check and Replace the toner cartridge.
Section PCU remedy
Case 1 Cause An improper cartridge is inserted. Case 3 Cause Control (PCU) PWB trouble
Toner cartridge trouble Check and Replace the PCU PWB.
remedy
F2-76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (M)

F2-71 Toner cartridge improper (C)
Trouble content CRUM cannot be read or written.
Trouble content Improper data are detected in the CRUM contents Section PCU
when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is Case 1 Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the
detected. connector and the harness between the PCU and
Section PCU the toner cartridge.
Case 1 Cause An improper cartridge is inserted. Check and Check the connector and the harness between the
Toner cartridge trouble remedy PCU and the toner cartridge.
Check and Replace the toner cartridge. Case 2 Cause CRUM trouble
remedy Check and Replace the toner cartridge.
remedy
Case 3 Cause Control (PCU) PWB trouble
F2-72 Toner cartridge improper (M) Check and Replace the PCU PWB.
remedy

when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is
detected.
F2-77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (Y)
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause An improper cartridge is inserted. Trouble content CRUM cannot be read or written.
Toner cartridge trouble Section PCU
Check and Replace the toner cartridge. Case 1 Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the
remedy connector and the harness between the PCU and
the toner cartridge.
Check and Check the connector and the harness between the
F2-73 Toner cartridge improper (Y) remedy PCU and the toner cartridge.
Case 2 Cause CRUM trouble
Check and Replace the toner cartridge.
remedy
when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is
detected. Case 3 Cause Control (PCU) PWB trouble
Section PCU Check and Replace the PCU PWB.
remedy
Case 1 Cause An improper cartridge is inserted.
Toner cartridge trouble
Check and Replace the toner cartridge.
remedy

F2-78 Registration exclusive image density F2-82 Half tone process control 1st patch
sensor trouble (Transfer belt surface reference value trouble (M)
reflection ratio abnormality)
Trouble content The low-density rising point or the high-density
saturation point cannot be calculated because of a
Trouble content The transfer belt surface is scanned by the image
calculation error in the primary approximation
density sensor before starting the registration, and
formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU
adjust the sensor gain so that the output is kept at
PWM value obtained from the first step patch print
a certain level. However, the output is not within
result when executing the half tone process control
the specified range though the senor gain is
in M.
adjusted.
Section MFP
Section PCU
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image
trouble between PCU PWB and the image density
density sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
belt cleaning trouble
cleaning trouble, calibration plate solenoid
operation trouble Check and Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
Check and Check the sensor and the harness. Check the
check the sensor and the harness. If the
remedy calibration plate solenoid operation and the
adjustment is completed, check the drum surface
transfer belt surface state.
state and the belt surface state.
If the trouble is not cleared, replace the image
sensor exclusively used for registration, replace
the transfer belt, replace the calibration plate
solenoid, or replace the PCU PWB according to F2-83 Half tone process control 1st patch
the check result. reference value trouble (Y)

F2-80 Half tone process control 1st patch saturation point cannot be calculated because of a
reference value trouble (K) calculation error in the primary approximation
PWM value obtained from the first step patch print
in Y.
formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU Section MFP
PWM value obtained from the first step patch print Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
result when executing the half tone process control trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image
in BK. density sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer
Section MFP belt cleaning trouble
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection Check and Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image remedy sensor gain adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed,
density sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer check the sensor and the harness. If the
belt cleaning trouble adjustment is completed, check the drum surface
adjustment is completed, check the drum surface F2-84 Half tone process control 2nd patch
state and the belt surface state. reference value trouble (K)
Trouble content The low-density section output is greater than the

F2-81 Half tone process control 1st patch middle-density section output when connecting the
reference value trouble (C) low-density section approximation formula and the
middle-density section approximation formula
(formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU
PWM value) from the second step patch print
in BK.
PWM value obtained from the first step patch print Section MFP
result when executing the half tone process control Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
in C. trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image
Section MFP density sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer
belt cleaning trouble
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image Check and Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
density sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer remedy sensor gain adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed,
belt cleaning trouble check the sensor and the harness. If the

F2-85 Half tone process control 2nd patch F2-92 High-density process control density
reference value trouble (C) correction error (C)
Trouble content The low-density section output is greater than the Trouble content The patch density value is not in the range of the
middle-density section output when connecting the density correction reference density value (STD
low-density section approximation formula and the value) r30% at the upper limit or the lower limit
middle-density section approximation formula bias voltage when executing the high density
(formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU process control.
PWM value) from the second step patch print Section PCU
result when executing the half tone process control Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
in C. trouble between PCU PWB and image density
Section MFP sensor, dirt on image density sensor, transfer belt
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection cleaning trouble
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image Check and 1) Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
density sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer remedy sensor gain adjustment.
belt cleaning trouble 2) If an error occurs, check the sensors and the
Check and Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control harnesses.
remedy sensor gain adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, 3) If the adjustment of 1) is completed, check
check the sensor and the harness. If the the drum surface state, the belt surface state,
adjustment is completed, check the drum surface etc.
F2-93 High-density process control density

F2-86 Half tone process control 2nd patch correction error (M)
reference value trouble (M)
Trouble content The patch density value is not in the range of the
Trouble content The low-density section output is greater than the density correction reference density value (STD
middle-density section output when connecting the value) r30% at the upper limit or the lower limit
low-density section approximation formula and the bias voltage when executing the high density
middle-density section approximation formula process control.
(formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU Section PCU
PWM value) from the second step patch print Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
result when executing the half tone process control trouble between PCU PWB and image density
in M. sensor, dirt on image density sensor, transfer belt
Section MFP cleaning trouble
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection Check and 1) Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image remedy sensor gain adjustment.
density sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer 2) If an error occurs, check the sensors and the
belt cleaning trouble harnesses.
Check and Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control 3) If the adjustment of 1) is completed, check
remedy sensor gain adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, the drum surface state, the belt surface state,
check the sensor and the harness. If the etc.
F2-94 High-density process control density
correction error (Y)
F2-87 Half tone process control 2nd patch
reference value trouble (Y) Trouble content The patch density value is not in the range of the
density correction reference density value (STD
Trouble content The low-density section output is greater than the value) r30% at the upper limit or the lower limit
middle-density section output when connecting the bias voltage when executing the high density
low-density section approximation formula and the process control.
middle-density section approximation formula Section PCU
(formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
PWM value) from the second step patch print trouble between PCU PWB and image density
result when executing the half tone process control sensor, dirt on image density sensor, transfer belt
in Y. cleaning trouble
Section MFP Check and 1) Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection remedy sensor gain adjustment.
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image 2) If an error occurs, check the sensors and the
density sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer harnesses.
belt cleaning trouble 3) If the adjustment of 1) is completed, check
Check and Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control the drum surface state, the belt surface state,
remedy sensor gain adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, etc.

F3-12 Tray 1 lift-up trouble F9-00 Communication trouble between the
controller and the printer controller
Trouble content T1LUD does not turn ON within the specified time. (FIERY option)
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause T1LUD sensor trouble. Harness connection trouble
Trouble content A communication error is detected during initial
between PCU PWB, the lift-up unit, and the paper
establishment or after establishment of
feed unit.
communication with the controller (FIERY option).
Check and Check the harness and the connector of T1LUD.
Section MFP
remedy
Case 1 Cause Printer controller MFPcnt PWB cable trouble
Case 2 Cause Tray 1 lift-up motor trouble
Check and Check the printer controller MFPcnt PWB cable.
Check and Check the lift-up unit.
remedy
remedy
Case 2 Cause MFPcnt PWB trouble, printer controller PWB
trouble
F3-22 Tray 2 lift-up trouble Check and Replace the MFPcnt PWB. Repair or replace the
remedy printer controller PWB.
After completion of check, turn OFF/ON the
Trouble content T2LUD does not turn ON within the specified time. machine and the printer controller.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause T2LUD sensor trouble. Harness connection trouble
between PCU PWB, the lift-up unit, and the paper H2-00 Detection thermistor open (TH1_AD2)
feed unit. of the non-contact thermistor
Check and Check the harness and the connector of T2LUD.
remedy
Case 2 Cause Tray 2 lift-up motor trouble Trouble content Thermistor open
Check and Check the lift-up unit. Section PCU
remedy Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
source trouble, fusing unit not-installed
F3-32 Tray 3 lift-up trouble Check and Check the harness and the connector from the
remedy thermistor to the control PWB.
Trouble content LUD3 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Section PCU H2-01 Lower thermistor open (TH_LM)
Case 1 Cause LUD3 sensor trouble. Harness connection trouble
between PCU PWB, the lift-up unit, and the paper
feed unit. Trouble content Thermistor open
Check and Check the harness and the connector of LUD3. Section PCU
remedy Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
Case 2 Cause Tray 3 lift-up motor trouble section connector connection trouble, AC power
Check and Check the lift-up unit. source trouble, fusing unit not-installed
remedy Check and Check the harness and the connector from the
F3-42 Tray 4 lift-up trouble

H2-02 Sub thermistor open (TH_US)
Trouble content LUD4 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Section PCU Trouble content Thermistor open
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause LUD4 sensor trouble. Harness connection trouble
between PCU PWB, the lift-up unit, and the paper Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
feed unit. section connector connection trouble, AC power
Check and Check the harness and the connector of LUD4. source trouble, fusing unit not-installed
remedy Check and Check the harness and the connector from the
Case 2 Cause Tray 4 lift-up motor trouble remedy thermistor to the control PWB.
Check and Check the lift-up unit.
remedy
H2-03 Non-contact thermistor
compensation thermistor open
(TH1_AD1)
Trouble content Thermistor open

Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
source trouble
Check and Check the harness and the connector from the

H2-04 External heating thermistor open H3-02 Sub thermistor fusing section high
(TH_EX1) temperature trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content Thermistor open Trouble content The fusing temperature inside the PWB exceeds
Section PCU the specified level.
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing Section PCU
section connector connection trouble, AC power Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
source trouble section connector connection error, AC power
Check and Check the harness and the connector from the source trouble
remedy thermistor to the control PWB. Check and 1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater
remedy lamp.
2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and
H2-05 Fusing external heating thermistor the harness.
Check the control PWB thermistor input
open (TH_EX2) circuit section.
3) If the heater lamp keep lighting, check the AC
Trouble content Thermistor open PWB and the control PWB lamp control
Section PCU circuit.
Case 1 Cause Fusing section connector and harness connection 4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
trouble
Check and Check the harness and the connector from the
remedy thermistor to the PCU PWB. H3-04 External heating thermistor high
Case 2 Cause Thermistor trouble, PCU PWB trouble temperature trouble (TH_EX1)
Check and Replace the thermistor or the PCU PWB.
remedy
Trouble content The external heating thermistor temperature
exceeds the specified temperature.
Section PCU
H3-00 Fusing section high temperature Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
trouble (TH_UM) section connector connection error, AC power
source trouble
Trouble content The fusing temperature inside the PWB exceeds Check and 1) Use Sim44-14 to check if the thermistor
the specified level. remedy (TH_EX1) shows an abnormal temperature. If
the display is normal, use Sim5-2 to check
Section PCU
the blinking operation of the heater lamp.
a) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor
section connector connection error, AC power
and the harness.
source trouble
Check and 1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater circuit section.
remedy lamp. b) If the heater lamp keep lighting, check
2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the AC PWB and the control PWB lamp
the harness. control circuit.
Check the control PWB thermistor input 2) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
circuit section.
PWB and the control PWB lamp control
circuit.
H3-05 Fusing external thermistor high
4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. temperature trouble (TH_EX2)
Trouble content It is detected that the fusing temperature exceeds

H3-01 Fusing section high temperature the specified temperature.
trouble (TH_LM) Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Fusing section connector and harness connection
trouble
Trouble content The fusing temperature inside the PWB exceeds
the specified level. Check and Check the harness and the connector from the
remedy thermistor to the PCU PWB.
Section PCU
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Case 2 Cause Thermistor trouble, PCU PWB trouble
section connector connection error, AC power
source trouble Check and Replace the thermistor or the PCU PWB.
remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Check and 1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater
remedy lamp.
the harness.
circuit section.
PWB and the control PWB lamp control
circuit.
4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.

H4-00 Fusing section low temperature H4-04 External heating thermistor fusing
trouble (TH_UM_AD2) section low temperature trouble
(TH_EX1)
Trouble content The temperature does not reach the specified level
within the specified time after turning on the power
Trouble content When the power relay is turned ON after supplying
relay.
power, the set temperature is not reached within
Section PCU the specified time.
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, heater lamp trouble, PCU PWB Section PCU
trouble, thermostat trouble, AC power source
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, heater lamp trouble, PCU PWB
trouble, interlock switch trouble
Check and 1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater trouble, interlock switch trouble
remedy lamp.
remedy lamp.
the harness.
Check the PCU PWB thermistor input circuit
the harness.
section.
3) If it is not lighted, check for the heater lamp
section.
disconnection and the thermostat breakage.
Check the interlock switch. Check the AC
PWB and the PCU PWB lamp control circuit.
H4-01 Fusing section low temperature

trouble (TH_LM) H4-30 Detection thermistor input
abnormality (TH_UM)
Trouble content TH_UM_AD1 and TH_UM_AD2 do not exceed the
relay.
specified level (50 count with the AD value) within
Section PCU 5 minutes after HL_UM is turned on.
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, heater lamp trouble, PCU PWB Section PCU
Case 1 Cause HL_UM does not turn on. Thermistor trouble,
harness trouble, PCU PWB trouble
remedy lamp.
remedy lamp.
the harness.
the harness.
section.
section.
H4-02 Sub thermistor fusing section low H5-01 5 continuous detection of POD1 not-
temperature trouble (TH_US) reached jam
Trouble content 5 continuous detection of POD1 not-reached jam
Section PCU
relay.
Case 1 Cause The fusing jam is not removed completely. (Jam
Section PCU
paper remains.)
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, heater lamp trouble, PCU PWB
Check and Check the fusing section for jam paper. (winding,
remedy etc.)
Case 2 Cause POD1 sensor trouble or harness connection
trouble
remedy lamp.
2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and Check and Check the POD1 sensor harness.
the harness. remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Check the PCU PWB thermistor input circuit Case 3 Cause Fusing unit installation trouble
section. Check and Check the fusing unit installation.
3) If it is not lighted, check for the heater lamp remedy

H7-10 Low temperature detection during the H7-14 Low temperature detection during the
temperature control reset operation temperature control reset operation
after stopping the alarm in a JOB after stopping the alarm in a JOB
(HL_UM) (HL_EX1)
Trouble content When the alarm is stopped, the set temperature is Trouble content When the alarm is stopped, the set temperature is
not reached within the specified time. not reached within the specified time.
* Alarm stop: When the fusing temperature falls * Alarm stop: When the fusing temperature falls
below the specified level in a print JOB, printing below the specified level in a print JOB, printing
is interrupted temporarily and the temperature is is interrupted temporarily and the temperature is
reset. reset.
Case 1 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble Case 1 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble
Check and Check connection of the connector and the Check and Check connection of the connector and the
remedy harness. remedy harness.
Case 2 Cause Thermistor trouble, thermostat trouble, heater lamp Case 2 Cause Thermistor trouble, thermostat trouble, heater lamp
trouble, PCU PWB trouble, AC power source trouble, PCU PWB trouble, AC power source
trouble, interlock switch trouble trouble, interlock switch trouble
Check and Use SIM 5-2 to check lighting of the heater lamp. Check and Use SIM 5-2 to check lighting of the heater lamp.
remedy Check conduction of the thermostat. Replace the remedy Check conduction of the thermostat. Replace the
heater lamp, the PCU PWB, and the AC PWB. heater lamp, the PCU PWB, and the AC PWB.
H7-11 Low temperature detection during the L1-00 Mirror feed trouble
temperature control reset operation
after stopping the alarm in a JOB Trouble content Mirror feed is not completed within the specified
time.
(HL_LM) Section SCU
Case 1 Cause Mirror unit trouble, mirror wire disengagement
Trouble content When the alarm is stopped, the set temperature is Check and Use SIM1-1 to check the mirror operation.
not reached within the specified time. remedy
* Alarm stop: When the fusing temperature falls
below the specified level in a print JOB, printing
is interrupted temporarily and the temperature is L3-00 Mirror return trouble
reset.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble Trouble content Mirror return is not completed within the specified
time.
remedy harness. Section SCU
Case 2 Cause Thermistor trouble, thermostat trouble, heater lamp Case 1 Cause Mirror unit trouble, mirror wire disengagement
trouble, PCU PWB trouble, AC power source Check and Use SIM1-1 to check the mirror operation.
trouble, interlock switch trouble remedy
Check and Use SIM 5-2 to check lighting of the heater lamp.
remedy Check conduction of the thermostat. Replace the
heater lamp, the PCU PWB, and the AC PWB. L4-02 Paper feed motor lock trouble
Trouble content When the paper feed motor is rotated in warming

H7-12 Low temperature detection during the up or in canceling a jam and the lock signal is not
temperature control reset operation detected within 1sec.
Section PCU
after stopping the alarm in a JOB
Case 1 Cause Paper feed motor trouble, harness connection
(HL_US) trouble between PCU PWB and paper feed motor,
control circuit trouble
Trouble content When the alarm is stopped, the set temperature is Check and Use SIM6-1 to check the paper feed motor
not reached within the specified time. remedy operation. Check the harness and the connector
* Alarm stop: When the fusing temperature falls between the PCU PWB and the paper feed motor.
below the specified level in a print JOB, printing
is interrupted temporarily and the temperature is
reset. L4-03 Fusing motor lock trouble
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
Check and Check connection of the connector and the the fusing motor.
remedy harness. Section PCU
Case 2 Cause Thermistor trouble, thermostat trouble, heater lamp Case 1 Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU
trouble, PCU PWB trouble, AC power source PWB and the fusing motor.
Check and Check the harness and the connector between the
Check and Use SIM 5-2 to check lighting of the heater lamp. remedy PCU PWB and the fusing motor.
remedy Check conduction of the thermostat. Replace the
Case 2 Cause Fusing motor trouble, control circuit trouble
heater lamp, the PCU PWB, and the AC PWB.
Check and Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the fusing
remedy motor.

L4-04 Developing motor trouble (BK) L4-09 Resist motor lock
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of Trouble content When the resist motor is rotation, the motor lock
the developing motor. signal is detected.
Case 1 Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU Case 1 Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU
PWB and the developing motor. PWB and the resist motor
Check and Check the harness and the connector between the Check and Check the harness and the connector between the
remedy PCU PWB and the developing motor. remedy PCU PWB and the resist motor.
Case 2 Cause Developing motor trouble, control circuit trouble Case 2 Cause Resist motor trouble, control circuit trouble
Check and Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the Check and Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the resist
remedy developing motor. remedy motor.
L4-05 Developing motor trouble (CL) L4-12 Secondary transfer separation trouble
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of Trouble content When the secondary transfer unit is separated, the
the developing motor. separation sensor status change is not detected
Section PCU within the specified time.
Case 1 Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU Section PCU
PWB and the developing motor. Case 1 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble
Check and Check the harness and the connector between the Check and Check connection of the connector and the
remedy PCU PWB and the developing motor. remedy harness.
Case 2 Cause Developing motor trouble, control circuit trouble Case 2 Cause Separation mechanism trouble, separation motor
Check and Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the trouble, separation sensor trouble
remedy developing motor. Check and Check the separation mechanism. Replace the
remedy separation motor and the separation sensor.
L4-06 Transfer belt separation position Check and Replace the PCU PWB.
sensor trouble remedy
Trouble content When separating the primary transfer belt unit, L4-13 Fusing external heating separation
change in the separation position sensor
characteristics is not detected within the specified trouble
time.
Section PCU Trouble content When the fusing external heating unit is separated,
Case 1 Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU the separation sensor status change is not
PWB and the separation position sensor detected within the specified time.
Check and Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the Section PCU
remedy separation position sensor. Case 1 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble
Case 2 Cause The belt position sensor is not interrupted or it is Check and Check connection of the connector and the
always interrupted. Belt separation clutch remedy harness.
operation trouble Case 2 Cause Separation mechanism trouble, separation motor
Check and Use SIM6-3 to check the belt separation operation. trouble, separation sensor trouble
remedy Check to insure that the sensor is interrupted from Check and Check the separation mechanism. Replace the
lighting when the belt is separated. remedy separation motor and the separation sensor.
Case 3 Cause The primary transfer belt unit is not installed. Case 3 Cause PCU PWB trouble
Check and Install the primary transfer belt unit. Check and Replace the PCU PWB.
remedy remedy
L4-08 Waste toner motor lock L4-30 Controller fan motor trouble
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of Trouble content 1) The motor lock signal is detected during
the waste toner motor. rotation of the controller fan motor.
Section PCU 2) The motor lock signal is detected during
Case 1 Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU rotation of the HDD fan motor.
PWB and the waste toner motor. Section MFP
Check and Check the harness and the connector between the Case 1 Cause Fan motor trouble
remedy PCU PWB and the waste toner motor. Check and Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan
Case 2 Cause Waste toner motor trouble, control circuit trouble remedy motor.
Check and Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the waste Case 2 Cause Harness connection trouble between the mother
remedy toner motor. PWB and the fan motor.
Check and Check the harness and the connector between the
remedy mother PWB and the fan motor.
Case 3 Cause Control circuit trouble
remedy
Case 4 Cause Mother PWB trouble.
Check and Replace the mother PWB.
remedy

L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan F lock L4-37 Charger cooling fan lock
Trouble content When the paper exit cooling fan F is operated, the Trouble content When the charger cooling fan is operated, the fan
fan operation signal is not detected within the operation signal is not detected within the specified
specified time. time.
Case 1 Cause Fan connector disconnection Case 1 Cause Fan connector disconnection
remedy PCU PWB and the fan. remedy PCU PWB and the fan.
Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble. Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble.
Check and Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually Check and Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually
remedy rotating. remedy rotating.
L4-32 Power cooling fan 1 lock L4-38 Machine ventilation fan center lock
Trouble content When the power cooling fan 1 is operated, the fan Trouble content When the machine ventilation fan center is
operation signal is not detected within the specified operated, the fan operation signal is not detected
time. within the specified time.
Case 1 Cause Power cooling fan 1 connector disconnection Case 1 Cause Fan connector disconnection
remedy PCU PWB and the fan. remedy PCU PWB and the fan.
Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble.
L4-34 LSU cooling fan trouble L4-39 Machine ventilation fan right lock
Trouble content When the LSU cooling fan is operated, the fan Trouble content When the machine ventilation fan right is operated,
operation signal is not detected within the specified the fan operation signal is not detected within the
time. specified time.
Case 1 Cause Fan connector disconnection Case 1 Cause Fan connector disconnection
remedy LSU PWB and the fan. remedy PCU PWB and the fan.
Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble.
If the trouble is not canceled, replace the LSU fan
and the LSU cnt PWB.
L4-40 Ozone fan 1 lock
L4-35 Fusing exhaust fan lock Trouble content When the ozone fan 1 is operated, the fan
operation signal is not detected within the specified
Trouble content When the fusing exhaust fan is operated, the fan time.
operation signal is not detected within the specified Section PCU
time. Case 1 Cause Fan connector disconnection
Section PCU Check and Check the harness and the connector between the
Case 1 Cause Fan connector disconnection remedy PCU PWB and the fan.
Check and Check the harness and the connector between the Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble.
remedy PCU PWB and the fan. Check and Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually
Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble. remedy rotating.
Check and Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually
remedy rotating.
L4-41 Ozone fan 2 lock
L4-36 Fusing suction fan lock Trouble content When the ozone fan 2 is operated, the fan
operation signal is not detected within the specified
Trouble content When the fusing suction fan is operated, the fan time.
operation signal is not detected within the specified Section PCU
time. Case 1 Cause Fan connector disconnection
Section PCU Check and Check the harness and the connector between the
Case 1 Cause Fan connector disconnection remedy PCU PWB and the fan.
Check and Check the harness and the connector between the Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble.
remedy PCU PWB and the fan. Check and Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually
Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble. remedy rotating.
Check and Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually
remedy rotating.

L4-42 Ozone fan 3 lock L8-02 Full wave signal width abnormality
Trouble content When the ozone fan 3 is operated, the fan Trouble content The full wave signal is judged as frequency
operation signal is not detected within the specified abnormality. (The detection frequency is judged as
time. 65Hz or above or 45Hz or less.)
Case 1 Cause Fan connector disconnection Case 1 Cause Harness trouble
Check and Check the harness and the connector between the Check and Check the harness and the connector connection.
remedy PCU PWB and the fan. remedy
Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble. Case 2 Cause Power unit trouble
Check and Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually Check and Replace the power unit.
remedy rotating. remedy
L4-43 Paper exit cooling fan center lock remedy
Trouble content When the paper exit cooling fan center is operated,
the fan operation signal is not detected within the L8-20 Power controller communication
specified time. trouble
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Fan connector disconnection Trouble content Communication establishment error/Framing/
Check and Check the harness and the connector between the Parity/Protocol error
remedy PCU PWB and the fan.
Section MFP
Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble. Case 1 Cause Connector connection trouble between the mother
Check and Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually board PWB and the MFPcnt PWB.
remedy rotating. MFPcnt PWB mother board connector pin
breakage
Check and Check the connector connection between the
L4-44 Power cooling fan 2 lock remedy mother board PWB and the MFPcnt PWB. Check
grounding of the machine.
Trouble content When the power cooling fan 2 is operated, the fan Case 2 Cause Mother PWB trouble
operation signal is not detected within the specified Check and Replace the mother PWB.
time. remedy
Section PCU Case 3 Cause Mother PWB jumper error
Case 1 Cause Fan connector disconnection Check and Set the mother PWB jumper to the Default side.
Check and Check the harness and the connector between the remedy
remedy PCU PWB and the fan.
Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble.
Check and Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually PC--- Personal counter not installed
remedy rotating.
Trouble content The personal counter is not installed.
Section MFP
L6-10 Polygon motor lock detection Case 1 Cause The personal counter is not installed.
Check and Install the personal counter.
Trouble content It is judged that the LSU polygon motor lock signal remedy
is not outputted, and the lock signal is checked
after 15 sec from starting rotation of the polygon
motor and it is judged that the polygon motor does U1-01 Battery trouble
not rotate properly.
Section PCU
Trouble content Backup SRAM battery voltage fall
Case 1 Cause Disconnection of the LSU connector or the LSU
Section MFP
inside harness, or breakage
Case 1 Cause 1) Battery life
Check and Check connection of the harness and the
2) Battery circuit abnormality
remedy connector.
Check and Check that the battery voltage is about 2.5V or
Case 2 Cause Polygon motor trouble, LSU PWB trouble
remedy above.
Check and Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
remedy motor.
Replace the LSUcnt PWB. Replace the LSU.
U2-00 EEPROM read/write error
(MFP detection)
L8-01 No full wave signal
Trouble content EEPROM device read/write error
Trouble content No full wave signal is detected. Section MFP
Section PCU Case 1 Cause EEPROM device trouble
Case 1 Cause Harness trouble Check and Replace the EEPROM device.
Check and Check connection of the harness and the remedy
remedy connector. Case 2 Cause EEPROM device contact failure
Case 2 Cause Power unit trouble Check and Check that EEPROM device is properly inserted.
Check and Replace the power unit. remedy
remedy Case 3 Cause Device access error due to electrical noises
Case 3 Cause PCU PWB trouble Check and Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Check and Replace the PCU PWB. remedy
remedy

U2-05 HDD/SRAM/EEPROM data U2-23 MFPC section SRAM memory
discrepancy individual data check sum error
Trouble content A HDD or SRAM memory for user authentication Trouble content MFPcnt PWB SRAM memory individual data
different from that used before turn off the power is check sum error (Communication management
installed. table, sender registration data, etc.)
Section MFP Section MFP
Case 1 Cause HDD replacement or SRAM memory replacement Case 1 Cause SRAM trouble
Check and Initialize the authentication information with SIM16, Check and 1) Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data
remedy and import the backup data (exported data by remedy related to the check sum error contents
device cloning) if any. automatically.
2) Since the registered contents have been
deleted, register them again.
U2-10 SRAM user authentication index Case 2 Cause Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises
check sum error Check and Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
remedy
Case 3 Cause MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Trouble content User index information (basic data of user Check and Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
authentication) check sum error on the SRAM remedy
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause 1) SRAM trouble
2) Hang-up of the control circuit due to electrical U2-24 SRAM memory user authentication
noises
3) MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble counter check sum error
Check and Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
remedy Trouble content Check sum error of the user counter on SRAM
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause 1) SRAM trouble
U2-11 EEPROM check sum error 2) Control circuit hang-up due to electrical
(MFP detection) noises
3) MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Trouble content Counter information check sum error on the remedy
EEPROM
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause 1) EEPROM device trouble U2-25 Flash memory user authentication
2) EEPROM device contact failure
3) Device access error due to electrical noises counter check sum error
remedy Trouble content Check sum error of the user authentication counter
on FLASH
Section MFP
U2-22 SRAM memory check sum error Case 1 Cause Flash trouble. Control circuit hang-up due to
electrical noises
MFPcnt PWB FLASH access circuit trouble.
Trouble content MFPcnt PWB SRAM memory check sum error
Check and Use SIM16 to recalculate the check sum of the
Section MFP
remedy user counter and save the normal sum value.
Case 1 Cause SRAM trouble
Check and 1) Initialize the communication management
remedy table registered in SRAM and the FAX soft
switch.
U2-30 Serial number data discrepancy
2) Since the registered contents have been (MFP l PCU)
deleted, register them again.
Case 2 Cause Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises Trouble content The serial number stored in the PCU differs from
Check and Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble. that stored in the MFP.
remedy
Section MFP
Case 3 Cause MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Case 1 Cause EEPROM is not changed when the PCU/MFPcnt
Check and Replace the MFPcnt PWB. PWB is replaced.
remedy
Check and 1) Check that EEPROM is properly set.
remedy 2) Check that EEPROM on the previous PWB is
inserted to the newly installed PWB.

U2-50 HDD section individual data check U2-90 EEPROM read/write error
sum error (MFP) (PCU detection)
Trouble content MFPcnt HDD individual data check sum error Trouble content EEPROM version error, write error to EEPROM
(One-touch, group, program, etc.) Section PCU
Section MFP Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble, installation of EEPROM which
Case 1 Cause Write/read error to/from HDD is not initialized.
Check and 1) Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data Installation of 64KBit EEPROM
remedy related to the check sum error contents Check and Check that EEPROM is properly set.
automatically. remedy Check to insure that 256KBit EEPROM is installed.
2) Since the registered contents have been Case 2 Cause PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
deleted, register them again. Check and To avoid deletion of the counter data/adjustment
3) If the trouble is not canceled, replace the remedy values, use the simulation to save the counter/
HDD. adjustment values. (If there is a printer option,
Case 2 Cause Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises execute SIM22-1 to save the counter data and the
Check and Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble. adjustment values.) Replace the PCU PWB. Use
remedy SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Case 3 Cause MFPcnt PWB HDD access circuit trouble
remedy U2-91 Adjustment value check sum error
(PCU detection)
U2-80 EEPROM read/write error
Trouble content EEPROM (PCU) check sum error
(SCU detection) Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises
Trouble content 1) EEPROM version error Check and Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
2) Write error to EEPROM remedy
Section SCU Case 2 Cause EEPROM trouble.
Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble, installation of EEPROM which is Check and Check that EEPROM is properly set.
not initialized remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Check and Check that EEPROM is properly set. Case 3 Cause PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
remedy Check and To avoid deletion of the counter data/adjustment
Case 2 Cause SCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble remedy values, use the simulation to save the counter/
Check and To avoid deletion of the counter data/adjustment adjustment values. (If there is a printer option,
remedy values, use the simulation to save the counter/ execute SIM22-1 to save the counter data and the
adjustment values. (If there is a printer option, adjustment values.) Replace the PCU PWB.
execute SIM22-1 to save the counter data and the Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
adjustment values.) Replace the SCU PWB. Use
SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
U5-00 SPF communication trouble
U2-81 Adjustment value check sum error Trouble content Communication error between the SCU and the
(SCU detection) DSPF, communication line test error after turning
on the power or canceling the exclusive simulation
Trouble content EEPROM (SCU) check sum error Section SCU
Section SCU Case 1 Cause Malfunction due to electrical noises
Case 1 Cause Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises Check and Cancel the trouble by turning OFF/ON.
Check and Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble. remedy
remedy Case 2 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble or
disconnection
Case 2 Cause EEPROM trouble
Check and Check the connector and the harness of the
Check and To avoid deletion of the counter data/adjustment
remedy values, use the simulation to save the counter/
adjustment values. (If there is a printer option, Case 3 Cause Control (SCU) PWB trouble. DSPF PWB trouble
execute SIM22-1 to save the counter data and the Check and Replace the control (SCU) PWB. Replace the
adjustment values.) Replace the SCU PWB. Use remedy DSPF PWB.
SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Case 3 Cause SCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check and Check that EEPROM is properly set. U5-16 SPF fan motor trouble
remedy
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
the fan.
Section SCU
Case 1 Cause Fan motor trouble, harness of the fan motor
related, circuit trouble
Check and Use SIM2-3 to check the operation.
remedy Check harness, connector and fan motor related
circuit.

U5-30 SPF tray lift-up trouble U6-23 LCC tray descending trouble
(reverse winding detection)
Trouble content Lift-up trouble is detected 5 times continuously.
(STUD does not turn ON within the specified time.)
Trouble content Reverse winding of the LCC tray wire is detected.
Section SCU
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause STUD/STLD trouble
Case 1 Cause Reverse winding of the wire
Check and Check STUD/STLD and its harness and connector.
Check and Check the wire.
remedy Check the lift-up unit.
remedy
Case 2 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble
U5-31 SPF tray lift-down trouble remedy harness.
Case 3 Cause Reverse winding detection SW-ON, reverse
Trouble content Lift-down trouble (STLD does not turn OFF within winding detection SW trouble, LCC control PWB
the specified time.) trouble
Section SCU Check and Replace the reverse winding SW and the LCC
Case 1 Cause STUD/STLD trouble remedy control PWB.
Check and Check STUD/STLD and its harness and connector.
remedy Check the lift-up unit.
U6-24 LCC tray lock detection trouble
U6-09 LCC lift motor trouble Trouble content Malfunction of the LCC tray lock mechanism is
detected.
Trouble content The encoder input value is not changed in Section PCU
0.2sec (1st time)/0.5sec (2nd time and later) Case 1 Cause Tray lock mechanism trouble
after rotation of the motor. Check and Check the tray lock mechanism.
The motor is rotated for 24sec (LCX2)/48sec remedy
(LCX3) or more. Case 2 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble
Section PCU Check and Check connection of the connector and the
Case 1 Cause Sensor trouble, LCC control PWB trouble, gear remedy harness.
breakage, lift motor trouble Case 3 Cause Tray lock detection sensor trouble, LCC control
Check and Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the PWB trouble
remedy sensor and the lift motor. Use SIM15 to cancel the Check and Replace the tray lock detection sensor and the
trouble. remedy LCC control PWB.
U6-20 LCC communication trouble U6-51 LCC incompatibility trouble
Trouble content LCC communication error. Communication line test Trouble content Detection of LCC connection which is incompatible
error after turning ON the power or canceling the with the MX-5500N/6200N/7000N series.
exclusive simulation. LCC and machine model Section PCU
codes discrepancy error
Case 1 Cause Connection of the LCC, which is incompatible with
Section PCU the MX-5500N/6200N/7000N series is detected.
Case 1 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble or Check and Connect the MX-LCX2/MX-LCX3.
disconnection, LCC control PWB trouble, control remedy
(PCU) PWB trouble, malfunction due to electrical
noises
Check and Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel the trouble. UC-02 CPT-ASIC trouble
remedy Check the connector and the harness of the
communication line.
Trouble content CPT-ASIC access error (When the ASIC does not
operate normally.)
U6-21 LCC transport motor trouble Section SCU
Case 1 Cause 1) CPT-ASIC abnormality
2) SCU PWB abnormality
Trouble content After passing 1 sec from turning ON the motor, the
Check and Turn OFF/ON the power several times. If the
lock state of the motor lock signal is detected
remedy trouble still occurs, replace the SCU PWB or the
continuously for 1 sec.
CPT-ASIC.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, an
overcurrent to the motor, LCC control PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the transport
remedy motor.
U6-22 LCC 24V power abnormality
Trouble content DC24V power is not supplied to LCC.

Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble or
disconnection, LCC control PWB trouble, power
unit trouble
Check and Check the connector and the harness of the power
remedy line. Check that the power unit and the LCC control
PWB is of 24V.

UC-20 Document control module trouble
Trouble content Communication error between SCU and DOCC

Communication line test error when turning on the
power or after canceling an exclusion simulation.
Section SCU
Case 1 Cause Connector or harness connection error or
disconnection
Case 2 Cause Control (SCU) PWB trouble. DOCC PWB trouble.
Check and Replace the SCU PWB or the DOCC PWB.
remedy
Case 3 Cause Malfunction due to electrical noises.
Check and Turn OFF/ON the power to electrical cancel the
remedy trouble.
UC-21 DOCC (Document Control) PWB

not-detected (DSK model only)
Trouble content When the data security kit ROM (BOOT, PROG1,
2) is installed, the DOCC PWB is not detected.
Section SCU
Case 1 Cause Connector or harness connection error or
disconnection
Case 2 Cause Control (SCU) PWB trouble. DOCC PWB trouble.
Check and Replace the SCU PWB or the DOCC PWB.
remedy
Case 3 Cause DOCC PWB not-installed
Check and Install the DOCC PWB.
remedy

[9] MAINTENANCE
MX-7000N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Maintenance system table

: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shift the position.
Monochrome
300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
supply/
When K K K K K K K K K K
Unit name Part name Mechanical parts Remark
calling
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
Color supply
K K K K K K K K K K
Drum Drum (BK) Monochrome
peripheral Cleaner blade (BK) supply
Side seal F/R (BK)
Charging unit (BK)
Drum (CL) Color supply
Cleaner blade (CL)
Charging unit (CL)
Side seal F/R (CL)
Toner reception seal (CL)
Toner stirring sheet
Cleaning brush (BK) Mechanical
Discharge lamp (K) parts { { { { { { { { { {
Sub blade
Waste toner box
Developing Developer (K) Monochrome
section DV seal (BK) supply
DV side seal F (BK)
DV side seal R (BK)
Toner filter (BK)
Developer (C) Color supply
Developer (M)
Developer (Y)
DV seal (CL)
DV side seal F/R (CL)
Toner filter (CL)
Toner cartridge (BK/C/M/Y) Monochrome/ User replacement for every toner empty
Color supply (or the specified traveling distance).
Bias pin/Connector Mechanical
parts
Monochrome
When 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
Unit name Part name supply/ Remark
calling K K K K K K K K K K
Mechanical parts
LSU Dust proof glass Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { {
Cleaning base parts
Transfer Primary transfer belt Mechanical
section Primary transfer roller parts
Transfer sub blade
Transfer cleaning blade
Belt drive gear
Primary transfer drive roller { { { { { { { { { {
Primary transfer follower { { { { { { { { { {
roller
Tension roller { { { { { { { { { {
Cleaning brush { { { { { { { { { { {
Y auxiliary roller { { { { { { { { { {
Resist backup roller { { { { { { { { { {
Secondary transfer belt
Secondary transfer roller
Secondary belt drive roller { { { { { { { { { {
Secondary belt tension roller { { { { { { { { { {
Secondary belt follower roller { { { { { { { { { {
Secondary drive idle gear
PTC cleaner
PTC cleaner B
Charger wire
Transfer idle roller { { { { { { { { { {
Cleaner seal
MX-7000N MAINTENANCE 9 1
300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
Monochrome
When K K K K K K K K K K
calling 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000
Mechanical parts
K K K K K K K K K K
Fusing Lower heat roller Mechanical Lower heat roller
section Lower roller bearing parts (300K) unit (Excludes the
heater lamp)
Upper separation pawl
Lower separation pawl
Separation pawl SP
Upper thermistor sub
External thermistor main
External thermistor sub
Lower thermistor
Slider ring External heating unit
External heating roller (Excludes the
External heating belt heater lamp)
External heating bearing
External heating collar
External heating SP
Gears Specified positions
Paper guides { { { { { { { { { { {
Web unit Mechanical
Upper heat roller parts (200K) Upper heat roller
Fusing gear unit (Excludes the
Upper roller bearing heater lamp)
Monochrome
When 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
Mechanical parts
Filters Ozone filter Mechanical
Toner filter parts
Paper exit filter
Dust filter
Paper feed Paper pickup roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { Replacement
section Paper feed roller parts { { { { { { { { { { reference
Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { Paper feed tray 1, 2:
200K or 1 year
of use
Paper feed tray 3, 4:
100K or 1 year
of use
Manual paper feed:
100K or 1 year
of use
Torque limiter
Transport Resist roller (Idle) Mechanical { { { { { { { { { {
section/ Transport rollers parts { { { { { { { { { {
Paper exit Paper dust cleaner unit {
reverse Discharge brush
section
Transport paper guides { { { { { { { { { { {
Gears When checking,
apply to the
necessary positions
(specified positions).
Drive Gears (Grease) Mechanical When checking,
section parts apply to the
necessary positions
UKOG-0307FCZZ
Shaft earth sections When checking,
(Conduction grease) apply to the
necessary positions
UKOG-0012QSZZ
Belts
Sensors (Process control/ { { { { { { { { { {
Resist sensors)
Image Sensors Mechanical { { { { { { { { { {
quality/ parts
Others
Monochrome
When 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
Mechanical parts
Optical Mirror/Lens/Reflector/CCD Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { {
section Table glass/SPF glass parts { { { { { { { { { { {
Scanner lamp { { { { { { { { { { {
Rails Specified positions
Drive belt/Drive wire
DSPF Paper feed Paper feed Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { {
section/ roller parts
Transport Pickup roller { { { { { { { { { { {
section Separation { { { { { { { { { { {
roller
No. 1 resist { { { { { { { { { { {
roller
Transport roller { { { { { { { { { { {
1 (PS front)
No. 2 resist { { { { { { { { { { {
roller (PS)
Platen roller { { { { { { { { { { {
2 (after first
scanning)
3 (after second
scanning)
Paper exit roller { { { { { { { { { { {
Discharge
brush
Torque limiter
(for separation)
No. 1 scanning { { { { { { { { { { {
plate
No. 2 scanning { { { { { { { { { { {
section,
scanning glass
No. 2 scanning { { { { { { { { { { {
section, white
reference glass
Optical Mirror
section Lens/CCD { { { { { { { { { { {
Scanner lamp/ { { { { { { { { { { {
Reflector
Others OC mat { { { { { { { { { { {
Drive Gears (Specified positions)
section UKOG-0299FCZZ
Belts
2. Details of maintenance
A. Drum peripheral
Monochrome supply/ 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
Mechanical parts When K K K K K K K K K K
No. Part name Remark
calling 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
Color supply
K K K K K K K K K K
1 Drum (BK) Monochrome supply
2 Cleaner blade (BK)
3 Side seal F/R (BK)
4 Charging unit (BK)
5 Drum (CL) Color supply
6 Cleaner blade (CL)
7 Charging unit (CL)
8 Side seal F/R (CL)
9 Toner reception seal (CL)
10 Toner stirring sheet
11 Cleaning brush (BK) Mechanical parts
12 Discharge lamp (K) { { { { { { { { { {
13 Sub blade
14 Waste toner box
8
9
13 11
6
5
10
1 3
8
2
3
12
7 4
14
The PM cycle means the replacement timing of periodic replace- As a reference of the drum life, "Life meter" can be checked with
ment consumable parts and other parts for maintaining the perfor- SIM22-1 according to each drum rotations.
mance. "Life meter" indicates the remained life (%) of the drum with the
The PM cycle is specified only for B/W output. For color output, it is entire drum life as 100%.
used as a reference value. (Example) If the used number of rotations is 550K:
[REASON] 100 (%) - 550 (K rotations)/ 840 (K rotations) x 100 = 040 (%)
Since the ratio of B/W to color differs depending on the user's oper-
ation scene and other conditions which varies every day, the PM Drum counter Number of rotations of drum
cycle cannot be specified in a certain cycle for color output. B/W Full color B/W Full color
Replacement of a PM item at the recommended life is performed Drum 3000K pages 100K pages 840K rotations 840K rotations
by the dealer's judgment or at PM call or at EM call.
Definition of drum life end
Drum Life
When the drum counter exceeds the specified level of 100% black
output or 100% full color output, it is judged as life end. 350
However in practice, wear cannot be specified by the number of Black Drum
300
sheets of output because racing is increased in the tandem engine Color Drum
by the mixing ratio of black and color outputs or when black output 250
is made in the color mode in ACS. For the reference of product
Drum Life
quality, wear is specified by the drum rotations. The rotation of the 200
MX-5500/MX-6200/MX-7000 series drum rotation is 840K.
150
The drum life is affected by the print quantity of one job. This is
because the actual life is determined by the rotations of the drum. 100
When the print quantity of one job is less than 6, the number of
rotations for one page is increased. As shown in the graph below, 50
therefore, the drum life quantity varies for each print quantity of one
0
job. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Number of multi print quantity (Unit: sheet)
B. LSU
Monochrome supply/ When 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
Mechanical parts calling K K K K K K K K K K
1 Dust proof glass Mechanical parts { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Cleaning base
1
1
C. Developing section
Monochrome supply/ 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
Mechanical parts When K K K K K K K K K K
calling 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
Color supply
K K K K K K K K K K
1 Developer (K) Monochrome supply
2 DV seal (BK)
3 DV side seal F (BK)
4 DV side seal R (BK)
5 Toner filter (BK)
6 Developer (C) Color supply
7 Developer (M)
8 Developer (Y)
9 DV seal (CL)
10 DV side seal F/R (CL)
11 Toner filter (CL)
12 Toner cartridge (BK/C/M/Y) Monochrome/ User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
Color supply
13 Bias pin/Connector Mechanical parts
10
6,7,8
11 1
13
13
13 4
9 13
5
10
3
13
12
D. Transfer section
1 Primary transfer belt Mechanical parts
2 Primary transfer roller
3 Transfer sub blade
4 Transfer cleaning blade
5 Belt drive gear
6 Primary transfer drive roller { { { { { { { { { {
7 Primary transfer follower roller { { { { { { { { { {
8 Tension roller { { { { { { { { { {
9 Cleaning brush { { { { { { { { { { {
10 Y auxiliary roller { { { { { { { { { {
11 Resist backup roller { { { { { { { { { {
12 Secondary transfer belt
13 Secondary transfer roller
14 Secondary belt drive roller { { { { { { { { { {
15 Secondary belt tension roller { { { { { { { { { {
16 Secondary belt follower roller { { { { { { { { { {
17 Secondary drive idle gear
18 PTC cleaner
19 PTC cleaner B
20 Charger wire
21 Transfer idle roller { { { { { { { { { {
22 Cleaner seal
22
4
3
9
22
1
15
14 17
18
10 21 20
8
7 9 19 12
13
21
16
2
2
2 11
6
2
E. Fusing section
300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
Monochrome supply/ When K K K K K K K K K K
Mechanical parts calling 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000
K K K K K K K K K K
1 Lower heat roller Mechanical parts Lower heat roller unit
2 Lower roller bearing (300K) (Excludes the heater lamp)
3 Upper separation pawl
4 Lower separation pawl
5 Separation pawl SP
6 Upper thermistor sub
7 External thermistor main
8 External thermistor sub
9 Lower thermistor
10 Slider ring External heating unit
11 External heating roller (Excludes the heater lamp)
12 External heating belt
13 External heating bearing
14 External heating collar
15 External heating SP
16 Gears Specified positions
17 Paper guides { { { { { { { { { { {
18 Web unit Mechanical parts
19 Upper heat roller (200K) Upper heat roller unit
20 Fusing gear (Excludes the heater lamp)
21 Upper roller bearing
10
4
7
4 15
8 13 16
14 14
10 16 16 16
2
1
5
15 17
13 5
14 9 5
2 12
5
11 20
21
3
17
18
6
3
19 17
21 3
F. Optical section
1 Mirror/Lens/Reflector/CCD Mechanical parts { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Table glass/SPF glass { { { { { { { { { { {
3 Scanner lamp { { { { { { { { { { {
4 Rails Specified positions
5 Drive belt/Drive wire
4
2
1
1
3
1
G. Filters
1 Ozone filter Mechanical parts
2 Toner filter
3 Paper exit filter
4 Dust filter
3
4
1
2
H. Paper feed section
1 Paper pickup roller Mechanical parts { { { { { { { { { { Replacement reference
2 Paper feed roller { { { { { { { { { { Paper feed tray 1, 2:
3 Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { 200K or 1 year of use
Paper feed tray 3, 4:
100K or 1 year of use
Manual paper feed:
100K or 1 year of use
4 Torque limiter
4
2
1
2
3 4
1
2
3 1
4
2
1
3
2
1
I. Transport section/Paper exit reverse section
1 Resist roller (Idle) Mechanical parts { { { { { { { { { {
2 Transport rollers { { { { { { { { { {
3 Paper dust cleaner unit {
4 Discharge brush
4
2
2
2
2
1
3 2
2
J. Drive section
1 Gears (Grease) Mechanical parts When checking, apply to
the necessary positions
UKOG-0307FCZZ
2 Shaft earth sections When checking, apply to
(Conduction grease) the necessary positions
UKOG-0012QSZZ
3 Belts
K. Image quality/Others
1 Sensors Mechanical parts { { { { { { { { { {
L. DSPF
1 Paper feed Paper feed roller Mechanical parts { { { { { { { { { { {
2 section/ Pickup roller { { { { { { { { { { {
3 Transport Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { {
4 section No. 1 resist roller { { { { { { { { { { {
5 Transport roller 1 { { { { { { { { { { {
(PS front)
6 No. 2 resist roller { { { { { { { { { { {
(PS)
7 Platen roller { { { { { { { { { { {
(after first scanning)
(after second
scanning)
10 Paper exit roller { { { { { { { { { { {
11 Discharge brush
12 Torque limiter (for
separation)
13 No. 1 scanning { { { { { { { { { { {
plate
14 No. 2 scanning { { { { { { { { { { {
section, scanning
glass
15 No. 2 scanning { { { { { { { { { { {
section, white
reference glass
16 Optical Mirror
17 section Lens/CCD { { { { { { { { { { {
18 Scanner lamp/ { { { { { { { { { { {
Reflector
19 Others OC mat { { { { { { { { { { {
20 Drive Gears (Specified positions)
section UKOG-0299FCZZ
21 Belts
1
12
5 2
6 3
7
13
8 19
9
10
11
17
21
17 18
21
14
16 20
21
15
3. Other related items e. Developer related
A. Maintenance timing display Code Content

Print job
Enable/Disable
The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when
VK Developer life end (K) print counter: 300K or Enable
each counter reaches the set value. The relationship between the the accumulated rotation number (K) of 840K.
messages and the counters is shown blow.
VC Developer life end (C) print counter: 100K or Enable
(1) (Maintenance timing) (Frameless) the accumulated rotation number (C) of 840K.
VM Developer life end (M) print counter: 100K or Enable
a. Maintenance related the accumulated rotation number (M) of 840K.
VY Developer life end (Y) print counter: 100K or Enable
Print job the accumulated rotation number (Y) of 840K.
Code Content
Enable/Disable
TA The maintenance counters (total) reaches 90% Enable After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-5 (Devel-
of the set value of SIM21-1, or they reaches oper counters (number of the developer print counter, accumu-
the set value of SIM21-1 but SIM26-38 is set to lated traveling distance of the developer) clear).
Print Enable.
(2) [Maintenance timing] (Framed)
CA The maintenance counters (color) reaches Enable
90% of the set value of SIM21-1, or they
a. Maintenance related
reaches the set value of SIM21-1 but SIM26-
38 is set to Print Enable.
Print job
AA The maintenance counters (both of total and Enable Code Content
Enable/Disable
color) reaches 90% of the set value of SIM21-
TA The maintenance counters (total) reaches the Disable
1, or they reaches the set value of SIM21-1 but
set value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to
SIM26-38 is set to Print Enable.
Print Disable.
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Mainte- CA The maintenance counters (color) reaches the Disable
nance counters (total, color) clear). set value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to
Print Disable.
b. Transfer unit AA The maintenance counters (both of total and Disable
color) reaches the set value of SIM21-1, and
Print job SIM26-38 is set to Print Disable.
Code Content
Enable/Disable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Mainte-
TK1 Primary transfer belt life end: 300K Enable
nance counters (total, color) clear).
TK2 Secondary transfer belt life end: 300K Enable
(3) [Check the waste toner box.] (Framed)
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Primary
and secondary transfer unit counters (number of the transfer unit Print job
Code Content
print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the transfer unit, Enable/Disable
days of use of the transfer unit) clear). Waste toner full Disable
c. Fusing unit related After detection of the waste toner full, reset the full detection by
opening/close of the front door.
Print job
Code Content
Enable/Disable
FK1 Fusing upper heat roller life end: 200K Enable
FK2 Fusing lower/external heat roller life end: 300K Enable
FK3 Fusing web life end: 200K Enable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Fusing

unit counters (number of the fusing unit print counter, days of use
of the fusing unit) clear).
d. Drum related
Print job
Code Content
Enable/Disable
DK Drum life end (K) print counter: 300K or the Enable
accumulated rotation number (K) of 840K.
DC Drum life end (C) print counter: 100K or the Enable
accumulated rotation number (C) of 840K.
DM Drum life end (M) print counter: 100K or the Enable
accumulated rotation number (M) of 840K.
DY Drum life end (Y) print counter: 100K or the Enable
accumulated rotation number (Y) of 840K.
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-7 (Drum

counters (number of the drum print counter, accumulated travel-
ing distance of the drum) clear).
[10] ROM VERSION-UP
MX-7000N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. General Firmware types

A. Cases where version-up is required Flash ROM Contents
ROM version-up is required in the following cases: Machine ALL Includes all contents shown below.
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. ICU(BOOT) ANIME
CONFIG
2) When installing a new spare ROM to the machine for repair.
ESCP_FONT
3) When installing a new spare PWB unit with ROM installed to it.
PDL_FONT
4) When there is a trouble in the programs in ROM and it must be ANIMATION
repaired. COLOR PROFILE
GRAPHIC
B. Notes for version-up
SLIST
(1) Relationship between each ROM and version-up ICU(MAIN) ICU(MAIN)
Before execution of ROM version-up, check combinations with IMG-ASIC IMAGE DATA
ROMs installed in the other PWBs including options. SCU SCU(MAIN)
PCU PCU(MAIN)
Some combinations of versions may cause malfunctions of the
DSPF DSPF(MAIN)
machine.
Option FAX FAX OPTION(MAIN)
C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware 4K FINISHER 4KFIN(MAIN)
There are following methods of downloading of the firmware. SADDLE UNIT SADDLE(MAIN)
INSERTER INSERTER(MAIN)
1) Firmware download using media
A3 LCC A3LCC(MAIN)
2) Firmware download using FTP A4 LCC A4LCC(MAIN)
3) Firmware download using Web page
NOTE: If the MFPcnt PWB DIP SW No. 2 is not set to ON, an error
occurs.
2. Version-up procedure
A. Firmware download using media
Media
Firmware. Adapter
USB Host
Firmware. +
Firmware. USB Memor y
Firmware.sfu The machine recognizes the

media and automatically executes
processing.
(1) Firmware update from USB memory device

First you must install the firmware file (xxx.sfu) to the root of a TEST SIMULATION NO.49-01 CLOSE
USB jump drive. FIRMWARE UPDATE/usbbd00/**********/
If the firmware is in a folder, Simulation 49-01 cannot open FILE1 FILE2

the folder. FILE3 FILE4
Secure Jumpdrive will not work.
Must have a minimum of 32MB of storage capacity to load
the firmware onto it.
1) Insert the USB memory device into the main unit.
2) Enter the 49-01 screen. Press the button of the file to be
updated. The screen transfers to the update screen. .. 1/1
(In this screen, [FILE 1] is selected)
* The number of button changes depending on the number of
the file in the USB memory device inserted.
MX-7000N ROM VERSION-UP 10 1

3) Current version number and the version number to be updated 6) At the completion of the upgrade, the display will change to:
will be shown for each firmware respectively. "COMPLETE: PLEASE TOUCH [OK] TO FINISH" Press OK.
Following key-codes will be changed; The Imager will reboot at this time.
NOW o CURRENT TEST SIMULATION NO.49-01 CLOSE
NEXT o UPDATED TO FIRMWARE UPDATE
COMPLETE : PLEASE TOUCH [OK] TO FINISH.
FIRMWARE UPDATE
CONFIG : CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00
ICU(MAIN) : CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00

OK
ICU(BOOTM) : CURRENT 09.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.00.00.00
ICU(BOOTS) : CURRENT 01.01.00.00 UPDATED TO 09.00.00.00

7) Go to Simulation 22-05 and confirm the firmware has
LANGUAGE : CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00
upgraded successfully.
GRAPHIC CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00
:
Note: If the Imager locks up or loses power during the
SLIST : CURRENT 09.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.00.00.00 upgrade, it could corrupt the firmware, preventing the
PCU(BOOT) : CURRENT 01.01.00.00 UPDATED TO 09.00.00.00 imager from booting up normally. If this occurs, you can
PCU(MAIN) : CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00 "rescue" the firmware using the following procedure:
DESK(BOOT) : CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00 Rename the firmware file on the USB device to emup-
DESK(MAIN) : CURRENT 01.01.00.00 UPDATED TO 09.00.00.00 date.sfu
A4LCC(BOOT) : CURRENT 01.01.00.00 UPDATED TO 09.00.00.00 Power off the imager (both switches) and insert the USB
ALL ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE
device (Jumpdrive) into the USB port of the imager.
1/3
Power on the imager
4) Select the button of the firmware to be updated. The button will The Imager will boot up into emergency update mode.
be highlighted. (In this screen, [ICU(MAIN)] and [LANGUAGE] When finished, the display will read "update completed"
are selected.) At the same time, [EXECUTE] button appears.
Power off the imager, and remove the USB device
* Press the selected button again to release the selection.
Reboot the imager, and go simulation 22-05 to confirm
* Press [ALL] button to select all items. firmware has upgraded successfully.
FIRMWARE UPDATE
FIRMWARE UPDATE
CONFIG : CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00 ERROR : PLEASE TOUCH [OK] TO FINISH.
ICU(MAIN) CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00 ICUM,PCU,SCU
:
ICU(BOOTM) : CURRENT 09.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.00.00.00
ICU(BOOTS) : CURRENT 01.01.00.00 UPDATED TO 09.00.00.00
LANGUAGE : CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00

OK
GRAPHIC : CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00
SLIST : CURRENT 09.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.00.00.00
PCU(BOOT) : CURRENT 01.01.00.00 UPDATED TO 09.00.00.00
PCU(MAIN) : CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00
DESK(BOOT) : CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00
DESK(MAIN) : CURRENT 01.01.00.00 UPDATED TO 09.00.00.00
A4LCC(BOOT) : CURRENT 01.01.00.00 UPDATED TO 09.00.00.00
ALL ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE 1/3
5) Press [EXECUTE] button. ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]

becomes clear. If no button is selected, [EXECUTE] button is
gray out and cannot be pressed. Press [YES] to start the
update.
FIRMWARE UPDATE
COMPLETEPLEASE TURN MAIN POWER OFF THEN ON
S E
CAUTION DO NOT POWER OFF THE MFP! FIRMWARE UPDATE IN PROGRESS!

B. Firmware download using FTP
Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2 Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52 10.36.112.83
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension .sfu) from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identi-
fier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
C. Firmware download using Web page

A Web browser (service technicians Web page) is used to update 4) When the firmware update is finished, Firmware Update com-
the firmware. pleted. Please reboot the MFP. appears. Pressing the
[Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
Update procedure
The browser will shift to the following screen.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the Update of Firmware button in the Web page. Click
the Browse button and select the firmware for the update.
MX-7000N
Close the browser and open again to display latest informa-

tion. will be displayed.
5) Update is completed with the above procedures.
3) After selecting the file, click the Submit button to send the
firmware to the Renaissance machine.
Update processing begins. While processing takes place,
Firmware Update, now processing... appears.

DSPF UNIT
REGIST SENSOR UNIT OPTION
[11]
PAPER OUT UNIT OPTION SRRC SRRBC STRC STRRBC STRRC STUD STLD STMPS SPLS1 SPED1
PCS
MX-7000N
DSW_FU PNC
TFD
SPFFAN SPOM SPFM SPUM SPFC SLUM
REGS_F SPLS2 SPED2
DSW_FL
POD2 POFM_F
SPPD5 SPPD4 SPPD3 SPPD2

VTOD REGS_R SPOD SPPD1 SPRANDOM
SCOV CL
TFD2 POFM_U
DSW_D DSPF DRIVER
PCSS PWB
TONER_K2 UNIT TONER_K1 UNIT TONER_C UNIT TONER_M UNIT TONER_Y UNIT CCD CL INVERTER
SOCD
PWB PWB
PO_TMP POM DVCRUM_K2 DVCRUM_K1 DVCRUM_C DVCRUM_M DVCRUM_Y
1. Block diagram
ROCD
K PROCESS
TM_K2 TM_K1 TM_C TM_M TM_Y DSPFcntPWB
FUSER UNIT DRIVE UNIT
HTCS_C HTCS_M HTCS_Y
A. System block diagram
COLOR PROCESS
WEB_INL/END BLTCL HTM_K1 HTM_C HTM_M HTM_Y
DRIVE UNIT
TH_UM HL_UM
BLTCL_R
TH_US HL_US FUM SCANNER UNIT OPTION
DM_K BTM DM_C TBLTC DM_M DM_Y
TH_EX1 HL_LM OPTION OPTION
FEXM CARD AUDITOR OPERATION UNIT
TH_EX2 HL_EX1 READER
PNC
FEXD DRIVER TOUCH
TH_LM HL_EX2 DVKM CCM DHPD_C DHPD_M DHPD_Y PWB PANEL
FUFM_R DOCC CL LVDS
POD1 PWB
PWB
FUFM_F DHPD_K PTCM INVERTER
ELECTRICAL SECTION
Color LCD
PWB
CL INVERTER
DTBFM ORS_LED
PS FEED UNIT PWB
SCNC
DL_K PWB
RRC PPD2 LCCM PTCM HP
CCD OPE
CCHP DL_C DL_M DL_Y MIM ORS_PD
PWB PWB
RRM
PFM DSW_R
CCMD
MPUC PPD1 POWER SW
WTM OCSW
PWB
TCS_K
LPFC
TCS_C TCS_M TCS_Y
CFM HTCS_K
RRC2 MHPS OPTION
PHTM_K1 MOTHER
DVK Driver DV_C UNIT DV_M UNIT DV_Y UNIT
PWB PWB DHS1/2
PHTM_K2
DV_K UNIT
RIGHT DOOR UNIT LSU UNIT
TNFD TBBOX PTC 2TC MC OZFM1/2/3
TURM ADUGS ADMH
TH1_LSU
PCU
PWB
HDD HDDFM CPUFM
THPS ADML 2BLD_K
LSS_BK LSS PSFM1/2 VFM_C VFM_R TH2_LSU
PWB
MFPC OPTION OPTION
PWB FAX BD_K
TANDEM PAPER FEED UNIT T1PPD LPPD LD_C
APPD1 POD3 PWB
EFI PWB
MX-7000N ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 1

LSU CNT
PWB LD_M
APPD2 TFD_R
PAPER FEED 3 PAPER FEED PWB
CLUM1 CLUM2 LSUSS
UNIT 4UNIT
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
RD I/F
1TC OPTION
PWB
LD_Y
PWB
HL
DSW_ADU TANCL TRC1/2 C3PFD C4PFD COINVENDER INSERTER
PWB
4K (SADDLE)
PUNCH UNIT
MANUAL PAPER FEED UNIT FIN
T2PFC CPFM CLUD3 CLUD2
PGM
MPWD MPLD1 Main DCPS A3/A4 LCC
T1PUS
CPED3 CPED2 DCPS AC TAPP
T1PFC DH_LCC for FIN UNIT
Only Japan
MPED MPUC T2PUS Sub DCPS
TANDEM C3SPD C4SPD
SENSOR
T1PPD1
PWB AC IN
T1PED/ LUD
MPFD MTOP1 MPFS DHSW
SIZE DETECT SIZE DETECT
T1PPD2
PWB PWB AC
C3SS1- 4 C4SS1- 4 PWB
TANDEM
SENSOR T1SPD
TH/HUD_M MTOP2 MPGS MSW
PWB WH
T2PED/ LUD C3LUM C4LUM PWB
T2SPD
DH1/2
AC IN PAPER
T1LUM TANSET C3PUS CASSETTE
C4PUS
OPTION Standards : Only Japan

C3PWD
T2LUM
B. MFP controller PWB
I2C (Ch.0)
ATA
CPU connector
RM7965A
UART
SDRAMx2
-900 IDE bus
SO-DIMM
SO-DIMM
for Debug
DIMM4
DIMM3
DDR
DDR bus 2 IDE
SYSAD bus
32bits width
ASIC
DDR bus 3
LVDS
64bits width
PCI bus 2
SO-DIMM
SO-DIMM
DDR bus 1
DIMM1
DIMM2
385/386/047/048
LSUIF
64bits width SYSTEM VIDEOIF ICU
ASIC SCAN OUT IF ASIC SCAN IN IF
LVDSIC
CPLD
ENGINE IF
connector
(Area separation)
(Image process)
I2C (Ch.0)
IMG-C Bus
IMG-B Bus
EFI connector
I2C (Ch.1)
PCI bus 1
EEPROM IMG-A Bus

256Kbits CPLD IMG (Auto Color)
PCU,SCN
ASIC UART
Piano
LOCAL bus FLASH IF
SW (LSI bus) FLASH
Expansion
PCI connector
USB Control
DEV USB-D IO signals
EXPAND
USB USB-H IF
HOST ASIC
OPE IF
VBUS
UART
SW SDR
SDR
SDRAM
LAN Ether SRAM
JACK LAN MAC
LOCAL bus
(ROM bus) RTC
MicroWire
EEPROM
72pinDIMM Socket
2Kbits 72pinDIMM Socket
72pinDIMM Socket Battery
72pinDIMM Socket FLASH
RIC RS232C Mem. x2
(RS232C) Transmitter 72pinDIMM Socket
UART 72pinDIMM Socket
FAX 100pinDIMM Socket
(OPT)

DM CLK/ BTM CLK
DC Motor Control
DV Motor BK (DVKM)
DV Motor CL (DVCM)
Stepping Motor Control Paper Feed Motor (CPFM)
EX
Fuser unit HV Pout Motor (POM)
Resist Motor (RRM)
HL control MC / TC2 unit ADU Motor (ADML/(ADMH)
Fuser Motor (FUM)
IC6 / PTC unit PSF Motor (PFM)
Waste Toner Motor (WTM)
I2C Bus EEPROM (HL_UM/LM/US/EX) Drum Motor BK (DM_K)
(256kbit) Drum Motor CL (DM_C/M/Y)
Belt Motor (BTM)
FAN Motor Control
C. PCU PWB
LCC Motor (LCCM)

IC3 PS Fan (PSFM1 - 2)
Fuser Release Motor (FUEXM)
RESETIC Ozone Fan (OZFM1 - 3)
AddressBus[21:0] Pout Fan (POFM_F/U)
FLASH ROM Syncronous Motor Fuser Fan (FUFM_F/R/DTBFM)
(16Mbit) Fuser Cleaning Motor Ventilation Fan (VFM_C/R)
DATABus[15:0] Flash Write Protect
(WEB_M)
X1 IC107 IC2
Discharge Lamp
Xtal Unbuffered Spread
UM / LM / US
19.6608MHz Inverter Spectrum
(DL_K/C/M/Y)
3-wired serial
IC4/IC8
SRAM
(1Mbit x 2)
IC11
PMC ASIC Sensor Input
CLOCK
DC Power (DVK_CH) / (CCM_ROT) Sensor Input
FW
Supply (PTCM_ROT/HP) COIN VENDOR
(TNFD) / (HTCS_K/C/M/Y) (Optional)
(FUEXD) / (WEB_INL/END)
HV (CV_CLCOPY/COPY)
TC1 unit DC Motor
2nd Belt Release Motor
IC7 (TURM)
I/O ASIC
To IC1 Load control Output
MFPC Charger Cleaner Motor
UART CPU (CCM) / (PTCM) Load Control Output
Via (PCSS) / (MPFS) / (TANCL)
Mother H8S/2373 IC9/IC27 (LSS_CL) / (BLTCL_R)
Load output DFF (RRC) / (T1PUS) / (T2PUS)
CRUM (BLTCL) / (LSS_BK)
Mechanical LCX574 I2C Bus (C3PFC) / (MPGS) / (C4PFC)
(CRUM_C/M/Y/K1/K2)
Counter (TRC1 - 2) / (MPUC) / (ADUGS)
(Optional) (T2PFC) / (T1PFC) / (LPFC)
(FPCL2) / (RRC2) / (FPCL1)
(PNC_K/CL) (C3PUS) / (C4PUS) / (MFPS) Sensor Input Synchronous Motor
Load Control Output Toner Hopper Motor
Sensor Input (PPD1 - 3) / (DSW_R/D/FU/FL) / (BELT_HP)
LSU UART Coin vendor IC70 TBBOX (C3PED) / (C4PED) / (TFD) / (CCHP)

(Optional) D/A Conv (FPD_CL/BK) / (C3PFD) / (POD1) / (TBLTB) (PHTM_K1)
FAN Lock Detect
(TCS/REGS cont) (APPD1 - 2) / (TBLTC) / (C3SS1 - 4) (PHTM_K2)
(C4SS1 - 4) / (T1PPD1 - 2) / (LPPD) / (T2LUD)
IC29/IC30 (POFM_LD1 - 3) / (OZFM_LD1 - 3) (T1LUD) / (C4SPD) / (C4LUD) / (C4PFD)
Optional MUX (FUFM_R_FD) / (FUFM_F_LD) (VTOD) / (C3SPD) / (C3LUD) / (MPFD)
HC151x2 (VFM_C_LD) / (VFM_R_LD) (DHPD_K/C/M/Y) / (T2PPD) / (TANSET) DVK Driver PWB
(PSFM_LD1 - 2) (T2PED) / (T1PED) / (T2SPD) / (T1SPD)
MUX Sensor Input

LCC UART HC151
RD I/F PWB (DSW_ADU) / (TFD3) / (MPLD)
(MTOP1 - 2) / (MPED)
Sensor Input
(PPD2)
FINISHER UART
IC83/84/86/87/88 Syncronous Motor
AND Gate Toner Motor Driver PWB
VHCT08 x 4 (TN_C/M/Y/K1/K2)
Analog Input
Analog Input
Temp/Hum sensor (TH_M/HUD_M) DC Motor Synchronous Motor
IC71/IC72/IC82
LSU Thermistor (TH1_LSU/TH2_LSU) Toner Detector (TCS_K/C/M/Y) Tray Lift Up Motor
Analog Toner Hopper Motor
MUX x 3 DV detector (DVTYP_C/M/Y/K1/K2) Process Cont. sensor (PCS_K/CL)
Fuser Thermistor (TH_UM/LM/US/EX1/EX2) Resist sensor (REGS_F/R) (T1LUM) / (T2LUM)
(C3LUM) / (C4LUM) (HTM_K/C/M/Y)
Paper Out Thermistor (PO_TMP) Multi-bypass tray width sensor (MPWD)
Drum Mark Sensor (DMS)
DSPFcnt PWB
DSPF Memory PWB
LVDS Receiver LVDS Driver

LVDS
28bit 28bit
CCD PWB
With AFE & LVDS
SCNcntPWB
LVDS Receiver LVDS
4bit *2
LVDS Driver
4bit *2
D. Scanner control PWB
SDRAM RGB8bit*3
LVDS Driver
128Mbit
30bit
LVDS Receiver
LVDS
30bit SDRAM BUS XTAL
28.795MHz
or 22.7425MHz
SCAN ASIC 24bit BUS 24bit BUS

RGB10bit*3 RGB8bit*3
/CS3 BUFFER BUFFER
DOCC PWB
LCD LVDS Driver

RGB8bit*3 LVDS
28bit Mother PWB
SRAM FlashROM <Socket>
1Mbit 8Mbit (MFP PWB)
/CS0
/CS2
(/CS0 RESERVE)
INVERTER PWB
CPT ASIC <Engine/Controller>
/CS4
ADDRESS/DATA BUS
LVDS
PANEL PWB
IO ASIC
/CS5 CARD READER
XTAL
19.6608MHz
SCANNER EEPROM
CPU

MOTOR 32Kbit
H8S/2373 I2C
AUDITOR
LAMP UN
MHPS OCSW
RSPF FEED Original detection

STMP UN (Light receiving)
MOTOR
RSPF RVS
MOTOR
CLUTCH
PHOTO Original detection
SENSOR (Light emitting)
RSPF Unit
RxD
DOCC
Schmit Inv.
CPU
(Optional) TxD
H8S/2320
O.C. Mother P.U.

TxD0 RxD[1]
nPCU_RxD
P.D. O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
RxD0 TxD[1]
nPCU_TxD
Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
P.U.
I/Oport CTS[1]
PCU_DSR
P.D. O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
I/Oport RTS[1]
PCU_DTR
E. Serial communication
O.C Schmit Inv. SCN Cnt

P.U.
TxD1 RxD
TRANS_DAT
P.U.
RxD TxD[2]
TxD
RxD
P.D. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. nTxD_SCN
P.U.
RxD1 TxD P.D.
RSV_DAT Schmit Inv. O.C.
LSUASIC P.U.
P.D. TxD RxD[2]
Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. nRxD_SCN
P.U.
SCK1 SCK CPU P.D.
SCK_LSU O.C Schmit Inv.
H8S/2373 P.U.
P.D. Schmit Inv. RTS[2]
Schmit Inv. RTS_SCN
LSU A[4:0]
I/O ASIC
P.U.
uPD65892GC CTS[2]
D[15:8] CTS_SCN
P.U. P.U.
TxD2 RxD
TxD
P.D.
RxD
TxD_FIN O.C Schmit Inv.
CPU O.C. Schmit Inv. DTR_SCAN

H8S/2373 P.U. P.U. DSR_SCAN
RxD2 TxD
RxD_FIN
RxD_SCAN
TxD_SCAN
P.D.
O.C. O.C.
P.D.
CPU
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O M30843FWGP O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. Schmit Inv. TxD[PIC]
DTR_FIN nTxD_PIC
P.U.
P.U.
O.C. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O FINISHER RxD[PIC]
DSR_FIN nRxD_PIC
(Optional) PIC
O.C. O.C. O.C Schmit Inv.
P.U. P.U.
CLR[PIC]
P.U.
P.U.
CLR_PIC
Schmit Inv. O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. O.C O.C.
P.U.
REQ[PIC]
P.D.
P.D.
REQ_PIC
O.C Schmit Inv.
MFPC
I/O
I/O
RxD
TxD
I/F ASIC
CPU

H8S/2373
P.U. P.U. P.U.

TxD4 RxD
TxD_LCC
MFPC
O.C. O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
RxD4 TxD DSPF Cnt
RxD_LCC
O.C. O.C. CPU
P.U. P.U. P.U. H8/3687
I/O TxD[7]
DTR_LCC FAX2D_TxD
O.C. O.C. TxD_FAX(D)+
P.U. P.U. P.U. TxD_FAX(D)- RxD[7]
I/O LCC FAX2D_RxD
DSR_LCC RxD_FAX(D)+
O.C. O.C. (Optional) RxD_FAX(D)- LVDS TxD[8]
FAX2CS_TxD
TxD_FAX(CS)+
TxD_FAX(CS)- RxD[8]
FAX2CS_RxD
RxD_FAX(CS)+
RxD_FAX(CS)-
New
A[4:0] PMC ASIC ASIC P.U.
RTS[7]
FAX2D_RTS
D[15:8] uPD65946GJ TxD
Schmit Inv. P.U. O.C. P.D.
PCU CPU CTS[7]
PIC FAX2D_CTS
SH7706
P.D. O.C P.U. Schmit Inv.
RxD RTS[8]
FAX2CS_RTS
Schmit Inv. P.U. O.C. P.D.
CTS[8]
FAX2CS_CTS
FAX P.D. O.C Schmit Inv.
(Optional)
LSUSS BK
5V2 interrupts
5V2
LD_BK
laser beams.
INT24V1 INT5V
LD C
LSUSS CL
F. Interlock
LC M interrupts
DM_K LSU PWB
LD Y laser beams.
DM_C
DM_M
INT24V1
DM_Y
DRIVER
BTM
PWB ADUH
HL_UM
POM INT24V1in
ADUL HL_US
HLPR
HL_LM
LCCM AC AC
HL_EX1
DR-DCPS HL_EX2
INT24V1 HL PWB
/INTcnt
INT24V_TM
TM_K1
TM_K2
TM_M
TM_C
TM_Y
DSW-R
(Right door)
DSW-FL INT24V1in
24V1 (Front door lower)
6.3A 24VDSW-FL
LSUSS CL
LSUSS BK

INT24V1in
PTCCM
FEXM
24V2
24V2 INT24V2 INT24V2
FUM
6.3A
CCM
AC PWB
PSM
DVCM
WTM
DL_K PWB
1TC PWB
PCU PWB 2TC PWB
PTC PWB
MC PWB
DC SUB POWER SUPPLY
Voltage
RC101 Generation
+ 5Vo
F1 + + 5VL
AC PWB
~
~
T5AH/250V
-
no-mounting
N/F
A1 F2
VR1
RL51
F61
DC MAIN POWER SUPPLY T2AH/250V
no-mounting F301
Voltage
A1 MAIN POWER SW Generation
+ 5Vo
AC IN F1 + 5VL F102 FW
L SQ61
Generating
20A/250V D102 Circuit
A2 VR3
+
N/F
~
~
+5Vo
-
N
F101
Voltage
Generation F103
F3 +24V1 T1AH/250V
+24V2 RY-CNT
+24V3
T2.0AH/250V no- +24V4 T8AH/250V
mounting +24V5
+12V
VR2 +5Vn FW
G. AC power line diagram (100V series)
WH-L WH-N +3.3V Z101

Generating
Circuit
HL PWB
L1
RY1
INT24V1
WARM HEATER SET (OPTION)
L2
WH-SW /HL_PR
WH PWB
SCN unit
WH-N 10W
WH-L RY1 SCN

NC
GND
NO TD1 TD2 TD3 TD4

T1 G T1 G T1 G T1 G
24V2
T2 4 SSR1 T2 4 SSR2 T2 4 SSR3 T2 SSR4
1 1 1 1
HLOUT_UM HLOUT_US HLOUT_LM HLOUT_EX
2 2 2 2
6 6 6 6
Main unit
18W
Tandem
drawer
HL_EX1 HL_EX2
Cassette
HL_UM HL_US HL_LM TS_EX1 TS_EX2
LCC TS_US TS_LM

AC120V-TBD A AC125V 15A
10W (OPTION) AC240V-TBD A AC250V 10A
TS_UM
LCC AC125V 15A AC120V 15A
AC250V 10A AC240V 10A
AC125V 15A
AC250V 10A
FUSING UNIT
DC SUB POWER SUPPLY
Voltage
RC101 Generation
+ 5Vo
F1
+ + 5VL
AC PWB ~
~
T5AH/250V
-
no-mounting
N/F
A1 F2
T5AH/250V
VR1
F3 DC MAIN POWER SUPPLY
F61
Voltage T2AH/250V
Generation T5AH/250V
+12V1
no-mounting +5V1
A1 MAIN POWER SW
RL51
AC IN F1 MSW detection circuit

FW
L FW SQ61
Generating NR2 Generating
T10AH/250V Circuit F2 Circuit
A2 VR3
T3.15AH/250V
+5Vo
+5V1
F2
RL1
N
T10AH/250V F1 T8AH/250V
DCCNT RY-CNT
F3 F4 no-mounting
T2.0AH/250V no- T2.0AH/250V N/F N/F NR1
mounting Voltage
VR2 Generation
H. AC power line diagram (200V series)
WH-L WH-N
+3.3V
+5V2
+12V2
+38V1+38V3
HL PWB
L1
INT24V1
WARM HEATER SET (OPTION)
L2
WH-SW /HL_PR
WH PWB
SCN unit
WH-N 10W
WH-L RY1 SCN

NC
GND
NO TD1 TD2 TD3 TD4

T1 G T1 G T1 G T1 G
24V2
T2 4 SSR1 T2 4 SSR2 T2 4 SSR3 T2 4 SSR4
1 1 1 1
HLOUT_UM HLOUT_US HLOUT_LM HLOUT_EX
2 2 2 2
6 6 6 6
Main unit
18W
Tandem
drawer
HL_EX1 HL_EX2
Cassette
HL_UM HL_US HL_LM TS_EX1 TS_EX2
LCC TS_US TS_LM

AC125V 15A AC125V 15A
10W (OPTION) AC250V 10A AC250V 10A
TS_UM
LCC AC125V 15A AC120V 15A
AC250V 10A AC240V 10A
AC125V 15A
AC250V 10A
FUSING UNIT
INT24V1 5V
5V D-GND LD BK PWB
INT24V1
DM_Y DM_C DM_M DM_K BTM ADMH POM LCCM ADML PFM P-GND /INTcnt INT5V
DRIVER PWB 3.3V
24V2 5V
P-GND 24V3 LD C PWB LD M PWB LD Y PWB
P-GMD
LSU PWB D-GND
INT24V2
5V 5V 1TC PWB P-GND 5V3
24V6 24V6 INT5V D-GND BD PWB(K) SPUM paper feed 24V_SPUM
FINISER motor
6.3A P-GND P-GND D-GND
INT24V2
OPTION 24V3 24V
MC PWB P-GND P-GND Polygon motor
SULM lift-up motor 24V_TR
24V1
INT24V2 P-GND LSU FAN DSPF DRIVER
2TC PWB P-GND 24V_TR PWB
5V FAN PGND
INT24V2
24V2 PTC PWB P-GND DHPD K DHPD C DHPD M DHPD Y T1S PWB T2S PWB
P-GND
D-GND SPFM transport motor 24V_SPFM
5V
24V4 5V
CPFM P-GND 24V4
D-GND P-GND DVKM 5V
D-GND DSPF CL inverter PWB 24V 24V
PWB PGND AGND
5V PGND
INT24V2 INT24V2 SGND
24V2 24V2 WTM P-GND P-GND DVCM
6.3A
3.3V DSPF CNT PWB
5V 24V3 5V
Mother FAN
AC PWB RD I/F PWB D-GND 12V 3.3V
24V 5V
DSPF CCD PWB
INT24V2 External variable GND 12V
DC POWER INT24V2 motor PGND GND
I. DC power line diagram (100V/200V series)
PWB Fusing motor P-GND

5V
24V3
D-GND
DVK DRIVER PWB
INT24V2
RRM P-GND
5V
INT24V2 INT24V2 24V3 5V
COIN VENDOR
INT24V1in INT24V1in P-GND CARD READER D-GND
P-GND P-GND
OPTION OPTONN
DSW-R Return harnes
(Right door) (Front door upper) 5V 5V 3.3V 5V
SUB POWER
GND 5V 5V MFP OPE-J PWB D-GND ORS PD PWB
PWB D-GND D-GND
MHPS
12V
24V2 24V2 INT24V1 3.3V

D-GND D-GND D-GND MFP FAN HDD FAN 3.3V D-GND LCD UN
24V
D-GND P-GND
LVDS-CD PWB
L-HL_U 3.3V 24V

L-HL_LM D-GND EFI D-GND LCD INV PWB
MOTHER PWB
HL PWB 3.3V OPTION
HL(US) HL(UM) HL(LM) HL(EX1) HL(EX2) 5V
12V SCNcnt PWB 24V ORS LED PWB
D-GND 5V
N_HL(EX) D-GND EXTEND PCI
N_HL(LM)
N_HL(UM) MFP PWB OPTION 5V
N_HL(SU) D-GND OCSW
3.3V
5V 5V 5V 3.3V
24V7 24V7 LCC D-GND 12V FAX UN 5V
6.3A P-GND P-GND CONTROL PWB D-GND 12V CCD PWB
GND
DSW-FL OPTION OPTION
(Front door lower)
24V1 24V1 D-GND
6.3A 24V CL inverter PWB
3.3V 3.3V 5V 5V HDD PWB
5V 5V 12V 12V
24V3 24V3 D-GND D-GND
6.3A 24V4 24V4
6.3A GND1 GND1 PCU PWB 3.3V 3.3V
GND2 GND2 5V 5V
12V 12V
5V 5V 24V5 24V5
12V 12V P-GND P-GND
24V5 24V5
6.3A
3.3V
5V DOCC
D-GND PWB
OPTION
INT24V1 5V
5V D-GND LD BK PWB
INT24V1
DM_Y DM_C DM_M DM_K BTM ADMH POM LCCM ADML PFM P-GND /INTcnt INT5V
DRIVER PWB
3.3V
24V2 5V
P-GND 24V3 LD C PWB LD M PWB LD Y PWB
P-GMD
D-GND
INT24V2 LSU PWB
5V 5V 1TC PWB P-GND 5V3
24V6 24V6 INT5V D-GND BD PWB(K) SPUM paper feed motor 24V_SPUM
FINISER
6.3A P-GND P-GND D-GND
INT24V2
OPTION 24V3 24V
MC PWB
P-GND P-GND Polygon motor
SULM lift-up motor 24V_TR
24V1
INT24V2 P-GND LSU FAN
2TC PWB P-GND 24V_TR
5V FAN PGND
DSPF DRIVER
INT24V2 PWB
24V2 PTC PWB P-GND DHPD K DHPD C DHPD M DHPD Y T1S PWB T2S PWB
P-GND
D-GND SPFM transport motor 24V_SPFM
5V
24V4 5V
CPFM P-GND 24V4
D-GND P-GND DVKM 5V
D-GND 24V 24V
DSPF CL inverter PWB
PGND AGND
5V PGND
INT24V2 INT24V2 SGND
WTM
24V2 24V2 P-GND P-GND DVCM
6.3A
DSPF CNT PWB
3.3V
J. DC power line diagram (120V series)
5V 24V3 5V
Mother FAN
AC PWB RD I/F PWB D-GND 12V 3.3V
24V 5V
DSPF CCD PWB
INT24V2 External variable GND 12V
DC POWER INT24V2 motor PGND GND
PWB Fusing motor P-GND
5V
24V3
DVK DRIVER PWB
D-GND
INT24V2
RRM P-GND
5V
INT24V2 INT24V2 24V3 5V
COIN VENDOR
INT24V1in INT24V1in P-GND CARD READER D-GND
P-GND P-GND
OPTIOON OPTONN
DSW-R Return harness
(Right door) (Front door upper) 5V 5V 3.3V 5V
SUB POWER
GND 5V 5V D-GND ORS PD PWB
PWB MFP OPE-J PWB
MHPS D-GND D-GND
12V
24V2 24V2 INT24V1 3.3V

D-GND D-GND D-GND MFP FAN HDD FAN 3.3V D-GND LCD UN
24V
D-GND P-GND
LVDS-CD PWB
L-HL_U 3.3V 24V
L-HL_LM D-GND EFI D-GND LCD INV PWB

MOTHER PWB
HL PWB 3.3V OPTION
HL(US) HL(UM) HL(LM) HL(EX1) HL(EX2) 5V
12V SCNcnt PWB 24V ORS LED PWB
D-GND 5V
N_HL(EX) D-GND EXTEND PCI
N_HL(LM)
N_HL(UM) OPTION 5V
N_HL(SU) MFP PWB D-GND OCSW
3.3V
5V 5V 5V 3.3V
24V1 24V1 LCC CONTROL D-GND 12V FAX UN 5V
6.3A P-GND P-GND PWB D-GND 12V CCD PWB
GND
DSW-FL OPTION OPTION
(Front door lower)
24V4 24V4 D-GND
6.3A 24V CL inverter PWB
3.3V 3.3V 5V 5V
HDD PWB
5V 5V 12V 12V
24V3 24V3 D-GND D-GND
6.3A
GND1 GND1 PCU PWB 3.3V 3.3V
GND2 GND2 5V 5V
12V 12V
5V 5V 24V5 24V5
12V 12V P-GND P-GND
24V5 24V5
6.3A
3.3V
5V DOCC
D-GND PWB
OPTION
24V4
PFM
6.3A
DVKM
DMBK
DMC
DMM
INT24V1
DMY
DRIVER
BTM
PWB ADMH
POM
ADML
PSFM INT24V1in
LCCM
K. DC24V distribution drawing
HLPR
DR-DCPS HL PWB
INT24V1
/INTcnt
HTMK INT24V_TM
HTMC TMK1
TA7291 circuit TMK2
24V2
HTMM
HTMY TMM
TMC
WEBM
PHTMK Return harness
TMY
for except Japan INT24V_TM
DSW-R (Front door upper)
(Right door)
DSW-FL INT24V1in DSW-FD
24V1 ( Front door lower) (Front door upper)
24VDSW-FL
DL_K
6.3A CCM
24V2
FUM
DVCM
INT24V1in

PSM
WTM
24V2 INT24V2
INT24V2
FPCL1,2
6.3A
AC PWB
24V3
24V3 HV PWB
6.3A
LSU PWB
DSPF
24V5 CL LUM1 - 4
Mother PWB SCNcnt Toner concentration sensor
6.3A PWB MM PCU PWB
INV POFM1 - 3
24V6 OZFM1 - 3
LCC ORSLED
6.3A
AUDITER DCFM1,2
24V7 Clutch, solenoid
6.3A
INSERTER DL_C,M,Y
Mechanical counter 1,2
Coin vender
(AC cord: common) CN1(B03P-VL) CN2(B03P-VL-K) (MSW harness CD) CN_1 (B2P3-VH) CN_3(B10P-VH) (Lower main harness CD) CN12(B12B-XL)
BK BK BL BL
1 L_IN MSW-Lout 3 MSW-Lout (WH) 1 L_DC 5VL 1 2 5VL
WH BL BL
2 NC NC 2 3 N_DC 5VL 2 3 5VL
WH GY GY
3 N_IN MSW-Nout 1 MSW-Nout (WH) GND 3 1 D-GND
GY GY
CN6(B2P3-VH-R) CN3(B03P-VL-R) GND 4 6 D-GND
WH BK BL BL
1 N_WH MSW-Lin 1 MSW-Lin (RD) 5VO 5 4 5VO
BK GY GY
3 L_WH NC 2 MSW CN_2 (B3P4-VH) GND 6 7 D-GND
WH BK BR RD
MSW-Nin 3 MSW-Nin (RD) 1 L_RY FW 7 10 24V5
WH BR GY
CN5(B03P-VL-E) CN4(B3P4-VH-R) 4 N_RY FW 8 12 P-GND
BK BK LB PL
1 L_HL L_DC 1 RY_CNT 9 9 12VHD
WH WH PL BL
3 N_HL N_DC 4 OFF_CNT 10 8 5VHD
(AC harness CD) (AC-DC harness CD) PL
SUB DCPS 11 12VN
BL 5 5VN
CN10(B4P-PH-K-S) (AC-DC harness CD) P SM-6pin R CN13
2. Actual wiring chart
24V2 RD 3 FW 3 BR 1 FW
AC_PWB 1
GY LB
FPS-250 D-GND 4 4 RY_CNT 4 2 RY_CNT
L_HL CN2(B8P-VH) 5 OFF_CNT 5 PL 3 OFF_CNT
BR BR
N_HL Output ON at Open /DCCNT 1 1 DC_CNT1 1 4 DC_CNT1
FPS-187 /MSW-MON 2 5 DC_CNT2
HL PWB CN_AC (B2P3-VH) GND2 3 6 3.3V
BK BL GY
1 L_DC +5V1 4 2 D-GND 2 7 D-GND
WH
3 N_DC GND2 5 AWG conversion B08B-PNDZS-1
PL
+12V1 6 NEW MOTHER PWB
GND2 7
(WH harness CD) WH_SW +12V1 8
PS-187 CN3(B9P-VH) DSW-FL CN1

BK RD RD
L_WH 1 +24V1 1 1 24VDSW-FL
GND1 2 GY GY 2 P-GND
BK RD
L_WH 1 +24V2 3 Page2
PS-187 GND1 4 GY GY 3 P-GND
RD RD
A. Power supply section (100V/200V series) (1/31)
+24V3 5 5 24V3
GY GY
GND1 6 4 P-GND
RD RD
+24V4 7 6 24V4
PL
GND1 8 7 12V
BR
(AC-DC harness CD) FW 9 12 FW
BL
CN5 8 5V2
GY GY
D-GND 1 CN4(B7P-VH) 9 D-GND
RD RD OR
24V2 3 +24V5 1 10 3.3V
GY GY
B03B-PH-K-R GND1 2 11 D-GND
+24V6 3 RD INSERTER (2 pcs.) B12B-XL
CN1 GND1 4 GY INSERTER (2 pcs.)
BK WH-L RD LCC PCU PWB
1 DCPS +24V7 5
WH GY
3 WH-N GND1 6 LCC
B2P3-VH-R (NC) 7

CN5(B4P-VH)
PL
WH PWB +12V2 1
(AC harness CD) (SCN-WH harness : common) GND2 2
CN2 ELR ELP ELR CN8(B6P-VH) +12V2 3
WH WH WH GY
WH-N(SCAN) 1 2 2 2 1 +38V1 GND2 4
BK BK BK
WH-L(SCAN) 3 1 1 1 2 GND1
B2P3VH-BL 3 +38V2 CN6(B10P-VH)
BL
4 GND1 +5V2 1
ELR 5 +38V3 GND2 2 GY
CN3 ELR WH 2 6 GND1 +5V2 3
WH-N(LCC) 1 12 To P23 BK 1 GND2 4
LCC heater BL INSERTER
WH-L(LCC) 3 4 +5V2 5
B2P3-VH GND2 6
BL
(WH harness CD) ELR ELP +5V2 7 LCC
WH
1 1 GND2 8
BK Cassette heater BL
CN4 2 2 +5V2 9
WH-N(CS_WH) 1 GND2 10
WH-L(CS_WH) 4 ELR ELP
WH
WH-N(TAN_WH) 2 1 1 CN7(B2P-VH)
BK Tandem heater OR
WH-L(TAN_WH) 5 2 2 +3.3V 1
GY
B4P(5-3)-VH GND2 2
(AC cord) CN1(B03P-VL) CN2(B03P-VL-K) (AC harness 120 CD) CN_1 (B2P3-VH) CN_3(B10P-VH) (Lower main harness 120V CD) CN12(B12B-XL)
BK MSW-Lout (WH) BK 1 1 BL BL 2
1 L_IN MSW-Lout 3 L_DC 5VL 5VL
WH 3 2 BL BL 3
2 NC NC 2 N_DC 5VL 5VL
WH MSW-Nout (WH) 3 GY GY 1
3 N_IN MSW-Nout 1 GND D-GND
4 GY GY 6
CN6(B2P3-VH-R) CN3(B03P-VL-R) GND D-GND
WH BK MSW-Lin (RD)
RY 5 BL BL 4
1 N_WH MSW-Lin 1 5VO 5VO
BK 6 GY GY 7
3 L_WH NC 2 MSW CN_2 (B3P4-VH) GND D-GND
WH MSW-Nin (RD) BK 1 7 BR BL 5
MSW-Nin 3 L_RY FW 5VN
WH 4 8 BR BL 8
CN5(B03P-VL-E) CN4(B3P4-VH-R) N_RY FW 5VHD
BK BK 9 LB PL 9
1 L_HL L_DC 1 RY_CNT 12VHD
WH WH 10 PL RD 10
3 N_HL N_DC 4 OFF_CNT 24V5
(AC-DC harness CD) PL
SUB DCPS 11 12VN
GY 12 P-GND
(AC harness 120 CD) CN10(B4P-PH-K-S) CN13
24V2 RD BR 1 FW
AC_PWB 1 (AC-DC harness CD) CN1(B2P3-VH-B)
GY BK LB
D-GND 4 3 L_DC 2 RY_CNT
FPS-250 WH 1 N_DC PL 3 OFF_CNT
L_HL CN8(B7P-VH-B) 4 DC_CNT1
N_HL 24V1 1 INSERTER (2 pcs.) 5 DC_CNT2
FPS-187 24V1 2 LCC 6 3.3V
HL PWB CN6(B03B-PASK-1) 24V2 3 To P2 GY 7 D-GND
1 DCCNT1 24V3 4 B08B-PNDZS-1
3 DCCNT2 24V3 5 NEW MOTHER PWB
24V4 6
(WH harness CD) WH_SW 24V5 7
DSW-FL
PS-187 CN7(B8P-VH-B) CN1
BK RD
B. Power supply section (120V series) (2/31)
L_WH 1 FW 1 1 24VDSW-FL
GY 2
P-GND 2 P-GND
BK GY
L_WH 1 P-GND 3 3 P-GND
GY 4
PS-187 P-GND 4 P-GND
CJ-PSun RD 5
P-GND 5 24V3
RD 6 24V4
P-GND 6
PL 7
P-GND 7 INSERTER (2 pcs.) 12V
BL 8
P-GND 8 LCC 5V2
GY
(AC-DC harness CD) 9 D-GND
OR 10 3.3V
CN5 CN4(B6P-VH-B)
D-GND GY GY 11 D-GND
1 5VN 1
24V2 RD BR 12
3 5VN 2 INSERTER FW
B03B-PH-K-R 5VN 3 LCC B12B-XL
5VN 4
CN1 D-GND 5 PCU PWB
BK 1 WH-L D-GND 6
WH 3 WH-N (DC inteface harness CD)
B2P3-VH-R CN2(B5P-VH-B) R EL-2pin P
D-GND 2 1 D-GND 1

5VL 4 2 5VL 2
WH PWB
(AC harness 120 CD) (SCN-WH harness : common) CN5(B04P-VH-B)
CN2 ELR ELP ELR 12V 1
WH WH WH
WH-N(SCAN) 1 2 2 2 12V 2
BK BK BK
WH-L(SCAN) 3 1 1 1 D-GND 3
B2P3VH-BL D-GND 4
ELR CN3(B03P-VH-B)
CN3 ELR WH 2 3.3V 1
WH-N(LCC) 1 12 To P23 BK 1 D-GND 3
WH-L(LCC) 3 4 LCC heater
B2P3-VH
(WH harness CD) ELR ELP
WH 1 1
BK Cassette heater
CN4 2 2
WH-N(CS_WH) 1
WH-L(CS_WH) 4 ELR ELP
WH-N(TAN_WH) 2 WH 1 1
BK Tandem heater
WH-L(TAN_WH) 5 2 2
B4P(5-3)-VH
Japan and Agency Norht America and Europe
Front toner bottle section Front toner bottle section
DSW_FU (HL relay harness JP CD) P DSW_FU (HL relay harness CD) P EL4P R (Upper main harness CD) CN11
RD RD RD RD
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
RD RD RD RD
INT24V_TM 2 2 INT24V_TM 2 2 INT24V_TM 2 3 INT24V_TM to TNmotor
PS-187-2V PS-187-2V B2P3-VH
P EL2P R
RD RD RD RD
3 1 INT24V1in 1 3 INT24V1in 3
RD RD RD RD
TC Electrode un 4 2 INT24V1in 2 4 INT24V1in 4
Right door section (IL return harness CD)
DSW_R (Upper main harness CD) CN16
RD RD
INT24V1in 2 3 INT24V1in
RD RD
24V(DSW_FL) 1 1 24V(DSW_FL)
C. Interlock section (3/31)
PS-187-2V B2P3-VH
Transfer separation sensor BK (Transfer belt separation harness BK CD) R SM-5P N P (Upper main harness CD) CN15
BR BR BR
TBLTB 1 1 TBLTB 1 14 TBLTB
GY GY GY
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 2 16 D-GND
BL BL BL
5VNPD(LED) 3 3 5VNPD(LED) 3 18 5VNPD(LED)
GP1S73P 179228-3 BR 4 PTCM_HP 4 BR B40B-PNDZS-1
GY 5 D-GND 5 GY
CN18
BR
22 PTCM_HP
GY
24 D-GND
Front door section B30B-PNDZS-1
PHNR-02-H + DSW_FL (MSW harness CD) P EL6P R (Lower main harness CD) CN1
(PTC guide UN harness CD) RD RD RD
PTC HP detection BU02P-TR-P-H 24V(DSW_FL) 2 2 24V(DSW_FL) 2 1 24V(DSW_FL)
BR BR BR RD RD
PTCM_HP 1 1 PTCM_HP 2 24V1 1 1 24V1 1 B12B-XL
GY GY GY
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 1 PS-187-2V
179228-2
CN3
24V1 RD
DR-DCPS 1
24V2 RD
(Japan/200V series) 3
B9P-VH
CN8
24V1 RD
CJ-DCPS 6
24V2 RD
(120V series) 3
B07P-VH DR-PCU PWB
CN10 (Lower main harness CD)
RD
INT24V1 1
RD
INT24V1 2
GY
P-GND 3
GY
P-GND 4
BL
5VNPD 5

B5P-VH
DRIVER PWB
CN2
RD
24V2 1
GY
P-GND 3 P SM-6pin R CN4
BL BL
5VN 2 6 5VN 6 40 5VN
B3P-VH AWG conversion
CN2
RD
1 INT24V1
RD
2 INT24V1
GY 3 P-GND
CN8 GY 5 P-GND
GY BL
coil P-GND 4 8 5VNPD
RD RD
INT24V1in 3 4 INT24V1in
RD RD
INT24V2 1 6 INT24V2
GY GY
P-GND 2 7 P-GND
BR BR
/INT_CNT 5 9 /INT_CNT
24V2 7 RD
B9P-VH
24V2 6 RD
AC PWB
B7P-VH-B
(TS-HL_UM harness CD) (Fusing harness CD)
(TS-HL_US harness CD) #250 #250 (HL relay harness CD) CN1
WH WH WH 550W WH
1 N-HL_UM 1 1 N-HL_UM
#250 WH
#250 #187 #187 5 N-HL_US HL PWB
BK BK BK BK 950W WH
THERMOSTAT 2 L-HL_U 2 3 N-HL_LM CN4
550W
HL_UM B3P5-VH INT24V1 1 RD
#187 #187 GY
400W #187 #187 D-GND 2
BK BR
HL_US THERMOSTAT BK CN2 HLout_UM 3
BK PK
2 L-HL_U HLout_US 4
WH WH WH 400W WH LB
3 N-HL_US 3 1 N-HL_EX HLout_LM 5
#187 #187 PL
S02B-VT HLout_EX 6
YL R/P #187 7 BR
450W #187 /HLPR
BK BK BK 1400W BK
THERMOSTAT BK 4 L-HL_LM 4 L-HL_LM B07B-PASK
HL_LM FPS-250
WH WH WH 450W
5 N-HL_LM 5
D. Fusing unit section (4/31)
(TS-HL_LOW harness: common) YL R/P

#187
WH WH 6 N-HL_EX 6 WH 950W
#187 (HL relay harness CD) (Upper main harness CD)
#187 #187 R SM-2pin_N P P DF1B-20P S CN8
475W
HL_EX1 #187 #187 #187 #187 #187
WEB 1 WEBM_a 1
BR
17 WEBM_a 17
BR
10 WEBM_a DRIVER PWB
motor 2 WEBM_b 2 PL 18 WEBM_b 18 PL 12 WEBM_b
475W
BK BK BK
TS TS B12B-PNDZS-1
HL_EX2 Fuser unit I/F Drawer Fuser unit I/F Drawer
#187
WH
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A1
1 2 3 3 2 1
A10
1 1
(WEB harness CD) 3 3
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B9 A2
B8 A3
B7 A4
B6 A5
B5 A6
B4 A7
B3 A8
B2 A9
B1 A10
6 5 4 4 5 6
5 5
WEB-END View from Fuser unit side View from Body side
PHNR-5-H +BU05P-TR-P-H CN12 CN10
WH PK PK PK BR
5 WEB_END 1 B-8 WEB_END B-2 9 WEB_END 9 9 WEB_END /HLPR 13
WH GY GY GY PL
4 D-GND 2 B-7 D-GND B-3 7 D-GND 7 7 D-GND HLout_EX 11
WH BR BR BR LB
3 WEB_INL 3 B-6 WEB_INL B-4 11 WEB_INL 11 11 WEB_INL HLout_LM 9
7 PK
HLout_US
5 BR
HLout_UM
3 GY
D-GND
19 TH2_AD2 19 13 TH2_AD2 1 RD
INT24V1
PHNR-3-H +BU03P-TR-P-H 20 TH2_AD1 20 15 TH2_AD1 B40B-PNDZS-1 (Upper main harness CD)
BK WH PL PL PL
TH_UM 3 TH1_AD2 1 B-3 TH1_AD2 B-7 2 TH1_AD2 2 2 TH1_AD2
WH WH LB LB LB
2 TH1_AD1 2 B-2 TH1_AD1 B-8 4 TH1_AD1 4 4 TH1_AD1
Non-contact BL 1 D-GND 3 WH B-1 D-GND B-9
GY GY
6 D-GND 6
GY
6 D-GND
PHNR-2-H +BU02P-TR-P-H
TH_US WH PL PL PL
2 TH_US 1 A-8 TH_US A-3 10 TH_US 10 10 TH_US
Contact 1 D-GND 2 WH A-7 D-GND A-4 GY

TH_EX1 WH PK PK PK
4 TH_EX1 1 A-4 TH_EX1 A-7 14 TH_EX1 14 14 TH_EX1
TH_EX2 WH BR BR BR
(WEB harness CD)
TH_LM WH LB LB LB
2 TH_LM 1 2 TH_LM 4 A-6 TH_LM A-5 12 TH_LM 12 12 TH_LM
Contact 1 D-GND 2 1 D-GND 5 WH A-5 D-GND A-6 GY
A-10 TH_UM A-1 BR BR 8 TH_UM 8 BR 8 TH_UM B16B-PNDZS-1

GY
A-9 D-GND A-2 CN13
13 POD1 13 36 POD1
POD1 15 5VNPD 15 38 5VNPD
D-GND 1 WH B-9 D-GND B-1 GY B40B-PNDZS-1
WH
6
8
7
5
4
3
2
1
POD1 2 B-5 POD1 B-5 DR-PCU PWB

5VNPD 3 WH B-4 5VNPD B-6
GP1A71L3 PHR-3 Drawer RWZ
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DF11-8DP-SP1
P SM-4p R (Upper main harness) CN13
RD
1 FUFM_R 1 2 FUFM_R
Fusing duct fan LB
4 FUFM_R_LD 4 4 FUFM_R_LD
GY
FUFM_R(80) 3 P-GND 3 6 P-GND
2 /FUFM_CNT 2
10 POFM_CNT2
External variable sensor (HL relay harness) P DF1B-32P S DR-PCU PWB

GY
PK
FEXD 2 3 FEXD 3 30 FEXD
BL
E. Fusing drive unit section (5/31)
5VNPD 1 5 5VNPD 5 32 5VNPD

OJ-4506-N23 ZHR-3 34 D-GND(/FUFM_CNT)
B40B-PNDZS-1
(HL relay harness)
P SM-4p R (Bottle FAN harness) P SM-4p R CN12
RD RD RD RD
1 FUFM_F 1 1 FUFM_F 1 7 FUFM_F 7 1 FUFM_F
Fusing duct fan PL PL PL LB
2 /POFM_CNT2 2 2 /POFM_CNT2 2 9 FUFM_F_LD 9 3 FUFM_F_LD
FUFM_F GY GY GY GY
3 P-GND 3 3 P-GND 3 11 P-GND 11 5 P-GND
(Sirocco) LB LB LB
4 FUFM_F_LD 4 4 FUFM_F_LD 4 B16B-PNDZS-1
CN10
PL
13 /POFM_CNT2 13 14 /FUFM_CNT
B40B-PNDZS-1
P PA-3pin R
RD
Bottle cooling fan 1 FUFM_F 1
BTFM 2 NC 2
GY
3 P-GND 3
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
FUFM_F
FUFM_F
FUFM_F
FUFM_F
P SM-6pin_N R (HL relay harness) (Upper main harness) CN14
BL BR BR BR
1 FEXM_/B 1 15 FEXM_/B 15 13 FEXM_/B
BR PL PL PL

3 FEXM_B 3 19 FEXM_B 19 15 FEXM_B
External variable YL LB LB LB
2 FEXM_/A 2 17 FEXM_/A 17 17 FEXM_/A
motor RD PK PK PK
4 FEXM_A 4 21 FEXM_A 21 19 FEXM_A
WH RD RD RD
5 INT24V2 5 23 INT24V2 23 3 INT24V2
6 N,C 6
Fusing motor (Upper main harness)

RD RD
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
GY GY
P-GND 2 5 P-GND
LB LB
/FUM_CK 4 7 /FUM_CK
PK PK
/FUM_D 5 9 /FUM_D
BR BR
FUM_LD 6 11 FUM_LD
N.C 3 B30B-PNDZS-1
N.C 7
B7B-PH-K-S
P SM-4p R (Paper exit UN harness CD) P DF1B-18p S (Upper main harness CD) CN15
BR BR BR BR
1 POFM 1 1 POFM 1 1 POFM
Paper exit PL PL PL PL
2 /POFM_CNT1 2 3 /POFM_CNT1 3 3 /POFM_CNT1
cooling fan GY GY GY GY
3 P-GND 3 5 P-GND 5 5 P-GND
POFM_F (80) LB LB LB LB
4 POFM_F_LD 4 7 POFM_LD1 7 7 POFM_LD1
PK PK PK
P SM-4p R 9 POFM_LD2 9 9 POFM_LD2
BR
F. Paper exit unit section (6/31)
1 POFM 1 11 POFM_LD3
Paper exit PL PL PL PL
cooling fan GY
3 P-GND 3
PK
POFM_U (60) 4 POFM_U_LD 4 p,4
P SM-4p R
3
2
1
CNT2
CNT2
CNT2
DF11-4DP-SP1
(Upper main harness CD)

BL BL BL
Main unit paper exit 13 5VNPD 13 2 5VNPD
PL PL PL
full detection 15 TFD 15 4 TFD
BL
5VNPD 1
PL BL BL BL
TFD 2 17 5VNPD 17 6 5VNPD
GY LB LB LB
D-GND 3 2 POD2 2 8 POD2
GY GY GY
LG248NL1 179228-3 4 D-GND 4 10 D-GND
BR BR BR
18 PO_TMP 18 12 PO-TMP
Paper exit detection BL Temperature sensor CN1 B40B-PNDZS-1
BR
5VNPD 1 PO_TMP 3
4
8
6
2
1
3
5
7
3
1
2
4
LB GY
POD2 2 D-GND 4 DR-PCU PWB
GY
D-GND 3 S4B-PH-K-S
LG248NL1 2-179228-3
POFM
POFM
POFM
POFM

P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-4DP-SP1 DF11-8DP-SP2
(Paper exit UN harness CD) (Upper main harness CD) CN4
PK PK PK PK
POM_A 1 6 POM_A 6 1 POM_A
BR BR BR BR
Paper exit POM_/A 4 8 POM_/A 8 2 POM_/A
PL PL PL PL
motor POM_/B 6 10 POM_/B 10 3 POM_/B
LB LB LB LB
POM_B 3 12 POM_B 12 4 POM_B DRIVER PWB
RD RD RD RD
INT24V1 2 14 INT24V1 14 5 INT24V1
RD RD RD RD
INT24V1 5 16 INT24V1 16 6 INT24V1
S6B-PH-SM3 B12B-PASK-1
PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H (Right door harness CD) (Upper main harness CD) CN15
RD RD RD RD
ADU gate 1 24V3 2 9 24V3 9 21 24V3
PL PL PL PL
2 /ADUGS 1 25 /ADUGS 25 23 /ADUGS
solenoid (Right paper exit UN harness CD) CN2 CN1
GY
40 F-GND 40
GY GY
Right full detection (Right door harness CD)
PL PK BL BL BL BL
TFD-R 1 6 TFD-R 1 1 TFD-R 5VN 1 1 5VN 1 25 5VN
GY GY GY GY GY GY
D-GND 2 5 D-GND 2 2 D-GND D-GND 2 17 D-GND 17 27 D-GND
BL BL PK PK PK PK
5VN(LED) 3 4 5VN(LED) 3 3 5VN(LED) SIN3 3 2 SIN3 2 29 SIN3
PK PK PL PL PL PL
Right paper exit detection GP1S73 179228-3 3 POD3 4 4 POD3 SELIN1 4 18 SELIN1 18 31 SELIN1
GY GY PL PL PL PL
POD3 1 2 D-GND 5 5 D-GND SELIN2 5 3 SELIN2 3 33 SELIN2
BL BL LB LB LB LB
D-GND 2 1 5VNPD(LED) 6 6 5VNPD(LED) SELIN3 6 19 SELIN3 19 35 SELIN3
LB LB LB LB
5VNPD(LED) 3 PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H APPD1 7 4 APPD1 4 37 APPD1
BR BR BR BR
GP1S73 179228-3 ADU open/close detection (Right door harness CD) APPD2 8 20 APPD2 20 39 APPD2
PL PL
DSW_ADU 1 7 DSW_ADU ADUD3 9
GY GY PK PK PK PK
D-GND 2 8 D-GND POD3 10 21 POD3 21 22 POD3
BL BL PK PK PK PK
5VN(LED) 3 9 5VN(LED) MPFD 11 6 MPFD 6 24 MPFD
BL BL BL BL
GP1S73 179228-3 5VNPD 16 32 5VNPD 32 26 5VNPD
G. Right door section 1/2 (7/31)
PL PL PL PL
HWPD 13 7 HWPD 7 28 HWPD
LB LB LB LB
TH_M 14 23 TH_M 23 30 TH_M
LB LB LB LB
HUD_M 15 8 HUD_M 8 32 HUD_M
S16B-PHDSS-B 27 P-GND 27
(ADU transport 1 relay harness: common) GY RD RD
ADU transport detection 1 (Right door harness CD) 15 24V3 15 34 24V3
LB LB GY PL PL
APPD1 1 3 APPD1 1 10 APPD1 31 /MPGS 31 36 /MPGS
GY GY GY PK PK
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 2 11 D-GND 30 /MPFS 30 38 /MPFS
BL BL GY RD RD
5VNPD(LED) 3 1 5VNPD(LED) 3 12 5VNPD(LED) 14 24V3 14 40 24V3
GP1S73 179228-3 PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H S16B-PHDSS-B P QR/P4 40PIN S B40B-PNDZS-1
ADU transport detection 2 (ADU transport 2 relay harness CD) (Right door harness CD) CN3(1/2)
GY GY
PCU PWB
APPD2 1 8 APPD2 1 4 APPD2 RIGHT DOOR I/F PWB
GY GY
GY GY
GP1S73 179228-3 PHNR-08-H + BU08P-TR-P-H
(Right door harness CD)
(Manual feed tray harness : common) (Manual feed tray harness : common) 1 HPLD2 14 LB 13 HPLD2
PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H 2 5VLED8 13 BL 15 5VLED8
Length detection 1
BR BR BR BR
MPLD1 1 4 MPLD1 6 3 MPLD1 12 16 MPLD1
GY GY
D-GND 2 5 D-GND 5
BL BL BL BL
5VNPD(LED) 3 6 5VNPD(LED) 4 4 5VNPD(LED) 11 18 5VNPD(LED)
Manual paper
GP1S73 179228-3
BL BL BL BL feed take-up
7 5VN 3 5 5VN 10 19 5VN R SM2P P
PK PK PK PK RD solenoid
Width detection 8 MPWS 2 6 MPWS 9 20 MPWS (Multi upper UN harness: common) 1 24V3 1
GY GY PL
5VN 3 9 D-GND 1 PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-H 2 /MPFS 2
GY RD
MPWS 2 8 24V3 1
GY PL
D-GND 1 CN3(2/2) 7 /MPFS 2 Manual paper feed paper empty detection
GY GY PL PL
PHNR-3 MPED 7 6 MPED 3 1 MPED
GY
Extension 2 D-GND

PL PL PL GY GY GY BL
MTOP2 1 7 MTOP2 8 22 MTOP2 D-GND 8 5 D-GND 4 3 5VN(LED)
GY GY GY BL
D-GND 2 5VN(LED) 9 4 5VN(LED) 5 GP1S73 179228-3
BL BL BL
5VNPD(LED) 3 8 5VNPD(LED) 7 24 5VNPD(LED) PHNR-5-H + BU05P-TR-P-H
GY PL PL PL
Reduction GP1S73 179228-3 2 /MPGS 7 4 /MPGS 2
LB LB LB GY RD RD RD
MTOP1 1 9 MTOP1 6 25 MTOP1 3 24V3 6 5 24V3 1
GY BL BL
D-GND 2 1 5VN(LED) 5
BL BL BL GY GY
5VNPD(LED) 3 10 5VNPD(LED) 5 27 5VNPD(LED) 2 D-GND 4
GY GY PK PK PK
GP1S73 179228-3 Temperature/humidity MPFD 10 1 MPFD 8 3 MPFD 3
BL BL BL
5VN 1 11 5VN 4 28 5VN
1
3
5
2
4
6
BR BR BR
HUD_M 2 12 HUD_M 3 29 HUD_M Manual paper feed paper entry detection
GY GY GY PK
D-GND 3 13 D-GND 2 14 D-GND MPFD 1
PK PK PK GY
TH_M 4 14 TH_M 1 31 TH_M D-GND 2
BL
ZHR-4 PHNR-14-H + BU14P-TR-P-H S32B-PHDSS-B 5VN(LED) 3
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VN(LED)
5VN(LED)
5VN(LED)
GP1S73 179228-3
1
3
5
4
2
7
6
8
DF11-6DP-SP2
P SM2P R
Manual paper 1 24V3 1
RD
feed gate PL
2 /MPGS 2
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
solenoid (Multi lower UN harness: common)
DF11-8DP-SP1
2TC separation motor (2TC separation harness CD)
P-GND 1
/TURM_A 2
(ADU transport 2 relay harness CD)
B2P-PH-K-S (Right door harness CD) (Upper main harness CD) CN18
GY GY GY
H. Right door section 2/2 (8/31)
PL GY GY
2TC separation detection 1 4 /TURM_A 2 4 /TURM_A 5 26 /TURM_A 26 6 /TURM_A PCU
BR GY GY
THPS 1 3 THPS 3 3 THPS 6 27 THPS 27 8 THPS PWB
GY GY GY
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 4 2 D-GND 7 28 D-GND 28 10 D-GND
BL GY GY
5VNPD(LED) 3 1 5VNPD(LED) 5 1 5VNPD(LED) 8 29 5VNPD(LED) 29 12 5VNPD(LED)
GP1S73 179228-3 PHNR-05-H + BU05P-TR-P-H PHNR-08-H + BU08P-TR-P-H 13 THPS2 13 14 THPS2
16 D-GND
39 5VN(LED) 39 18 5VNPD(LED)
B30B-PNDZS-1
ADUL motor (Right door harness CD) (Upper main harness CD) CN7
PL PL PK PK
ADML_A 4 5 ADML_A 5 12 ADML_A
BR BR LB LB
ADML_A/ 1 12 ADML_A/ 12 11 ADML_A/
PK PK PL PL
ADML_B/ 3 22 ADML_B/ 22 10 ADML_B/
LB LB BR BR
ADML_B 6 11 ADML_B 11 9 ADML_B
RD RD RD RD
INT24V1 2 10 INT24V1 10 8 INT24V1
RD RD RD RD
INT24V1 5 16 INT24V1 16 7 INT24V1
S6B-PH-SM3
DRIVER
PWB

ADUH motor (Right door harness CD)
PL PL PK PK
ADMH_A 4 33 ADMH_A 33 6 ADMH_A
BR BR LB LB
ADMH_A/ 1 36 ADMH_A/ 36 5 ADMH_A/
PK PK PL PL
ADMH_B/ 3 38 ADMH_B/ 38 4 ADMH_B/
LB LB BR BR
ADMH_B 6 35 ADMH_B 35 3 ADMH_B
RD RD RD RD
INT24V1 2 34 INT24V1 34 2 INT24V1
RD RD RD RD
INT24V1 5 37 INT24V1 37 1 INT24V1
S6B-PH-SM3 P QR/P4 40PIN S B12B-PASK-1
SPS-01T-187 (TC relay harness BK CD) SPS-01T-187 FPS-187(BK) (1st TC harness CD) FPS-187(BK)
RD RD
TC-K TC-K 1TC-K 1TC-K NEW 1st TC PWB
SPS-01T-187 (TC relay harness C CD) SPS-01T-187 CN1 (Upper main harness CD) CN10
RD RD RD
TC-C TC-C PS-187(BL) (1st TC harness CD) FPS-187(BL) INT24V2 1 2 INT24V2
RD GY GY
SPS-01T-187 (TC relay harness C CD) SPS-01T-187 1TC-C 1TC-C P-GND 2 4 P-GND
RD PK PK
TC-M TC-M /HV_DATA# 3 6 /1TC_DATA#
BR BR
SPS-01T-187 (TC relay harness Y CD) SPS-01T-187 PS-187(RD) (1st TC harness CD) FPS-187(RD) /HV_CLK# 4 8 /1TC_CLK#
RD RD LB LB
TC-Y TC-Y 1TC-M 1TC-M /HV_LD1# 5 10 /1TC_LD1#
PL PL
Transfer belt un HV_REM# 6 12 HV_REM#
PS-187(YL) (1st TC harness CD) FPS-187(YL) B06B-PASK B40B-PNDZS-1
RD
1TC-Y 1TC-Y
Drive UN_CL
I. High voltage section (9/31)
(PTC-K harness CD) SRA-21T-3 (MC-K harness CD) PS-250(WH)

RD
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-4 PS250(BK) MC-K MC-K
RD PTC SRA-21T-3 (MC-K harness CD) VHR-2
RD
GB-K GB-K
PTC_UN WH CASE (MC-K harness CD) VHR-3 DR-PCU PWB
WH
PS250(WH) SRA-21T-3 BS-K
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-4 BS-K
Drive UN_BK GB-C (Spring) GB-C
CN1 (Lower main harness CD) CN6
RD
BS-C (Spring) BS-C 24V3 3 10 24V3
GY GY
P-GND 2 2 P-GND
RD RD
GB-M (Spring) GB-M NEW MC PWB INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
GY GY
P-GND 4 3 P-GND
(MC relay harness: PK PK
BS-M (Spring) BS-M /HV_DATA# 5 5 /HV_DATA
common) LB LB
PS-187 MC-C /HV_CLK# 6 7 /HV_CLK
PL PL
GB-Y (Spring) GB-Y /HV_LD1# 7 6 /HV_LD1
RD BR BR
PS-187 MC-M HV_REM# 8 8 HV_REM#
(MC relay harness: BS-Y (Spring) BS-Y B08B-PASK B40B-PNDZS-1
common)
PS-187 MC-M
RD
PS-187 MC-Y
(MC relay harness: common) PS-187(WH)
RD
PS-187 MC-Y MC-CMY
(2nd TC harness CD) PS187(WH) CN1 (Lower main harness CD) CN5

RD RD RD
PS187(BL) 2-TC 2-TC INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
GY GY
P-GND 2 3 P-GND
RD LB LB
PS187(RD) CLR 1 CLR /TC_DATA# 3 5 /TC_DATA#
PK PK
VHR-2 /TC_CLK# 4 7 /TC_CLK#
BR BR
/TC_LD# 5 6 /TC_LD#
PL PL
2nd TC PWB /HV_REM# 6 8 /HV_REM#
B06B-PASK B34B-PNDZS-1
(2nd TC harness CD) PS187(WH) CN1 CN19

RD
PTC INT24V2 1 8 INT24V2
P-GND 2 10 P-GND
WH
1 CASE /PTC_DATA# 3 7 /PTC_DATA#
VHR-2 /PTC_CLK# 4 9 /PTC_CLK#
/PTC_LD# 5 11 /PTC_LD#
PTC PWB HV_REM 6 13 HV_REM
PTC_ERR 7 15 PTC_ERR
R SM2P-N P (TM-CRUM harness CD) P DF1B-34DE S (Upper main harness CD) CN10
BR BR BR BR
1 TM_K1a 1 1 TM_K1a 1 19 TM_K1a
Toner motor K1 2 TM_K1b 2 PL PL 3 TM_K1b 3 PL PL 21 TM_K1b
R SM2P-N P
LB LB LB LB
1 TM_K2a 1 5 TM_K2a 5 23 TM_K2a
Toner motor K2 2 TM_K2b 2 PK PK 7 TM_K2b 7 PK PK 25 TM_K2b
R SM2P-N P
BR BR BR BR
1 TM_Ca 1 9 TM_Ca 9 27 TM_Ca
Toner motor C 2 TM_Cb 2 PL PL 11 TM_Cb 11 PL PL 28 TM_Cb
R SM2P-N P
LB LB LB LB
1 TM_Ma 1 13 TM_Ma 13 20 TM_Ma
Toner motor M 2 TM_Mb 2 PK PK 15 TM_Mb 15 PK PK 22 TM_Mb
R SM2P-N P
BR BR BR BR
1 TM_Ya 1 17 TM_Ya 17 24 TM_Ya
J. Toner bottle section (10/31)
Toner motor Y PL PL PL PL
2 TM_Yb 2 19 TM_Yb 19 26 TM_Yb
(CRUM relay harness CD)

CRUM_K R SM4P-N P (TM-CRUM harness CD) (Upper main harness CD)
GY GY GY GY GY
D-GND 1 1 D-GND 1 2 D-GND 2 35 D-GND
BL BL BL BL BL
5V3_CRUM 2 2 5V3_CRUM 2 4 5V3_CRUM 4 29 5V3_CRUM
PK PK PK PK PK
CRM_K_CK# 3 3 CRM_K_CK# 3 6 CRM_K_CK# 6 33 CRM_K_CK#
BR LB LB LB LB
CRM_K_DT# 4 4 CRM_K_DT# 4 8 CRM_K_DT# 8 31 CRM_K_DT#
TSR-04V-K
(CRUMelay harness CD)
CRUM_K2 R SM4P-N P
GY GY
D-GND 1 1 D-GND 1
BL BL
5V3_CRUM 2 2 5V3_CRUM 2
PK PK PK PK PK
CRM_K2_CK# 3 3 CRM_K2_CK# 3 10 CRM_K2_CK# 10 40 CRM_K2_CK#
BR LB LB LB LB
CRM_K2_DT# 4 4 CRM_K2_DT# 4 12 CRM_K2_DT# 12 39 CRM_K2_DT#
TSR-04V-K
CRUM_C R SM4P-N P
GY GY
D-GND 1 1 D-GND 1
BL BL
PK PL PL PL PL
CRM_C_CK# 3 3 CRM_C_CK# 3 14 CRM_C_CK# 14 32 CRM_C_CK#
BR BR BR BR BR
CRM_C_DT# 4 4 CRM_C_DT# 4 16 CRM_C_DT# 16 30 CRM_C_DT#
TSR-04V-K
(CRUMelay harness CD) PCU PWB
CRUM_M R SM4P-N P
GY GY
D-GND 1 1 D-GND 1
BL BL

PK PK PK PK PK
CRM_M_CK# 3 3 CRM_M_CK# 3 18 CRM_M_CK# 18 38 CRM_M_CK#
BR LB LB LB LB
CRM_M_DT# 4 4 CRM_M_DT# 4 20 CRM_M_DT# 20 37 CRM_M_DT#
TSR-04V-K
CRUM_Y R SM4P-N P
GY GY
D-GND 1 1 D-GND 1
BL BL
PK PL PL PL PL
CRM_Y_CK# 3 3 CRM_Y_CK# 3 21 CRM_Y_CK# 21 36 CRM_Y_CK#
BR BR BR BR BR
CRM_Y_DT# 4 4 CRM_Y_DT# 4 22 CRM_Y_DT# 22 34 CRM_Y_DT#
TSR-04V-K
p,10
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
5V3CR
5V3CR
5V3CR
5V3CR
5V3CR
5V3CR
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-4DP-SP1(c) DF11-8DP-SP1(b) DF11-6DP-SP1(a)

R SM3P-B P (TM-CRUM harness CD) P DF1B-34DE S (Upper main harness CD) CN8
BR BR BR BR
1 HTM_K1a 1 23 HTM_K1a 23 1 HTM_K1a
Hopper motor K1 PL PL PL PL
K. Hopper section (11/31)
3 HTM_K1b 3 25 HTM_K1b 25 3 HTM_K1b

R SM3P-B P
BR BR BR BR
1 HTM_Ca 1 27 HTM_Ca 27 5 HTM_Ca
Hopper motor C PL PL PL PL
3 HTM_Cb 3 29 HTM_Cb 29 7 HTM_Cb DRIVER PWB
R SM3P-B P
LB LB LB LB
1 HTM_Ma 1 31 HTM_Ma 31 9 HTM_Ma
Hopper motor M PK PK PK PK
3 HTM_Mb 3 33 HTM_Mb 33 11 HTM_Mb
R SM3P-B P
BR BR BR BR
1 HTM_Ya 1 24 HTM_Ya 24 2 HTM_Ya
Hopper motor Y PL PL PL PL
3 HTM_Yb 3 26 HTM_Yb 26 4 HTM_Yb
B12B-PNDZS-1
Hopper remaining quantity sensor C (HTCS relay harness CD) R SM-3Pin_N P (TM-CRUM harness CD) (Upper main harness CD) CN10
BL BL BL BL BL
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1 28 5VNPD 28 15 5VNPD
PL BR BR BR BR
HTCS_C 2 2 HTCS_C 2 30 HTCS_C 30 17 HTCS_C
GY GY
D-GND 3 3 D-GND 3
DF3-3S-2C
PCU PWB
Hopper remaining quantity sensor M (HTCS relay harness CD) R SM-3Pin_N P
BL BL
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1
PL PL PL PL PL
HTCS_M 2 2 HTCS_M 2 32 HTCS_M 32 16 HTCS_M
GY GY
D-GND 3 3 D-GND 3
DF3-3S-2C
Hopper remaining quantity sensor Y (HTCS relay harness CD) R SM-3Pin_N P

BL BL
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1
PL LB LB LB LB
HTCS_Y 2 2 HTCS_Y 2 34 HTCS_Y 34 18 HTCS_Y
GY GY
D-GND 3 3 D-GND 3 B40B-PNDZS-1
DF3-3S-2C p,9
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
DF11-4DP-SP1(c) DF11-4DP-SP1(d)
Belt M (Drive UN-BK harness CD) S DF1B-34DE P (Upper main harness CD) CN4
RD RD RD RD
INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1 1 12 INT24V1
RD RD RD RD
INT24V1 5 3 INT24V1 3 11 INT24V1
BR BR BR BR
BTM_B 4 5 BTM_B 5 10 BTM_B
PL PL PL PL
BTM_B/ 6 7 BTM_B/ 7 9 BTM_B/
LB LB LB LB
BTM_A/ 3 9 BTM_A/ 9 8 BTM_A/
PK PK PK PK
BTM_A 1 11 BTM_A 11 7 BTM_A DRIVER
B6B-XH B12B-PASK-1 PWB
DM_K CN5
RD RD RD RD
INT24V1 2 13 INT24V1 13 1 INT24V1
RD RD RD RD
INT24V1 5 15 INT24V1 15 2 INT24V1
BR BR BR BR
DM_K_B 3 17 DM_K_B 17 3 DM_K_B
PL PL PL PL
DM_K_B/ 1 19 DM_K_B/ 19 4 DM_K_B/
LB LB LB LB
DM_K_A/ 6 21 DM_K_A/ 21 5 DM_K_A/
PK PK PK PK
DM_K_A 4 23 DM_K_A 23 6 DM_K_A
B6B-PH-K-S B13B-PASK-1
NEW developing BK CN13

RD RD RD RD
24V4 1 25 24V4 25 1 24V4
L. Process drive K unit section (12/31)
GY GY GY GY
P-GND 2 27 P-GND 27 3 P-GND
VH-2P
GY GY GY GY
BL BL BL BL
5VN 2 2 5VN 2 7 5VN
BR BR BR BR
/DVKM_D 3 4 /DVKM_D 4 9 /DVKM_D
PL PL PL PL
/DVKM_CK 4 6 /DVKM_CK 6 11 /DVKM_CK
LB LB LB LB
DVKM_LD 5 8 DVKM_LD 8 13 DVKM_LD
PK PK PK PK
DVKM_GAIN 6 10 DVKM_GAIN 10 15 DVKM_GAIN
BR BR BR BR
DVKM_CW/CCW 7 30 DVKM_CW/CCW 30 17 DVKM_CW/CCW
B07B-PASK
Phase detection BK
GY GY GY GY
PK PK PK PK
DHPD_K 2 14 DHPD_K 14 21 DHPD_K
BL BL BL BL
GP1A71 PHR-3
PHNR-02-H + BU02P-TR-P-H PCU PWB
Belt separation RD RD RD RD
1 24V3 2 18 24V3 18 25 24V3
BR BR BR BR
clutch (normal) 2 /BLTCL 1 20 /BLTCL 20 27 /BLTCL

PHNR-02-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
Belt separation RD RD RD RD
1 24V3 2 22 24V3 22 29 24V3
PL PL PL PL
clutch (reverse) 2 /BLTCL_R 1 24 /BLTCL_R 24 31 /BLTCL_R
P SM-2pin R
Charger 1 CCM_a 1
LB LB
26 CCM_a 26
LB LB
33 CCM_a
cleaner PK PK PK PK
2 CCM_b 2 28 CCM_b 28 35 CCM_b
motor B40B-PNDZS-1
P SM-2pin R CN18
LB
PTC cleaner 1 PTCM_a 1 34 PTCM_a 34 25 PTCM_A
PK
2 PTCM_b 2 31 PTCM_b 31 27 PTCM_B
motor
B30B-PNDZS-1
Drive un BK
CN13
37 D-GND
40 BLT_HP
39 5VNPD
B40B-PNDZS-1
R SM6 P (Drive UN-CL harness CD) S DF1B-34DE P (Upper main harness CD) CN5
WH 6 INT24V1 6 RD RD 1 INT24V1 1 RD RD 7 INT24V1
BK 5 INT24V1 5 RD RD 3 INT24V1 3 RD RD 8 INT24V1
BL 3 DM_C_B 3 BR BR 5 DM_C_B 5 BR BR 9 DM_C_B
DM_C OR 4 DM_C_B/ 4 PL PL 7 DM_C_B/ 7 PL PL 10 DM_C_B/
YL 1 DM_C_A/ 1 LB LB 9 DM_C_A/ 9 LB LB 11 DM_C_A/
RD 2 DM_C_A 2 PK PK 11 DM_C_A 11 PK PK 12 DM_C_A
B13B-PASK-1
R SM6 P CN6
WH RD RD RD RD
6 INT24V1 6 13 INT24V1 13 1 INT24V1
BK RD RD RD RD
5 INT24V1 5 15 INT24V1 15 2 INT24V1
BL BR BR BR BR
3 DM_M_B 3 17 DM_M_B 17 3 DM_M_B
DM_M OR PL PL PL PL
4 DM_M_B/ 4 19 DM_M_B/ 19 4 DM_M_B/
YL LB LB LB LB
1 DM_M_A/ 1 21 DM_M_A/ 21 5 DM_M_A/
RD PK PK PK PK
2 DM_M_A 2 23 DM_M_A 23 6 DM_M_A
R SM6 P
WH RD RD RD RD
6 INT24V1 6 25 INT24V1 25 7 INT24V1 DRIVER PWB
BK RD RD RD RD
5 INT24V1 5 27 INT24V1 27 8 INT24V1
BL BR BR BR BR
3 DM_Y_B 3 29 DM_Y_B 29 9 DM_Y_B
DM_Y OR PL PL PL PL
4 DM_Y_B/ 4 31 DM_Y_B/ 31 10 DM_Y_B/
YL LB LB LB LB
1 DM_Y_A/ 1 33 DM_Y_A/ 33 11 DM_Y_A/
RD PK PK PK PK
2 DM_Y_A 2 2 DM_Y_A 2 12 DM_Y_A
B14B-PASK-1
M. Process drive CL unit section (13/31)
DV motor CL (Upper main harness CD) CN9

RD RD RD RD
INT24V2 1 4 INT24V2 4 2 INT24V2
GY GY GY GY
BR BR BR BR
/DVCM_CK 4 8 /DVCM_CK 8 6 /DVCM_CK
PL PL PL PL
/DVCM_D 5 10 /DVCM_D 10 8 /DVCM_D
LB LB LB LB
DVCM_LD 6 12 DVCM_LD 12 10 DVCM_LD
N.C 3
N.C 7
Phase detection CL1(C) B7P-PH-K-S
GY GY GY GY
PK PK PK PK
DHPD_C 2 26 DHPD_C 26 12 DHPD_C
BL BL BL BL
PHR-3
Phase detection CL2(M)
GY
D-GND 1
BR BR BR BR
DHPD_M 2 30 DHPD_M 30 14 DHPD_M
BL BL
5VNPD(LED) 3 14 5VNPD(LED) 14
PHR-3
Phase detection CL3(Y)
D-GND 1 GY PCU PWB

PL PL PL PL
DHPD_Y 2 32 DHPD_Y 32 16 DHPD_Y
5VNPD(LED) 3 BL 16 5VNPD(LED) 16 BL
PHR-3
Transfer separation sensor CL (TC belt separation harness CL CD)

BR BR BR BR BR
TBLTC 1 1 TBLTC 3 34 TBLTC 34 18 TBLTC
GY GY
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 2 B30B-PNDZS-1
BL BL BL
5VNPD(LED) 3 3 5VNPD(LED) 1 18 5VNPD(LED) 18
GP1S73P 179228-3 PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H CN18
BL 7 5VNPD(LED)
5
4
3
2
1
BL 9 5VNPD(LED)
BL
11 5VNPD(LED)
B30B-PNDZS-1
CL drive front sirocco fan
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
P SM4P R (Upper main harness CD) CN15

1 DMCFM 1 RD
DF11-6DP-SP1(a) 15 CFM_PTC
2 /DMCFFM_CNT 2 BR
17 CFM_PTC_CNT
DMCFM 3 P-GND 3 GY
19 P-GND
LB
4 DMCFM_LD 4 20 CFM_PTC_LD
Drive un CL B30B-PNDZS-1
LCC transport motor
(Drive UN-tandem harness CD)
S DF1B-28DE P (Lower main harness CD) CN1
BR BR BR BR
LCCM_A 1 17 LCCM_A 17 1 LCCM_A
PL PL PL PL
LCCM_A/ 3 19 LCCM_A/ 19 2 LCCM_A/
LB LB LB LB
LCCM_B/ 6 21 LCCM_B/ 21 3 LCCM_B/
PK PK PK PK
LCCM_B 4 23 LCCM_B 23 4 LCCM_B
RD RD RD RD
INT24V1 2 25 INT24V1 25 5 INT24V1
RD RD RD RD
INT24V1 5 27 INT24V1 27 6 INT24V1
N. PS drive unit section (14/31)
B6B-XH B6B-PASK-1
DRIVER PWB
PS front motor (Drive UN-PS harness CD) P DF1B-18DE S (Upper main harness CD) CN9
BR BR BR BR
PFM_A 4 1 PFM_A 1 6 PFM_A
PL PL PL PL
PFM_A/ 1 3 PFM_A/ 3 5 PFM_A/
LB LB LB LB
PFM_B/ 3 5 PFM_B/ 5 4 PFM_B/
PK PK PK PK
PFM_B 6 7 PFM_B 7 3 PFM_B
RD RD RD RD
INT24V1 2 9 INT24V1 9 2 INT24V1
RD RD RD RD
INT24V1 5 11 INT24V1 11 1 INT24V1
B6P-PH-K-S B7B-PASK-1
1 24V3 2 RD
PS clutch BR
2 /RRC 1
(Upper main harness CD) CN14
RD RD RD
13 24V3 13 8 24V3
BR BR BR
PS motor 15 /RRC 15 10 /RRC
RD RD RD RD
INT24V2 1 17 INT24V2 17 2 INT24V2
GY GY GY GY
PL PL PL PL
/RRM_CK 4 4 /RRM_CK 4 12 /RRM_CK
LB LB LB LB
/RRM_D 5 6 /RRM_D 6 14 /RRM_D
PK PK PK PK
RRM_LD 6 8 RRM_LD 8 16 RRM_LD
N.C 3
B6P-PH-K-S

(Upper main harness CD) PCU PWB
RD RD RD RD
1 24V3 2 10 24V3 10 18 24V3
Manual paper feed clutch BR BR BR BR
2 /MPUC 1 12 /MPUC 12 20 /MPUC
RD RD RD RD
1 24V3 2 14 24V3 14 22 24V3
LCC paper feed clutch PL PL PL PL
2 /LPFC 1 16 /LPFC 16 24 /LPFC
B30B-PNDZS-1
PS drive un
Process K un Drive UN-BK
3 3 (Upper main harness CD)

(DL harness CD)
DL-PWB 4 4 (DVK relay harness CD) S DF1B-22DE P CN9
RD RD RD RD
24V 1 2 24V_DL 2 1 24V_DL 1 7 24V_DL
PK PK BR BR
DL_K# 3 1 DL_K# 1 3 DL_K# 3 9 DL_K#
S3B-PH-K-S
Charger cleaner HP detection 8 8

GY GY GY GY
CCHP 2 PL 6 CCHP 6 PL 7 CCHP 7 PL PL 13 CCHP
RD RD BL BL
GP1A71 PHR-3 P QR/P8-8P S
DV-K un
Toner concentration sensor (DVK harness CD-N)
O. DV and DL K, C section (15/31)
RD RD RD RD RD
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 11 24V3 11 17 24V3
PL PL PL PL PL
TCS_K 3 6 TCS_K 6 13 TCS_K 13 19 TCS_K
GY GY GY GY GY
LB LB LB LB LB
TSG_K 1 8 TSG_K 8 17 TSG_K 17 23 TSG_K
51021-0400
R SM-5pin P (DVK harness CD-N)

Intermediate hopper BL BL 1 5VNPD 1 BL 10 5VNPD 10 BL BL 25 5VNPD
1 5VNPD 1 PCU PWB
PL PL 2 HTCS_K 2 PL 12 HTCS_K 12 LB LB 27 HTCS_K
toner concentration 2 HTCS_K 2
GY GY GY GY GY
3 D-GND 3 3 D-GND 3 14 D-GND 14 29 D-GND
sensor 4 HTCS_CH 4 PK PK 11 DVK_CH 11 LB 18 DVK_CH 18 PL PL 30 DVK_CH
5 HTCS_CH 5 PK
(DVK motor harness CD)

R SM-4pin P CN2 CN1
LB PK PK GY GY GY
Intermediate 1 PHTM_1a 1 2 PHTM1_A DVK_CH 1 4 D-GND 4 16 D-GND 16 1 D-GND
PK LB LB LB PK
2 PHTM_1b 2 3 PHTM1_B PHTM_Ka 2 9 PHTM_Ka 9 20 PHTM_Ka 20
hopper motor 3 DVK_CH 3 BR 1 DVK_CH PHTM_Kb 3
PK PK 10 PHTM_Kb 10
PK
22 PHTM_Kb 22 BR
GY PK PK PK PK PK
Intermediate hopper 4 DVK_CH_R 4 9 DVK_CH_R FPCL1 4 14 FPCL1 14 21 FPCL1 21 22 FPCL1
BR BR BR BR BR
FPCL2 5 13 FPCL2 13 2 FPCL2 2 24 FPCL2
BL BL BL BL BL
(DVK motor harness CD) 5VNPD 6 12 5VN 12 4 5VN 4 26 5VN
RD
R SM-3pin P 24V3 7
LB GY GY GY GY GY
1 PHTM_2a 1 4 PHTM2_A D-GND 8 15 D-GND 15 19 D-GND 19 20 D-GND
Stirring motor 2 NC 2 VFM_R 9 P QR/P8-20P S B30B-PNDZS-1
3 PHTM_2b 3 PK 5 PHTM2_B DVK_FM_LD 10
GY

D-GND 11
PK
DVK_CH_R 12
SM12B-GHS-TB
7 DVK_FM
8 DVK_FM_LD DVK Drive PWB
6 D-GND
SM9B-GHS-TB CCM rotation detection CN18
D-GND 1 GY 5 D-GND
PL PL
CCMD 2 6 CCMD 6 3 CCP_ROT
BL BL
SRA-01T-3.2 GP1A71 PHR-3 B30B-PNDZS-1
F.G.
GY
DRIVER PWB
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
CN8
PK
SRA-01T-3.2 #110 #110 SRA-01T-3.2 6 PHTM_Ka
BR
8 PHTM_Kb
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
(DVK_BS harness CD) (DVK_BS harness CD) B12B-PNDZS-1
DF11-4DP-SP1 DF11-4DP-SP1 DF11-4DP-SP1

(DV relay harness: common)
(Lower main harness CD)
DL-C PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H (Process duct harness CD) S DF1B-26DE P CN7
GY GY GY GY GY
PK PL PL LB LB
DL_C# 3 10 DL_C# 1 3 DL_C# 3 3 DL_C#
53254-0310
Toner concentration sensor (DV harness CD)
RD RD RD RD RD RD
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 5 24V3 5 5 24V3
PL PL LB LB PL PL
TCS_C 3 6 TCS_C 6 7 TCS_C 4 7 TCS_C 7 7 TCS_C
GY GY GY
D-GND 4 7 D-GND 7 5 D-GND 6
BR BR PK PK LB LB
TSG_C 1 8 TSG_C 8 6 TSG_C 5 9 TSG_C 9 9 TSG_C
51021-0400
GY GY GY GY GY
1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 11 D-GND 11 11 D-GND
LB BR BR PK PK
2 DVTYP_C 2 3 DVTYP_C 8 13 DVTYP_C 13 13 DVTYP_C
3 3 PK 2 9
BL BL BL BL BL
4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 15 5VN 15 15 5VN
P QR/P8-8P S
WH
BS-C (Spring) To P4
DV-C un SRA-01T-3.2 (BIAS harness A/B: common) SPS-01T-110 (DV relay harness: common)
P. DV and DL M, Y section (16/31)

DL-M PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
GY GY GY GY GY
PK LB LB PK PK
DL_M# 3 10 DL_M# 1 19 DL_M# 19 19 DL_M#
53254-0310
RD RD RD
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 21 24V3 21 21 24V3
PL PL PK PK PL PL
TCS_M 3 6 TCS_M 6 7 TCS_M 4 23 TCS_M 23 23 TCS_M
GY GY GY
BR BR BR BR LB LB
TSG_M 1 8 TSG_M 8 6 TSG_M 5 25 TSG_M 25 25 TSG_M PCU PWB
51021-0400
GY GY
1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7
LB PL PL PK PK
2 DVTYP_M 2 3 DVTYP_M 8 2 DVTYP_M 2 2 DVTYP_M
PK
3 3 2 9
BL BL BL BL BL
4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 4 5VN 4 4 5VN
P QR/P8-8P S
WH
BS-C (Spring) To P4
DV-M un SRA-01T-3.2 (BIAS harness A/B: common) SPS-01T-110 (DV relay harness: common)
DL-Y PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
GY GY GY GY GY
2
PK PK PK BR BR
DL_Y# 3 10 DL_Y# 1 8 DL_Y# 8 8 DL_Y#
53254-0310
RD RD RD RD RD RD
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 10 24V3 10 10 24V3
PL PL BR BR PL PL

TCS_Y 3 6 TCS_Y 6 7 TCS_Y 4 12 TCS_Y 12 12 TCS_Y
GY GY GY
BR BR PL PL LB LB
TSG_Y 1 8 TSG_Y 8 6 TSG_Y 5 14 TSG_Y 14 14 TSG_Y
51021-0400
GY GY
1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7
LB LB LB PK PK
2 DVTYP_Y 2 3 DVTYP_Y 8 16 DVTYP_Y 16 16 DVTYP_Y
PK PK
3 3 2 9
BL BL BL BL BL
4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 18 5VN 18 18 5VN
P QR/P8-8P S
WH
BS-C (Spring) To P4
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
DV-Y un SRA-01T-3.2 (BIAS harness A/B: common) SPS-01T-110

GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
P SM4P R DF11-8DP-SP1
RD RD BR BR
1 OZFM1 1 20 OZFM1 20 20 OZFM1
BR BR PL PL
2 /OZFM_CNT 2 22 /OZFM_CNT 22 22 /OZFM_CNT
OZONE FAN1 GY GY GY GY
LB LB LB LB
4 OZFM_LD1 4 26 OZFM_LD1 26 26 OZFM_LD1
B30B-PNDZS-1
PHNR-8-H
PS front sensor (PPD1) (PS UN harness CD) BU08P-TR-P-H (Upper main harness CD)
GY GY GY GY
PL PL PK PK
PPD1 3 5 PPD1 4 23 PPD1
BL BL BL BL
QSW-Z0538 PHR-3
PS UN PS sensor (PPD2)
BL BL BL BL
BR BR LB LB
PPD2 2 2 PPD2 7 25 PPD2
GY GY GY GY
GP2A200L 179228-3
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
BR LB LB
1 /RRC2 2 7 /RRC2 2 29 /RRC2
PS clutch 2 RD RD RD
2 24V 1 8 24V3 1 30 24V3
B30B-PNDZS-1
PS UN
DR-PCU PWB
(Process control sensor UN harness CD) (Lower main harness CD)
Resist sensor F R SM18P P (HL relay harness CD) P DF1B-32P S P DF1B-18DE S CN8
BL BL BL BL BL BL BL BL
5VNPD 4 1 5VNPD 1 2 5VNPD 2 1 5VNPD 1 19 5VNPD
GY GY GY GY GY GY GY GY
LB LB BR LB BR BR LB LB
REG_F 2 3 REG_F 3 6 REG_F 6 5 REG_F 5 21 REG_F
PK PK PL PK PL PL PK PK
REG_F_LED# 1 4 REG_F_LED# 4 8 REG_F_LED# 8 7 REG_F_LED# 7 22 REG_F_LED#
PHR-4
Process control sensor

BL BL BL BL BL BL BL BL
GY GY GY GY GY GY GY GY
LB LB LB LB LB LB BR BR
PCS_K 3 7 PCS_K 7 14 PCS_K 14 13 PCS_K 13 25 PCS_K
PL PL PK PL PK PK PL PL
PCS_CL 2 8 PCS_CL 8 16 PCS_CL 16 15 PCS_CL 15 26 PCS_CL
PK PK BR PK BR BR LB LB
PCS_LED# 1 9 PCS_LED# 9 18 PCS_LED# 18 17 PCS_LED# 17 27 PCS_LED#
PHR-5
Q. Resist sensor and process control sensor section (17/31)
Resist sensor R
Process BL BL BL BL BL BL BL BL
control GY GY GY GY GY GY GY GY
sensor UN D-GND 3 11 D-GND 11 22 D-GND 22 2 D-GND 2 30 D-GND
BR BR PL BR PL PL PK PK
REG_R 2 12 REG_R 12 24 REG_R 24 4 REG_R 4 31 REG_R
PK PK LB PK LB LB BR BR
REG_R_LED# 1 13 REG_R_LED# 13 26 REG_R_LED# 26 6 REG_R_LED# 6 32 REG_R_LED#
PHR-4

BR PK BR PK PK PK PK
Process control 2 /PCSS 2 14 /PCSS 14 28 /PCSS 28 8 /PCSS 8 36 /PCSS
RD RD RD RD RD RD RD
1 24V3 1 15 24V3 15 30 24V3 30 10 24V3 10 35 24V3
shutter solenoid
R SM2P P B40B-PNDZS-1
(Upper main harness CD) CN18

PL PL PL PL
12V 16 25 12V 25 13 12V
BR BR BR BR
DMS 17 27 DMS 27 17 DMS
LB LB LB LB
DMS_LED 18 29 DMS_LED 29 15 DMS_LED
B30B-PNDZS-1
Process control sensor UN

LD BK PWB(2BEAM) (LSU-LD harness CD) CN1 B20B-PNDZS-1
BL BL
G +5V_LD 1 1 +5V_LD B CN6 B07B-PASK-1 (LSU-LD harness CD) LSU thermistor 1
GY GY PL PL
D-GND 2 2 D-GND H TH1 6 3 TH1 C
LB LB GY GY
Vref_K1 3 8 VREF_K D-GND 5 4 D-GND
/LDOFF 4 BR BR 7 nENB_K S4B-PH-K-S
SH SH
D-GND 5 3 D-GND
DATA+_K1 6 PK PK 4 DT_K+
WH WH
DATA-_K1 7 6 DT_K- CN6 B07B-PASK-1 (LSU-LD harness CD) BD PWB(K)
SH SH BL BL
D-GND 8 14 D-GND H 5V3 4 1 5V3 J
PK PK GY GY
DATA+_K2 9 16 DT_K2+ D-GND 3 2 D-GND
WH WH PL PL
DATA-_K2 10 18 DT_K2- n BD 2 3 n BD
PL PL GY GY
/SH_K1 11 5 nSH_K D-GND 1 4 D-GND
LDERR 14 PK PK 9 nLDERR_K B4P-PH-K-R
BR BR
/SH_K2 12 15 nSH_K2
LB LB
LDCHK 15 10 LDCHK_K
PK PK
Vref_K2 13 20 VREF_K2
SM15B-GHB-TB 11 TH2_1
12 D-GND
13 +5V
17 nSHB_K
19 nSHB_K2
R. LSU section (internal connection) (18/31)
LD C PWB (LSU-LD harness CD) CN4 B34B-PNDZS-1

GY GY
F D-GND 10 3 D-GND A
BL BL
INT5V 9 1 INT5V LSU PWB
BR BR
/SH_C 8 5 /SH_C
PK PK
/ENB_C 7 7 /ENB_C
WH WH
DT_C- 6 6 DT_C-
PK PK
DT_C+ 5 4 DT_C+
SH SH
D-GND 4 2 D-GND
PL PL
Vref_C 3 8 Vref_C
LB LB
LDCHK_C 2 10 LDCHK_C
BR BR
n LDERR_C 1 9 n LDERR_C
S10B-PH-K-S
LD M PWB (LSU-LD harness CD) CN4 B34B-PNDZS-1

GY GY
E D-GND 10 15 D-GND A
BL BL
INT5V 9 13 INT5V

BR BR
/SH_M 8 17 /SH_M CN8 B08B-PASK-1 (Polygon motor harness CD) LSU thermistor 2
PK PK PK PK
/ENB_M 7 19 /ENB_M A TH2_2 8 3 TH2 C
WH WH GY GY
DT_M- 6 18 DT_M- D-GND 7 4 D-GND
PK PK
DT_M+ 5 16 DT_M+ S4B-PH-K-S
SH SH
D-GND 4 14 D-GND
PL PL
Vref_M 3 20 Vref_M
LB LB
LDCHK_M 2 22 LDCHK_M CN8 B08B-PASK-1 (Polygon motor harness CD) Polygon motor
BR BR LB LB
n LDERR_M 1 21 n LDERR_M A nBREAK 6 1 BRAKE B
PL PL
S10B-PH-K-S nPOLY_CK 5 2 CLOCK
PK PK
nPOLY_LOCK 4 3 LOCK
BR BR
nPOLY_START 3 4 START/STOP
GY GY
LD Y PWB (LSU-LD harness CD) CN4 B34B-PNDZS-1 P-GND 2 5 GND
GY GY RD RD
D D-GND 10 27 D-GND A 24V 1 6 24V
BL BL
INT5V 9 25 INT5V B6B-PH-SM3-TB
BR BR
/SH_Y 8 29 /SH_Y
PK PK
/ENB_Y 7 31 /ENB_Y
WH WH
DT_Y- 6 30 DT_Y-
PK PK
DT_Y+ 5 28 DT_Y+ CN2 B03B-PASK-1
SH SH
D-GND 4 26 D-GND 24V1 1
PL PL
Vref_Y 3 32 Vref_Y n FANRDY 2 LSU FAN
LB LB
LDCHK_Y 2 34 LDCHK_Y P-GND 3
BR BR
n LDERR_Y 1 33 n LDERR_Y
S10B-PH-K-S
CN8
RD RD
LSU shutter 1 INT24V2 1 39 INT24V2
PL PL
2 /LSS_CL 2 40 /LSS_CL
solenoid CL P SM2P-N R

D-GND 1 GY GY 13 D-GND
3.3V 2 OR OR 14 3.3V
D-GND 3 GY GY 15 D-GND
5VN 4 BL BL 16 5VN
24V3 5 RD RD 17 24V3
P-GND 6 GY GY 18 P-GND
S6B-XA

BL BL
INT5V 1 1 INT5V
GY GY
D-GND 2 2 D-GND
BR BR
n SCK_LSU 4 4 n SCK_LSU
GY GY
D-GND 3 3 D-GND
PL PL
n TRANS_DATA 5 5 n TRANS_DATA
GY GY
D-GND 6 6 D-GND PCU PWB
LB LB
n RSV_DAT 8 8 n RSV_DAT
PK PK
LSUASIC_RST 7 7 LSUASIC_RST
BR BR
n TRANS_RST 9 9 n TRANS_RST
PL PL
JOBEND_INT 10 10 JOBEND_INT
PK PK
LSUTH1 11 11 LSUTH1
LB LB
LSUTH2 12 12 LSUTH2
S. LSU section (external connection) (19/31)
The shortest communication line connection B40B-PNDZS-1
(Lower main harness CD) CN6

BR BR
VSYNC_K_N 13 8 VSYNC_K_N
PL PL
VSYNC_K_P 14 7 VSYNC_K_P
PK PK
VSYNC_C_P 15 6 VSYNC_C_P
LB LB
VSYNC_C_N 16 5 VSYNC_C_N
BR BR
VSYNC_M_N 17 4 VSYNC_M_N
PL PL
VSYNC_M_P 18 3 VSYNC_M_P
PK PK
VSYNC_Y_P 19 2 VSYNC_Y_P
LB LB
LSU PWB VSYNC_Y_N 20 1 VSYNC_Y_N
S20B-PADSS-1

PK PK
CH0_N 1 32 CH0_N
WH WH

CH0_P 2 31 CH0_P
SH SH
D-GND 3 30 D-GND
SH SH
D-GND 4 29 D-GND
PK PK
CH1_N 5 28 CH1_N
WH WH
CH1_P 6 27 CH1_P
PK PK
CH2_N 7 26 CH2_N
WH WH
CH2_P 8 25 CH2_P MOTHER PWB
SH SH
D-GND 9 24 D-GND
SH SH
D-GND 10 23 D-GND
PK PK
CLCLK_N 11 22 CLCLK_N
WH WH
CLCLK_P 12 21 CLCLK_P
PK PK
CH3_N 13 20 CH3_N
WH WH
CH3_P 14 19 CH3_P
SH SH
D-GND 15 18 D-GND
GY GY
D-GND 16 17 D-GND
PK PK
ECLK_LSU_N 17 16 ECLK_LSU_N
WH WH
ECLK_LSU_P 18 15 ECLK_LSU_P
SH SH
D-GND 19 14 D-GND
SH SH
D-GND 20 13 D-GND
PK PK
HSYNC_LSU_P 21 12 HSYNC_LSU_P
WH WH
HSYNC_LSU_N 22 11 HSYNC_LSU_N
N.C 23 B32B-PNDZS-1
N.C 24
S24B-PADSS-1
NEW paper feed motor (Drive unit tandem harness CD)
S DF1B-28DE P (Lower main harness CD) CN4
24V4 RD 1 24V4 1 PK 1 24V4
1
GY 3 P-GND 3 GY 3 P-GND
P-GND 2
VH-2P
GY 5 5 GY 5 D-GND
D-GND 1 D-GND
BL 7 7 BL 7
5VN 2 5VN 5VN
BR 9 9 BR 9
/CPFM_D 3 /CPFM_D /CPFM_D
PL PL
/CPFM_CK 4 11 /CPFM_CK 11 11 /CPFM_CK
LB 13 13 LB 13
CPFM_LD 5 CPFM_LD CPFM_LD
CPFM_GAIN 6 PK 15 CPFM_GAIN 15 15 CPFM_GAIN
CPFM_CW/CCW 7 BR 2 CPFM_CW/CCW 2 2 CPFM_CW/CCW
B07B-PASK
Vertical 1 24V3 2 RD 4 24V3 4 RD 4 24V3
transport 2 1 PL 6 6 PK 6
/TRC1 /TRC1 /TRC1
T. Tandem drive unit section (20/31)
upper clutch
Tandem 1 24V3 2 RD
transport 2 /TANCL 1 LB 8 /TANCL 8 BR 8 /TANCL DR-PCU PWB
clutch
Tray 2 1 24V3 2
RD
paper feed PK PL
2 /T2PFC 1 10 /T2PFC 10 10 /T2PFC
clutch
Tray 1 1 24V3 2 RD
paper feed 2 /T1PFC 1 BR 12 /T1PFC 12 LB 12 /T1PFC
clutch
RD

Tray 2 pick-up 1 24V3 2
2 /T2PUS 1 PL 14 /T2PUS 14 PK 14 /T2PUS
solenoid
P SM2P-N R B40B-PNDZS-1
CN8
RD RD RD 37
LSU shutter 1 INT24V2 1 18 INT24V2 18 INT24V2
BR BR BR 38
solenoid BK 2 /LSS_BK 2 20 /LSS_BK 20 /LSS_BK
P SM2P-B R B40B-PNDZS-1
6
5
4
3
2
1
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
DF11-6DP-SP1
(Tandem 1 sensor harness CD)
T2S PWB R SM-4P-N P (Cassette size harness R CD) P DF1B-26DE S (Lower main harness CD) CN5
BL BL BL BL BL
GY GY GY GY GY
PK PK PK PK PK
T2LUD 3 3 T2LUD 3 5 T2LUD 5 13 T2LUD
BR BR BR BR BR
T2PED 4 4 T2PED 4 7 T2PED 7 15 T2PED
PAP-04V
(Tandem transport harness CD)

Tray 1 paper pass sensor 2 R SM-6P-N P
BL BL BL
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1
PK PK PK PL
T1PPD2 2 2 T1PPD2 2 9 T1PPD2 9 17 T1PPD2
GY GY GY
D-GND 3 3 D-GND 3
BL BL BL
GP2A200L 179228-3 4 5VN 4 11 5VN 11 19 5VN
LB LB LB
5 T1PPD1 5 13 T1PPD1 13 21 T1PPD1
U. Tandem tray section (21/31)
GY GY
6 D-GND 6
Tray 1 paper pass sensor 1
BL
5VN 1
LB
T1PPD1 2
GY
D-GND 3
GP2A200L 179228-3
T1S PWB (Tandem 2 sensor harness CD) R SM-10P-N P

BL
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1
GY
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 2
BR BR
PL PL
GY
PAP-04V 5 D-GND 5
LB
Tray 2 paper remaining 6 T2SPD 6 19 T2SPD 19 27 T2SPD
BL
quantity detection 7 5VNPD 7
GY
D-GND 1 8 D-GND 8
PK PK
T2SPD 2 9 T1SPD 9 21 T1SPD 21 29 T1SPD
BL
5VNPD 3 10 5VNPD 10
GP1A71 PHR-3
Tray 1 paper remaining
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
quantity detection
D-GND 1
T1SPD 2
5VNPD 3
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
GP1A71 PHR-3
P SM-2PIN R DF11-8DP-SP1
RD
Tray 1 1 24V3 1 23 24V3 23 31 24V3
PL
2 /T1PUS 2 25 /T1PUS 25 33 /T1PUS
pickup solenoid
B34B-PNDZS-1

Tray 2 lift-up motor (Lower main harness CD) CN6
GY
P-GND 1 11 P-GND
LB
/T2LUM 2 13 /T2LUM
B2P-PH-K-S
Tray 1 lift-up motor (Lower main harness CD)

GY
P-GND 1 15 P-GND
PK
/T1LUM 2 17 /T1LUM
B2P-PH-K-S B40B-PNDZS-1
Tandem tray installation detection (Paper feed drive harness CD) (Lower main harness CD)
D-GND 1 D-4(p,22) P DF1B-34DE S CN3
BR
TANSET 2 32 TANSET 32 32 TANSET
5VN 3 34 5VN 34 34 5VN
GP1A71 PHR-3 B34B-PNDZS-1
DR-PCU PWB
CS3 lift-up motor (Lower main harness CD) CN6
GY GY
P-GND 1 12 P-GND
LB LB
/C3LUM 2 14 /C3LUM
GY
B2P-PH-K-S 16 P-GND
PK
18 /C4LUM
CS4 lift-up motor B40B-PNDZS-1
GY
P-GND 1
PK
/C4LUM 2
B2P-PH-K-S
V. CS3/4 drive unit section (22/31)
CS3 remaining quantity (Cassette size harness F CD) PHNR-14-H+BU14P-TR-K-S (Cassette size harness R CD) P DF1B-26DE S (Lower main harness CD) CN5
GY BR BR
BR PL PL
C3SPD 2 2 C3SPD 13 4 C3SPD 4 12 C3SPD PCU PWB
BL LB LB
PK PK
GP1A71 PHR-3 4 C4SPD 11 8 C4SPD 8 16 C4SPD
BR BR
5 5VNPD 10 10 5VNPD 10 18 5VNPD
PL PL
6 C3SS1 9 12 C3SS1 12 20 C3SS1
LB BR
CS4 remaining quantity 7 C3SS2 8 14 C3SS2 14 22 C3SS2
GY PK PL
D-GND 1 8 C3SS3 7 16 C3SS3 16 24 C3SS3
CS PL BR LB
paper feed C4SPD 2 9 C3SS4 6 18 C3SS4 18 26 C3SS4
BL PL PK
5VNPD 3 10 C4SS1 5 20 C4SS1 20 28 C4SS1
LB LB
GP1A71 PHR-3 11 C4SS2 4 22 C4SS2 22 30 C4SS2
PK PK
12 C4SS3 3 24 C4SS3 24 32 C4SS3
BR BR
13 C4SS4 2 26 C4SS4 26 34 C4SS4
CS3 paper size detection 14 1 B34B-PNDZS-1
D-GND 2 GY
LB
C3SS1 3
PK
C3SS2 4
BR
C3SS3 5
PL
C3SS4 6
S6P-PH-K-S
CS4 paper size detection

GY
D-GND 2

LB
C4SS1 3
PK
C4SS2 4
BR
C4SS3 5
PL
C4SS4 6
S6P-PH-K-S
6
5
4
3
2
1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-6DP-SP1
PHNR-03-H + BU03P-TR-P-H P DF1B-34 S (Lower main harness CD) CN3
Tray 1 transport sensor (T1PPD harness CD) (Paper feed drive harness CD)
T1PPD 2 PL 1 T1PPD 3 BR BR 9 T1PPD 9 BR BR 9 T1PPD
D-GND 3 GY 2 D-GND 2 GY GY 3 D-GND 3 GY GY 3 D-GND
A-2 A-1
5VN 1 BL 3 5VN 1 BL BL 5 5VN 5 BL BL 5 5VN
B-2 B-1
7 5VNPD 7 BL BL 7 5VNPD
GP2A200L 179228-3 C-1
LCC paper entry detection (LPPD harness CD) PHNR-03-H + BU03P-TR-P-H

PL PL PL PL PL
LPPD 2 1 LPPD 3 11 LPPD 11 11 LPPD
GY GY GY GY GY
D-GND 3 2 D-GND 2 A-3 D-1 1 D-GND 1 1 D-GND
5VN 1 BL 3 5VN 1 BL B-3
GP2A200L 179228-3
CS3 paper entry detection (Paper feed UN harness CD) PHNR-12-H + BU12P-TR-P-H
GY GY GY
D-GND 3 6 D-GND 7 A-4
LB LB LB LB LB LB
C3PFD 2 5 C3PFD 8 13 C3PFD 13 13 C3PFD
BL BL BL PK PK PK
5VN 1 4 5VN 9 B-4 15 C3LUD 15 15 C3LUD
GY GY BR BR BR
GP2A200L 179228-3 CS3 lift-up detection 12 D-GND 1 A-5 17 C3PED 17 17 C3PED
D-GND 1 GY BR 11 C3LUD 2 PK
BR BL BL PL PL PL
C3LUD 2 10 5VNPD 3 C-2 19 C3PUS 19 19 C3PUS
3CS BL GY GY LB LB LB
5VNPD 3 9 D-GND 4 A-6 21 C3PWD 21 21 C3PWD
paper PL BR OR OR OR
CS3 paper empty detection GP1A71 PHR-3 8 C3PED 5 23 VREF 23 23 VREF
feed GY BL BL
D-GND 1 7 5VNPD 6 C-3
UN PL RD RD
C3PED 2 3 +24V 10 E-2
BL PK PL
5VNPD 3 2 C3PUS 11
1 12 PK 25 C4PFD 25 PK PK 25 C4PFD
GP1A71 PHR-3
BR 27 C4LUD 27 BR BR 27 C4LUD
PHNR-2-H
PL 29 C4PED 29 PL PL 29 C4PED
BU2P-TR-P-H
1 +24V 2 RD E-1 31 24V3 31 RD RD 31 24V3
CS3
2 C3PUS 1 PK LB 33 C4PUS 33 LB LB 33 C4PUS
pickup solenoid PK 6 /C3PFC 6 PK PK 6 /C3PFC
BR 8 /C4PFC 8 BR BR 8 /C4PFC
(CPWS harness CD) PL PL PL
10 /TRC2 10 10 /TRC2
W. CS3/4 paper feed and transport section (23/31)
CS3 width detection

BR LB
C3PWD 2 3 C3PWD 3 B34B-PNDZS-1
GY GY
GND 1 2 D-GND 2 A-7 PCU PWB
OR OR
VREF 3 1 VREF 1
Slide volume R SM3pin_N P
PHNR-12-H +
CS4 paper entry detection (Paper feed UN harness CD) BU12P-TR-P-H
GY GY GY
D-GND 3 6 D-GND 7 A-8
LB LB PK
C4PFD 2 5 C4PFD 8 N.C
BL BL BL
5VN 1 4 5VN 9 B-5 p,23
GY 12 D-GND 1 GY
GP2A200L 179228-3 CS4 lift-up detection D-2
D-GND 1 GY BR 11 C4LUD 2 BR
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
C4LUD 2 BR BL 10 5VNPD 3 BL C-5

4CS 5VNPD 3 BL GY 9 D-GND 4 GY D-3
paper PL 8 C4PED 5 PL
CS4 paper empty detection GP1A71 PHR-3

feed GY BL BL
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
D-GND 1 7 5VNPD 6 C-6

D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
UN PL RD RD
C4PED 2 3 +24V 10 E-3
BL PK LB
5VNPD 3 2 C4PUS 11 DF11-8DP-SP1 (C) DF11-8DP-SP1 (B) DF11-8DP-SP1 (A)
GP1A71 PHR-3 1 12
PHNR-2-H
BU2P-TR-P-H p,20
RD
CS4 1 +24V 2 p,23
PK
pickup solenoid 2 C4PUS 1
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PK
CS3 paper 1 /C3PFC 2
RD
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
2 24V3 1 E-4
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
feed clutch
PHNR-02-H + BU02P-TR-P-H DF11-6DP-SP1 (E) DF11-8DP-SP1 (D)
CS4 paper 1 /C4PFC 2 BR
2 24V3 1 RD E-5
feed clutch
Vertical PHNR-02-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
PL
1 /TRC2 2
transport RD
2 24V3 1 E-6
lower clutch
CN5
PK
2 GND
(WTM relay harness CD)
WTM (Inner lothar) P SM-7pin R (WTM harness CD) P DF1B-20DE S (Paper feed drive harness CD) P DF1B-34DE S CN3
BR LB LB LB
/WTM_LD 2 1 /WTM_LD 1 1 /WTM_LD 1 12 /WTM_LD 12 12 /WTM_LD
BL BL PK
/WTM_CW 3 2 /WTM_CW 2 3 /WTM_CW 3 14 /WTM_CW 14 14 /WTM_CW
PL PL PL PL
/WTM_CLK 4 3 /WTM_CLK 3 5 /WTM_CLK 5 16 /WTM_CLK 16 16 /WTM_CLK
LB BR BR BR
/WTM_D 5 4 /WTM_D 4 7 /WTM_D 7 18 /WTM_D 18 18 /WTM_D
BL BL
5V3 6 5 5V3 5 9 5V3 9 B-6(p,22)
GY GY GY GY
P-GND 7 6 P-GND 6 11 P-GND 11 4 P-GND 4 4 P-GND
RD RD RD RD
INT24V2 8 7 INT24V2 7 13 INT24V2 13 2 INT24V2 2 2 INT24V2
S8B-ZR-SM4
Vertical transport
open/close detection
D-GND 1 GY
BR GY GY
VTOD 2 15 D-GND 15 D-5(p,22)
BL BR BR BR BR
5V3 3 17 VTOD 17 20 VTOD 20 20 VTOD
BL BL
Front lower door detection GP1A71L3 PHR-3 19 5V3 19 B-7(p,22)
GY GY GY
D-GND 1 2 D-GND 2 D-6(p,22)
PL PL PL PL PL
DSW_D 2 4 DSW_D 4 22 DSW_D 22 22 DSW_D
BL BL BL
5V3 3 6 5V3 6 B-8(p,22)
GP1A71L3 PHR-3
PAP PA-3pin PALR DR-PCU PWB

RD RD BL
1 CFM 1 8 CFM 8 24 CFM 24 24 CFM
X. LCC and waste toner section (24/31)
BK charger LB LB BL
2 CFM_LD 2 10 CFM_LD 10 26 CFM_LD 26 26 CFM_LD
cleaner fan GY GY BL
PK
30 TNFD
Waste toner full detection B34B-PNDZS-1
GY
D-GND 1
PK
TNFD 2 CN8
BL
5VNPD 3 34 D-GND
GP1A71L3 PHR-3 33 5VNPD
B40B-PNDZS-1
Waste toner box sensor (Lower main harness CD) CN6
D-GND 2 9 D-GND
TBBOX 3 19 TBBOX
5VNPD(LED) 1 20 5VNPD(LED)
QSW-Z0538 PHR-3 B40B-PNDZS-1
CN-A 1 NC 1
NC 4 2 NC 2 (Lower main harness CD) CN4
LB LB
TXD_LCC 7 3 TXD_LCC 3 33 TXD_LCC
PL PL
RXD_LCC 8 4 RXD_LCC 4 35 RXD_LCC
BR BR
/DTR_LCC 9 5 /DTR_LCC 5 37 /DTR_LCC
PK PK
LCC CONTROL /DSR_LCC 10 6 /DSR_LCC 6 39 /DSR_LCC
BR BR
PWB RES_LCC 11 7 RES_LCC 7 34 RES_LCC

GY
NC 3 F.G. 8 F-GND 8 F.G.
BL
5VN 5 9 5VN 9
GY GY
RD PK
24V4 1 11 24V4 11 38 /TRC_LCC
P-GND 2 12 P-GND 12 GY
B40B-PNDZS-1
/TRC_LCC 12 13 /TRC_LCC 13 PK
B12B-PHDSS-B P EL 15PIN R (Lower main harness CD) CN4
RD
5 24V7
GY
6 P-GND
(WH harness CD) CN3 B7P-VH DR-DC PWB
BK BK
1 WH_L(LCC) 1 4 WH_L(LCC) 4 3 WH_L(LCC) CN6 (Japan / 200V series)
WH WH BL
WH 2 WH_N(LCC) 2 12 WH_N(LCC) 12 1 WH_N(LCC) 7 5VN
5 F-GND 5 Y/G
B03P-VH WH PWB B10P-VH
F.G. P EL 12PIN R
(Lower main harness 120V_CD)
(LCC OPTION) CN8
RD
F.G. 2 24V1
B7P-VH
CN7
GY
8 P-GND CJ-DC PWB
B8P-VH (120V series)
CN4
BL
3 5VN
B6P-VH
CN2 (Lower main harness CD) CN4 SOCKET1 SOCKET1
GY
D-GND 1 17 D-GND P-GND 1 1 P-GND
GY
D-GND 2 19 D-GND HTMY_1 2 2 HTMY_1
GY
D-GND 9 21 D-GND HTMY_2 3 3 HTMY_2
BR
n_POF_PCU 7 23 n_POF_PCU PHTMK_1 4 4 PHTMK_1
BR
n_FAX_LED 14 25 n_FAX_LED PHTMK_2 5 5 PHTMK_2
PL
n_DSR_PCU 8 27 n_DSR_PCU WEB_M1 6 6 WEB_M1
PL
PCU_RXD 10 29 PCU_RXD WEB_M2 7 7 WEB_M2
MOTHER GY
D-GND 15 31 D-GND 5VN 8 8 5VN
PWB LB
n_DTR_PCU 4 18 n_DTR_PCU P-GND 9 9 P-GND
LB
TXD_PCU 6 20 TXD_PCU N,C 10 10 N,C
BL
5VNPDin 11 22 5VNPDin D-GND 11 11 D-GND
BL
5VNPDin 13 24 5VNPDin ADMH_A 12 12 ADMH_A
PK
n_RES_MPFC_PCU 5 26 n_RES_MPFC_PCU ADMH_/A 13 13 ADMH_/A
BR
PCU_RES 12 28 PCU_RES /ADMH_CNT 14 14 /ADMH_CNT
BR
n_FWP_PCU 3 30 n_FWP_PCU ADML_A 15 15 ADML_A
GY
D-GND 16 32 D-GND ADML_/A 16 16 ADML_/A
B16B-PNDZS-1 B40B-PNDZS-1 PSFM_CLK 17 17 PSFM_CLK
LCCM_A 18 18 LCCM_A
LCCM_/A 19 19 LCCM_/A
LCCM_CNT 20 20 LCCM_CNT
5VN 21 21 5VN
DRMCL_CLK 22 22 DRMCL_CLK
/DRMCL_CNT 23 23 /DRMCL_CNT
DMK_EN 24 24 DMK_EN
PCU DMM_EN 25 25 DMM_EN DRIVER PWB
PWB BTM_CLK 26 26 BTM_CLK
POM_A 27 27 POM_A
POM_/A 28 28 POM_/A
/POM_CNT 29 29 /POM_CNT
D-GND 30 30 D-GND
P-GND 31 31 P-GND
HTMM_1 32 32 HTMM_1
HTMM_2 33 33 HTMM_2
HTMC_1 34 34 HTMC_1
HTMC_2 35 35 HTMC_2
HTMK_1 36 36 HTMK_1
HTMK_2 37 37 HTMK_2
5VN 38 38 5VN
P-GND 39 39 P-GND
N,C 40 40 N,C
D-GND 41 41 D-GND
Y. Between the PCU, the Mother and the Motor drive section (25/31)
ADMH_B 42 42 ADMH_B

ADMH_/B 43 43 ADMH_/B
/ADML_CNT 44 44 /ADML_CNT
ADML_B 45 45 ADML_B
ADML_/B 46 46 ADML_/B
PSFM_CNT 47 47 PSFM_CNT
PSFM_EN 48 48 PSFM_EN
LCCM_B 49 49 LCCM_B
LCCM_/B 50 50 LCCM_/B
5VN 51 51 5VN
DMK_CLK 52 52 DMK_CLK
/DMK_CNT 53 53 /DMK_CNT
DMC_EN 54 54 DMC_EN
DMY_EN 55 55 DMY_EN
/BTM_CNT 56 56 /BTM_CNT
BTM_EN 57 57 BTM_EN
POM_B 58 58 POM_B
POM_/B 59 59 POM_/B
D-GND 60 60 D-GND
TX24-60R-LT-H1 TX-25-60P-LT-H1
P SM4P R (Lower main harness CD) CN6
PK
1 OZFM2 1 21 OZFM2
PL
OZONE 2 /OZFM_CNT 2 23 /OZFM_CNT
GY
3 P-GND 3 25 P-GND
FAN2 BR
4 OZFM_LD2 4 27 OZFM_LD2
P SM4P R
PL
1 OVFM3 1 22 OVFM3
OZONE 2 /OZFM_CNT 2 24 /OZFM_CNT
GY
3 P-GND 3 26 P-GND
FAN3 LB
4 OZFM_LD3 4 28 OZFM_LD3
B40B-PNDZ-S
CN19
PK
(Lower main harness CD) 16 RSV_PMC
PL
14 /FUFM_CNT
BR
1 /RSV_in1
(Upper main harness CD) B16B-PNDZS-1
P SM4P R S DF1B18DE P CN13
RD
1 MFPFM 1 12 24V3 12 20 24V3
2 MFPFM_CNT 2 CN18
Mother FAN LB
3 P-GND 3 14 RSV_IO_OUT 14 29 RSV_IO_OUT
4 MFPFM_LD 4 B30B-PNDZS-1
PHDR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H (ACDC harness CD) R SM6P P (Lower main harness CD) CN6 DR-PCU PWB
Z. Inserter and outlet fan section (26/31)
PK PK
1 PSFM1 3 1 OVFM3 1 29 PSFM1
Power source 2 PSFM_LD1 2
BR
2 /OZFM_CNT 2
BR
31 PSFM_LD1
FAN1 GY GY
PHDR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
PL PL
1 PSFM2 3 4 OVFM3 4 30 PSFM2
Power source 2 PSFM_LD2 2
LB
5 /OZFM_CNT 5
LB
32 PSFM_LD2
FAN2 GY GY
CN CN (Lower main harness CD)

PK PK
1 TXD_FIN TXD_FIN 1 TXD_FIN 1 35 TXD_INS
BR BR
2 RXD_FIN RXD_FIN 2 RXD_FIN 2 37 RXD_INS
PL PL
3 /DTR_FIN /DTR_FIN 3 /DTR_FIN 3 39 /DTR_INS
LB LB
4 /DSR_FIN /DSR_FIN 4 /DSR_FIN 4 36 /DSR_INS
PK PK
5 RES_FIN RES_FIN 5 RES_FIN 5 38 RES_INS
RD
6 24V3 24V3 6 24V6 6
BL
7 5VN 5VN 7 5VN 7
GY GY
FINISHER 8 D-GND D-GND 8 D-GND 8
GY
40 D-GND

9 P-GND P-GND 9 P-GND 9 B40B-PNDZ-S
GY
10 F-GND F-GND 10 F-GND 10
RD
11 24V5 24V5 11 24V6 11
GY
12 P-GND P-GND 12 P-GND 12
P EL 12PIN R
INSERTOR CN4
RD
3 24V6
GY
FINISHER & INSERTOR (OPTION) 4 GND1
F.G. B7P-VH-B DR-DC PWB
CN6 (Japan / 200V series)
BL
5 5V2
B10P-VH-B
CN8
RD
1 24V6
B7P-VH-B
CN7
GY
7 P-GND
B8P-VH-B CJ-DC PWB
CN4 (120V series)
BL
2 5VN
B6P-VH-B
CN16
1 24V3
2 P-GND
3 /CV_COPY
4 /CV_COUNT
5 /CV_START
6 /CV_CA
7 /CV_CLCOPY
8 /CV_COLOR1
TO COIN VENDOR 9 /CV_STAPLE
(OPTION) 10 /CV_COLOR0
AA.Option section (27/31)
11 /CV_DUPLEX PCU PWB

12 5V3
13 /CV_SIZE0
14 /CV_SIZE1
15 /CV_SIZE2
16 /CV_SIZE3
B16B-PNDZ-1
Mechanical counter 1 SMR-04 (MSW harness CD) P EL-6P R CN7
RD RD
24V3 1 1 1 3 24V3 3 27 24V3
LB LB
/PNC_B 2 2 2 4 /PNC_B 4 29 /PNC_B
3 3 5 24V3 5 RD 28 24V3
MECHANICAL 179228-2
PL
4 4 6 /PNC_C 6 30 /PNC_C
COUNTER SMP-04 B30B-PNDZS-1
(OPTION) Mechanical counter 2
24V3 1 RD
/PNC_C 2 PL
179228-2
R SM-6pin P SCN-mother harness CD CN145

1 /C_CARD 1 BR 1 /C_CARD
CARD 2 /C_SEL 2 LB 2 /C_SEL
3 /C_CLOCK 3 PK 3 /C_CLOCK
READER 4 /C_DATA 4 PL 4 /C_DATA
5 5V 5 BL 5 5V

(OPTION) 6 D-GND 6 GY 6 D-GND
B6P-PH-K-R
CN131
1 n A_PNC
2 n A_COPY SCN-cnt PWB
3 n A_CA
4 n A_READY
R SM6P P Table relay harness CD 5 n A_AUD
1 /C_CARD 1 6 5V
CARD 2 /C_SEL 2 7 D-GND
3 /C_CLOCK 3 TO AUDITER 8 24V
READER 4 /C_DATA 4 9 D-GND
5 5V 5 10 n A_TC
(OPTION) 6 D-GND 6 PNC harness 11 24V
12 PNC-a
13 D-GND
B13P-PH-K-S
OCSW
OCSW
5VEXT
D-GND
ORS LED PWB

side harness: common
EH
3
2
1
F-GND
24VEXT
/SIZE_LED2
/SIZE_LED1
GY
Document detection light emitting
LB
PL
LB
BL
RD
GY
CCD-F harness 1
SCN-mother harness CD
:common
GY GY
6
5
4
3
2
1
P^GND 1 3 P^GND AGND 1 1 AGND

RD GY
CN3
24V1 2 1 24V1 AGND 3 3 AGND

CN11
CN136
CN148
12V 3 PL 2 12V CCD_CP- 5 BR 5 CCD_CP-

5VN 4 BL 4 5VN CCD_CP+ 7 PK 7 CCD_CP+
B6P-PH-K-S
3.3V 5 OR 5 3.3V AGND 9 GY 9 AGND

GY BR
OCSW
5VEXT
D-GND
B6P-VH
D-GND 6 6 D-GND CCD_RS+ 11 11 CCD_RS+

24VEXT
PK
/SIZE_LED2
/SIZE_LED1
CN138 B6P-VH-R
CCD_RS- 13 13 CCD_RS-
SCN-mother harness CD AGND 15 BR 15 AGND
n INFO_LED 1 LB 1 n INFO_LED CCD_CLK2- 17 BR 17 CCD_CLK2-
PL PK
CN3
CN_CHK_OUT 3 3 CN_CHK_OUT CCD_CLK2+ 19 19 CCD_CLK2+

CN144
D-GND 5 SH 5 AGND 21 GR 21 AGND

D-GND
LCD_CLK+ 7 PK 7 LCD_CLK+ CCD_CLK1+ 23 BR 23 CCD_CLK1+
LCD_CLK- 9 WH 9 LCD_CLK- CCD_CLK1- 25 PK 25 CCD_CLK1-
D-GND 11 SH 11 AGND 27 GY 27 AGND
D-GND
CCD PWB
LCD_DATA2+ 13 PK 13 LCD_DATA2+ AD_MCLK- 29 BR 29 AD_MCLK-

LCD_DATA2- 15 WH 15 LCD_DATA2- AD_MCLK+ 31 PK 31 AD_MCLK+
D-GND
LCD_DATA1+ 19 PK 19 LCD_DATA1+ CLKP1_OUT+ 35 BR 35 CLKP1_OUT+
LCD_DATA1- 21 WH 21 LCD_DATA1- CLKP1_OUT- 37 PK 37 CLKP1_OUT-
D-GND
LCD_DATA0+ 25 PK 25 LCD_DATA0+ AGND 2 GY 2 AGND
LCD_DATA0- 27 WH 27 LCD_DATA0- A12V 4 PL 4 A12V
CN_CHK_IN 29 GY 29 CN_CHK_IN AGND 6 GY 6 AGND
5VO 2 BL 2 A5V 8 BL 8 A5V
5VO
LB GY
MOTHER PWB
n WU_LED 4 4 n WU_LED AGND 10 10 AGND
PL OR
B30B-PHDSS-B
n POW_LED 6 6 n POW_LED A3.3V 12 12 A3.3V

n WU_KEY 8 LB 8 /LVDS_STBY 14 BR 14 /LVDS_STBY
n WU_KEY
n PWR_SW 10 PL 10 n PWR_SW /RES_CCDAD 16 PK 16 /RES_CCDAD
NC 12 12 AD_SCLK 18 BR 18 AD_SCLK
NC
n POF_SCN 14 PL 14 n POF_SCN AD_WRSO 20 PK 20 AD_WRSO
n RES_MPFC_SCN 16 LB 16 n RES_MPFC_SCN AD_SEN 22 BR 22 AD_SEN
RES_SCN 18 PL 18 RES_SCN AD_RDSI 24 PK 24 AD_RDSI
n RTS_SCN 20 LB 20 n RTS_SCN AGND 26 GY 26 AGND
TXD_SCN 22 PL 22 AD_CLPIN 28 BR 28 AD_CLPIN
TXD_SCN
n CTS_SCN 24 LB 24 n CTS_SCN AD_BLKCLP 30 PK 30 AD_BLKCLP
RXD_SCN 26 PL 26 RXD_SCN CCD_SH 32 BR 32 CCD_SH
B30B-PNDZS-1
n FWP_SCN 28 LB 28 n FWP_SCN AGND 34 GY 34 AGND
GY BR
501190-4017(MOLEX)
501190-4017(MOLEX)
D-GND 30 30 D-GND SH_OUT+ 36 36 SH_OUT+

SH_OUT- 38 PK 38 SH_OUT-
SCN-mother harness CD AGND 40 GY 40 AGND
Ndetect 1 PK 1 Ndetect CCD-F harness 1:
D-GND 2 GY 2 D-GND common
CN19
CN146
nDET_ANC 3 LB 3 nDET_ANC AGND 1 GY 1 AGND

SCNcnt PWB
BR
CN1
NC 4 4 NC TC+ 3 3 TC+
CN147
TXD_ANC 5 PK 5 TXD_ANC TC- 5 PK 5 TC-

NC 6 6 NC AGND 7 GY 7 AGND
RXD_ANC 7 BR 7 RXD_ANC TB+ 9 BR 9 TB+
NC 8 8 NC TB- 11 PK 11 TB-
D-GND 9 GY 9 D-GND AGND 13 GY 13 AGND
D-GND 10 GY 10 D-GND TA+ 15 BR 15 TA+
PK
B12B-PHDSS-B
B10B-PHDSS-B
TA- 17 17 TA-
SCN-mother harness CD AGND 19 GY 19 AGND
SCANDATA0- 1 WH 1 SCANDATA0- AGND 2 GY 2 AGND
PK BR
CN5
SCANDATA0+ 2 2 SCANDATA0+ TE+ 4 4 TE+
CN143
D-GND 3 SH 3 D-GND TE- 6 PK 6 TE-
SCANDATA1+ 5 PK 5 SCANDATA1+ TD+ 10 BR 10 TD+
D-GND 6 SH 6 D-GND TD- 12 PK 12 TD-
SCANDATA2+ 8 PK 8 SCANDATA2+ TCLK+ 16 BR 16 TCLK+
SH PK
501190-2017(MOLEX)
D-GND 9 9 D-GND TCLK- 18 18 TCLK-

WH GY
501190-2017(MOLEX)
SCANCLKOUT- 10 10 SCANCLKOUT- AGND 20 20 AGND

SCANCLKOUT+ 11 PK 11 SCANCLKOUT+
D-GND 12 SH 12 D-GND SCN-LAMP
SCANDATA3- 13 WH 13 SCANDATA3- FFC: common
PK
B15P-PH-K-S
B15P-PH-K-S
SCANDATA3+ 14 14 SCANDATA3+ P-GND 1 5 P-GND
D-GND 15 SH 15 D-GND P-GND 2 4 P-GND
CN130
LAMP 3 3 LAMP
Inverter PWB
24V 4 2 24V
24V 5 1 24V
2
1
CN146
CN143
/DETECT 1
D-GND 2
SCNcntPWB
SCNcntPWB
/DET_ANC 3
TXD_ANC 5
RXD_ANC 7
CL
D-GND 9
D-GND 10
SCANDATA0- 1
CN4 B12B-PHDSS-B CN3

SCANDATA0+ 2
D-GND 3 MiM_A 1
SCANDATA1- 4 MiM_B 2
When DOCC PWB is installed

CN137
SCANDATA1+ 5 MiM_/A 3 MOTOR
D-GND 6 MiM_/B 4 MIRROR
SCANDATA2- 7
SCANDATA2+ 8
D-GND 9
SCANCLKOUT- 10 MHPS 1 BR 3 MHPS
GY
Document Control PWB

SCANCLKOUT+ 11 D-GND 2 2 D-GND
MHPS
D-GND 12 5V 3 BL 1 5V
EH
SCANDATA3- 13
CN134 PH
MHPS harness: common
B15P-PH-K-S
SCANDATA3+ 14
D-GND 15
OPTION
AB.Scanner section 1/2 (28/31)
CN142 CN135 CN1 CN2 PH
BR
1 P-GND 1 1 P-GND D-GND 1 26 D-GND PDSEL0 1 1 PDSEL0
LB
2 P-GND 2 2 P-GND 3.3V 2 25 3.3V PDSEL1 2 2 PDSEL1
PL
3 SPPD1 3 3 SPPD1 5V3 3 24 5VN PDSEL2 3 3 PDSEL2
BL
4 SPPD2 4 4 SPPD2 D-GND 4 23 D-GND 5VN 4 4 5VN
PK
5 24VPD 5 5 24VPD PD 5 22 PD PD 5 5 PD
GY
6 24VPD 6 6 24VPD PDSEL0 6 21 PDSEL0 D-GND 6 6 D-GND
7 5V_EXT 7 7 5V_EXT PDSEL1 7 20 PDSEL1 BM06B-PASS-TB ORS-PD harness CD ORS PD PWB
8 AVCC 8 8 AVCC PDSEL2 8 19 PDSEL2
9 SPFMCK 9 9 SPFMCK /KEYIN 9 18 /KEYIN CN3 PH
BR
10 SPFMM1 10 10 SPFMM1 SEG0 10 17 SEG0 n PWRSW 1 3 n PWRSW
GY
11 SPFMM2 11 11 SPFMM2 SEG1 11 16 SEG1 D-GND 2 2 D-GND
GY
12 SPFMO1 12 12 SPFMO1 SEG2 12 15 SEG2 D-GND 3 1 D-GND
13 SPFMO2 13 13 SPFMO2 /F0 13 14 /F0 BM03B-PASS-TB PSW harness CD POWER SW PWB
14 SPRMA 14 14 SPRMA /F1 14 13 /F1
15 SPRMA/ 15 15 SPRMA/ /F2 15 12 /F2
16 SPRMB 16 16 SPRMB /F3 16 11 /F3
AC.Scanner section 2/2 (29/31)
17 SPRMB/ 17 17 SPRMB/ /BZR 17 10 /BZR MFP OPE

TO DSPF 18 SPRMO1 18 18 SPRMO1 D-GND 18 9 D-GND
PWB CD
19 SGS 19 19 SGS n PWRSW 19 8 n PWRSW
20 STMPS 20 20 STMPS n WU_KEY 20 7 n WU_KEY
21 SRRC 21 21 SRRC n INFO_LED 21 6 n INFO_LED
22 SPFC 22 22 SPFC POW_LED 22 5 POW_LED
23 SPWS 23 23 SPWS WU_LED 23 4 WU_LED
24 SELA_ 24 24 SELA_ D-GND 24 3 D-GND
25 SELB_ 25 25 SELB_ 5V2 25 2 5V2
26 SELC_ 26 26 SELC_ D-GND 26 1 D-GND
27 SSELO 27 27 SSELO SLW26S-1C7 MFP OPE FFC CD 52610-2671(MOLEX)
28 SPPD4 28 28 SPPD4
29 SPFFAN 29 29 SPFFAN CN3
30 SPPD3 30 30 SPPD3 SCN-CNT PWB D-GND 1 22 VSS
31 SPPD5 31 31 SPPD5 CN125 CN1 YD 2 21 YD
32 5VPD 32 32 5VPD D-GND 1 30 D-GND LP 3 20 LP
33 D-GND 33 33 D-GND CN_CHK_OUT 2 29 CN_CHK_OUT CP 4 19 XCK
34 D-GND 34 34 D-GND LCD_CLK+ 3 28 LCD_CLK+ D-GND 5 18 VSS
B34B-PHDSS-B LCD_CLK- 4 27 LCD_CLK- VCONT 6 17 Vcon
D-GND 5 26 D-GND DISPout 7 16 DISP
LCD_DAT2+ 6 25 LCD_DAT2+ 3.3V 8 15 VDD
LCD_DAT2- 7 24 LCD_DAT2- 3.3V 9 14 VDD
D-GND 8 23 D-GND 3.3V 10 13 VDD
LCD_DAT1+ 9 22 LCD_DAT1+ D-GND 11 12 VSS
LCD_DAT1- 10 21 LCD_DAT1- D-GND 12 11 VSS LCD UN
D-GND 11 20 D-GND D0 13 10 D0
LCD_DAT0+ 12 19 LCD_DAT0+ D1 14 9 D1
LCD_DAT0- 13 18 LCD_DAT0- D2 15 8 D2

D-GND 14 17 D-GND D3 16 7 D3
DISP 15 16 DISP D4 17 6 D 4
3.3V_EXT 16 15 3.3V_EXT D5 18 5 D 5
TP1418 17 14 NC D6 19 4 D 6
VCONT 18 13 VCONT D7 20 3 D 7
AVCC 19 12 AVCC D-GND 21 2 VSS
SC_TEMP 20 11 SC_TEMP D-GND 22 1 VSS
P-GND 21 10 P-GND 52435-2271(MOLEX) LCD-FFC CD FH12-22S-0.5SH(55) (HIR
24V_EXT 22 9 24V_EXT CN4
TP1449 23 8 NC /YL(Y1) 1
/CCFT1 24 7 /CCFT1 XH(X1) 2
Touch panel
CN_CHK_IN(LCD) 25 6 CN_CHK_IN(LCD) YH(Y2) 3
X2CN 26 5 X2CN /XL(X2) 4
Y2CN 27 4 Y2CN 52271-0469(MOLEX)
X1CN 28 3 X1CN S02(8.0)B-BHS CN2
Y1CN 29 2 Y1CN CN2 CN1 CCFT+ 1
BR
D-GND 30 1 D-GND /CCFT 1 3 /CCFT /CCFT 2
BR
SLW30S-1C7 LVDS FFC CD 52271-3079(MOLEX) D-GND 2 2 D-GND S02(8.0)B-BHS CN3 BACK LIGHT
BR
24V 3 1 24V CCFT+ 1
LVDS-CD PWB SM03B-PASS-1-TB LCD-INV harness CD S03B-PASK-2 /CCFT 2
LCD INV PWB CD
PAP-04V-F CN17
1 1 12V
HDD 2 2 HDDFM_PWM
3 3 D-GND
FAN 4 4 HDDFM_LD
4 HDDFM_LD 1 1 12V
MFP 3 D-GND 2 2 CPUFM_PWM
2 HDDFM_PWM 3 3 D-GND
FAN 1 12V 4 4 CPUFM_LD
(SCN-mother harness CD) CN15

12V 1 1 12V
AD.MFP section 1/2 (30/31)
D-GND 2 3 D-GND
D-GND 3 4 D-GND
5VN 4 2 5VN
B4P-VH
USB2.0 (DEVICE) USB1.1 (HOST) LAN RS232C
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN5
IDE_RST_N 1 1 IDE_RST_N
D-GND 2 2 D-GND
RI
D-
D-
CT
CT
NC
NC
CD
5V
5V
D+
D+
TX-
RX-
TX+
RX+
TXD
RTS
CTS
DTR
RXD
DSR
GND
GND
GND
IDE_DD7 3 3 IDE_DD7 Mother PWB
IDE_DD8 4 4 IDE_DD8
IDE_DD6 5 5 IDE_DD6 CN8 USB-B CN9 USB-A CN26 LAN CN18 RS232C
IDE_DD9 6 6 IDE_DD9
IDE_DD5 7 7 IDE_DD5
IDE_DD10 8 8 IDE_DD10
HDD IDE_DD4 9 9 IDE_DD4
IDE_DD11 10 10 IDE_DD11
IDE_DD3 11 11 IDE_DD3 1 5VL 31 CH1_N 61 D-GND 91 n WU_FAX2 1 5VL 31 CH1_N 61 D-GND 91 n WU_FAX2
IDE_DD12 12 12 IDE_DD12 2 5VL 32 CH1_P 62 D-GND 92 n MSW_MON2 2 5VL 32 CH1_P 62 D-GND 92 n MSW_MON2
IDE_DD2 13 13 IDE_DD2 3 5VL 33 CH2_N 63 D-GND 93 n POF_MFPC 3 5VL 33 CH2_N 63 D-GND 93 n POF_MFPC
IDE_DD13 14 14 IDE_DD13 4 5VL 34 CH2_P 64 D-GND 94 n REQ_PIC 4 5VL 34 CH2_P 64 D-GND 94 n REQ_PIC
IDE_DD1 15 15 IDE_DD1 5 5VL 35 CLK_N 65 D-GND 95 n CLR_PIC 5 5VL 35 CLK_N 65 D-GND 95 n CLR_PIC
IDE_DD14 16 16 IDE_DD14 6 5VL 36 CLK_P 66 D-GND 96 TXD_PIC 6 5VL 36 CLK_P 66 D-GND 96 TXD_PIC
IDE_DD0 17 17 IDE_DD0 7 5VL 37 CH3_N 67 D-GND 97 RXD_PIC 7 5VL 37 CH3_N 67 D-GND 97 RXD_PIC
IDE_DD15 18 18 IDE_DD15 8 5VL 38 CH3_P 68 D-GND 98 PWM 8 5VL 38 CH3_P 68 D-GND 98 PWM
D-GND 19 19 D-GND 9 PICVPPON 39 ECLK_LSU_N 69 RSV 99 n CNCT_FAN 9 PICVPPON 39 ECLK_LSU_N 69 RSV 99 n CNCT_FAN

KEY 20 20 KEY 10 nANTI_INST 40 ECLK_LSU_P 70 RSV 100 n RES_PIC 10 nANTI_INST 40 ECLK_LSU_P 70 RSV 100 n RES_PIC
IDE_DMARQ 21 21 IDE_DMARQ 11 SCANDATA3+ 41 HSYNC_LSU_P 71 RXD_SCN 101 RES_MFP 11 SCANDATA3+ 41 HSYNC_LSU_P 71 RXD_SCN 101 RES_MFP
D-GND 22 22 D-GND MFP PWB 12 SCANDATA3- 42 HSYNC_LSU_N 72 nCTS_SCN 102 PWM2 12 SCANDATA3- 42 HSYNC_LSU_N 72 nCTS_SCN 102 PWM2
IDE_DIOW_N 23 23 IDE_DIOW_N 13 SCANCLKOUT+ 43 VSYNC_K_N 73 TXD_SCN 103 FLVPP 13 SCANCLKOUT+ 43 VSYNC_K_N 73 TXD_SCN 103 FLVPP
D-GND 24 24 D-GND 14 SCANCLKOUT- 44 VSYNC_K_P 74 n RTS_SCN 104 n REQ_PIC_INT 14 SCANCLKOUT- 44 VSYNC_K_P 74 n RTS_SCN 104 n REQ_PIC_INT
IDE_DIOR_N 25 25 IDE_DIOR_N 15 SCANDATA2+ 45 VSYNC_C_P 75 n RES_SCN 105 n WU_FAX1 15 SCANDATA2+ 45 VSYNC_C_P 75 n RES_SCN 105 n WU_FAX1
D-GND 26 26 D-GND 16 SCANDATA2- 46 VSYNC_C_N 76 n RES_PCU 106 3.3V 16 SCANDATA2- 46 VSYNC_C_N 76 n RES_PCU 106 3.3V
IDE_IORDY_N 27 27 IDE_IORDY_N 17 SCANDATA1+ 47 VSYNC_M_N 77 RXD_PCU 107 3.3V 17 SCANDATA1+ 47 VSYNC_M_N 77 RXD_PCU 107 3.3V
D-GND 28 28 D-GND 18 SCANDATA1- 48 VSYNC_M_P 78 n CTS_PCU 108 3.3V 18 SCANDATA1- 48 VSYNC_M_P 78 n CTS_PCU 108 3.3V
IDE_DMACK_N 29 29 IDE_DMACK_N 19 SCANDATA0+ 49 VSYNC_Y_P 79 TXD_PCU 109 5VO 19 SCANDATA0+ 49 VSYNC_Y_P 79 TXD_PCU 109 5VO
D-GND 30 30 D-GND 20 SCANDATA0- 50 VSYNC_Y_N 80 n RTS_PCU 110 12V 20 SCANDATA0- 50 VSYNC_Y_N 80 n RTS_PCU 110 12V
IDE_INTRQ 31 31 IDE_INTRQ 21 LCD_DATA0- 51 5VL 81 TXD_FAX(D) 111 D-GND 21 LCD_DATA0- 51 5VL 81 TXD_FAX(D) 111 D-GND
ICCS10 32 32 ICCS10 22 LCD_DATA0+ 52 5VL 82 TXD_FAX(CS) 112 D-GND 22 LCD_DATA0+ 52 5VL 82 TXD_FAX(CS) 112 D-GND
IDE_DA1 33 33 IDE_DA1 23 LCD_DATA1- 53 5VL 83 RXD_FAX(D) 113 D-GND 23 LCD_DATA1- 53 5VL 83 RXD_FAX(D) 113 D-GND
IDE_CBLID_N 34 34 IDE_CBLID_N 24 LCD_DATA1+ 54 5VL 84 RXD_FAX(CS) 114 D-GND 24 LCD_DATA1+ 54 5VL 84 RXD_FAX(CS) 114 D-GND
IDE_DA0 35 35 IDE_DA0 25 LCD_DATA2- 55 5VL 85 n RTS_FAX(D) 115 D-GND 25 LCD_DATA2- 55 5VL 85 n RTS_FAX(D) 115 D-GND
IDE_DA2 36 36 IDE_DA2 26 LCD_DATA2+ 56 5VL 86 n CTS_FAX(D) 116 D-GND 26 LCD_DATA2+ 56 5VL 86 n CTS_FAX(D) 116 D-GND
IDE_CS0 37 37 IDE_CS0 27 LCD_CLK- 57 5VL 87 n RTS_FAX(CS) 117 D-GND 27 LCD_CLK- 57 5VL 87 n RTS_FAX(CS) 117 D-GND
IDE_CS1 38 38 IDE_CS1 28 LCD_CLK+ 58 5VL 88 n CTS_FAX(CS) 118 D-GND 28 LCD_CLK+ 58 5VL 88 n CTS_FAX(CS) 118 D-GND
IDE_DASP_N 39 39 IDE_DASP_N 29 CH0_N 59 5VL 89 n RES_FAX 119 D-GND 29 CH0_N 59 5VL 89 n RES_FAX 119 D-GND
D-GND 40 40 D-GND 30 CH0_P 60 5VL 90 n CNCT_FAX 120 D-GND 30 CH0_P 60 5VL 90 n CNCT_FAX 120 D-GND
HU5-400PNA-S53T-FA
CN20
1 3.3V CN19
2 3.3V D-GND 1
3 3.3V D-GND 2
4 D-GND 3.3V 3
5 SA_VIDEO_CLKI 3.3V 4
6 D-GND FAXD_TXD_N 5
7 SA_VIDEO_HSYNC_I n CNCT_FAX 6
8 D-GND FAXD_TXD_P 7
9 SA_VIDEO_VSYNC_K_I n MSW_MON 8
10 D-GND FAXCS_TXD_P 9
11 SA_VIDEO_VSYNC_C_I n RES_FAX 10
12 D-GND FAXCS_TXD_N 11
13 SA_VIDEO_VSYNC_M_I D-GND 12
AE.MFP section 2/2 (31/31)
14 D-GND FAXD_RXD_N 13
15 SA_VIDEO_VSYNC_Y_I n RES_MFP 14
16 D-GND FAXD_RXD_P 15
17 VIDEO_DAT_KO n FAX_WUP 16
FAX UN
18 VIDEO_DAT_K1 FAXCS_RXD_P 17 (OPTION)
19 VIDEO_DAT_K2 n PLED 18
20 VIDEO_DAT_K3 FAXCS_RXD_N 19
21 VIDEO_DAT_K4 D-GND 20
22 VIDEO_DAT_K5 n FAXD_RTS 21
23 D-GND D-GND 22
24 VIDEO_DAT_CO n FAXD_CTS 23
25 VIDEO_DAT_C1 FLVPP 24
26 VIDEO_DAT_C2 n FAXCS_RTS 25
27 VIDEO_DAT_C3 5VO 26
EFI (OPTION) 28 VIDEO_DAT_C4 MFPC PWB n FAXCS_CTS 27
29 VIDEO_DAT_C5 12V 28
30 D-GND 3.3V 29
31 VIDEO_DAT_MO 3.3V 30
32 VIDEO_DAT_M1 D-GND 31
33 VIDEO_DAT_M2 D-GND 32
34 VIDEO_DAT_M3 B32B-PHDSS-B
35 VIDEO_DAT_M4
36 VIDEO_DAT_M5
37 D-GND
38 VIDEO_DAT_YO
39 VIDEO_DAT_Y1
40 VIDEO_DAT_Y2
41 VIDEO_DAT_Y3
42 VIDEO_DAT_Y4
43 VIDEO_DAT_Y5
44 SA_VIDEO_HSYNC_O
45 D-GND

46 EF_CLK_IN
47 D-GND
48 GPI_nEF_DETECT
49 ENG_RDY(O,OC)
50 PRTC_RDY(I,OC)
51 PRT_RTS(O)
52 PRT_TXD(O)
53 PRT_CTS(I) CN22 FX8C-60S-SV5
54 PRT_RXD(I)
55 3.3V
56 PON_PRTC(I)
57 n WU_EF
5V_IN
5V_IN
5V_IN
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
EXT_GNT
EXT_REQ
PCI1_EXT
58 n PD_PRTCIF(O)
PCI_STOP
PCI1_SERR
PCI1_PERR
n PCI1_RST
59 D-GND
60 D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 PCI1_INTA_PU
11
12
13 PCI1MAC_AD30
14 PCI1MAC_AD31
15 PCI1MAC_AD28
16 PCI1MAC_AD29
17 PCI1MAC_AD26
18 PCI1MAC_AD27
19 PCI1MAC_AD24
20 PCI1MAC_AD25
21 PCI1MAC_AD23
22 PCI1MAC_CBE3
23 PCI1MAC_AD21
24 PCI1MAC_AD22
25 PCI1MAC_AD19
26 PCI1MAC_AD20
27 PCI1MAC_AD17
28 PCI1MAC_AD18
29 PCI1MAC_CBE2
30 PCI1MAC_AD16
31 PCI1MAC_AD14
32 PCI1MAC_AD15
33 PCI1MAC_AD12
34 PCI1MAC_AD13
35 PCI1MAC_AD10
36 PCI1MAC_AD11
37 PCI1MAC_AD8
38 PCI1MAC_AD9
39 PCI1MAC_AD7
40 PCI1MAC_CBE1
41 PCI1MAC_AD5
42 PCI1MAC_AD6
43 PCI1MAC_AD3
44 PCI1MAC_AD4
45 PCI1MAC_AD1
46 PCI1MAC_AD2
47 PCI1MAC_CBE0
48 PCI1MAC_AD0
49
50 PCI1MAC_IDSEL
51 PCI1MAC_PAR
52 PCI1MAC_FRAME
53 PCI1MAC_IRDY
54 PCI1MAC_TRDY
55 PCI1MAC_DVSEL
56
57
58
59
60
FX8C-60S-SV5
EXTEND PCI
3. Signal list
Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Signal name Name [Type] Function/Operation NOTE
"L" "H" No. No. name
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate. ON OFF CN15 23 PCU
[Electromagnetic solenoid]
ADUH ADU1 motor upper Drives the right door section. - - CN7 6, 5, 4, Driver Drives with
[Stepping motor] 3 4-phase signals.
ADUL ADU2 motor lower Drives the right door section. - - CN7 12, 11, Driver Drives with
[Stepping motor] 10, 9 4-phase signals.
APPD1 ADU transport path Detects paper pass in the Pass - CN15 37 PCU
detector 1 [Photo interrupter] upstream section of the
duplex (ADU).
APPD2 ADU transport path Detects paper pass in the Pass - CN15 39 PCU
detector 2 [Photo interrupter] midstream section of the
duplex (ADU).
BLTCL Belt separation clutch Controls separation of the ON OFF CN13 27 PCU
(Normal) primary transfer belt.
[Electromagnetic clutch]
BLTCL_R Belt separation clutch Controls separation of the ON OFF CN13 31 PCU
(Reverse) primary transfer belt.
BTM Transfer drive motor Drives the transfer belt. - - CN4 7, 8, 9, Driver Drives with
C3LUD Tray 3 upper limit detection Detects the upper limit of the - Upper limit CN3 15 PCU
(Lift HP detection) tray 3.
[Photo interrupter]
C3LUM Paper tray lift-up motor Drives the paper tray lift. Stop Drive CN6 14 PCU
(Tray 3) [Brush motor]
C3PED Tray 3 paper detector Detects paper in the tray 3. YES NO CN3 17 PCU
[Photo interrupter] Controls ON/OFF of the paper
C3PFC Tray 3 paper feed clutch feed roller in the tray 3 paper ON OFF CN3 6 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] feed section.
C3PFD Tray 3 paper entry detector Detects paper pass in the tray Pass - CN3 13 PCU
[Reflection type sensor] 3.
C3PUS Paper pickup solenoid Paper pickup solenoid ON OFF CN3 19 PCU
(Tray 3) (Tray 3)
C3PWD Tray 3 width detector Detects the paper width in the - - CN3 21 PCU Analog
[Volume resistor] tray 3. detection
C3SPD Tray 3 remaining quantity Detects the remaining Remained - CN5 12 PCU
detector [Photo interrupter] quantity of paper in the tray 3.
C3SS1 Tray 3 rear edge detector 1 Detects insertion of the tray - - CN5 20 PCU
[Tact switch] by detecting either of rear
C3SS2 Tray 3 rear edge detector 2 edges 1 - 4 of the tray 3. - - CN5 22 PCU
[Tact switch] Detects the paper size in the Refer to A-(1)
C3SS3 Tray 3 rear edge detector 3 tray 3. - - CN5 24 PCU Tray 3.
[Tact switch]
C3SS4 Tray 3 rear edge detector 4 - - CN5 26 PCU
[Tact switch]
C4LUD Tray 4 upper limit detector Detects the upper limit of tray - Upper limit CN3 27 PCU
(Lift HP detection) 4.
[Photo interrupter]
C4LUM Paper tray lift-up motor Drives the paper tray lift. Stop Drive CN6 18 PCU
(Tray 4) [Brush motor]
C4PED Tray 4 paper detector Detects paper presence in YES NO CN3 29 PCU
[Photo interrupter] tray 4.
C4PFC Tray 4 paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN3 8 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] feed roller in the tray 4 paper
feed section.
C4PFD Tray 4 paper entry detector Detects paper pass in the tray Pass - CN3 25 PCU
[Reflection type sensor] 4.
C4PUS Paper pickup solenoid Paper pickup solenoid ON OFF CN3 33 PCU
(Tray 4) (Tray 4)
C4SPD Tray 4 remaining quantity Detects the remaining Remained - CN5 16 PCU
detector [Photo interrupter] quantity of paper in the tray 3.
C4SS1 Tray 4 rear edge detector 1 Detects insertion of the tray - - CN5 28 PCU
[Tact switch] by detecting either of rear
C4SS2 Tray 4 rear edge detector 2 edges 1 - 4 of the tray 4. - - CN5 30 PCU
[Tact switch] Detects the paper size in the Refer to A-(2)
C4SS3 Tray 4 rear edge detector 3 tray 4. - - CN5 32 PCU Tray 4.
[Tact switch]
C4SS4 Tray 4 rear edge detector 4 - - CN5 34 PCU
[Tact switch]

CCHP Charger cleaner HP detector Detects the charger cleaner - HOME CN9 13 PCU
[Photo interrupter] position (in the process unit).
CCM Charger cleaner motor Cleans the main charger. - - CN13 33, 35 PCU Normal/reverse
[Brush motor] rotation with
2-phase.
CCM_ROT CCM rotation detector Detects the RPM of the - - CN18 23 PCU RPM detection
[Photo interrupter] charger cleaner.
CFM Charger cooling fan motor Exhausts ozone. Stop Drive CN3 24 PCU
CFM_LD CFM lock detector Detects the CFM lock. - Lock CN3 26 PCU
detected
CLI Scanner lamp[Xenon lamp] Radiates lights onto a ON OFF CN130 3 SCU
document for the CCD to
scan the document images.
CPUFM Controller cooling fan motor Cools the control PWB. Stop Drive CN13 1 Mother
CPUFM_PWM Controller cooling fan motor Controls the controller cooling - - CN13 2 Mother
control fan motor RPM.
CPUFM_LD Controller cooling fan motor Detects the controller cooling - Lock CN13 4 Mother
lock fan motor lock. detected
CPFM_D Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section. Drive Stop CN4 9 PCU
[DC brushless motor]
CPFM_CK Paper feed motor control Controls the paper feed motor - - CN4 11 PCU PWM drive
RPM.
CPFM_LD Paper feed motor lock Detects the paper feed motor - Lock CN4 13 PCU
lock. detected
CSDH Cassette dehumidifying Dehumidifies paper.
heater
CV_CA Clear all signal [Coin vendor] Clean all Clear - CN17 6 PCU
CV_CLCOPY Copy enable signal (Color) Copy enable (Color) Copy - CN17 7 PCU
[Coin vendor] Enable
CV_COPY Copy enable signal Coy enable (Monochrome) Copy - CN17 3 PCU
(Monochrome) [Coin vendor] Enable
CV_COUNT Count-up signal Count-up Count UP - CN17 4 PCU
[Coin vendor]
CV_DUPLEX Print count identification Identifies the print count. DUPLEX - CN17 11 PCU
signal (Duplex mode) (Duplex mode)
[Coin Vendor]
CV_SIZE0 Paper size detection 0 Paper size 0 - - CN17 13 PCU
[Coin vendor]
[Coin vendor]
[Coin vendor]
[Coin vendor]
CV_STAPLE Staple mode signal Identifies presence of the STAPLE - CN17 9 PCU
[Coin vendor] staple mode.
CV_START Copy start signal Copy start status Start - CN17 5 PCU
[Coin vendor]
DHPD_C C phase detection Detects C phase. - Reference CN9 12 PCU
[Photo interrupter]
DHPD_K K phase detection Detects K phase. - Reference CN13 21 PCU
[Photo interrupter]
DHPD_M M phase detection Detects M phase. - Reference CN9 14 PCU
[Photo interrupter]
DHPD_Y Y phase detection Detects Y phase. - Reference CN9 16 PCU
[Photo interrupter]
DHS1 Scanner heater Keeps the heat in the scanner
unit.
DL_C Discharge lamp (C) [LED] Discharges the OFF ON CN7 3 PCU
photoconductor.
DL_K Discharge lamp (K) Discharges the OFF ON CN9 9 PCU
photoconductor.
DL_M Discharge lamp (M) [LED] Discharges the OFF ON CN7 19 PCU
photoconductor.
DL_Y Discharge lamp (Y) [LED] Discharges the OFF ON CN7 8 PCU
photoconductor.
DM_C Drum motor C Drives the cyan - - CN5 9, 10, Driver Drives with
[Stepping motor] photoconductor unit. 11, 12 4-phase signals.
DM_K Drum motor K Drives the black - - CN5 3, 4, 5, Driver Drives with
[Stepping motor] photoconductor unit. 6 4-phase signals.
DM_M Drum motor M Drives the magenta - - CN6 3, 4, 5, Driver Drives with
[Stepping motor] photoconductor unit. 6 4-phase signals.
DM_Y Drum motor Y Drives the yellow - - CN6 9, 10, Driver Drives with
[Stepping motor] photoconductor unit. 11, 12 4-phase signals.

DSPF COPY DSPF Copy lamp Radiates the lights onto a
LUMP [Xenon lamp] document for the CCD to
scan the document images.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close Detects open/close of the Open Close CN2 7 RD I/F
detection [Photo interrupter] duplex (ADU) cover.
DSW_D Right lower door open/close Detects open/close of the Open Close CN3 22 PCU
sensor [Photo interrupter] right lower door.
DSW-FL Front door lower open/close Detects open/close of the Open Close CN11 3 PCU
switch [Micro switch] front door lower.
DSW-FU Front door upper open/close Detects open/close of the Open Close CN1 1 PCU
switch [Micro switch] front door upper.
DSW-R Right door open/close switch Detects open/close of the Open Close CN2 4 PCU
[Micro switch] right door.
DVCM_D Developing drive motor CL Drives the developing section Drive Stop CN9 8 PCU
[DC brushless motor] (CL).
DVCM_CK Developing drive motor CL Controls the developing drive - - CN9 6 PCU PWM drive
control motor CL RPM.
DVCM_LD Developing drive motor CL Detects the developing drive - Lock CN9 10 PCU
lock motor CL lock. detected
DVKM_D Developing drive motor K Drives the developing section Drive Stop CN13 9 PCU
[DC brushless motor] (K). / Drives the primary
transfer belt separation.
DVKM_CK Developing drive motor K Controls the developing drive - - CN13 11 PCU PWM drive
control motor K RPM.
DVKM_LD Developing drive motor K Detects the developing drive - Lock CN13 13 PCU
lock motor K lock. detected
DVKM_GAIN Developing drive motor K Developing drive motor K Low High speed CN13 15 PCU
gain gain. speed
DVKM_CW/ Developing drive motor K Developing drive motor K CW CCW CN13 17 PCU
CCW rotating direction rotating direction
FUEXD External variable sensor Detects the position of the - Reference CN13 30 PCU
[Photo interrupter] separation mechanism of the
external heater of the fusing
section.
FEXM External variable motor Separates the external - - CN14 3, 13, PCU Drives with
[Stepping motor] heating roller of the fusing 15, 17, 4-phase signals.
unit. 19
FUFM_F Fusing cooling fan/ Toner Cools the fusing unit./ Cools Stop Drive CN12 1 PCU
bottle cooling fan the toner bottle.
FUFM_F_LD Fusing cooling fan lock Detects the fusing cooling fan - Lock CN12 3 PCU
lock. detected
FUFM_R Fusing duct fan Cools the fusing unit. Stop Drive CN13 2 PCU
FUFM_CNT Fusing duct fan control Controls the fusing duct fan - - CN10 14 PCU PWM drive
RPM.
FUFM_CNT2 Fusing cooling fan control Controls the fusing cooling - - CN13 10 PCU
fan RPM.
FUFM_R_LD Fusing duct fan lock Detects the fusing duct fan - Lock CN13 4 PCU
lock. detected
FUM_D Fusing motor Drives the fusing unit. Stop Drive CN14 9 PCU
FUM_CK Fusing motor control signal Controls the fusing motor - - CN14 7 PCU PWM drive
RPM.
FUM_LD Fusing motor lock Detects the fusing motor lock. - Lock CN14 11 PCU
detected
HDDFM HDD cooling fan motor Cools the HDD. Stop Drive CN17 1 Mother
HDDFM_PWM HDD cooling fan motor Controls the HDD cooling fan - - CN17 2 Mother PWM drive
control motor RPM.
HDDFM_LD HDD cooling fan motor lock Detects the HDD cooling fan - Lock CN17 4 Mother
motor lock. detected
HL_EX Heater lamp [Halogen lamp] Heats the external roller. OFF ON CN10 11 PCU
HL_LM Lower heater lamp Heats the lower heat roller. OFF ON CN10 9 PCU
[Halogen lamp]
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main Heats the upper heat roller OFF ON CN10 5 PCU
[Halogen lamp] (main).
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub Heats the upper heat roller OFF ON CN10 7 PCU
[Halogen lamp] (sub).
HTCS_C Hopper remaining quantity Detects the remaining Remaining Remaining CN10 17 PCU
sensor C [Oscillation sensor] quantity of toner in the toner quantity quantity
hopper. Large Small
HTCS_K Hopper remaining quantity Detects the remaining Remaining Remaining CN9 27 PCU
sensor K [Oscillation sensor] quantity of toner in the toner quantity quantity
hopper. Large Small

HTCS_M Hopper remaining quantity Detects the remaining Remaining Remaining CN10 16 PCU
sensor M [Oscillation sensor] quantity of toner in the toner quantity quantity
hopper. Large Small
HTCS_Y Hopper remaining quantity Detects the remaining Remaining Remaining CN10 18 PCU
sensor Y [Oscillation sensor] quantity of toner in the toner quantity quantity
hopper. Large Small
HTM_C Hopper motor C Transports toner. - - CN8 5, 7 Driver Drives with
[Synchronous motor] 2-phase signals.
HTM_K Hopper motor K Transports toner. - - CN8 6, 8 Driver Drives with
HTM_M Hopper motor M Transports toner. - - CN8 9, 11 Driver Drives with
HTM_Y Hopper motor Y Transports toner. - - CN8 2, 4 Driver Drives with
HUD_M/TH_M Temperature/humidity Detects the temperature and - - CN15 30, 32 PCU Analog
sensor [Temperature/ the humidity. detection
Humidity sensor]
LCCM LCC Transport motor Drives the LCC transport - - CN1 1, 2, 3, Driver Drives with
[Stepping motor] roller. 4 4-phase signals.
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN14 24 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] feed roller in the LCC paper
feed section.
LPPD LCC paper entry sensor Detects paper entry from the Pass - CN3 11 PCU
[Reflection sensor] LCC.
LSS_BK LSU shutter solenoid BK Opens and closes the LSU ON OFF CN8 38 PCU
[Electromagnetic solenoid] (BK) shutter.
LSS_CL LSU shutter solenoid CL Opens and closes the LSU ON OFF CN8 40 PCU
[Electromagnetic solenoid] (CL) shutter.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor Cools the polygon motor. Stop Drive CN2 1 LSU
nFANRDY LSU cooling fan motor lock Detects the LSU cooling fan - Lock CN2 2 LSU
MHPS Scanner home position Detects the scanner home - Home CN134 1 SCU
sensor [Photo interrupter] position. position
MIM Scanner motor Scanner (reading) section - - CN137 1, 2, 3, SCU
[Stepping motor] 4
MPED Manual paper presence Detects paper in the manual YES NO CN3 7 RD I/F
detection [Photo interrupter] paper feed tray.
MPFD Manual paper entry detection Detects paper entry from the Pass - CN15 24 PCU
[Photo interrupter] manual paper feed tray.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid Paper pickup solenoid Pickup - CN15 38 PCU
(Manual paper feed) (manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate Controls open/close of the ON OFF CN15 36 PCU
solenoid manual feed gate.
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length Detects the paper length of Detection - CN3 16 RD I/F
detector [Photo interrupter] the manual paper feed tray.
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN14 20 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] feed roller in the manual
paper feed section.
MPWS Manual paper feed tray Detects the width of paper in - - CN15 28 PCU Analog
paper width detector the manual paper feed tray. detection
[Volume resistor]
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull- Detects the pull-out position - Storing CN3 25 RD I/F
out position detector 1 (storing position) of paper in position
[Photo interrupter] the manual paper feed tray.
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull- Detects the pull-out position - Puling out CN3 22 RD I/F
out position detector 2 (storing position) of paper in position
[Photo interrupter] the manual paper feed tray.
OCSW Original cover SW Document size detection Close Open CN136 3 SCU
[Photo interrupter] trigger
OZFM1 Ozone fan motor 1 Exhausts ozone. Stop Drive CN 7 20 PCU
OZFM_CNT Ozone fan motor control 1 Controls the ozone fan motor - - CN7 22, 23 PCU PWM drive
1 and 2 RPM.
OZFM_CNT2 Ozone fan motor control 2 Controls the ozone fan motor - - CN19 16 PCU PWM drive
3 RPM.
OZFM_LD1 Ozone fan motor 1 lock Detects the ozone fan motor 1 - Lock CN7 26 PCU
lock. detected
lock. detected
lock. detected

PCS_CL/ Process control sensor PWB Detects the toner patch - - CN8 25, 26 PCU Analog
PCS_K [Toner density sensor] density. detection
PCSS Process control shutter Opens and closes the shutter Open Close CN8 36 PCU
solenoid of the process control and the
[Electromagnetic solenoid] register sensor.
PFM PS front transport motor Drives the transport roller. - - CN9 3, 4, 5, Driver Drives with
PHTM_K1 Intermediate hopper motor 1 Transports toner. - - CN2 2, 3 DVK_
[Synchronous motor] Driver
PHTM_K2 Intermediate hopper motor 2 Transports toner. - - CN2 4, 5 DVK_
[Synchronous motor] Driver
PNC_B Personal counter signal B Outputs the count UP signal. Count UP - CN7 29 PCU
PNC_C Personal counter signal C Outputs the count UP signal. Count UP - CN7 30 PCU
PO_TMP Paper exit temperature Detects the temperature. - - CN15 12 PCU Analog
detection detection
[Temperature sensor]
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects paper from the fusing - Pass CN13 36 PCU
[Photo interrupter] section.
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects paper exit. Pass - CN15 8 PCU
[Photo interrupter]
POD3 Right tray paper exit Detects paper exit to the right Pass - CN15 22 PCU
detection [Photo interrupter] tray.
POFM Paper exit cooling fan motor Cools the fusing unit. Stop Drive CN15 1 PCU
(F side/ Center)
POFM_CNT1 Paper exit cooling fan motor Controls the paper exit - - CN15 3 PCU PWM drive
(F side) control cooling fan motor (F side)
RPM.
POFM_CNT2 Paper exit cooling fan motor Controls the paper exit - - CN15 13 PCU PWM drive
(Center) control cooling fan motor (center)
RPM.
POFM_F_LD Paper exit cooling fan motor Detects the paper exit cooling - Lock CN15 7 PCU
(F side) lock fan motor (F side) lock. detected
POFM_U_LD Paper exit cooling fan motor Detects the paper exit cooling - Lock CN15 9 PCU
(Center) lock fan motor (center) lock. detected
POLY_START Polygon motor Scans laser beams. Drive Stop CN8 3 LSU
POLY_CL Polygon motor control Controls the polygon motor - - CN8 5 LSU
RPM.
POLY_LOCK Polygon motor lock Detects the polygon motor - Lock CN8 4 LSU
lock. detected
BRAKE Polygon motor brake Polygon motor brake Break - CN8 6 LSU
POM Paper exit motor Drives the paper exit roller. - - CN4 1, 2, 3, Driver Drives with
PPD1 Resist front detection (PPD1) Detects paper in front of the Pass - CN14 23 PCU
[Photo interrupter] resist roller.
PPD2 Resist detection (PPD2) Detects paper at the rear of Pass - CN14 25 PCU
[Reflection type sensor] the resist roller.
PSFM1 Power cooling fan motor 1 Cools the power unit. Stop Drive CN6 29 PCU
PSFM2 Power cooling fan motor 2 Cools the power unit. Stop Drive CN6 30 PCU
PSFM1_LD Power cooling fan motor 1 Detects the power cooling fan - Lock CN6 31 PCU
lock motor 1 lock. detected
PSFM2_LD Power cooling fan motor 2 Detects the power cooling fan - Lock CN6 32 PCU
lock motor 2 lock. detected
PTCM PTC cleaner motor Cleans the PTC. - - CN18 25, 27 PCU Normal/reverse
[Brush motor] rotation with
2-phase.
PTCM_HP PTC unit inside sensor Detects the home position of - HOME CN18 22 PCU
[Leaf switch] the PTC cleaner.
REG R Resist sensor PWB R Detects the toner patch - - CN8 PCU Analog
[Reflection type sensor] (R side). detection
REG_F Resist sensor PWB F Detects the toner patch - - CN8 21 PCU Analog
[Reflection type sensor] (F side). detection
RRC PS clutch Controls ON/OFF of the resist ON OFF CN14 10 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] roller.
RRC2 PS clutch 2 Resist roller braking ON OFF CN14 29 PCU
RRM_D PC motor Drives the transport roller. Drive Stop CN14 14 PCU
RRM_CK PS motor control Controls the PS motor RPM. - - CN14 12 PCU PWM drive
RRM_LD PS motor lock Detects the PS motor lock. - Lock CN14 16 PCU
detected
SCOV DSPF upper door open/close Detects open/close of the Open SCU
sensor [Transmission type] upper door.

SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close Detects open/close of the Open SCU
sensor [Micro switch] lower door.
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor Lifts up or moves down the SCU
[PM stepper motor] paper feed tray.
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor Detects open/close of the Open SCU
[Transmission type] DSPF unit.
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit Detects the upper limit of the When SCU
sensor [Transmission type] DSPF document. paper is
detected
SPED2 DSPF document empty Detects document in the When SCU
sensor [Transmission type] paper feed tray. paper is
detected
SPFC DSPF paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper SCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] feed section roller.
SPFFAN DSPF cooling fan motor Cools the motor and the SCU
[DC brushless motor] clutch.
SPFM DSPF transport motor Drives the transport roller. SCU
[Hybrid stepper motor]
SPLS1 DSPF document length Detects the length of When SCU
detection short sensor document in the paper feed paper is
[Transmission type] tray. detected
SPLS2 DSPF document length Detects the length of When SCU
detection long sensor document in the paper feed paper is
[Transmission type] tray. detected
SPOD DSPF paper exit sensor Detects paper exit. When SCU
[Transmission type] paper is
detected
SPOM DSPF paper exit motor Drives the paper exit roller. SCU
[PM stepper motor]
SPPD1 DSPF paper pass sensor 1 Detects paper pass. When SCU
detected
detected
detected
detected
detected
SPRDMD DSPF document random Detects the paper size in When SCU
sensor [Transmission type] random paper feed. paper is
detected
SPUM DSPF paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section SCU
[Hybrid stepper motor] roller and the transport roller.
SPWS DSPF document width Detects the width of SCU
sensor [Volume resistor] document in the paper feed
tray.
SRRBC DSPF No. 2 resist roller No. 2 resist roller braking SCU
brake clutch
SRRC DSPF No. 2 resist roller Controls ON/OFF of No. 2 SCU
clutch resist roller.
STLD DSPF paper feed tray lower Detects the lower limit of the Lower limit SCU
limit sensor paper feed tray.
[Transmission type]
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of the SCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller 1.
STRRBC DSPF No. 1 resist roller No. 1 resist roller braking SCU
brake clutch
STRRC DSPF No. 1 resist roller Controls ON/OFF of No. 1 SCU
clutch [Electromagnetic resist roller.
clutch]
STUD DSPF paper feed tray upper Detects the upper limit of the Upper limit SCU
limit sensor paper feed tray.
[Transmission type]
T1LUD Tandem tray 1 sensor Detects lift-up of the tandem Upper limit - CN5 23 PCU

T1PED Tandem tray 1 sensor Detects paper in the tandem Paper NO Paper YES CN5 25 PCU
T1LUM Paper tray lift-up motor Drives the paper tray lift. Stop UP CN6 17 PCU
(Tandem tray 2)
[Brush motor]
T1PFC Tandem tray 1 paper feed Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN4 12 PCU
clutch feed tray in the tandem tray 1
[Electromagnetic clutch] paper feed section.
T1PPD1 Tandem tray 1 transport Detects paper entry of Pass - CN5 21 PCU
sensor 1 tandem tray 1.
[Reflection type sensor]
T1PPD2 Tandem tray 1 transport Detects the tandem tray 1 Pass - CN5 17 PCU
sensor 2 paper pass in the transport
[Reflection type sensor] roller.
T1PUS Paper pickup solenoid Paper pickup solenoid ON OFF CN5 33 PCU
(Tandem tray 1) (Tandem tray 1)
T1SPD Tandem tray 1 paper Detects the remaining - Remaining CN5 29 PCU
remaining quantity detector quantity of paper in the quantity
[Photo interrupter] tandem tray 1. 66% or
less
T2LUD Tandem tray 2 sensor Detects the tandem tray 2 lift- Upper limit - CN5 13 PCU
[Photo interrupter] up.
T2PED Tandem tray 2 sensor Detects paper in the tandem Paper NO Paper YES CN5 15 PCU
T2LUM Paper tray lift-up motor Drives the paper feed tray lift. Stop UP CN6 13 PCU
(Tandem tray 2)
[Brush motor]
T2PFC Tandem tray 2 paper feed Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN4 10 PCU
clutch feed roller in the tandem tray
[Electromagnetic clutch] 2 paper feed section.
T2PPD Tandem tray 2 transport Detects paper pass from the Pass - CN3 9 PCU
detection tandem tray 2.
[Reflection type sensor]
T2PUS Paper pickup solenoid Paper pickup solenoid ON OFF CN5 14 PCU
(Tandem tray 2) (Tandem tray 2)
T2SPD Tandem tray 2 paper Detects the remaining - Remaining CN5 27 PCU
quantity detector [Photo quantity of paper in the quantity
interrupter] tandem tray 2. 66% or
less
TANCL Tandem tray transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN4 8 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller in the tandem
tray section.
TANDH Tandem tray dehumidifying Dehumidifies paper.
heater
TANSET Tandem tray installation Detects insertion and removal Pull our Insertion CN3 32 PCU
detection [Photo interrupter] of the tandem tray.
TBBOX Waste toner box sensor Detects installation of the NO Install CN8 28 PCU
[Photo interrupter] waste toner box.
TBLTB Transfer belt separation Detects the transfer belt - BK position CN15 4 PCU
sensor BK [Photo interrupter] separation BK.
TBLTC Transfer belt separation Detects the transfer belt CL - CN9 18 PCU
sensor Cl [Photo interrupter] separation CL. position
TCS_C Toner density detection C Detects the toner density (C). - - CN7 7 PCU Analog
(ATC) [Permeable sensor] detection
TCS_K Toner density detection K Detects the toner density (K). - - CN9 19 PCU Analog
TCS_M Toner density detection M Detects the toner density (M). - - CN7 23 PCU Analog
TCS_Y Toner density detection Y Detects the toner density (Y). - - CN7 12 PCU Analog
TFD Main unit paper exit full Detects the full state of the Full - CN15 4 PCU
detection [Photo interrupter] face-down paper exit tray.
TFD_R Right tray paper exit full Detects the full state of the Full - CN2 1 RD I/F
detection [Photo interrupter] right tray paper exit.
TH_EX1 Contact thermistor EX1 Detects the temperature of - - CN12 14 PCU Analog
(External 1) the heat roller. detection
TH_EX2 Contact thermistor EX2 Detects the temperature of - - CN12 16 PCU Analog
(External 2) the heat roller. detection
TH_LM Contact thermistor (Lower Detects the temperature of - - CN12 12 PCU Analog
main) the heat roller. detection
TH_M Manual feed temperature Detects the temperature of - - CN15 30 PCU Analog
detection the manual feed tray and its detection
peripheral sections.

TH_UM Contact thermistor UM Detects the temperature of - - CN12 8 PCU Analog
(Upper Main) the heat roller. detection
TH_US Contact thermistor US Detects the temperature of - - CN12 10 PCU Analog
(Upper Sub) the heat roller. detection
TH1 LSU thermistor 1 Detects the temperature of - - CN8 11 PCU Analog
[Temperature sensor] the LSU. detection
TH1_AD1/AD2 Non-contact thermistor Detects the temperature of - - CN12 16/2 PCU Analog
(Upper Main) the heat roller. detection
TH2 LSU thermistor 2 Detects the temperature of - - CN8 12 PCU Analog
[Temperature sensor] the LSU. detection
THPS Secondary transfer Detects separation of - Contact CN18 8 PCU
separation drive sensor secondary transfer.
[Photo interrupter]
TM_C Toner motor C Transports toner from the - - CN10 27, 28 PCU Drives with
[Synchronous motor] toner cartridge to the 2-phase signals.
developing unit.
TM_K1 Toner motor K1 Transports toner from the - - CN10 23, 25 PCU Drives with
developing unit.
TM_K2 Toner motor K2 Transports toner from the - - CN10 19, 21 PCU Drives with
developing unit.
TM_M Toner motor M Transports toner from the - - CN10 20, 22 PCU Drives with
developing unit.
TM_Y Toner motor Y Transports toner from the - - CN10 24, 26 PCU Drives with
developing unit.
TNFD Waste toner full detection Detects the full state of waste - Full CN3 30 PCU
[Photo interrupter] toner.
TRC1 Vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the ON OFF CN4 6 PCU
upper vertical transport roller.
TRC2 Vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the ON OFF CN3 10 PCU
lower vertical transport roller.
TURM Secondary transfer Performs separation in the Stop Separation/ CN18 6 PCU
separation drive motor secondary transfer. Contact
[Brush motor]
VFM_C Machine inside ventilation Exhausts air from the Drive Stop CN19 1 PCU
fan motor (Center) machine.
VFM_C_LD Machine inside ventilation Detects the machine inside - Lock CN18 29 PCU
fan motor (Center) lock ventilation fan motor (center) detected
lock.
VFM_R Machine inside ventilation Exhausts air from the Stop Drive CN15 15 PCU
fan motor (Right) machine.
VFM_R_CNT Machine inside ventilation Controls the machine inside - - CN15 17 PCU PWM drive
fan motor (Right) control ventilation fan motor (right)
RPM.
VFM_R_LD Machine inside ventilation Detects the machine inside - Lock CN15 20 PCU
fan motor (Right) lock ventilation fan motor (right) detected
lock.
VTOD Right transport unit open/ Detects open/close of the Open Close CN3 20 PCU
close sensor right transport unit.
[Photo interrupter]
WEB_END Web end sensor Detects the web end. END - CN12 9 PCU
[Mechanical switch] Detection
WEB_INL Web presence detection Detects presence of the web. YES NO CN12 11 PCU
[Mechanical switch]
WEBM Fusing web cleaning motor Drives the fusing web - - CN8 10, 12 Driver Drives with
[Synchronous motor] cleaning paper. 2-phase signals.
WH_SW Dehumidifying heater SW Controls ON/OFF of the
[Seesaw switch] power of the dehumidifying
heater.
WTM_D Waste toner drive motor Stirs waste toner. Drive Stop CN3 18 PCU
WTM_CLK Waste toner drive motor Controls the waste toner drive - - CN3 16 PCU PWM drive
[DC brushless motor] motor RPM.
WTM_LD Waste toner drive motor lock Detects the waste toner drive - Lock CN3 12 PCU

A. Combination of cassette paper size detection SW pattern and volume detection width
* SW numbers 1 o 4: When viewed from the front.
(1) Tray 3 (2) Tray 4
a. AB series a. AB series
Width detection C4 Rear edge detection SW

C3 Rear edge detection SW volume paper width SS1 SS2 SS3 SS4
(mm) A3W H L H L
SS1 SS2 SS3 SS4 MIN MAX A3 H L L L
A3W H L H L 299 309 A4 L L H L
A3 H L L L 291 303 A4R L H L H
A4 L L H L 291 303 B4 H L L H
A4R L H L H 204 216 B5 L L H H
B4 H L L H 251 263 B5R L H H L
B5 L L H H 251 263 8.5 x 13 L L L H
B5R L H H L 176 188 8.5 x 11R L H L L
A5R L L H L 142.5 154.5 Tray not-installed H H H H
11 x 17 H L L L 273.4 285.4
8.5 x 14 H L L H 209.9 221.9
8.5 x 13 L L L H 209.9 221.9 b. Inch series
8.5 x 11 L L H L 273.4 285.4
8.5 x 11R L H L L 209.9 221.9 C4 Rear edge detection SW
Tray not- SS1 SS2 SS3 SS4
H H H H - - A3W H L H L
installed
A4R L H L H
B5 L L H H
b. Inch series 11 x 17 H L L L
8.5 x 14 H L L H
Width detection 8.5 x 13 L L L H
C3 Rear edge detection SW volume paper width
8.5 x 11 L L H L
(mm)
8.5 x 11R L H L L
SS1 SS2 SS3 SS4 MIN MAX
7.25 x 10.5R L H H L
A3W H L H L 299 309
Tray not- H H H H
A3 H L L L 291 303
installed
A4 L L H L 291 303
A4R L H L H 204 216
B4 H L L H 251 263 c. China series
B5 L L H H 251 263
11 x 17 H L L L 273.4 285.4 C4 Rear edge detection SW
8.5 x 14 H L L H 209.9 221.9 SS1 SS2 SS3 SS4
8.5 x 13 L L L H 209.9 221.9 A3W H L H L
8.5 x 11 L L H L 273.4 285.4 A3 H L L L
8.5 x 11R L H L L 209.9 221.9 A4R L H L H
7.25 x 10.5R L H H L 178.1 190.1 8.5 x 13 L L L H
5.5 x 8.5R L L H L 133.7 145.7 8K H L L H
Tray not- H H H H - - 16K L L H H
installed L L H L
16KR L H H L
L H L L
c. China series Tray not- H H H H
installed
Width detection
C3 Rear edge detection SW volume paper width
(mm)
SS1 SS2 SS3 SS4 MIN MAX
A3W H L H L 299 309
A3 H L L L 291 303
A4 L L H L 291 303
A4R L H L H 204 216
A5R L L H L 142.5 154.5
8.5 x 13 L L L H 209.9 221.9
8K H L L H 264 276
16K L L H H 264 276
L L H L 264 276
16KR L H H L 189 201
L H L L 189 201
Tray not- H H H H - -
installed

[12] OTHERS
MX-7000N (3) Operation settings
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Setting item Factory default setting

1. System settings (Administrator) zOther Settings
XKeys Touch Sound Middle
A. Login Key Touch Sound at Initial Point Disabled
(1) When user authentication is not enabled XAuto Clear Setting 60 sec.
Cancel Auto Clear Timer Disabled
1) Press [Admin Password] key.
XMessage Time Setting 6 sec.
2) Press [Password] text box and enter the administrator pass- XDisplay Language Setting American English
word. XDisabling of Job Priority Operation Disabled
3) Press [OK] key. XDisabling of Bypass Printing Disabled
XKey Operation Setting 0.0 sec.
(2) When user authentication is enabled
Disable Auto Key Repeat Disabled
a. When user authentication is by login name and password XDisabling of Clock Adjustment Disabled
(and e-mail address) XDisabling of Covers/Inserts Mode Disabled
1) Press [Admin Login] key. zCustomize Key Setting *1
2) Press [Password] key, and enter the administrator password. XCopy
Customize 1 File
3) Press [OK] key.
Customize 2 Quick File
b. Login by user number Customize 3
1) Press [Admin Login] key, and enter the administrator pass- XScan
word. Customize 1 Address Review
Customize 2 File
B. System settings (Administrator) list Customize 3 Quick File
(1) User control XInternet Fax *2
(Same as Scan)
Setting item Factory default setting XFax *3
zUser Authentication Setting (Same as Scan)
XUser Authentication Disabled XUSB Memory Scan
XAuthentication Method Setting Authenticate a User by Customize 1
Login Name and Customize 2
Password Customize 3
XDevice Account Mode Setting Disabled XData Entry *4
zOther Settings (Same as Scan)
XActions when the Limit of Pages for Job is Stopped when the zHome Screen Settings *1
Output Jobs Limit of Pages is Reached zDisplay Pattern Setting Following the System
XThe Number of User Name Displayed 12 Settings
Setting on Operation Panel
*1: This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in the system
XA Warning when Login Fails Disabled
settings in the Web pages.
XDisabling of Printing by Invalid User Disabled
XDefault Network Authentication Server *2: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
Setting *3: When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
XUser Information Print *4: When the application integration module is installed.
zUser List
zPage Limit Group List
(4) Device control
zAuthority Group List
zFavorite Operation Group List *
zOther Settings
XFavorite Operation Group Registration *
XOriginal Feeding Mode All Disabled
XHome Screen List *
XSaddle Stitch Position Adjust *1 0.0 mm
zUser Count
XAuto Paper Selection Setting Plain Paper
*: This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in "User Control" in XTandem Connection Setting
the Web pages. IP Address of Slave Machine 0.0.0.0
(2) Energy save Port Number 50001
Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disabled
Setting item Factory default setting Disabling of Slave Machine Mode Disabled
zToner Save Mode XDetect Standard in Auto Color Mode 3
XPrint Disabled XAuto Switching of Finisher Trays Enabled
XCopy Disabled XRegistration Adjustment
zAuto Power Shut-Off Enabled XOptimization of a Hard Disk
zAuto Power Shut-Off Timer 90 min. XClear All Job Log Data
zPreheat Mode Setting 15 min. zOriginal Size Detector Setting
XOriginal Detection Size Combination Inch-1
XCancel Detection at Document Glass Disabled
zDisabling of Devices
XDisabling of Document Feeder Disabled
XDisabling of Duplex Disabled
XDisabling of Large Capacity Cassette *2 Disabled
XDisabling of Tray Setting Disabled
XDisabling of Finisher *3 Disabled
XDisabling of Inserter *4 Disabled
XDisabling of Offset Disabled
MX-7000N OTHERS 12 1
Setting item Factory default setting (7) Printer settings
XDisabling of Stapler *3 Disabled
XDisabling of Punch *5 Disabled Setting item Factory default setting
XDisabling of Color Mode *6 Disabled zDefault Settings
zFusing Control Settings 16 - 24 lbs. (60 - 90g/m2) XProhibit Notice Page Printing Enabled
XProhibit Test Page Printing Disabled
*1: When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
XA4/Letter Size Auto Change Disabled
*2: When a large capacity tray is installed. XPrint Density Level
*3: When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed. Color 3
*4: When an inserter is installed. Black & White 3
*5: When a punch module is installed. XBypass Tray Settings
Enable Detected Paper Size in Disabled
*6: When a color-related problem has occurred.
Bypass Tray
(5) Copy function settings Enable Selected Paper Type in Enabled
Bypass Tray
Setting item Factory default setting Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Disabled
zInitial Status Settings Paper Select
XColor Mode Full Color X Job Spool Queuing Enabled
XPaper Tray Varies depending on the zInterface Settings
machine configuration XHexadecimal Dump Mode Disabled
XExposure Type Auto XI/O Timeout 60 sec.
XCopy Ratio 100% XEnable USB Port Enabled
X2-Sided Copy 1-Side to 1-Side XUSB Port Emulation Switching Auto
XOutput XEnable Network Port Enabled
zOther Settings XNetwork Port Emulation Switching Auto
XCopy Exposure Adjustment XPort Switching Method Switch at End of Job
Color 5 zAuto Color Calibration
Black & White 5 (8) Image send settings
XRotation Copy Setting Enabled
XAdd or Change Extra Preset Ratios Setting item Factory default setting
XSetting a Maximum Number of Copies 999 zOperation Settings
XInitial Margin Shift Setting XOther Settings
Side 1 1/2" Default Display Settings Scan (fax when fax is
Side 2 1/2" installed)
XErase Width Adjustment Hold settings for a while after Disabled
Edge Clearance Width 1/2" scanning has been completed
Center Clearance Width 1/2" Switch Automatically to Copy Enabled
XCard Shot Settings Mode Screen
Original Size X: 3-3/8", Y: 2-1/8" Initial Resolution Setting
Fit to Page Disabled Apply the Resolution Set when Disabled
XAutomatic Saddle Stitch * Enabled Stored
XInitial Tab Copy Setting 1/2" Scan 200 X 200 dpi
XDisabling Deletion of Job Programs Disabled Internet Fax *1 200 X 100 dpi
XDisabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy Disabled Fax *2 Standard
XDisabling of Auto Paper Selection Disabled Default Exposure Settings Auto
XAuto Selection Setting of Tray that is Disabled Original Image Type Text
Supplied the Paper Moir Reduction Disabled
XB/W 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning Mode for Disabled Must Input Next Address Key at Disabled
Document Feeder Broadcast Setting
XB/W Quick Scan from Document Glass Enabled Scan Complete Sound Setting Middle
zColor Adjustments The Number of File Name/Subject/ 12
XInitial Color Balance Setting Factory default state Body Keys Displayed Setting
XAuto Color Calibration The Number of Direct Address Keys 10
Displayed Setting
*: When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
Disable Switching of Display Order Disabled
(6) Network settings Hold Setting for Received Data Print Disabled
XSettings to Disable Registration
Setting item Factory default setting Disable Registering Destination from Disabled
zIP Address Setting DHCP Operation Panel
zEnable TCP/IP Enabled Disable Registering Destination on Disabled
zEnable NetWare Enabled Web Page *3
zEnable EtherTalk Enabled Disable Registration Using Network Disabled
zEnable NetBEUI Enabled Scanner Tool *3
zReset the NIC XSettings to Disable Transmission
zPing Command Disable [Resend] on Image Send Disabled
Mode
Disable Selection From Address Disabled
Book
Disable Direct Entry Disabled
Disable PC-Internet Fax Disabled
Transmission *1
Disable PC-Fax Transmission *2 Disabled
zScan Settings
XOther Settings
Setting item Factory default setting (9) Document filing settings
Default Sender Set
Default Color Mode Settings Setting item Factory default setting
Black & White Mono 2 zOther Settings
Color Mode Auto, Grayscale XDefault Mode Settings Sharing Mode
Disable Change of B/W Setting in Disabled XSort Method Setting Date
Auto Mode XAdministrator Authority Setting
Initial File Format Setting Delete File Disabled
File Type PDF Delete Folder Disabled
Black & White MMR (G4) XDelete All Quick Files
Color/Grayscale Medium Delete
Specified Pages per File Disabled Delete quick files at power up Enabled
Compression Mode at Broadcasting (protected files excluded)
Black & White MH (G3) XDefault Color Mode Settings
Color/Grayscale Medium Color Auto
Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments Unlimited Black & White Mono 2
(E-mail) XDefault Exposure Settings Auto
Maximum Size of Data Attachments Unlimited Original Image Type Text
(FTP/Desktop/Network Folder) Moir Reduction Disabled
Bcc Setting XInitial Resolution Settings 600 x 600 dpi
Enable Bcc Disabled XColor Data Compression Ratio Setting Medium
Display Bcc Address on the Job Disabled XDefault Output Tray Varies depending on the
Status Screen machine configuration
Disable Scan Function XScan Complete Sound Setting Middle
USB Memory Scan Disabled XDisable Stamp for Reprinting Disabled
PC Scan Disabled XBatch Print Settings
Pre-Setting Mail Signature Disabled Selection of [All Users] is not allowed. Enabled
XDefault Address Setting Disabled Selection of [User Unknown] is not Enabled
zInternet Fax Settings *1 allowed.
XInternet Fax Default Settings zDocument Output Options
Internet Fax Own Name and Address XPrint
Set Copy Enabled
Auto Wake Up Print Enabled Print Enabled
Compression Setting MH (G3) Scan Send Disabled
Speaker Volume Setting Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-Internet Disabled
Receive Signal Middle Fax)
Communication Error Signal Middle Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Disabled
Original Print on Transaction Report Print Out Error Report Scan to HDD Enabled
Only XScan Send
Transaction Report Print Select Setting Copy Disabled
Single Sending Print Out Error Report Scan Send Enabled
Only Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-Internet Disabled
Broadcasting Print Out All Report Fax)
Receiving No Printed Report Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Disabled
Activity Report Print Select Setting Scan to HDD Enabled
Auto Print at Memory Full Disabled XInternet Fax Send *1
Print Daily at Designated Time Disabled Copy Disabled
Body Text Print Select Setting Disabled Scan Send Disabled
Pre-Setting Mail Signature Disabled Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-Internet Enabled
XInternet Fax Send Settings Fax)
Internet Fax Reception Report On/Off Disabled Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Disabled
Setting Scan to HDD Disabled
Internet Fax Reception Report 1 hour XFax Send *2
Request Timeout Setting Copy Disabled
Number of Resend Times at 2 Scan Send Disabled
Reception Error Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-Internet Disabled
Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments Unlimited Fax)
Rotation Sending Setting All Enabled Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Enabled
Printing Page Number at Receiver Enabled Scan to HDD Disabled
XInternet Fax Receive Settings *1: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
Auto Receive Reduce Setting Enabled
*2: When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
Duplex Reception Setting Disabled
Set Address for Data Forwarding (10) List print (Administrator)
A3 RX Reduce Disabled
POP3 Communication Timeout 60 sec. Setting item Factory default setting
Setting zAdministrator Settings List
Reception Check Interval Setting 5 min. zImage Sending Activity Report
Internet Fax Output Setting Varies depending on the zData Receive/Forward List
machine configuration zWeb Settings List *1
XAnti Junk Mail/Domain Name Setting All Invalid zMetadata Set List *2
*1: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed. *1: When network connection is enabled.
*2: When the facsimile expansion kit is installed. *2: When the application integration module is installed.
*3: When network connection is enabled.
(11) Security settings *1: When a large capacity tray is installed.
*2: When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.
*3: When an inserter is installed.
zSetting of SSL
XHTTPS Disabled *4: When a punch module is installed.
XIPP-SSL Disabled *5: When a color-related problem has occurred.
XFTPS Disabled *6: When network connection is enabled.
XSMTP-SSL Disabled *7: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
XPOP3-SSL Disabled
*8: When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
XLevel of Encryption Disabled
(12) Enable/disable settings (13) Change Administrator password
Setting item Factory default account Factory default password

User users users
zUser Control
Administrator admin admin
XDisabling of Printing by Invalid User Disabled
zOperation Settings (14) Product key
XCancel Auto Clear Timer Disabled
XDisabling of Job Priority Operation Disabled Setting item Factory default setting
XDisabling of Bypass Printing Disabled zPS3 Expansion Kit
XDisable Auto Key Repeat Disabled zInternet Fax Expansion Kit
XDisabling of Clock Adjustment Disabled zE-mail Alert and Status
XDisabling of Covers/Inserts Mode Disabled zApplication Integration Module
zDevice Control zSerial Number
XDisabling of Document Feeder Disabled * It may not be possible to use some settings, depending on the
XDisabling of Duplex Disabled peripheral devices installed.
XDisabling of Large Capacity Cassette *1 Disabled
(15) Initialize and/or store settings
XDisabling of Tray Setting Disabled
XDisabling of Finisher *2 Disabled
XDisabling of Inserter *3 Disabled
zRestore Factory Defaults
XDisabling of Offset Disabled
zStore Current Configuration
XDisabling of Stapler *2 Disabled
zRestore Configuration
XDisabling of Punch *4 Disabled
XDisabling of Color Mode *5 Disabled
XDisabling of Master Machine Mode Disabled
2. Paper JAM code
XDisabling of Slave Machine Mode Disabled A. JAM cause code list
zCopy Function Settings
XDisabling Deletion of Job Programs Disabled (1) PCU JAM cause
XDisabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy Disabled
XDisabling of Auto Paper Selection Disabled Code Code content
zPrinter Settings NO_JAM_CAUSE No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
XProhibit Notice Page Printing Enabled NO_MATCH Parameter no matching
XProhibit Test Page Printing Disabled STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
XExclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Disabled TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed JAM (T1PPD1 not-reached JAM)
Select CPFD1_S1 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
zImage Send Settings CPFD1_N2 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
XOther Disabling CPFD1_N3 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
Disable Switching of Display Order Disabled CPFD1_N4 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Disable Scan Function CPFD1_S2 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
USB Memory Scan Disabled CPFD1_S3 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PC Scan Disabled CPFD1_S4 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
XSettings to Disable Registration TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed JAM (T2PPD not-reached JAM)
Disable Registering Destination from Disabled CPFD2_N3 CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
Operation Panel CPFD2_N4 CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Disable Registering Destination on Disabled CPFD2_S2 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
Web Page *6 CPFD2_S3 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
Disable Registration Using Network Disabled CPFD2_S4 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Scanner Tools *6 PPD1_N1 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
XSettings to Disable Transmission PPD1_N2 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
Disable [Resend] on Image Send Disabled PPD1_N3 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
Mode PPD1_N4 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Disable Selection from Address Book Disabled PPD1_NM PPD1 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed
Disable Direct Entry Disabled paper)
Disable PC-Internet Fax Disabled PPD1_NL PPD1 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
Transmission *7 PPD1_NA PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
Disable PC-Fax Transmission *8 Disabled PPD1_S1 PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
zDocument Filing Settings PPD1_S2 PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
XDisable Stamp for Reprinting Disabled PPD1_S3 PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
XBatch Print Settings PPD1_S4 PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Selection of [All Users] is not allowed. Enabled PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
Selection of [User Unknown] is not Enabled PPD1_SL PPD1 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
allowed. PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2_N1 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD2_N2 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
Code Code content Code Code content
PPD2_N3 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) H_SEN_SB Inserter reverse sensor remaining JAM (when
PPD2_N4 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) discharging from the reverse path)
PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed TBH_SEN_NF Inserter tab sheet reverse sensor not-reached JAM
paper) (when entering the reverse path)
PPD2_NL PPD2 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper) TBH_SEN_NB Inserter tab paper sheet reverse sensor not-reached
PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper) JAM (when discharging from the reverse path)
PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper) TBH_SEN_SF Inserter tab sheet reverse sensor not-reached JAM
PPD2_S2 PPD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper) (when entering the reverse path)
PPD2_S3 PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) TBH_SEN_SB Inserter tab sheet reverse sensor not-reached JAM
(when discharging from the reverse path)
PPD2_S4 PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
FHS_N Finisher paper exit not-reached JAM
PPD2_SM PPD2 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
FHS_S Finisher paper exit remaining JAM
PPD2_SL PPD2 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
FSFS_N Finisher saddle transport not-reached JAM
PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
FSFS_S Finisher saddle transport remaining JAM
PPD2_PRI PPD2 JAM (Image preparation wait timeout)
FSHS_N Finisher saddle paper exit not-reached JAM
POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM
FSHS_S Finisher saddle paper exit remaining JAM
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM
INS_EJCT Inserter not-delivered JAM
T1PPD1_S1 T1PPD1 remaining JAM (Tray 1 paper feed paper)
T1PPD2_N1 T1PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 1 paper feed paper)
T1PPD2_S1 T1 PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 1 paper feed paper)
T2PPD_N3 T2PPD not-reached JAM (Cassette 3 paper feed
APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM
paper)
APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM
T2PPD_N4 T2PPD not-reached JAM (Cassette 4 paper feed
APPD2_N APPD2 not-reached JAM
paper)
APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM
T2PPD_S2 T2PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 2 paper feed paper)
TRAY3 Cassette 3 paper feed JAM (C3PFD not-reached
T2PPD_S3 T2PPD remaining JAM (Cassette 3 paper feed
JAM)
paper)
DPFD1_N4 DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
T2PPD_S4 T2PPD remaining JAM (Cassette 4 paper feed
DPFD1_S3 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) paper)
DPFD1_S4 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) C3PFD_N4 C3PFD not-reached JAM (Cassette 4 paper feed
TRAY4 Cassette 4 paper feed JAM (C4PFD not-reached paper)
JAM) C3PFD_S3 C3PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 3 paper feed
DPFD2_S4 DPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) paper)
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (MPFD not- C3PFD_S4 C3PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 4 paper feed
reached) paper)
MPFD_S MPFD remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper) C4PFD_S4 C4PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 4 paper feed
LCC Side LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD1 not-reached) paper)
LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper) LPPD_NL LPPD not-reached JAM (Side LCC paper feed paper)
SIZE_ILG Size illegal JAM LPPD_SL LPPD remaining JAM (Side LCC paper feed paper)
MTR_ILG Motor driver trouble JAM (2) SCU JAM cause
FJPID_N Interface transport inlet sensor not-reached JAM
FJPID_S Interface transport inlet sensor remaining JAM Code Code content
FJPOD_N Interface transport outlet sensor not-reached JAM NO_JAM_CAUSE No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
FJPOD_S Interface transport outlet sensor remaining JAM NO_MATCH Parameter no matching
FED_N Finisher inlet sensor not-reached JAM STOP_JAM Emergency stop JAM (Controller request)
FED_S Finisher inlet sensor remaining JAM SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM
FFPD_N Finisher saddle not-reached JAM SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM
FFPD_S Finisher saddle remaining JAM SPPD2_N SPPD2 not-reached JAM
FEXIT_S Finisher bundle exit remaining JAM SPPD2_S SPPD2 remaining JAM
FSTPL Staple JAM SPPD3_N SPPD3 not-reached JAM
FPNCH Punch JAM SPPD3_S SPPD3 remaining JAM
FDOP Finisher door open SPPD4_N SPPD4 not-reached JAM
FIN_TIME Finisher paper clearance abnormality JAM SPPD4_S SPPD4 remaining JAM
TREG_SEN_N Inserter tab sheet resist sensor not-reached JAM SPPD5_N SPPD5 not-reached JAM
TREG_SEN_S Inserter tab sheet resist sensor remaining JAM SPPD5_S SPPD5 remaining JAM
THI_SEN_N Inserter tab sheet paper exit sensor not-reached JAM SPOD_N SPOD not-reached JAM
THI_SEN_S Inserter tab sheet paper exit sensor remaining JAM SPOD_S SPOD remaining JAM
REG_SEN_N Inserter resist sensor not-reached JAM SPRDMD_S SPRDMD remaining JAM
REG_SEN_S Inserter resist sensor remaining JAM SPSD_SCN Exposure start notification wait timeout
TIM_SEN_N Inserter timing sensor not-reached JAM SPPD2_NR SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAM
TIM_SEN_S Inserter timing sensor remaining JAM SPPD2_SR SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM
HI_SEN_NI Inserter paper exit sensor not-reached JAM (when ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM
feeding with the inserter)
HI_SEN_NP Inserter paper exit sensor not-reached JAM (when
feeding with the main unit)
HI_SEN_S Inserter paper exit sensor remaining JAM
H_SEN_NF Inserter reverse sensor not-reached JAM (when
entering the reverse path)
H_SEN_NB Inserter reverse sensor not-reached JAM (when
discharging from the reverse path)
H_SEN_SF Inserter reverse sensor remaining JAM (when
entering the reverse path)
3. Hidden Page for Serviceman Only
A. Outline
The Hidden Page for Serviceman Only is the web page used for a
serviceman to backup user data and system setup data of the
machine.
The backup data can be imported to another machine, and a profile
and fonts can be added from the web page.
B. Operating procedure
1) Boot the browser.
2) Enter "***.***.*** (IP address)/service_login.html" to the
address column of the browser, and press ENTER key.
3) Enter the password, and log in.
Password: service
1) 2) 3)
* The password can be changed optionally.

1) Select "Password Setting" on the menu bar.
2) Enter a new password.
3) Enter the new password again on the reconfirmation column.
4) Press [Submit] button.
2)
1) 3)
4)
(1) Font/Form Download
a. Font Download
1)
5)
2)
3)
4)
1) Select "Font/Form Download" on the menu bar. b. Deleting downloaded fonts

2) Select "Resource Type" in the pull-down menu. 1) Select fonts to be deleted from the lists of the downloaded
(Example: Font/Form of PCL/PostScript, macro, etc.) fonts, and click [Delete] button.
3) Click [Browse] button and select font files. 2) The confirmation message is displayed. Press [YES] key, and
4) Click [Download] button, and the selected fonts are down- the selected fonts are deleted.
loaded to the HDD. 3) To initialize all the resources, press the initial button.
5) The list of the downloaded fonts and the use rate (%) of the 4) The confirmation message is displayed. Press [YES] key, and
HDD are displayed. all the downloaded files are deleted.
(2) Output Profile Settings
1)
4)
2)
3)
1) Select "Output Profile Settings" on the menu bar. **Reference**

2) Click [Browse] button and select an output profile. 1. The difference between the output A profile and the output B
3) Click [Add] button to add an output profile. profile is:
4) The added profile is displayed on the list, and the newly added Output profile A: Photo/CAD
file becomes the default. Output profile B: Standard/Graphic
(If no file is added, the file registered when shipping serves as 2. When the PS option is installed, the output C profile/Pantone
the default.) table setting can be made. (The setting procedure is the same.)
(3) Device Cloning
a. Backup
1) Select "Device Cloning" on the menu bar. b. Import

2) Select an item to be backed up. 1) Select "Device Cloning" on the menu bar.
3) Press [Execute] button to execute backup. 2) Import from a file: Click [Browse] button and select a backup
(File name: *****.bin) file (file name: *****.bin).
3) Press [Execute] button to execute importing.
(4) Filing Data Backup

a. Backup
2)
1)
3)
4)
1) Select "Filing Data Backup" on the menu bar. b. Import

2) Select one of the radio buttons of the storage space for a file to 1) Select "Filing Data Backup" on the menu bar.
be exported. 2) Import from a file: Click [Browse] button and select a backup
(Main Folder/Quick File Folder/Custom Folder) file (File name: *****.bin).
3) The index/number of display can be changed with the pull- 3) Press [Execute] button to execute importing.
down menu to specify the retrieval condition.
4) Press [Execute] button to execute backup.
(File name: *****.bin)
(5) Jog Log
a. Save Job Log
2)
1)
1) Select "Job Log" on the menu bar.

2) Click [Save] button to execute backup of the job log.
(File name: *****.csv)
b. View Job Log
1) Select "Job Log" on the menu bar.
2) Click "View Job Log."
3) Click [Show] button, and the job log is displayed on the
browser.
3)
[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT
MX-7000N (1) Front cabinet
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Parts
1. Disassembly and assembly a Front cabinet
A. Cabinet
Parts Page
a Front cabinet A- 1
b Rear cabinet A- 2
c Rear cabinet lower a
d Upper cabinet rear cover A- 2
e Upper cabinet left A- 2
f Upper cabinet right
g Left cabinet A- 3
h Right lower door A- 3
i Right cabinet rear A- 4
j Right cabinet lower A- 4
k LCC lower cabinet
l Front cabinet upper A- 5 1) Open the front cabinet (A).
m Operation panel base plate
n Frame cover R A- 5
o Right lower door cover A- 6
p Upper cabinet rear A- 7
q Toner cover A- 8
r Paper exit tray
s Paper exit rear A
m f
q
i 2) Remove the bands (B). Remove the hinges (C), and remove
a the front cabinet (A).
l
k
n
o j
B
h
a
p r A
d e
b
g C C
c
MX-7000N EXTERNAL OUTFIT A 1

(2) Rear cabinet, Rear cabinet lower (3) Upper cabinet rear cover
Parts Parts
b Rear cabinet d Upper cabinet rear cover
c Rear cabinet lower
c 1) Remove the screws (A), and remove the upper cabinet rear
cover (B).
* When installing, engage the pawls (C).
1) Remove the screws (A), and remove the rear cabinet (B). C
d B A
(4) Upper cabinet left, Upper cabinet right
Parts
e Upper cabinet left
f Upper cabinet right
B b
f
2) Loosen the screws (C). Remove the screws (D). Remove the
rear cabinet lower (E).
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. (Refer to the (3) Upper
cabinet rear cover.)
2) Remove the DSPF unit. (Refer to the [C] DSPF SECTION)
3) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass. (Refer to the [D]
SCANNER SECTION.)
4) Remove the upper cabinet rear. (Refer to the (12) Upper cab-
c E inet rear.)
D 5) Release the lock (A), and open the right door unit (B).
C
A

6) Remove the screws (C), and remove the upper cabinet left (D) 3) Pull out the handles (C). Remove the screw (D), and remove
and the upper cabinet right (E). the left cabinet (E).
* When installing, push the pawls (F) part from the obverse
side, and slide it to the rear side.
D e
F
C
E f
C
C
C
F D
E
(5) Left cabinet g
Parts
g Left cabinet (6) Right lower door
Parts
h Right lower door
1) Pull out the tandem paper feed tray unit (A).

1) Release the lock (A), and open the right door unit (B).
2) Open the front cabinet (B).
2) Open the right lower door (C).

3) Remove the resin ring (D), and remove the right lower door (8) Right cabinet lower, LCC lower cabinet
(C).
Parts
j Right cabinet lower
k LCC lower cabinet
D
k
j
C
h
1) Remove the right lower door. (Refer to the "(6) Right lower
door".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the LCC cover F (B) and
the LCC cover R (C).
(7) Right cabinet rear * When installing, be careful to difference of the shapes.
Parts
i Right cabinet rear
C A
i
A
1) Remove the screw (A). Push down the right cabinet rear. Dis-
3) Remove the screws (D). Remove the right cabinet lower (E).
engage the pawl (C), and remove the right cabinet rear (B) so
that slide to the front side. * When installing, push the pawls (F) part from the obverse
side, and slide it to the lower side.
j E
A F
C
l F
D
B
4) Remove the screws (G), and remove the LCC lower cabinet
(H).
H k
G

(9) Front cabinet upper, Operation panel base plate 4) Remove the screws (E). Disengage the pawls (F), and remove
the operation panel base plate (G).
Parts
l Front cabinet upper
m Operation panel base plate G m E
m
E E
E
l
F
* When installing, engage the pawls (F) to the holes (H) of the
scanner unit, fix with the screws (E) while supporting from
lower direction for engaging the pawls (F).
B H
E
E E
2) Open the toner cover (C).
(10) Frame cover R
C Parts
n Frame cover R
1) Remove the front cabinet upper. (Refer to the "(9) Front cabi-
3) Remove the screws (D), and remove the front cabinet upper
net upper, operation panel base plate".)
(E).
2) Open the front cabinet (A).
l E
A
D
D

3) Turn the blue screw (B) counterclockwise. Check that the lock 7) Remove the screw (J), and remove the knob (K). Remove the
is released as shown in (C). screws (L), and remove the frame cover R (M).
* Failure to complete this step may damage the primary trans-
fer belt.
C M n
L
B
J
K L
4) Remove the screw (D). Hold the drum fixing knob (E) by the
hand to not rotate, remove the screw (F). Remove the drum (11) Right lower door cover
fixing knob (E).
Parts
o Right lower door cover
F
o
E
5) Pull out the fixing cover (G). 1) Open the front cabinet (A).
A
G
6) Loosen the screws (H), and open the process section cover (I). 2) Open the right lower door (B).

3) Pull out the tandem paper feed tray unit (C). (12) Upper cabinet rear
Parts
p Upper cabinet rear
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. (Refer to the "(3) Upper
cabinet rear cover".)
4) Pull out the paper feed tray (D).
2) Remove the DSPF unit. (Refer to the "[C] DSPF SECTION")
3) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass. (Refer to the "[D]
SCANNER SECTION".)
4) Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the screw (B), and
remove the earth wire (C).
B
5) Remove the screws (E), and remove the right lower door cover A
(F).
5) Remove the screws (D), lift the upper cabinet rear (E), and dis-
connect the connector (F).
E * When installing, engage the pawl (G) of the upper cabinet
rear to the upper cabinet right (H).
F o
E D D D
E p
G
F
H

(13) Toner cover, Paper exit tray, Paper exit tray rear 4) Remove the screws (E), and remove the paper exit tray (F).
Parts
q Toner cover
r Paper exit tray
s Paper exit tray rear
E
r
s
q F r
E
5) Remove the screws (G), and remove the paper exit tray rear
(H).
1) Remove the toner cartridge (BK/C/M/Y). (Refer to the "[K]
TONER SUPPLY SECTION".)
2) Remove the resin ring (A), and remove the toner cover (B). s H
G
A
B q
3) Remove the paper arm (C), and remove the paper exit full
detection actuator (D).
C
D

CN4
[B]
/YL(Y1) 1
XH(X1) 2
OCSW
CN125 CN1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D-GND 1 30 D-GND YH(Y2) 3
PWRSW
No.
CN_CHK_OUT 2 29 CN_CHK_OUT /XL(X2) 4
Signal
MX-7000N
LCD_CLK+ 3 28 LCD_CLK+ 52271-0469(MOLEX)

LCD_CLK- 4 27 LCD_CLK- CN3
D-GND 5 26 D-GND
D-GND 1 22 VSS
LCD_DAT2+ 6 25 LCD_DAT2+
YD 2 21 YD
LCD_DAT2- 7 24 LCD_DAT2-
LP 3 20 LP
D-GND 8 23 D-GND
CP 4 19 XCK
D-GND 5 18 VSS
VCONT 6 17 Vcon
D-GND 11 20 D-GND
DISPout 7 16 DISP
3.3V 8 15 VDD
3.3V 9 14 VDD
D-GND 14 17 D-GND
3.3V 10 13 VDD
DISP 15 16 DISP
LVDS PWB
D-GND 11 12 VSS
Touch panel
LCD module
3.3V_EXT 16 15 3.3V_EXT
D-GND 12 11 VSS
LCD backlight
TP1418 17 14 NC
LCD INV PWB

D0 13 10 D0
VCONT 18 13 VCONT
D1 14 9 D1
LCD UN
AVCC 19 12 AVCC
MFP OPE-JPWB
D2 15 8 D2
Original cover SW
SC_TEMP 20 11 SC_TEMP
D3 16 7 D3
P-GND 21 10 P-GND
D4 17 6 D4
24V_EXT 22 9 24V_EXT
D5 18 5 D5
TP1449 23 8 NC
D6 19 4 D6
Name
Name
/CCFT1 24 7 /CCFT1
D7 20 3 D7
CN_CHK_IN(LCD) 25 6 CN_CHK_IN(LCD)
D-GND 21 2 VSS
X2CN 26 5 X2CN
D-GND 22 1 VSS
Y2CN 27 4 Y2CN
52435-2271(MOLEX) FH12-22S-0.5SH(55) (HIROSE)
X1CN 28 3 X1CN
Y1CN 29 2 Y1CN
OPERATION PANEL
D-GND 30 1 D-GND S02(8.0)B-BHS CN2
2
1
CN2 CN1 CCFT+ 1
SLW30S-1C7 52271-3079(MOLEX)
/CCFT 1 3 /CCFT /CCFT 2
Operaton panel power supply switch

D-GND 2 2 D-GND S02(8.0)B-BHS CN3
24V 3 1 24V CCFT+ 1
Document detection light emitting PWB

Document detection light collector PWB
SM03B-PASS-1-TB S03B-PASK-2 /CCFT 2
PWB
LVDS-CD
8
LCD INV
PWB CD
PWB
SCN-CNT
Backlight for LCD

5
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
3
CN135 CN1
D-GND 1 26 D-GND
3.3V 2 25 3.3V
Outputs the key operation signal

5V3 3 24 5VN
Outputs the display signal for LCD

D-GND 4 23 D-GND
6
Trigger for document size detection

PD 5 22 PD
PWB
PDSEL0 6 21 PDSEL0
Emits light for document size detection

PDSEL1 7 20 PDSEL1
MX-7000N OPERATION PANEL B 1

PDSEL2 8 19 PDSEL2
/KEYIN 9 18 /KEYIN
Displays the various menu and information
Outputs the document size detection signal

MFP OPE
SEG0 10 17 SEG0
Turns ON or OFF the main DC power supply

SEG1 11 16 SEG1
PWRSW
SEG2 12 15 SEG2
/F0 13 14 /F0
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
/F1 14 13 /F1 CN3

/F2 15 12 /F2 n PWRSW 1 3 n PWRSW
/F3 16 11 /F3 D-GND 2 2 D-GND
7
OCSW
/BZR 17 10 /BZR D-GND 3 1 D-GND

D-GND 18 9 D-GND BM03B-PASS-TB
n PWRSW 19 8 n PWRSW CN2
Drives the backlight that outputs the display signal for LCD
n WU_KEY 20 7 n WU_KEY PDSEL0 1 1 PDSEL0
Function/Operation
Function/Operation
Executes the various adjustments and the setting operation

n INFO_LED 21 6 n INFO_LED PDSEL1 2 2 PDSEL1
POW_LED 22 5 POW_LED PDSEL2 3 3 PDSEL2
WU_LED 23 4 WU_LED 5VN 4 4 5VN
D-GND 24 3 D-GND PD 5 5 PD
5V2 25 2 5V2 D-GND 6 6 D-GND
D-GND 26 1 D-GND BM06B-PASS-TB
SLW26S-1C7 52610-2671(MOLEX)
CN136
5VEXT 1 1 5VEXT
D-GND 2 2 D-GND
OCSW 3 3 OCSW
24VEXT 4 24VEXT
/SIZE_LED1 5 /SIZE_LED1
/SIZE_LED2 6 /SIZE_LED2
B6P-PH-K-S F-GND
2. Operational descriptions (1) Operation panel unit
The operation panel unit is composed of the MFP OPE-J PWB, the Unit
LCD INV PWB/LVDS PWB, the LCD unit, and the operation keys, 1 Operation panel unit
and is used to operate the machine and to set and display the
machine status.
The MFP OPE-J PWB is connected to the document detection light
collector PWB for detecting the document size. It receives light
from the document detection light emitting PWB attached to the
rear frame, detecting the document size.
1
The power switch of the operation panel supplies the ON/OFF con-
trol signal of the DC power source.
3. Disassembly and assembly

A. Operation panel unit
1) Remove the upper cabinet left, the front cabinet upper, and
Unit Parts Page
the operation panel base plate. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL
1 Operation panel unit a LCD INV PWB B- 3
OUTFIT".)
b LVDS PWB B- 3
c LCD module B- 3 2) Remove the screw (A) and the earth wire (B). Disconnect the
d Touch panel B- 4 connector (C). Remove the screws (D).
e POWER_SW_PWB B- 4
f MFP OPE-JPWB B- 4
D
1-b D
1-a
1-c D
D
1-d
A
1
1-f 1-e C
B
3) Raise the operation panel unit (E) upright. Disconnect the flat
cables (F).
E 1

a. LCD INV PWB, LVDS PWB b. LCD module
Unit Parts Unit Parts

1 Operation panel unit a LCD INV PWB 1 Operation panel unit c LCD module
b LVDS PWB
1-b
1-a
1-c
1) Remove the upper cabinet left, the front cabinet upper, and
1) Remove the upper cabinet left, the front cabinet upper, and the operation panel base plate. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL
the operation panel base plate. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
OUTFIT".)
2) Remove the operation panel unit. (Refer to the "(1) Operation
2) Remove the operation panel unit. (Refer to the "(1) Operation panel unit".)
panel unit".)
3) Disconnect the connectors (A) and the flat cables (B). Remove
3) Remove the screws (A), and disconnect the connectors (B) the screws (C), and remove the LCD holder (D).
and the flat cables (C), and remove the LCD INV PWB (D) and
LVDS PWB (E).
C
A
A C
1-b E A A
B C
C D
B D 1-a B
4) Remove the LCD module (E). Remove the flat cable (F).
E 1-c

c. Touch panel d. POWER_SW_PWB, MFP OPE-JPWB

1 Operation panel unit d Touch panel 1 Operation panel unit e POWER_SW_PWB
f MFP OPE-J PWB
1-f
1-e
1-d
1) Remove the upper cabinet left, the front cabinet upper, and 1) Remove the upper cabinet left, the front cabinet upper, and
the operation panel base plate. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL the operation panel base plate. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL
OUTFIT".) OUTFIT".)
2) Remove the operation panel unit. (Refer to the "(1) Operation 2) Remove the operation panel unit. (Refer to the "(1) Operation
panel unit".) panel unit".)
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the LCD unit (B). 3) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screws (B), and
the POWER_SW_PWB (C).
A B
B
A
A
A
C 1-e
4) Disconnect the connector (D). Remove the screws (E) and the
mylar (F). Remove the MFP OPE-J PWB (G).
4) Disconnect the flat cable (C), and remove the touch panel (D).
E E
B
F
E
D
C E
G 1-f
D 1-d

D_SPED2 1
[C]
SGND 2 N2
5V(sensor) 3 4 D_SPED2
175487-3 1 SGND
3 5V(sensor)
MX-7000N
D_STLD 1 6 D_STLD
SGND 2 2 SGND
5V(sensor) 3 5 5V(sensor)
175487-3 8 D_SPOD
9 SGND
7 5V(sensor)
10 NC( SGND )
B10B-PHDSS-B
A. Paper feed section
DRIVER PWB
3
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
SPRDMD
2
2 /D_SPFC 1
DSPF SECTION
1 24V_TR 2
1
PHNR-03-H
N4
5V(sensor) 3 18 SGND
SPPD1
D_SPPD1 2 16 /D_SPFC
SGND 1 15 24V_TR
PHR-3 13 5V(sensor)
5V(sensor) 3 14 D_SPPD1 CN6 CN 609
2 17 SGND 5V 1 1 5V
D_RANDOM
1 11 5V(sensor) SGND 2 2 SGND
SGND
12 D_RANDOM D_SPFFAN 3 3 D_SPFFAN
PHR-3
4 SGND SGND 4 4 SGND
5V(sensor) 3 9 5V(sensor) D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1
STUD
SGND 2 3 SGND D_RANDOM 6 6 D_RANDOM
D_STUD 1 10 D_STUD D_SOCV 7 7 D_SOCV
175487-3 7 5V(sensor) D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD
2 SGND D_SPUM_INA 9 9 D_SPU M_INA
STLD
5V(sensor) 8 D_SPED1 D_SPUM_IN/A 10 10 D_SPU M_IN/A
SCOV
3
5 5V(sensor) D_SPUM_INB 11
DSPF CNT PWB
SGND 2 11 D_SPU M_INB

1 SGND
SPWS
D_SPED1 1 D_SPUM_IN/B 12 12 D_SPU M_IN/B
175487-3 6 D_SOCV D_SLUMA 13 13 D_SLUMA
B18B-PHDSS-B D_SULM/A 14 14 D_SULM/A
SPED2
4
D_SLUMB 15 15 D_SLUMB
5V(sensor) 3
D_SLUM/B 16 16 D_SLUM/B
SGND 2
D_SPOM_ENA 17 17 D_SPOM_ENA
D_SOCV 1
D_SPOM_STEP 18 18 D_SPOM_STEP
SPFC
175487-3
SPED1
D_SPOM_MODE 19 19 D_SPOM_MODE
D_SPOM_DIR 20 20 D_SPOM_DIR
SPLS1
24V 21 21 24V
CN7 PGND 22 22 PGND
1 D_SPUM/B 24V 23 23 24V
2 D_SPUM/A PGND 24 24 PGND
3 D_SPUMB 24V 25 25 24V
4 D_SPUMA
MX-7000N DSPF SECTION C 1

PGND 26 26 PGND
5 24V_SPUM B26B-PHDSS-B B 26B-PHDSS-B
6 24V_SPUM
SPLS2
6B-PH-K-S
SPUM
CN5
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1 D_SLUM/B C N3 CN610
2 D_SLUM/A D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF
3 D_SLUMB D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF
4 D_SLUMA D_SPOM_VREF1 3 3 D_SPOM_VREF1
5 24V_TR D_SPOM_VREF2 4 4 D_SPOM_VREF2
SLUM
5B-PH-K-S D_SELA 5 5 D_SELA
D_SELB 6 6 D_SELB
D_SELC 7 7 D_SELC
D_SELOUT 8 8 D_SELOUT
VAREF 9 9 VAREF
D_SPWS 10 10 D_SPWS
AGND 11 11 AGND
D_SPFC 12 12 D_SPFC
D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
D_SPLS1 1 D_SRRBC 14 14 D_SRRBC
SGND 2 CN1 D_SPFM_M1 15 15 D_SPFM_M1
5V(sensor) 3 2 D_SPLS1 D_SPFM_M2 16 16 D_SPFM_M2
175487-3 1 SGND D_SPFM_CLK 17 17 D_SPFM_CLK
3 5V(sensor) D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC
D_SPLS2 1 8 D_SPLS2 D_STRRC 19 19 D_STRRC
SGND 2 9 SGND D_STRRBC 20 20 D_STRRBC
5V(sensor) 3 7 5V(sensor) D_STMPS 21 21 D_STMPS
175487-3 4 VAREF /D_STRC 22 22 /D_STRC
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H 5 D_SPWS 5V 23 23 5V
VAREF 1 VAREF 3 6 AGND SGND 24 24 SGND
D_SPWS 2 D_SPWS 2 B9B-PH-K-S B 24B-PHDSS-B B 24B-PHDSS-B
AGND 3 AGND 1
HNR-03-H
Signal Name Function/Operation
SCOV DSPF upper door open/close sensor Detects open/close of upper door
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor Lifts up/down the paper feed tray
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the document
SPED2 DSPF document empty sensor Detects the existing of document on the paper feed tray
SPFC DSPF paper feed clutch Controls the ON/OFF of the roller on the paper feed section
DSPF document length detection short
SPLS1 Detects length of the document on the paper feed tray
sensor
DSPF document length detection long
SPLS2 Detects length of the document on the paper feed tray
sensor
SPPD1 DSPF paper pass sensor 2 Detects pass of the paper
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor Detects paper size at the random paper feed
SPUM DSPF paper feed motor Drives the roller and transport roller on the paper feed section
SPWS DSPF document width sensor Detects width of document on the paper feed tray
STLD DSPF paper feed tray lower limit sensor Detects the lower limit of the paper feed tray
STUD DSPF paper feed tray upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the paper feed tray

1 Pickup roller Picks up the document, and transports to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller Executes the document feed operation
3 Separation roller Separates a document to prevent double-feed
4 Torque limiter A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to prevent
double feed

CN6 CN 609
5V 1 1 5V
SGND 2 2 SGND
STRC
SPUM
SPPD2
STRRC
D_SPFFAN 3 3 D_SPFFAN
2
1
STRRBC
No.
SGND 4 4 SGND
Signal
D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1
D_RANDOM 6 6 D_RANDOM
D_SOCV 7 7 D_SOCV
D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD
D_SPUM_INA 9 9 D_SPU M_INA
D_SPUM_IN/A 10 10 D_SPU M_IN/A
D_SPUM_INB 11 11 D_SPU M_INB
DRIVER PWB
D_SPUM_IN/B 12 12 D_SPU M_IN/B
D_SLUMA 13 13 D_SLUMA
D_SULM/A 14 14 D_SULM/A
CN9 D_SPOM_ENA 17 17 D_SPO M_ENA
22 NC D_SPOM_ STEP 18 18 D_SPOM_ STEP
21 NC D_SPO M_ MODE 19 19 D_SPO M_ MODE
B. Upper transport section
Transport roller (Drive)

DSPF paper feed motor
No.1 resist roller (Drive)

16 NC D_SPOM_DIR 20 20 D_SPO M_ DIR
Name
Name
SMR-02V-N 15 NC 24V 21 21 24V
DSPF paper pass sensor 2
DSPF transport roller clutch

1 24V_TR 1 18 /D_STRC PGND 22 22 PGND
DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch

2 /D_STRC 2 14 24V_TR 24V 23 23 24V
SMP-0 27 24V_TR PGND 24 24 PGND
25 PGND 24V 25 25 24V
28 FAN_LOCK
DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch

PGND 26 26 PGND
26 NC(FAN_PWM) B26B-PHDSS-B B 26B-PHDSS-B
12 24V_TR
20 /D_SRRC C N3 CN610
10 24V_TR D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF
9 /D_SRRBC D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF
24 24V_SPF D_SPOM_VREF1 3 3 D_SPOM_VREF1
23 24V_SPF D_SPOM_VREF2 4 4 D_SPOM_VREF2
17 D_SPFMA D_SELA 5 5 D_SELA
PHNR-02-H 11 D_SPFM/B D_SELB 6 6 D_SELB
2 24V_TR 1 19 D_SPFM D_SELC 7 7 D_SELC
1 /D_STRRC 2 13 D_SPFM/A D_SELOUT 8 8 D_SELOUT
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H 8 24V_TR VAREF 9 9 VAREF
7 /D_STRRC D_SPWS 10 10 D_SPWS
6 24V_TR AGND 11 11 AGND
PHNR-03-H
5 /D_STRRBC
3 24V_TR 1 D_SPFC 12 12 D_SPFC
2 4 24V_TR D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
2
3 /D_STMP
1 /D_STRRBC 3 D_SRRBC 14 14 D_SRRBC
Detects pass of the paper
Resists paper transporting

2 D_STSET
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H D_SPFM_M1 15 15 D_SPFM_M1
Brakes the No.1 resist roller

1 SGND
D_SPFM_M2 16 16 D_SPFM_M2
2
B28B-PHDSS-B
D_SPFM_CLK 17 17 D_SPFM_CLK
D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC
CN7
D_STRRC 19 19 D_STRRC
1 D_SPUM/B
D_STRRBC 20 20 D_STRRBC

2 D_SPUM/A
D_STMPS 21 21 D_STMPS
3 D_SPUMB
/D_STRC 22 22 /D_STRC
4 D_SPUMA
5V 23 23 5V
5 24V_SPUM
Controls the ON/OFF of the No.1 resist roller

Controls the ON/OFF of the transport roller 1
SGND 24 24 SGND
6 24V_SPUM
B 24B-PHDSS-B B 24B-PHDSS-B
1
B6B-PH-K-S
STRC
Function/Operation
Function/Operation
Drives the roller and transport roller on the paper feed section
SPPD2
5V
5V
5V
5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
DSPF CNT PWB
Transports the paper from the No.1 resist roller to the No.2 resist roller
D_SOCD
D_ROCD
D_SPPD5
D_SPPD4
D_SPPD3
D_SPPD2
5V
5V
STRRC
CN608
6
5
4
2
3
9
1
8
7
12
15
10
14
11
17
18
16
13

3
2
1
5V
STRRBC
SGND
B3B-PH-K-S
D_SPPD2
SPUM
C N9
SPFM
SGND 1
D_STSET 2
/D_STMP 3
24V_TR 4
/D_STRRBC 5
24V_TR 6
SPPD5
/D_STRRC 7
24V_TR 8 SMP-0 6 V-N C
D_SPF M/A 13 1 D_SPF M/B 1
D_SPFM B 19 2 D_SPF M/A 2
4
D_SPF M/B 11 3 D_SPFM B 3
D_SPF MA 17 4 D_SPF MA 4
24V_SPF M 23 5 24V_SPF M 5
SRRBC
Transports the paper from the transport roller 3 to the paper exit roller
24V_SPF M 24 6 24V_SPF M 6
/D_SRRBC 9 SMR-0 6V-N
Transports the paper from the platen roller to the transport roller 3
24V_TR 10 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
Synchronizes the edge of document and the scanning start point

/D_SRRC 20 3 /D_SRRBC 1
24V_TR 12 2 2
SRRC
NC( FAN _PWM) 26 1 24V_TR 3
Function/Operation
Function/Operation
FAN_LOCK 28 PHNR-03-H
Applies a pressure to paper to prevent variation of paper

PGND 25
SPPD3
24V_TR 27
24V_TR 14
/D_STRC 18
NC 15
NC 16
Controls the ON/OFF of the No.2 resist roller

NC 21
NC 22
B28B-PHDSS-B
SPPD4

CN6 CN 609
5V 1 1 5V
3
SGND 2 2 SGND
2
SGND 4 4 SGND
Brakes the No.2 resist roller

D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1
DRIVER PWB

Drives the transport roller
DSPF CNT PWB
D_SOCV 7 7 D_SOCV
1
D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD
D_ SPU M_INA 9 9 D_SPU M_INA
D_ SPU M_IN/A 10 10 D_SPU M_IN/A
D_ SPU M_INB 11 11 D_SPU M_INB
D_ SPU M_IN/B 12 12 D_SPU M_IN/B
D_ SPO M_ENA 17 17 D_SPO M_ENA
D_ SPO M_STEP 18 18 D_SPO M_ STEP
D_SPOM_MODE 19 19 D_SPO M_ MODE
D_ SPO M_ DIR 20 20 D_SPO M_ DIR
24V 21 21 24V
PGND 22 22 PGND
24V 23 23 24V
PGND 24 24 P GND
24V 25 25 24V

P GND 26 26 PGND
CN608
B 26 B-PHDSS-B B26 B-PHDSS-B
D_SOCD 13
GND 16
C N3 CN 610
DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch

5V 7
D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF
D_ROCD 18

D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF
GND 17
Transport roller 2 (Drive)

No. 2 resist roller (Drive)
Name
Name
D_SPOM_VREF1 3 3 D_SPOM_VREF1
5V 8
C. Lower transport section
D_SPOM_VREF2 4 4 D_SPOM_VREF2
DSPF transport motor

GND 1 1 SGND
D_SELA 5 5 D_SELA
D_SPPD2 9 2 D_SPPD3
D_SELB 6 6 D_SELB
5V 3 3 5V
D_SELC 7 7 D_SELC
GND 2 B3B-PH-K-S
D_SELOUT 8 8 D_SELOUT
D_SPPD3 11
VAREF 9 9 VAREF
5V 4
Platen roller
D_SPWS 10 10 D_SPWS
GND 14 1 SGND
AGND 11 11 AGND
D_SPPD4 10 2 D_SPPD4
D_SPFC 12 12 D_SPFC
5V 5 3 5V
D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
GND 15 B3B-PH-K-S
D_SRRBC 14 14 D_SRRBC
D_SPPD5 12
D_SPFM_M1 15 15 D_SPFM_M1 PHNR-03-H
5V 6
B18B-PHDSS-B 1 SGND 3 1 SGND
2 D_SPPD5 2 2 D_SPPD5
D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC 3 5V 1 3 5V
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H B3B-PH-K-S
Signal
No.
1
2
3
4
SRRBC
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
SRRC
SPFM
5V 23 23 5V
SGND 24 24 SGND
B 24B-PHDSS-B B 24 B-PHDSS-B
D. Optical section
DSPF COPY LUMP
2 PGND
DSPF CNT 1 PGND
1 PWB
CL-INV-R
CN130
24V 1 5 24V
24V 2 4 24V
LAMP 3 3 LAMP
PGND 4 2 PGND
PGND 5 1 PGND
5597-05CPB7F

DSPF COPY
DSPF copy lamp Radiates the light to the document for CCD to read the image
LUMP
1 Reflector Condenses the copy lamp light
2 Mirror Inducts the document image into the lens
3 Lens Shrinking the image (light) of the document, and project it on CCD.
4 DSPF CCD PWB Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it into the electric signal

E. Paper exit section
DSPF CNT PWB

CN6 CN 609
5V 1 1 5V
SGND 2 2 SGND
SGND 4 4 SGND
D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1
D_SOCV 7 7 D_SOCV
D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD
D_SPU M_INA 9 9 D_SPU M_INA
D_SPU M_IN/A 10 10 D_SPU M_IN/A
D_SPU M_INB 11 11 D_SPU M_INB
D_SPU M_IN/B 12 12 D_SPU M_IN/B
D_SPO M_ENA 17 17 D_SPO M_ENA
D_SPO M_ STEP 18 18 D_SPO M_STEP
CN8 D_SPO M_ MODE 19 19 D_SPO M_ MODE

1 D_SPOM/B D_SPO M_ DIR 20 20 D_SPO M_DIR
SPOM 2 D_SPOM/A 24V

PGND
21
22
21
22
24V
PGND
3 D_SPOMB
4 D_SPOMA 24V 23 23 24V
4B-PH-K-S PGND 24 24 PGND
24V 25 25 24V
PGND 26 26 PGND
B 26 B-PHDSS-B B26 B-PHDSS-B
DRIVER
CN3 CN610
PWB D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF
D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF
CN2 D_SPOM_VREF1 3 3 D_SPOM_VREF1
4 D_SPED2 D_SPOM_VREF2 4 4 D_SPOM_VREF2
1 SGND D_SELA 5 5 D_SELA
D_SELB 6 6 D_SELB
1 3
6
5V()
D_STLD D_SELC 7 7 D_SELC
2 SGND D_SELOUT 8 8 D_SELOUT
5 5V() VAREF 9 9 VAREF
SPOD D_SPOD 1 8 D_SPOD D_SPWS 10 10 D_SPWS

SGND 2 9 SGND AGND 11 11 AGND
5V() 3 7 5V() D_SPFC 12 12 D_SPFC
175487-3 10 N C( SGND ) D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
B10B-PHDSS-B D_SRRBC 14 14 D_SRRBC

D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC
5V 23 23 5V
SGND 24 24 SGND
B24 B-PHDSS-B B 24 B-PHDSS-B

SPOD DSPF paper exit sensor Detects the paper that discharged
SPOM DSPF paper exit motor Drives the paper exit roller

1 Paper exit roller (Drive) Paper is discharged

2. Operational descriptions
A. Document size detection
Size detection on the document tray
The document width is detected by the DSPF document width sensor (SPWS), and the document length is detected by the DSPF document
length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from the document width and the document length as shown in the table below.
When, however, documents of different sizes are mixed and set on the document tray, the largest size is detected.
Document length sensor

Document size
SPLS1 SPLS2
AB series A5 OFF OFF
B5 OFF OFF
11" 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
B5R ON OFF SPWS
A4R ON OFF
8.5" 13" ON ON SPLS1
B4 ON ON
A3 ON ON SPLS2
11" 17" ON ON
Inch series 8.5" 5.5" OFF OFF
11" 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" 13" ON ON
8.5" 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" 17" ON ON
B. Timing chart
To increase the document replacement speed, pre-feed of the second and the later documents is performed for documents of A4/Letter or
smaller sizes. Therefore, a clutch is provided for each transport roller to perform individual control. An electromagnetic brake is provided for
each transport roller in order to reduce loads to the motor in comparison with a mechanical brake.
Transport speed 314mm/s Letter single-surface transport

Copy key ON
SPFFAN ON simultaneously with print start of each motor
DSPF cooling fan motor OFF at 500ms after SPCD of the last paper
SPUM
DSPF paper feed motor
SPFM
DSPF transport motor
Timer from ON
SPFC
DSPF paper feed clutch
Timer from ON
SPFC
DSPF paper feed clutch
STRRC
DSPF No.1 resist roller cluch
STRRBC
SPRDMD
DSPF random sensor 1
SPPD1
SPPD2
STRC ON simultaneously with SPPD2_ON

DSPF transport roller clutch OFF at 69.4ms after SPPD2_OFF
SPPD3
DSPF paper pass sensor
12.3mm 11.8mm
SRRC ON at 12.3mm - 10ms (29ms) after SPPD3 ON

DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch (SIM adjustment)
OFF at 11.8mm (38ms) after SPPD3 OFF
SRRBC ON simultaneously with SPPD3 ON
DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch OFF at 10ms before SRRC ON
SPPD4
SPPD5
DSPF paper pass sensor 5 37.6mm
OC scanner scanning Scanning start at 37.6mm (120ms) from

39.3mm
SPPD4 ON (SIM adjustment)
Built-in scanner scanning Scanning start at 39.3mm (125ms) from

SPPD5 ON (SIM adjustment)
SPOD
DSPF paper exit sensor
SPOM
Reduces the speed simultaneously with SPOD OFF,
DSPF paper exit motor
reduces the speed up to 1855PPS in 15.7mm.
(Common to each paper size)

3. Disassembly and assembly 1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. (Refer to the "[A]
EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
Section Page 2) Remove the screw (A), and remove the earth wire (B). Discon-
A Exterior section C- 8 nect the connector (C), and remove the snap band (D).
B Paper feed section C -11 Remove the screw (E). Disengage the pawl (F), and pass the
C Upper transport section C -17 cover (G) under the harness (H), and remove it.
D Lower transport section C -19
E Optical section C -25
F Paper exit section C -31
B A
G Drive section C -32
H Others C -35
A. Exterior section
D F
Unit Parts Page H
1 DSPF unit a Front cabinet C- 9
b Rear cabinet C- 9
c Paper feed cover C -10
d Upper door C -10 C E
G E
1-d 1-b
3) Loosen the screws (I), and lower the angle adjustment plate
(J).
1-c
I
I
1-a 1
(1) DSPF unit
Unit
1 DSPF unit 4) Open the DSPF unit (K) to put it straight up, and remove the
screws (L).
K
1
L L

5) Slide the DSPF unit (K) to the rear side, and fit the step screw 2) Disengage the pawls (C, D, E, F), and remove the front cabinet
(M) with the key hole (N) of the hinge, and lift it up to remove. (G).
D
K 1 F
C
E
G 1-a
M
N
b. Rear cabinet
Unit Parts
1 DSPF unit b Rear cabinet
a. Front cabinet
Unit Parts
1 DSPF unit a Front cabinet 1-b
1) Open the upper door (A).

1-a
1) Open the upper door (A), and remove the screw (B). A

2) Remove the screws (B). Disengage the pawls (C, D), and 2) Remove the screw (B), and remove the paper feed cover (C).
remove the rear cabinet (E).
D
B
C
B
B C 1-c
B
E 1-b
c. Paper feed cover d. Upper door

1 DSPF unit c Paper feed cover 1 DSPF unit d Upper door
1-d
1-c
1) Open the upper door (A).

1) Remove the front cabinet. (Refer to the "a. Front cabinet".)
2) Remove the spring (A). Disengage the pawl (B), and remove
A the pressure release axis holder (C). Remove the screw (D),
and remove the pressure release link lever (E).
C
E
B
D

3) Remove the resin E-ring (F), and remove the upper door (G). (1) Paper feed tray unit
Unit
1 Paper feed tray unit
G 1-d
B. Paper feed section

/CKPVG 1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet. (Refer to the
Unit Parts Page
PCPEG "A. Exterior section".)
1 Paper feed DSPF document length C -11 2) Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the screws (B), and
a
tray unit detection short sensor
remove the paper feed tray unit (C).
DSPF document length
b
detection long sensor
DSPF document width C -12
c
sensor
A
2 Paper feed a Pickup roller { C -13
unit b Paper feed roller {
DSPF paper feed tray upper C -14
c
limit sensor B
DSPF document upper limit
d
sensor C 1
DSPF upper door open/
B
e
close sensor
f DSPF paper pass sensor 1
B
DSPF document random
g
sensor
h DSPF paper feed clutch
Mainte
Parts Page
nance
a Separation roller { C -15
b Torque limiter C -15
c DSPF paper feed tray lower limit sensor a. DSPF document length detection short sensor, DSPF
C -16 document length detection long sensor
d DSPF document empty sensor
Unit Parts
1 Paper feed tray unit a DSPF document length detection
short sensor
2-e b DSPF document length detection
long sensor
2-c 2-h
2-f 2-d
2-b
2
2-g
b
d
1-b
1-a
a 1-b
2-a 1-a 1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet. (Refer to the
c 1 1-c "A. Exterior section".)
2) Remove the paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "(1) Paper feed
tray unit".)

3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the paper feed tray lower 3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the paper feed tray lower
(B). (B). Disconnect the connector (C).
C A
A
A A
B B
4) Disconnect the connectors (C), and remove the DSPF docu- 4) Remove the screw (D), and remove the rotation tray shaft (E).
ment length detection short sensor (D) and the DSPF docu- Remove the paper feed rotation tray (F).
ment length detection long sensor (E).
D 1-a
E 1-b
C E
D
C
5) Disconnect the connector (G). Disengage the pawl (H), and
b. DSPF document width sensor remove the DSPF document width sensor (I).
Unit Parts
G
1 Paper feed tray unit c DSPF document width sensor
1-c
1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet. (Refer to the
"A. Exterior section".)
tray unit".)

(2) Paper feed unit a. Pickup roller, paper feed roller
Unit Mainte
Unit Parts
2 Paper feed unit nance
2 Paper feed unit a Pickup roller {
b Paper feed roller {
2-b 2-a
1) Remove the front cabinet, the rear cabinet, and the paper feed 1) Remove the paper feed cover. (Refer to the "A. Exterior sec-
cover. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".) tion".)
2) Disconnect the connector (A). Open the wire saddle (B). 2) Disengage the pawl (A), and remove the paper feed PG upper
Remove the snap band (C). cover (B).
A C
3) Remove the screws (D), and remove the paper feed unit (E). 3) Disengage the pawl (C), and remove the pickup roller holder
(D). Remove the pickup roller (E) from the pickup roller holder
(D).
D
D C
E 2-a
E 2

4) Remove the paper feed roller (F). 4) Disconnect the connectors (D), and remove the DSPF paper
feed tray upper limit sensor (E), the DSPF document upper
limit sensor (F), the DSPF upper door open/close sensor (G),
the DSPF paper pass sensor 1 (H), and the DSPF document
F 2-b
random sensor (I).
D G 2-e
2-f H
D
D
2-g I
b. DSPF paper feed tray upper limit sensor, DSPF document 2-c E F 2-d
upper limit sensor, DSPF upper door open/close sensor,
DSPF paper pass sensor 1, DSPF document random
sensor
Unit Parts c. DSPF paper feed clutch

2 Paper feed unit c DSPF paper feed tray upper limit
sensor Unit Parts
d DSPF document upper limit sensor 2 Paper feed unit h DSPF paper feed clutch
e DSPF upper door open/close sensor
g DSPF document random sensor
2-e
2-f
2-h
2-g
2-d
2-c
1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet and the paper
feed cover. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".)
2) Remove the paper feed unit. (Refer to the "(2) Paper feed
unit".)
1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet and the paper
feed cover. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".) 3) Disengage the pawl (A), and remove the paper feed PG upper
cover (B).
2) Remove the paper feed unit. (Refer to the "(2) Paper feed
unit".)
3) Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the screws (B), and
remove the paper feed PG upper supporting plate (C). B
A
B
B B
C
A

4) Disconnect the connector (C). Remove the screws (D), and 2) Disengage the pawl (A), and remove the paper feed PG upper
remove the paper feed PG upper supporting plate (E). cover (B).
C B
D
D D
5) Remove the E-ring (F) and the bearing (G). Lift the paper feed
roller shaft (H) diagonally, and remove the DSPF paper feed
A
clutch (I).
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation stop- 3) Remove the screw (C), and remove the paper feed PG lower
per is engaged with the plate. cover (D).
I 2-h
C
G
F
(3) Separation rolloer 4) Disengage the pawl (E), and remove the reverse pressure
release lever (F). Remove the separation roller (G).
Mainte
Parts
nance
a Separation roller { G a
F
1) Remove the paper feed cover. (Refer to the "A. Exterior sec-
tion".)

(4) Torque limiter 7) Remove the screws (F), and remove the separation roller sup-
porting plate (G) and the bearing (H). Remove the roller shaft
Mainte (I), and remove the torque limiter (J).
Parts
nance
b Torque limiter
I
H
G
b
F
J b
(5) DSPF paper feed tray lower limit sensor, DSPF

1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet. (Refer to the document empty sensor
Parts
2) Remove the paper feed unit. (Refer to the "(2) Paper feed c DSPF paper feed tray lower limit sensor
unit".) d DSPF document empty sensor
3) Remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch, and remove
the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch. (Refer to the "C. Upper
transport section")
4) Remove the drive unit. (Refer to the "G. Drive section.")
5) Remove the resin E-ring (A), and remove the No.1 resist roller
(idle) (B).
c
d
A "A. Exterior section".)
tray unit".)
6) Remove the screws (C). Lift the paper feed rotation tray (D),
and remove the paper feed PG lower (E). 3) Disconnect the connectors (A), and remove the DSPF paper
feed tray lower limit sensor (B) and the DSPF document empty
sensor (C).
C
A
C
C d
E
A
B c
C
D

C. Upper transport section 2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the resin E-ring (B),
and remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch (C) and
Mainte the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch (D).
Parts Page
nance
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation stopper is
a DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch C -17
engaged with the plate.
b DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch
c DSPF transport roller clutch C -17
d No.1 resist roller (Drive) { C -18 a
b D B
e DSPF paper pass sensor 2 C -18
f Transport roller 1 (Drive) { C
d
b
c a
e
f
A
(2) DSPF transport roller clutch
Parts
c DSPF transport roller clutch
(1) DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch, DSPF No.1

resist roller clutch
Parts
a DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch
b DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch
b
a
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".)

2) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the snap band (B).
Remove the resin E-ring (C), and remove the DSPF transport
roller clutch (D).
D c
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".) A C

(3) No.1 resist roller (Drive) 6) Remove the resin E-ring (F) and the bearing (G), and remove
the No.1 resist roller (drive) (H).
Mainte
Parts
nance
d No.1 resist roller (Drive) {
7) Remove the E-ring (I) and the bearing (J) from the No.1 resist
roller (drive) (H).
"A. Exterior section".) H d
2) Remove the paper feed unit. (Refer to the "B. Paper feed sec-
tion".)
the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch. (Refer to the "(1) DSPF
No.1 resist roller brake clutch, DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch".)
4) Remove the resin E-ring (A), and remove the No.1 resist roller J
(idle) (B).
I
(4) DSPF paper pass sensor 2, Transport roller 1

B (drive)
Mainte
Parts
nance
e DSPF paper pass sensor 2
f Transport roller 1 (Drive) {
5) Remove the screws (C), lift the paper feed rotation tray (D), e
and remove the paper feed PG lower (E). f
C
E
C 1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet. (Refer to the
D "A. Exterior section".)

2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the transport PG upper D. Lower transport section
(B).
Mainte
Parts Page
nance
a Platen roller { C -19
B b No. 1 scanning plate {
c DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch C -20
A d DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch
e DSPF paper pass sensor 3 C -20
g No.2 resist roller (Drive) {
h DSPF paper pass sensor 5 C -22
i Transport roller 2 (Drive) {
j Transport roller 3 (Drive) { C -24
g f e d
c
3) Disconnect the connector (C), and remove the DSPF paper
pass sensor 2 (D).
a
h
b
D e
i
C j
4) Remove the DSPF transport roller clutch. (Refer to the "(2) (1) Platen roller, No.1 scanning plate
DSPF transport roller clutch".)
5) Remove the E-ring (E), the washer (F), the spring (G), the col- Mainte
Parts
lar (H), the polyslider (I), and the bearing (J). Remove the belt nance
(K), the pulley (L), and the bearing (M), and remove the trans- a Platen roller {
port roller 1 (drive) (N). b No. 1 scanning plate {
M
L
K
a
N
b
J E
I
H
G
F
6) Remove the E-ring (O) and the bearing (P) from the transport
roller 1 (drive) (N).
N f
P
O

1) Open the DSPF unit (A). 2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the resin E-ring (B)
and remove the DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch (C) and
the DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch (D).
A
D d
c C
B
2) Clean the platen rollers (B) and the No.1 scanning plate (C).
(3) DSPF paper pass sensor 3, DSPF paper pass

a sensor 4, No.2 resist roller (Drive)
B Mainte
Parts
nance
e DSPF paper pass sensor 3
g No.2 resist roller (Drive) {
C b
a
B g f e
(2) DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch, DSPF No.2

resist roller clutch
Parts
c DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch
d DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch
d
c 1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet and the upper
door. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the transport PG upper
(B).

3) Loosen the screws (C), and lower the angle adjustment plate 7) Remove the screws (L), and remove the PS front PG (M).
(D). Open the DSPF unit (E).
E
M
L
C C
L
D
4) Remove the screw (F), and remove the left rear lower cabinet 8) Remove the screw (N), and disconnect the connector (O), and
(G). remove the DSPF paper pass sensor 3 (P).
G N
P e
O
5) Remove the resin E-ring (H), and remove the PS knob (I).
9) Remove the screws (Q), and remove the lift-up PG (R).

I
Q
R
6) Remove the screws (J), and remove the PS outer PG (K).
Q
J
K 10) Remove the screw (S), and remove the spring (T). Remove
the belt (U), and disengage the pawls (V), and remove the
platen roller (W).
J V
T S
U

11) Disconnect the connector (X) and remove the screw (Y). (4) DSPF paper pass sensor 5, Transport roller 2
Remove the DSPF paper pass sensor 4 (Z). (Drive)
Mainte
Parts
nance
X
h DSPF paper pass sensor 5
i Transport roller 2 (Drive) {
f Z
12) Remove the DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch and the
DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch. (Refer to the "(2) DSPF No.2
resist roller brake clutch, DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch".)
i
13) Remove the DSPF cooling fan motor. (Refer to the "G. Drive
section".)
14) Remove the E-ring (a), the washer (b), the spring (c), the collar
(d), the polyslider (e), the bearing (f), and the bering (g).
g "A. Exterior section".)
f
e 2) Remove the OC mat. (Refer to the "H. Others.)
d 3) Loosen the screw (A), and lower the angle adjustment plate
c (B). Open the DSPF unit (C).
a b
15) Loosen the screw (h). Loosen the belt (i) tension. Tighten the
screw (h). Slide the No.2 resist roller (drive) (j). Remove the
pulley (k), the E-ring (l), the bearing (m), and the bearing (n). A
A
Remove the No.2 resist roller (drive) (j).
i B
h 4) Remove the screws (D), and remove the lift-up PG (E).
j g D
l
n E
m
k
m

5) Remove the screw (F), and remove the intersecting point plate 10) Disconnect the connectors (N). Remove the screws (O), and
(G). Remove the lower door (H). remove the control PWB unit (P).
F
G
N
N
H N
N O
P
O
11) Loosen the screw (Q), and loosen the belt (R) tension. Tighten
6) Remove the screws (I). Remove the transport PG lower (J). the screw (Q). Remove the belt (R). Remove the E-ring (S)
Disconnect the connector (K). and the pulley (T).
Q
I
J T
S
I
12) Remove the E-ring (U). Slide the bearing (V). Remove the
I transport roller 2 (drive) (W). Remove the bearing (X), the resin
E-ring (Y), and the spring pin (Z) from the transport roller 2
(drive) (W).
7) Disconnect the connector (L), and remove the DSPF paper
pass sensor 5 (M).
L i W
M h
Z
V Y
X
U
8) Remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch and remove
transport section".)
9) Remove the drive unit. (Refer to the "G. Drive section".)

(5) Transport roller 3 (drive) 7) Disconnect the connector (F). Remove the screws (G), and
remove the control PWB unit (H).
Mainte
Parts
nance
j Transport roller 3 (Drive) {
F
F
F
F G
H
G
8) Loosen the screw (I), and loosen the belt (J) tension. Tighten
j
the screw (I). Remove the belt (J).
I
"A. Exterior section".) J
2) Remove the paper feed unit. (Refer to the "B. Paper feed sec-
tion".)
5) Remove the resin E-ring (A), and remove the No.1 resist roller
(idle) (B).
9) Remove the resin E-ring (K) and the bearing (L). Remove the
transport roller 3 (drive) (M). Remove the E-ring (N), the pulley
(O), the spring pin (P), and the bearing (Q) from the transport
roller 3 (drive) (M).
B
j M
L K
A N Q
6) Remove the screws (C). Lift the paper feed rotation tray (D), O
and remove the paper feed PG lower (E).
P
C
C
E
C
D

E. Optical section 3) Disconnect the connector (B) from DSPF CL inverter PWB (A).
Mainte
Unit Parts Page
nance
1 Lamp unit a Scanning glass { C -26
b DSPF copy lamp {
A
c Reflector {
2 Optical unit a Lens { C -28
b CCD {
c CCD unit
d Mirror C -29 B
Mainte
Parts Page
nance
a DSPF CL inverter PWB C -29
b White reference glass { C -30
4) Remove the screw (C), and remove the intersecting point plate
(D). Remove the lower door (E).
2-c 2-b 2-a 2-d
C
D
a
E
2
1-b 1
1-c
1-a b
(1) Lamp unit
Unit
1 Lamp unit 5) Remove the screw (F), and remove the intersecting point plate
(G). Remove the white reference plate (H).
F
1 G
2) Remove the OC mat. (Refer to the "H. Others".)

6) Remove the screw (I), and remove the scanning section cover 2) Open the lower door (B).
(J). Remove the screws (K), and remove the lamp unit (L).
1 L
B
J I
3) Remove the cleaner (C).
a. Scanning glass, DSPF copy lamp, Reflector
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Lamp unit a Scanning glass {
b DSPF copy lamp {
C
c Reflector {
1-b
1-a
4) Use the cleaner (C) to clean the scanning glass (surface) (D).
1-c
1) Open the DSPF unit (A). D 1-a
C
A
7) Remove the lamp unit. (Refer to the "(1) Lamp unit".)

8) Remove the screw (E), and remove the DSPF copy lamp (F). (2) Optical unit
Unit
2 Optical unit
1-b F
E
2
9) Clean the scanning glass (back surface) (G).
1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet and the upper
1-a G door. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".)
4) Remove the screws (A), and remove the transport PG upper
(B).
10) Remove the screws (H), and remove the reflector (I).
B
H A
I 1-c
H
5) Remove the screw (C), and remove the harness cover (D).
Disconnect the connectors (E).
* When installing, arrange the harness (F) so that it is placed
in the lower position than the rib height.
C
D
E
F
E

6) Remove the step screw (G), and remove the screws (H), and 6) Disengage the pawls (F), and remove the lens cover (G).
remove the optical fixing plate (I). Remove the optical unit (J).
F
I
F
G
H
2 J
7) Clean the lens (H) and the CCD (I).
a. Lens, CCD
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
2 Optical unit a Lens {
2-b I
b CCD {
2-b 2-a H 2-a
b. CCD unit
Unit Parts
2 Optical unit c CCD unit
2-c
4) Remove the optical unit. (Refer to the "(2) Optical unit".)
5) Remove the screws (A). Disengage the pawls (B). Remove the
dust-proof cover (C). Remove the screw (D), and remove the
dark box (E).
D A
E 1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet and the upper
A door. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".)
B 4) Remove the optical unit. (Refer to the "(2) Optical unit".)
C
B

5) Remove the screws (A). Disengage the pawls (B), and remove 5) Remove the screws (A), and remove the mirror base cover (B).
the dust-proof cover (C). Remove the screw (D), and remove
the dark box (E).
A
D A
E
A
A A B
C
B
6) Clean the mirrors (C).

6) Remove the screws (F), and remove the CCD unit (G).
2-d C
F
2-c G
C 2-d
F
(3) DSPF CL inverter PWB

c. Mirror
Parts
a DSPF CL inverter PWB
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
2 Optical unit d Mirror
2-d

4) Remove the optical unit. (Refer to the "(2) Optical unit".)

2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the screws (B), and (4) White reference glass
remove the control PWB unit (C).
Mainte
Parts
nance
b White reference glass {
A
A
A
A B
C
B
3) Disconnect the connector (D), and remove the screws (E).

Remove the inverter PWB guide (F).
b
1) Open the DSPF unit (A).
E
A
D
F E
4) Remove the screws (G), and remove the DSPF CL inverter

PWB (H).
G 2) Open the lower door (B).

G
B
H a

3) Remove the cleaner (C). (1) Discharge brush
Mainte
Parts
nance
a Discharge brush
C
4) Use the cleaner (C) to clean the white reference glass (D).
a
D b
C 2) Remove the paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "B. Paper feed
section".)
3) Remove the discharge brush (A).
* When attaching the discharge brush, attach it to the attach-
ment reference.
a A
F. Paper exit section
Mainte
Parts Page
nance
a Discharge brush C -31
b DSPF paper exit sensor C -31
c Paper exit roller (drive) { C -32
(2) DSPF paper exit sensor
Parts
b DSPF paper exit sensor
b a
2) Remove the paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "B. Paper feed
section".)

3) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the DSPF paper G. Drive section
exit sensor (B).
Unit Parts Page
1 Drive unit a DSPF paper feed motor C -33
b DSPF paper exit motor C -33
c DSPF lift-up motor C -34
b B 2 Drive transport unit a DSPF transport motor C -34
Parts Page
A a DSPF cooling fan motor C -35
1 2 2-a a
(3) Paper exit roller (drive)
Mainte
Parts
nance
c Paper exit roller (drive) {
1-c 1-b 1-a
(1) Drive unit

c
Unit
1 Drive unit
2) Remove the paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "B. Paper feed
section".)
5) Remove the resin E-rings (A), the gear (B), the bearing (C),
and the paper exit roller (drive) (D).
B 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".)

A D c transport section".)
C

3) Disconnect the connectors (A), and open the edge saddle (B). 2) Disconnect the connector (A), and open the edge saddle (B).
Remove the snap band (C). Remove the screws (C), and remove the DSPF paper feed
motor (D).
B
D 1-a
A C
A
4) Remove the screw (D), and remove the drive unit (E).
D
D
b. DSPF paper exit motor
1 E
Unit Parts
1 Drive unit b DSPF paper exit motor
D
1-b
a. DSPF paper feed motor
Unit Parts
1 Drive unit a DSPF paper feed motor
2) Disconnect the connector (A), and open the edge saddle (B).
Remove the screws (C), and remove the DSPF paper exit
motor (D).
1-b D
C
B
1-a
A
C

c. DSPF lift-up motor 4) Loosen the screws (A), and loosen the belts tension (B).
Tighten the screws (A).
Unit Parts
1 Drive unit c DSPF lift-up motor
B
A
1-c A
B
5) Disconnect the connector (C). Remove the screws (D), and

remove the drive transport unit (E).
D D
C
2 E
remove the DSPF lift-up motor (C).
C 1-c D
A a. DSPF transport motor

B Unit Parts
2 Drive transport unit a DSPF transport motor
(2) Drive transport unit
Unit
2 Drive transport unit
2-a
2

2) Loosen the screws (A), and loosen the belts (B) tension.
Tighten the screw (A).
B
B

2) Remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch and the A
DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch and the DSPF transport roller
clutch. (Refer to the "C. Upper transport section".)
A
3) Remove the DSPF cooling fan motor. (Refer to the "(3) DSPF
cooling fan motor".)

3) Disconnect the connector (C), and remove the screws (D). H. Others
Remove the DSPF transport motor (E).
Mainte
Parts Page
nance
a OC mat { C -35
b DSPF open/close sensor C -36
c DSPF lower door open/close sensor C -36
d DSPF driver PWB C -37
C e DSPF flash PWB C -37
f DSPF control PWB C -37
d e f
D
2-a E
(3) DSPF cooling fan motor
Parts
a DSPF cooling fan motor
b c a
a
(1) OC mat
Mainte
Parts
nance
a OC mat {

2) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screws (B), and
remove the DSPF cooling fan motor (C).
C a
A
a
B 1) Open the DSPF unit (A).

2) Remove the OC mat (B) from the left edge. 2) Disconnect the connector (A) and remove the screw (B).
Remove the open/close sensor holder (C). Remove the DSPF
open/close sensor (D) from the open/close sensor holder (C).
C
b
a B D
A
* When installing, place the OC mat (B) on the document table to

fit with the reference and close the DSPF unit (C).
(3) DSPF lower door open/close sensor
Parts
c DSPF lower door open/close sensor
C
(2) DSPF open/close sensor
Parts
b DSPF open/close sensor c

2) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screw (B).
Remove the lower door open/close sensor holder (C). Remove
the DSPF lower door open/close sensor (D) from the lower
door open/close sensor holder (C).
C
c D
b B

(4) DSPF driver PWB 1) Remove the screw (A), and remove the ROM cover (B).
Parts
d DSPF driver PWB
B
2) Release the lock (C), and remove the DSPF flash PWB (D).

2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the screws (B), and
remove the DSPF driver PWB (C).
B
A D e
A B
A C
B
(6) DSPF control PWB
C d Parts
f DSPF control PWB
(5) DSPF flash PWB
Parts
f
e DSPF flash PWB

2) Remove the DSPF flash PWB. (Refer to the "(5) DSPF flash
PWB".)

remove the control PWB unit (C).
A
A
A
A B
C
B
4) Disconnect the connector (D), and remove the screws (E).

Remove the control PWB unit (F).
E
E
D
f F

4. Maintenance
: Check { : Clean : Replace U : Adjust : Lubricate : Shift the position
(Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.)
Remark/Refer to
Mono- the Parts Guide.
chrome When 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000 Block/Item No.
No. Part name supply/ calling K K K K K K K K K K (Only the
Mechanical replacement
parts parts are
described.)
1 Paper Paper feed roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { {
2 feed Pickup roller parts { { { { { { { { { { {
3 section/ Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { {
4 Trans- No. 1 resist roller { { { { { { { { { { {
port
section
(PS front)
6 No. 2 resist roller { { { { { { { { { { {
(PS)
7 Platen roller { { { { { { { { { { {
(after No.1 scanning)
(after No.2 scanning)
10 Paper exit roller { { { { { { { { { { {
11 Discharge brush
12 Torque limiter
(for separation)
13 No. 1 scanning plate { { { { { { { { { { {
14 No. 2 scanning { { { { { { { { { { {
section, scanning
glass
15 No. 2 scanning { { { { { { { { { { {
section, white
reference glass
16 Optical Mirror
17 section Lens/CCD { { { { { { { { { { {
18 Copy lamp/Reflector { { { { { { { { { { {
19 Others OC mat { { { { { { { { { { {
20 Drive Gears UKOG-0299FCZZ
section (specified
positions)
21 Belts
1
12
5 2
6 3
7
13
8 19
9
10
11
17
21
17 18
21
14
16 20
21
15

[D] SCANNER SECTION
MHPS
6
3 9 MIM
7
CLI 3
1
2
8
CL CCD PWB
D-GND
MHPS
1
2
CN3 501190-4017 CN1 501190-2017

5V
INVERTOR
CLKP1_OUT+
CCD_CLK1+
CCD_CLK2+
AD_BLKCLP
/RES_CCDAD
AD_MCLK-
AD_MCLK+
/LVDS_STBY
AD_WRSO
CCD_CLK2-
AD_CLPIN
CCD_CLK1-
CLKP1_OUT-
CCD_CP+
CCD_RS+
SH_OUT+
AD_SCLK
CCD_CP-
CCD_RS-
SH_OUT-
AD_RDSI
CCD_SH
AD_SEN
PWB
TCLK+
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
TCLK-
AGND
AGND
A3.3V
A12V
TC+
TD+
A5V
TE+
TB+
TA+
TC-
TD-
TE-
TB-
TA-
3
2
1
P-GND
P-GND
24VPD
24VPD
CL
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
4
3
2
1
CCD_CLK2+
/RES_CCDAD
CCD_CLK1+
/LVDS_STBY
AD_MCLK-
AD_BLKCLP
CLKP1_OUT+
AD_MCLK+
AD_WRSO
CCD_CLK2-
AD_CLPIN
CCD_CLK1-
CCD_CP+
CCD_RS+
SH_OUT+
AD_SCLK
CLKP1_OUT-
CCD_CP-
CCD_RS-
SH_OUT-
AD_RDSI
CCD_SH
AD_SEN
D-GND
TCLK+
P-GND
P-GND
24VPD
24VPD
MiM_/A
MiM_/B
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
TCLK-
AGND
AGND
MiM_A
MiM_B
MHPS
A3.3V
A12V
TC+
TD+
A5V
TE+
TB+
TA+
TC-
TD-
TE-
TB-
TA-
CL
5V
CN134 CN130 CN148 501190-4017 CN147 501190-2017 CN137

SCN-CNT PWB

CLI Scanner lamp Illuminates the document. (Xenon lamp)
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit
MIM Scanner motor Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit

1 Pulley belt Transmits the scanner motor power to the pulley
2 Pulley Drives the scanner drive wire
3 Scanner drive wire Transmits the scanner motor power to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit
4 Reflector Condenses the copy lamp light
5 No. 2 mirror Inducts the document image into the No. 3 mirror
6 No. 3 mirror Inducts the document image into the lens
7 Lens Shrinking the image (light) of the document, and project it on CCD.
8 CCD PWB Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it intot the electric signal
9 Idle gear Transmits the scanner motor power to the belt
MX-7000N SCANNER SECTION D 1

A. Outline
This section functions and operates as follows: B
1) The copy lamp radiates light onto the document, and the con- G
trast of the reflected light is scanned by the three line (RGB) R
CCD element and converted into image signals (analog).
2) The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital sig-
nals by the A/D converter.
3) The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process sec-
tion (scanner control PWB).
B. Detail description
(1) Optical section drive R
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner G
motor (MIM) to the drive pulley and the wire through the belt, to
B
drive the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by
the drive wires. (Image data per 1 line)
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
the scanner control PWB.
(2) Scanner lamp drive
The scanner lamp (CLI) is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage
R G B
generated in the CL inverter PWB according to the control signal
Red component of Freen component of Blue component of
sent from the scanner control PWB. image data image data image data
(3) Image scan/color separation
The copy lamp radiates light onto the document, and the contrast of (4) Image signal A/D conversion
the reflected light is scanned by the three line (RGB) CCD element 1) Each image signal (analog) of RGB is converted into 10bit dig-
and converted into image signals (analog). ital signal by the A/D converter.
Each color component of RGB is separately extracted from the Each color pixel has 10bit information.
document image by the three lines (RGB) of the CCD elements. 2) Each 10bit digital image signal of RGB is sent to the image
The red CCD extracts the red components from the document process section.
image, the green CCD the green components, and the blue CCD
the blue components. This operation is called Color Separation.
A CCD element has three CCD elements of RGB. CCD PWB
Scanning of a document in the main scanning direction is per-
formed by the CCD elements. Scanning of a document in the sub R IC R ADC
scanning direction is performed by shifting the scanner unit position
with the scanner motor.
Document images are optically reduced by the lens and projected 3
G IC G ADC
to the CCD elements. CCD
Scanning resolution is 600 dpi.
B IC B ADC
R
Transfer IC G
B
R G B
(5) Zooming operation

Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is performed by the image
process technology (software), it is not achieved optically.

3. Disassembly and assembly (1) Scanner unit
A. Scanner unit Unit
1 Scanner unit
Mainte
Unit Parts Page
nance
1 Scanner unit a Table glass { D- 4
b SPF glass {
c Lens { D- 5
d CCD {
e Reflector { D- 5
f Mirror {
g Scanner lamp { 1
h CL inverter PWB
i CCD unit D- 6
j Rails D- 7
k Drive wire D- 7
l Drive belt
m Scanner motor D- 7
n Scanner home position D- 8
sensor
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. (Refer to the "[A]
o Original cover SW D- 8
EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
p Document detection light D- 8
collector PWB 2) Remove the DSPF unit. (Refer to the "[C] DSPF SECTION".)
q Document detection light D- 9 3) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass. (Refer to the a.
emitting PWB Table glass, SPF glass.)
4) Remove the upper cabinet rear, the upper cabinet left, the
upper cabinet right, the front cabinet upper, and the operation
panel base plate. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
5) Remove the operation panel unit. (Refer to the "[B] OPERA-
1-j TION PANEL".)
6) Remove the screw (A), and remove the earth wire (B). Discon-
1-b nect the connectors (C). Remove the snap band (D), the mylar
1-q sheet (E), and remove the harnesses (G) from edge saddles
(F).
C
1-j D
1-p
1
1-a
1-n C
1-f
1-k 1-e
1-h F B
1-o
F A
1-k
1-m
1-g
1-f 1-l G E D G
1-c
1-d
1-i

7) Remove the screws (H), and remove the support plate (I). Dis- a. Table glass, SPF glass
connect the connector (J), and remove the snap band (K).
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Scanner unit a Table glass {
b SPF glass {
J 1-b 1-a
K
H
I H
I
H
H
1) Loosen the screws (A), and lower the angle adjustment plate
8) Disconnect the connector (L), and remove the screws (M), and (B).
remove the air outlet duct (N).
M A
A
M
B
2) Open the DSPF unit (C).

L
9) Remove the screws (O), and remove the scanner unit (P).
C
O
P 1

3) Remove the screws (D), and remove the glass holder (E). 3) Clean the lens (E) and the CCD (F).
Remove the table glass (F). Remove the screws (G), and
remove the SPF glass (H).
F 1-d
D
D
G
G
E E 1-c
c. Reflector, Mirror, Scanner lamp, CL inverter PWB
1-b H F 1-a Unit Parts

Mainte
nance
1 Scanner unit e Reflector {
f Mirror {
b. Lens, CCD g Scanner lamp {
h CL inverter PWB
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Scanner unit c Lens {
1-f
d CCD {
1-e
1-h
1-g
1-f
1) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass. (Refer to the "a.
1-c 1-d Table glass, SPF glass".)
2) Clean the reflector (A) and mirror (B).
Table glass, SPF glass".)
2) Remove the screws (A), the earth wire (B), and remove the
dark box (C). Remove the lens cover (D).
B A A
1-e
C
A
D
B 1-f

3) Shift the lamp unit (C) to the right. Loosen the screw (D), and 7) Remove the screws (M) and mirror spring (N), and remove the
remove the wire (E). CL inverter PWB (O).
M N
D
C
E
O
1-h
4) Lift the lamp unit (F) by rotating it. Remove the harness holder
(G), flat cable (H), and remove the lamp unit (F).
d. CCD unit
H
Unit Parts
1 Scanner unit i CCD unit
5) Clean the mirror (I).

1-i
I 1-f Table glass, SPF glass".)
2) Remove the screws (A), the earth wire (B), and remove the
dark box (C). Disconnect the connectors (D), and remove the
screws (E), and remove the CCD unit (F).
E B A
6) Disconnect the connector (J), and remove the screw (K), and E
remove the scanner lamp (L). A
D
1-i
F
K L 1-g
C
D

e. Rails 2) Check the drive wires (A) and drive belt (B).
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Scanner unit j Rails
A 1-k
1-l
1-j B
1-j
1-k A
2) Apply grease on each rail (A).
* Install the drive wire in the order of alphabetical shown in the

figure below. Wind the drive wire 10 turns around the wind-
ing pulley. The 9th turn must be fixed with a screw.
A 1-j
G
A F
1-j B
D E
A
C
1-j
A G
10 9 8 1
1-j A D F
E 1 8 9 10
B
A
C
f. Drive wire, Drive belt
Mainte g. Scanner motor

Unit Parts
nance
1 Scanner unit k Drive wire Unit Parts
l Drive belt 1 Scanner unit m Scanner motor
1-m
1-k
1-l
1-k
EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)

2) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screws (B), and i. Original cover SW
remove the scanner motor (C).
Unit Parts
1 Scanner unit o Original cover SW
C 1-m
1-o
A B
h. Scanner home position sensor

Unit Parts
EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
1 Scanner unit n Scanner home position sensor 2) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screw (B), and
remove the original cover SW (C).
1-n
1-o
C A
B
EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screw (B), and j. Document detection light collector PWB
remove the scanner home position sensor (C).
Unit Parts
1 Scanner unit p Document detection light collector PWB
1-n C
1-p
1) Remove the upper cabinet left, the front cabinet upper, and the
operation panel base plate. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL
OUTFIT".)
2) Remove the operation panel unit. (Refer to the "[B] OPERA-
TION PANEL SECTION".)

3) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the protection sheet 6) Remove the screws (C), and remove the cover (D). Remove
(B). Remove the screws (C), and remove the document detec- the document detection light emitting PWB (E).
tion light collector PWB (D).
D
B E 1-q
D 1-p
C
C
C
C
k. Document detection light emitting PWB
1 2 3
Unit Parts
1 Scanner unit q Document detection light emitting PWB
1-q
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. (Refer to the [A]

EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2) Remove the DSPF unit. (Refer to the "[C] DSPF SECTION".)
3) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass. (Refer to the a.
Table glass, SPF glass.)
4) Remove the upper cabinet rear. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL
OUTFIT".)
5) Remove the screw (A), and remove the light emitting unit (B).

4. Maintenance
When moving the copy lamp unit manually for cleaning or adjusting the scanner section and the mirror section, be sure to turn OFF the main
power source (the power switch inside the front cabinet) and confirm that the power LED on the operation panel is OFF.

Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Monochrome
When 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000 Block/Item No.
supply,
No. Part name calling K K K K K K K K K K (Only the
Mechanical
replacement
parts
parts are
described.)
1 Mirror/lends/reflector/CCD Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Table glass/SPF glass parts { { { { { { { { { { {
3 Scanner lamp { { { { { { { { { { {
4 Rails Specified position
5 Drive belt/drive wire
4
2
1
1
3
1

[E] MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION
CN1 40 F-GND 40 CN15 CN14

5VN 1 1 5VN 1 25 5VN 24V3 18 10 24V3 10 2 24V3 1
D-GND 2 17 D-GND 17 27 D-GND /MPUC 20 12 /MPUC 12 1 /MPUC 2
SIN3 3 2 SIN3 2 29 SIN3 B30B-PNDZS-1
SELIN1 4 18 SELIN1 18 31 SELIN1
SELIN2 5 3 SELIN2 3 33 SELIN2 PCU
SELIN3 6 19 SELIN3 19 35 SELIN3
APPD1 7 4 APPD1 4 37 APPD1 PWB
APPD2 8 20 APPD2 20 39 APPD2 CN4 P DF1B-28DE S
ADUD3 9 24V4 1 1 24V4 1 1 24V4
POD3 10 21 POD3 21 22 POD3 P-GND 3 3 P-GND 3 2 P-GND
MPFD 11 6 MPFD 6 24 MPFD VH-2P
5VNPD 16 32 5VNPD 32 26 5VNPD D-GND 5 5 D-GND 5 1 D-GND
HWPD 13 7 HWPD 7 28 HWPD 5VN 7 7 5VN 7 2 5VN
TH_M 14 23 TH_M 23 30 TH_M /CPFM_D 9 9 /CPFM_D 9 3 /CPFM_D
HUD_M 15 8 HUD_M 8 2 HUD_M /CPFM_CK 11 11 /CPFM_CK 11 4 /CPFM_CK
S16B-PHDSS-B 27 P-GND 27 CPFM_LD 13 13 CPFM_LD 13 5 CPFM_LD
15 24V3 15 34 24V3 CPFM_GAIN 15 15 CPFM_GAIN 15 6 CPFM_GAIN
31 /MPGS 31 36 /MPGS CPFM_CW/CCW 2 2 CPFM_CW/CCW 2 7 CPFM_CW/CCW
30 /MPFS 30 38 /MPFS B40B-PNDZS-1 B07B-PASK
14 24V3 14 40 24V3
P QR/P4 40PIN S B40B-PNDZS-1
CPFM
LCCM
RIGHT
DOOR MPUC
I/F PWB CN1 P DF1B-28DE S
INT24V1 5 25 INT24V1 25 2 INT24V1
INT24V1 6
B6B-PASK-1
27 INT24V1 27 5 INT24V1
B6B-XH
4
1
DRIVER
PWB MPFD
2 3 MPFS
5
HUD_M/TH_M
MPED
DF11-6DP-SP2
2 5VN(LED
4 5VN(LED
6 5VN(LED
3 5VN(LED)
1 D_GND
3 D_GND
5 D_GND
2 D-GND
1 MPFD MTOP2 MTOP1
GP1S73 179228-3 MPWS
R
1
SM2P
24V3
P
1
MPGS
CN3(2/2)
8
7
24V3
/MPFS
1
2 2 /MPFS 2
MPLD1
MPED 7 6 MPED 3 1 MPED
2 D-GND
D-GND 8 5 D-GND 4 3 5VN(LED)
5VN(LED) 9 4 5VN(LED) 5 GP1S73 179228-3
PHNR-5-H + BU05P-TR-P-H R SM2P P
2 /MPGS 7 4 /MPGS 2 2 /MPGS 2
3 24V3 6 5 24V3 1 1 24V3 1
1 5VN(LED) 5
2 D-GND 4
MPFD 10 1 MPFD 8 3 MPFD 3
CN3(1/2) PHNR-14-H + BU14P-TR-P-H PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H

MPLD1 16 12 MPLD1 3 6 MPLD1 4 1 MPLD1
5 D-GND 5 2 D-GND
5VNPD(LED) 18 11 5VNPD(LED) 4 4 5VNPD(LED) 6 3 5VNPD(LED)
GP1S73 179228-3
5VN 19 10 5VN 5 3 5VN 7 3 5VN
MPWS 20 9 MPWS 6 2 MPWS 8 2 MPWS
1 D-GND 9 1 D-GND
PHNR-3
MTOP2 22 8 MTOP2 7 1 MTOP2
2 D-GND
GP1S73 179228-3
MTOP1 25 6 MTOP1 9 1 MTOP1
2 D-GND
GP1S73 179228-3
5VN 28 4 5VN 11 1 5VN
HUD_M 29 3 HUD_M 12 2 HUD_M
TH_M 31 1 TH_M 14 4 TH_M
S32B-PHDSS-B ZHR-4
8
7
2
4
5
3
1
6
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-8DP-SP1
MX-7000N MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION E 1

CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section
HUD_M/TH_M Temperature/humidity sensors Detects temperature/humidity
LCCM LCC transport motor Drives the LCC transport motor
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Manual paper feed tray paper empty detection
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Manual paper feed tray paper entry detection
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper Controls the paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Controls the manual paper feed gate solenoid Open/Close
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detector Manual paper feed tray paper length detection
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/OFF
MPWS Manual paper feed tray paper width Manual paper feed tray paper width detection
detector
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (storage position)
detector 1
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (pulling-out position)
detector 2

1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double feed
3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed Pick up paper, and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
tray)
double feed
5 Transport roller 16 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. Transports
paper fed from the manual feed tray to the transport roller 8
2. Operational descriptions 3. Disassembly and assembly

The paper pickup roller moves up and down to press paper and Unit Page
separates the top paper. Paper which had been separated is fed to A Manual paper feed tray unit E- 3
the paper feed roller. B Manual paper feed unit E- 6
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the paper transport section,
and the separation roller prevents double feed. A. Manual paper feed tray unit
ON/OFF of the paper pickup roller and the paper feed roller are Unit Parts Page
controlled of by the manual paper feed clutch. 1 Manual paper feed a Temperature/humidity E- 4
Then, paper is transported to the resist roller by the manual paper tray unit sensors
transport roller. b Manual paper feed tray pull-
out position detector 2
c Manual paper feed tray pull-
out position detector 1
d Manual paper feed tray paper
width detector
e Manual feed paper length E- 5
detector
1 1-a
1-b
1-d 1-c
1-e

(1) Manual paper feed tray unit 3) Remove the screw (E), and remove the lock pawl (F) and the
lever (G). Remove the screw (H), and disengage the pawl (I),
Unit and remove the cabinet (J).
1 Manual paper feed tray unit
1
I
E
J
F G
4) Remove the screw (K), and remove the slide rail (L).
2) Remove the screws (C), and remove the cabinet (D).

L
5) Remove the screws (M). Remove the screw (N), and remove
the inner cover (O).
C
D
M
O
C

6) Remove the screws (P), and remove the cabinet (Q). a. Temperature/humidity sensors, Manual paper feed tray
pull-out position detector 2, Manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 1, Manual paper feed tray paper width
detector
Q P
Unit Parts
1 Manual paper feed a Temperature/humidity sensors
tray unit b Manual paper feed tray pull-out position
P detector 2
c Manual paper feed tray pull-out position
detector 1
d Manual paper feed tray paper width
detector
1-a
P 1-b
1-d 1-c
7) Remove the shaft (R). Remove the screws (S), and remove
the manual paper feed tray unit (T).
1) Remove the manual paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "(1)
Manual paper feed tray unit".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the cover (B).
A
1 T
S R A
8) Remove the cover (U), and disconnect the connector (V).
U B
3) Lift the cover (D), so that it push into rear side (C), and remove
the cover (D). Disengage the pawl (E). Lift the tray (F) and dis-
connect the connector (G).
C
D
E
V
F
G

4) Remove the temperature/humidity sensor (H), the manual 3) Lift the cover (D), so that it push into rear side (C), and remove
paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2 (I), the manual the cover (D). Disengage the pawl (E). Lift the tray (F) and dis-
paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1 (J). Disconnect the connect the connector (G).
connectors (K).
C
H 1-a D
K E
K
1-b I
1-c J
F
G
5) Remove the manual paper feed tray paper width detector (L).
Disconnect the connector (M). E
L 1-d 4) Remove the screw (H), and remove the lower cover (I).
M
I
b. Manual feed paper length detector
Unit Parts
1 Manual paper feed e Manual feed paper length detector
tray unit
5) Disconnect the connector (J), and remove the manual feed

paper length detector (K).
J
1-e
1) Remove the manual paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "(1) K 1-e

B. Manual paper feed unit a. Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray), Paper feed
roller (Manual paper feed tray), Separation roller (Manual
Mainte paper feed tray)
Unit Parts Page
nance
1 Manual a Paper pickup roller (Manual { E- 6 Mainte
Unit Parts
paper feed paper feed tray) nance
unit b Paper feed roller (Manual { 1 Manual paper feed a Paper pickup roller {
paper feed tray) unit (Manual paper feed tray)
c Separation roller (Manual { b Paper feed roller {
paper feed tray) (Manual paper feed tray)
d Manual paper feed gate E- 7 c Separation roller {
solenoid (Manual paper feed tray)
e Transport roller 16 (Drive) { E- 7
f Manual feed paper entry
detection
g Torque limiter E- 8 1-b
h Manual feed paper empty E- 8
detection
i Paper pickup solenoid E- 9
(Manual paper feed)
1-a
1-c
1-e
1-b
1-f 1-i 1) Disengage the pawl (A), and remove the cover (B).
1-h
1-g
A
1-a
1-c
1 1-d
B
(1) Manual paper feed unit
Unit
1 Manual paper feed unit
2) Disengage the pawl (C), and remove the paper pickup roller
(Manual paper feed tray) (D), the paper feed roller (Manual
paper feed tray) (E).
1
C
1-b E
1) Remove the manual paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "A.
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the manual paper feed
unit (B). Disconnect the connector (C).
D 1-a
A
A
1 B A

3) Open the cover (F). Disengage the pawl (G), and remove the c. Transport roller 16 (Drive), Manual feed paper entry
separation roller (manual paper feed tray) (H). detection
Mainte
G Unit Parts
nance
1 Manual paper feed e Transport roller 16 (Drive) {
unit f Manual feed paper entry
detection
1-c H 1-e
F 1-f
b. Manual paper feed gate solenoid
Unit Parts
1 Manual paper feed d Manual paper feed gate solenoid
unit 1) Remove the manual paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "A.
2) Remove the manual paper feed unit. (Refer to the "(1) Manual
paper feed unit".)
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the support plate (B).
Remove the spring (C).
A
B
A
1-d
2) Remove the manual paper feed unit. (Refer to the "(1) Manual C
paper feed unit".)
Remove the spring (C).
A 4) Remove the E-ring (D), and remove the collar (E), the gear (F),
the parallel pin (G), the E-rings (H), and the bearings (I).
B
Remove the transport roller 16 (Drive) (J).
A
1-e J
H
C
I
G I
E
4) Disengage the pawls (D), and remove the manual paper feed
gate solenoid (E). Disconnect the connector (F).
H
D F
E 1-d

5) Remove the screw (K), and remove the sensor mounting plate 5) Remove the E-ring (H). Shift the shaft (I), and remove the
(L). Disconnect the connector (M), and remove the manual torque limiter (J).
feed paper entry detection (N).
H J 1-g
L K
1-f N
M I
e. Manual feed paper empty detection
d. Torque limiter Unit Parts

1 Manual paper feed h Manual feed paper empty detection
Mainte unit
Unit Parts
nance
1 Manual paper feed g Torque limiter
unit
1-h
1-g
paper feed unit".)
3) Disengage the pawl (A), and remove the cover (B) and the
screws (C), and remove the paper guide (D).
paper feed unit".) C
3) Remove the transport roller 16 (Drive). (Refer to the "C. Trans- D
port roller 16 (Drive), Manual paper entry detection".) C
4) Remove the E-rings (A), and remove the gears (B), the parallel
pins (C), the E-ring (D), and the bearings (E). Remove the
screws (F), and remove the support plate (G).
A
G
F
E
B
C 4) Remove the screw (E), and remove the sensor mounting plate
B
F (F). Disconnect the connector (G), and remove the manual
feed paper empty detection (H).
A
D F E
E
F C B
1-h H

f. Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) 6) Remove the paper guide unit (K).
Unit Parts
1 Manual paper feed i Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper K
unit feed)
1-i
7) Remove the spring (L). Remove the screws (M), and remove
the support plate (N).
2) Remove the manual paper feed unit. (Refer to the "(1) Manual M
paper feed unit".) M N
3) Remove the transport roller 16 (Drive). (Refer to the "C. Trans-
port roller 16 (Drive), manual feed paper entry detection".)
4) Remove the E-rings (A), and remove the gears (B), the parallel
pins (C), the E-ring (D), and the bearings (E). Remove the
screws (F), and remove the support plate (G).
L
G
F
E
8) Remove the screws (O), and remove the paper pickup sole-
C noid (Manual paper feed) (P).
B
F
P 1-i
A
D
E
F C B
5) Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screws (I), and
remove the support plate (J).
O
O
J
9) Remove the spring (Q), and remove the solenoid arm (R).
Remove the pin (S), and remove the solenoid plunger (T).
I
T 1-i
S
H
I Q
I
R

4. Maintenance
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
replacement
parts
parts are
described.)
1 Paper pickup roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { {
2 Paper feed roller parts { { { { { { { { { {
3 Separation roller { { { { { { { { { {
4 Torque limiter
5 Each transport roller { { { { { { { { { {
4
1
2

5
[F]
MX-7000N
5
3
1
2
A. Tandem paper feed tray unit
R SM-4P-N P P DF1B-26DE S CN5

PAP-04V
R SM-10P-N P
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1
5
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 2
PAP-04V 5 D-GND 5
D-GND 1 6 T2SPD 6 19 T2SPD 19 27 T2SPD
4
T2SPD 2 7 5VNPD 7
5VNPD 3 8 D-GND 8
GP1A71 PHR-3 9 T1SPD 9 21 T1SPD 21 29 T1SPD
TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION
10 5VNPD 10
T1LUD
D-GND 1
T1PED
T1SPD 2
7
6
5
2
1
7
6
5
2
1
5VNPD 3
GP1A71 PHR-3
1
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-8DP-SP1
T1SPD
3
P SM-2PIN R
T1PUS
2
1 24V3 1 23 24V3 23 31 24V3
2 /T1PUS 2 25 /T1PUS 25 33 /T1PUS
4
B34B-PNDZS-1
CN6
P-GND 1 11 P-GND
/T2LUM 2 13 /T2LUM
B2P-PH-K-S
P-GND 1 15 P-GND
/T1LUM 2 17 /T1LUM
B2P-PH-K-S B40B-PNDZS-1
T2SPD
T2LUD
T1PFC
T1LUM
T2PED
MX-7000N TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION F 1

TANSET
PCU PWB
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
S DF1B-28DE P CN4
24V4 1 1 24V4 1 1 24V4
VH-2P
T2PUS
5VN 2 7 5VN 7 7 5VN
/CPFM_D 3 9 /CPFM_D 9 9 /CPFM_D
CPFM_LD 5 13 CPFM_LD 13 13 CPFM_LD
CPFM_GAIN 6 15 CPFM_GAIN 15 15 CPFM_GAIN
CPFM_CW/CCW 7 2 CPFM_CW/CCW2 2 CPFM_CW/CCW
B07B-PASK 4 24V3 4 4 24V3
CPFM
PHNR-02-H + BU02P-TR-P-H 6 /TRC1 6 6 /TRC1
1 24V3 2
2 /T2PFC 1 10 /T2PFC 10 10 /T2PFC
T2LUM
T2PFC
1 24V3 2
2 /T1PFC 1 12 /T1PFC 12 12 /T1PFC
1 24V3 2
2 /T2PUS 1 14 /T2PUS 14 14 /T2PUS
B40B-PNDZS-1
4
1
6 24V3
5 24V3
4 24V3
1 24V3
D=GND
D=GND
P S
DF11-6DP-SP1
DF1B-34DE CN3
TANSET 2 32 TANSET 32 32 TANSET
5VN 3 34 5VN 34 34 5VN
GP1A71 PHR-3 B34B-PNDZS-1
T1LUD Tandem tray 1 upper limit detection Detects upper limit of tandem tray 1
T1LUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1) Drives the paper tray lift plate.
T1PED Tandem tray 1 paper empty detection Detects the paper empty of tandem tray 1
T1PFC Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch Controls the paper feed roller ON/OFF on the paper feed section of tandem tray 1
T1PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1) Controls the paper pickup
T1SPD Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity Detects remaining quantity of tandem tray 1
detector
T2LUD Tandem tray 2 upper limit detection Detects upper limit of tandem tray 2
T2LUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 2) Drives the paper tray lift plate.
T2PED Tandem tray 2 paper empty detection Detects the paper empty of tandem tray 2
T2PFC Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch Controls the paper feed roller ON/OFF on the paper feed section of tandem tray 2
T2PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 2) Controls the paper pickup
T2SPD Tandem tray 2 paper remaining quantity Detects remaining quantity of tandem tray 2
detector
TANSET Tandem tray installation detection Detects the installation state of tandem tray

1 Paper pickup roller Pick up paper, and feeds it to the paper feed roller
(Tandem No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed tray)
2 Paper feed roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section
3 Separation roller Separates paper to prevent Double Feed
double feed
5 Lift wire Transmits the paper tray lift-up motor power to the paper feed tray

CN3 S DF1B-34 P 7 D-GND 6 3 D-GND
C3PFD 13 13 C3PFD 13 8 C3PFD 5 2 C3PFD
C3LUD 15 15 C3LUD 15 9 5VN 4 1 5VN
C3PED 17 17 C3PED 17 1 D-GND 12 GP2A200L 179228-3
2 C3LUD 11 1 D-GND
C3PUS 19 19 C3PUS 19 3 5VNPD 10 2 C3LUD
C3PWD 21 21 C3PWD 21 4 D-GND 9 3 5VNPD
VREF 23 23 VREF 23 5 C3PED 8 GP1A71 PHR-3
C4PFD 25 25 C4PFD 25 6 5VNPD 7 1 D-GND
C4LUD 27 27 C4LUD 27 10 +24V 3 2 C3PED
C4PED 29 29 C4PED 29 11 C3PUS 2 3 5VNPD
24V3 31 31 24V3 31 12 1 GP1A71 PHR-3
C4PUS 33 33 C4PUS 33 PHNR-2-H
BU2P-TR-P-H
B34B-PNDZS-1 2 +24V 1
1 C3PUS 2
3 C3PWD 3 2 C3PWD
2 D-GND 2 1 GND
1 VREF 1 3 VREF
P SM3pin_N R Slide Volume
PHNR-12-H
BU12P-TR-P-H
B. Tray paper feed unit
7 D-GND 6 3 D-GND
8 C4PFD 5 2 C4PFD
9 5VN 4 1 5VN
1 D-GND 12 GP2A200L 179228-3
2 C4LUD 11 1 D-GND
3 5VNPD 10 2 C4LUD
4 D-GND 9 3 5VNPD
5 C4PED 8 GP1A71 PHR-3
6 5VNPD 7 1 D-GND
10 +24V 3 2 C4PED
11 C4PUS 2 3 5VNPD
12 1 GP1A71 PHR-3
PHNR-2-H
12
BU2P-TR-P-H
10
11
2 +24V 1
1 C4PUS 2
1
C3PED
8
2
3
7
C3LUD
12
11
10
C3SS3
C3PUS
C3PFD
6
C4PED
4
PCU PWB
9
1 2
3
C3SS1
C4LUD
C3SS2
C3PWD
C3SPD
C3SS4
C4SS3
C4PUS
C4PFD
4

9
DF1B-28DE P
C4SS1
S CN4
CPFM_CW/CCW 7 2 CPFM_CW/CCW 2 2 CPFM_CW/CCW
CPFM
C4SS2
C4SS4
C4SPD
C3PFC
C4PFC

5VN 2 7 5VN 7 7 5VN
B07B-PASK
24V4 1 1 24V4 1 1 24V4
VH-2P
S6P-PH-K-S
TRC2
6 C4SS4 PHNR-02-H + BU02P-TR-P-H

5 C4SS3 1 /C3PFC 2
4 C4SS2 2 24V3 1 P DF1B-34 S CN3
3 C4SS1 PHNR-02-H + BU02P-TR-P-H 6 /C3PFC 6 6 /C3PFC
2 D-GND
1 /C4PFC 2 8 /C4PFC 8 8 /C4PFC
CN5 1 14 S6P-PH-K-S 2 24V3 1 10 /TRC2 10 10 /TRC2
C4SS4 34 26 C4SS4 26 2 C4SS4 13 6 C3SS4 B34B-PNDZS-1
C4SS3 32 24 C4SS3 24 3 C4SS3 12 5 C3SS3
1 /TRC2 2
C4SS2 30 22 C4SS2 22 4 C4SS2 11 4 C3SS2
2 24V3 1
PCU PWB
C4SS1 28 20 C4SS1 20 5 C4SS1 10 3 C3SS1

C3SS4 26 2 D-GND B2P-PH-K-S CN6
18 C3SS4 18 6 C3SS4 9
P-GND 1 12 P-GND
C3SS3 24 16 C3SS3 16 7 C3SS3 8 PHR-3 GP1A71
3 5VNPD /C3LUM 2 14 /C3LUM
C3SS2 22 14 C3SS2 14 8 C3SS2 7
2 C4SPD B2P-PH-K-S 16 P-GND
C3SS1 20 12 C3SS1 12 9 C3SS1 6
P-GND 1 18 /C4LUM
5VNPD 18 10 5VNPD 10 10 5VNPD 5 1 D-GND
/C4LUM 2 B40B-PNDZS-1
C4SPD 16 8 C4SPD 8 11 C4SPD 4 PHR-3 GP1A71
C3LUM

C4LUM
C3SPD 12 4 C3SPD 4 13 C3SPD 2 2 C3SPD

B34B-PNDZS-1 S DF1B-26DE P PHNR-14-H+BU14P-TR-K-S
C3LUD Tray 3 upper limit detection (Lift HP Detects upper limit of tray 3
detection)
C3LUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 3) Drives the paper tray lift plate
C3PED Tray 3 paper empty detection Detects the paper empty of tray 3
C3PFC Tray 3 paper feed clutch Controls the paper feed roller ON/OFF on the paper feed section of tray 3
C3PFD Tray 3 paper entry detection Detects paper entry from tray 3
C3PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 3) Controls the paper pickup
C3PWD Tray 3 paper width detection Detects paper width of tray 3
C3SPD Tray 3 remaining quantity detection Detects remaining quantity of tray 3
C3SS2 Tray 3 rear edge detection 2 Detects the tray that is inserted from the detection of either tray 3 rear edge 1, 2, 3 or 4.
C3SS3 Tray 3 rear edge detection 3 Detects paper size of tray 3
C4LUD Tray 4 upper limit detection (Lift HP Detects upper limit of tray 4
detection)
C4LUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 4) Drives the paper tray lift plate
C4PED Tray 4 paper empty detection Detects the paper empty of tray 4
C4PFC Tray 4 paper feed clutch Controls the paper feed roller ON/OFF on the paper feed section of tray 4
C4PFD Tray 4 paper entry detection Detects the paper entry from tray 4
C4PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 4) Controls the paper pickup
C4SPD Tray 4 remaining quantity detection Detects remaining quantity of tray 4
C4SS2 Tray 4 rear edge detection 2 Detects the tray that is inserted from the detection of either tray 4 rear edge 1, 2, 3 or 4.
C4SS3 Tray 4 rear edge detection 3 Detects paper size of tray 4.
TRC2 Vertical transport clutch lower Controls the transport roller 1, 2, transport roller 3, 4 ON/OFF.

1 Paper pickup roller (No. 3 / No. 4 paper Pick up paper, and feeds it to the paper feed roller
feed tray)
2 Paper feed roller (No. 3 / No. 4 paper feed Feeds paper to the paper transport section
tray)
3 Separation roller (No. 3 / No. 4 paper feed Separates paper to prevent double feed
tray)
double feed
5 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports the paper from the paper feed tray 4 to the transport roller 2
6 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports the paper from the transport roller 1 to the transport roller 4
7 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports the paper from the paper feed tray 3 to the transport roller 4
8 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports the paper from the transport roller 2 and the transport roller 3 to the transport roller 5
9 Paper size detection plate The rear edge detection detects the paper size, by changing position to synchronizing with the
rear end plate.
10 Lift plate Lifts up the paper, and always keeps constant the paper feed position.
11 Regulation plate Regulates short side direction of the paper
12 Rear end plate Regulates long side direction of the paper

2. Operational descriptions B. Tray paper feed
A. Tandem paper feed (1) Preliminary operation before paper feed
When the paper is set and the paper feed tray is inserted, the
(1) Paper size of each paper feed tray
pickup roller moves down and the paper feed tray sensor turns
The paper feed tray 1 is used exclusively for A4, 11 x 8.5, or B5 ON.
paper size.
The lift-up motor operates to lift the rotating plate.
The paper feed tray 2 is used for A4 (11 x 8.5) paper size.
The paper upper limit sensor turns on to stop the rotating plate at
(2) Paper feed operation the specified position.
1) When copy/print operation is started, the motors (CPFM) and (2) Paper feed operation
the clutch (T1PFC) are turned on to turn on the solenoid
When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch
(T1PUS) at the timing of paper pickup. This rotates and falls
are turned ON and the pickup roller is rotated in the paper pickup
the take-up roller to pick up paper.
timing to feed paper.
2) At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to feed paper to
At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to feed paper to
the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates
the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates to
to prevent against double feed of paper.
prevent against double feed of paper.
(3) Remaining paper detection
Remaining paper detection is performed according to four
stages, i.e. three stages with paper and one stage with no paper,
and the result is displayed.
(4) Remaining paper detection method
The number of remaining sheets is determined according to the
number of times the remaining paper sensor changes from the
time the paper feed tray starts lifting up to the time when the
upper detection sensor comes ON.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and changes
in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
Detects remaining paper CPED
by the paper empty sensor (empty sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining paper
Not detects the paper detection actuator
CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low
Remaining paper 1/3 position
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low

3. Disassembly and assembly 2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the stopper (B). Remove
the screws (C), and remove the tandem paper feed tray unit
Unit Page (D).
A Tandem paper feed tray unit F- 6
B Tray paper feed unit F -11 B
C Others F -18
A. Tandem paper feed tray unit

C A
Mainte
Unit Parts Page
nance
1 Tandem a Paper pickup roller { F- 6
paper feed (Tandem No. 1 / No. 2
tray unit paper feed tray)
b Paper feed roller (Tandem {
No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed
tray)
c Separation roller (Tandem { F- 7
C
No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed D 1
tray)
d Torque limiter F- 8
e Lift wire (Rear) F- 8 a. Paper pickup roller (Tandem No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed tray),
f Lift wire (Front) F -10 Paper feed roller (Tandem No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed tray)
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1-a 1-d
1 Tandem paper feed a Paper pickup roller (Tandem {
1-b
tray unit No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed tray)
1-c 1-e b Paper feed roller (Tandem {
1 No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed tray)
1-a
1-b
1-d
1-c
1-f 1-b
1-a
1-b
(1) Tandem paper feed tray unit
1-a
Unit
1 Tandem paper feed tray unit 1) Pull out the tandem paper feed tray unit (A).
1) Remove the right lower door and right lower door cover. (Refer
to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT).

2) Disengage the pawls (B), and remove the paper guide (C). 1) Pull out the tandem paper feed tray unit (A).
B A
2) Remove the screw (B), and remove the paper guide (C).
3) Raise the tandem paper feed PG unit (D). Disengage the pawl
C
(E), and remove the paper pickup roller (Tandem No. 1 / No. 2
paper feed tray) (F), the paper feed roller (Tandem No. 1 / No.
2 paper feed tray) (G).
1-a F
B
1-b G E
3) Disengage the pawl (D), and remove the separation roller (E).
D
D
b. Separation roller (Tandem No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed tray)
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
E 1-c
1 Tandem paper feed c Separation roller (Tandem {
tray unit No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed tray)
1-c
1-c

c. Torque limiter 4) Remove the torque limiter (F).
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Tandem paper feed d Torque limiter
tray unit
1-d
F 1-d
d. Lift wire (Rear)
Unit Parts
1 Tandem paper feed e Lift wire (Rear)
tray unit
1-d
1-e
1) Pull out the tandem paper feed tray unit (A).
1) Remove the right lower door and the right lower door cover.
(Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2) Remove the screw (B), and remove the paper guide (C).
2) Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "(1)
Tandem paper feed tray unit".)
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the cassette positioning
plate (B).
B A
3) Remove the screws (D), and remove the separation roller unit
(E). B
D
E

4) Remove the E-ring (C). Slide the pulley (D) to rear side, turn it 7) Remove the wires (L).
clockwise to loosen the wires (E). * When installing, pass the wire through clamp (M).
E C 1-e L
1-e
D L M
1-e
L
L
1-e
5) Disengage the pawls (F), and remove the wires (E).
* When installing the pulley, turn it counterclockwise, and fit

the shaft hole (O) of pulley and the T form pin (N) position on
the shaft, insert it.
F
E
* When installing, the order of the installation on R side is sil-

ver (G), and red (H). L side is blue (I), and red (J). N
O
H J
6) Remove the resin E-rings (K).

e. Lift wire (Front) 5) Disengage the pawls (G), and remove the wires (F).
Unit Parts
1 Tandem paper feed f Lift wire (Front)
tray unit
* When installing, the order of the installation on R side is sil-

ver (H), and red (I). L side is blue (J), and red (K).
1-f
to the EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2) Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "(1) J
H
3) Remove the screws (A) and washers (B), and remove the front
cabinet (C).
K
I
A
B 6) Remove the resin E-rings (L).
A
B L
L
A L
B
B
A C
A
B
4) Remove the E-ring (D). Slide the pulley (E) to front side, turn it 7) Remove the wires (M).
counterclockwise to loosen the wire (F). * When installing, pass the wires (M) through clamp (N).
1-f M
D F
M 1-f
E
1-f N
M
1-f
M

* When installing the pulley, turn it clockwise, and fit the shaft (1) Tray paper feed unit
hole (P) of pulley and the T form pin (O) position on the
shaft, insert it. Unit
1 Tray paper feed unit
O
1) Remove the right lower door, the right cabinet lower, and the
right lower door cover. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUT-
FIT".)
2) Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to the PHOTOCONDUC-
TOR SECTION.)
3) Reomve the resin E-ring (A), and remove the right vertical
transport unit (B).
B. Tray paper feed unit

Mainte
Unit Parts Page
nance
1 Tray paper a Paper pickup roller (No. 3 / { F -12
feed unit No. 4 paper feed tray) B
b Paper feed roller (No. 3 / {
No. 4 paper feed tray)
c Separation roller (No. 3 / { F -12
d Transport roller 2, 4 (Drive) { F -13
e Torque limiter F -13
f Paper empty detection F -14
g Upper limit detection (Lift
HP detection)
A
h Entry detection F -15
i Transport roller 1, 3 (Drive) { F -16
j Paper pickup solenoid F -17
4) Remove the screws (C), and remove the supporting point
lower (D) and the paper guides (E).
1-g 1-j
1-a
1-f
E
D
1-b
1-e
1-d
C E
1-h
1
1-c D
1-i

5) Disconnect the connector (F). Remove the screws (G), and 1) Remove the paper feed tray (A).
remove the tray paper feed unit (H). Remove the screws (I)
from tray paper feed unit (H), and remove the fixing plate (J).
A
F
G
H 1
2) Disengage the pawl (B), and remove the paper guide (C).
1 H
B
J
I C
a. Paper pickup roller (No. 3 / No. 4 paper feed tray), Paper

3) Disengage the pawl (D), and remove the paper pickup roller
feed roller (No. 3 / No. 4 paper feed tray)
(No. 3 / No. 4 paper feed tray) (E) and paper feed roller (No. 3
Mainte / No. 4 paper feed tray) (F).
Unit Parts
nance
1 Tray paper feed unit a Paper pickup roller (No. 3 / {
b Paper feed roller (No. 3 / No. {
D
4 paper feed tray)
1-a
1-a E F 1-b
b. Separation roller (No. 3 / No. 4 paper feed tray)
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1-b 1 Tray paper feed unit c Separation roller (No. 3 / No. {
4 paper feed tray)
1-c

1) Remove the paper feed tray (A). 4) Remove the E-ring (A), and remove the belt (B), the pulley (C),
and the parallel pin (D). Remove the E-ring (E), and remove
the bearing (F).
A
F
E
D
C
B
A
2) Disengage the pawl (B), and remove the separation roller (No.
3 / No. 4 paper feed tray) (C).
5) Remove the screw (G), and remove the earth plate (H), the E-
ring (I), and the bearing (J). Remove the transport roller 2, 4
(Dirve) (K).
H
G
J
B
C 1-c I
c. Transport roller 2, 4 (Drive) K 1-d
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Tray paper feed unit d Transport roller 2, 4 (Drive) { d. Torque limiter
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Tray paper feed unit e Torque limiter
1-d
1-e
FIT".)
2) Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to the [J] PHOTOCON- 1) Remove the right lower door, the right cabinet lower, and the
DUCTOR SECTION.) right lower door cover. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUT-
3) Remove the tray paper feed unit. (Refer to the "(1) Tray paper FIT".)
feed unit".) 2) Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to the [J] PHOTOCON-
DUCTOR SECTION.)
3) Remove the tray paper feed unit. (Refer to the "(1) Tray paper
feed unit".)

4) Remove the E-ring (A), the gear (B), the parallel pin (C), the E- 7) Slide the separation shaft (P), and remove the bearing (Q).
ring (D), and the bearing (E). Remove the screws (F), and Remove the separation shaft (P).
remove the paper guide unit (G).
D F
C B
P
E A
G
F
F Q
P
8) Remove the E-ring (R), and remove the coupling (S). Remove
the separation shaft (T), and remove the torque limiter (U).
5) Remove the spring (H). Remove the screws (I), and remove
the support plate (J). Remove the spring (K) and separation S
R
pressure release plate (L).
T
I
I J
H I
U 1-e
L
e. Paper empty detection, Upper limit detection (Lift HP
detection)
Unit Parts
1 Tray paper feed unit f Paper empty detection
g Upper limit detection (Lift HP detection)
6) Disengage the pawl (M), and remove the separation roller (N).
Remove the E-ring (O). 1-g
1-f
FIT".)
2) Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to the [J] PHTOCON-
DUCTOR SETCTION.)
feed unit".)
4) Remove the transport roller 2, 4 (Drive). (Refer to the "c.
Transport roller 2, 4 (Drive)".)

5) Remove the screws (A), and remove the paper guide (B). f. Entry detection
Unit Parts
1 Tray paper feed unit h Entry detection
6) Remove the screws (C) and the screws (D), and remove the
support plate (E). 1-h
C
D
D D 1) Remove the right lower door, the right cabinet lower, and the
right lower door cover. (Refer to the "A. EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
C C 2) Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to the [J] PHOTOCON-
DUCTOR SECTION.)
D
feed unit".)
5) Remove the screws (A), and remove the paper guide (B).
E
7) Remove the screws (F), and remove the paper empty detec-
tion (G) and the upper limit detection (Lift HP detection (H)). B
Disconnect the connectors (I).
A
I
F H 1-g
1-f G
A
I
support plate (E).
C
D
D D
C C
D

7) Remove the screw (F) and paper entry detection unit (G). Dis- 6) Remove the screws (C) and the screws (D), and remove the
connect the connector (H). Remove the screw (I) and paper support plate (E).
entry detection (J).
C
D D
D
F
C C
H
D
G
1-h J
I 7) Remove the E-ring (F), and remove the gear (G), the pulley
(H), and the parallel pin (I). Remove the E-ring (J), and remove
the bearing (K).
g. Transport roller 1, 3 (Drive)
Unit Parts
Mainte K
nance
J
1 Tray paper feed unit i Transport roller 1, 3 (Drive) {
I
H
G
F
8) Remove the screw (L), and remove the earth plate (M), the E-
ring (N), and the bearing (O). Remove the transport roller 1, 3
(Drive) (P).
1-i O
N
M
1-i P
right lower door cover. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUT- L
FIT".)
2) Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to the [J] PHOTOCON-
DUCTOR SECTION.)
feed unit".)

h. Paper pickup solenoid 7) Disconnect the connector (F), and remove the screws (G), and
remove the paper pickup solenoid unit (H).
Unit Parts
* When installing, arrange so that the arm (I) is under the
1 Tray paper feed unit j Paper pickup solenoid
take-up holder (J).
1-j J
I
H G
G
1) Remove the right lower door, the right cabinet lower, the right
lower door cover. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
DUCTOR SECTION.)
3) Remove the tray paper feed unit. (Refer to the "(1) Tray paper 8) Remove the screws (K), and remove the paper pickup sole-
feed unit".) noid (L).
4) Remove the transport roller 2, 4 (Drive). (Refer to the "c. * When installing, check to insure that the solenoid pin (M) is
Transport roller 2, 4 (Drive)".) engaged with the arm (N).
B
N M 1-j L
A
K
support plate (E).
C
D D
D
C
C
D

C. Others 3) Disconnect the connectors (E), and remove the screws (F),
and remove the paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1, 2) unit
Parts Page (G).
a Paper Tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1) F -17
b Paper Tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 2)
c Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1) F -17 G
d Tandem sensor PWB (Tandem tray 1) F -19 G
e Tandem sensor PWB (Tandem tray 2) E
f Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection F -20
E
g Tandem tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
h Tandem tray installation detection F -20
i Tray 3 paper remaining quantity detector F -20
j Tray 4 paper remaining quantity detector
k C3SS PWB F -21
F
F
l C4SS PWB
m Tray 3 width detection F -21 4) Disengage the pawls (H), and remove the coupling (I) and
spring (J) from the paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1, 2)
(K).
c a
g f
e d I
k b
H H
l h J
i
m j
a b K
(2) Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1)
(1) Paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1, 2) Parts

c Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1)
Parts
a Paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1)
b Paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 2) c
a 1) Remove the rear cabinet and rear cabinet lower. (Refer to the
"[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
b
2) Remove the screws (A), and open the control box (B).
1) Remove the rear cabinet and rear cabinet lower. (Refer to the
2) Remove the E-ring (A), and remove the belt (B), the pulley (C), B
and the parallel pin (D).
* When removal of the paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray
2), this procedure is required.
A
B
D C
B
A A

3) Disconnect the connector (C). Disengage the pawls (D), and 6) Remove the screws (L), and remove the mounting plate unit
remove the duct (E). (M) from the paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1) (N).
* When installing, pass the shaft (O) through into the arm (P).
D
O
C P
D
L
E
M
D c N
4) Disconnect the connector (F). Remove the screws (G), and

remove the ozone duct (H).
(3) Tandem sensor PWB (Tandem tray 1, 2)
Pa rts
d Tandem sensor PWB (Tandem tray 1)
e Tandem sensor PWB (Tandem tray 2)
G
H
d e
G
F
G
5) Disconnect the connector (I). Remove the screws (J), and 1) Remove the right lower door and the right lower door cover.
remove the paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1) unit (K). ([A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2) Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "A.
3) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screw (B), and
remove the tandem sensor PWB (Tandem tray 1, 2) (C).
K
C d
C e
J
J
C
I
B
A

(4) Tandem tray 1, 2 paper remaining quantity (5) Tandem tray installation detection
detection
Parts
Parts h Tandem tray installation detection
f Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
g Tandem tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
h
f g
to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2) Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "A.
3) Disconnect the connectors (A), and remove the screws (B). A
Remove the harness (D) from the wire saddles (C), and
remove the lock arm unit (E). B
A E
A
B
C
3) Remove the tandem tray installation detection (C). Disconnect
A the connector (D) from tandem tray installation detection (C).
B
D B
4) Disconnect the connectors (F), and remove the tandem tray 1

paper remaining quantity detector (G) and the tandem tray 2 D
paper remaining quantity detector (H).
C h
(6) Tray 3, 4 remaining quantity detection

H g
F F Parts
i Tray 3 remaining quantity detection
f G j Tray 4 remaining quantity detection

1) Remove the paper feed tray (A). 2) Disconnect the connector (B). Remove the screw (C), and
remove the holder (D).
A
D
2) Remove the screw (B), and remove the cover (C). Disconnect
the connector (D), and remove the tray 3, 4 remaining quantity
detection (E).
3) Disengage the pawls (E), and remove the C3SS, C4SS PWB
unit (F). Remove the springs (G) from the C3SS, C4SS PWB
(H).
G
E i j G
D
B
k l H G
C
E F E
(7) C3SS, C4SS PWB
Parts
k C3SS PWB
l C4SS PWB
(8) Tray 3 width detection
k Parts
m Tray 3 width detection
l
1) Remove the paper feed tray (A).
A
FIT".)
DUCTOR SECTION.)
3) Remove the tray paper feed unit. (Refer to the "B. Tray paper
feed unit".)

4) Remove the screws (A), and remove the width detection unit
(B). Disconnect the connector (C).
B
C A
5) Remove the spring (D). Disengage the pawl (E), and remove
the paper width detection mounting base (F).
6) Remove the width detection arm (G). Remove the screw (H),
and remove the tray 3 width detection (I).
* When installing the width detection arm (G), engage to the
projection (J) of tray 3 width detection (I).
H
G
m I

4. Maintenance
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
replacement
parts
parts are
described.)
1 Paper pickup roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { {
2 Paper feed roller parts { { { { { { { { { {
3 Separation roller { { { { { { { { { {
4 Torque limiter
5 Each transport roller { { { { { { { { { {
1
2
3 4
1
2
4
2
1
4
5
3
2
1
4
5
3

[G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION

A. Paper pass unit
CPFM_CW/CCW
PCU PWB
CPFM_GAIN
/CPFM_CK
CPFM_LD
B34B-PNDZS-1
/CPFM_D
/TANCL
D-GND
P-GND
T1PPD1
T1PPD2
24V3
24V4
5VN
5VNPD
D-GND
5VN
B40B-PNDZS-1
21
19
17
11
CN4
9
15
13
11
8
4
9
7
5
3
1
15
13
11
9
7
5
13
11
P
2
3
1
9
3
1
8
4
CPFM_CW/CCW
CPFM_GAIN
/TANCL
/CPFM_CK
T1PPD1
T1PPD2
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_D
DF1B-28DE
5VNPD
D-GND
24V3
D-GND
P-GND
5VN
24V4
5VN
8
4
13
11
3
1
15
13
11
S
2
9
7
5
3
1
DF11-6DP-SP1
DF11-8DP-SP1
24V3 1
5VNPD 1
24V3 3
5VNPD 3
D-GND 1
D-GND 3
1
2
D-GND 4
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
/TANCL
CPFM_CW/CCW
CPFM_GAIN
P
24V3
6
5
4
3
2
1
/CPFM_CK
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_D
D-GND
P-GND
B07B-PASK
24V4
5VN
SM-6P-N
T1PPD1
T1PPD2
TANCL
VH-2P
5VNPD
D-GND
D-GND
5VN
2
1
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
CPFM
GP2A200L 179228-3
GP2A200L 179228-3
3
2
1
3
2
1
T1PPD1
T1PPD2
5VNPD
D-GND
D-GND
5VN
T1PPD1
T1PPD2

T1PPD1 Tandem tray 1 transport detector 1 Detects entry of the paper from the tandem tray 1
T1PPD2 Tandem tray 1 transport detector 2 Detects pass of the paper from the tandem tray 1
TANCL Tandem tray transport clutch Controls the ON/OFF of the transport roller 12 and 13

1 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports the paper from the tandem tray 1 to the transport roller 13
MX-7000N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION G 1

B. Vertical transport unit
S DF1B-28DE P CN4
24V4 1 1 24V4 1 1 24V4
VH-2P

5VN 2 7 5VN 7 7 5VN
1 24V3 2 4 24V3 4 4 24V3
2 /TRC1 1 6 /TRC1 6 6 /TRC1
DF11-6DP-SP1
CPFM
2
1
24V3
24V3
TRC1
PCU PWB
T2PPD
DSW_D
2
PHNR-03-H + BU03P-TR-P-H P DF1B -34 S CN3

T2PPD 2 1 T2PPD 3 9 T2PPD 9 9 T2PPD
1 5VN 1 3 5VN 1 5 5VN 5 5 5VN
GP2A200L 179228-3 B34B-PNDZS-1
DF11-8DP-SP1 (B)
DF11-8DP-SP1 (A)
2
1
2
1
D=GND
D=GND
5VN
5VN

T2PPD Tandem tray 2 paper presence detector Detects pass of the paper from the tandem tray 2
TRC1 Vertical transport clutch upper Controls the ON/OFF of the transport roller 5, 6
DSW-D Right lower door open/close detection Detects open/close of the right lower door

2 Transport roller 6 (Drive) Transports the paper from the transport roller 5 and the tandem tray 1 to the transport roller 7

2
1
No.
LPFC
LPPD
LCCM
CPFM
Signal
D_MFPC/ 9 9 /CPFM_D 9 3 /CPFM_D
5VN 7 7 5VN 7 2 5VN
B07B-PASK

24V4 1 1 24V4 1 1 24V4
B40B-PNDZS-1 P DF1B-28DE S VH-2P
CN3 PHNR-03-H + BU03P-TR-P-H

LPPD 11 11 LPPD 11 3 LPPD 1 2 LPPD
PCU PWB
5VN 5 5 5VN 5 1 5VN 3 1 5VN
C. LCC transport unit
B34B-PNDZS-1 179228-3 GP2A200L
1
3
1
3
Paper feed motor

LCC transport motor
LCC transport clutch
SOCKET1 SOCKET1
5VN
5VN
P-GND 1 1 P-GND
D=GND
D=GND
HTMY_1 2 2 HTMY_1
DF11-8DP-SP1 (A)
DF11-8DP-SP1 (B)
Name
Name
HTMY_2 3 3 HTMY_2

2
PHTMK_1 4 4 PHTMK_1
PHTMK_2 5 5 PHTMK_2
WEB_M1 6 6 WEB_M1
WEB_M2 7 7 WEB_M2
5VN 8 8 5VN
LCC paper entry detection sensor

P-GND 9 9 P-GND
N,C 10 10 N,C
1
D-GND 11 11 D-GND
ADMH_A 12 12 ADMH_A
ADMH_/A 13 13 ADMH_/A
/ADMH_CNT 14 14 /ADMH_CNT
ADML_A 15 15 ADML_A
ADML_/A 16 16 ADML_/A
PSFM_CLK 17 17 PSFM_CLK
LCCM_A 18 18 LCCM_A
5VN 21 21 5VN
DMK_EN 24 24 DMK_EN
DMM_EN 25 25 DMM_EN
BTM_CLK 26 26 BTM_CLK
POM_A 27 27 POM_A
POM_/A 28 28 POM_/A
LPPD
D-GND 30 30 D-GND
P-GND 31 31 P-GND
HTMM_1 32 32 HTMM_1
HTMM_2 33 33 HTMM_2
HTMC_1 34 34 HTMC_1
Drives the paper feed section

HTMC_2 35 35 HTMC_2
Drives the LCC transport motor

HTMK_1 36 36 HTMK_1
HTMK_2 37 37 HTMK_2
5VN 38 38 5VN
P-GND 39 39 P-GND
CPFM
N,C 40 40 N,C
D-GND 41 41 D-GND
Detects entry of the paper from the LCC

ADMH_B 42 42 ADMH_B
ADML_B 45 45 ADML_B

LCCM_B 49 49 LCCM_B
5VN 51 51 5VN
Function/Operation
Function/Operation
DMC_EN 54 54 DMC_EN
LCCM
Transports the paper from the LCC to the transport roller 15

DMY_EN 55 55 DMY_EN
BTM_EN 57 57 BTM_EN
POM_B 58 58 POM_B
POM_/B 59 59 POM_/B
Controls the ON/OFF of the transport roller of LCC transport section

D-GND 60 60 D-GND
TX-25-60P-LT-H1 TX24-60R-LT-H1
Transports the paper from the transport roller 14 to the transport roller 8
24V3 22 14 24V3 14 2 24V3 1
/LPFC 24 16 /LPFC 16 1 /LPFC 2
B30B-PNDZS-1
LPFC
CN1 S DF1B-28DE P
INT24V1 5 25 INT24V1 25 2 INT24V1
INT24V1 6 27 INT24V1 27 5 INT24V1
DRIVER PWB
B6B-PASK-1 B6B-XH
1
1
No.
LCCM
Signal
D. PS lower unit
SOCKET1 SOCKET1
P-GND 1 1 P-GND
HTMY_1 2 2 HTMY_1
HTMY_2 3 3 HTMY_2
LCC transport motor

PHTMK_1 4 4 PHTMK_1
PHTMK_2 5 5 PHTMK_2
Name
Name

WEB_M1 6 6 WEB_M1
WEB_M2 7 7 WEB_M2
5VN 8 8 5VN
P-GND 9 9 P-GND
N,C 10 10 N,C
D-GND 11 11 D-GND
ADMH_A 12 12 ADMH_A
ADML_A 15 15 ADML_A
LCCM_A 18 18 LCCM_A
5VN 21 21 5VN
DMK_EN 24 24 DMK_EN
DMM_EN 25 25 DMM_EN
POM_A 27 27 POM_A
POM_/A 28 28 POM_/A
D-GND 30 30 D-GND
P-GND 31 31 P-GND
HTMM_1 32 32 HTMM_1
LCCM
HTMM_2 33 33 HTMM_2
HTMC_1 34 34 HTMC_1
PCU PWB
HTMC_2 35 35 HTMC_2
Drives the LCC transport motor

HTMK_1 36 36 HTMK_1
DRIVER PWB
HTMK_2 37 37 HTMK_2
5VN 38 38 5VN
P-GND 39 39 P-GND
N,C 40 40 N,C
D-GND 41 41 D-GND
ADMH_B 42 42 ADMH_B

ADML_B 45 45 ADML_B
LCCM_B 49 49 LCCM_B
Function/Operation
Function/Operation
5VN 51 51 5VN
DMC_EN 54 54 DMC_EN
DMY_EN 55 55 DMY_EN
BTM_EN 57 57 BTM_EN
POM_B 58 58 POM_B
POM_/B 59 59 POM_/B
D-GND 60 60 D-GND
Transports the paper from the transport roller 6 and 13 to the transport roller 8
CN1 P DF1B-28DE S
INT24V1 5 25 INT24V1 25 5 INT24V1
INT24V1 6 27 INT24V1 27 6 INT24V1
B6B-PASK-1 B6B-XH
E. PS unit
DRIVER
PWB
P DF1B-18DE S CN9
PFM_A 4 1 PFM_A 1 6 PFM_A
PFM_A/ 1 3 PFM_A/ 3 5 PFM_A/
PFM_B/ 3 5 PFM_B/ 5 4 PFM_B/
PFM_B 6 7 PFM_B 7 3 PFM_B
INT24V1 2 9 INT24V1 9 2 INT24V1
INT24V1 5 11 INT24V1 11 1 INT24V1
B6P-PH-K-S B7B-PASK-1
PHNR-02-H + BU02P-TR-P-H CN14

1 24V3 2 13 24V3 13 8 24V3
2 /RRC 1 15 /RRC 15 10 /RRC
INT24V2 1 17 INT24V2 17 2 INT24V2

/RRM_CK 4 4 /RRM_CK 4 12 /RRM_CK
/RRM_D 5 6 /RRM_D 6 14 /RRM_D
RRM_LD 6 8 RRM_LD 8 16 RRM_LD
N.C 3 B30B-PNDZS-1
PFM B6P-PH-K-S
RRC
RRM
PCU PWB
3 RRC2
2
PPD2
PPD1
PHNR-2-H PHNR-8-H
BU02P-TR-P-H BU08P-TR-P-H CN14
2 24V 1 8 24V3 1 30 24V3
1 /RRC2 2 7 /RRC2 2 29 /RRC2

PPD2 2 2 PPD2 7 25 PPD2
GP2A200L 179228-3
PPD1 3 5 PPD1 4 23 PPD1

PFM PS front transport motor Drives the transport roller
PPD1 Resist pre-detection Detects the paper of the resist roller front
PPD2 Resist detection Detects the paper of the resist roller front
RRC PS clutch Controls the ON/OFF of the resist roller
RRC2 PS clutch 2 Brakes the resist roller
RRM PS motor Drives the resist roller

1 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports the paper to the resist roller.
2 Resist roller (Drive) Transports the paper to the transfer section. Controls the paper transport timing to adjust relative
relations between images and paper.
3 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give paper the transport power of the transport
roller

2. Operational descriptions 3) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screws (B), and
remove the paper pass unit (C).
Paper is fed from each paper feed section and transported to the
resist roller by the transport rollers.
ON/OFF of each transport roller is controlled of by the paper trans-
B
C 1
port clutch.
The resist roller controls the relative positions of transported paper
and the transfer image.
The resist roller is driven by the transport motor.
The relative positions of paper and the transfer image are deter-
mined by the ON timing of the transport motor.
A
Unit Page
A Paper pass unit G- 6
B Vertical transport unit G- 8 a. Transport roller 12 (Drive)
C LCC transport unit G -11
D PS lower unit G -14 Mainte
Unit Parts
E PS unit G -15 nance
F Others G -19 1 Paper pass unit a Transport roller 12 (Drive) {
A. Paper pass unit

Unit Parts Mainte Page 1-a
nance
1 Paper pass a Transport roller 12 (Drive) { G- 6
unit b Transport roller 13 (Drive) { G- 7
c Tandem tray 1 transport G- 7
detector 1
d Tandem tray 1 transport G- 8
detector 2
1-a
1-c 1
1) Romove the front cabinet, the right lower door, and the right
2) Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "[F]
TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION".)
3) Remove the paper pass unit. (Refer to the "(1) Paper pass
unit".)
1-b 4) Remove the screw (A), and remove the sheet (B). Remove the
screw (C). Disengage the pawl (D), and remove the earth plate
1-d (E).
* When installing the screw (C), apply thread locking material.
(1) Paper pass unit

D
Unit
1 Paper pass unit A
1 C
B

5) Remove the E-rings (F) and the bearings (G), and remove the 5) Remove the screw (C). Disengage the pawl (D), and remove
transport roller 12 (Drive) (H). the earth plate (E).
* When installing the screw (C), apply thread locking material.
G
D
F
H 1-a
E
C
G
F
b. Transport roller 13 (Drive) 6) Remove the E-rings (F) and the bearings (G), and remove the
transport roller 13 (Drive) (H).
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Paper pass unit b Transport roller 13 (Drive) {
F
G 1-b
H
G
F
1-b
1) Romove the front cabinet, the right lower door, and right lower
door cover. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".) c. Tandem tray 1 transport detector 1
TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION".) Unit Parts
1 Paper pass unit c Tandem tray 1 transport detector 1
unit".)
4) Remove the screws (A), and remove the support plate (B). 1-c
B
A
unit".)

4) Remove the screw (A), and remove the tandem tray 1 trans- B. Vertical transport unit
port detector 1 (B). Disconnect the connector (C).
Mainte
Unit Parts Page
nance
A 1 Vertical a Transport roller 5 (Drive) { G- 9
transport unit b Transport roller 6 (Drive) { G- 9
c Tandem tray 2 transport G -10
detector
d Right door open/close G -11
1-c detection sensor
B
C
1-b
1-c
1
d. Tandem tray 1 transport detector 2
Unit Parts
1 Paper pass unit d Tandem tray 1 transport detector 2
1-d
1-a
(1) Vertical transport unit

1-d Unit
1 Vertical transport unit
2) Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "[F] 1
unit".)
A
right lower door cover. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUT-
FIT.)
2) Remove the waste toner bottle. (Refer to the [J] PHOTOCON-
B DUCTOR SECTION.)
A
3) Remove the resin E-ring (A), and remove the right vertical
transport unit (B).
5) Remove the screw (C), and remove the tandem tray 1 trans-
port detector 2 (D). Disconnect the connector (E).
B
C
D 1-d
E A

4) Release the lock (C), and open the right door unit (D). 4) Remove the E-ring (A), the gear (B), the parallel pin (C), and
the gear collar (D). Remove the E-rings (E), and remove the
bearing (F).
F
D
E
D
C C
B
A
5) Disconnect the connectors (E), and remove the screws (F),

and remove the vertical transport unit (G).
5) Remove the screw (G), and remove the earth plate (H).
Remove the E-ring (I), and remove the bearing (J). Remove
the transport roller 5 (Drive) (K).
E
F G 1
E K 1-a
F J
I
H
G
a. Transport roller 5 (Drive) b. Transport roller 6 (Drive)
Mainte Mainte
nance nance
1 Vertical transport unit a Transport roller 5 (Drive) { 1 Vertical transport unit b Transport roller 6 (Drive) {
1-b
1-a
right door cover. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2) Remove the waste toner box. ([J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SEC- FIT.)
TION.)
3) Remove the vertical transport unit. (Refer to the "(1) Vertical DUCTOR SECTION.)
transport unit".)
3) Remove the vertical transport unit. (Refer to the "(1) Vertical
transport unit".)

4) Remove the screws (A), and remove the support plate (B). c. Tandem tray 2 transport detector
Unit Parts
A 1 Vertical transport unit c Tandem tray 2 transport detector
A B
1-c
5) Remove the E-ring (C), the gear (D), the parallel pin (E), and
the gear collar (F). Remove the E-rings (G), and remove the
bearing (H).
FIT.)
H DUCTOR SECTION.)
G 3) Remove the vertical transport unit. (Refer to the "(1) Vertical
F transport unit".)
E 4) Remove the screws (A), and remove the support plate (B).
D
C A
A B
6) Remove the screw (I), and remove the earth plate (J). Remove
the E-ring (K), and remove the bearing (L). Remove the trans-
port roller 6 (Drive) (M).
5) Disconnect the connector (C). Remove the screw (D), and

remove the tandem tray 2 transport detector (E).
1-b M
D
K L C
J
I
E 1-c

d. Right lower door open/close detection sensor C. LCC transport unit
Unit Parts Mainte
Unit Parts Page
1 Vertical transport unit d Right lower door open/close detection nance
sensor 1 LCC a Transport roller 14 (Drive) { G -12
transport unit b Transport roller 15 (Drive) { G -12
c LCC paper entry detection G -13
sensor
1
1-b
1-c
1) Remove the right lower door, the right cabinet lower, the right
1-a
door cover. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.) 1-c
DUCTOR SECTION.)
(1) LCC transport unit
3) Remove the vertical transport unit. (Refer to the "(1) Vertical
transport unit".) Unit
4) Remove the right lower door open/close detection sensor (A). 1 LCC transport unit
LCC lower cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
A 1-d

3) Disconnect the connector (C). Remove the screws (D), and 4) Remove the E-ring (C), the gear (D), the parallel pin (E), and
remove the earth wire (E) and LCC transport unit (F). the gear collar (F). Remove the E-rings (G), and remove the
bearing (H).
F 1
D
D H G
D
F
E E
D C
5) Remove the E-ring (I), and remove the bearing (J). Remove
the transport roller 14 (Dirve) (K).
C
a. Transport roller 14 (Drive)

K 1-a
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 LCC transport unit a Transport roller 14 (Drive) {
J
I
b. Transport roller 15 (Dirve)
Mainte
1-a Unit Parts
nance
1 LCC transport unit b Transport roller 15 (Drive) {
LCC lower cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".) 1-b
2) Remove the LCC transport unit. (Refer to the "(1) LCC trans-
port unit".)
3) Disengage the pawls (A), and remove the cover (B).
A LCC lower cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
B 2) Remove the LCC transport unit. (Refer to the "(1) LCC trans-
port unit".)

3) Disengage the pawls (A), and remove the cover (B). c. LCC paper entry detection sensor
Unit Parts
1 LCC transport unit c LCC paper entry detection sensor
1-c
4) Remove the E-ring (C), the gear (D), the parallel pin (E), and
the gear collar (F). Remove the E-rings (G), and remove the
bearing (H). 1) Remove the right lower door, the right cabinet lower, and the
2) Remove the LCC transport unit. (Refer to the "(1) LCC trans-
port unit".)
H
G
F E D
C B
5) Remove the E-ring (I), and remove the bearing (J). Remove 4) Remove the screws (C) and the earth wire (D), and remove the
the transport roller 15 (Dirve) (K). support plate (E).
K 1-b E
D C
J
I

5) Remove the screw (F), and remove the LCC paper entry 5) Remove the screws (A), and remove the PS lower unit (B).
detection sensor (G). Disconnect the connector (H).
A
F A
1 B
H
D. PS lower unit
a. Transport roller 7 (Drive)
Mainte
Unit Parts Page Mainte
nance Unit Parts
nance
1 PS lower unit a Transport roller 7 (Drive) { G -14
1 PS lower unit a Transport roller 7 (Drive) {
1-a
1-a
1) Remove the right lower door , the right cabinet lower, and the
2) Remove the LCC transport unit. (Refer to the "C. LCC trans-
(1) PS lower unit port unit".)
Unit 3) Remove the paper dust removal cleaner. (Refer to the F. Oth-
1 PS lower unit ers.)
4) Remove the PS unit. (Refer to the "E. PS unit".)
5) Remove the PS lower unit. (Refer to the D. PS lower unit.)
6) Remove the screws (A), and remove the earth plate (B) and
supporting point holder (C). Remove the paper guide (D).
D
2) Remove the LCC transport unit. (Refer to the "C. LCC trans-
port unit".)
B
3) Remove the paper dust removal cleaner. (Refer to the F. Oth-
ers.)
4) Remove the PS unit. (Refer to the "E. PS unit".)
A
C

7) Remove the screws (E), and remove the support plate (F). E. PS unit
Mainte
E Unit Parts Page
nance
1 PS unit a Resist detection G -16
b Resist pre-detection G -17
c Resist roller (Drive) { G -17
F E d Transport roller 8 (Drive) { G -18
e Resist roller (Idle) { G -18
f PS clutch 2 G -19
1-c
1-a
1-e
8) Remove the screws (G) and screws (H), and remove the paper
guide (I).
G 1-f
H
H 1
G
1-d
I 1-b
(1) PS unit
Unit
1 PS unit
9) Disengage the pawl (J), and remove the earth plate (K).
Remove the E-ring (L), and remove the bearing (M).
1

K ers.)
M 2) Release the lock (A), and open the right door unit (B).
10) Remove the E-ring (N), the gear (O), the parallel pin (P), the
gear collar (Q). Remove the E-rings (R), and remove the bear-
ing (S). Remove the transport roller 7 (Drive) (T).
B
T 1-a
S R
Q
P
O
N

3) Remove the screw (C), and remove the cover (D). a. Resist detection
* When installing, engage the pawl (E) to the frame.
Unit Parts
1 PS unit a Resist detection
1-a
4) Remove the screw (F), and remove the harness cover (G).
ers.)
2) Remove the PS unit. (Refer to the "(1) PS unit".)
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the stay (B).
A
A
A
A
F G
A
A
5) Disconnect the connector (H) and the snap band (I). Remove
B
the screw (J), and remove the PS unit (K).
J 4) Remove the screw (C), and remove the resist detection (D).
Disconnect the connector (E).
K 1 C E
H D 1-a

b. Resist pre-detection c. Resist roller (Drive)
Unit Parts Mainte

Unit Parts
1 PS unit b Resist pre-detection nance
1 PS unit c Resist roller (Drive) {
1-c
1-b
1) Remove the paper dust removal cleaner. (Refer to the F. Oth- 1) Remove the paper dust removal cleaner. (Refer to the F. Oth-
ers.) ers.)
2) Remove the PS unit. (Refer to the "(1) PS unit".) 2) Remove the PS unit. (Refer to the "(1) PS unit".)
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the stay (B). 3) Remove the snap band (A). Disconnect the connector (B).
Remove the screw (C), and remove the holder (D).
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation-stop
A projection is engaged with the rib of the holder.
A
A
A
D
A
A
C
A
A
B B
C
4) Remove the screw (C), and the remove the mounting plate
(D). Disconnect the connector (E), and resist pre-detection (F).
C
4) Remove the screw (E), and remove the earth spring (F).
Remove the screw (G), and remove the coupling (H). Remove
the E-ring (I), and the gear (J), and the parallel pin (K).
D Remove the E-ring (L), and remove the bearing (M).
* When installing, apply thread locking material to the screw
(G).
E E
F
F
1-b
H
M
L G
K
J I

5) Remove the E-ring (N) and the gear (O). Remove the E-ring 4) Remove the screw (E), and the earth spring (F). Remove the
(P) and bearing (Q), and remove the resist roller (Drive) (R). screw (G), and remove the coupling (H). Remove the E-ring (I)
and the bearing (J).
* When installing, apply thread locking material to the screw
(G).
F
R 1-c
J
I
H
Q
P G
O
N
5) Remove the E-ring (K), and remove the gear (L). Remove the
E-ring (M), and remove the bearing (N). Remove the transport
roller 8 (Dirve) (O).
d. Transport roller 8 (Drive)
Parts Mainte
Unit
nance
1 PS unit d Transport roller 8 (Drive) { N
M
1-d L
K
O
1-d
e. Resist roller (Idle)
Mainte
Unit Parts
1) Remove the paper dust removal cleaner. (Refer to the F. Oth- nance
ers.) 1 PS unit e Resist roller (Idle) {

3) Remove the snap band (A). Disconnect the connector (B).
Remove the screw (C), and remove the holder (D).
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation-stop
projection is engaged with the rib of the holder. 1-e
A
B ers.)

3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the stay (B). 3) Disconnect the connector (A) and the E-ring (B), and remove
the PS clutch 2 (C).
A * When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation stop-
per is engaged with the rib of the holder.
A
A
A
A
A C 1-f
A
4) Clean the resist roller (Idle) (C).
A B
C 1-e
F. Others
Mainte
Parts Page
nance
a Paper dust removal cleaner { G -19
f. PS clutch 2
Unit Parts
1 PS unit f PS clutch 2
a
1-f
(1) Paper dust removal cleaner


ers.)

2) Remove the paper dust removal cleaner (B), and clean the
paper dust.
a
B
4. Maintenance
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
replacement
parts
parts are
described.)
1 Resist roller (Idle) Mechanical { { { { { { { { { {
2 Each transport roller parts { { { { { { { { { {
3 Paper dust removal cleaner { (P/G No. : [48]-10)
(P/G No. : [48]-11)
(P/G No. : [48]-12)

SOCKET1 SOCKET1
P-GND 1 1 P-GND
HTMY_1 2 2 HTMY_1
HTMY_2 3 3 HTMY_2
PHTMK_1 4 4 PHTMK_1
PHTMK_2 5 5 PHTMK_2
WEB_M1 6 6 WEB_M1
MX-7000N
WEB_M2 7 7 WEB_M2
5VN 8 8 5VN
5
P-GND 9 9 P-GND
N,C 10 10 N,C
D-GND 11 11 D-GND
ADMH_A 12 12 ADMH_A
ADML_A 15 15 ADML_A
6
LCCM_A 18 18 LCCM_A
APPD2
5VN 21 21 5VN
DMK_EN 24 24 DMK_EN
APPD1
DMM_EN 25 25 DMM_EN
TFD_R
POM_A 27 27 POM_A
POM_/A 28 28 POM_/A
[H] DUPLEX SECTION
D-GND 30 30 D-GND
P-GND 31 31 P-GND
HTMM_1 32 32
POD3
HTMM_1
HTMM_2 33 33 HTMM_2
HTMC_1 34 34 HTMC_1
3
HTMC_2 35 35 HTMC_2
2
1
HTMK_1 36 36 HTMK_1
4
HTMK_2 37 37 HTMK_2
5VN 38 38 5VN
P-GND 39 39 P-GND
N,C 40 40 N,C
D-GND 41 41 D-GND
ADMH_B 42 42 ADMH_B
ADML_B 45 45 ADML_B
ADMH
ADML
LCCM_B 49 49 LCCM_B
ADUGS
DSW_ADU
5VN 51 51 5VN
DMC_EN 54 54 DMC_EN
DMY_EN 55 55 DMY_EN
BTM_EN 57 57 BTM_EN
POM_B 58 58 POM_B
POM_/B 59 59 POM_/B
D-GND 60 60 D-GND
CN7
ADML_A 12 5 ADML_A 5 4 ADML_A
ADML_A/ 11 12 ADML_A/ 12 1 ADML_A/
ADML_B/ 10 22 ADML_B/ 22 3 ADML_B/
ADML_B 9 11 ADML_B 11 6 ADML_B
MX-7000N DUPLEX SECTION H 1

INT24V1 8 10 INT24V1 10 2 INT24V1
INT24V1 7 16 INT24V1 16 5 INT24V1
S6B-PH-SM3
ADMH_A 6 33 ADMH_A 33 4 ADMH_A
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
ADMH_A/ 5 36 ADMH_A/ 36 1 ADMH_A/

ADMH_B/ 4 38 ADMH_B/ 38 3 ADMH_B/
ADMH_B 3 35 ADMH_B 35 6 ADMH_B
DRIVER PWB
INT24V1 2 34 INT24V1 34 2 INT24V1
INT24V1 1 37 INT24V1 37 5 INT24V1
PCU PWB
B12B-PASK-1 S QR/P4 40PIN P S6B-PH-SM3
CN3(1/2)
APPD2 4 1 APPD2 8 1 APPD2
S32B-PHDSS-B PHNR-08-H + BU08P-TR-P-H GP1S73 179228-3
CN15 S QR/P4 40PIN P CN1 CN2
5VN 25 1 5VN 1 1 5VN APPD1 10 1 APPD1 3 1 APPD1
D-GND 27 17 D-GND 17 2 D-GND D-GND 11 2 D-GND 2 2 D-GND
SIN3 29 2 SIN3 2 3 SIN3 5VNPD(LED) 12 3 5VNPD(LED) 1 3 5VNPD(LED)
SELIN1 31 18 SELIN1 18 4 SELIN1 PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H GP1S73 179228-3
SELIN2 33 3 SELIN2 3 5 SELIN2 DSW_ADU 7 1 DSW_ADU
SELIN3 35 19 SELIN3 19 6 SELIN3 D-GND 8 2 D-GND
APPD1 37 4 APPD1 4 7 APPD1 5VN(LED) 9 3 5VN(LED)
APPD2 39 20 APPD2 20 8 APPD2 GP1S73 179228-3
9 ADUD3 1 TFD-R
POD3 22 21 POD3 21 10 POD3 TFD-R 1 1 TFD-R 6 2 D-GND
MPFD 24 6 MPFD 6 11 MPFD D-GND 2 2 D-GND 5 3 5VN(LED)
5VNPD 26 32 5VNPD 32 16 5VNPD 5VN(LED) 3 3 5VN(LED) 4 GP1S73 179228-3
HWPD 28 7 HWPD 7 13 HWPD POD3 4 4 POD3 3 1 POD3
14 5 2
RIGHT DOOR I/F PWB

TH_M 30 23 TH_M 23 TH_M D-GND 5 D-GND 2 D-GND
HUD_M 32 8 HUD_M 8 15 HUD_M 5VNPD(LED) 6 6 5VNPD(LED) 1 3 5VNPD(LED)
40 F-GND 40 S16B-PHDSS-B S16B-PHDSS-B PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H GP1S73 179228-3
24V3 21 9 24V3 9 2 24V3 1
/ADUGS 23 25 /ADUGS 25 1 /ADUGS 2
B40B-PNDZS-1 PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
ADMH ADU motor upper Drives the transport roller
ADML ADU motor lower Drives the duplex (ADU) section
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the right paper exit gate
APPD1 ADU transport pass detection 1 Detects paper pass in the upstream of the duplex (ADU).
APPD2 ADU transport pass detection 2 Detects paper pass in the midstream of the duplex (ADU).
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/close
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit into the right tray
TFD_R Right tray paper exit full detection Detects the right tray paper exit full

1 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 17 to the transport roller 11.
2 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 16.
3 Transport roller 17 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the paper exit roller 1 to the paper exit roller 2
/ Transports the paper to the duplex (ADU) section
4 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Ejects the paper to the right tray
5 Right paper exit gate Switching the paper path route which transports the paper to the duplex (ADU) section or ejects
the paper to the right paper tray.
6 ADU reverse gate When transporting the paper to the duplex (ADU) section, executes switchback for switching the
paper transport route.
Paper which had been sent from the fusing section is sent to the
paper exit roller 1 from the transport roller 13 that is driven by the
ADU motor upper.
At that time, paper passes under the gate guide.
After the specified time from detection of paper lead edge by
POD1, the paper exit drive motor is rotated forward, and after the
specified time, it is rotated reversely.
The paper exit drive motor rotates reversely, paper is transported
to the reverse section. At that time, paper passes the right side of
the ADU gate guide by its own weight.
The transport roller 10 and the transport roller 11 that are driven
by the ADU motor lower transport the paper to the duplex paper
feed position.
Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and trans-
ported to the inside of the machine again.

A. Right door unit
Mainte 1-f
Unit Parts Page
nance
1 Right door a RD I/F PWB H- 3 1-e
unit b ADU motor upper H- 4 1-d
c ADU motor lower H- 5 1-b
1-l
d Right tray paper exit full H- 6
1-j
detection
e Right tray paper exit 1-a
detection 1-f
f Discharge brush H- 7
g ADU transport pass H- 8
1-o 1-i
detection 1 1-k
h ADU transport pass H- 9 1-c
detection 2 1-m
i ADU transport open/close H- 9 1-g
detection
j ADU gate solenoid H -10
k Transport roller 2 (Drive) { H -11
l Transport roller 17 (Drive) { H -12 1
m Transport roller 10 (Drive) { H -13
n Transport roller 11 (Drive) { H -14
o Right paper exit gate H -15 1-n
1-h

(1) Right door unit 3) Remove the screws (E), and remove the right door unit (B).
Unit
1 Right door unit
B 1
1 E
E
E
a. RD I/F PWB
Unit Parts
1 Right door unit a RD I/F PWB
1-a
B
2) Remove the screws (C), and remove the front cover (D).
C
D
B
C
A

2) Remove the screw (C), and remove the slide rail (D). b. ADU motor upper
Unit Parts
1 Right door unit b ADU motor upper
1-b
C
3) Remove the screws (E). Remove the screw (F), and remove
the inner cover (G).
E
G
F

remove the RD I/F PWB (J). B
A
1-a
J H
I
2) Remove the screw (C), and remove the slide rail (D).
H
I

3) Remove the screws (E). Remove the screw (F), and remove c. ADU motor lower
Unit Parts
1 Right door unit c ADU motor lower
E
G
E 1-c
4) Remove the screws (H), and remove the stay (I).
H 1) Release the lock (A), and open the right door unit (B).
I H
H
5) Disconnect the connector (J), and remove the the screws (K),
and remove the ADU motor upper (L).
B
L 1-b A
2) Remove the screws (C). Remove the screw (D), and remove
J the inner cover (E).
K
K
C
E

3) Disconnect the connector (F), and remove the the screws (G), 1) Release the lock (A), and open the right door unit (B).
and remove the ADU motor lower unit (H).
G
B
G A
F
G
4) Remove the screws (I), and remove the ADU motor lower (J). the inner cover (E).
1-c
J
C
E
I
D
I
C
d. Right tray paper exit full deteciton, Right tray paper exit
detection
Unit Parts 3) Remove the screws (F), and remove the rear cover (G).
1 Right door unit d Right tray paper exit full detection
e Right tray paper exit detection
1-e G F
1-d
4) Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screws (I) and the
screws (J), and remove the right paper exit unit (K).
I
I
J K
J

5) Remove the screws (L), and remove the cover (M). Remove e. Discharge brush
the screws (N), and remove the cover (O).
Unit Parts
1 Right door unit f Discharge brush
N N
O 1-f
N L
6) Disconnect the connectors (P), and remove the screws (Q),

and remove the right tray paper exit full detection unit (R) and
right tray paper exit detection unit (S).
Q
S
Q
P 1) Relese the lock (A), open the right door unit (B).
P
7) Remove the right tray paper full detection (U) and right tray
paper exit detection (V) from the sensor mounting plate (T).
B
1-d
T A
1-e U T
V
the inner cover (E).
C
E

3) Remove the screws (F), and remove the rear cover (G). f. ADU transport pass detection 1
Unit Parts
1 Right door unit g ADU transport pass detection 1
G F
1-g
4) Disconnect the connector (H), and remove the screws (I), the
screws (J), and remove the right paper exit unit (K).
I
I
J K 1) Release the lock (A), and open the right door unit (B).
5) Remove the screws (L), and remove the cabinet (M).

A
L
2) Remove the screws (C), and remove the reverse PG unit (D).
M C
6) Check the discharge brush (N).
D C
C C
3) Remove the screw (E). Remove the ADU transport path detec-
tion unit (F). Disconnect the connector (G), and remove the
ADU transport path detection 1 (H).
N 1-f 1-g
H G
F
E

g. ADU transport pass detection 2 4) Remove the screw (G), and remove the ADU transport path
detection unit (H). Disconnect the connector (I), and remove
Unit Parts the ADU transport path detection 2 (J).
1 Right door unit h ADU transport pass detection 2
H 1-h
I
J
h. ADU transport open/close detection
Unit Parts
1 Right door unit i ADU transport open/close detection
1-h
1-i
2) Remove the screws (C), and remove the paper guide (D).
D
C
C B
3) Remove the screws (E), and remove the pressure plate (F).
A
Remove the springs (G).
G G
E
E
E

2) Remove the screws (C). Remove the screw (D), and remove 1) Release the lock (A), and open the right door unit (B).
C
E B
D A
2) Remove the screw (C), and remove the slide rail (D).
3) Remove the screw (F), and remove the ADU transport open/
close detection unit (G). Disconnect the connector (H), and
remove the ADU transport open/close detection (I).
C
F
D
G H
I 1-i 3) Remove the screws (E). Remove the screw (F), and remove
i. ADU gate solenoid
Unit Parts
1 Right door unit j ADU gate solenoid
E
G
F
1-j
4) Remove the screws (H), and remove the stay (I).
I H
H

5) Disconnect the connector (J), and remove the screws (K), and j. Paper exit roller 2 (Drive)
remove the ADU motor upper unit (L).
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Right door unit k Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) {
K L
K
K
J 1-k
6) Disconnect the connector (M) and remove the screws (N), and
the ADU gate solenid unit (O).
N O
1) Remove the ADU gate solenoid. (Refer to the "i. ADU gate
solenoid".)
N M 2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the rear cover (B).
7) Remove the screws (P), and remove the ADU gate solenoid
(Q).
B A
Q 1-j
A
P
P A
3) Disconnect the connector (C). Remove the screws (D) and the
screws (E). Remove the right paper exit unit (F).
D
D
E F
E

4) Remove the screws (G), and remove the front cover (H). k. Transport roller 17 (Drive)
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Right door unit l Transport roller 17 (Drive) {
G
1-l
5) Remove the screw (I), and remove the bearing plate (J).
Remove the E-ring (K), the gear (L), the parallel pin (M), the E-
ring (N), and the bearing (O).
J
O N M L
K 1) Release the lock (A), and open the right door unit (B).
I
6) Remove the screw (P), and remove the earth plate (Q).
Remove the E-ring (R) and the bearing (S), and remove the
paper exit roller 2 (Drive) (T). B
1-k A
T
S
R
P C
Q E

3) Remove the screw (F), and remove the rear cover (G). 7) Remove the belt (Q). Remove the E-ring (R), and remove the
pulley (S), the parallel pin (T), the E-ring (U), and the bearing
(V).
G F
V
U
F S T
Q
R
F
8) Remove the E-rings (W), and remove the pulleys (X), the par-
allel pins (Y), and the belt (Z).
4) Disconnect the connector (H). remove the screws (I) and the
screws (J). Remove the right paper exit unit (K).
Z
I Y X
I W
Y X
J K W
J
9) Remove the E-ring (a), and remove the bearing (b). Remove
the transport roller 17 (Drive) (c).
5) Disconnect the connector (L), and remove the screws (M), and
remove the ADU motor upper unit (N). 1-l
c
a
M N
M b
l. Transport roller 10 (Drive)

M
Mainte
Unit Parts
L nance
1 Right door unit m Transport roller 10 (Drive) {
6) Remove the screws (O), and remove the front cover (P).
O
1-m

1) Release the lock (A), and open the right door unit (B). 5) Remove the screw (I), and remove the earth plate (J). Remove
the E-ring (K), and remove the bearing (L).
L
J K
B I
6) Remove the E-ring (M), and remove the pulley (N), the parallel
pin (O), and the belt (P).
P
C
E
N
D M
O
C 7) Remove the E-ring (Q), and remove the bearing (R). Remove
the transport roller 10 (Drive) (S).
3) Remove the screws (F), and remove the front cover (G).
1-m
S
R
F m. Transport roller 11 (Drive)
G Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Right door unit n Transport roller 11 (Drive) {
4) Open the open/close door (H).
1-n

1) Release the lock (A), and open the right door unit (B). 5) Remove the screw (I), and remove the earth plate (J). Remove
the E-ring (K), and remove the pulley (L), the belt (M), the par-
allel pin (N), the E-ring (O), and the bearing (P).
O
B
A J K P
I
N
L M
2) Remove the screws (C). Remove the screw (D), and remove 6) Remove the E-ring (Q), and remove the bearing (R). Remove
the inner cover (E). the transport roller 11 (Drive) (S).
C
E
1-n
S
D
C R
3) Remove the screws (F), and remove the front cover (G). Q
n. Right paper exit gate
Unit Parts
1 Right door unit o Right paper exit gate
F
G
F
1-o
4) Open the open/close door (H).

1) Release the lock (A), and open the right door unit (B). 5) Remove the E-ring (L), and slide the bearing (M). Remove the
right paper exit gate (N), and remove the bearings (M).
M
1-o
N
M
B
L
A
M
C
E
3) Remove the screws (F), and remove the rear cover (G).
G F
4) Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screws (I) and

screws (J). Remove the right paper exit unit (K).
I
I
J K
J

4. Maintenance
{ : Check : Clean : Replace U : Adjust : Lubricate : Shift the position
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
replacement
parts
parts are
described.)
1 Each transport roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { {
2 Discharge brush parts

[i] LSU SECTION
PCU PWB
CN8
1 INT24V2 1 18 INT24V2 18 37 INT24V2
2 /LSS_BK 2 20 /LSS_BK 20 38 /LSS_BK
S DF1B-28DE P
13 P SM2P-B R
1 INT24V2 1 39 INT24V2
2 /LSS_CL 2 40 /LSS_CL
P SM2P-N R
CN9
D-GND 1 13 D-GND
3.3V 2 14 3.3V
D-GND 3 15 D-GND
13 5VN
24V3
4
5
16
17
5VN
24V3
P-GND 6 18 P-GND
S6B-XA
CN5
INT5V 1 1 INT5V
D-GND 2 2 D-GND
n SCK_LSU 4 4 n SCK_LSU
D-GND 3 3 D-GND
n TRANS_DATA 5 5 n TRANS_DATA
D-GND 6 6 D-GND
n RSV_DAT 8 8 n RSV_DAT
LSS_CL LSUASIC_RST 7 7 LSUASIC_RST
n TRANS_RST 9 9 n TRANS_RST
JOBEND_INT 10 10 JOBEND_INT
LSUTH1 11 11 LSUTH1
LSUTH2 12 12 LSUTH2
B40B-PNDZS-1
CN6
VSYNC_K_N 13 8 VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P 14 7 VSYNC_K_P
LSS_BK VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
15
16
6
5
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
CN8 B08B-PASK-1 VSYNC_M_N 17 4 VSYNC_M_N
nBREAK 6 1 BRAKE VSYNC_M_P 18 3 VSYNC_M_P
nPOLY_CK 5 2 CLOCK 9 VSYNC_Y_P 19 2 VSYNC_Y_P
nPOLY_LOCK 4 3 LOCK VSYNC_Y_N 20 1 VSYNC_Y_N
nPOLY_START 3 4 START/STOP S20B-PADSS-1
P-GND 2 5 GND CN3
24V 1 6 24V CH0_N 1 32 CH0_N
B6B-PH-SM3-TB CH0_P 2 31 CH0_P
CN8 B08B-PASK-1
D-GND 3 30 D-GND
TH2_2 8 3 TH2
D-GND 7 4 D-GND
12 D-GND 4 29 D-GND
CH1_N 5 28 CH1_N
S4B-PH-K-S TH2 PGM 9 CH1_P 6 27 CH1_P
CH2_N 7 26 CH2_N
CN2 B03B-PASK-1 LSUFM CH2_P 8 25 CH2_P
24V1 1 6 D-GND
D-GND
9
10
24
23
D-GND
D-GND
n FANRDY 2
P-GND 3
7 CLCLK_N 11 22 CLCLK_N
1 TH1 CLCLK_P 12 21 CLCLK_P
CH3_N 13 20 CH3_N
CH3_P 14 19 CH3_P
D-GND 15 18 D-GND
D-GND 16 17 D-GND
ECLK_LSU_N 17 16 ECLK_LSU_N
ECLK_LSU_P 18 15 ECLK_LSU_P
5 11 10 D-GND 19 14 D-GND
D-GND 20 13 D-GND
2 4 9 HSYNC_LSU_P 21 12 HSYNC_LSU_P
HSYNC_LSU_N 22 11 HSYNC_LSU_N
3 N.C
N.C
23
24
B32B-PNDZS-1
S24B-PADSS-1 MOTHER
PWB
8 LSU PWB
S10B-PH-K-S
S10B-PH-K-S
n LDERR_C
S10B-PH-K-S
n LDERR_M
n LDERR_Y
DATA+_K1
DATA+_K2
LDCHK_C
B4P-PH-K-R
LDCHK_M
LDCHK_Y
DATA-_K1
DATA-_K2
/ENB_M
D-GND
/ENB_C
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DT_M+
D-GND
D-GND
DT_C+
+5V_LD
LDERR
LDCHK
/SH_M
/ENB_Y
DT_M-
D-GND
D-GND
/SH_C
DT_C-
/LDOFF
Vref_M
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
Vref_C
DT_Y+
INT5V
/SH_K1
/SH_K2
INT5V
Vref_K1
Vref_K2
/SH_Y
DT_Y-
n BD
INT5V
TH1
Vref_Y
5V3
SM15B-GHB-TB
S4B-PH-K-S
10
10
10
11
14
12
15
13
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3
4
1
2
3
4
CN1
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN6
CN6
10
27
25
29
31
30
28
26
32
34
33
3
1
5
7
6
4
2
8
9
14
16
18
15
10
20
11
12
13
17
19
15
13
17
19
18
16
14
20
22
21
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
8
7
3
4
6
5
9
B20B-PNDZS-1
B34B-PNDZS-1
B34B-PNDZS-1
B34B-PNDZS-1
n LDERR_Y
n LDERR_M
LDCHK_C
LDCHK_M
n LDERR_C
nLDERR_K
LDCHK_K
VREF_K2
LDCHK_Y
nSHB_K2
VREF_K
nENB_K
nSHB_K
B07B-PASK-1
B07B-PASK-1
/ENB_M
nSH_K2
DT_K2+
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
+5V_LD
DT_M+
D-GND
D-GND
/ENB_C
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DT_K2-
nSH_K
DT_C+
DT_K+
/ENB_Y
/SH_M
DT_M-
D-GND
D-GND
Vref_M
TH2_1
DT_Y+
/SH_C
DT_C-
DT_K-
INT5V
Vref_C
INT5V
/SH_Y
DT_Y-
n BD
INT5V
Vref_Y
TH1
5V3
+5V
MX-7000N LSU SECTION i 1

LSS_BK LSU shutter solenoid BK Opens/closes the shutter of the LSU (BK)
LSS_CL LSU shutter solenoid CL Opens/closes the shutter of the LSU (CL)
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor Cools the polygon motor.
PGM Polygon mirror motor Reflects the laser beams at constant-speed rotating.
TH1 LSU therminstor 1
Measures the temperature in LSU.
TH2 LSU therminstor 2
1 LD PWB (K)
2 LD PWB (C)
Controls laser beam flashing and the output value.
3 LD PWB (M)
4 LD PWB (Y)
5 Cylindrical lens
6 fT lens 1 Collects the laser beams, and focuses it.
7 fT lens 2
8 Reflection mirror Secures the path for laser beams.
9 Cylindrical lens Collects the laser beams, and focuses it on the OPC drum.
10 Collective lens for BD Condenses the laser beam to the BD PWB.
11 BD PWB Detects the timing for starting laser scanning.
12 LSU CNT PWB Laser beams are controlled and the polygon motor control signal is generated according to the
PCU PWB control signal and image data.
13 OPC drum Forms electrostatic latent images according to laser beams.
A. Outline (2) Scan system
Converts the image data (has been sent by way of PCU from the
image processing circuit) to laser beam, and irradiates to the OPC
drum surface.
The LSU unit is composed of the primary system (including optical
elements such as lasers and the polygon mirror and the mirror
which assures the optical path) and the scan system (which
includes the optical elements including the polygon mirror and the
mirror which assures the optical path).
By the once scanning, black laser LD sends two laser beams of
BK1 and BK2 at same time for high-speed print.
The interval in the sub-scanning direction of two laser beams is
(3) polygon motor
42.3 P, also interval at image surface is 70 P. The interval in the
paper feed direction of two laser beams is 70 P by electrically con- Number
trolled. Model of mirror Rotating speed Bearing
Since interval of the laser beams is adjusted at shipping, adjust- surface
ment about that is not required at the later. Model of 55 sheets 7 surfaces Color : 35028 rpm AIR
Model of 62 sheets Monochrome : 30371 rpm
B. Composition Model of 70 sheets Color : 35028 rpm
(1) Primary system Monochrome : 35939 rpm
C. Outline of LSU specifications

Effective scan width: 307 mm
Resolution: 600 dpi
Beam diameter: Main scan = 50 to 65 Pm, Sub scan = 60 to 75 Pm
Laser power: Max. 0.8 mW
LD wavelength: 770 to 800 nm

D. Serial label 1) Remove the left cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUT-
There is the LSU serial label on the LSU fan side. FIT".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the left plate (B).
MODEL LSU CD UN 70 MODEL LSU CD UN 62 MODEL LSU CD UN 50 A A

00000000 00000000 00000000
Unit is different in each model of 55 or 62 or 70 sheets. 3) Loosen the screws (C), and remove the screw (D). Remove
the screw (E), and remove the fixing plate (F). Remove the
snap band (G), and disconnect the connectors (H) and shift it
3. Disassembly and assembly to the rear side, and remove the LSU (I) so that slide it to rear
side.
Unit Page
* When installing, insert the shaft (J) to cut-out portion of the
A LSU i- 3
skew adjuster (K).
B Others i- 7
* After installing the LSU, be sure to check the condition of
A. LSU skew image. Carry out the adjustment according to neces-
sity.
Mainte
Unit Parts Page
nance
1 LSU a Dust-proof glass { i- 3
b LSU CNT PWB i- 4 D
C
c LSU cooling fan motor i- 5
E
d Polygon motor i- 5
e LSU thermistor 2 1
f LSU thermistor 1 i- 6
F I
1-b
1-e
1-a
1-a
H
G K
H J
1-f
1-c a. Dust-proof glass
1-d Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1-a 1 LSU a Dust-proof glass {
1
(1) LSU 1-a

Unit
1-a
1 LSU 1-a
1-a

1) Open the front cabinet (A). 6) Clean all the cleaning holes (D) (4-positions) on the dustproof
glass.
* When the cleaning base became extremely dirty, replace it.
(Don't cleaning use dirty cleaning base other dustproof
A
glasses.)
2) Remove the claning rod (B).
1-a D
B b. LSU CNT PWB
Unit Parts
1 LSU b LSU CNT PWB
1-b
3) Check the dirt of the cleaning base (C) (tip of the cleaning rod).
* When cleaning base is dirty, replace it. (Refer to the "B. Oth-
ers".)
1) Remove the left cabinet. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUT-

FIT.)
4) Insert the cleaning rod (B) in the hole which cleaning is
required so that the cleaning base is made downward slowly. 2) Remove the LSU. (Refer to the "(1) LSU".)
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the earth wire (B).
Remove the cover (C).
* When installing the cover (C), engage the pawls (D) to cover
lower (E). At this time be careful it bite the wire.
B
D B
D
5) Insert the cleaning rod (B) all the way and slide it back and
forth a few times for cleaning.
E
B B C

4) Disconnect the connectors (F), and remove the screws (G) 4) Remove the screws (F), and remove the cover (G).
and the screw (H), and remove the LSU CNT PWB (I). * When removing the cover (G), be careful to work place and
* When installing, first of all install the screw (H). method, to don't enter the dust into the unit. Trouble (image
* When installing, engage the PWB to the pawl (J). not fully etc.) may occur.
* When installing the cover, lock the pawl (H).
H G
G
F
F F G
H
1-b I
J
c. LSU cooling fan motor

5) Disconnect the connector (I). Remove the molt (J), and
Unit Parts
remove the LSU cooling fan motor (K).
1 LSU c LSU cooling fan motor * When installing, point at the direction of outside with the
arrow (L).
1-c
L K
J
K
J
I
1-c
I
FIT)
2) Remove the LSU. (Refer to the "(1) LSU".) d. Polygon motor, LSU thermistor 2
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the earth wire (B).
Unit Parts
Remove the cover (C).
1 LSU d Polygon motor
* When installing the cover (C), engage the pawls (D) to cover e LSU thermistor 2
lower (E). At this time be careful it bite the wire.
1-e
A
D B
D
E
1-d
C

FIT.)
2) Remove the LSU. (Refer to the "(1) LSU".)

3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the earth wire (B). 6) Loosen the screw (N), and remove the LSU thermistor 2 (O).
Remove the cover (C). Disconnect the connector (P).
* When installing the cover (C), engage the pawls (D) to cover * When disassembling, be careful to drop the screw (etc.)
lower (E). At this time be careful it bite the wire. inside the LSU.
D B
D
E
N
C
P O 1-e
4) Remove the screws (F), and remove the cover (G).

* When removing the cover (G), be careful to work place and
method, to don't enter the dust into the unit. Trouble (image e. LSU thermistor 1
not fully etc.) may occur.
Unit Parts
* When installing the cover, lock the pawl (H).
1 LSU f LSU thermistor 1
F
G
1-f

5) Disconnect the connector (I), and remove the screws (J), and
FIT.)
remove the polygon motor (K). Disconnect the connector (L).
2) Remove the LSU. (Refer to the (1) LSU.)
* When disassembling, be careful to drop the screw (etc.)
inside the LSU. 3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the earth wire (B) and
cover (C).
* Don't touch the cover glass surface (M) of polygon motor.
J I A
C
1-d L A
M A
K
A
B

4) Remove the screw (D), and remove the LSU thermistor 1 (E). 3) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screw (B), and
Disconnect the connector (F). remove the LSU shutter solenoid CL unit (C).
* When installing, insert the U-cut part (D) of solenoid arm to
the shaft (E).
D
E
C
1-f E
D
F
A
B. Others
Mainte
Parts Page remove the LSU shutter solenoid CL (H).
nance
a LSU shutter solenoid CL i- 7 * When installing, hook the solenoid pin (I) to the solenoid arm
b LSU shutter solenoid BK i- 7 (J).
c Cleaning base i- 9
H a
b
c
G G
F
J
(1) LSU shutter solenoid CL
Parts
I
a LSU shutter solenoid CL
(2) LSU shutter solenoid BK
Parts
b LSU shutter solenoid BK

FIT.)
2) Remove the LSU. (Refer to the "(1) LSU".)

2) Remove the screws (A), and open the control box (B). 5) Disconnect the connector (I). Remove the screws (J), and
remove the LSU shutter solenoid BK uint (K).
* When installing, engage the shutter drive shaft (L) to the
solenoid arm (M).
B
M
I
L
A
B
K J
A
6) Disconnect the connector (N), and remove the snap band (O).
Remove the screws (P), and remove the mounting plate (Q).
* When installing, engage the spring (R) to the groove (S) of
the mounting plate and the groove (T) of the solenoid arm.
3) Remove the screws (C), and remove the flywheel (D).
* Check to confirm that has not come in contact with the har-
ness etc.
P P
Q
T S
D
R
C
O
N
C
4) Disconnect the connector (E). Remove the screws (F). Disen- 7) Disengage the pawl (U), and remove the LSU shutter solenoid
gage the pawl (G), and remove the duct (H). BK (V).
E U
V b

(3) Cleaning base 4) Open the cover (D), and pull out the cleaning base (E) for
replacement.
Mainte
Parts
nance
c Cleaning base
c D
5) Attach the new cleaning base (F) to the mounting hole with fit-
ting to the pawl.
A
F
2) Remove the cleaning rod (B).
3) Remove the dirty cleaning base (C).
c C

4. Maintenance
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
replacement
parts
parts are
described.)
1 Dust-proof glass Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Cleaning base parts (P/G No. : [2]-50)
(P/G No. : [49]-40)
1
1

[J]
MC
MX-7000N
GB
1
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H S DF1B-26DE P CN7
MC
DL_C# 3 10 DL_C# 1 3 DL_C# 3 3 DL_C#

53254-0310
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
A. OPC drum unit
GB
1
DL_M# 3 10 DL_M# 1 19 DL_M# 19 19 DL_M#
MC
53254-0310
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
2
2
DL_Y# 3 10 DL_Y# 1 8 DL_Y# 8 8 DL_Y#
GB
53254-0310 B30B-PNDZS-1
3 3
4 4 S DF1B-22DE P CN9
GB
24V 1 2 24V_DL 2 1 24V_DL 1 7 24V_DL
MC
DL_K# 3 1 DL_K# 1 3 DL_K# 3 9 DL_K#
1
S3B-PH-K-S B30B-PNDZS-1
PS-187(WH)
MC
GB
MC-CMY
PCU
PWB
GB-Y
GB-M CN1 CN6

24V3 3 10 24V3
GB-C P-GND 2 2 P-GND
1
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
P-GND 4 3 P-GND
/HV_DATA# 5 5 /HV_DATA
/HV_CLK# 6 7 /HV_CLK
/HV_LD1# 7 6 /HV_LD1
HV_REM# 8 8 HV_REM#
DL_Y
PS-250(WH)
MC-K
2
PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
VHR-2
GB-K
2
1
MC PWB
MC
GB
DL_M
S DF1B-34DE P CN13
26 CCM_a 26 33 CCM_a
28 CCM_b 28 35 CCM_b
B40B-PNDZS-1
CN18
S DF1B-22DE P 5 D-GND
6 CCMD 6 3 CCP_ROT
8 5VNPD 8 1 5VNPD
DL_C
B30B-PNDZS-1
DL_K
B14B-PASK-1
2 DM_Y_A 2 2 DM_Y_A 2 12 DM_Y_A
DM_Y
1 DM_Y_A/ 1 33 DM_Y_A/ 33 11 DM_Y_A/
4 DM_Y_B/ 4 31 DM_Y_B/ 31 10 DM_Y_B/
3 DM_Y_B 3 29 DM_Y_B 29 9 DM_Y_B
DM_M
5 INT24V1 5 27 INT24V1 27 8 INT24V1
6 INT24V1 6 25 INT24V1 25 7 INT24V1
R SM6 P
2 DM_M_A 2 23 DM_M_A 23 6 DM_M_A
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1 DM_M_A/ 1 21 DM_M_A/ 21 5 DM_M_A/
MX-7000N PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION J 1

4 DM_M_B/ 4 19 DM_M_B/ 19 4 DM_M_B/
3 DM_M_B 3 17 DM_M_B 17 3 DM_M_B
5 INT24V1 5 15 INT24V1 15 2 INT24V1
6 INT24V1 6 13 INT24V1 13 1 INT24V1
CN6
DM_C
R SM6 P
B13B-PASK-1
2 DM_C_A 2 11 DM_C_A 11 12 DM_C_A
1 DM_C_A/ 1 9 DM_C_A/ 11 DM_C_A/
9
4 DM_C_B/ 4 7 DM_C_B/ 7 10 DM_C_B/
3 DM_C_B 3 5 DM_C_B 5 9 DM_C_B
5 INT24V1 5 3 INT24V1 3 8 INT24V1
MC
2
6 INT24V1 6 1 INT24V1 1 7 INT24V1

R SM6 P S DF1B-34DE P CN5
B6B-PH-K-S B13B-PASK-1
DL_K
DM_K_A 4 23 DM_K_A 23 6 DM_K_A

DM_K_A/ 6 21 DM_K_A/ 21 5 DM_K_A/
DM_K_B/ 1 19 DM_K_B/ 19 4 DM_K_B/
DM_K_B 3 17 DM_K_B 17 3 DM_K_B
INT24V1 5 15 INT24V1 15 2 INT24V1
CCMD
INT24V1 2 13 INT24V1 13 1 INT24V1
S DF1B-34DE P CN5
DM_K
PWB
CCM
DRIVER
CCM Charger cleaner motor Cleans the charge unit
CCMD CCM rotation detection Detects rotation of the charger cleaner motor
DL_C Discharge lamp (C)
DL_K Discharge lamp (K)
Discharging the OPC drum
DL_M Discharge lamp (M)
DL_Y Discharge lamp (Y)
DM_C Drum motor_C
DM_K Drum motor_K
Drives the OPC drum unit
DM_M Drum motor_M
DM_Y Drum motor_Y
GB Grid The OPC drum surface potential is controlled
MC Charge unit The OPC drum surface is charged negatively

1 OPC drum Latent electrostatic images are formed
2 Cleaning blade Residual toner is cleaned and removed from the OPC drum surface

B. Waste toner section
DF11-8DP-SP1 (B)
5VN
5VN
CN5
2 GND
6
1
P SM-7pin R P DF1B-20DE S P DF1B- 34DE S CN3
/WTM_LD 2 1 /WTM_LD 1 1 /WTM_LD 1 12 /WTM_LD 12 12 /WTM_LD
/WTM_CW 3 2 /WTM_CW 2 3 /WTM_CW 3 14 /WTM_CW 14 14 /WTM_CW
/WTM_CLK 4 3 /WTM_CLK 3 5 /WTM_CLK 5 16 /WTM_CLK 16 16 /WTM_CLK
/WTM_D 5 4 /WTM_D 4 7 /WTM_D 7 18 /WTM_D 18 18 /WTM_D
5V3 6 5 5V3 5 9 5V3 9 5 5VN 5 5 5VN
P-GND 7 6 P-GND 6 11 P-GND 11 4 P-GND 4 4 P-GND
INT24V2 8 7 INT24V2 7 13 INT24V2 13 2 INT24V2 2 2 INT24V2
1 S8B-ZR-SM4
PAP PA-3pin PALR
1 CFM 1 8 CFM 8 24 CFM 24 24 CFM
2 CFM_LD 2 10 CFM_LD 10 26 CFM_LD 26 26 CFM_LD
30 TNFD
B34B-PNDZS-1
PCU
PWB
1
WTM
2 CFM 3
CN6
TBBOX D-GND 2 9 D-GND
TBBOX 3 19 TBBOX
5VNPD(LED) 1 20 5VNPD(LED)
D-GND 1
TNFD 2 CN8
4 TNFD 5VNPD
GP1A71L3
3
PHR-3
34
33
D-GND
5VNPD
B40B-PNDZS-1

CFM Charger air inlet fan motor Sends air to the charge unit of OPC drum unit (BK)
TBBOX Waste toner box sensor Detects the installation state of the waste toner box
TNFD Waste toner full detection Detects the waste toner full
WTM Waste toner drive motor Stirs waste toner
1 Waste toner transport screw Transports the waste toner to the transport pipe
2 Waste toner transport pipe Transports the waste toner to the waste toner box
3 Waste toner transport screw Transports the waste toner from the waste toner pipe to the waste toner box
4 Waste toner box Receives waste toner when copying or printing, and collects it

2. Operational descriptions 3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the
cleaning blade.
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the charge unit.
Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by
the waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.
the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the charge
unit.
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
Screen grid High voltage unit
Main corona unit
The charge unit is provided with the screen grid. The OPC
drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the voltage
applied to the screen grid.
2) Laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images. 4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
Aluminum Aluminum
Aluminum layer layer
OPC drum layer CGL CGL
CGL CTL CTL
CTL
OPC drum
lens
Laser lights
By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens,
light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface.
When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
and positive charges are generated.
CGL, positive and negative charges are generated.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. At the same time, neg-
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
ative charges are attracted to positive charges in the aluminum
negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the alumi-
layer of the OPC drum.
num layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on
anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
surface voltage.
of the OPC drum.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser lights are not
radiated.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.

3. Disassembly and assembly a. Drum (CL)
Mainte
Unit Page Unit Parts
nance
A OPC drum unit (CL) J- 5
1 OPC drum unit (CL) a Drum (CL)
B OPC drum unit (BK) J- 7
C Waste toner section J -12
A. OPC drum unit (CL)

1-a
Mainte
Unit Parts Page
nance
1 OPC drum a Drum (CL) J- 5
unit (CL) b Charge unit J- 6
c Side seal F (CL) J- 6
d Side seal R (CL)
e Toner reception seal (CL)
f Cleaner blade (CL)
g Toner mixing sheet
1-e 1) Remove the development unit (CL). (Refer to the "[L] DEVEL-
1-a OPING SECTION".)
2) Remove the OPC drum unit (CL). (Refer to the "(1) OPC durm
1-f
unit (CL)".)
1-d
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the fixing shaft (B).
1-c
1-g
1-b
1 B
A
(1) OPC durm unit (CL)
Unit
1 OPC drum unit (CL)
A
4) Slide the drum (CL) to the front side, and lift the OPC drum
rear side (C), and remove the drum (CL) (D) from the hole in
1 the front section.
* When installing, apply stearin acid to the drum (CL) surface
(E).
1) Remove the development unit (CL). (Refer to the "[L] DEVEL-

OPING SECTION".)
2) Hold the lock lever (A), and pull out OPC drum unit (CL) gently,
and remove OPC drum unit (CL) (B) while supporting the lower D 1-a
section with both hands. C
B 1

b. Charge unit (CL) 6) Disengage the pawl (E), and remove the cover (F). Remove
the Charge unit (G).
Mainte
Unit Parts * When installing the cover (F), be careful so that the other
nance
side of the side with the pawl doesn't separate.
1 OPC drum unit (CL) b Charge unit (CL)
1-b
G
1-b
F
A E

OPING SECTION".) c. Side seal F (CL), Side seal R (CL), Toner reception seal
(CL), Cleaner blade (CL), Toner mixing sheet
2) Remove the OPC drum unit (CL). (Refer to the "(1) OPC durm
unit (CL)".) Mainte
Unit Parts
3) Remove the drum (CL). (Refer to the "a. Drum (CL)".) nance
4) Remove the screws (A), and remove the cover (B). 1 OPC drum unit (CL) c Side seal F (CL)
d Side seal R (CL)
e Toner reception seal (CL)
A f Cleaner blade (CL)
g Toner mixing sheet
B
A
1-e
1-f
1-d
1-c
5) Remove the lock pawl (C) with a screwdriver, and remove the 1-g
MC cleaner shaft (D).

C OPING SECTION".)
D
D 2) Remove the OPC drum unit (CL). (Refer to the "(1) OPC durm
unit (CL)".)
3) Remove the drum (CL). (Refer to the "a. Drum (CL)".)
4) Remove the Charge unit. (Refer to the "b. Charge unit".)
5) Remove the side seal F (CL) (A), the side seal R (CL) (B), and
the toner reception seal (CL) (C).
C 1-e
1-c A
B 1-d

* When attaching, position it within the specified range shown B. OPC drum unit (BK)
from the reference line in the figure below.
Mainte
Unit Parts Page
nance
Reference line Reference line 1 OPC drum a Charge unit (BK) J- 8
unit (BK) b Drum (BK) J- 8
0 - 0.5mm 0 - 0.5mm
0 - 0.5mm c Side seal F (BK)
0 - 0.3mm
d Side seal R (BK)
Reference
line e Discharge lamp (K) {
f Cleaner blade (BK) J- 9
g Cleaning brush (BK) J -10
h Charger cleaner HP J -11
detection
i Sub blade J -12
1-d
0 - 0.3mm 0 - 0.3mm 1
Reference line Reference line 1-b
6) Remove the screws (D), and remove the cleaner blade (CL)
(E) and the toner mixing sheet (F).
* When installing screw (D), install the screw to the hole
shown with mark of arrow in the order of numeral (1, 2, 3)
mark. 1-i
1-g
1-c
1-e
3 D 1-a 1-f
1-h
D
2 (1) OPC drum unit (BK)
Unit
D 1 OPC drum unit (BK)
1
1-f E
1-g F
1) Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L] DEVEL-

OPING SECTION".)
2) Remove the Charge unit (BK). (Refer to the "a. Charge unit
(BK)".)
3) Hold the handle part, and remove the OPC drum unit (BK) (A).
A
1

a. Charge unit (BK) b. Drum (BK), Side seal F (BK), Side seal R (BK), Discharge
lamp (K)
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance Mainte
Unit Parts
1 OPC drum unit (BK) a Charge unit (BK) nance
1 OPC drum unit (BK) b Drum (BK)
c Side seal F (BK)
d Side seal R (BK)
e Discharge lamp (K) {
1-d
1-b
1-a
1-c
1-e

OPING SECTION".)
2) Remove the charge unit (BK). (Refer to the "a. Chaege unit
(BK)".)
A
3) Remove the OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) OPC drum
unit (BK)".)
4) Remove the screws (A), and open the frame (B).
B A
2) Open the cover (B) of the charge unit (BK). Loosen the screw
(C), and remove the Charge unit (BK) (D).
5) Remove the drum unit (BK) (C).
D B
1-a C

6) Remove the blue screws (D), and remove the flange (E). 8) Lift up the knob (J), and disengage the pawl (K). Remove the
Remove the drum (BK) (F). shading cover (L).
* When installing, engage the pawl (M) of the shading cover
to the frame.
E
M
K
J
D
F
1-b
L
* (Concerning OPC layer separating) 9) Disconnect the connector (N). Remove the discharge lamp (O)
With the rotational friction, OPC layer in end of both sides of (B).
the OPC drum may be separated.
If the print image is normal, the OPC drum can be continuing
use, replacement is not required.
* When installing the new OPC drum, be careful so that there
is the lot No. side (G) in upper side, insert the hand into the N
OPC drum, and install.
Be careful not to touch the photo-surface of the OPC drum.
1-e
O
c. Cleaner blade (BK)
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 OPC drum unit (BK) f Cleaner blade (BK)
7) Check condition of the side seal F (BK) (H) and the side seal R
(BK) (I).
* If replacement is required, paste it along the reference line.
1-d 1-c
I H
1-f
Reference line Reference line

OPING SECTION".)
Reference 2) Remove the charge unit (BK). (Refer to the "a. Charge unit
line Reference
line (BK)".)
unit (BK)".)

4) Remove the screws (A), and open the frame (B). * When installing, be careful not to cover the molt (J) with the
cleaner blade (K).
A
B A
K K
J
J

K K
J
J
d. Cleaning brush (BK)
Unit Parts Mainte

nance
1 OPC drum unit (CL) g Cleaning brush (BK)
6) Lift up the knob (D), and disengage the pawl (E). Remove the
shading cover (F).
* When installing, engage the pawls (G) of the shading cover
to the frame.
G 1-g
E
D

OPING SECTION".)
2) Remove the charger unit (BK). (Refer to the "a. Charger unit
(BK)".)
F
unit (BK)".)
7) Remove the screws (H), and remove the cleaning blade (BK)
(I).
B
H
H A
1-f I H

5) Remove the screw (C), and remove the collar (D) and the e. Charger cleaner HP detection
spring (E). Remove the screws (F), and remove the dirve plate
(G). Unit Parts
1 OPC drum unit (BK) h Charger cleaner HP detection
G
F
C
E
D 1-h
6) Remove the fixing block (H), and remove the cleaning brush
unit (BK) (I). 1) Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L] DEVEL-
OPING SECTION".)
2) Remove the charger unit (BK). (Refer to the "a. Charger unit
(BK)".)
H 3) Remove the OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) OPC drum
unit (BK)".)
4) Remove the screw (A), and charger cleaner HP detection unit
I (B).
7) Disengage the pawl (J), and remove the coupling (K) and the
bearing (L) from the cleaning brush (BK) (M).
A
J
B
1-g
5) Disconnect the connector (C), and remove the charger cleaner
M HP detection (D).
D 1-h
K
L
C

f. Sub blade 6) Remove the screws (D), and remove the sub blade (E).
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
D
1 OPC drum unit (BK) i Sub blade
D
1-i E
D
1-i
C. Waste toner section

Mainte
Parts Page
nance
1) Remove the developement unit (BK). (Refer to the [L] DEVEL- a Waste toner box J -12
OPPING SECTION.) b Waste toner full detection J -13
c Waste toner box sensor J -13
2) Remove the charger unit (BK). (Refer to the a. Charger unit
d Waste toner drive motor J -13
(BK).)
3) Remove the OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer to the (1) OPC drum
unit (BK).)
4) Remove the screws (A), and open the frame (B). d
a
A c
b
B A
(1) Waste toner box
Mainte
Parts
nance
a Waste toner box

1) Open the right cabinet lower (A). 4) Disconnect the connector (D), and remove the waste toner full
detection (E).
b
E
2) Remove the waste tnoer box (B).
(3) Waste toner box sensor
Parts
c Waste toner box sensor
a B
(2) Waste toner full detection

1) Remove the rear cabinet and the rear cabinet lower. (Refer to
Parts the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
b Waste toner full detection 2) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the waste toner box
sensor (B).
b
B c
"[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".) A
2) Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to the (1) Waste toner
box.)
(4) Waste toner drive motor
3) Remove the spring (A). Remove the screws (B), and remove
the rail (C). Parts
d Waste toner drive motor
B 1) Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to the (1) Waste toner
box.)

LCC lower cabinet. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
3) Remove the LCC transport unit. (Refer to the [G] PAPER
TRANSPORT SECTION.)
4) Remove the front cabinet upper and the frame cover R. (Refer
5) Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the E-ring (B), and
remove the gear (C). Remove the screws (D), and remove the
waste toner drive unit (E).
D
A
B C D
6) Disconnect the connector (F). Remove the E-ring (G), the

polyslider (H), and the bearing (I). Remove the screws (J), and
remove the drive mounting plate (K).
K
I
H
G
F
J
7) Remove the E-ring (L), and remove the gears (M). Remove the
screws (N), and remove the waste toner drive motor (O).
* When installing, fit the triangle mark (P) of the drive mount-
ing plate to the connector (Q) position, and install it.
d O
N
Q
L
N
P
M

4. Maintenance
Monochrome Remark/Refer to
300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
supply, When the Parts Guide.
K K K K K K K K K K
No. Part name Mechanical calling Block/Item No.
parts (Only the
Color supply 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 replacement parts
K K K K K K K K K K are described.)
1 Drum (BK) Monochrome
2 Cleaning blade (BK) supply (P/G No. : [36]-40)
3 Side seal F, R (BK)
4 Charge unit (BK) (P/G No. : [35]-41)
5 Drum (CL) Color supply
6 Cleaning blade (CL) (P/G No. : [34]-11)
7 Charge unit (CL) (P/G No. : [34]-2)
8 Side seal F, R (CL)
9 Toner reception seal (CL)
10 Toner mixing sheet (P/G No. : [34]-62)
11 Cleaning brush (BK) Mechanical
12 Discharge lamp (K) parts { { { { { { { { { {
13 Sub blade (P/G No. : [36]-17)
14 Waste toner box
8
9
13 11
6
5
10
1 3
8
2
3
12
7 4
14

The PM cycle means the replacement timing of periodic replace-
ment consumable parts which are required for maintaining the per-
formance.
The PM cycle is specified only for B/W output. For color output, it is
used as a reference value.
[Reason]
Since the ratio of B/W to color differs depending on the user's oper-
ation scene which varies every day, the PM cycle cannot be speci-
fied in a certain cycle for color output.
Replacement of a PM item at the recommended life is performed
by the dealer's judgment or at PM call or at EM call.
[Life end definition of a OPC drum ]
When the OPC drum counter exceeds the specified level of 100%
black output or 100% full color output, it is judged as life end.
However in practice, wear cannot be specified by rotations
because racing is increased in the tandem engine by the mixing
ratio of black and color outputs or when black output is made in the
color mode in ACS. For the reference of product quality, wear is
specified by the OPC drum rotations. The rotation of the MX-5500/
MX-6200/MX-7000 series OPC drum rotation is 840K.
The OPC drum life is affected by the print quantity of one job. This
is because the actual life is determined by the rotations of the OPC
drum.
When the print quantity of one job is 5 or less, the number of rota-
tions for one page is increased. As shown in the graph below,
therefore, the OPC drum life quantity varies for each print quantity
of one job.
"Life meter" can be checked with SIM22-1 according to each OPC
drum rotations as the OPC drum life.
"Life meter" indicates the remained life (%) of the OPC drum with
the entire OPC drum life as 100%.
(Example) If the used number of rotations is 550K:
100(%) 550 (K rotations) / 840 (K rotations) x 100 = 040 (%)
Number of ratations
OPC drum counter
of OPC drum
B/W Full color B/W Full color
OPC
300K pages 100K pages 840K rotations 840K rotations
Drum
OPC drum Life
350
300 Black OPC drum
Color OPC drum

250
200
150
100
50
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Number of sheets of one print job

[K] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
2 TM_Yb 2 19 TM_Yb 19 26 TM_Yb

1 TM_Ya 1 17 TM_Ya 17 24 TM_Ya
R SM2P-N P
2 TM_Mb 2 15 TM_Mb 15 22 TM_Mb
1 TM_Ma 1 13 TM_Ma 13 20 TM_Ma
R SM2P-N P
TM_Y 2 TM_Cb 2 11 TM_Cb 11 28 TM_Cb
1 TM_Ca 1 9 TM_Ca 9 27 TM_Ca
TM_M R
2
SM2P-N
TM_K1b
P
2 3 TM_K1b 3 21 TM_K1b
1 TM_K1a 1 1 TM_K1a 1 19 TM_K1a
TM_C R
2
SM2P-N
TM_K2b
P
2 7 TM_K2b 7 25 TM_K2b
1 TM_K2a 1 5 TM_K2a 5 23 TM_K2a
TM_K1 R SM2P-N P P DF1B-34DE S CN10
TM_K2
P SM-4p R P DF1B-32P R CN12

R PA-3pin P 1 FUFM_F 1 7 FUFM_F 7 1 FUFM_F
1 FUFM_F 1 2 /POFM_CNT2 2 9 FUFM_F_LD 9 3 FUFM_F_LD
2 NC 2 3 P-GND 3 11 P-GND 11 5 P-GND
3 P-GND 3 4 FUFM_F_LD 4 B16B-PNDZS-1
CN13
13 /POFM_CNT2 13 10 POFM_CNT2
B40B-PNDZS-1
DTBFM F
U
F
U
F
U
F
U
F F F F
M M M M
_ _ _ _
F F F F R SM3P-B P P DF1B-34DE S CN8
3 HTM_Yb 3 26 HTM_Yb 26 4 HTM_Yb
HTM_Y 1 HTM_Ya 1 24 HTM_Ya 24 2 HTM_Ya
R SM3P-B P
3 HTM_Mb 3 33 HTM_Mb 33 11
HTM_M 1 HTM_Ma 1 31 HTM_Ma 31 9
HTM_Mb
HTM_Ma
R SM3P-B P
3 HTM_Cb 3
HTM_C 1 HTM_Ca 1
29
27
HTM_Cb
HTM_Ca
29
27
7
5
HTM_Cb
HTM_Ca
R SM3P-B P
3 HTM_K1b 3 25 HTM_K1b 25 3 HTM_K1b
HTM_K 1 HTM_K1a 1 23 HTM_K1a 23 1 HTM_K1a
B12B-PNDZS-1
HTCS_Y
DRIVER
PWB
HTCS_M
HTCS_C
HTCS_K
PCU PWB
SM-3Pin_N
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1 CN10
HTCS_C 2 2 HTCS_C 2 30 HTCS_C 30 17 HTCS_C
D-GND 3 3 D-GND 3
DF3-3S-2C
R SM-3Pin_N P
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1
HTCS_M 2 2 HTCS_M 2 32 HTCS_M 32 16 HTCS_M
D-GND 3 3 D-GND 3
DF3-3S-2C
R SM-3Pin_N P
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1
HTCS_Y 2 2 HTCS_Y 2 34 HTCS_Y 34 18 HTCS_Y
D-GND 3 3 D-GND 3
DF3-3S-2C
B40B-PNDZS-1
SMR-03 S DF1B-22DE P CN9
5VNPD 1 1 1 1 5VNPD 1 10 5VNPD 10 25 5VNPD
HTCS_K 2 2 2 2 HTCS_K 2 12 HTCS_K 12 27 HTCS_K
D-GND 3 3 3 3 D-GND 3 14 D-GND 14 29 D-GND
HRS SMP-03 P QR/P8-20P S B30B-PNDZS-1
MX-7000N TONER SUPPLY SECTION K 1

DTBFM Bottle cooling fan motor Cools the toner cartridge
HTCS_C Hopper remaining sensor C
HTCS_K Hopper remaining sensor K
Detects toner remaining quantity
HTCS_M Hopper remaining sensor M
HTCS_Y Hopper remaining sensor Y
HTM_C Hopper motor C
HTM_K Hopper motor K
Transports the toner
HTM_M Hopper motor M
HTM_Y Hopper motor Y
TM_C Toner motor C
TM_K2 Toner motor K2 Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the developement unit.
TM_M Toner motor M
TM_Y Toner motor Y
2. Operational descriptions 2) Remove the old toner cartridge (B).
A. Outline
Adoption of the rotating toner bottle enables large capacity with a
compact toner bottle size.
When the remaining toner detection sensor in the toner hopper unit
detects no toner, the toner bottle turns to supply toner to the toner
hopper.
After supplying, full or empty status is detected at the toner hopper
inside. Therefore even if the toner cartridge becomes empty, copy-
ing is not immediately suspended because toner inside the toner 1 B
hopper is used.

Unit Page
A Toner cartridges (BK/C/M/Y) K- 2 3) Shake the new toner cartridge (C) a few times.
B Others K- 3
A. Toner cartridges (BK/C/M/Y)

Unit Maintenance C
1 Toner cartridges (BK/C/M/Y) User
replacement
1
* Do not put the toner cartridge upright.
(1) Toner cartridges

1) Open the toner cover (A).

4) Install the new toner cartridge (D). B. Others
* Do not forcibly insert the toner cartridge. Keep holding the
cartridge and completely insert it. Parts Page
a Hopper remaining sensor (C/M/Y) K- 3
b Bottle cooling fan motor K- 4
a
D b
(1) Hopper remaining sensor (C/M/Y)

5) Insert the cartridge securely until it locks. Parts
a Hopper remaining sensor (C/M/Y)
* Be sure to install the color cartridges to their proper posi-

tions. Avoid installation to a different color position. 1) Remove the toner cartridge. (Refer to the "[K] TONER SUP-
PLY SECTION".)
2) Remove the developement unit (CL) and the developement
BK1 BK2 unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L] DEVELOPEMENT SECTION".)
Y M C 3) Remove the OPC drum unit (CL), the charge unit, and the
OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer to the "[J] PHTOCONDUCTOR
SECTION".)
4) Remove the paper exit tray, the paper exit tray rear, and the
rear cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
5) Remove the screws (A), and remove the guide fixture (B).
6) Close the toner cover (E).
A
B
A

6) Disconnect the connectors (C). (2) Bottle cooling fan motor
Parts
b Bottle cooling fan motor
C
C
C
1) Remove the toner cartridge (BK/C/M/Y). (Refer to the [K]

TONER SUPPLY SECTION.)
7) Remove the screws (D). Remove the screws (E), and remove
the toner transport unit (C) (F), the toner transport unit (M) (G), 2) Remove the paper exit tray. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL
and the toner transport unit (Y) (H). OUTFIT.)
3) Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the screws (B) and the
washers (C), and remove the bottle cooling fan motor (D).
* When installing, the label (E) side is upward.
E
B
H C
E F
E
C
G
E A
D b
8) Disconnect the connector (I). Remove the screws (J), and

remove the hopper remaining sensor (C/M/Y) (K).
J I
a K

4. Maintenance
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
replacement
parts
parts are
described.)
1 Toner cartridge (BK/C/M/Y) Mechanical User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
parts

GND
GND
GND
GND
[L]
1
2
4
6
CN7 P DF1B-26DE S PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H S QR/P8-8P P 51021-0400
DF11-8DP-SP1
TSG_Y 14 14 TSG_Y 14 5 TSG_Y 6 8 TSG_Y 8 1 TSG_Y
6 D-GND 5 7 D-GND 7 4 D-GND
MX-7000N
TCS_Y 12 12 TCS_Y 12 4 TCS_Y 7 6 TCS_Y 6 3 TCS_Y

24V3 10 10 24V3 10 3 24V3 8 5 24V3 5 2 24V3
51021-0400
1
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H S QR/P8-8P P
TSG_M 25 25 TSG_M 25 5 TSG_M 6 8 TSG_M 8 1 TSG_M
TCS_M 23 23 TCS_M 23 4 TCS_M 7 6 TCS_M 6 3 TCS_M
24V3 21 21 24V3 21 3 24V3 8 5 24V3 5 2 24V3
D-GND 11 11 D-GND 11 PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H S QR/P8-8P P 51021-0400
TSG_C 9 9 TSG_C 9 5 TSG_C 6 8 TSG_C 8 1 TSG_C
TCS_C 7 7 TCS_C 7 4 TCS_C 7 6 TCS_C 6 3 TCS_C
24V3 5 5 24V3 5 3 24V3 8 5 24V3 5 2 24V3
B30B-PNDZS-1
1
CN1 CN2 P SM-4pin R
1 DVK_CH PHTM_A 2 1 PHTM_1a 1
2 PHTM_Ka PHTM_B 3 2 PHTM_1b 2
3 1 3 3
2
PHTM_Kb DVK_CH DVK_CH
4 FPCL1 DVK_CH_R 9 4 DVK_CH_R 4
1
5 FPCL2 P SM-3pin R
6 5VNPD PHTM2_A 4 1 PHTM_2a 1
3
7 24V3 2 NC 2
8 D-GND
PTMH_1
5 3 PHTM_2b 3
PWB
PHTM2_B
9 VFM_R SM9B-GHS-TB
PTMH_2
10 DVK_FM_LD
11 D-GND
DRIVER
2
CN2
TCS_Y
12 DVK_CH_R
PHTM_Kb 8
PHTM_Ka 6 SM12B-GHS-TB
B12B-PNDZS-1
DVK DRIVER PWB

2
DEVELOPING SECTION
3
S DF1B-22DE P S QR/P8-20P P
2
D-GND 4 D-GND 4
BS_Y
16 16
TCS_M
20 PHTM_Ka 20 9 PHTM_Ka 9
CN9 22 PHTM_Kb 22 10 PHTM_Kb 10
FPCL1 22 21 FPCL1 21 14 FPCL1 14
1
FPCL2 24 2 FPCL2 2 13 FPCL2 13
4
5VN 26 4 5VN 4 12 5VN 12
51021-0400
TSG_K 23 17 TSG_K 17 8 TSG_K 8 1 TSG_K
BS_M
TCS_K 19 13 TCS_K 13 6 TCS_K 6 3 TCS_K
24V3 17 11 24V3 11 5 24V3 5 2 24V3
B30B-PNDZS-1
TCS_C
TCS_K
BS_C
PCU PWB
MX-7000N DEVELOPING SECTION L 1

3
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
DVCM
CN6 CN1
HV_REM# 8 8 HV_REM#
/HV_LD1 6 7 /HV_LD1
BS_K
/HV_CLK 7 6 /HV_CLK VHR-3
/HV_DATA 5 5 /HV_DATA BS-K
P-GND 3 4 P-GND
DVKM
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2 BS-C

P-GND 2 2 P-GND BS-M
24V3 10 3 24V3
MC PWB
B40B-PNDZS-1 BS-Y
B08B-PASK
CN13 B07B-PASK
5VN 7 2 5VN 2 2 5VN
VH-2P
24V4 1 25 24V4 25 1 24V4
B40B-PNDZS-1
B7P-PH-K-S
7 N.C
CN9 3 N.C
DVCM_LD 10 12 DVCM_LD 12 6 DVCM_LD
/DVCM_D 8 10 /DVCM_D 10 5 /DVCM_D
/DVCM_CK 6 8 /DVCM_CK 8 4 /DVCM_CK
INT24V2 2 4 INT24V2 4 1 INT24V2
B30B-PNDZS-1
BS_C Developer bias (C)
BS_K Developer bias (K)
Developer bias
BS_M Developer bias (M)
BS_Y Developer bias (Y)
DVCM Developer drive motor_CL Drives the development section (CL)
DVKM Developer drive motor_K Drives the developement section (K) /Drives the separating operations of the primary transfer belt
PTMH_1 Intermediate hopper motor Transports the toner
PTMH_2 Stirring motor Stirs the toner
TCS_C Toner density sensor (C) (ATC)
TCS_K Toner density sensor (K) (ATC)
Detects the toner density in the developing unit
TCS_M Toner density sensor (M) (ATC)
TCS_Y Toner density sensor (Y) (ATC)

1 Developer roller Latent electrostatic images on the OPC drum are changed to visible images
2 Stirring roller Stirring developer
3 Toner filter Prevents dispersing of toner
4 DVK DRIVER PWB Controls the toner stirring motor

Electrostatic latent images generated on the OPC drum by the Unit Page
laser (writing) units (laser image ray) are converted into visible A Development unit (CL) L- 2
images by toner. B Development unit (BK) L- 6
A. Development unit (CL)

Mainte
Unit Parts Page
nance
1 Development a Developer (C/M/Y) L- 4
unit (CL) b DV seal (CL) L- 5
c DV side seal F (CL)
d DV side seal R (CL)
e Toner density sensor (ATC) L- 5
f Toner filter (CL) L- 5
1-f 1-d
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are stirred and transported
by the mixing roller.
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively
charged due to mechanical friction. 1-e
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC 1-b
component) is applied to the developing roller. 1-c
1
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
1-a
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.
(1) Development unit (CL)
Unit
1 Development unit (CL)

1) Open the front cabinet (A). 5) Loosen the screws (H), and open the cover (I) of the process
section.
A I
2) Turn the blue screw (B) counterclockwise. Check that the lock
is released as shown in (C). 6) Loosen the screw (J).
fer belt.
J
B
3) Remove the screw (D). Hold the drum fixing knob (E) by the 7) Pinch the knob (K), and remove the development unit (CL) (L).
hand to not rotate, remove the screw (F). Remove the drum
fixing knob (E).
D K
4) Pull out the fixing cover (G).

a. Developer (C/M/Y) 4) Take out the old developer (D), and infuse the developer (E).
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Development unit a Developer (C/M/Y)
(CL)
D
1-a
1-a
1) Remove the development unit (CL). (Refer to the "(1) Devel-

opment unit (CL)".)
2) Remove the screws (A).
A
* When replacing developer, use an extreme care not to drop
developer on the drive section (marked with {).
* [Important information]
(Note for cleaning the development unit)
If the development unit is cleaned with a cleaner or an air blower
with much developer in the development unit, static electricity
A may be accumulated in the unit. In order to prevent against this,
note the following items.
* If metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller sur-
face when transporting developer or removing foreign material
from the magnet roller, developer may adhere to the magnet
roller surface. Be careful to avoid this when handling the mag-
net roller.
* Remove developer in the development unit as well as devel-
oper attached to the magnet roller as far as possible.
* (When cleaning the development unit with an air blower [duct])
Before cleaning with an air duct, remove developer from the
3) Pinch the part of (B), and remove the cover (C) in the arrow unit as far as possible, and ground the magnet roller rear side
direction. cored bar as shown in the figure below and clean the unit with
an air blower. (Do not pinch the grounding wire with a crocodile
B clip connector in order to prevent against damage on the cored
bar.)
C
the magnet roller

rear side cored bar
B

* After supplying developer, do not tilt the development unit. c. Toner density sensor C/ M/ Y (ATC)
Unit Parts
1 Development unit e Toner density sensor C/M/Y (ATC)
(CL)
b. DV seal (CL), DV side seal F (CL), DV side seal R (CL)
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Development unit b DV seal (CL)
(CL) c DV side seal F (CL) 1-e
d DV side seal R (CL)
1-d

opment unit (CL)".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the guide (B). Remove
1-b the screws (C), and disconnect the connector (D), and remove
the toner density sensor C/M/Y (ATC) (E) and mylar (F).
1-c * When pasting the mylar, paste it along the reference line.
A
B
A
opment unit (CL)".)
2) Remove the DV seal (CL) (A), the DV side seal F (CL) (B), and
the DV side seal R (CL) (C).
1-e D
B C E
1-b A
1-c
1-d
F
C
referance
0 - 0.3mm 0 - 0.5mm
reference
d. Toner filter (CL)
* Attach the DV seal (CL) (D) and DV side seal F (CL) (E) and Mainte
Unit Parts
DV side seal R (CL) (F) along the reference line. nance
1 Development unit f Toner filter (CL)
(CL)
0 - 0.2mm
0 - 0.3mm
1-f
D
0 - 0.3mm
0 - 0.5mm
0 - 0.3mm
0 - 0.3mm
E F

1) Remove the development unit (CL). (Refer to the "(1) Devel- 1) Open the front cabinet (A).
opment unit (CL)".)
2) Remove the cover (A), and remove the toner filter (CL) (B).
A
A
B 1-f
is released as shown in (C).
fer belt.
B. Development unit (BK)

Mainte
Unit Parts Page
nance C
1 Development a Developer (K) L- 7
unit (BK) b Toner density detection K L- 8
(ATC)
c DVK DRIVER PWB L- 9
d Hopper remaining sensor K L -10
B
e Intermediate hopper motor L -10
f Toner filter (BK) L -11
g DV side seal F (BK) L -11
h DV side seal R (BK) 3) Remove the screw (D). Hold the drum fixing knob (E) by the
i DV seal (BK) L -12 hand to not rotate, remove the screw (F). Remove the drum
j Stirring motor (BK) L -12 fixing knob (E).
1-c
1-a 1-d
D
1-g 1-h
F
1-e
1-f E
1-i
1-j
1-b
1
(1) Development unit (BK)
Unit
1 Development unit (BK)
G

5) Loosen the screws (H), and open the cover (I) of the process 1) Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) Devel-
section. opment unit (BK)".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the toner hopper unit (B).
* When installing, engage the toner hopper unit to the pawls
I (C) of the MG roller unit.
H
A
H B
A
6) Loosen the screw (J).
3) Disconnect the connector (D) on front side and the connector

(E) on rear side.
D
7) Hold the knob and remove the development unit (BK) (K).
K
1
a. Developer (K) E
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Development unit a Developer (K)
(BK)
4) Remove the DV discharge plate (F).
1-a

5) Take out the old developer (K) (G). 9) Shake the development unit (N) horizontally a few times.
G 1-a
b. Toner density detection K (ATC)
Unit Parts
6) While rotating the MG roller knob (H), infuse the developer (K) 1 Development unit b Toner density detection K (ATC)
(I). (BK)
H
1-b
1) Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) Develop

ment unit (BK)".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the toner hopper unit (B).
7) Install the DV discharge plate (J).
* When installing, engage the toner hopper unit to the pawls
(C) of the MG roller unit.
A
J
B
A
8) Engage the pawls (K) to the toner hopper unit (L), and install it,
and fix with the screws (M).
C
M
L
M

3) Disconnect the connector (D) on front side, and the connector c. DVK DIRVER PWB
(E) on rear side.
Unit Parts
1 Development unit c DVK DRIVER PWB
(BK)
1-c
D
1) Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) Devel-

opment unit (BK)".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the DV cover (B).
* When installing, engage the pawls (C) of the cover to the
pawls (D) of the DV_BOX.
E
B
A
A
* Before the following procedure executing, be sure to take
out the developer (K).
4) Remove the screws (F), and remove the ATC sheet (G). A
Remove the screws (H), and remove the toner density sensor
K (I). Disconnect the connector (J).
C
F F
G
D
H 3) Remove the DVK DRIVER PWB (E). Disconnect the connec-

tors (F).
J
I
1-b
F
F
1-c E

d. Hopper remaining sensor K 2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the toner hopper unit (B).
* When installing, engage the toner hopper unit to pawls (C)
Unit Parts
of the MG roller unit.
1 Development unit d Hopper remaining sensor K
(BK)
A
B
A
1-d
C
3) Disconnect the connector (D) on front side, and the connector
(E) on rear side.
1) Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the (1) Develop-

ment unit (BK).)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the sheet (B). Remove
the screws (C), and remove the hopper remaining sensor K
(D). Disconnect the connector (E).
D
* When installing, arrange the snap band (F) so that there is in
the upper side of the projection (G), then engage the har-
ness (H) to cut-out portion of the projection (G).
F D 1-d
H
H
C G
A E
B
A E
e. Intermediate hopper motor
Unit Parts
1 Development unit e Intermediate hopper motor
(BK)
4) Remove the screws (F), and remove the intermediate hopper
motor unit (G).
G
1-e
1) Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) Devel-

opment unit (BK)".)

5) Remove the gear (H). Remove the harness from the clamp (I). g. DV side seal F (BK), DV side seal R (BK)
Remove the screws (J), and remove the intermediate hopper
motor (K). Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Development unit g DV side seal F (BK)
(BK) h DV side seal R (BK)
H
J
K
1-e
1-g
J
I 1-h
f. Toner filter (BK)
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance 1) Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) Develop-
1 Development unit f Toner filter (BK) ment unit (BK)".)
(BK)
2) Remove the DV side seal F (BK) (A), and remove the DV side
seal R (BK) (B).
* When attaching, position it within the specified range.
B 1-h
1-g
A
1-f
0 - 0.5mm 0 - 0.5mm
1) Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) Develop-
ment unit (BK)".)
2) Remove the toner filter (A). 1-g 1-h
* Push the sheet into the hole (C) of development unit (BK) A B
until the edge (trapezoidal shape side) of the sheet (B) is
passing the hole, and exiting.
0 - 0.5mm 0 - 0.5mm
C 1-f
A
B
B

h. DV seal i. Stirring motor
Mainte Unit Parts

Unit Parts
nance 1 Development unit j Stirring motor
1 Development unit i DV seal (BK) (BK)
(BK)
1-j
1-i
1) Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) Develop- 1) Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the (1) Develop-
ment unit (BK)".) ment unit (BK).)
2) Remove the screw (A), and remove the cover (B). 2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the pawl (B) and front
cover (C).
C A
A
B B
3) Remove the DV seal (C).

* When attaching, position it within the specified range. A
3) Disconnect the connector (D). Remove the screws (E), and
remove the stirring motor (F) and gear (G).
0 - 0.5mm
Reference
D
C
1-i C E
G
F 1-j
E

4. Maintenance
Monochrome Remark/Refer to
supply, When 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000 the Parts Guide.
No. Part name Mechanical calling K K K K K K K K K K Block/Item No.
parts (Only the
Color supply 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 replacement parts
K K K K K K K K K K are described.)
1 Developer (K) Monochrome
2 DV seal (BK) supply (P/G No. : [32]-46)
3 DV side seal F (BK) (P/G No. : [32]-65)
4 DV side seal R (BK) (P/G No. : [32]-59)
5 Toner filter (BK) (P/G No. : [32]-63)
6 Developer (C) Color supply
7 Developer (M)
8 Developer (Y)
9 DV seal (CL) (P/G No. : [31]-49)
10 DV side seal F/R (CL) DV side seal F
(P/G No. : [31]-28),
DV side seal R
(P/G No. : [31]-37)
11 Toner filter (CL) (P/G No. : [30]-2)
12 Bias terminal/connector Mechanical
parts
10
6,7,8
11 1
12
12
12 4
9 12
5
10
3
12

[M] TRANSFER SECTION
CN4 P DF1B-34DE S
INT24V1 12 1 INT24V1 1 2 INT24V1
INT24V1 11 3 INT24V1 3 5 INT24V1
BTM_B 10 5 BTM_B 5 4 BTM_B
BTM_B/ 9 7 BTM_B/ 7 6 BTM_B/
BTM_A/ 8 9 BTM_A/ 9 3 BTM_A/
BTM_A 7 11 BTM_A 11 1 BTM_A
B12B-PASK-1 B6B-XH
DRIVER
PWB
CN18 P DF1B-34DE S R SM-2pin P
PTCM_A 25 34 PTCM_a 34 1 PTCM_a 1
PTCM_B 27 31 PTCM_b 31 2 PTCM_b 2
B30B-PNDZS-1
CN13
5VN 7 2 5VN 2 2 5VN
B40B-PNDZS-1 B07B-PASK
CN9 P DF1B-34DE S
D-GND 3 24 D-GND 24
TBLTC 18 34 TBLTC 34 2 TBLTC 2 1 TBLTC
B30B-PNDZS-1 1 D-GND 3 2 D-GND
CN18 18 5VNPD(LED) 18 3 5VNPD(LED) 1 3 5VNPD(LED)
5VNPD(LED) 7 PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H GP1S73P 179228-3
DF11-6DP-SP1(a)
5VNPD(LED) 9
D-GND 1
D-GND 5
5VNPD(LED) 11
B30B-PNDZS-1
CN15 P SM-3P N R
TBLTB 14 1 TBLTB 1 1 TBLTB
B40B-PNDZS-1 GP1S73P 179228-3
5
8 DVKM
TBLTC
BTM
1
7 PTCM
TBLTB
3
PCU PWB 4
4
2
12
4
10
6
9
4
13 TURM
14
11 THPS
CN18
PTCM_HP 22 4 PTCM_HP 4 2 PTCM_HP 1 1 PTCM_HP
D-GND
B30B-PNDZS-1
24 5 D-GND 5 1 D-GND 2 2
179228-2
D-GND PTCM_HP
PHNR-02-H +
BU02P-TR-P-H 1 P-GND
CN18
P-GND 4 24 P-GND 24 4 P-GND 5 1 P-GND 5 2 /TURM_A
/TURM_A 6 26 /TURM_A 26 5 /TURM_A 4 2 /TURM_A 4 B2P-PH-K-S
THPS 8 27 THPS 27 6 THPS 3 3 THPS 3 1 THPS
5VNPD(LED) 12 29 5VNPD(LED) 29 8 5VNPD(LED) 1 5 5VNPD(LED) 1 3 5VNPD(LED)
B30B-PNDZS-1 S QR/P4 40PIN P PHNR-08-H + BU08P-TR-P-H PHNR-05-H + BU05P-TR-P-H GP1S73 179228-3

BTM Transfer drive motor Drives the tranfer belt
DVKM Transfer drive motor_K Drives the development section (K) / Drives separation operation of primary transfer belt
MX-7000N TRANSFER SECTION M 1

PTCM PTC cleaner motor Drives the PTC cleaner
PTCM_HP Sensor inside the PTC unit Detects home position of the PTC cleaner
TBLTB Transfer belt separation sensor BK Detects primary transfer separation (BK)
TBLTC Transfer belt separation sensor CL Detects primary transfer separation (CL)
THPS Secondary transfer separation drive Detects secondary transfer separation
sensor
TURM Secondary transfer separation drive motor Drives separation operation of the secondary transfer

1 Primary transfer belt Transfers toner on the OPC drum forms toner images on the belt.
2 Primary transfer drive roller Drives primary transfer belt
3 Primary transfer follower roller Drives primary transfer belt
4 Primary transfer roller Transfers toner images on the OPC drum to the primary transfer belt
5 Y auxiliary roller Retaining the belt position by separation of the Y primary transfer roller
6 Registration backup roller Retaining the belt position in the process control and the registration section.
7 Cleaning brush Cleans the back surface of the primary transfer belt
8 Transfer cleaning blade Cleans the frontal surface of the primary transfer belt
9 Secondary transfer belt Transfers toner images on the primary transfer belt to paper
10 Secondary belt dirve roller Drives secondary transfer belt
11 Secondary belt follower roller Drives secondary transfer belt
12 Secondary belt tension roller Applies a proper tension to the secondary transfer belt
13 PTC unit Imposes negative charges
14 PTC cleaner Clean the PTC unit
A. Outline
In this section, a high voltage are applied to the primary transfer
roller, toner images on the OPC drum are transferred to the primary
transfer belt surface, toner images on the primary transfer belt are
transferred to paper by the secondary transfer belt.
Y M C K
Also performs all pressure contact, all separation, and only black
contact by the roller separation sensor (TBLTC, TBLTB) and the
separation detection arm.
The primary transfer and the secondary transfer are driven together
with the black developing motor.
C. Transfer belt separation

Transfer belt is separated by the transfer separation motor.
The transfer belt is in contact with the OPC drum except for the fol-
DRUM PTC lowing cases.
[Case where the transfer belt is not contact with the OPC drum]
When executing process control (to prevent against breakage of
B. Primary transfer roller separation mechanism toner patch on the OPC drum)
and content When a jam occurs (Protection of the OPC drum, right door
The primary transfer roller performs all pressure contact, all sepa- open/close)
ration, and only black contact depending on the operation mode.
When the roller separation clutch (BLTCL) is turned ON, the trans-
fer cam rotates and the primary transfer link and the primary trans-
fer arm which is linked with the cam are shifted in the arrow
direction, performing separation of the roller.
All pressure contact
Y M C K
All separation
Y M C K
Only black contact

3. Disassembly and assembly (1) Primary transfer unit
Unit
Unit Page
1 Primary transfer unit
A Primary transfer unit M- 3
B Secondary transfer unit M- 9
C PTC unit M -12
D Secondary transfer separation drive unit M -14
E Others M -16
A. Primary transfer unit

Mainte
Unit Parts Page
nance
1 Primary a Primary transfer belt M- 4
transfer unit b Y auxiliary roller { M- 6 1
c Primary transfer follower {
roller
d Primary transfer roller
e Belt drive gear M- 6
f Primary transfer drive roller { M- 7
g Transfer idle roller { M- 7
h Tension roller {
i Cleaning brush { M- 7 1) Open the front cover (A).
j Resist backup roller { M- 8
k Cleaner seal M- 8
l Transfer sub blade
m Transfer cleaning blade A
n Cleaning brush {
1-k
1-l 1-i
1-n
1-k
is released as shown in (C).
fer belt.
1-m
1-e
1 1-a
C
1-d
1-h
1-c B
1-g
1-b hand to not rotate, remove the screw (F). Remove the drum
fixing knob (E).
1-g
1-f 1-j D

4) Pull out the fixing cover (G). * When installing, check to insure that guide rail (O) of the pri-
mary transfer unit is in the rail (N) of main unit side, and
push into the primary transfer unit (M).
G N
O M
5) Loosen the screws (H), and open the cover (I) of the process
section.
I a. Primary transfer belt
H Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Primary transfer unit a Primary transfer belt
H
6) Release the lock (J), and open the right door unit (K).
1-a
K
1) Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the "(1) Primary
transfer unit".)
J
2) Remove the screws (A). Rotate the cleaner unit (B) 45
degrees, and remove it.
7) Loosen the screws (L). Remove the primary transfer unit (M).
A
1 M
B
A
L
45

3) Remove the screws (C), and remove the paper guide (D). 7) Fold the transfer frame cleaner unit side (O), and remove the
primary transfer belt (P).
C * When working, front side is made downward to prevent
damage of the primary transfer belt (P). When removing,
pinch the belt upper edge (rear side) (Q), be sure to don't
touch the surface.
C * Install so that the lot number (R) side of the belt inside is
front side.
D Q
4) Remove the screw (E), and disengage the pawl (F), and
P
remove the guide rail (G).
O 1-a
F
G E R
* Apply starting powder

5) Remove the screw (H), and remove the guide (I). a) Apply the Kynar powder (UKOG-0123FCZZ) to whole of
* When installing, check that the shaft (J) is in the cut-out por- belt surface evenly.
tion (K) of the guide.
I H
b) Rub the Kynar that applied to the belt into the belt gen-
tly. (Cover the whole surface.)
6) Remove the screws (L), and slide the plates (M). Remove the
fixing bearing (N).
M
M
L

b. Y auxiliary roller, Primary transfer follower roller, Primary 5) Remove the primary transfer roller units (D).
transfer roller
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Primary transfer unit b Y auxiliary roller {
c Primary transfer follower {
roller
d Primary transfer roller
D
1-e
1-d D
1-c 6) Remove the bearing (E), the collar (F), and bearings (G) from
primary transfer roller (H).
1-f F
G
1-b

transfer unit".) G
E
2) Remove the primary transfer belt. (Refer to the "a. Primary
transfer belt".) H
3) Clean the Y auxiliary roller (A) and the primary transfer fol-
lower roller (B). 1-d
* Clean with alcohol. When installing, alcohol must be volatil-
ized completely. c. Belt drive gear
* Prevent dust or dirt being put.
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Primary transfer unit e Belt drive gear
A 1-b
B 1-e
1-c
4) Remove the screws (C).
1) Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the (1) Primary

C C transfer unit.)
2) Remove the screw (A), and remove the belt drive gear (B).
* When installing, be sure to install the parallel pin (C).
C B 1-e

d. Primary transfer drive roller 3) Clean the transfer idle roller (A) and the tension roller (B).
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Primary transfer unit f Primary transfer drive roller {
1-g A
1-h
B
1-g A
f. Cleaning brush
Mainte
Unit Parts
1-f nance
1 Primary transfer unit i Cleaning brush {
1) Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the (1) Primary
transfer unit.)
transfer belt".)
3) Clean the primary transfer drive roller (A).
1-i
* Clean with alcohol. When installing, alcohol must be volatil-
ized completely.
A 1-f

transfer unit".)
transfer belt".)
3) Clean the cleaning brush (A).
e. Transfer idle roller, tension roller
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance 1-i A
1 Primary transfer unit g Transfer idle roller {
h Tension roller {
1-h
1-g
1-g

transfer unit".)
transfer belt".)

g. Resist backup roller 1) Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the "(1) Primary
transfer unit".)
Mainte
Unit Parts 2) Remove the screws (A). Rotate the cleaner unit (B) 45
nance
degrees, and remove it.
1 Primary transfer unit j Resist backup roller {
B
A
1-j
45

transfer unit".)
transfer belt".)
3) Clean the resist backup roller (A).
* Clean with alcohol. When installing, alcohol must be volatil- 3) Check the cleaner seal (C).
ized completely.
* When replacing is required, paste it along the reference line.
1-k C
1-k C
A 1-j
0.2mm - 0.7mm 0.2mm - 0.7mm
h. Cleaner seal, Transfer sub blade, transfer cleaning blade,

cleaning brush reference
line
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Primary transfer unit k Cleaner seal 0 - 0.5mm 0 - 0.5mm
l Transfer sub blade
m Transfer cleaning blade reference line reference line
n Cleaning brush {
4) Remove the screws (D), and remove the transfer sub blade (E)
and transfer cleaning blade (F).
1-l
1-n 1-k D
1-k D
D 1-l
E
1-m
D
F
D
D
1-m

5) Remove the screw (G), and remove the cover (H), the shutter B. Secondary transfer unit
(I), and the spring (J).
Mainte
Unit Parts Page
nance
1 Secondary a Secondary transfer idle M-10
G transfer unit gear
b Secondary belt follwer roller {
c Secondary drive belt
d Secondary transfer roller M-11
e Secondary belt dirve roller { M-11
f Secondary belt tension { M-11
J roller
I H
6) Remove the screws (K), and remove the plate (L). Remove the
E-ring (M), the bearing (N), and the screws (O), and remove
1-c
the pipe (P) and the plate (Q).
1-e
L 1-a
K
Q 1-f
O
1
N M
1-b
1-d
(1) Secondary transfer unit

P O
Unit
7) Remove the E-ring (R), and remove the bearing (S). Remove
1 Secondary transfer unit
the E-ring (T), the gear (U), and the bearing (V), and remove
the cleaning brush (W).
T 1-n
W 1
U V
R
S 1) Release the lock (A), and open the right door unit (B).

2) Push the plate (C) slightly, and release the lock (D). Rotate the 2) Remove the screws (A) and remove the plate (B), and remove
secondary transfer unit (E) and remove it. the secondary drive idle gear (C). Remove the bearing (D) and
the belt (E). Remove the polyslider (F), the pulley (G), the
polyslider (H), the bearing (I), and the parallel pin (J). Remove
the spring (K) and the plate (L).
1
E
J
I
H G
E
F
L D
B
C K 1-a C
A
3) Remove the screws (M), and remove the frame (N).
D
M
a. Secondary drive idle gear, Secondary belt follower roller,

Secondary transfer belt
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Secondary transfer a Secondary drive idle gear
unit b Secondary belt follower roller {
N
M
c Secondary transfer belt
4) Remove the frame (O) and the bearing (P), and remove the
secondary belt follower roller (Q) and bearing (R).
1-c
1-a
R
1-b P
O
Q 1-b
1) Remove the secondary transfer unit. (Refer to the "(1) Second- 5) Remove the secondary transfer belt (S).
ary transfer unit".)
S 1-c

b. Secondary transfer roller 1) Remove the secondary transfer unit. (Refer to the "(1) Second-
Mainte
Unit Parts 2) Remove the secondary transfer belt. (Refer to the "a. Second-
nance
ary transfer idle gear, secondary belt follower roller, secondary
1 Secondary transfer d Secondary transfer roller
transfer belt".)
unit
3) Remove the C-ring (A). Remove the secondary belt drive roller
(B). Remove the C-ring (C), the parallel pin (D), and bearings
(E) from the secondary belt drive roller (B).
D
C
E E
A B 1-e
1-d
1) Remove the secondary transfer unit. (Refer to the "(1) Second-

d. Secondary belt tension roller
2) Remove the secondary transfer belt. (Refer to the "a. Second-
ary transfer idle gear, secondary belt follower roller, secondary Mainte
Unit Parts
transfer belt".) nance
3) Disenage the pawl (A), and remove the bearing (B) on the front 1 Secondary transfer f Secondary belt tension roller {
side, the bearing (C), and the spring (D). Remove the secon- unit
rary transfer roller (E), and remove the bearing (F) and the
bearing (G).
G F
1-f
E 1-d
D
C B
c. Secondary belt drive roller 1) Remove the secondary transfer unit. (Refer to the "(1) Second-
Mainte 2) Remove the secondary transfer belt. (Refer to the "a. Second-
Unit Parts
nance ary transfer idle gear, secondary belt follower roller, secondary
1 Secondary transfer e Secondary belt drive roller { transfer belt".)
unit
3) Remove the bearings (A) and springs (B), and remove the sec-
ondary belt tension roller (C).
1-e B
A
B C 1-f

C. PTC unit 3) Remove the screw (C). Hold the drum fixing knob (D) by the
hand to not rotate, remove the screw (E). Remove the drum
Mainte fixing knob (D).
Unit Parts Page
nance
1 PTC unit a PTC cleaner B M -13
b PTC cleaner
c Charger wire M -13
E
1
1-b 1-c
4) Pull out the fixing cover (F).
1-a
(1) PTC unit F

Parts
1 PTC unit
1 5) Loosen the screws (G), and open the cover (H) of the process
section.
H
1) Remove the paper dust removal cleaner. (Refer to the [G]
PAPER TRANSFER SECTION.) G
2) Turn the blue screw (A) counterclockwise. Check that the lock
is released as shown in (B). G
fer belt.
B
6) Remove the screw (I), and pull out the PTC unit (J) straight.
J
1

* When installing, be careful to prevent damage of the primary 4) Disenage the pawl (D). Remove the PTC cleaner B (E), and
transfer belt where right side (K) of the PTC unit is a cause. remove the PTC cleaner (F).
* When installing, check that rails (L) is engaged. * When installing, check that the charger wire (G) is posi-
tioned to center of the cleaner pad (H).
* When installing the PTC cleaner B (E), be sure to check that
K the pawl (D) and the pawl (I) of the PTC cleaner (F) is
engaged.
* When removing or installing, be careful that the charger wire
(G) hang up the lower side (J) of the PTC cleaner (F).
L
G
1-b
L
F
1-a D
a. PTC cleaner B, PTC cleaner
E
Mainte J
Unit Parts
nance I
1 PTC unit a PTC cleaner B
b PTC cleaner
b. Charger wire
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 PTC unit c Charger wire
1-b
1-a
1) Remove the paper dust removal cleaner. (Refer to the [G]

PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION.)
2) Remove the PTC unit. (Refer to the "(1) PTC unit".)
1-c
3) After disengaging the pawl (A), disengage the pawl (B).
Remove the holder cover (C).
C
A 1) Remove the paper dust removal cleaner. (Refer to the [G]
PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION.)
2) Remove the PTC unit. (Refer to the "(1) PTC unit".)
3) Remove the PTC cleaner B and PTC cleaner. (Refer to the a.
PTC cleaner B, PTC cleaner.)

4) Remove the spring (B) from the pawl (A). Remove the round 2) Remove the screws (C), and remove the paper guide (D).
terminal (D) from the pawl (C). Remove the charger wire (E).
Remove the spring (B) form the round terminal (F).
* When installing, hold the round terminal (D). Don't touch the D
wire directly.
* When installing, be careful to dirt of the wire and don't put oil
etc., and be sure to prevent the wire bending or twisting.
B C
D 1-c C
E
3) Remove the screws (E), and remove the pressure plate (F)
C and springs (G).
G G
A
F F
B
D. Secondary transfer separating drive unit E

E
E
Unit Parts Page
4) Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screw (I). Disenage
1 PTC unit a Secondary transfer M -15
separation motor the pawl (J), and remove the cover (K).
b Secondary transfer M -15
separation drive sensor H I
J
H
1 1-a
5) Remove the screws (L), and remove the secondary transfer

1-b separation drive unit (M).
(1) Secondary transfer separating drive unit M 1

Parts
1 Secondary transfer drive unit
L
L
B

a. Secondary transfer separation motor 4) Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screws (I), and
remove the secondary transfer separation motor unit (J).
Unit Parts
1 Secondary transfer a Secondary transfer separation motor
separating drive unit
H
1-a I
J
5) Disengage the pawls (K), and remove the coupling (M) and
spring (N) from the secondary transfer separation motor (L).
K K
N
B
A
1-a L
b. Secondary tansfer separation drive sensor

2) Remove the screws (C), and remove the paper guide (D).
Unit Parts
1 Secondary transfer b Secondary transfer separation drive
separating drive unit sensor
D
C
C
3) Remove the screws (E), and remove the pressure plate (F)
and springs (G).
1-b
G G
E
B
E
E
E
A

2) Remove the screws (C), and remove the paper guide (D). E. Others
Parts Page
a Transfer belt separation BK detection M -16
D b Sensor inside the PTC unit M-17
C
a
C
3) Remove the screws (E), and remove the pressure plate (F) b
and springs (G).
G G (1) Transfer belt separation BK detection
Parts
a Transfer belt separation BK detection
F
E a
E
E
4) Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screw (I). Disenage

the pawl (J), and remove the cover (K).
H I 1) Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the "A. Primary

transfer unit".)
2) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUT-
J FIT")
H
K
B
5) Disconnect the connector (L), and remove the secondary sep-

aration drive sensor (M).
A
B
A
1-b M

4) Disconnect the connectors (C). (2) Sensor inside PTC unit
Parts
b Sensor inside PTC unit
C b
5) Disconnect the connector (D). Remove the screw (E), and dis-
engage the pawls (F), and remove the electrode holder (G). 1) Remove the paper dust removal cleaner and the PS unit.
(Refer to the "[G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION".)
2) Remove the charge unit. (Refer to the "[J] PHOTOCON-
DUCTER SECTION".)
F G 3) Remove the developement unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L]
DEVELOPING UNIT".)
4) Remove the OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer to the "[J] PHOTO-
E CONDUCTER SECTION".)
5) Disengage the pawls (A), and remove the sensor inside PTC
unit (B), and disconnect the connector (C).
D
F
6) Remove the transfer belt separation BK detection (H).

b B
C
H a
A
* When installing, be careful to the sensor tilting to the front

side.

4. Maintenance
Remark/Refer to
Monochrome the Parts Guide.
When 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
supply, Block/Item No.
No. Part name calling K K K K K K K K K K
Mechanical (Only the
parts replacement parts
are described.)
1 Primary transfer belt Mechanical (P/G No. : [38]-12)
2 Primary transfer roller parts (P/G No. : [38]-31)
(P/G No. : [40]-35)
3 Transfer sub blade (P/G No. : [39]-19)
(P/G No. : [39]-34)
4 Transfer cleaning blade (P/G No. : [39]-19)
5 Belt drive gear (P/G No. : [38]-9)
6 Primary transfer drive roller { { { { { { { { { {
7 Primary ransfer follower roller { { { { { { { { { {
8 Tension roller { { { { { { { { { {
9 Cleaning brush { { { { { { { { { { {
10 Y auxiliary roller { { { { { { { { { {
11 Resist backup roller { { { { { { { { { {
12 Secondary transfer belt (P/G No. : [43]-37)
13 Secondary transfer roller (P/G No. : [43]-15)
14 Secondary belt drive roller { { { { { { { { { {
15 Secondary belt tension roller { { { { { { { { { {
16 Secondary belt follower roller { { { { { { { { { {
17 Secondary drive idle gear (P/G No. : [43]-30)
18 PTC cleaner (P/G No. : [41]-29)
19 PTC cleaner B (P/G No. : [41]-30)
20 Charger wire (P/G No. : [41]-5)
21 Transfer idle roller { { { { { { { { { {
22 Cleaner seal
22
4
3
9
22 1
15
14 17
10 21 18
20
8 9 12
7 13
19
21
16
2
2
2 11
6
2

[N]
PCSS
PCS_K
REG_F
REG_R
PCS_CL/
Signal
MX-7000N
REG_F
Name
Registration sensor PWB F

Registration sensor PWB R
Process control sensor PWB
Process control shutter solenoid

PCS_CL/PCS_K
REG_R
Detects the toner patch density
Detects the shift of registration image

PCSS
PCU PWB
R SM2P P B40B-PNDZS-1
PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION
1 24V3 1 15 24V3 15 30 24V3 30 10 24V3 10 35 24V3

2 /PCSS 2 14 /PCSS 14 28 /PCSS 28 8 /PCSS 8 36 /PCSS
PHR-4
REG_R_LED# 1 13 REG_R_LED# 13 26 REG_R_LED# 26 6 REG_R_LED# 6 32 REG_R_LED#
Function/Operation
REG_R 2 12 REG_R 12 24 REG_R 24 4 REG_R 4 31 REG_R
PHR-5
MX-7000N PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR SECTION N 1

PCS_LED# 1 9 PCS_LED# 9 18 PCS_LED# 18 17 PCS_LED# 17 27 PCS_LED#
PCS_CL 2 8 PCS_CL 8 16 PCS_CL 16 15 PCS_CL 15 26 PCS_CL
PCS_K 3 7 PCS_K 7 14 PCS_K 14 13 PCS_K 13 25 PCS_K
Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and the registration sensor.
PHR-4
REG_F_LED# 1 4 REG_F_LED# 4 8 REG_F_LED# 8 7 REG_F_LED# 7 22 REG_F_LED#
REG_F 2 3 REG_F 3 6 REG_F 6 5 REG_F 5 21 REG_F
5GTXKEG/CPWCNSENSOR SECTION

R SM18P P P DF1B-32P S P DF1B-18DE S CN8
A. Process control sensor control A. Process control registration sensor unit
The shutter is provided on the monochrome (PCS_K) and color
Mainte
(PCS_CL) process control sensor. When the shutter is opened (the Unit Parts Page
nance
image density is corrected), the toner patch formed on the transfer
1 Process a Process control sensor { N- 3
belt is scanned by the process control sensor and the information is
control PWB
passed to the PCU. registration b Registration PWB F {
When the shutter is closed, the gray resin section on the back of sensor unit c Registration PWB R {
the shutter is scanned to perform calibration of the sensor itself. d Process control shutter N- 3
The shutter operation is controlled by the process control shutter solenoid
solenoid (PCSS).
B. Registration sensor control

The registration sensor is attached to the F side (REG_F) and the 1-d
R side (REG_R). When the shutter is opened, the registration
image formed on the transfer belt is scanned by the sensor and the
information is passed to the PCU.
1
1-c
1-a
1-b
(1) Process control registration sensor unit
Unit
1 Process control registration sensor unit

OPING SECTION".)
3) Remove the charge unit (BK) and OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer
to the "[J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION".)
4) Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the [M] TRANS-
FER SECTION.)
5) Remove the paper exit tray. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL
OUTFIT".)

6) Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the screw (B), and b. Process control shutter solenoid
remove the process control registration sensor unit (C).
Unit Parts
1 Process control d Process control shutter solenoid
registration sensor
unit
1-d
1 C
a. Process control sensor PWB, Registration sensor PWB F,

Registration sensor PWB R
Mainte 2) Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L] DEVEL-
Unit Parts
nance OPING SECTION".)
1 Process control a Process control sensor PWB { 3) Remove the charge unit (BK) and OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer
registration sensor b Registration sensor PWB F { to the "[J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION".)
unit c Registration sensor PWB R {
4) Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the [M] TRANS-
FER SECTION.)
OUTFIT".)
6) Remove the process control registration sensor unit. (Refer to
the "(1) Process control registration sensor unit".)
7) Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the screw (B), and
remove the process control shutter solenoid (C) so that it lift up
from the connector side.
1-c * When installing, hook cut-out portion (D) of the shutter move
plate to the process control shutter solenoid.
1-a
1-b A
1) Remove the process control registration sensor unit. (Refer to

the "(1) Process control registration sensor unit)");
2) Push up the shutters (A), and clean the process control sensor
PWB (B), the registration sensor PWB F (C), and the registra- C 1-d
tion sensor PWB R (D) .
D
B
A
D
B 1-b
C
1-a
1-c

4. Maintenance
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
replacement
parts
parts are
described.)
1 Sensors Mechanical { { { { { { { { { {
parts

CN1
1 N-HL_UM 1 1 N-HL_UM HL PWB
5 N-HL_US CN4
2 L-HL_U 2 3 N-HL_LM INT24V1 1
[O]
B3P5-VH D-GND 2
CN2 HLout_UM 3
2 L-HL_U HLout_US 4
3 N-HL_US 3 1 N-HL_EX HLout_LM 5
S02B-VT HLout_EX 6
MX-7000N
4 L-HL_LM 4 L-HL_LM /HLPR 7

5 N-HL_LM 5 FPS-250 B07B-PASK
6 N-HL_EX 6
R SM-2pin_N P P DF1B-20P S CN8
1 WEBM_a 1 17 WEBM_a 17 10 WEBM_a DRIVER
2 WEBM_b 2 18 WEBM_b 18 12 WEBM_b
B12B-PNDZS-1 PWB
PHNR-5-H +BU05P-TR-P-H CN12 CN10
5 WEB_END 1 B-8 WEB_END B-2 9 WEB_END 9 9 WEB_END /HLPR 13
4 D-GND 2 B-7 D-GND B-3 7 D-GND 7 7 D-GND HLout_EX 11
3 WEB_INL 3 B-6 WEB_INL B-4 11 WEB_INL 11 11 WEB_INL HLout_LM 9
HLout_US 7
19 TH2_AD2 19 13 TH2_AD2 HLout_UM 5
PHNR-3-H +BU03P-TR-P-H 20 TH2_AD1 20 15 TH2_AD1 D-GND 3
3 TH1_AD2 1 B-3 TH1_AD2 B-7 2 TH1_AD2 2 2 TH1_AD2 INT24V1 1
2 TH1_AD1 2 B-2 TH1_AD1 B-8 4 TH1_AD1 4 4 TH1_AD1 B40B-PNDZS-1
1 D-GND 3 B-1 D-GND B-9 6 D-GND 6 6 D-GND
2 TH_US 1 A-8 TH_US A-3 10 TH_US 10 10 TH_US
1 D-GND 2 A-7 D-GND A-4
TH_EX2
FUSING SECTION
2 3 A-2 TH_EX2 A-9 16 TH_EX2 16 16 TH_EX2

2 TH_LM 1 2 TH_LM 4 A-6 TH_LM A-5 12 TH_LM 12 12 TH_LM
1 D-GND 2 1 D-GND 5 A-5 D-GND A-6
A-10 TH_UM A-1 8 TH_UM 8 8 TH_UM
A-9 D-GND A-2
D-GND 1 B-9 D-GND B-1 1 FUFM_F
POD1 2 B-5 POD1 B-5 3 FUFM_F_LD
5VNPD 3 B-4 5VNPD B-6 5 P-GND
GP1A71L3 PHR-3 B16B-PNDZS-1
6
8
7
5
4
3
2
1
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DF11-8DP-SP1
WEBM
CN13
HL_US
13 POD1 13 36 POD1
15 5VNPD 15 38 5VNPD
TH_EX2
HL_EX
10 POFM_CNT2
B40B-PNDZS-1
HL_UM
TS_EX
WEB_INL
TS_US
WEB_END
PCU PWB
HL_LM
TH_EX1
3
6
4
TS_EX
MX-7000N FUSING SECTION O 1

5
TS_UM
7
TH_LM
TH_UM
4
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
3
FEXM
4
1
P DF1B-32P R P DF1B-32P R P DF1B-32P R
1 FUFM_F 1 1 FUFM_F 1 7 FUFM_F 7
TS_LM
2 /POFM_CNT2 2 2 /POFM_CNT2 2 9 FUFM_F_LD 9
3 P-GND 3 3 P-GND 3 11 P-GND 11
4 FUFM_F_LD 4 4 FUFM_F_LD 4
TH_US
FCFM
13 /POFM_CNT2 13
POD1
2
P SM-6pin_N R P DF18-32P S CN14
1 FEXM_/B 1 15 FEXM_/B 15 13 FEXM_/B
3 FEXM_B 3 19 FEXM_B 19 15 FEXM_B
2 FEXM_/A 2 17 FEXM_/A 17 17 FEXM_/A
4 FEXM_A 4 21 FEXM_A 21 19 FEXM_A
5 INT24V2 5 23 INT24V2 23 3 INT24V2
6 N,C 6
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
P-GND 2 5 P-GND
FUM /FUM_CK 4 7 /FUM_CK
/FUM_D 5 9 /FUM_D
FUM_LD 6 11 FUM_LD
N.C 3 B30B-PNDZS-1
N.C 7
B7B-PH-K-S
FCFM Fusing cooling fan Cools the fusing unit
FEXM External variable motor Separates the external heat roller of the fusing unit
FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing unit
HL_EX Heater lamp external Heats the external heat roller
HL_LM Lower heater lamp Heats the lower heat roller
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main Heats the upper heat roller
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub Heats the upper heat roller
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects the paper from the fusing unit
TH_EX1 External thermistor main Controls surface temperature of the external heat roller
TH_EX2 External thermistor sub Controls surface temperature of the external heat roller
TH_LM Lower thermistor Controls surface temperature of the lower heat roller
TH_UM Upper thermistor main Controls surface temperature of the upper heat roller
TH_US Upper thermistor sub Controls surface temperature of the upper heat roller
TS_EX External thermostat Prevents the external heat roller overheating
TS_LM Lower thermostat Prevents the lower heat roller overheating
TS_UM Upper thermostat main Prevents the upper heat roller overheating
TS_US Upper thermostat sub Prevents the upper heat roller overheating
WEB_END Web end sensor Detects end of the web
WEB_INL Web installation detection Detects installation of the web unit
WEBM Fusing web cleaning motor Drives the fusing web cleaning paper

1 Upper heat roller Heat and presses toner on paper to fuse it on paper
2 Lower heat roller Heat and presses toner on paper to fuse it on paper
3 Upper separation pawl Mechanically separates the paper which was not separated naturally from the upper heat roller.
4 Lower separation pawl Mechanically separates the paper which was not separated naturally from the lower heat roller.
5 External heat roller Supports temperature control of the upper heat roller.
6 Web unit Clean the upper heat roller
7 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper from the upper/lower heat rollers to the paper exit roller 1
A. Fusing unit drive
To drive the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the
drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the upper heat
roller gear.
The drive motor (stepping motor) is driven according to the control
signal sent from the PCU.
PCU FUM
B. Heater lamp drive

The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the ther-
mistor is sent to the PCU. When the temperature is lower than the
specified level, the heater lamp lighting signal is sent from the PCU
to the heater lamp drive circuit in the sub power PWB.
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and
heating the heat roller. The heater lamp is provided in the upper and lower heat rollers and
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller, the external heat roller. It heats paper up and down.
the thermostat is provided for safety. This is because necessary to heat from left/right/above/below for
When the thermostat is opened, power supply (AC line) to the fusing four layers of toner on paper.
heater lamp is cut off. The upper and lower heat rollers are of silicon rubber.
C. Fusing operation This is because of the following reasons:
Color toner of YMCK on paper is heated and pressed by the heat 1) To provide a greater nip quantity and a higher heating capacity
rollers to be fused on paper. for paper.
At that time, color toner of YMCK is mixed to reproduce nearly 2) The soft, flexible rollers press multi-layer toner without defor-
actual colors of document images. mation to fuse on paper.
3) An even pressure is applied to an uneven surface of multilayer
toner.
The external heat roller roller has the following functions.
1) Helps fusing and keeps the fusing temperature under special
conditions.

D. Fusing temperature control
The temperature sensors are provided at the center and the edges
of the upper heat roller, at the center of the lower heat roller, and at
the center and the edges of the external heat roller.
The heat roller temperature is detected by the temperature sensors
to control the heater lamp so that the temperature is maintained at
1-o
the specified level. 1-n
The fusing temperature is switched according to the paper type 1-E
1-c 1-m
selected.
1-B
* For the fusing temperature set value, refer to SIM43-1 in [7] SIM- 1-G 1-E
ULATIONS. 1-d
1-n 1-y
1-z
Unit Page
1-F
A Fusing unit O- 3
B Others O -20
A. Fusing unit 1-i

1-F
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
Page 1-m
1 Fusing unit a External thermostat main O- 4 1-y 1-j 1 1-u
1-o 1-D
b External thermostat sub
c External thermistor main O- 5
1-D 1-q
d External thermistor sub
e Upper thermostat main O- 6
f Upper thermostat sub
1-r
g Upper thermistor sub O- 7
h Upper thermistor main O- 8
i Lower thermostat O- 8
j Lower thermistor
k Fusing rear detection O- 9 1-v
l Heater lamp external O -10 1-C
m External heat SP
n Slider ring 1-g
o External heat bearing 1-C
p External heat collar 1-w
q External heat belt 1-v 1-k
1-C
r External heat roller
s Heater lamp upper sub O -12
t Heater lamp upper main 1-a
u Fusing gear
v Upper roller bearing
1-b 1-p
1-l
w Upper heat roller
x Lower heater lamp O -14 1-p
y Lower roller bearing
z Lower heat roller
1-x
A Discharge brush O -16
B Transport roller 9 (Drive) { O -16
C Upper separation pawl O -17
D Upper separation pawl SP
E Lower separation pawl O -18 1-s 1-A
F Lower separation pawl SP 1-t 1-h
G Web unit O -19
1-f 1-e

(1) Fusing unit 3) Hold the part of green felts (E), and remove the fusing unit (F).
Unit
1 Fusing unit
F 1
1
E E
* CAUTION. HOT
When removing the fusing unit, because the fusing unit is high
temperature, remove after it cools enough.
* When working, open the right door unit enough.
a. External thermostat main, External thermostat sub
Unit Parts
1 Fusing unit a External thermostat main
b External thermostat sub
B
1-a
A
1-b
2) Remove the screws (C), and pull out the fusing unit (D).
1) Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "(1) Fusing unit".)
C C

2) Remove the screws (A). Rotate the fusing web unit (B), and b. External thermistor main, External thermistor sub
remove it.
Mainte
* When installing, engage the fusing web unit (B) to the pawls Unit Parts
nance
(C) of the upper cover.
1 Fusing unit c External thermistor main
* When installing, be careful to prevent bending the elec- d External thermistor sub
trodes (D), and check that the electrodes are contacted.
A
1-c
1-d
B
A
B
2) Remove the screws (A). Rotate the fusing web unit (B), and
remove it.
* When installing, engage the fusing web unit (B) to the pawls
C * When installing, be careful to prevent bending the elec-
3) Remove the screws (E), and remove the upper cover (F).
F B
A
E
E
D
E
4) Disconnect the connectors (H) by releasing each locks (G). B

Remove the screws (I), and remove the external thermostat
main (J), the external thermostat sub (K), and the washers (L).
1-b K
1-a C
J
F
H
I E
G L
L G E
E

4) Remove the screw (G), and remove the clamp (H). Disconnect 2) Remove the screws (A). Rotate the fusing web unit (B), and
the connector (I). Remove the screws (J), and remove the remove it.
mounting plates (K). Remove the screws (L), and remove the * When installing, engage the fusing web unit (B) to the pawl
external thermistor main (M) and the external thermistor sub (C) of the upper cover.
(N).
* When installing, be careful to prevent bending the elec-
L
L A
N
M 1-c 1-d B
J A
K D
I
H G
C
c. Upper thermostat main, Upper thermostat sub
Unit Parts
1 Fusing unit e Upper thermostat main
f Upper thermostat sub
F
E
E
E
1-f 1-e

4) Disconnect the connectors (H) by releasing each locks (G). 2) Remove the screws (A). Rotate the fusing web unit (B), and
Remove the screws (I) and the washers (J), and remove the remove it.
thermostat main (K) and the thermostat sub (L). Remove the * When installing, engage the fusing web unit (B) to the pawl
washers (M). (C) of the upper cover.
K 1-e A
1-f
L B
A
J I
D C
G J G D
A M D A
H B
H B
B
M
d. upper thermistor sub
Unit Parts
Mainte C
nance
1 Fusing unit g Upper thermistor sub
F
E
E
1-g E
4) Disconnect the connector (G). Remove the screw (H), and
remove the upper thermistor sub (I).
H 1-g

e. Upper thermistor main 4) Disconnect the connector (G). Remove the screw (H), and
remove the upper thermistor main (I).
Unit Parts
1 Fusing unit h Upper thermistor main
G
1-h I
1-h
f. Lower thermostat, Lower thermistor
1) Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "(1) Fusing unit".) Mainte
Unit Parts
2) Remove the screws (A). Rotate the fusing web unit (B), and nance
remove it. 1 Fusing unit i Lower thermostat
* When installing, engage the fusing web unit (B) to the pawl j Lower thermistor
B
A
1-i
1-j
D
2) Remove the screw (A), and remove the cover (B). Disconnect
B the connector (C). Remove the screws (D), and remove the
cover R (E).
C
A
C
3) Remove the screws (E), and remove the upper cover (F). E
B
F
E D
D
E
E

3) Remove the screws (F), and remove the cover F (G). g. Fusing rear detection
Unit Parts
1 Fusing unit k Fusing rear detection
1-k
F
F
4) Remove the screws (H), and remove the lower cover (I).
H 1) Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "(1) Fusing unit".)

2) Remove the screw (A), and remove the cover (B). Disconnect
I the connector (C). Remove the screws (D), and remove the
cover R (E).
H
C
A
H E
5) Disconnect the connectors (K) by releasing each locks (J). B

Remove the screws (L) and the washers (M), and remove the
lower thermostat (N). Disconnect the connector (O), and
remove the screw (P), and remove the fusing lower thermistor
(Q).
D
P D
O 3) Disconnect the connector (F), and remove the fusing rear
detection (G).
1-i Q * When installing, apply thread locking material.
N 1-j
1-k G
F
M L
J M J
K

h. Heater lamp external, External heat SP, Slider ring, External 3) Remove the screws (C), and remove the upper cover (D).
heat bearing, External heat collar, External heat belt,
External heat roller
Mainte
Unit Parts D
nance
1 Fusing unit l Heater lamp external
m External heat SP
C
n Slider ring
o External heat bearing
p External heat collar
q External heat belt
r External heat roller C
C
1-q 1-n 4) Remove the screw (E), and remove the cover (F). Disconnect
the connector (G). Remove the screws (H), and remove the
1-m cover R (I).
1-r
1-n
G
E
1-o
I
1-m 1-p
1-l 1-p F
1-o

2) Remove the screws (A). Rotate the fusing web unit (B), and H
remove it.
* When installing, engage the fusing web unit (B) to the pawl
(C) of the upper cover. H
trodes (D), and check that the electrodes are contacted. 5) Remove the screws (J), and remove the cover F (K).
A
K
B
A
J
J
B

6) Remove the screws (L), and remove the clamps (M). Discon- 9) Remove the external heat springs (Z). Remove the E-rings (a),
nect the connectors (N) with release each locks (O). and remove the slider rings (b), the lever F (c), and the lever R
* When installing, be careful to the wiring. (d).
Remove the slider rings (e) from the lever F (c) and lever R (d).
L L 1-m
Z
M M c
d
O O 1-n 1-n
b b
a a
N d c
L M
7) Remove the screws (P) and the lamp holders (Q). Remove the
heater lamps external (R).
* When installing the heater lamp external (R), voltage nota-
tion side (S) is the rear side. e 1-n 1-n e
10) Remove the screws (f), and remove the external heat roller
Q P
unit (g). Remove the external heat bearings (h).
P Q
f
S 1-l
R
1-o h
S h 1-o
1-l R f
g
8) Remove the screw (T) and the clamp (U), and disconnect the
connectors (V). Remove the screws (W), and remove the 11) Remove the external heat collars (i), and the external heat belt
external heat roller unit (X) from the shaft (Y). (j) from the external heat rollers (k).
i 1-p
W
V
1-r k
X j 1-q
1-p i k 1-r
V
U T
Y

i. Heater lamp upper sub, Heater lamp upper main, Fusing 3) Remove the screw (A), and remove the cover (B). Disconnect
gear, Upper roller bearing , Upper heat roller the connector (C). Remove the screws (D), and remove the
cover R (E).
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Fusing unit s Heater lamp upper sub
t Heater lamp upper main
C
u Fusing gear A
v Upper roller bearing
w Upper heat roller
E
B
1-v 1-u
D
1-v 4) Remove the screws (F), and remove the cover F (G).
1-s
1-t 1-w

G
2) Raise upwards the pressure release levers (A), release the
pressure.
F
5) Remove the screws (H), and remove the clamps (I). Discon-
nect the connectors (J). Remove the screws (K), and remove
the lamp holders (L).
A A
L L
I I H
H
K K
H
J
J

6) Remove the heater lamp upper sub (M) and the heater lamp 9) Remove the screws (W), and open the fusing upper unit (X).
upper main (N).
* When installing the heater lamp upper sub (M) and heater
lamp upper main (N), the red harnesses (O) is the rear side.
W
O
X
O
1-s M
1-t N
10) Remove the upper heat roller unit (Y).
7) Remove the screws (P). Rotate the fusing web unit (Q), and * Don't touch the heat roller surface.
remove it.
* When installing, engage the fusing web unit (Q) to the pawls
(R) of the upper cover.
trodes (S), and check that the electrodes are contacted.
Y
P
Q
P
11) Remove the roller stoppers (Z), and remove the fusing gear (a)
Q and the fusing gear F (b). Remove the roller stoppers (c), and
remove the upper roller bearings (d) from the upper heat roller
(e).
1-u
R a
c
8) Disconnect the connector (T). Remove the screws (U), and

remove the paper guide (V).
Z
e 1-w
d 1-v
1-v
T d
V b
Z
U
U

j. Lower heater lamp, Lower roller bearing, Lower heat roller 4) Remove the screws (G), and remove the cover F (H).
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Fusing unit x Lower heater lamp
y Lower roller bearing H
z Lower heat roller
1-y
G
5) Remove the screws (I), and remove the lower cover (J).
1-y
1-x
1-z I
J
2) Raise upwards the pressure release levers (A), release the I
pressure.
I
6) Disconnect the connectors (K). Remove the screws (L), and
remove the lamp holders (M).
A A
M M
3) Remove the screw (B), and remove the cover (C). Disconnect
the connector (D). Remove the screws (E), and remove the
cover R (F).
L
L
D
B
7) Remove the lower heater lamp (N).
* Install so that the red harness (O) is in the rear side.
C
1-x N
O
E

8) Remove the screws (P). Rotate the fusing web unit (Q), and 10) Open the paper guide (W). Remove the springs (X).
remove it.
* When installing, engage the fusing web unit (Q) to the pawls
(R) of the upper cover.
trodes (S), and check that the electrode is contacted.
X
Q
P
11) Remove the screws (Y), and open the fusing lower unit (Z).
S
Y
9) Disconnect the connector (T). Remove the screws (U), and Y

remove the paper guide (V). Z
12) Remove the lower heat roller unit (a).
* Don't touch the heat roller surface.
T V
a
U
U
13) Remove the roller stoppers (b), and remove the lower roller
bearings (c). Remove the roller stoppers (d) from lower heat
roller (e).
1-y c b
1-z e
d
1-y
c
b

k. Discharge brush 4) Remove the screws (H), and remove the lower cover (I).
Mainte H
Unit Parts
nance
1 Fusing unit A Dischrge brush
I
H
5) Remove the screws (J), and remove the paper guide (K).
J
1-A
J
2) Remove the screw (A), and remove the cover (B). Disconnect K
the connector (C). Remove the screws (D), and remove the
cover R (E).
C
A
6) Check the discharge brush (L).
* When replacing is required, attach it based on reference line
as bend part end of the frame.
E
B Reference
line
1-A
20mm 0.5mm
D L
3) Remove the screws (F), and remove the cover F (G).
G l. Transport roller 9 (Drive)
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
F 1 Fusing unit B Transport roller 9 (Drive) {
1- B

2) Remove the screw (A), and remove the cover (B). Disconnect 6) Remove the screw (O), and remove the earth plate (P).
the connector (C). Remove the screws (D), and remove the Remove the E-ring (Q), and remove the bearing (R). Remove
cover R (E). the transport roller 9 (Drive) (S).
C 1-B S
A
B P
O
D R
Q
D m. Upper separation pawl, Upper separation pawl SP
3) Remove the screws (F), and remove the cover F (G). Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Fusing unit C Upper separation pawl
D Upper separation pawl SP
G
1-D
F
4) Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screw (I), and
remove the sensor unit (J). 1-C
1) Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "(1) FUSING UNIT".)

J remove it.
H (C) of the upper cover.
* When installing, be careful to prevent bending the electrode
(D), and check that the electrode is contacted.
A
I
B
A
5) Remove the E-ring (K). Lift the actuator (L), and remove the
gear (M) and the bearing (N).
L
D
N M
B
K

3) Remove the screws (E), and remove the separation pawl hold- 3) Remove the screws (F), and remove the cover F (G).
ers (F). Disengage the upper separation pawls (G), and
remove the upper separation pawl SPs (H).
G
F
F
F
E E E
H 1-D H 1-D
F
4) Remove the screws (H), and remove the lower cover (I).
H
1-C G
I
n. Lower separation pawl, Lower separation pawl SP
H
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Fusing unit E Lower separation pawl
F Lower separation pawl SP
1-F 5) Open the paper guide (J). Remove the springs (K).
1-E
1) Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "(1) FUSING UNIT".)

2) Remove the screw (A), and remove the cover (B). Disconnect J
the connector (C). Remove the screws (D), and remove the
cover R (E).
6) Remove the screw (L), and remove the mounting plate (M).
Remove the paper guide (N).
C
A
D
N
L
D M

7) Remove the lower separation pawl units (O). Disengage the 3) Remove the screw (E), and remove the bearing (F).
lower separation pawl SPs (Q) from the lower separation
pawls (P).
E
F
1-E P
Q
O 4) Remove the wind-up side (G) of web unit. Remove the collar
1-F (H).
o. Web unit
G
Mainte
Unit Parts
nance
1 Fusing unit G Web unit
1-G H
5) Remove the springs (I) and the bearings (J). Remove the roller
(K).

remove it.
(C) of the upper cover. I J
* When installing, be careful to prevent bending the electrode
(D), and check that the electrode is contacted. J I
6) Pull out the shafts (L) from rear side.

B
A * When installing, be careful to the installing direction of the
shafts. First of all, insert the side where the tip of the shaft
each is steps.
B
L
L
C

7) Remove the web unit (M). Remove the collar (N) and the break (1) Fusing cooling fan
rubber (O).
* When installing the collar (N) and the break rubber (O), pre- Parts
vent damage of the web unit (M), install to other side of red a Fusing cooling fan
line (P).
P N a
O
1-G M

FIT".)
* When installing, hang the web unit to the shafts (Q) and the
roller (R), and arrange as shown below.
R B
Q
A
A
B
B. Others
A
Parts Page
a Fusing cooling fan O -20
b Fusing motor O -21
c External variable motor O -21
d Fusing web cleaning motor O -22 3) Remove the snap bands (C). Remove the harness (E) from the
e Fusing air outlet fan O -23 wire saddles (D).
e
a
b
C
c D
d D C

4) Disconnect the connectors (F). Remove the screws (G), and 2) Remove the screws (A), and open the control box (B).
remove the fusing cooling fan unit (H).
H
B
F G
A
B
F
G
F
F A
5) Remove the screws (I), and remove the fusing cooling fan (J).
remove the fusing motor (E).
b E
I
J a
C D
D
D
(2) Fusing motor
(3) External variable motor
Parts
b Fusing motor
Parts
c External variable motor
b
c

FIT".) 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUT-
FIT".)
2) Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "A. FUSING UNIT".)
3) Remove the fusing cooling fan. (Refer to the "(1) Fusing cool-
ing fan".)

4) Remove the screws (A), and remove the drive unit (B). 3) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the harness (C)
from the clamps (B).
B
C B
A
A
A
remove the external variable motor unit (E). 4) Remove the screws (D), and remove the fusing web cleaning
motor unit (E).
E E
D
6) Remove the screws (F). Slide the gear part (G), and remove 5) Remove the E-ring (F), and remove the gear (G). Remove the
the external variable motor (H). screws (H), and remove the fusing web cleaning motor (I).
F H
F d I
G H
F
H c
(4) Fusing web cleaning motor
Parts
d Fusing web cleaning motor
1) Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "A. FUSING UNIT".)

2) Remove the front cabinet upper. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL
OUTFIT".)

(5) Fusing air outlet fan
Parts
e Fusing air outlet fan
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUT-

FIT.)
2) Remove the paper exit filter. (Refer to the [S] FAN, FILTER
SECTION.)
remove the blanket (C).
C
C
A
4) Remove the screws (D), and remove the fusing air outlet fan
(E).
* When installing, label side (F) of the fusing air outlet fan is
the blanket side, and according to the projection (G), install
it.
e E
D
F G

4. Maintenance
300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
Remark/Refer to
Monochrome K K K K K K K K K K
When the Parts Guide.
supply,
No. Part name calling Block/Item No.
Mechanical 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000
(Only the replacement
parts K K K K K K K K K K
parts are described.)
1 Lower heat roller Mechanical (P/G No. Lower heat

parts : [54]-15) roller unit
2 Lower roller bearing (300K) (P/G No. (without the
: [54]-14) heater lamp)
3 Upper separation pawl (P/G No.: [51]-28)
4 Lower separation pawl (P/G No.: [54]-3)
5 Separation pawl SP (P/G No.: [54]-2)
6 Upper thermistor sub (P/G No.: [53]-18)
7 External thermistor main (P/G No.: [52]-10)
8 External thermistor sub (P/G No.: [52]-10)
9 Lower thermistor (P/G No.: [54]-37)
10 Slider ring (P/G No. External
: [52]-30) heat unit
11 External heat roller (P/G No. (without the
12 External heat belt (P/G No.
: [52]-23)
13 External heat bearing (P/G No.
: [52]-15)
14 External heat collar (P/G No.
: [52]-17)
15 External heat SP (P/G No.
: [52]-22)
16 Gears etc. Apply to specified
positions
17 Paper guides etc. { { { { { { { { { { {
19 Discharge brush
20 Web unit Mechanical (P/G No.: [51]-13)
21 Upper heat roller parts (P/G No. Upper heat
(200K) : [53[-37) roller unit
22 Fusing gear (P/G No. (without the
23 Upper heat roller bearing (P/G No.
: [53]-36)

10
18 4
7
4 15
8 13
14 16
10 14 16 16 16
2
1
5
15 17
13 5
14 9 5
2
12
5
11 22
23
3
6 17
20
19
3
21
17
23 3

[P] PAPER EXIT SECTION
SOCKET1 SOCKET1
P-GND 1 1 P-GND
HTMY_1 2 2 HTMY_1
HTMY_2 3 3 HTMY_2
PHTMK_1 4 4 PHTMK_1
PHTMK_2 5 5 PHTMK_2
WEB_M1 6 6 WEB_M1
WEB_M2 7 7 WEB_M2
5VN 8 8 5VN
P-GND 9 9 P-GND
N,C 10 10 N,C
D-GND 11 11 D-GND
ADMH_A 12 12 ADMH_A
ADML_A 15 15 ADML_A
LCCM_A 18 18 LCCM_A
5VN 21 21 5VN
DMK_EN 24 24 DMK_EN
DMM_EN 25 25 DMM_EN
POM_A 27 27 POM_A
CN1 POM_/A 28 28 POM_/A
PO_TMP 3 /POM_CNT 29 29 /POM_CNT
D-GND 4 D-GND 30 30 D-GND
P-GND 31 31 P-GND
PO_TMP S4B-PH-K-S
HTMM_1 32 32 HTMM_1
POFM_U HTMM_2
HTMC_1
33
34
33
34
HTMM_2
HTMC_1
HTMC_2 35 35 HTMC_2
POM HTMK_1
HTMK_2
36
37
36
37
HTMK_1
HTMK_2
5VN 38 38 5VN
TFD P-GND
N,C
39
40
39
40
P-GND
N,C
D-GND 41 41 D-GND
ADMH_B 42 42 ADMH_B
ADML_B 45 45 ADML_B
POD2 ADML_/B 46 46 ADML_/B
POFM_F PSFM_CNT
PSFM_EN
47
48
47
48
PSFM_CNT
PSFM_EN
LCCM_B 49 49 LCCM_B
5VN 51 51 5VN
1 DMK_CLK
/DMK_CNT
52
53
52
53
DMK_CLK
/DMK_CNT
DMC_EN 54 54 DMC_EN
DMY_EN 55 55 DMY_EN
BTM_EN 57 57 BTM_EN
POM_B 58 58 POM_B
POM_/B 59 59 POM_/B
D-GND 60 60 D-GND
PCU PWB DRIVER

P DF1B-18p S CN15
LG248NL1
D-GND
2-179228-3
3
18
4
PO_TMP
D-GND
18
4
18
10
PO_TMP
D-GND
PWB
POD2 2 2 POD2 2 8 POD2
LG248NL1 179228-3
D-GND 3
TFD 2 15 TFD 15 4 TFD
P SM-4p R
4 POFM_U_LD 4
3 P-GND 3
1 POFM 1 11 POFM_LD3
P SM-4p R 9 POFM_LD2 9 9 POFM_LD2
4 POFM_F_LD 4 7 POFM_LD1 7 7 POFM_LD1
1 POFM 1 1 POFM 1 1 POFM
P SM-4p R B40B-PNDZS-1
CN4
POM_A 1 6 POM_A 6 1 POM_A
POM_/A 4 8 POM_/A 8 2 POM_/A
POM_/B 6 10 POM_/B 10 3 POM_/B
POM_B 3 12 POM_B 12 4 POM_B
INT24V1 2 14 INT24V1 14 5 INT24V1
INT24V1 5 16 INT24V1 16 6 INT24V1
S6B-PH-SM3 B12B-PASK-1

PO_TMP Paper exit temperature detection Detects the temperature
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the exit paper
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) Cools the fusing unit
POFM_U Paper exit cooling fan motor (Center) Cools the fusing unit
POM Paper exit motor Drives the paper exit roller
TFD Paper exit full detection (Main unit) Detects face-down paper exit tray full

1 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Paper is discharged. / Paper is transported to the right paper exit tray.
/ Paper is transported to the duplex (ADU) section.
MX-7000N PAPER EXIT SECTION P 1

2. Operational descriptions 2) Remove the paper holding arm (A), and remove the paper exit
full detection actuator (B).
Paper transported from the fusing section is passed to the trans-
port roller 9 which is driven by the fusing motor and to the paper
exit roller 1, then discharged to the inner tray.
When paper is discharged to the right tray, it is passed to the
paper exit roller 1 and the paper exit motor is reversely rotated,
and paper is passed over the ADU reverse gate and the right
paper exit gate, and discharged to the right tray. A

A. Paper exit unit
Mainte Page
Unit Parts
nance
1 Paper exit a Paper exit motor P- 3 B
unit b Paper exit cooling fan motor P- 3
(F side)
c Paper exit cooling fan motor
(Center)
d Paper exit full detection P- 4
3) Remove the screws (C). Disengage the pawl (D), and remove
(Main unit)
the cover (E).
e Paper exit detection
f Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) { P- 4
g Paper exit temperature P- 5
detection PWB D
h Discharge brush P- 5
1-d 1-e
1-h C
1-g
1-h
1-f
remove the paper exit unit (H).
1-a
1
1 H
1-c
1-b
(1) Paper exit unit
Unit G F
1 Paper exit unit G
1) Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "[O] FUSING SEC-

TION".)

a. Paper exit drive motor 1) Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "[O] FUSING SEC-
TION".)
Unit Parts
2) Remove the paper exit unit. (Refer to the "(1) Paper exit unit".)
1 Paper exit unit a Paper exit motor
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the fan cover (B).
1-a
A
A
B
TION".)
3) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screws (B) and 4) Disconnect the connectors (C), and remove the paper exit
the paper exit motor (C). cooling fan motor (F side) (D) and the paper exit cooling fan
motor (Center) (E).
* When installing, attach the fan motor (F side) (D) so that the
label surface is upper, and attach the fan motor (center) (E)
so that label surface is bottom. At each install be careful to
1-a C direction of the harnesses.
B
C
C
D 1-b
B
A 1-c E
b. Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side), Paper exit cooling fan
motor (Center)
Unit Parts
1 Paper exit unit b Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side)
c Paper exit cooling fan motor (Center)
1-c
1-b

c. Paper exit full detection (Main unit), Paper exit detection d. Paper exit roller 1 (Drive)
Unit Parts Mainte

Unit Parts
1 Paper exit unit d Paper exit full detection (Main unit) nance
e Paper exit detection 1 Paper exit unit f Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) {
1-e
1-d
1-f
1) Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "[O] FUSING SEC- 1) Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "[O] FUSING SEC-
TION".) TION".)
2) Remove the paper exit unit. (Refer to the "(1) Paper exit unit".) 2) Remove the paper exit unit. (Refer to the "(1) Paper exit unit".)
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the fan cover (B). 3) Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the E-ring (B), and
remove the bearing (B). Remove the screws (D), and remove
the paper exit motor unit (E).
A
A D
E
D
A
C
A B
B
A
D
4) Remove the screw (C), and remove the mounting plate (D). 4) Remove the screws (F), and remove the paper guide unit (G).
Disconnect the connectors (E), and remove the paper exit full
detection (Main unit) (F), and the paper exit detection (G).
F
C G 1-e
E
D
G
F F
1-d

5) Remove the screws (H), and remove the earth plate (I). 3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the fan cover (B).
Remove the E-ring (J), and remove the bearing (K). Remove
the E-ring (L), and remove the belt (M), the pulley (N), the par-
allel pin (O). Remove the paper exit roller 1 (Drive) (P). A
J A
H 1-f
P
A
H I K
L A
O
N M
B
4) Remove the screw (C), and remove the paper exit temperature
e. Paper exit temperature detection PWB detection PWB (D). Disconnect the connector (E).
Unit Parts
1 Paper exit unit g Paper exit temperature detection PWB
1-g 1-g
D E
f. Discharge brush
Mainte
1) Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "[O] FUSING SEC- Unit Parts
nance
TION".) 1 Paper exit unit h Discharge brush
1-h

TION".)

3) Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the E-ring (B), and
remove the bearing (C). Remove the screws (D), and remove
the paper exit motor unit (E).
D
E
D
C
B
A
D
4) Remove the screws (F), and remove the fan cover (G).
F
F
5) Remove the earth tapes (H). Check the discharge brushes (I).
* When pasting, fit the reference line.
0 0.5 0 0.5
0 0
1-h
0.5 0.5
I
1-h I
H

4. Maintenance
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
replacement
parts
parts are
described.)
2 Discharge brush

[Q] DRIVE SECTION
MX-7000N (1) Main drive unit (CL)
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Unit
1. Disassembly and assembly 1 Main drive unit (CL)
Unit Page
A Main drive unit (CL) Q- 1
B Main drive unit (BK) Q- 4 1
C Toner transport drive unit Q -11
D PS drive unit Q -16
E Tandem drive unit Q -21
F Multistage drive unit Q -28
A. Main drive unit (CL)

Unit Parts Page
1 Main drive unit (CL) a Developement drive Q- 2
motor_CL 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUT-
b Drum motor_Y Q- 3 FIT".)
c Drum motor_M 2) Remove the screws (A), and open the control box (B).
d Drum motor_C
e Y phase detection Q- 3
f M phase detection
g C phase detection
h Transfer belt separation Q- 4
detection sensor CL
B
1-b
1-c
A
1-a B
1-h
A
3) Remove the screws (C), and remove the flywheel (D) and (E).
* When installing, check to confirm that has not come in con-
tact with the harness etc.
1-e * When installing, the order of the installation is the flywheel
(E), the flywheel (D). (Equipping the mark to each color.)
1-f
1-d 1-g
E C
D
MX-7000N DRIVE SECTION Q 1

4) Disconnect the connectors (F). Remove the harness (H) from 2) Remove the screws (A), and open the control box (B).
the wire saddles (G). Remove the screws (I), and remove the
main drive unit (CL) (J).
B
I
G H G
F
F tact with the harness etc.
* When installing, the order of the installation is the flywheel
1 (E), the flywheel (D). (Equipping the mark to each color.)
J
a. Developement drive motor_CL
Unit Parts
1 Main drive unit (CL) a Developement dirve motor_CL
E C
D
1-a 4) Disconnect the connector (F). Remove the screws (G), and
remove the developement dirve motor_CL (H).
G
G
H 1-a
FIT".)

b. Drum motor_Y, Drum motor_M, Drum motor_C 4) Disconnect the connectors (G). Remove the screws (H), and
remove the drum motors (I) of each color.
Unit Parts
* Be careful to wiring of harnesses.
1 Main drive unit (CL) b Drum motor_Y
c Drum motor_M
d Drum motor_C H H I 1-b
H I 1-d
1-b
1-c
1-c I
G
1-d
H
G
H G
FIT".)
B
c. Y phase detection, M phase detection, C phase detection
Unit Parts
A 1 Main drive unit (CL) e Y phase detection
f M phase detection
g C phase detection
A
1-e
1-f
1-g
3) Remove the screws (C). Remove the flywheel (D), the flywheel
(E), and the flywheel (F). 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUT-
* When installing, check to confirm that has not come in con- FIT".)
tact with the harness etc. 2) Remove the screws (A), and open the control box (B).
The flywheel (F) is out of the order.
C
F
A
C
E D

3) Remove the screws (C). Remove the flywheel (D), the flywheel 3) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the transfer belt
(E). separation sensor CL (B).
B 1-h
A
B. Main drive unit (BK)

E C Unit Parts Page
D 1 Main drive unit (BK) a Developement drive motor_K Q- 6
b Developement drive motor Q- 7
4) Remove the screws (F), and remove the phase detections (G)
c Drum motor_K Q- 7
of each color. Disconnect the connectors (H).
d Belt separation clutch Q- 8
(normal)
e Belt separation clutch
(reverse)
f K phase detection Q- 9
F g Charger cleaner motor Q -10
h CCM rotation detection
G i PTC cleaner motor Q -10
H
1-a
1-d
1-e
1-g G 1
1-f G
1-e G
1-b
d. Transfer belt separation sensor CL
1-i
Unit Parts
1-g
1 Main drive unit (CL) h Transfer belt separation sensor CL 1-h
1-f 1-c
(1) Main drive unit (BK)
Unit
1-h 1 Main drive unit (BK)

1
FIT".)
2) Remove the main drive unit (CL). (Refer to the "(1) Main drive
unit (CL)".)

FIT".)

2) Open the front cabinet (A). 6) Loosen the screws (H), and open the cover (I) of the process
section.
A
I
is released as shown in (C). 7) Loosen the screw (J), pull out slightly the developement unit
* Failure to complete this step may damage the primary trans- (BK) (K) and the OPC drum unit (BK) (L).
fer belt.
K L
J
hand to not rotate, remove the screw (F). Remove the drum
fixing knob (E).
8) Remove the screws (M), and open the control box (N).
E
M
N
M
G

9) Remove the screws (O), and remove the flywheel (P). a. Developement drive motor_K
Unit Parts
1 Main drive unit (BK) a Developement drive motor_K
P
1-a
O
FIT".)
O
10) Disconnect the connectors (Q).
Q
A
B
A
11) Disconnect the connectors (R), and the connectors (S).
Remove the screws (T), and remove the main drive unit (BK)
(U).
* When connecting the connectors (S), refer to the mark (V)
and connect it. 3) Remove the screws (C), and remove the flywheel (D).
T
R R
1 U C

4) Disconnect the connectors (E). Remove the screws (F). Disen- 3) Remove the screws (C), and remove the flywheel (D).
gage the pawl (G) of PWB supporter, and remove the devel- * When installing, check to confirm that has not come in con-
opement drive motor_K (H). tact with the harness etc.
G
E
D
1-a E
H
F C
F
F
F C
4) Disconnect the connector (E). Remove the screws (F), and
b. Developement drive motor remove the transfer drive motor (G).
Unit Parts
1 Main drive unit (BK) b Developement drive motor
G 1-b
E
1-b F
F
FIT".)
c. Drum motor_K
Unit Parts
1 Main drive unit (BK) c Drum motor_K
1-c
A
B

FIT".)

2) Remove the screws (A), and open the control box (B). d. Belt separation clutch (normal), Belt separation clutch
(reverse)
Unit Parts
1 Main drive unit (BK) d Belt separation clutch (normal)
e Belt separation clutch (reverse)
B
1-d
1-e
A
B

FIT".)
B
A
B
A
C

C
4) Disconnect the connector (E). Remove the screws (F), and tact with the harness etc.
remove the drum drive motor_K (G).
G 1-c
D
F
C
F
C
E

4) Remove the E-ring (E), and remove the separation drive gear 2) Remove the screws (A), and open the control box (B).
(F) and the parallel pin (G).
G F
E A
B
5) Disconnect the connectors (H). Remove the harness from the

wire saddles (I). Remove the belt separation clutch (normal) A
(J) and the belt separation clutch (reverse) (K).
H H
I * When installing, check to confirm that has not come in con-
1-d I I tact with the harness etc.
J
I
K 1-e
C
e. K phase detection
Unit Parts
1 Main drive unit (BK) f K phase detection
C
4) Remove the screw (E). Remove the mounting plate (F). Dis-
connect the connector (G), and remove the K phase detection
(H).
1-f
F
FIT".)
1-f
H
E

f. Charger cleaner motor, CCM rotation detection g. PTC cleaner motor

1 Main drive unit (BK) g Charger cleaner motor 1 Main drive unit (BK) i PTC cleaner motor
h CCM rotation detection
1-i
1-g 1-h
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUT- 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUT-
FIT".) FIT".)
2) Remove the main drive unit (BK). (Refer to the (1) Main drive 2) Remove the main drive unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) Main drive
unit (BK).) unit (BK)".)
3) Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the harness (C) from 3) Remove the transfer drive motor. (Refer to the "b. Transfer
the pawls (B) of the motor fixing plate. Disconnect the connec- dirve motor".)
tor (D). Remove the screws (E), and remove the motor fixing
4) Remove the drum drive motor_K. (Refer to the "c. Drum drive
plate (F). Disconnect the connector (G).
motor_K".)
5) Remove the screws (A), and remove the terminal (white har-
ness) (B) and the terminal (red harness) (C).
E * When installing, refer the mark (D) of the mounting plate,
D arrange the terminals.
E B
C
A B
B
D
A
F
A C
4) Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the drive gear (I), the
charger cleaner motor (J), and the CCM rotation detection (K). 6) Remove the screw (E), and remove the PTC electrode mount-
ing plate (F).
H E
J 1-g
K 1-h
I
F

7) Disconnect the connector (G). Insert the screwdriver to the (1) Toner transport drive unit
holes (H), and remove the screws (I). Remove the electrode
mounting plate unit (J). Unit
* When installing, fit the positioning pins (K). 1 Toner transport drive unit
I
I 1
H K
K H
G

J 2) Remove the developement unit (CL) and the developement
unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L] DEVELOPING SECTION".)
8) Remove the harness (L) from the pawls (M). Remove the 3) Remove the OPC drum unit (CL), the charge unit (BK), and the
screws (N), and remove the PTC cleaner motor (O). OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer to the "[J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR
SECTION".)
5) Remove the screws (A), and remove the guide fixture (B).
Remove the screw (C), and disengage the pawls (D), and
remove the toner cartridge guide (E).
L
M M
C
O
1-i E
C. Toner transport drive unit A

B
Unit Parts Page A
1 Toner transport drive a Toner motor K1 Q -13
unit b Toner motor K2
c Toner motor C
d Toner motor M
e Toner motor Y
f Hopper motor K Q -14
D
g Hopper motor C
h Hopper motor M D
i Hopper motor Y
6) Remove the screws (F), and remove the toner transport unit
(BK) (G).
1-e
1-d G
1-c
1-b
1-a
1
1-i F
1-h
1-g
F
1-f

7) Disconnect the connectors (H). 10) Disconnect the connectors (P). Remove the harness (R) from
the wire saddles (Q).
H
H
H P
Q
R
8) Remove the screws (I). Remove the screws (J), and remove
the toner transport unit C (K), the toner transport unit M (L),
and the toner transport unit Y (M). 11) Remove the screws (S), and remove the PWB mounting plate
(T).
T
S
S
J
S
M
J K
J S
12) Remove the screws (U), and remove the toner transport drive
L unit (V).
U
V 1 U
U
I
9) Remove the screws (N), and open the control box (O).
N
O

a. Toner motor 7) Remove the screws (C), and open the control box (D).
Unit Parts
1 Toner transport drive a Toner motor K 1
unit b Toner motor K 2
c Toner motor C
d Toner motor M D
e Toner motor Y
1-c
C
1-b D
1-a
1-e
1-d
C

2) Remove the developement unit (CL), the charge unit (BK), and 8) Disconnect the connectors (E). Remove the harness (G) from
the developement unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L] DEVELOPING the wire saddles (F).
SECTION".)
3) Remove the OPC drum unit (CL), charge unit (BK), and the
OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer to the "[J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR E
SECTION".)
4) Remove the paper exit tray and the rear cabinet. (Refer to the
5) Turn it counterclockwise while holding the coupling (A),
release the lock.
F
A G
9) Remove the screws (H), and remove the PWB mounting plate
(I).
I
H
H
6) Remove the couplings (B).
H
B B
B B
B H

10) Disconnect the connectors (J). Remove the screws (K), and 5) Remove the screws (A), and remove the guide fixture (B).
remove the toner motors (L) of each color. Remove the screw (C), and disengage the pawls (D), and
remove the toner cartridge guide (E).
K
C
1-b L 1-d 1-e

1-a L L 1-c
L L
A
B
A
J
D
K D
6) Remove the screws (F), and remove the toner transport unit
(BK) (G).
b. Hopper motor
Unit Parts
1 Toner transport drive f Hopper motor K
unit g Hopper motor C
G
h Hopper motor M
i Hopper motor Y
1-i
1-h
1-g F
1-f
7) Disconnect the connectors (H).
2) Remove the developement unit (CL) and the developement
unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L] DEVELOPING SECTION".) H
H
3) Remove the OPC drum unit (CL), the charge unit (BK), and the H
OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer to the "[J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR
SECTION".)

8) Remove the screws (I). Remove the screws (J), and remove 11) Disconnect the connectors (P). Remove the screws (Q), and
the toner transport unit C (K), the toner transport unit M (L), remove the guide (R). Remove the gears (S).
and the toner transport unit Y (M). * When installing, be careful it bite the wire.
P P
P
S S S
S R
J
R
R R
M
K Q
J Q
Q
J
12) Remove the screws (T), and open the control box (U).
I
9) Turn it counterclockwise while holding the coupling (N),

release the lock.
U
N
T
U
10) Remove the couplings (O).
13) Disconnect the connectors (V). Remove the harness (X) from
O O the wire saddles (W).
O O
O
W
X

14) Remove the screws (Y), and remove the PWB mounting plate D. PS drive unit
(Z).
Unit Parts Page
1 PS drive unit a PS front transport motor Q -18
b LCC transport motor Q -18
c PS motor Q -18
d PS clutch Q -19
e Manual paper feed clutch Q -20
Z f LCC transport clutch Q -20
Y g Torque limiter
Y
Y 1 1-d
15) Disconnect the connector (a). Remove the screws (b), and
remove the hopper motors (c) of each color.
1-a
b 1-c
1-b
1-g
1-e
1-g
1-f c 1-h
c c 1-i 1-f
c
(1) PS drive unit

c Unit
1 PS drive unit

2) Remove the screws (A), and open the control box (B). 5) Remove the resin ring (I), and remove the pulley sheet (J), the
belt (K), the pulley (L), and the parallel pin (M).
M
B L
A K
B J
I
6) Remove the resin ring (N). Remove the pulley sheet (O), the
belt (P), and the pulley (Q), and remove the parallel pin (R).
R
Q
P O
N
7) Remove the screws (S), and remove the support plate (T).
D
S
C T
4) Disconnect the connector (E). Remove the screws (F). Disen-
gage the pawl (G), and remove the duct (H).
S
E
8) Disconnect the connectors (U), and remove the screws (V),
and remove the PS drive unit (W).
F
H V
U
G U
W 1

a. PS front transport motor b. LCC transport motor

1 PS drive unit a PS front transport motor 1 PS drive unit b LCC transport motor
1-a
1-b
the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2) Remove the PS drive unit. (Refer to the (1) PS dirve unit.)
2) Remove the PS drive unit. (Refer to the (1) PS drive unit.)
3) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screws (B), and
remove the PS front transport motor (C).
remove the LCC transport motor (C).
A
C 1-b A
C 1-a
B
B
* When installing, check that the motor pulley (E) and the pul-
ley (F) puts on the belt (D).
* When installing, check that the motor pulley (E) and the pul-
ley (F) puts on the belt (D).
D
E
D
F
c. PS motor
Unit Parts
1 PS drive unit c PS motor
1-c

2) Remove the screws (A), and open the control box (B). 3) Remove the screws (F), and remove the frame (G).
G
F
B F
A
B
4) Disconnect the connector (H), and remove the PS clutch unit

(I).
A * When installing, fit the clutch rotation stopper, and be careful
to the wiring of the harness.
3) Disconnect the connector (C). Remove the screws (D), and H

remove the PS motor (E).
1-c E
5) Remove the E-ring (J), and remove the PS clutch (K).

D
C
J
d. PS clutch
Unit Parts
1 PS drive unit d PS clutch
1-d
1-d K
2) Remove the PS dirve unit. (Refer to the "(1) PS drive unit".)

e. Manual paper feed clutch 5) Disconnect the connector (G), and remove the manual paper
feed clutch unit (H).
Unit Parts
* When installing, fit the clutch rotation stopper, and be careful
1 PS drive unit e Manual paper feed clutch
1-e G
3) Remove the E-rings (A), the gears (B), the parallel pins (C),
and the collars (D).
6) Remove the E-rings (I), and remove the manual paper feed
clutch (J).
A
A
D
B I
A I
B
D C
C
B
D
1-e J
f. LCC transport clutch
Unit Parts
1 PS drive unit f LCC transport clutch
4) Remove the screws (E), and remove the frame (F). g Torque limiter
E
E F E
1-f
1-g

3) Remove the E-rings (A), the gears (B), the parallel pins (C), 6) Remove the E-rings (I), and remove the LCC transport clutch
and the collars (D). (J).
A
A I
D I
B
A
B
D C
C
B
D
C
J 1-f
7) Remove the E-rings (K), and remove the torque limiter (L).
K
4) Remove the screws (E), and remove the frame (F).
E
E F E
L 1- g
E. Tandem drive unit

Unit Parts Page
5) Remove the torque limiter unit (G). Disconnect the connector 1 Tandem drive unit a Paper feed motor Q -23
(H), and remove the LCC transport clutch unit (I). b Tandem tray 1 paper feed Q -23
* When installing, fit the clutch rotation stopper, and be careful clutch
to the wiring of the harness. c Tandem tray transport clutch Q -24
d Tandem tray 2 paper feed Q -25
clutch
e Vertical transport clutch upper Q -26
f Paper pickup solenoid Q -27
(Tandem tray 2)
H
1-b
1-c
I
1-f
1-a
1-d
1-e

(1) Tandem drive unit 4) Disconnect the connector (E). Remove the screws (F). Disen-
gage the pawl (G), and remove the duct (H).
Unit
1 Tandem drive unit
1 F
G
5) Remove the resin ring (I), and remove the pulley sheet (J), the
belt (K), the pulley (L), and the parallel pin (M).
B
M
L
A
B
K
J
I
A 6) Remove the resin ring (N), and remove the pulley sheet (O),
the belt (P), the pulley (Q), and the parallel pin (R).

R
Q
D P O
N
7) Remove the screws (S), and remove the support plate (T).
C

8) Remove the resin ring (U), remove the pulley (V), the belt (W), a. Paper feed motor
the parallel pin (X), and the pulley sheet (Y). Remove the
screws (Z), and remove the support plate (a). Unit Parts
1 Tandem drive unit a Paper feed motor
Y
X
W
V
U
a Z 1-a
9) Disconnect the connector (b). Remove the harness (d) from the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
the wire saddle (c). Remove the screws (e), and remove the 2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the screws (B). Disen-
inner ventilation fan motor (Center) unit (f). gage the pawl (C) of the PWB supporter, and remove the
paper feed motor (D).
D 1-a
f C
b
e B
d c
B
10) Disconnect the connectors (g). Remove the screws (h), and A
remove the tandem drive unit (i).
b. Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch
Unit Parts
1 Tandem drive unit b Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch
1-b
g 1
g
i 1) Remove the rear cabinet and the rear cabinet lower. (Refer to
2) Remove the tandem drive unit. (Refer to the "(1) Tandem drive
unit".)

3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the couplings (B) and the c. Tandem tray transport clutch
spring (C).
Unit Parts
* When installing, apply thread locking material to the screws
1 Tandem drive unit c Tandem tray transport clutch
(A).
A
A
1-c
B
B
unit".)
4) Remove the screws (D), and remove the support plate (E). 3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the couplings (B) and the
Remove the screws (F), and remove the frame (G). spring (C).
D (A).
F
E
A
F A
B
G B
5) Disconnect the connector (H), and remove the tandem tray 1

paper feed clutch unit (I).
* When installing, fit the clutch rotation stopper. 4) Remove the screws (D), and remove the support plate (E).
Remove the screws (F), and remove the frame (G).
H I
D
F
E
F
6) Remove the E-ring (J), and remove the tandem tray 1 paper
feed clutch (K).
K 1-b

5) Remove the bearing (H) and the belt (I). 3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the couplings (B) and the
spring (C).
H (A).
A
I A
B
B
6) Disconnect the connector (J), and remove the tandem tray

transport clutch unit (K).
* When installing, fit the clutch rotation stopper.
K
4) Remove the E-rings (D), and remove the collars (E), the gears
J (F), and the parallel pins (G).
D D
D
E E
E
F F
F
G G
G
7) Remove the E-ring (L), and remove the tandem tray transport
clutch (M).
L
remove the support plate (J). Remove the screws (K), and
remove the frame (L).
K
M 1-c I K
d. Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch J

Unit Parts
1 Tandem drive unit d Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch
L
H
1-d
unit".)

6) Disconnect the connector (M), and remove the tandem tray 2 3) Remove the E-ring (A), and remove the pulley (B), the parallel
paper feed clutch unit (N). pin (C), and the belt (D).
A
N
M
B
7) Remove the E-ring (O), and remove the tandem tray 2 paper
4) Remove the screws (E), and remove the couplings (F) and the
feed clutch (P)
spring (G).
(A).
O
E
E
F
F
G
P 1-d
e. Vertical transport clutch upper
Unit Parts
1 Tandem drive unit e Vertical transport clutch upper 5) Remove the E-rings (H), and remove the collars (I), the gears
(J), and the parallel pins (K).
H H
H
I I
I
J J
1-e J
K K
K
unit".)

6) Disconnect the connector (L). Remove the screws (M), and f. Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 2)
remove the support plate (N). Remove the screws (O), and
remove the frame (P). Unit Parts
1 Tandem drive unit f Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 2)
O
M O
1-f
P
L
unit".)
7) Disconnect the connector (Q), and remove the vertical trans-
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the couplings (B) and the
port clutch upper unit (R).
spring (C).
(A).
R A
Q A
B
B
8) Remove the E-rings (S), and remove the vertical transport

clutch upper (T).
4) Remove the E-rings (D), and remove the collars (E), the gears
(F), and the parallel pins (G).
S
D D
D
E E
E
F F
F
G G
G
T 1-e

5) Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screws (I), and F. Multistage drive unit
remove the support plate (J). Remove the screws (K), and
remove the frame (L). Unit Parts Page
1 Multistage drive unit a Paper tray lift-up motor Q -29
(Tray 3)
K b Paper tray lift-up motor
I (Tray 4)
K c Tray 3 paper feed clutch Q -29
d Tray 4 paper feed clutch Q -30
J e Vertical transport clutch lower Q -31
L
H
1
1-c
6) Remove the screws (M), and remove the paper pickup sole-
noid (Tandem tray 2) unit (N).
1-a
M
M
1-d
1-e
1-b
N
(1) Multistage drive unit
Unit
7) Remove the screws (O), and remove the mounting plate unit
1 Multistage drive unit
(P) from the paper pickup solenoid (Ttandem tray 2) (Q).
* When installing, insert the shaft (R) in the arm (S).
S
1
O
O
1-f Q

2) Remove the resin ring (A), and remove the pulley (B), the belt 2) Disconnect the connectors (A), and remove the screws (B),
(C), the parallel pin (D), and the pulley sheet (E). Remove the and remove the paper tray lift-up motor (Tray3, 4) units (C).
screws (F), remove the support plate (G).
E
D
C C
B A
A
G F
B
F C
A
3) Disconnect the connectors (H). Remove the screws (I), and

remove the multistage drive unit (J).
B
1 J 3) Disengage the pawls (D), and remove the coupling (E) and the
I spring (F) from the paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 3, 4) (G).
H
H
E
H
H
D D
F
H
a. Paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 3), Paper tray lift-up motor
(Tray 4) 1-a
G
Unit Parts 1-b
1 Multistage drive unit a Paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 3)
b Paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 4)
b. Tray 3 paper feed clutch
Unit Parts
1 Multistage drive unit c Tray 3 paper feed clutch
1-a
1-c
1-b
2) Remove the multistage drive unit. (Refer to the "(1) Multistage
drive unit".)

3) Remove the E-rings (A), and remove the collars (B), the gears c. Tray 4 paper feed clutch
(C), and the parallel pins (D). Remove the screws (E), and
remove the frame (F). Unit Parts
1 Multistage drive unit d Tray 4 paper feed clutch
A A
B B
C C
E
D 1-d
E D
F the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2) Remove the multistage drive unit. (Refer to the "(1) Multistage
drive unit".)
3) Remove the E-rings (A), and remove the collars (B), the gears
(C), and the parallel pins (D). Remove the screws (E), and
remove the frame (F).
A A
4) Disconnect the connector (G), and remove the tray 3 paper B B

feed clutch unit (H). E
* When installing, fit the clutch rotation stopper, and be careful C C
D D
G E F
H
4) Disconnect the connector (G), and remove the tray 4 paper

feed clutch unit (H).
5) Remove the E-rings (I), and remove the tray 3 paper feed * When installing, fit the clutch rotation stopper, and be careful
clutch (J). to the wiring of the harness.
I
I
G
1-c J H

5) Remove the E-ring (I), and remove the tray 4 paper feed clutch 4) Remove the E-rings (F), and remove the collars (G), the gears
(J). (H), and the parallel pins (I). Remove the screws (J), and
remove the frame (K).
J 1-d F F
I
G G
J
H H
I I
J K
d. Vertical transport clutch lower
Unit Parts 5) Disconnect the connector (L), and remove the vertical trans-
1 Multistage drive unit e Vertical transport clutch lower port clutch lower unit (M).
* When installing, fit the clutch rotation stopper, and be careful
1-e
2) Remove the multistage drive unit. (Refer to the "(1) Multistage L
drive unit".)
3) Remove the E-ring (A), and remove the pulley (B), the parallel
pin (C), the belt (D), and the pulley sheet (E).
M
A
6) Remove the E-ring (N), and remove the bearing (O). Remove
the E-ring (P), and remove the vertical transport clutch lower
B (Q).
C
P
D
Q 1-e
E N

2. Maintenance
Remark/Refer to the
Monochrome
When 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000 Parts Guide. Block/
supply,
No. Part name calling K K K K K K K K K K Item No. (Only the
Mechanical
replacement parts are
parts
described.)
1 Gears (grease) Mechanical When chacking, apply to
parts the necessary positions.
(Specified positions)
(UKOG-0307FCZZ)
2 Earth portion of each When chacking, apply to
shaft the necessary positions.
(Conduction Grease) (Specified positions)
(UKOG-0012QCZZ)
3 Belts

[R] PWB SECTION
MX-7000N (1) SUB power PWB
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Parts
1. Disassembly and assembly a SUB power PWB
A. PWB
Parts Page
a SUB power PWB R- 1
b AC power PWB R- 1
c DC power PWB R- 2
d 1 TC PWB R- 3
a
e HL PWB R- 3
f DRIVER PWB R- 4
g PCU PWB R- 4
h Mother PWB R- 4
i MFP cnt PWB R- 5
j MC PWB R- 6 1) Remove the rear cabinet and the rear cabinet lower. (Refer to
k 2 TC PWB R- 6 the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
l HDD R- 6
m DSPF memory PWB R- 7
remove the SUB power PWB (C).
n Scanner control PWB
o PTC PWB R- 8
C a
A
m
B
B
n
d
g B
e B
f
l B
j B
i
(2) AC power PWB
Parts
b AC power PWB
n b
k
b
o
c a
MX-7000N PWB SECTION R 1

2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the screws (B) and 3) Remove the snap bands (A). Remove the screws (B), and
the screws (C), and remove the AC power PWB (D). remove the cord mounting plate (C).
* Be careful to the difference between the size of the screws
(B) and the size of screws (C).
b
A D
A
B A
A
C
B
A C B
B
C
B
B
(3) DC power PWB
4) Remove the screws (D), and remove the power supply unit
Parts (E).
c DC power PWB
D
D
c E
the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".) D
2) Disconnect the connectors (A).
5) Remove the snap bands (F), and disconnect the connector
(G). Remove the screws (H), and remove the AC power unit
(I).
H H
H
A
G
200V
120V

6) Remove the screws (J), and disconnect the connector (K). 3) Disconnect the connectors (C). Remove the screws (D), and
Remove the DC power PWB (L). remove the 1 TC PWB (E).
200V J C
J
J
L c D D
120V J
J
J K
d E D
J
J
D
(5) HL PWB
Parts
L c e HL PWB
(4) 1 TC PWB
Parts
d 1 TC PWB
d
FIT".)

FIT".)
B
A
B
A
B

3) Disconnect the connectors (C). Remove the screws (D), and (7) PCU PWB
remove the HL PWB (E).
Parts
g PCU PWB
D D
E e
D FIT".)
2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the screws (B) and
the connector (C), and remove the PCU PWB (D).
D
(6) DRIVER PWB D g

A
B
Parts
f DRIVER PWB
B
B
C
B
B
f
(8) Mother PWB

1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUT- Parts
FIT".) h Mother PWB
disconnect the connector (C), and remove the DRIVER PWB
(D).
D f
A
h
B
B
C
FIT".)
B

2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the screws (B). Dis- 3) Pull out the control box (G) until the position in which the con-
connect the connector (C), and remove the Mother PWB (D). nector (F) is seen. Pull the sheet (H), and remove the connec-
tor (F).
D h
A
B
F
B G
C
H
(9) MFP cnt PWB * When installing, check that the harness (I) is put on the
mylar (J).
Parts * Check that the harness is not twisting, hanging down, etc.
i MFP cnt PWB
J
i
I
1) Remove the right cabinet rear. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL

OUTFIT".)
2) Remove the screws (A). Raise the finger hooks (B), and pull
out the control box (D) until the position in which the clamp (C)
is seen. Remove the harness (E) from the clamp (C).
4) Remove the screws (K), and remove the MFP cnt PWB (L).
C
E K
K
D
B
L i
K

(10) MC PWB 4) Disconnect the connectors (F). Remove the screw (G), and
remove the earth wire (H).
Parts Mainte
nance
j MC PWB
H
F
G
F
j
F

5) Remove the screws (I). Disengage the pawls (J), and remove
FIT".)
the MC PWB (K).
A
B I
j K
I
(11) 2 TC PWB
Parts
A k 2 TC PWB
* When installing, check to confirm that has not come in con- k
E C
D

2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the screws (B), and (13) DSPF memory PWB, Scanner control PWB
remove the 2 TC PWB (C).
Parts
m DSPF memory PWB
k C n Scanner control PWB
A
B
B
m
n
B B

(12) HDD EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
Parts
2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the snap bands (B).
Remove the screws (C), and remove the scanner control PWB
l HDD
unit (D).
A
l
D
FIT".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the mounting plate (B)
and HDD unit (C). Disconnect the connectors (D).
B B
C C
D
3) Remove the screws (E), and remove the DSPF memory PWB
(F).
A
E
B E
D
A
3) Remove the screws (E), and remove the angles (G) from the
HDD (F). m F
* Since the HDD is weak in shock, handle it carefully. For
example, avoid hitting the corner, dropping, or other shocks.
F l E
E G

4) Remove the screws (G), and remove the mounting plates (H).
Remove the screws (I), and remove the scanner control PWB
(J).
H G
I G
H
I H
I
J n
(14) PTC PWB
Parts
o PTC PWB
remove the PTC PWB (C).
o C
A
B
B
B B

[S] FAN, FILTER SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly (1) Controller cooling fan motor
Parts
Unit Page
a Controller cooling fan motor
A Fan motor S- 1
B Filter S- 7
A. Fan motor
Parts Page
a Controller cooling fan motor S- 1
b HDD cooling fan motor S- 2
c Power cooling fan motor S- 2 a
d Ozone fan motor 3 S- 3
e Ozone fan motor 2
f Ozone fan motor 1 S- 4
g Charger air inlet fan motor S- 5
h Inner ventilation fan motor (center) S- 5
i Inner ventilation fan motor (right) S- 6
FIT".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and open the controller box (B).
b
i
g A
f B
a d
e
h
c A
3) Peel off the mylar (C). Disconnect the connector (D), and
remove the screws (E). Remove the contrller cooling fan motor
(F).
* When installing, the label side is upward.
F a
C D
MX-7000N FAN, FILTER SECTION S 1

(2) HDD cooling fan motor (3) Power cooling fan motor
Parts Parts
b HDD cooling fan motor c Power cooling fan motor
b
c
FIT".) 2) Disconnect the connectors (A).
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the mounting plate (B)
and HDD unit (C). Disconnect the connectors (D).
C A
D
A
A 200V
B
3) Disconnect the connector (E). Remove the harness from the

120V
wire saddle (F). Remove the screws (G), and remove the HDD
cooling fan motor (H).
* When installing, the label side is inward.
3) Remove the snap bands (B). Remove the screws (C), and
remove the cord mounting plate (D).
b H
G
B
B
B
F
G
E D
B C

4) Remove the screws (E), and remove the power supply unit (F). 2) Remove the screws (A), and open the control box (B).
E
E
B
F
A
E
5) Disconnect the connectors (G), and remove the snap bands A
(H). Remove the screws (I), and remove the power cooling fan
motor (J).
* When installing, the label side is positioned on the inside.
G 3) Disconnect the connector (C). Disengage the pawls (D), and

G H
remove the duct (E).
H
J c
D
C
D
I
c J
I
(4) Ozone fan motor 3, Ozone fan motor 2 E

Parts
d Ozone fan motor 3
e Ozone fan motor 2
D

G
d
e
H
G
F
G

5) Disengage the pawl (I), and remove the duct (J). 2) Remove the screws (A), and open the control box (B).
* When installing, hook the duct (J) to the washer (K).
J K B
K A
I
J
A
6) Disconnect the connector (L). Remove the screws (M), and
remove the washer (N). Remove the ozone fan motor 3 (O).
Disconnect the connector (P). Remove the screws (Q), and
remove the ozone fan motor 2 (R).
3) Disconnect the connector (C). Disengage the pawls (D), and
remove the duct (E).
M
N O d
L D
C
Q D
P
E
R e
(5) Ozone fan motor 1

D
Parts
f Ozone fan motor 1
4) Disconnect the connectors (F). Remove the screws (G), and
f
H
1) Remove the rear cabinet and rear cabinet lower. (Refer to the G
F
G

5) Disconnect the connector (I). Remove the screws (J), and (7) Inner ventilation fan motor (center)
remove the ozone fan motor 1 (K).
Parts
h Inner ventilation fan motor (center)
f K
J
J
(6) Charger air inlet fan motor the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
Parts 2) Remove the screws (A), and open the control box (B).
g Charger air inlet motor
A
B
1) Remove the frame cover R. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL

OUTFIT".)
remove the charger air inlet fan motor (C).
A
C g 3) Disconnect the connector (C). Remove the herness (E) from

the clamp (D). Remove the screws (F), and remove the inner
B ventilation fan motor (Center) unit (G).
A
G
C
F
E D

4) Remove the screws (H), and remove the inner ventilation fan 3) Disconnect the connector (C), and remove the snap band (D).
motor (Center) (I).
* When installing, direct the label face (J) to the mounting
plate side, and position the harness (L) in mark (K) side.
D
H h I H
J
4) Close the control box (E).
K L
(8) Inner ventilation fan motor (right)
Parts
i Inner ventilation fan motor (right)
5) Remove the screw (F), and push the part (G), disengage the
pawl (H). Disengage the pawl (I), and remove the inner ventila-
tion fan motor (Right) unit (J).

FIT".)
F
B H
J
A
I

6) Remove the screws (K), and remove the inner ventilation fan 1) Remove the filter cover (A), and remove the ozone filters (B).
motor (Right) (L).
B a
A
K L i
B a
(2) Ozone filter

B. Filter
Mainte
Parts
nance
Mainte
Parts Page b Ozone filter
nance
a Ozone filter S- 7
b Ozone filter S- 7
c Dust filter S- 8
d Paper exit filter S- 8
b
d
c
1) Remove the rear cabinet and rear lower cabinet. (Refer to the
a "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2) Remove the screws (A). Pull out the cover (B), and remove the
b ozone filter (C).
C b
(1) Ozone filter
Parts Mainte
nance
a Ozone filter
A
B
A

(3) Dust filter (4) Paper exit filter
Mainte Mainte
Parts Parts
nance nance
c Dust filter d Paper exit filter
d
c
1) Disengage the pawl (A), and remove the filter cover (B).
Remove the paper exit filter (C).
A d C
B
2) Remove the holder (C). Remove the dust filter (D).
c D

2. Maintenance
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
replacement
parts
parts are
described.)
1 Ozone filter Mechanical (P/G No. : [65]-22)
parts (P/G No. : [65]-24)
2 Paper exit filter (P/G No. : [55]-50)
3 Dust filter
2
3

[T] SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly 2) Remove the screws (A), and open the control box (B).
A. Sensor, switch
Parts Page
a Right door open/close switch T- 1
b Main switch T- 2 B
c Front door lower open/close switch T- 3
d Front door upper open/close switch T- 3
e Right transport unit open/close detection sensor T- 4
A
B
d
a
3) Disconnect the connector (C).
b
(1) Right door open/close switch
Parts
a Right door open/close switch 4) Release the lock (D), and open the right door unit (E).
a E

FIT".)
MX-7000N SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION T 1

5) Remove the screws (F), and remove the holder (G). 3) Remove the screw (B), and remove the cover (C). Remove the
screw (D), and remove the left cabinet lower (E). Remove the
screw (F), and remove the rail cover (G).
* When installing, engage the pawl (H) to hole of the frame.
* Install so that the rib (I) of the left cabinet lower is positioned
inside than adjuster cover (J).
F G
E H
G
F C
B
6) Remove the screw (H), and remove the right door open/close H
switch (I).
D
E
F
I
J
I a
4) Remove the screws (K), and remove the frame cover (L).
H
(2) Main switch
Parts
b Main switch
K K
5) Remove the screw (M), and remove the cover (N). Remove
the screws (O), and remove the main switch unit (P).
b * When installing, engage the pawl (Q) to the main unit (P).
* When installing, pinch the pawl (R) to the frame (S).
1) Romove the front cabinet left. (Refer to the "A. EXTERNAL

O
OUTFIT".)
2) Pull out the paper feed tray (A). P
S
Q R
A M

6) Disconnect the connectors (T). Disengage the pawls (U), and 3) Remove the screws (B), and remove the frame cover (C).
remove the main switch (V).
C
b V
U
T
B B
T 4) Remove the screw (D), and remove the front door lower open/
T close switch (E). Disconnect the connectors (F).
(3) Front door lower open/close switch
Parts F
c Front door lower open/close switch
E c
D
(4) Front door upper open/close switch
Parts
d Front door upper open/close switch
1) Romove the front cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUT-

FIT".)
2) Pull out the tandem paper feed tray (A). d

OUTFIT".)
A
3) Remove the screw (A), and remove the switch cover (B).

4) Remove the screws (C), and remove the front door upper 3) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screw (B), and
open/close switch unit (D). remove the mounting plate (C). Remove the right transport unit
open/close detection sensor (D).
A
B
D
D e
5) Disconnect the connectors (E). Remove the screw (F), and

remove the front door upper open/close switch (G).
E F
G d
(5) Right transport unit open/close detection sensor
Parts
e Right transport unit open/close detection sensor
2) Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to "[F] Tray
paper feed section".)

LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWBs of this model employs lead-free solder. The LF marks indicated on the PWBs and the Service Manual mean Lead-Free solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm
a Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
i
n
s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommendable.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT XXXX
solder is about 220C, which BYSHARP
is about 40C higherCORPORATION
than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black stored in a retrieval
during soldering work,system, orfile
clean and transmitted
the tip within
steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering.
Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturers instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger dexplosion s il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
mme type ou dun type quivalent recommand par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien drfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
BATTERY DISPOSAL
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGES

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANSE)
QUI DOIT TRE TRAITE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
* Applicable for model that uses battery.

COPYRIGHT 2005 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
Microsoft Windows operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft
Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003 and Internet
Explorer are trademarks or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and
other countries.
IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
Acrobat Reader Copyright 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
re
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document System Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2005 December Printed in Japan

Sharp MX5500 6200 7000 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sharp MX5500 6200 7000 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

DIGITAL FULL COLOR

NOTE FOR SERVICING [F] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION . . . .F-1

[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL [M] TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . M-1

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

[N] PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR

2. Warning for servicing

MX-7000N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

6) Place of much dust

7) Place near a wall

8) Unstable or slant surface

MX-7000N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

2. Newly employed technology

MX-7000N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 1

Saddle staple cartridge

Saddle stitch finisher

Punch module Inserter

Finisher Staple cartridge

Data security kit Expansion kit (Software, ROM) FAX system

Barcode font kit Facsimile expansion kit

MX-7000N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 2

C. Combination of options list

MX-7000N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 3

Photoconductor kind OPC (Drum diameter: Black; I80mm,

MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N

Item Scanner Internet Fax Fax l. F code communication

Setting item Overview

(8) Print functions

Function Content PCL6/5c PS (Option)

C. Standard environmental conditions for

D. Environmental conditions for use of supplies

E. Environmental conditions for transit of

F. Environmental conditions for store of supplies

1. Supply system table

B. Europe/East Europe/Russia/Australia/New Zealand

MX-7000N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 1

2. Maintenance parts list

MX-7000N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 2

MX-7000N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 3

MX-7000N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 4

The lot number is in 10 digits. Each digit indicates the following

MX-7000N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 5

Indication of remaining toner amount Message

Indication of remaining toner amount Message

MX-7000N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 6

1. Identification of each section and functions

No. Name Function/Operation Remark

MX-7000N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 1

No. Name Function/Operation Remark

MX-7000N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 2

No. Name Function/Operation

No. Name Function/Operation

MX-7000N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 3

JOB STATUS LOGOUT

No. Name Function/Operation

MX-7000N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 4

1 Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax

Job Queue Sets / Progress Status Spool Spool

No. Name Function/Operation

MX-7000N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 5

HTCS_Y HTCS_M HTCS_C WEB_END